The reflection report

profileARYAN2020
Sunday__44813_51.zip

Artcile 16 .pdf

Next-Gen Supply Chain

Contents Foreword 05

Introduction 06

The supply chain eco system in India 08 • Supply chain in India and considerations 08

• Cost structure and efficiency rates 10

Emerging supply chain trends 12 • Changing operating models 13

• Real-time visibility and tracking 16

• Increasing usage of advanced technologies 17

• Sustainability and cost reduction 18

Future of digitally enabled supply chain 20 • Collaboration in value chain supported by technology 20

• IoT and Industry 4.0 enabling shift to autonomous supply chain 22

• Talent considerations in the digital age 23

The way forward 26

About CII 28

Bibliography 29

Contributors 30

Next-Gen Supply Chain

03

Foreword With adoption of exponential technologies, organisations worldwide are moving away from the traditional and linear supply chain models to connected, intelligent, scalable, customisable, and nimble supply networks. Early adopters and innovative companies are shifting to dynamic and integrated networks that deliver a continuous flow of products, services, information, and analytics for decision making. Traditional organisations are evolving their supply chain functions to meet increasingly volatile consumer preferences, while trying to stay ahead of competition. While the level of emerging technology adoption and use cases are relatively less in India, it is only a matter of time before supply chains across industries would be reimagined, improved, and disrupted.

CII-Deloitte report titled ‘Next-Gen Supply Chain’ is an endeavour to explore upcoming trends and technologies that

will influence the way supply chain in India is going to be redefined in the near future. In this report, Deloitte’s supply chain professionals share insights on trends across four major areas – evolving operating models, usage of technology and its impact on the supply chain, real-time visibility and tracking of the supply chain and its performance and, sustainability and cost reduction. The report draws on use cases from within India and outside to give an understanding of the changes that are already underway, and what to expect in the future.

P S Easwaran Partner Consulting Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu India LLP

Next-Gen Supply Chain

05

Next-Gen Supply Chain

04

Introduction Enabled by concurrent development and integration of the digital and physical technologies, Industry 4.0 is transforming the way supply chains operate across geographies. Industry 4.0 incorporates and extends digital connectivity within the context of the physical world in

enterprises and supply networks. This drives the physical act of manufacturing, distribution and performance known as the physical-digital-physical loop (PDP) - Fig 1.

Fig 1: The physical-digital-physical loop

Supply chains traditionally are linear in nature, with a discrete progression of design, plan, source, make, and deliver. Today, the shift from linear, sequential supply chain operations to an interconnected, open system of supply operations could lay the foundation for how companies would compete in the future. This interconnected open system called Digital Supply Networks (DSN) combines digital information from many different physical and digital sources and locations.

Historically, supply chain professionals managed the “four Vs” (volatility, volume, velocity, and visibility) as they attempted

to optimise results across a series of objectives that include total cost, service, quality, and support for innovation. These traditional priorities are not likely to change but going forward, supply chain decision makers are likely to be able to achieve higher levels of performance with supply chain capabilities developed in a non-linear environment.

This document attempts to capture the evolution of supply chains in India over the last decade, dimensions to be addressed and areas emerging in the future.

1. Establish a digital record

Capture information from the physical world to create a digital record of the physical operation and supply network.

Source: Deloitte

3. Generate movement

Apply algorithms and automation to translate decisions and actions from the digital world into movements in the physical world.

2. Analyze and visualize

Machines talk to each other to share information, allowing for advanced analytics and visualisations of real- time data from multiple sources.

PHYSICAL DIGITAL

Next-Gen Supply Chain

07

Next-Gen Supply Chain

06

The supply chain eco system in India Supply chain in India and considerations Changing demographics and state-wise preferences in India are creating varying demand patterns and impacting the supply chain operating models and infrastructure of organisations. Share of

population in the age bracket of 35-59 years is expected to be equal to those in the 15-34 year bracket over the next 10- 12 years. This changing demographic is expected to alter demand preferences1.

Growth is not uniform across states and the variation impacts consumption patterns. Share of population increases in states such as Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh while the

share decreases in Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu2.

Net state value added varies across states with the manufacturing activity

concentrated across top 5-6 states. Five states accounted for ~60% of the total net state value added in manufacturing in FY173.

With ~65% of the goods being moved through the road network, the concentrated manufacturing and dispersed demand points have a significant impact on the supply chains of companies4.

With the implementation of GST, logistics hubs have emerged and existing ones have been re-oriented. The government of India is planning multi-modal logistics hubs across India on a public – private partnership model which is expected to

drive long haul movement across hubs and also reduce transportation cost as indicated in Fig 4.

Fig 2: Share of population in % for the age group in India

Fig 3: Net state value added growth FY15 to FY17

10%

20%

30%

40%

2001 2011 2021 2031

15-34 years 35-59 years

5%

10%

15%

20%

25%

Andhra Pradesh

Assam Bihar Gujarat Karnataka Madhya Pradesh

Maharashtra Rajasthan Tamil Nadu Telangana Uttar Pradesh

Source: http://censusindia.gov.in/.

Source: RBI

1 MoSPI, “Youth of India”, 2017

2. http://censusindia.gov.in/ 3 RBI 4 IBEF

Next-Gen Supply Chain

09

Next-Gen Supply Chain

08

• Objective would be to connect multiple modes of transport for seamless movement

• Integrated hubs would assist in consolidation and aggregation of freight demand and also providing last mile connectivity

• Hubs could also provide value added services such as custom clearance, bonded storage yards

Fig 4: Location of logistics hub planned

Cost structure and efficiency rates

Fig 5: Lending interest rates

Fig 6: Typical logistics and warehousing cost as a % of sales

With the cost of capital for organisations being relatively higher compared to many developed nations (Fig 5) and the logistics and warehousing costs being significant, organisations need to adopt innovative business models and exponential technologies to sustain and grow in a competitive marketplace. Focus will be on effectively addressing dimensions

associated with dispersed demand, concentrated manufacturing ecosystem, cost of capital considerations and emergence of new demand locations. Given this context, visibility, real time information, efficiency and control in the value chain becomes critical for organisations.

Parameter Pharma FMCG Automotive Industrial products

Steel EPC

Material cost as a % of sales 40-45% 40-45% 65-70% 55%-60% 35%-40% 40-45%

Value addition as a % of sales 35-40% 33%-43% 15%-23% 25%-33% 35%-45% 45%-52%

Operating cost as a % of sales 15%-20% 17-22% 12%-15% 12%-15% 10-15% 8-10%

Source: Deloitte analysis

9.5%

5.2% 4.3%

3.5%

0.5% 0%

2%

4%

6%

8%

10%

India Australia China US* UK#

Source: World Bank, *- 2016 values, # 2014 values.

0%

2%

4%

6%

8%

10%

12%

Consumer goods Cement Industrial products FMCG

Source: Deloitte analysis

Surat

Nagpur

Hyderabad

Bangalore

Vijayawada

Guwahati

Source: https://economictimes.indiatimes.com.

Next-Gen Supply Chain

11

Next-Gen Supply Chain

10

Emerging supply chain trends As companies address challenges related to demand volatility, dispersion and cost pressures, Digital Supply Networks (DSN) are increasingly in focus as they provide an opportunity to exponentially improve efficiency and effectiveness in the supply chain, optimise cost and obtain end to end

visibility. The fourth industrial revolution would therefore be driven largely by DSNs where machines are expected to augment human performance. And as part of this shift, execution of connected products, customers, and supply chain and operations would be driven by a vast network of cyber-physical systems.

Changing operating models When fully adopted, DSNs can cause a paradigm shift in the operational delivery for most industries and companies. Innovators and market leaders would strive to achieve operational digital

congruence – configuration of the right capabilities in the right way within their operating model. This would require a shift from the tradition operating models to insight-driven and agile operating models with the customer at the core.

Fig 8: Shifting away from traditional models

Fig 7: Digital supply networks

Develop

Product Innovation & Development

Plan

Supply Chain

Planning

Source

Sourcing and

Procurement

Make

Manufacturing Operations

Deliver

Logistics & Distribution

Support

Customer Service

Traditional Supply Chain Digital Supply Networks

Digital Supply Networks

Supply Chain Functions

Digital Core

Differentiators

Make-to-use with 3D Printing

Analytics/sensor-driven suggested replenishment

Proactive sensing and quality control

Fast deployment with cloud-based technologies

Product traceability and inventory control

Manage and monitor product quality

information

Source: Deloitte

Source: Deloitte

Customer

Location

Products & Services

Channels

Processes

Data

Technology

Organisation

People

From traditional operating model… ..to working in an Insight-driven and Agile way

Operations & Processes

Data, Technology & Infrastructure

Organisation & Governance

Skills, Culture & Talent

Customer

Outputs Products & Services

Continuous customer feedback: learning and adopting

Strategy & Leadership

Inputs

Technology Advances

Societal Shifts

E n ab

le rs

Pr oc

es s

C u st

om er

Data, Technology & Infrastructure

Customer

Location

Products & Services

Channels

Processes

Data

Technology

Organisation

People

From traditional operating model…..to working in an Insight-driven and Agile way

Operations & Processes

Data, Technology & Infrastructure

Organisation& Governance

Skills, Culture & Talent

Customer

Outputs Products & Services

Continuous customer feedback: learning and adopting

Strategy & Leadership

Inputs

Technology Advances

Societal Shifts

E n ab

lers Process

C u stom

er

Next-Gen Supply Chain

13

Next-Gen Supply Chain

12

• Transportation and warehousing marketplaces • Real-time tracking

• Forecasting and demand planning support

• Industry focused footprint

• Grid based planning model

• Crowd-sourced services for rural expansion

• Investment as per the customer specific requirement

• Localisation and local intelligence

• Last mile connectivity

These operating models allow for new areas of collaboration and innovation across organisations – hyper segmentation for personalised customer experience and targeting, collaborative distribution models, and new product development leveraging real-time customer feedback and upcoming megatrends.

Aligned to all these changes, organisations are revisiting their planning processes, which have always been a demanding and challenging process independent of scale and scope. But in the current age of information and connected networks, these challenges have become even more daunting.

While few leading companies have matured to an integrated business planning model, majority still rely on traditional operational models to meet business requirements. Currently the planning cycles depend on regular monthly meetings, and follows a sequential approach to supply and demand planning. In today’s dynamic environment, this rigid structure is ineffective to accurately respond to sudden changes in demand and supply. The globalisation of the business environment and increasing complexity in the value chain, has made accurate forecasting even more difficult and thus reducing the effectiveness of traditional planning cycles.

Fig 9: Inefficiencies in traditional planning model

In order to meet today’s challenges effectively and mitigate future risks, companies need to consider shifting to a radically new collaborative planning process. The next generation planning model that is evolving is expected to be a truly collaborative effort involving real-time data gathering and analysis, improved decision making and is likely

to move away from inflexible IT systems to highly flexible and customisable cloud based platforms. This has the potential to provide the organisation with customisability, platform for collaboration, rapid simulation and scenario planning, and continuous monitoring of KPIs through role-based dashboards.

While companies are still evaluating on how to leverage evolving technologies/ trends and integrate them into their planning and operating models, some ecosystem partners like logistics service providers have already started changing

the way they are servicing the market by providing customised solutions. Players in the value chain are considering strategic and tactical aspects including re- aligning the footprint, value enhancement and technology enablement

Fig 10: Next generation integrated and collaborative planning process

Process Technology People

Parallel ProcessingCognitive TechnologyCloud ComputingReal Time Data Captutre – IOT, Big Data

Single Integrated Platform

Rapid Stimulation & Scenario Planning Capabilities

Continuous KPI monitoring

Highly Scalable

Customizable

Strategy Planning Management Execution

Aligning the footprint based on the market and operational factors

Technology enablement connecting fleet operators, warehouse, and customers

Collaborative value chain –Value enhancement by integrating with stakeholders

• Moving from a commodity to solution model

• Improving the reach through partnerships

• Multi-modal logistics

• Risk evaluation and resilience planning

• Linear decisions made by different BUs in isolation resulting in non-resonating action across the firm

• Non-inclusion of financial metrics fails to translate simulations in operational terms

• Teams trying to balance demand and supply rather than addressing source of controllable variability

• Non-standard algorithms need repeated manual interventions

• Lack of simulation capabilities and coordination tools for effective planning and execution

• Absence of centralized data repository to automate future business decisions based on past learnings

• Heavy reliance on people possessing tribal knowledge acquired through years of experience

• Incorrect definition of success metrics of different functions lead to misaligned focus

• Lack of combination of domain and cross functional expertise

Source: Deloitte

Source: Deloitte

A division of a leading logistics player is exploring the feasibility of consolidating marine freight. The company does not have their own vessels, but instead owns slots for cargo which customers can book through an app/ device.

Collaborative meetings

Next-Gen Supply Chain

15

Next-Gen Supply Chain

14

Real-time visibility and tracking Enhancing the supply chain with real- time visibility supports in transforming business operations and providing insights needed to operate quickly, accurately, and more effectively. Fortunately, most companies are already awash in the data they need to create a DSN, whether through networked systems on the factory floor or back- office databases. The key is to tap into these data sources to optimize the DSN. This data can take many forms:

• Master data: Business-critical data that is consumed by applications to enable business processes.

• Transactional data: Post-business- process information such as purchasing inventory records or sales volumes by region.

• Sensor data: Unstructured data that characterises the conditions of the enterprise’s physical assets, from voltage to vibration.

• Other unstructured data: Data existing within the organisation such as spreadsheets, emails, engineering schematics, drawings, and beyond.

A DSN can be enabled by leveraging existing data sources, aligning them with desired business outcomes, and applying the insights in a scalable way. This journey has three primary steps:

• Locate the data among your assets and systems, and organize and prepare it

• Organise and validate the data for analysis

• Turn insights into action

While most organisations have recognised the need to adopt key data management capabilities—including data governance, master data management, and data quality, among others - complexity of managing and integrating data across the enterprise may also require new technologies. Some of the cognitive technology categories that companies are exploring for deriving insights and visibility are Robotic Process Automation (RPA), Cognitive - language technologies, Machine Learning and Cognitive - computer vision.

Additionally, companies are exploring the usage of blockchain for real-time visibility of the supply chain and to ensure trust and authenticity in the transactions across the chain. Through blockchain companies gain a real-time digital ledger of transactions and movements for

all participants in their supply chain network. This enables greater supply chain efficiency by conducting payment and audits, tracking inventory and assets, purchase orders and shipment notifications. By linking physical goods to serial numbers, bar codes, digital tags like RFID and sensors, and recording the transactions in a blockchain, it is easy for the stakeholders (including end consumers) to verify certifications or properties of the product at any given time and trace the product to source.

Increasing usage of advanced technologies Innovation and advanced technologies are critical to company and national level competitiveness; they differentiate businesses and help them thrive amidst global competition by creating premium products, processes, and services that capture higher margins. Advanced manufacturing strengthens economies and creates higher income jobs. Technologically advanced manufacturing industries employ a higher-skilled workforce that earns higher wages than workers employed by traditional industries.

Over the last couple of decades, with Additive Manufacturing (AM)/ 3D printing, companies are exploring the feasibility of eliminating or significantly reducing inventory requirements. This technology

A state government food distribution project in India is expected to use blockchain and RFID tags to track circulation of milk, vegetables and fish through the state.

enables components to be printed based on requirement and nearness to the customer, thus reducing the lead time to supply as well as logistics cost. While this has enhanced flexibility, coordination efforts among players in the value chain have also become efficient .

A leading aircraft manufacturer uses 3D printed titanium stress- bearing parts, a first in the aviation industry. This is expected to save the organisation USD 2-3 Mn per aircraft.

An online jewellery brand is using 3D printing to make jewellery for millennials.

A major automotive manufacturer uses 3D printing to test its prototypes for design, engineering, production and mass production.

Next-Gen Supply Chain

17

Next-Gen Supply Chain

16

Augmented Reality / Virtual Reality (AR/VR) applications are also gaining greater prominence in the value chain, including retail stores. Some of the areas of application include warehouse operations, transportation management, assembly operations and also enhancing customer service levels. This has helped improve productivity, efficiency, traceability and visibility in the chain.

There has also been a significant change in the way last mile deliveries are being planned and drones are expected to play a significant role especially from a cost and time perspective. They also have minimal environmental impact compared with traditional means such as road or rail.

Sustainability and cost reduction With a focus on sustenance and reducing environmental impact, companies are increasingly recognising the need to adopt a green supply chain. This is now integrated into the entire value chain activities including product design, material sourcing and selection, manufacturing processes, delivery of the final product as well as end-of-life management of the product after its useful life. This helps in improving the performance of the process and the end products according to the requirements of environmental regulations agency. Complementing this is the circular supply chain, which is about taking apparent waste materials and returned goods and turning them into products which can be resold.

Organisations are also migrating from being cost effective to exploring means to reduce environmental impact. This also involved aspects such co-managed supply or collaboration in terms of sharing of people, assets, technology etc. Companies could pair up with third-party delivery services to achieve same day delivery, or find innovative ways to deal with unsold inventory such as renting it out to businesses and gathering data for which items are most popular to better target the needs of future customers.A global logistics company’s

employees use AR to make the order picking process faster and less prone to error.

An online real estate marketplace has forayed into VR-based property listings. Accordingly, the company takes property to customer's doorstep for viewing and evaluation.

A team of students from MIT and Harvard are developing an affordable model of cold chains for India. The smart, modular, refrigerated shipping boxes can be rented out individually to cut costs and save billions of rupees in spoiled perishable goods.

A global furniture manufacturer collaborated with a supplier to reduce the size of a package by 1cm. This resulted in more fitment into one load, reducing transport costs and environmental penalties relating to the movement of a single unit of the package.

A leading agriculture equipment manufacturer has created a sharing platform that allows farmers to rent agricultural equipment. Farmers can book equipment through smartphones or call centres. This has enabled the company to increase its customer base, build brand awareness, and driving rural prosperity by empowering famers.

To summarize, the emerging technologies and trends indicate that organisations are increasingly looking at real-time, innovative and flexible solutions - the future of supply chain is going to be enabled by digitisation.

Next-Gen Supply Chain

19

Next-Gen Supply Chain

18

Future of digitally enabled supply chain Collaboration in value chain supported by technology Disruption within the supply chain is driving better integration across platforms, transforming industries and changing consumer expectations. As traditional, linear supply chain nodes are

collapsing into a set of dynamic networks, allowing dramatically increased differentiation, companies must choose priority initiatives to configure their supply chains to meet competitive objectives.

Fig 11: Application of emerging technologies and tactics across the supply chainFig 11: Application of emerging technologies and tactics across the supply chain

Design process optimisation

Sensor/data- driven design enhancements

Open innovation /crowdsourcing

Rapid prototyping

Virtual design simulation

Product optimisation

Data as a product or service

Make-to-use with 3d printing

Ultra-delayed differentiation

Planning & inventory efficiency

Analytics-driven demand sensing

Dynamic inventory fulfillment

Pos-driven auto- replenishment

Real-time inventory optimisation

Sensor-driven forecasting

Risk prevention & mitigation

Proactive quality sensing

Track-and-trace solutions

Proactive risk sensing

Supplier collaboration

Analytics-driven sourcing

Asset sharing Blockchain- enabled transparency

Cloud/ control tower optimisation

Supplier ecosystem

Operations efficiency

Augmented reality-enhanced operations

Automated production

Predictive maintenance

Sensor- enabled labor monitoring

Logistics Optimisation

Augmented reality- enhanced logistics

Automated logistics

Direct to user delivery

Driverless trucks

Dynamic/ predictive routing

Sales optimisation

Inventory-driven dynamic pricing

Sensor-driven replenishment pushes

Targeted marketing

Aftermarket sales & services

Augmented reality- enabled customer support

End-to-end transparency to customers

Make-to-use with 3d printing

Predictive aftermarket maintenance

Supply Chain Transformations Sample Tactics

Source: Deloitte

Next-Gen Supply Chain

21

Next-Gen Supply Chain

20

IoT and Industry 4.0 enabling shift to autonomous supply chain As part of the Industry 4.0 drive, a constant drive has been to interface human actions and computing power, and one key enabler has been the use of smart glasses and augmented or mixed reality head-mounted displays (HMDs). Smart glass technology has evolved significantly over the last five years. Today’s devices are less intrusive, more ergonomic, and faster than their predecessors.

Smart glass technology is already advancing in hands-on industries such as manufacturing, logistics, field services, inspection, and operations. Initial implementation will be driven through the logistics, maintenance, and assembly functions, but as the devices gain more mainstream adoption, companies will be more comfortable experimenting with the technology in different environments.

In the world of information and analytics, a key differentiator would be the use of smart sensors. The accelerated exchange of physical-turned-digital information can exponentially increase the range of opportunities for increased performance, higher capacity, greater reliability, and advanced innovation. Smart sensor computing capabilities have strengthened substantially, thereby enabling data processing and analysis at or near the source (“edge computing”) and reducing the amount of data that moves between the device and platform.

Smart sensors increase the level of automated collection and processing of data and broaden management visibility across the supply chain to help companies reduce operating costs, improve asset efficiency, and generate incremental revenue. Smart sensors combined with smart glasses close the physical-digital loop in minutes and allow engineers to identify the root cause of manufacturing issues at the time of assembly.

When we talk about how these advancements are disrupting supply chains and the way they interact with all the ecosystem partners, including customers, suppliers and other partners the key is how we address information flow between the physical and digital worlds as indicated in Fig 12. There are three elements that have to addressed:

• First, companies need to establish a digital record – collect information from the physical world and create a digital imprint

• Second, once the digital information is created, there’s a digital to digital connection – sharing digital information to allow for advanced analytics and visualisations, and start to generate decisions

• Third, how does that translate into movement in the supply chain

Fig 12: Digital transformation from an IoT perspective

Talent considerations in the digital age Smart automation, coupled with techniques of cognitive and machine learning, are becoming more mainstream, most organisations are looking to find as many applications as possible to optimise their day-to-day operations. At the same time, other changes are taking place as well, shifting the expectations for the skills, training, and capabilities that could be most relevant for supply chain roles. Figure 13 lists some of these changes.

Traditional core business

e.g. cost reduction, optimized

sourcing, footprint strategy

New business

expand core business into

solutions for new and adjacent

markets

Transformed enterprise

Digital transformation

Digital performance management

Complexity reduction

Automated planning

3D continuity

Artificial intelligence

3D printing

Model-based experience

Cost para-metric analyzer

Remote monitoring and control

Augmented reality

Simultaneous engineering

Predictive maintenance Product cost analytics

Digitalized purchasing

Virtual product development

Simulation

Predictive quality

Human-machine cooperation

Next level product cost optimisation

Product complexity analytics

Rapid prototyping

Data driven demand prediction

Next Level of Cost Optimisation

Lean Sourcing & Procurement

Lean Manufacturing

Lean SCM / Logistics 4.0

Lean Product Development

Overall

Source: Deloitte

A leading paint manufacturer has successfully conducted PoC (Proof of Concept) in emerging technologies like IoT, Artificial Intelligence, Conversational chat bots, Natural language translation and 3-D visualisation of home décor.

An independent power producer is using IoT-enabled solution to send details on the equipment and environmental conditions every 90 minutes. This enables the company to estimate energy production and the amount to plan for storage (excess energy).

Next-Gen Supply Chain

23

Next-Gen Supply Chain

22

Fig 13: How supply chain changes affect the workforce

Changes in Supply Network

The key to addressing the challenges of the next generation supply chain is to cultivate a highly skilled workforce of supply chain professionals. Supply chain talent was already in short supply before the paradigm shift. Now in addition to a shortage of hard skills, there is a lack of talent capable of navigating the supply chain at large and complicated organisations. Supply chain professionals

must collaborate with individuals in marketing, finance, and other functions on a regular basis and, therefore, must understand their priorities and speak their language. Companies can help develop supply chain talent by refreshing their training content and development programs to address analytical and digital topics.

Collaboration between trade partners, including both customer and supplier relationships, is being facilitated by the rise of technologies that can provide broader systemic visibility of movement of goods and materials—and is becoming increasingly important for supply chain talent to master.

Customer expectations continue to change quickly, with demands for lower cost, faster response times, greater transparency into how a product is made and the origin of its raw materials, and customized products and services looming large for supply chain organisations.

Supply Chain Workers at every level should be able to facilitate and maintain interpersonal relationships with external partners and Customers.

These trends may demand a closer integration of customer service and fulfillment functions, and also require faster cycle times in many departments to meet ever-changing pressures.

Increased specialisation with specific tools or patterns often means that what were once single roles such as “buyer” are now often fragmented, split across multiple job titles and departments (for example, buying specialist, indirect buyer, and procurement specialist).

End-to-end supply chain processes have allowed for greater transparency and related services to customers, such as detailed track-and-trace capability. However, this change also breaks many traditional supply chain silos.

New technologies are improving workflows, connecting large volumes of data to improve visibility and generate more holistic insights. Advanced technologies can also complete some of the “thinking” for humans on relatively simpler tasks.

Current approaches to specialisation and the resulting fragmentation can make it difficult to segregate tasks for automation and to define new roles accurately and to scale. the need to rationalize and refine roles could become more important as management seeks an accurate view of capacity and what can or should be automated.

Individual workers should have a working knowledge of, or the ability to access information across, the entire supply chain from end to end.

The rapid pace of technological change can also mean that workers may need to engage in continuous learning or training to keep building their skills, so they can evolve alongside the technologies.

Source: Deloitte

Related Impacts on the Workforce

25

Next-Gen Supply Chain

24

Next-Gen Supply Chain

As organisations make advancements, there would be transformational change in how performance get measured and reported leading to four defined differentiators for the business

• Supply chain strategy to set the direction and defining the focus

• End to end processes paired with transparency

• Organisational alignment and clear accountability

• Integrated technology and predictive analytics / reporting

To enable this, the maturity levels of performance reporting would also change from traditional trend analysis and tools to track key KPIs to ones that recognize and enable optimisation of trade-offs from conflicting objectives, all in the context of cross-functional performance.

The way forward We are at a stage where organisations are evaluating emerging technologies offered by Industry 4.0 and are conducting pilots. As they move towards large scale deployments, information transparency and the inter-operability of people and machines are key drivers that would take supply chains and their performance to the next level.

The key for organisations is to break away from the traditional linear mind set which are set in boundary conditions around regulation, infrastructure etc. Organisations need to identify and prioritise discrete “proof of value” projects where these transformation (especially digital strategies) initiatives

can be tested and tangible ROI can be demonstrated. Once such implementations deliver a sufficient ROI, companies should position themselves to expand across the enterprise. In the process, companies should also think creatively in order to address challenges around finding, training and retaining skilled talent following a six step process (fig. 14) that is set on the themes of :

• Think BIG

• Start SMALL

• Scale FAST

Identify Opportunity

What is the business issue

and value potential?

Assess Infrastructure

What does my current

infrastructure and application portfolio

look like and what solutions can it

support?

Construct Data

What data is needed to enable the solution?

Digitize & Connect Assets

What assets need to be

sensorized and how do I connect

them?

Generate Insights

What analytics should be

conducted to identify insights that address the

issue?

Take Action

What actions need to be changed or implemented to

drive value?

Emerging Developing Defined Advanced Leading

• Informal operational performance metrics

• Standardized performance metrics within business units

• Trend analysis of performance measures

• Standardized metrics with formal target- setting process

• Optimized trade-offs in performance measures from conflicting objectives

• Local functional metrics and functional accountability

• Local functional metrics with shared accountability

• Regional functional metrics with shared accountability

• Regional process and functional metrics with shared accountability

• Global process metrics with shared accountability

• Executive incentives aligned with functional objectives

• Executive incentives based on regional cross-functional performance

• Cross-business metrics aligned to support enterprise objectives

• Executive incentives aligned on global cross-functional performance

• Tools available to track key KPIs

• Targets evaluated formally on a regular basis, and form the basis for continuous improvement

Developing Supply Chains Leading Supply Chains

Fig 14: Six step process

Source: Deloitte

Table 1: Maturity curve for performance management

Source: Deloitte

Next-Gen Supply Chain

27

Next-Gen Supply Chain

26

About CII The Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) works to create and sustain an environment conducive to the development of India, partnering industry, Government, and civil society, through advisory and consultative processes.

CII is a non-government, not-for-profit, industry-led and industry-managed organiszation, playing a proactive role in India's development process. Founded in 1895, India's premier business association has around 9000 members, from the private as well as public sectors, including SMEs and MNCs, and an indirect membership of over 300,000 enterprises from around 265 national and regional sectoral industry bodies.

CII charts change by working closely with Government on policy issues, interfacing with thought leaders, and enhancing efficiency, competitiveness and business opportunities for industry through a range of specialised services and strategic global linkages. It also provides a platform for consensus-building and networking on key issues.

Extending its agenda beyond business, CII assists industry to identify and execute corporate citizenship programmes. Partnerships with civil society organisations carry forward corporate initiatives for integrated and inclusive development across diverse domains including affirmative action, healthcare, education, livelihood, diversity management, skill development, empowerment of women, and water, to name a few.

As a developmental institution working towards India’s overall growth with a special focus on India@75 in 2022, the CII theme for 2018-19, India RISE : Responsible. Inclusive. Sustainable. Entrepreneurial emphasises Industry's role in partnering Government to accelerate India's growth and development. The focus will be on key enablers such as job creation; skill development; financing growth; promoting next gen manufacturing; sustainability; corporate social responsibility and governance and transparency.

With 65 offices, including 9 Centres of Excellence, in India, and 11 overseas offices in Australia, Bahrain, China, Egypt, France, Germany, Iran, Singapore, South Africa, UK, and USA, as well as institutional partnerships with 355 counterpart organisations in 126 countries, CII serves as a reference point for Indian industry and the international business community.

CII Address Confederation of Indian Industry Northern Region Headquarters Block No. 3, Dakshin Marg Sector 31-A, Chandigarh 160030 (India) T: +91-172- 2607228 F: +91-172 - 2606259 www.cii.in

Bibliography • Deloitte, Using smart sensors to drive supply chain innovation • Deloitte, Utilizing virtual reality to drive supply chain innovation • Deloitte series on exploring Industry 4.0 and their potential impact for enabling digital supply networks in manufacturing • Deloitte POV on performance management in supply chain and operations • Deloitte report titled "Embracing a digital future” • Deloitte report titled “Future of freight” • Deloitte, Next Generation Sales & Operations Planning, 2016 • Deloitte, The Next Generation Supply Chain: Bridging the Talent Gap, 2018 • Deloitte, When two chains combine : Supply chain meets blockchain, 2017 • Deloitte, Deliver the digital promise : Operating in a digital world, 2018 • Deloitte, Drowning in data, but starving for insights, 2018 • World Bank • Ministry of Labor, Government of India • www.rbi.org.in • IBEF report on Roads and Indian Railways, Aug 2018 • www.allerin.com • www.manufacturing.net • www.forbes.com • www.redstagfulfillment.com • www.hcmworks.com • www.linkedin.com • www.smbp.uwaterloo.ca • www.supplychain247.com • www.trade.gov • www.supplychainquarterly.com • www.bringg.com • www.inboundlogistics.com • www.supplychaindive.com • www.linkedin.com • www.researchgate.net • www.stratasysdirect.com • www.industryweek.com • www.itworld.com • www.zetes.com • www.floship.com • www.socalcscmp.org • www.sipotra.it • www-935.ibm.com • www.supplychainbrain.com • www.aims-international.org • www.iaeme.com • www.ellenmacarthurfoundation.org • https://cryptovest.com • https://supplychainmit.com • www.icegate.gov.in • https://techwireasia.com • https://economictimes.indiatimes.com

Next-Gen Supply Chain

29

Next-Gen Supply Chain

28

Contributors

Sincere appreciation to the efforts of Soumyadeep Banerjee, Urvi Rohatgi, Mir Noaman Ali and Prathyusha Adurthi who have provided support in development of this thought paper.

P S Easwaran [email protected] Partner and Supply Chain Practice Leader, Deloitte

Ranjith Prabhu [email protected] Senior Manager, Deloitte

Antony Prashant [email protected] Partner, Deloitte

Sreejith Unnikrishnan [email protected] Senior Manager, Deloitte

Next-Gen Supply Chain

30

Deloitte refers to one or more of Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Limited, a UK private company limited by guarantee (“DTTL”), its network of member firms, and their related entities. DTTL and each of its member firms are legally separate and independent entities. DTTL (also referred to as “Deloitte Global”) does not provide services to clients. Please see www.deloitte.com/about for a more detailed description of DTTL and its member firms. This material is prepared by Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu India LLP (DTTILLP). This material (including any information contained in it) is intended to provide general information on a particular subject(s) and is not an exhaustive treatment of such subject(s) or a substitute to obtaining professional services or advice. This material may contain information sourced from publicly available information or other third party sources. DTTILLP does not independently verify any such sources and is not responsible for any loss whatsoever caused due to reliance placed on information sourced from such sources. None of DTTILLP, Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Limited, its member firms, or their related entities (collectively, the “Deloitte Network”) is, by means of this material, rendering any kind of investment, legal or other professional advice or services. You should seek specific advice of the relevant professional(s) for these kind of services. This material or information is not intended to be relied upon as the sole basis for any decision which may affect you or your business. Before making any decision or taking any action that might affect your personal finances or business, you should consult a qualified professional adviser. No entity in the Deloitte Network shall be responsible for any loss whatsoever sustained by any person or entity by reason of access to, use of or reliance on, this material. By using this material or any information contained in it, the user accepts this entire notice and terms of use. ©2018 Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu India LLP. Member of Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Limited

Article 1 .pdf

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries

JULY 2010

This publication was produced for review by the U.S. Agency for International Development. It was prepared by the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management: Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries

The authors' views expressed in this publication do not necessarily reflect the views of the U.S. Agency for International Development or the United States Government.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1 The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1, is funded by the U.S. Agency for International Development under contract no. GPO-I-01-06-00007-00, beginning September 29, 2006. Task Order 1 is implemented by John Snow, Inc., in collaboration with PATH; Crown Agents Consultancy, Inc.; Abt Associates; Fuel Logistics Group (Pty) Ltd.; UPS Supply Chain Solutions; The Manoff Group; and 3i Infotech. The project improves essential health commodity supply chains by strengthening logistics management information systems, streamlining distribution systems, identifying financial resources for procurement and supply chain operations, and enhancing forecasting and procurement planning. The project also encourages policymakers and donors to support logistics as a critical factor in the overall success of their health care mandates.

Recommended Citation USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1. 2010. Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management: Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Abstract This paper examines the potential opportunity for public sector health systems to engage third party service providers to support the logistics functions—with an emphasis on distribution, warehousing, and inventory management. It provides stakeholders in supply chain management for public sector health, including the Ministry of Health and Ministry of Finance officials, program managers, and Central Medical Store managers (or associated parastatal organizations charged with health product management) with a resource that describes outsourcing and how it could be used in public health supply chains, when to consider outsourcing, the process of deciding whether outsourcing is a viable option in a particular context, and how to begin the outsourcing process. These points are illustrated by a few country examples of how countries have engaged the private sector in providing the logistics function to support their public sector supply chains.

Cover photo: Men load boxes into a truck in Indonesia.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT John Snow, Inc. 1616 Fort Myer Drive, 11th Floor Arlington, VA 22209 USA Phone: 703-528-7474 Fax: 703-528-7480 Email: [email protected] Internet: deliver.jsi.com

Contents

Acronyms .................................................................................................................................... vii

Acknowledgments ........................................................................................................................ ix

Executive Summary ...................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 3

Overview ...................................................................................................................................3

What?............................................................................................................................................ 7

Supply Chain Functions to Consider Outsourcing ....................................................................8

Types of Service Providers .......................................................................................................9

Beyond Outsourcing: Supply Chain Collaboration ....................................................................9

Specific Examples of Outsourcing Logistics in Public Sector Health Systems .......................11

When?......................................................................................................................................... 17

Deliberation—Strategic and Operational Considerations........................................................18

Cost-Benefit Analysis—Financial Considerations ...................................................................19

How?—Implementation Roadmap .............................................................................................. 27

Stage 1. Project Team and Activity Formation........................................................................27

Stage 2. 3PL Recruitment .......................................................................................................28

Stage 3. Service-level Agreement...........................................................................................30

Stage 4. Monitoring and Evaluation ........................................................................................32

Conclusion .................................................................................................................................. 33

References.................................................................................................................................. 37

Appendices

A. Typical Contract Format ......................................................................................................... 41

B. Sample Implementation Plan..................................................................................................43

Figures

1. The Logistics Cycle................................................................................................................... 7

2. Uses and Advantages of 3PLs................................................................................................ 17

3. Process for Outsourcing Decisionmaking………………………………………………………....27

Tables

1. Category and Examples of Costs ...........................................................................................20

2. Category and Examples of Costs to Upgrade.........................................................................21

3. Cost Comparison Sample Worksheet .....................................................................................23

4. Final Cost-Benefit Comparison ...............................................................................................25

v

vi

Acronyms

3PL third party logistics provider

4PL fourth party logistics providers

AHP analytic hierarchy process

AIDS acquired immune deficiency syndrome

CHAI Clinton Health Access Initiative

ARV antiretroviral

CCTU closed-circuit television

CMS Central Medical Store

CPFR collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment

DGFP Directorate General for Family Planning

DRC Democratic Republic of the Congo

EDI electronic data interchange

FEFO first-to-expire, first-out

FIFO first-in, first-out

GOB Government of Bangladesh

HIV human immunodeficiency virus

IAPHL International Association of Public Health Logisticians

ICB international competitive bidding

IHD UTi Pharma Distribution

ISO International Organization for Standardization

ITT invitation to tender

KPI key performance indicator

LMIS logistics management information system

LMU logistics management unit

M&E monitoring and evaluation

MOF Ministry of Finance

MOH Ministry of Health

NGO nongovernmental organization

vii

NPV net present value

PHD Pharmaceutical Healthcare Distributors (Pty) ltd.

RFP request for proposals

SDC service delivery contract

SLA service level agreement

SOP standard operating procedure

UNDP United Nations Development Programme

USAID U.S. Agency for International Development

WHO World Health Organization

WMS warehouse management system

viii

Acknowledgments

This paper is the result of significant input and expertise from a knowledgeable group of people who have experience with public sector health system supply chains, outsourcing, and the decision process to outsource. The main authors of the document are Alexis Heaton of the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT; Zachary Clarke, who was an intern at the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID); and Simon Cole from Pharmaceutical Healthcare Distributors, ltd (PHD). James Gibney, formerly of JSI, gave this activity its initial momentum through his thorough research. Thanks go to Maeve Magner of the Clinton Health Access Initiative (CHAI) for her careful review and thoughtful comments on an early version of the guide.

We are grateful to the many members of the International Association of Public Health Logisticians (IAPHL) who contributed to an interesting online discussion about outsourcing; the forum started and encouraged discussions during the writing of this paper. Last, but no less important, many thanks go to the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT staff, especially Shyam Lama, Linda Allain, Joseph McCord, and Kelly Hamblin. They provided valuable contributions, including opinions and perspectives from their own experiences that helped shape this work. We thank them for their participation in brainstorming sessions, interviews, and multiple rounds of document reviews. We would also like to thank the many researchers, writers, and practitioners whose work provided the theoretical foundation for this report.

ix

x

Executive Summary

Supply chain management in public sector health systems has received increasing attention in recent years—as both a priority and a challenge for many countries—as governments find themselves struggling with an increasing number of products, programs, and patients to manage. Due to major increases in funding and donor support for a variety of health programs, supply chain managers may be responsible for a larger number and volume of products, but with limited additional resources to expand their capacity to manage, store, and distribute these products. Often, staff already working in this area receive additional pressure to build up internal capacity to meet the service delivery targets. However, many countries, faced with this type of challenge, recognize that these functions, that were once ancillary to their primary function of service delivery to patients, could tie up a significant portion of their budgets should they scale up appropriately. Furthermore, some countries recognize that these functions could potentially be outsourced to private sector logistics providers. More and more governments and donors are considering options to engage the private sector to contract out functions such as warehousing, distribution, and inventory management. However, the costs and benefits of doing so often are not clear and managers have limited resources to guide them through this process.

This document provides professionals working in supply chain management with a useful resource for engaging outside resources for public health logistics, covering the what, when, and how of outsourcing and its applicability to people working in public health supply chain management. They could include Ministry of Health (MOH) and Ministry of Finance (MOF) stakeholders, program managers, and Central Medical Store managers (or associated managers at parastatal organizations charged with health product management). This document, divided roughly into three sections, focuses on the following three elements of outsourcing.

What: This section describes the basic principles of outsourcing, and provides examples of outsourcing functions from the public sector supply chains in Bangladesh and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. These examples highlight possible successes, such as improved service delivery and increased capacity; they also explain the potential challenges—unpopularity due to loss of government jobs and skill shifting from supply chain management to contract management. The process of outsourcing can be a significant change for an organization; the lessons learned from these examples highlight considerations that should be carefully weighed before any decision is made to outsource.

When: This section covers the decision process, including basic guidelines for doing a cost benefit analysis—comparing outsourcing to maintaining functions in-house and, potentially, increasing the capacity to meet demands. The guide highlights additional considerations that are above and beyond cost—for example, the capacity of local organizations to take on these functions, political feasibility, and contracting and payment options that will affect relationships with private companies.

How: This section covers the specifics of contract management, including common pitfalls and suggested ways to avoid them. It outlines how to convene a project team to manage the process, the selection of a third party logistics provider (3PL), the creation of a service-level agreement with the

1

selected contractor, and management of the contract, including key performance indicators (KPIs) for the contract.

Overall, it is important to remember that while outsourcing can significantly reduce the number of functions that a government has to provide for its public sector health system, it may not be a perfect solution. Managing a contract is usually challenging, especially for a large job with a complex network, as public health supply chains often are. It may require fewer resources than doing the same job in-house; but will require different types of management, oversight, and funding. Furthermore, it may not be a feasible option if there are restrictions on contracting or funding, or the decision may cause political opposition because of lost jobs.

However, as private sector companies continue to make significant advances with technology and information management, their capacity to excel in supply chain functions often surpasses what is possible within the public sector. Rather than attempt to keep pace with these advances, it may make sense for government systems to benefit from that capacity by outsourcing specific functions to the private sector, when and if that is a viable option. For outsourcing, no one answer is always right, but to increase capacity to meet an increasing number of demands on supply chains for public sector health systems, this guide should help managers and policymakers determine what is possible within a given context.

2

Introduction

Many supply chain managers in public sector health systems find themselves with an increasing number and volume of products to manage, but with limited resources to expand their capacity to manage, store, and distribute these products. Often, to meet acceptable service levels, there is pressure to either build up internal capacity or contract these services to the private sector. However, the decision to do one or the other is not always clear, and there are limited resources available to guide managers through this process.

This document provides anyone working in supply chain management with a useful resource for engaging outside expertise for public health logistics, covering the what, when, and how of outsourcing and its applicability to people working in public health supply chain management. They could include the MOH and MOF stakeholders, program managers, Central Medical Store managers (or associated parastatal organizations charged with health product management). This document, divided roughly into three sections, focuses on the three elements of outsourcing.

 What: The first section of this paper presents the what of outsourcing, including background on outsourcing in the private sector. It also includes the functions that public health sector organizations should think about when they consider outsourcing and how this might improve their ability to meet customer needs. This is followed by a sub-section with examples of a few government health systems and nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) in resource-limited countries that have outsourced logistics functions; the document explores how these have affected service delivery. The examples include evidence of past outcomes and provide lessons learned that can be applied to future outsourcing programs.

 When: This section includes guidance on how to identify potential opportunities for outsourcing within an organization and how to conduct an analysis that would help an MOH or government body determine if outsourcing would be feasible and advantageous to meet organizational performance objectives.

 How: This section provides guidance on the steps that should be included in an implementation plan, after the decision to outsource is made. This includes the selection of a 3PL, the tender process, drafting a contract and monitoring performance, and building and maintaining a relationship with a 3PL to improve the quality of service delivery.

Overview Outsourcing discrete business functions is a well-established practice in the private sector. During the past several decades, a significant number of companies and organizations have expanded the use of 3PLs for functions that fall outside their core capacities. Typically, organizations outsource parts of their business when the need for functions beyond their main business or mission exceeds their ability or utility (cost, efficiency, mission). Rather than invest additional resources in staff and infrastructure to expand support to these functions, it may be cost effective to outsource to an organization that specializes in these services, often at a lower cost and/or higher level of service. Businesses frequently outsource parts of supply chain management (i.e., procurement, distribution, logistics etc.), as companies seek to shift their responsibility for all management functions to only

3

those that specifically require their unique and specialized expertise. The once fully vertical model of companies managing all their logistics functions has moved toward reliance on companies whose primary focus is logistics services. For example, a company that manufactures goods may outsource warehousing and shipping to another company that focuses on warehousing and distribution rather than trying to build this capacity.

While much of this shift initially occurred in the private sector of developed countries, where infrastructure and information systems are robust; developing countries have increased interest in adopting this model, where the public sector still provides many services. As markets have opened up and private services have expanded in many countries, organizations are exploring how the same basic principles can be applied to their supply chains. In many resource-limited countries, the private sector has significantly expanded their involvement in improving education, service delivery, and infrastructure; including road and bridge building, communications, and power networks.

For instance, in several countries, hospital management has been outsourced to private companies to improve efficiency and quality of service delivery. The same principle of outsourcing non-core functions can be applied to public health systems. Ministries of health often identify their core competency as health service delivery to their constituencies, yet continue to be involved in logistics for health products, such as warehousing, transportation, quality assurance, etc. These functions could potentially be outsourced to third parties, thus freeing up key resources to focus on the core mission. The result can be increased service levels for the patients and reduced operational costs.

Currently, in many developing countries, MOHs are responsible for all in-country distribution of health products, in addition to forecasting, procuring supplies, and providing service delivery. In many cases, freight forwarders coordinate shipments as far as the central warehouse in a country1; but, from there, the government is responsible for all aspects of product management and movement. That means that, in these countries, the public sector is responsible for coordinating all movement and management of products from the time they pass through customs, quarantine, and quality assurance testing, to storage at the national level; and then as they are distributed to the provincial, district, and service delivery points. In many places, this is necessary. With minimal infrastructure and limited private market development, the MOH has few options.

Further, because of growing populations and a rising number of health services and facilities, MOHs in developing countries often invest increasing amounts of scarce resources in supply chain management for the public sector as the number of service delivery points expand, patient access/demand grows, health supplies and suppliers increase, and volumes increase. This growth in the number of products and clients results in expanding needs for warehousing, information management, transportation, and the equipment and staff needed to support those functions. Often this increased demand occurs within an atmosphere of uncertainty as donor commitments and government budgets vary from year to year, seasonal disease patterns and product demands change, and fuel costs and currency values fluctuate, making these ancillary responsibility for logistics management a significant part of an MOH’s management burden. In many countries, the people charged with logistics management are pharmacists and clinicians; they require additional logistics training to carry out this added task. Furthermore, high levels of staff turnover in many public health

1 Occasionally, freight forwarders deliver products to levels farther down in a health system, but this is unusual; this is an example of the type of distribution outsourcing that this paper explores.

4

systems leave positions vacant for significant periods and require frequent investments of time and money in training new staff.

The objective of a public health supply chain is to get the right health commodities, of the right quality, at the right time, in the right quantity, to the right place, and for the right cost. For many reasons, this is a significant challenge for the public health sector in many countries—it is difficult to find the resources required to consistently meet the six rights. These challenges may be the result of increased supply chain demands of other (vertical) programs, lack of routine or accurate data, limited forecasting and procurement capacity, vehicle limitations, budget constraints, lack of staff trained in logistics, outdated information systems, policy shifts, or other factors that governments must face. These challenges can result in weak supply chains that negatively impact systems already struggling with limited resources, including stockouts; they can also result in high morbidity and mortality rates when patients do not receive medicines and health supplies, and the lack of or inferior data that leads to poor decision making and inefficient use of funding. Thus, outsourcing has emerged as a potential way to maximize the resources of governments (MOHs) and improve service delivery while leveraging the expertise of private sector service providers to better meet customer needs.

5

6

What?

Outsourcing is often defined as “engaging a third party provider to perform services for the host organization that were previously performed in-house.” In this definition, third party provider refers to any entity outside the traditional supplier-carrier-consumer relationship. Within any organization, public or private, there may be valid business and strategic reasons to outsource parts of the operation so the business can focus on its core capabilities. This process requires both an objective evaluation of internal performance and capacity, followed by a search for reliable partners that can deliver responsive services. Note that we distinguish outsourcing from contracting out—contracting usually implies that the customer dictates exactly what a contractor is to do and how to do it; outsourcing means the customer dictates the required outcome and the contractor determines how to complete the task based on their expertise.

In public health systems and supply chain management, a number of potential functional areas can be outsourced. There are many examples of public health systems that have contracted out service delivery; where, for example, a private organization or NGO may be contracted to provide health services to clients or to manage hospital administration. Following are a few such examples of this arrangement:

 In Cambodia, to outsource health services to NGOs, the MOH created two mechanisms: (1) a service delivery contract (SDC), where the contractor has complete line responsibility for service delivery in a specific area; and (2) management contract (MC) where the contractor works within the MOH system to strengthen the system. In El Alto, Bolivia, an NGO was given a management contract to improve the hospital management. In Madagascar and Senegal, the governments contracted with NGOs to deliver community-based nutrition interventions for improved health (Loevinsohn 2008).

Figure 1. The Logistics Cycle

While there are a limited number of well-documented examples of governments outsourcing parts of their supply chains; there are still opportunities in this area, and there is increasing interest in exploring this option. Many logistics functions can be outsourced. However, the various functions of the logistics cycle in figure 1 show clearly that some functions are better outsourced than others. MOHs are unlikely to relegate responsibility for functions that

7

they consider part of their core competency—areas that are under their direct mission and that they can perform better than an external party. These functions typically include developing and updating treatment guidelines, developing health policies, resourcing health facilities, creating national essential drug lists, and selecting products. However, ministries may determine that outside expertise is advantageous for some other functions that may not be part of their core competencies: forecasting and procurement, storage, distribution, and logistics management information systems (LMIS).

Supply Chain Functions to Consider Outsourcing The following supply chain activities may be appropriate for outsourcing in this context, because of the MOHs’ lack of specialization in these areas and the frequent availability of these services from third party providers:

Importation: This is the expeditious and controlled movement of goods into a country, always following local regulations; it may include customs clearance. To remain sensitive to necessary storage conditions, third party importation services may also include—

 Bonded Facilities—A government certifies these facilities and a bonding agency guarantees them; goods can be securely stored and the related taxes and duties deferred until they are removed.

 Cold Chain—This is the guaranteed maintenance and storage of goods, at the appropriate temperature, as they move from the supplier, through customs, to the consignee. This is especially important for vaccines and other temperature-sensitive products.

 Storage and Distribution—This is the secure, appropriate, and climate-controlled warehousing for all products. Third party providers may also offer inventory accuracy guarantees; 24-hour assistance, if needed; product insurance; and access for government or program officers to ensure proper goods management. Related services may include—

― Inventory management. The service provider may use an electronic warehouse management system (WMS) that would allow for real-time sharing of inventory status, if the customer uses a compatible system.

― Stock rotation. Proper stock rotation will ensure minimal product expiration and wastage; it may be first-to-expire, first-out (FEFO) for products with limited shelf lives but first-in, first-out (FIFO) for others.

― Picking and packing. This may include preparing orders for delivery to individual facilities, or for a district storage center; the service provider may or may not control it.

― Order tracking. This information shows what quantities of which products have moved from where to where, including the dates of these movements and proof that a facility received the products.

8

― Cross-docking. This is a service for orders that are packed for a facility, but sent to a collection or redistribution point for consolidation and onward delivery. Additional storage is not needed.

Transportation and Delivery—This is the physical delivery service of goods between different levels in the supply chain (movement from central level to regional level or last mile locations, etc.), according to the program/client requirements.

Product Security—A third party provider manages a product for the entire time; they are responsible for the safety and security of the goods. Additional services provided for product security may include bar coding, closed-circuit television (CCTV) for monitoring and security, restricted access, and product tracking.

Information Services—Service providers typically invest in information systems to monitor stock movements, order status, and invoicing, using bar coding and electronic data management systems. With this data, third parties can provide real-time data on stock levels, product usage, and trend analysis to add significant visibility and value to management.

Types of Service Providers Although any external or third party organization may be able to provide services for a customer, several types of organizations focus specifically on logistics services.

Third Party Logistics Providers—These providers specialize in the logistics functions described above. Commonly called 3PLs, these organizations are popular in the private sector as solution providers to firms interested in outsourcing some or all aspects of their supply chain management functions. They typically invest in physical infrastructure and information services that make their offerings more sophisticated and specialized than what can be provided by other organizations in­ house.

Non-Asset–Based 3PLs—These providers offer logistics solutions without ownership of physical resources, such as warehouses or trucks. They operate similarly to freight forwarders by negotiating and contracting warehousing and transportation while offering information services related to product handling.

Fourth Party Logistics Providers (4PLs)—These lead logistics partners act as a supply chain integrator that assembles and manages the resources, capabilities, and technology of its own organization with those of complementary service providers to deliver a comprehensive supply chain solution. These partners function as the primary manager of other 3PL partners for a client. They provide a single interface for the client and are the primary supply chain management provider, even if multiple parties actually perform specific aspects.

Beyond Outsourcing: Supply Chain Collaboration In addition to outsourcing, supply chain collaboration is another option for working with the private sector or other external partners in supply chain management. Supply chain collaboration is the joint planning, coordinating, and process integration between suppliers, customers, and other partners. This type of agreement can reduce costs, increase return on assets, and improve reliability and responsiveness to market needs.

9

Supplier-client collaboration can take a variety of forms. Three of the most common are described below, but the best forms of collaboration are tailored to the unique needs and requirements of the supplier-client partnership.

 Supplier direct delivery: In this model, the supplier delivers products directly to the distribution point. For example, in some local supermarkets, the supplying company delivers and shelves a variety of products (shampoo, soft drinks, etc.). This transfers the burden of storage and transport to the supplier. It also increases the risk for the distribution point, because they depend on their supplier’s well-functioning supply chain to avoid stockouts.

In Mexico, as a public health example, a system analysis concluded that distribution costs in the public health sector were 30 to 50 percent lower when private companies provided the same services. The higher costs were attributed to insufficient logistics infrastructure, limited information systems, and a complex network of distribution. In states where the government managed the distribution, products arrived at a state central warehouse; were moved to local warehouses; and then were eventually moved to the hospitals and health facilities, as needed. In this system, lead times were long, managers had very little visibility into the status of their orders, and warehouses were under-utilized. As a pilot, several states changed the system so the suppliers delivered medicines directly to the hospitals and health centers. The results showed that this shift to supplier direct delivery resulted in an improved response time, a 95 percent order fulfillment rate, and a 36 percent increase in the availability of medicines. (A.T. Kearney 2004).

 Collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR): This can be used to streamline communication through the supply chain, from the manufacturer to the end user. Information shared between suppliers and the procurer allows for continuous updating of inventory and projected needs. This, in turn, makes the end-to-end supply chain more efficient, facilitates better supply planning, and decreases expenditures on excess inventory by creating a leaner supply chain. It improves transport by promoting more efficient routing schedules, which are based on known demand.

CPFR has been used for public health in the past, at least partially, in coordinating donor-funded procurements. For example, the Clinton Health Access Initiative aggregated demand forecasts for pediatric antiretrovirals needed across many developing countries for treatment of HIV and AIDS in children; this helped suppliers understand the total demand for specific products. Prior to this, suppliers had to create their own forecasts for product development and manufacturing, with limited visibility into country-level demand estimates, particularly for new products. This type of information sharing enables the manufacturer to plan better, such as ensuring the availability of necessary raw materials and increasing their ability to meet customer needs on time. This information sharing needs to be routine and continuous to ensure that ongoing supply levels are appropriate, given the estimated demand.

 Vendor managed inventory—In this model, the manufacturer or distributor for the client must maintain the product inventory levels. The inventory can be held either at a distributor/supplier interim distribution center or, for replenishment, at the supplier’s central warehouse or manufacturing facility. This system requires the supplier to have visibility of the supply chain to the distribution point. For the manufacturer or supplier to know when and how much stock to replenish, they must have accurate and real-time knowledge of inventory status at the distribution points.

10

In the private sector, this is often done through the Internet or electronic data interchange (EDI). Computer-to-computer transfer of data minimizes data entry and calculation errors in the LMIS; this improves order accuracy. The responsibility to ensure stock availability shifts to the supplier. This direct link to the point of service further enables the supplier to provide quality, efficient service to both the distributor and the end user.

For example, in South Africa several distributors are warehousing and distributing antiretrovirals (ARVs) for suppliers. Three large distributors, IHD (now UTi Pharma Distribution), PHD, and CiplaMedpro have contracts with a variety of ARV suppliers—the suppliers maintain ownership of the medicines, but the distributors store, manage, and sell them. At the time the products are moved to the point of sale (health facilities, smaller distributors, etc.), ownership is transferred from the supplier to the buyer. The distributor is, therefore, a retailer that stores the product and shares the expected demand with the supplier to help better manage inventory in exchange for a predetermined commission or profit.

Specific Examples of Outsourcing Logistics in Public Sector Health Systems Following are some examples of how these types of outsourcing partnerships have been implemented by governments in health systems in developing countries. These examples of partnerships in health logistics in low-income countries include information on the background, decision criteria, risks and concerns of participants, and outcomes. The examples provide lessons learned that MOHs, policymakers, and supply chain implementers can use in similar contexts.

Example 1: Gradually handing over control in Bangladesh

Background Prior to 1994, the Government of Bangladesh (GOB) MOH Directorate General for Family Planning (DGFP) used a government-owned and -operated fleet of vehicles for distributing family planning commodities. However, because of consistently late deliveries, labor shortages, lost products, and high costs, the DGFP decided to outsource some of the transportation of family planning commodities.

Decision Criteria To help the GOB make this decision, it contracted a consultant to assess the logistics system to determine if there were opportunities for increased cost savings and/or greater efficiencies by outsourcing some or all of the family planning commodities logistics. This third party consultancy performed a cost-benefit analysis and analyzed efficiency of the system. Specifically, the consultant compared asset utilization rates, cost schedules, human resource capacity, and service levels of the private sector and the DGFP. The assessor found significant opportunities for cost savings and some potential service benefits (according to the consultant, the cost savings alone justified the change). Most of the potential savings were by eliminating or reducing government employees’ pensions and other benefits (due to the high labor costs) and the high operational costs caused by the under-utilization of human and physical capital (e.g., idle drivers and vehicles, and shipping at less than a full truckload).

11

The DGFP decided to proceed with a limited outsourcing plan; the DGFP outsourced 20 percent of the distribution of family planning commodities from the central warehouse to the regional warehouses, to the district reserve stores, and, finally, to the sub-district (thana) stores.2 By outsourcing 20 percent of the transportation to an outside organization, the government was able to easily compare the performance of the private sector transportation to the public sector transportation. From this comparison, it was obvious that by using the private carrier, costs were lower and efficiencies (as determined by on-time deliveries) were greater. This success motivated the DGFP to expand the private sector involvement and commit to outsourcing up to 80 percent of the transportation requirements of the DGFP. To proceed, the DGFP held a competitive bid for a two year contract that the GOB fully funded (not donors).

Risks and Concerns The government was hesitant to make the outsourcing decision because of several concerns. First, the GOB was using a significant amount of capital (trucks) for transportation and they employed a large number of drivers. What would happen to this capital and, more important, what would happen to the drivers if the government outsourced this function? Second, what would political consequences be for the redundancies? And, finally, the GOB wanted to retain control over the family planning program— outsourcing was seen as a threat to this control. Because these were serious concerns, they had to be addressed during any discussion or decision to outsource.

This led the government to take a moderate approach in adapting an outsourcing strategy. Not only did the DGFP begin the project by outsourcing only 20 percent of the transportation requirement, but it also decided not to dismiss any employees. Instead, the DGFP would not hire new employees or replace worn-out capital. As employees left, and as vehicles were retired, they were replaced by the private carrier. To maintain some control over transportation, the government decided to cap private sector participation at 80 percent of the total capacity requirement. This ensured the GOB a minimum of 20 percent of the total capacity3 (DELIVER 2007), which allowed them to maintain some control, and flexibility for emergency shipments and backup to resolve any problems with the private carrier.

Outcomes The cost and service-level benefits for outsourcing transportation have already been mentioned. These benefits occurred when the private sector took a more competitive and professional approach to transportation logistics management. For service-level improvements, the evidence is largely anecdotal. In the past, there were frequent labor problems (striking government workers); corruption (government employees used the trucks to visit relatives, which delayed departures and changed routes); drivers’ lack of accountability (drivers would claim mechanical problems to spend time with family members); and poor use of capital (shipping less than a truck load). Compared to outsourcing to the private sector, cost savings are measurable. Now, there is a financial incentive to hold employees accountable, use capital efficiently, and use modern route planning software.

2 From the sub-district stores to the clinics, transportation is more efficient. Each month the last mile suppliers (health clinic workers) meet at the sub-district stores to attend meetings and receive paychecks. At this time, each attendee is resupplied with family planning commodities. The quantities are small enough that they can be transported using local transportation, motorcycle, or bicycle. At the time the project was implemented, there was one central warehouse, three regional warehouses, 18 district reserve stores, and 467 sub-districts stores in Bangladesh. 3 As of September 2006, the private sector capacity had only reached 50 percent of the transportation requirement.

12

According to the third party consultancy, these improvements could save the DGFP approximately 25 percent in annual operating costs for the routes outsourced to the private sector (Pearson 1997).

However, outsourcing did not mean that the DGFP could ignore transportation; it has not eliminated the government’s role, it has simply changed it. Now, rather than using government resources to provide transportation, the government plans, oversees, and evaluates the service provider. Furthermore, the exacting standards of the private carrier have led to more rigorous standards for the DGFP, particularly in resource planning, warehousing, forecasting, and payroll practices. The DGFP also had to learn to manage a contract, particularly writing the contract; and manage the bidding process, perform supplier evaluations, and monitor supplier performance.

Finally, the private sector service providers have also had concerns. They were cautious about working with the government because of their delayed payments and perceived level of corruption. To maintain the trust of its private partners and to maintain these relationships, the GOB had to include payment terms in the contracts and follow through every time.

Lessons Learned Outsourcing is not a perfect solution that will end all logistics concerns. It can lead to significant cost savings and service-level improvements, but it requires constant involvement and special skills from the outsourcing party, particularly in contract management. The DGFP had to develop, manage, and evaluate their outsourcing contract and meet the standards of the contract.

Outsourcing programs are often unpopular because of the perceived loss of government control over parts of the public programs and concerns about layoffs. These political risks should be carefully considered and mitigated in outsourcing programs to ensure adequate management participation and organizational buy-in. The DGFP overcame these concerns by proceeding cautiously and avoiding politically unpopular layoffs.

Finally, the profit incentives of the private sector encourage greater use of technology and cost saving practices in health commodity delivery. These improvements placed pressure on the DGFP to follow supply chain best practices, but they also increased service levels.

Example 2: Using a 4PL in the Democratic Republic of the Congo

Background In 2005, the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) became part of an innovative public-private partnership in the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) (Global Health Council 2009). The DRC’s general lack of infrastructure and government resources has created significant challenges in administering a much-needed grant from the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria. Because the government lacked the internal capacity to manage a large public health project, UNDP stepped in to fill this role; they are accountable for the U.S.$200 million grant.

Under this grant, UNDP is responsible for the entire supply chain—from procurement to final distribution. It has fully capable procurement units with years of experience in procuring drugs and health commodities; however, when the grant was issued, it lacked local capacity and expertise in distribution, particularly in last-mile distribution. This challenge was complicated by the lack of infrastructure in the DRC—they have only 250 miles of paved roads in a country approximately the size of Western Europe.

13

Due to human resource capacity constraints and an inability to develop the short-term capacity, UNDP was not able to use the public sector to distribute its commodities but, instead, turned to the private sector. UNDP contacted the World Response Consultancy to engineer a public-private partnership strategy. World Response drafted an initial request for proposal (RFP) that included the primary distribution tasks that UNDP would need the private sector to fulfill—quality assurance, customs clearance, storage, and comprehensive national distribution. UNDP and World Response decided that, despite the procurement capabilities of UNDP, it would be beneficial to outsource this function, as well. This would create one cohesive supply chain that was implemented from start to finish by the private sector service provider. After completing a competitive bidding process, Missionpharma was awarded the contract.

Decision Criteria As previously mentioned, UNDP lacked the expertise to implement a distribution network under the difficult conditions in the DRC. To quickly attain a high level of supply chain service, UNDP needed the knowledge of an organization with on-the-ground experience. This would allow UNDP to fulfill its Global Fund mandate and use its resources efficiently and effectively. Developing internal capacity would have been too time consuming and would have initially affected service at the lower levels as UNDP learned to manage the distribution.

Risks and Concerns One of the greatest challenges in this partnership has been reinforcing accountability of the participating organizations. UNDP mitigated this challenge in its contract, which stipulates that payment for procured products will not be made until UNDP receives verification that the products have reached their final destination. This ensures UNDP that its objectives are met, but it requires a high level of trust from Missionpharma.

The incentive arrangement also places Missionpharma at significant financial risk when products are damaged or lost, and poses administrative management challenges due to the length of the supply chain. To overcome this, Missionpharma pre-packs cartons in its overseas warehouses for shipment directly to the service delivery points throughout the DRC (Global Health Council 2009). Missionpharma also established a bonded warehouse to protect products against leakage during the customs clearance process. The warehouse, with a track and trace barcode system, has allowed Missionpharma to maintain control and visibility of products throughout the supply chain, eliminating leakage and protecting its investment.

Outcomes The primary outcome has been that UNDP has successfully distributed health commodities throughout the DRC, a country with very limited infrastructure and long lead times.

Furthermore, they reached this level in a relatively short period of time. By contracting with only one service provider and reducing the amount of time and effort necessary to coordinate a supply chain among multiple partners, UNDP has been able to implement a complete, functioning supply chain in less than two months. This has guaranteed that the target population has access to needed health commodities quickly, saving lives.

Finally, the incentive structure of the public-private partnership has contributed to the implementation of a best practices supply chain that is more common among big businesses. Strict accountability and financial incentives provide Missionpharma the impetus to employ real-time

14

package tracking technology, a bonded warehouse, and a chartered dedicated aircraft. Undoubtedly, these practices have improved service levels and overall superior supply chain performance.

Lessons Learned Public-private partnerships can do more than fill the gaps in public sector capacity; they can encourage supply chain innovations and greater supply chain performance. These benefits are realized through contracts and incentives that mirror private sector competitiveness, risk, and accountability. This risk encouraged supply chain best practices and innovation in the DRC context and has also improved service levels throughout the length of the supply chain.

Key Lessons from These Examples From these examples, we have learned that the application of outsourcing and use of 3PL services by public institutions and public health organizations, in particular, can improve service delivery, but it is not always an easily implemented solution. There are many reasons why MOHs and associated parastatal organizations responsible for warehousing and distribution of health products would consider outsourcing some of their supply chain functions to private contractors. One reason is that as health services expand, as they have in many countries, the number of products that need to be managed and the number of distribution points have increased. Without major investments in infrastructure and equipment, it is extremely difficult to achieve this expansion. Because of donor support, many resource-limited settings have had a rapid increase in the number and volume of products they must manage, but they have received little additional support for inventory management and distribution for staff, equipment, or management skills. Further, warehousing and transportation needs often vary, meaning that the investment required to increase infrastructure to accommodate the largest inventory may not be worthwhile, if that need is only once a year, or is infrequent enough that it would be more efficient to outsource the need for additional capacity. In some cases, the cost of adapting a system for maximum variability—buying additional trucks or building additional warehouse space—could be avoided by outsourcing that function for a specified function or period of time.

In addition to the common issues just mentioned, four ideas from the examples can be applied to other situations:

MOH recognition of capacity constraints. The main reason the governments or agencies decided to outsource specific functions was because the MOH recognized that they could not carry out the identified activity, whether it was human capacity, or infrastructure capacity, or both. This limitation prompted the MOH to determine how they could obtain that capacity elsewhere instead of investing the time and capital necessary to build the capacity internally.

Defining the private sector: The private sector partners in the outsourcing relationships mentioned in this research fall outside the traditional definition of private sector. These partners range from domestic for-profit organizations to international private cooperating agencies, such as Missionpharma, that have organizational goals beyond earning a profit. These are not for profit organizations as defined by the for profit private sector. Defining these partners is particularly important to the country context. Opportunities to outsource depend on the level of development, infrastructure, and private sector sophistication. Often, very low-income countries do not have options for private sector partnership. As countries’ markets develop, however, so do their private sectors; and the options for outsourcing with private sector companies increase.

15

Concerns of control and payment: The most common concerns mentioned by the outsourcing participants were control and payment. Control was particularly important to the public sector partner, but the private sector also mentioned it. This concern should be addressed before an outsourcing decision is made. In the examples mentioned earlier, the Government of Bangladesh was concerned about the control of its health supply chain; this was one reason it chose to proceed cautiously and to outsource only a small percentage of its transportation capacity. This type of risk assessment and caution contributes to successful outsourcing campaigns by encouraging participant support and political buy-in.

In the examples researched, the private sector participant was, at least initially, concerned about the ability of the public sector to guarantee timely and accurate payment. This type of concern leads to higher costs and lower service levels because the private sector partner is hesitant to make significant investments in the project if there are concerns about recovering costs. This risk can be mitigated through contract management, but it can only be eliminated by developing a true partnership and trust.

Contract management: For an outsourcing program to succeed, there must be excellent contract management. The outsourcing organization needs to know how to write, enforce, and monitor a contract. This includes clauses for payment terms, performance expectations, assessment, and contract renewal. Different types of contracts are appropriate for different contexts, but it is essential that both parties enter the contract with accurate expectations of performance, a clear understanding of how that performance will be measured, and what the consequences will be for under-performance.

16

When?

The decision to outsource is not one that should be made without an exhaustive evaluation of resources and intended outcomes. Usually, some catalyst or issue drives the exploration process of alternative solutions, whether it is a resource limitation or a challenge in maintaining performance that an outside partner may be better positioned to address.

For example, as the needs of public sector health systems expand and the scope of products managed by a MOH increases, outsourcing may be an opportunity to expand without making additional investment in infrastructure and staff. This could either be a short-term strategy for managing change, or a longer-term strategy if a government decides that these capacities are not part of their core competencies and are not areas that they want to grow internally.

Additionally, shifting certain functions may result in economies of scale, as a 3PL can leverage the resources and needs of other clients to more efficiently meet the needs of all. Thus, when a 3PL consolidates smaller infrequent shipments, they may be able to provide larger, more frequent shipments at a lower average cost than the clients could provide individually. This might ultimately lead to lower costs for the MOH and service improvements for the ultimate customers. Using 3PLs leverages the private sector’s flexibility and may help overcome absorptive capacity constraints imposed on government institutions. Some common challenges, and how a 3PL may be able to address these, are displayed in figure 2.

Figure 2. Uses and Advantages of 3PLs

17

The following two-phase process will enable a public institution, such as a MOH, to decide if they should pursue outsourcing as a way to improve service.

Deliberation—Strategic and Operational Considerations At this initial stage, the organization recognizes that there are issues with service levels or capacity, but they may need to conduct further analysis to pinpoint operational bottlenecks. This should involve a group of internal stakeholders who understand the existing system and its performance and are able to analyze options for improvement. Ideally, the team is consistently involved in the process from beginning to end. During this deliberation process, the stakeholder team will determine which of the organization’s functions and activities could be outsourced to a third party. The stakeholder team may find that none of the analyzed functions fall into this category, but the deliberation process will still help determine the best approach for moving forward with system improvements. The steps in this process may take the following form:

1. Identification of core competency—Out of all parts of an organization’s process, define what is and what is not within the core operational expertise of the organization. The core competency of a business is its main purpose and its key to survival; it is how a private sector organization makes a profit and survives in a competitive environment. Surprisingly, it is common for an organization to misunderstand, or to not recognize, its core competency; because it often changes with time, technology, management, or customer demands. Before an organization makes an outsourcing decision, it should be confident that it understands its core competencies.

The core competency is what sets an organization apart from its competition; it is what the organization does that its competitors do not, or what it does better than its competitors. Many successful businesses have multiple core competencies but, for simplicity, observers often focus on only one. The following are examples of frequently recognized core competencies.

 Dell: manufacturing consistently high-quality, customizable computers

 Apple: design and innovation

 Walmart: low costs because of its supply chain excellence

Each organization has a core competency that sets it apart from the competition and enables it to earn high profits, often at an above average rate of return.4 Without this core competency, the organization would not survive, or would not be as successful (i.e., profitable).

Using this process, an MOH should consider outsourcing activities that are outside its areas of operational expertise, or areas in which the MOH does not want to build expertise. This move toward specialization of services would, for example, allow a Central Medical Store (CMS) that has staff with expertise in procurement and management of pharmaceutical supplies, but limited experience with transportation scheduling or fleet management, to outsource the physical distribution of products. This would increase the CMS’ capacity to focus on their areas of strength while shifting responsibility for other aspects of supply chain management to the private sector, rather than trying to build internal capacity.

4 An above normal rate of return is a rate greater than the organization’s cost of capital, or an economic profit (as opposed to accounting profit).

18

2. Operational process review—Identify functional areas within the organization’s operations that are not performing well. This requires the ability to measure performance and compare it to some benchmark or standard. Comparable measurement of performance must have performance-based indicators, also known as metrics. The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT has published a list of suggested metrics for logistics systems (Aronovich et al. 2010); it is available on the project’s website.

Using metrics like these, public health logistics performance can be measured against international standards, including the World Health Organization (WHO) (WHO Expert Committee 2006), or private sector standards, such as International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The operational process review can also occur through customer feedback or assessments conducted by outside consultants. A skills assessment of staff should be done to understand the knowledge base and the capacity currently available.

After the core competency and the process review are complete, the areas to be outsourced should be clear.

3. Feasibility analysis—Determine which outsourcing options are politically and operationally feasible. Having identified certain processes as potential candidates for outsourcing, the stakeholder team will need to assess the political feasibility of outsourcing government operations to a private third party. After the team has determined that there are no political barriers to outsourcing, they should find out if there are any operational barriers, such as the availability of 3PLs that could carry out the tasks the MOH wants to outsource. This should include a frank discussion and cooperation between MOH and MOF stakeholders about how to secure funding and whether to use the MOH’s capital, loans, or donor funding. It is essential that they discuss if and when the initiative could become self-sufficient.

Cost-Benefit Analysis—Financial Considerations After a not-for-profit organization determines that outsourcing a particular function would make operational sense, it must assess the potential financial implications of doing so. A cost-benefit analysis enables the organization to compare the costs and benefits of providing the services in­ house to the costs and benefits of outsourcing the same services or functions.

When conducting a cost-benefit analysis, the following points are important to keep in mind:

 The cost comparison should include additional measurements beyond the direct costs of vehicles, fuel, warehouse space, and staff; these costs need to be compared to the cost that would be paid for the 3PL to assume these functions.

 For product availability, depending on the circumstances, and especially in the public sector, it may be worthwhile to pay higher operating costs while improving performance. If the overall cost of operations goes up by 10 percent, but the service levels improve by 30 percent, the MOH will need to decide if its service priorities allow this cost increase.

 Also, it is important to consider the longer-term benefits if future maintenance or upgrade costs are averted. Such trade-offs should be carefully analyzed in any comparison of the value of outsourcing versus maintaining functions in-house.

 Further, use of a 3PL may provide greater flexibility for adjusting to changes in demand or number of supplies managed. This increased flexibility may not generate a measureable, monetary benefit, but it can improve performance, regardless.

19

Therefore, an organization must gather detailed information on costs and processes necessary to quantify many of these elements. This requires information about the entire system, the location of cost information, and, finally, access to the information.

The following section lists each of the components of a cost-benefit analysis to determine the financial implication of logistics outsourcing. Each component includes examples of cost figures that should be accounted for in the analysis. To obtain these figures, the stakeholder group can use accounting costs, costs allocated based on relative amount of activity, and validated assumptions or estimates. For example, if an essential medicines program uses 60 percent of a warehouse and they want to know the warehousing costs, they could consider the entire amount spent on warehousing—space, utilities, depreciation, maintenance, and labor—and determine 60 percent of that to represent the amount consumed by the essential medicines program.

A. Existing operation Determine the current costs associated with the function under consideration for outsourcing (see table 1).

Table 1. Category and Examples of Costs

Category of Costs Examples of Costs to Include

Employee and administrative  Salaries  Pensions  Health care  Training  Other benefits.

Equipment  Operations (fuel, insurance)  Maintenance  Replacement.

Buildings  Operations costs (electricity, communications, facilities)

 Maintenance  Security (guards and systems).

Cost of inventory*

*if considering outsourcing inventory management

 Purchase value of expired stock  Purchase value of excess stock  Purchase value of unusable or obsolete stock.

These types of cost data can be collected using the project’s supply chain costing tool (USAID | DELIVER PROJECT Forthcoming), an Excel-based template for capturing and analyzing supply chain costs by tier (level), function, and facility. Another useful tool for determining what to measure when estimating costs of current transportation systems is Guidelines for Assessing Costs in a Logistics System: An Example of Transport Cost Analysis (Abdallah 2004), which is available on the project’s website.

While the information on operating costs of the current system are critical inputs, it is important to acknowledge that if the current system is underperforming, and the objective of outsourcing is to

20

improve service delivery, the cost of what it would take to meet a higher level of performance must also be part of the evaluation. Therefore, it is necessary to cost, or at least develop a reasonable estimate, of the costs that would be incurred to improve the current system (see table 2).

B. Upgrade costs

Table 2. Category and Examples of Costs to Upgrade

Category of Costs Examples of Costs to Include

Benchmarking operation  Consultancy cost.

Improving personnel skills  Training costs o trainer’s time o cost of lost staff time while in training.

 Recruitment costs o job specification development o advertising o interviewing.

Improving infrastructure  Buildings o warehouses o garages o offices.

 Equipment o computers o materials handling equipment o racking o vehicles and spare parts o vehicle repair equipment.

 Systems o financial o logistical o vehicle tracking.

 Personnel turnover o losing/gaining people and associated

training.

The sum of the actual costs (A), plus estimated upgrade costs (B), can then be compared to documented and estimated costs of outsourcing, outlined in the section C (see table 3). This information may be difficult to estimate, but it is important to be as realistic as possible. It may be possible to obtain input estimates from a private sector company working in another sector with similar equipment, infrastructure, and systems costs. They may not be able to share their actual costs but they may be able to gauge whether a set of estimates is reasonable, in a given context.

21

C. Outsourced operation  Cost of tendering

The process of requesting cost estimates from potential outsourcing partners and evaluating their ability to perform the task will require administrative time. The contract manager should participate in this process.

 Cost of contract management

This will include paying people to monitor the contract, which can be very time consuming. They may need to monitor the quality of work during visits, including travel costs, or by phone or email. Expect to closely monitor organizations with less experience.

 Third party costs for services required

The third party cost estimate will probably be the largest percentage of costs incurred when outsourcing. Verify that their estimates are realistic to prevent disputes if they do not follow through on their proposal.

 Cost of providing some infrastructure

Depending on the outsourcing contract, both buildings and vehicles may need to be provided to the third party.

 Contingency for poor performance

What is the back-up plan if the service provider does not perform well? Keeping a contingency plan may cost money, but it is essential to ensure high levels of service.

 Retrenchment costs (if current operation is scaled back)

Outsourcing may be politically unpopular as it may require downsizing the part of the system that is currently performing that function. Laying off workers may lead to low morale among those who remain, fearful that their jobs are also at risk. Depending on local and organizational labor laws, redundancy pay may be required to compensate employees who have been downsized. Although this is not desired, the risk of sabotage from disgruntled employees may need to be factored into scale-back costs, as well.

Any organizational change will lead to a drop in productivity levels during the transition period, which will vary in length, depending on the size of the change. In a cost-benefit analysis, the loss of productivity may also need to be considered.

 Cost of capital

Because the life of a project normally spans a specific length of time, it is important to evaluate the costs over the entire relevant project period and to account for any risk. This time frame and risk add an additional component to the equation: the cost of capital. The cost of capital is equal to the next best use of the organization’s resources (the opportunity cost or risk of the investment). As a general rule, the cost of capital is equal to the return that an investment could have earned elsewhere (by investing in another project or by investing in the financial markets), or the rate of the return that the organization has earned on similar projects. Essentially, the cost of capital is a measurement of risk; the higher the risk, the greater the cost of capital.

22

Table 3. Cost Comparison Sample Worksheet

Current costs (A)

Cost to upgrade (B) Cost to outsource (C) Potential savings/increased cost from outsourcing

Total = A + B Total = C Difference = C – (A+B)

The cost-benefit analysis can take many forms, but in a private sector environment where profit guides the decisionmaking process, it is often distilled to a mathematical equation such as net present value (NPV); if the equation is positive, the organization pursues the opportunity; if it is negative, the organization abandons the project. In its simplest form, an analyst identifies each and every relevant cost of a decision, including non-monetary costs, which are given a value based on an economic estimation. These costs are then added together and compared against the expected benefits (cost savings, profit, increased quality, etc.). This analysis should yield the information necessary to make a decision about whether outsourcing would either decrease costs or be a reasonable expansion of costs, given what it would take to match capacity with internal resources.

D. Non-quantifiable benefits for a public organization that decides to outsource

Not all the benefits are monetary or quantifiable and they may require a different type of estimation. For example, it is often difficult to put a dollar value on increased quality because the provider may be unsure about how consumers will receive it. There are many such benefits to outsourcing that do not fit the cost-benefit equation, but they should still be considered when making an outsourcing decision. These include the following examples: 1. Using public money in an effective manner  Public perception that government is getting

value for money

2. Improving the services to the public  Seen to be socially focused

3. High performance leading to positive customer feedback  Improved team morale

4. Osmosis of skill sets from private to public sector  Work force increases skills

Based on the country priorities and reasons for outsourcing, these non-quantifiable benefits (D) will have to factor into the calculations with A, B, and C in table 3; but how they vary will be on a case- by-case basis.

23

What are some reasons to consider outsourcing?  Reduce costs.  Focus on core expertise.  Maximize use of shared resources and infrastructure  Improve service levels.  Increase flexibility to deal with ever-changing business conditions.  Improve access to products, services, and emerging technologies.  Assign operational issues to an outside expert.  Use the expertise of other organizations.  Compensate for lack of expertise or capacity internally.  Improve credibility and image by associating with superior providers.  Improve operating performance, quality, timeliness, and productivity.

Case Example: Country X Considers Potential Distribution Outsourcing An MOH in a sub-Saharan African country decided to improve its services by increasing the availability of medical products at public health facilities; they decided that outsourcing might be a possible route to that improvement.

Following the steps outlined above, the MOH first formed a permanent stakeholder group that was to decide whether or not to outsource some of its operations. The stakeholder group laid out all its activities related to the support of health services. They determined that developing treatment guidelines, selecting products, and ensuring quality were within its core competencies, but physical transportation to service delivery points was not. Conducting an operational process review, the group also found that its transport operations suffered from low performance; vehicles were frequently unavailable for delivery because of maintenance and scheduling problems.

While stakeholders agreed that laying off the current transport personnel was politically undesirable, they decided they could condense current operations to improve performance and, simultaneously, take advantage of locally available transport firms to serve unmet need. Additionally, the stakeholder group found that the use of a 3PL for transport could enable the MOH to deal with variable demand more efficiently—3PLs would have better short-term capacity to handle seasonal or emergency distribution of products. From this analysis, the MOH decided that outsourcing transport operations was both politically and operationally desirable.

Using only internal resources, the stakeholder group then conducted a cost-benefit analysis to determine the financial implications of outsourcing compared to performance improvement. Using the Supply Chain Costing Tool: User Manual (USAID | DELIVER PROJECT Forthcoming), they found that current transport costs to service delivery points (A) cost the MOH $55,000 per year. The estimated cost to improve service internally (B) was $100,000 in the first year for new equipment and training, and $40,000 per year after the first year to increase capacity and manage the process. The MOH then asked local transport services for bid estimates for regular transport. Specifically, the MOH looked for companies that owned their own vehicles, employed safety and security measures, charged per cubic meter or kilogram, and were able to respond to short-term and long-term transport requests from the MOH. The lowest cost response that met these needs had an annual cost of $50,000–$55,000, depending on the MOH’s final requirements. Table 4 shows the final cost-benefit comparison.

24

Table 4. Final Cost-Benefit Comparison

Keep In-House Outsource Comparison

Total current cost (A)

$55,000/year

Total current cost (A) (would not be eliminated, but condensed, which reduces the total current costs, and includes contract management) $40,000

Total difference

Cost to upgrade (B)

$100,000 first year only

$40,000/year

Cost to outsource (C)

$50,000 to $55,000/year

Total

$155,000 first year only

$95,000/year after

$90,000 to $95,000/year

$90,000 to $95,000/year

$65,000 to $60,000 savings

0 to $5,000 savings/year

By conducting the cost-benefit analysis, the stakeholder group agreed to contract transport services from the 3PL identified during the bid process. While they realized that other than then first year saving, the lifetime costs of outsourcing were almost the same as internal improvement, the group agreed that the non-quantifiable benefits (D), which is the ability to see improvements sooner and the ability to efficiently handle short-term changes, made outsourcing the more desirable option.

This process will identify a function or activity that makes strategic and financial sense to outsource and has the support of internal stakeholders.

Summary of Outsourcing Decision Process

The organization recognizes the need for improvement or expansion in operations. The organization forms a group of internal stakeholders to investigate the potential for outsourcing to a third party as a way to achieve this. The stakeholder group conducts the following two phases:

Deliberation—does outsourcing a particular function make strategic and operational sense?

 Identify core competency—Of all the organization’s processes, which are the core competencies? Core competencies should probably not be outsourced.

 Process review—Of all the organization’s process, which are under-performing? Those that are not core competencies and are under-performing are good candidates for outsourcing.

 Feasibility analysis—Are all involved stakeholders supportive of possible outsourcing? Are potential third parties available that can perform the work?

Cost-benefit analysis—Does outsourcing make financial sense? For the outsource-able function, collect and compare:  current cost of performing function internally  cost of improving or expanding performance internally  cost of outsourcing.

25

Other Potential Analysis Frameworks In addition to the cost-benefit analysis, several other analysis frameworks can be used to inform business decisionmaking. Two decision analysis frameworks, that include nonmonetary costs and benefits, may be particularly appropriate for decisionmaking. The first, the PrOACT model, is best defined by the letters in the name—problem, objective, alternatives, consequences, and tradeoffs. Working through this model for decisionmaking involves using five steps to help rationalize difficult decisions: (1) defining the problem, (2) considering an exhaustive list of objectives, (3) identifying alternatives, (4) understanding the consequences (of each alternative), and (5) addressing and evaluating tradeoffs.

The second framework is the analytic hierarchy process (AHP), a structured technique for working through complex decisions. Instead of providing an analysis that leads to a correct decision, the AHP helps decisionmakers find the solution that best meets their needs, given an understanding of their defined problem. In the AHP process, the first step is to deconstruct the decision problem into a hierarchy of more easily understood sub-problems, each of which can be analyzed independently. The elements of the hierarchy can relate to any aspect of the decision problem—tangible or intangible, carefully measured or roughly estimated, well- or poorly-understood—any information or criteria that relates to the decision.

After the hierarchy of criteria is developed, the next step is for the decisionmakers to systematically evaluate its various elements by comparing them in pairs. When making comparisons, the decisionmakers can use actual data about the elements, or they can judge the elements' relative significance or importance to the decision. One benefit of the AHP is that human judgment, not just the underlying information, can be used for the evaluations. For this reason, the AHP model is often cited as appropriate to making public sector capital budgeting decisions.

Additional resources can provide other information about these frameworks. A select few are listed below, but an Internet search will yield many results (Bhushan 2004 and Saaty 1980). If internal capacity is not available to do this kind of analysis, an outside consultant can guide an objective analysis of the situation.

Key considerations when deciding to outsource  Is the function non-essential to the organization? Does it add value?  What are the processes where the need for change is greatest?  Are there work processes in which change is already taking place?  Which work processes have a high chance of success/ease of implementation?  Which work process, if improved, will transform the organization?  Which work processes are separable and can be decoupled to improve performance?

26

How?—Implementation Roadmap

To ensure a smooth transition to outsourcing, if that decision is made during the decisionmaking process, all the stakeholders need to plan and agree on an implementation process.

Each project will be unique, but the high-level aspects will be very similar. Appendix B provides a sample implementation plan. This plan, which is based on actual experience, shows the analysis and selection phases taking up to ten months; however, it could take more or less time. Outsourcing is not a quick fix; this process requires careful planning and strong leadership. Government and MOH personnel must be patient with this activity. The spreadsheet in appendix B highlights the key elements of the transition process to outsourcing.

Beginning with the initial decision to outsource or not (described in the previous chapter), the following stages show how to develop a project plan to guide the outsourcing process (see figure 3).

Figure 3. Process for Outsourcing Decisionmaking

Stage 1. Project Team and Activity Formation First, form a cross-functional team of stakeholders and key decisionmakers (many were probably involved in the decision to outsource). Ideally, the leader should be either the Minister of Health or the Permanent Secretary, and departmental heads should be part of the team, including the manager of the CMS and other key stakeholders. The team must commit to meeting regularly, based on the size of the undertaking, to ensure key activities are met and problems are averted.

Second, set objectives that are in line with the MOH’s own mission to ensure that the right service(s) are outsourced with the right objectives—they should be part of the deliberation process. Also, determine the desired outcome from outsourcing. To be meaningful, the impact of outsourcing must be measured and evaluated; key parameters for performance should be established at the outset, including—  improved order fill rate

27

 reduced stockouts

 increased customer satisfaction

 reduced warehouse space required

 reduced product expiries.

Be sure to address issues related to financing and payment of contracting expenses. Government operations may face restrictions from the ministries of finance on their options for budgeting or paying 3PLs, which may hinder relations with potential contractors. Therefore, someone familiar with financing and contracting options should be part of this project team. Address and identify an on-going funding stream and payment terms that will be attractive to private sector companies; discuss them openly during negotiations with potential 3PLs.

Stage 2. 3PL Recruitment To recruit a 3PL, it will be necessary to thoroughly understand all country procedures and regulations regarding contracting with vendors. Laws may dictate how the recruitment and contracting process must be conducted, and it will be important to ensure that these procedures are followed.

In general, the first step is to develop a list of potential candidates by determining what local or international companies may be able to provide the services that will be outsourced. This will depend on the skill base and capacity in a given country or setting. Many large international logistics organizations have partners/agents in many countries, so trade directories may be useful. Alternative sources may come from recommendations and, if needed, a press release asking for expressions of interest from 3PLs. The output should be a list of possible companies, including contact names and telephone numbers.

Next, contact the list of candidates to explore their interest in acting as a 3PL. Most of the time, for formal requests, a telephone conversation is sufficient to screen companies and reduce the list to a manageable size. The screening process should determine if candidates have the required experience, whether they have or could develop resources in the right locations, whether they would be interested in tendering for the work, and, if so, the contact address for the invitations to tender. This step should eliminate businesses that do not have the capacity or are not interested in this type of business. The final list of companies can be contacted with an invitation to tender (ITT).

RFPs or ITTs are typically done through an international bid process. However, some countries have a legal framework within which they perform tenders. The ITT to potential contractors should include—

 introduction and scope of work

 description of agency or organization

 explanation of the origins of the ITT and strategic goals

 business requirements for work to be done

 logistics standards

 performance measures

28

 outline of contractual terms

 operator information

 outline of acceptable fee structure

 definition of needed format for quotations

 date of final response for the ITT.

The ITT should also include any information that will assist the contractor with estimates for fees and quotations. Give the potential contractors the opportunity to ask questions and give all bidders access to the responses. They can be coordinated in several ways—by offering a short visit to the current operations, aggregating all questions and answers and circulating to all bidders, or providing a supplementary data pack with additional information, based on questions or requests.

After the bids are submitted, analyze and evaluate them. To help in the selection, compare and rank criteria—operational fit, costs/prices quoted, technical expertise, information management capabilities, and management structure. Consider visiting the prospective providers’ facilities; this is critical to see if potential contractors have the management capacity and physical resources to meet the objectives of the operations to be outsourced. Also, review the qualifications of all members of the potential 3PL team who will be working on the outsourcing project. To further evaluate how well they perform, talk to previous and existing clients and visit operations they currently service or manage. This will show their management style and how well the team is able to manage operations and/or solve problems.

After evaluating and ranking bidders, if multiple candidates remain, create a short list of preferred candidates. To select the best option, gather more information on the financial status of the company, meet and interview key staff, review the benefits they offer, and the pricing structure.

The final step in selecting a 3PL is the preparation and signature of a formal contract and designation of roles and responsibilities within the terms of the contract.

29

Why organizations are reluctant to outsource (Patel 2005)  Cost.  Lack of management support.  Cultural differences.  Confidentiality.  Concerns about level of service.  Perceived loss of control.  Loss of internal expertise.  Personnel issues.

Major reasons why outsourcing fails (Barthélemy 2003)  Poor management of the outsourced relationship.  Making the wrong choices about what to outsource.  Choosing the wrong vendor.  Drafting an inappropriate or unrealistic contract.  Overlooking potential personnel issues.

Stage 3. Service-level Agreement During contract negotiations, it is important to have a service level agreement (SLA) that is performance-oriented, yet realistic within the context. It would be discouraging for all parties if a clause was included in a distribution contract mandating that all orders be delivered within 24 hours if it takes 36 hours to reach some of the health facilities. Also, while electronic reports may be preferable, allowances may need to be made in areas where communications are challenging. The agreement must be fair and equitable, with allowances for conflict resolution, so that each party can perform well, but allow for resolving problems.

Contracting companies should also have standard operating procedures (SOPs) that clearly define the operational activities to be performed between the customer and the 3PL, and also state how they will be performed. These should be outlined in the contract or as an addendum. The SOP is, however, a live document. To ensure that all parties understand the details of the agreement, it should be updated whenever a change occurs in the process.

Next, develop and agree on KPIs, which are linked to the overall objective of outsourcing, as discussed in stage 1. Additional measures could be added, depending on the service to outsource, including—

 delivery times

 condition of vehicles

 agreed-upon reporting protocols

 order processing rates

 accuracy of orders being processed.

KPIs should be measurable, time limited, and realistically attainable. They are the contractor’s insurance to ensure that their outsourcing partner performs as expected. The SLA should state clearly what the implications are for not performing according to the KPIs. This process ensures

30

accountability for both partners. As mentioned earlier, the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT has published a list of suggested metrics for logistics systems (Aronovich et al. 2010), which is available on the project’s website.

Many resources are available on contracts. Recommended reading includes Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers (JSI 2004). While this guide provides guidance on contracting health service delivery, rather than logistics functions, the contracting sections are useful for both. Appendix A includes excerpts on the suggested contract template and format. Another good resource for the contracting process is How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services (Slater 1998) and The Handbook of Logistics Contracts (Jané and de Ochoa 2006). Additional resources are listed in the references section.

Transitioning from in-house to outsourcing may be challenging. After an organization decides to outsource some of its operation, the old way and new way will co-exist for awhile. As part of this, it is critical to have a change management strategy for the operations of both organizations. It is important to ensure that all staff understand the reasons for outsourcing and how it will affect them. Organizational change can lower employee morale and performance as people are unsure how their job will change, or whether it will be eliminated. Good communication about changes can help mitigate this anxiety. The best route is to include all workers at the beginning of the process so at- risk parts of the operation can be highlighted and a contingency plan established.

It will be important to allay fears by confirming the continuation of employees, if that is the case, or to alert them to any potential changes in their responsibilities. Conversely, if jobs are going to be eliminated, a business continuity plan should be developed in case of service interruption during the transition. For instance, if transportation is going to be outsourced, drivers may lose their jobs. To reduce the incidence of theft, damage, or poor service, the 3PL may bring in drivers to drive government vehicles before the SLA is in place.

One of the biggest changes for the program managers is in their role of contract management. Managing a 3PL relationship may require additional training or capacity building to ensure that staff that once directly managed a warehouse or scheduled transport are now equipped to manage a 3PL relationship and to ensure that operations are running smoothly and customers’ needs are being met. It will be a shift toward oversight that includes checking, approving, and processing invoices; information management; and making sure that service levels are met (quality monitoring).

The key areas to focus on are—

 reports based on agreed KPIs

 regular meetings with 3PL to highlight issues or praise good service

 financial oversight

 conflict management

 relationship building.

This job is critical to the success of any outsourcing agreement and, therefore, the contract manager must be a senior government official with project management experience, with support and authority; who, ideally, reports directly to the minister or permanent secretary.

31

 Financial

 Formalize terms of payment and ensure that these are acceptable and reasonable for both parties.

 Establish strong links with the outsourcing partner to develop trust so that they can give favorable payment terms or even discounts for additional work.

Stage 4. Monitoring and Evaluation

Life after the Contract Using the KPIs and objectives of outsourcing, it will be important to assess outsourced functions and contractors to determine if the anticipated benefits were achieved. Depending on the length of the contract, it will be important to conduct a periodic reassessment to ensure that both parties are following their contract. It is especially important to assess the quality of service of an outsourcing partner when the contract is due for rebid or expansion.

These steps, with strong senior management buy-in and vigilant project management, will foster a strong partnership, ensure that objectives are met, and improve the likelihood that both parties will consider the experience mutually beneficial. Further information is available from many sources (Inbound Logistics 2010.)

32

Conclusion

Experience from both the private and public sector’s work with 3PLs and suppliers have generated some useful lessons that are broadly applicable to organizations considering outsourcing some of their logistics functions or working closer with suppliers to improve inventory management.

 The policy environment can affect the government’s flexibility to collaborate with service providers and suppliers.

Policies governing financial mechanisms available to MOH procurement units may inhibit contracting options and opportunities for supplier collaboration between the government and private companies. A service provider or supplier is less likely to make special efforts to accommodate a client’s needs if it will only result in a short-term or one-time contract with no guarantee of future business. Framework contracts or framework international competitive bidding (ICB) contracts may be a favorable contract arrangement for purchaser and supplier, resulting in preferential pricing over a longer-term contract agreement. However, the existing MOF and donor policies might also limit the potential use of these and other types of contracts. Efforts should be made to work with policymakers to ensure that the environment is conducive to healthy competition, yet flexible enough to take advantage of relationships that improve service levels and reduce costs.

 After the decision is made to outsource an activity, the client must develop a thoughtful management plan to implement the proposed changes.

Managing the transition process is a big part of a successful outsourcing initiative. The client needs to invest a significant amount of time and willingness to integrate the 3PL, as the arm of existing services, to ensure that service delivery is seamless for the customer. The 3PL will represent your organization; therefore, they must be able to operate as part of your organization and have the resources and relationships to do this well. This will not happen without a significant amount of communication, training, and resource planning involving both the client and the 3PL from the outset of the relationship.

One way to mitigate issues that arise during a transition is to have a change management plan and a strong project management team to manage the process and ensure that key stakeholders from all involved partners and organizations understand the process and can help oversee the progress and ensure that the transition occurs smoothly.

 Selection of a reputable and respected 3PL with adequate capacity for the task is essential to success.

Part of the initial evaluation of the use of 3PL providers needs to include careful ‘due diligence’ of any prospective partner. A major concern is the financial and operational health of the prospective service provider—how confident are you that the company will not go out of business or become bankrupt during your service contract? Do they have significant capital available to invest in and support their existing infrastructure and expand as needed? Some risk is expected in any business you work with and the business may cease functioning for a variety of reasons—from risky investments made by their management, to natural disasters, to mismanagement. After you have

33

decided to outsource particular services, your role in selecting a 3PL is making sure that the company is reliable and the risk is mitigated as much as possible.

An established company should provide proof of their level of management and experience in an area. The 3PLs should provide references from existing clients that show a clear record of consistent, on-time services; clean financial and legal documents; and good driving records for anyone involved with transporting products.

 A strong contract and contract management plan must be in place to ensure the successful transition to outsourcing and to define roles and responsibilities.

A contract is a useful tool for both parties in defining what the roles and responsibilities are and the expectations of both client and service provider. If well written, the contract should explain who does what, who is held accountable, and how both parties can determine if what has been done was done well.

The contract is what the MOH can use to ensure that the supplier/manufacturer does what is expected. It states performance measures, and, if those measures are monitored, the contract manager can hold the supplier to the expectation stated in the contract.

The process of managing a contract requires a different core competency than doing the work. Rather than planning delivery routes, allocating resources, and coordinating transaction paperwork, a program manager in the MOH or logistics management unit (LMU) monitors performance by collecting information on these performance measures. They may facilitate communications between the contracted supplier and the warehouses or service delivery points with whom they will be collaborating.

Furthermore, either as a government entity or through the 3PL, a business continuity plan should spell out the consequences if some level of the system fails. While not necessarily the responsibility of the 3PL, it is important to know if they have a contingency plan should something disrupt their ability to provide service (i.e., if they are providing distribution services and all of their drivers go on strike).

 Clear performance measures are the foundation for a successful partnership.

The ability to define the desired quality and service levels during the 3PL selection process and in the contract will make the entire process easier. It is important to clearly define the scope and parameters of responsibilities and required logistics services. Even before meeting with potential partners, it would be a good idea to outline performance metrics, including KPIs and desired contractual terms. Expectations and business objectives should be clearly defined and documented. Eventually, after the needs and desired functions of the 3PL are identified, an ITT will need to be developed to start soliciting bids from potential 3PLs. The performance indicators will then go into the contract to ensure that the client is able to determine if the 3PL is or is not providing quality service.

A variety of resources suggest appropriate performance measures for supply chains. The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT lists them in A Guide to Key Performance Indicators for Public Health Managers (Aronovich et al. 2010) and How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services (Slater 1998). The publications are good examples of the contents of an ITT.

34

 Communications must be open and frequent and both parties must be committed to the success of the relationship.

In the private sector in the United States and Europe, communication is cited as one of the most difficult barriers to effective business partnerships and supply chain collaboration. Governments may not be accustomed to managing a contract or providing feedback on performance to a vendor as a way to improve the quality of service. Conversely, 3PLs may not understand the constraints that governments must work with in their operations. Open and on-going communication about needs and expectations can provide opportunities to address these issues and improve the overall system quality.

Outsourcing is an important option to consider for public sector health systems struggling with maintaining high service delivery standards in the middle of growing supply chain demands. Third party service providers can potentially provide a way for governments (MOHs) to maximize limited resources for product management and distribution by harnessing the expertise and resources of the private sector, including advanced information technology, economies of scale, service specialization, and profit incentives generally not available to the public sector supply chain managers.

However, it is important to remember that while outsourcing can significantly reduce the number of functions that a government has to provide for its public sector health system, it is not a perfect solution. Managing a contract is usually challenging, especially for a key function with a complex network—outsourced public health supply chain functions often are. It may require fewer resources than doing the same job in–house, but it will require different types of management, oversight, and funding. Furthermore, it may not be a feasible option if restrictions on contracting, funding, or the decision faces political opposition because of lost jobs. However, if these obstacles do not exist or can be overcome, government systems may benefit from the enhanced capacity and specialization of 3PLs by outsourcing specific functions to the private sector.

The decision to outsource must be made after careful consideration of the potential benefits and risks and with a clear understanding of the expected results from an outsourcing contract; this will help ensure that the process will have a favorable outcome. There is no right answer, but using this guide should help managers and policymakers determine what might be possible and feasible within a given context and to increase the capacity to work with an increasing number of demands on supply chains for public sector health systems.

35

36

References

Abdallah, Hany. 2004. Guidelines for Assessing Costs in a Logistics System: An Example of Transport Cost Analysis. Arlington, Va.: John Snow, Inc./DELIVER, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Abramson, Wendy B. 2004. Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers. Arlington, Va.: John Snow, Inc./DELIVER. Available at http://www.jsi.com/Managed/Docs/Publications/ContractingPrimerManual.pdf

Aronovich, Dana, Marie Tien, Ethan Collins, Adriano Sommerlatte, and Linda Allain. 2010. Measuring Supply Chain Performance: A Guide to Key Performance Indicators for Public Health Managers. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

A.T. Kearny. 2004. Improving the Medicine Supply Chain: An Imperative for Public Health Care. Accessed May 25, 2010 at http://www.mbadepot.com/external_link.php?ID=3850&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.atkearne y.com%2Fshared_res%2Fpdf%2FMedicines_Monograph_S.pdf

Barthélemy, J. 2003. The seven deadly sins of outsourcing, Academy of Management Executive, Briarcliff Manor, NY. Vol. 17. No. 2 p. 87–98.

Bhushan, Navneet, and Kanwal Rai. 2004. Strategic Decision Making: Applying the Analytic Hierarchy Process. London: Springer-Verlag.

Boyson, S., T. Corsi, and E. Rabinovich. 1999. “Managing effective third party logistics relationships: what does it take?” Journal of Business Logistics, Vol. 20 No. 1, p.73–100. Accessed May 3, 2010 at http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_qa3705/is_199901/ai_n8845573/

DELIVER. 2007. DELIVER: Final Project Report. Arlington, Va.: DELIVER, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Family Planning Logistics Management/John Snow, Inc. 2000. Programs That Deliver: Logistics’ Contributions to Better Health in Developing Countries. Arlington, Va.: Family Planning Logistics Management/John Snow, Inc., for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Global Health Council. 2009. Global Health Council Field Note: “Harnessing the Magic of the Market Place for Public Health: A Public-Private Partnership in the Democratic Republic of the Congo that Delivers.” Accessed July 21, 2009 at: http://www.globalhealth.org/reports/report.php3?id=273.

Inbound Logistics. Kicking Off a 3PL Relationship. Volume 29 No. 7, p. 128. Accessed May 14, 2010 at http://www.inboundlogistics.com/digital/issues/il_digital_july2009.pdf

International Finance Committee, World Bank Group. 2007. The Business of Health in Africa: Partnering with the Private Sector to Improve People’s Lives. Accessed February 20, 2009 at http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/healthinafrica.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/IFC_HealthinAfrica_Final/$ FILE/IFC_HealthinAfrica_Final.pdf.

37

Jané, Joan, and Alfonso de Ohcoa. 2006. The Handbook of Logistics Contracts. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

John Snow, Inc. 2004. Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers. Boston, Mass.: John Snow, Inc.

Langley, C. John Jr., and U.S. Capgemini LLC. 2008. The State of Logistics Outsourcing: 2008. Third- Party Logistics. Accessed May 25, 2010 at: http://www.us.capgemini.com/DownloadLibrary/files/factsheets/Capgemini_3PL_study_Hig hTech_FS0209.pdf

Loevinsohn, Benjamin. 2008. Performance-Based Contracting for Health Services in Developing Countries: A Toolkit. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank. Accessed May 20, 2010 at: http://siteresources.worldbank.org/INTHSD/Resources/topics/415176­ 1216235459918/ContractingEbook.pdf

Nikolic, Irina, and Harald Maikisch. 2006. Public-Private Partnerships and Collaboration in the Health Sector: An Overview with Case Studies from Recent European Experience. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank. Accessed May 14, 2010 at: http://info.worldbank.org/etools/docs/library/240103/PUBLIC~2.PDF

Patel, A., and H. Aran. 2005. Outsourcing Success: The Management Imperative. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

Pearson, Paul. 1997. A Comparative Study on Transportation Models: Directorate of Family Planning Managed Transport and Private Carrier. Alexandria, Va.: Paul O. Pearson, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Saaty, Thomas L. 1980. The Analytical Hierarchy Process. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Sarafinchan, Warren. 2008. Governance Practices in Logistics Outsourcing. Logistics Quarterly, Volume 14, Issue 4. Toronto, Canada: Logistics Quarterly.

Slater, Alan. 1998. How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services. Altrincham, UK: Added Value Logistics Publications Limited.

The Rockefeller Foundation, Dalberg, and MIT-Zaragoza. 2008. Private Sector Role in Health Supply Chains, Final Report. New York: The Rockefeller Foundation.

Thomas, Ann, and Valerie Curtis. 2003. Public-Private Partnerships for Health: A Review of Best Practices in Health Sector. World Bank. Accessed May 15, 2010 at: http://sulabhenvis.in/admin/upload/pdf_upload/WSP_PPP_15_10.pdf

U.S. Agency for International Development. 2006. Assessment of the USAID/Bangladesh Component of DELIVER Project: A Success to Build On. Bangladesh: USAID Mission, Bangladesh, Office of Population, Health, and Nutrition.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1. Forthcoming. Supply Chain Costing Tool: User Manual. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Versi, Anver. 2007. The Science and Art of Logistics in Africa. African Business, July. Accessed March 2, 2010 at: http://www.africasia.com/africanbusiness/ab.php?ID=1380&back_month=71

38

WHO Expert Committee on Specifications for Pharmaceutical Preparations. World Health Organization. 2006. WHO Technical Report Series, no. 937, 2006; Accessed May 14, 2010 at http://whqlibdoc.who.int/trs/WHO_TRS_937_eng.pdf

Interview Sources for Outsourcing Examples

Shyam Lama. Senior Program Manager, USAID | DELIVER PROJECT.

39

40

Appendix A

Typical Contract Format

1. Front page: Title of a contract, contracting parties, date when contract becomes effective.

2. Background: Purpose and objectives of the contract and parties involved.

3. Authorized persons and signatures: The contract is signed by a legal representative from each party and it is dated.

4. Contract period: Time period covered by the contract and the arrangements for contract renewal.

5. Terms of reference and service specification: The general scope of work under the contract, including service delivery objectives, definitions of services (what), volume of services (how many), target populations (to whom), and geographic locations (where).

6. Performance of specification: Definition of performance, performance targets, methods of performance measurements, and links to payment.

7. Payment methods: Specification of how, how much, and when the providers are paid.

8. Monitoring and Evaluation (M&E): Data collection and recordkeeping requirements, forms, and schedules/periodicity with specification as to use of possible third party evaluators.

9. Variations to the agreement: The procedure for making variations, normally in writing and mutually agreed.

10. Best endeavors: Both parties have a duty to resolve matters without arbitration, if possible.

11. Arbitration: Who the arbitrator will be and how he/she will be appointed.

12. Statutory regulations: Statement that both parties must be acquainted with and act in accordance with all relevant legislation and national policy.

13. Other items: Conflict of interest, confidentiality, patent, etc.

41

42

Appendix B

Sample Implementation Plan

If activity is complete, mark status with green infill OUTSOURCING MOH SUPPLY CHAIN OPERATIONS IMPLEMENTATION PLAN

Key

Planned

Completed

Outstanding

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1 Form a Cross Functional Team

1.1 Indentify key stakeholders MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.2 Define roles and identify strong project leader MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.3 Prepare a mandate for operations MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.4 Plan regular team meetings MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.5

Develop a reporting process to inform all stakeholders of progress MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.6 Team commits to project and makes it priority MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.7 Develop clear deliverables and dates for actions MOH Month 0 Month 1

2 Set Objectives

2.1 Team defines clear objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

2.2 Success criteria defined to ensure right result is received MOH Month 1 Month 1

43

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

2.3

Ensure that each team member has ownership of specific tasks to achieve objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

2.4

Team determines desired outcome from outsourcing based on the objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

3 Complete Internal Assessment and Pareto Analysis

3.1 Complete cost benefit analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

3.2 Complete skills analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

3.3 Complete a service gap analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

4 Supplier Selection

4.1 Develop a list of potential candidates MOH Month 3 Month3

4.2 Explore interest among the candidates MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.3

If no original candidates interested look for other companies including outside the country MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.4 Develop full specifications for the services required MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.5

Develop an assessment matrix to facilitate easy selection; incorporate cost/service level/capacity/technical expertise/financial stability/geographical coverage MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.6 Instigate the tender process MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.7 Visit companies that have tendered for the business MOH Month 4 Month 6

4.8 Review their professional qualifications MOH Month 6 Month 6

4.9

Solicit feedback from existing or previous customers of the potential supplier MOH month 7 Month 7

4.1 0

Choose the best supplier to meet organization's objectives and that scores highest on assessment matrix MOH Month 8 Month 8

5 Service Level Agreement

5.1 Negotiate the final agreement with supplier MOH/Supplier Month 9 Month 9

5.2 Agree on the KPIs that will govern the agreement MOH/Supplier Month 9 Month 9

5.3 Appoint a contract manager to monitor performance MOH Month 9 Month 9

44

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

5.4

Ensure a plan is in place to make transition is as seamless as possible MOH Month 6

month 10

6 Service Level Agreement Management

6.1 Hold regular meetings with supplier to review performance MOH/Supplier

Month 11

Month 22

6.2

Senior management from both sides meet when needed to resolve issues MOH/Supplier

Month 11

Month 22

6.3

Where possible, have cross- organizational meetings, including customers, to ensure that objectives have been met

MOH/Supplier / Customer

Month 11

Month 22

7 Life after the SLA

7.1

Schedule regular internal reviews to ensure performance is to the agreed levels and objectives have been met MOH

Month 11

Month 22

7.2 If being met, continue/extend the contract MOH

Month 11

Month 22

7.3 If not being met, try to resolve with supplier or restart process MOH

month 22

Month 22

* This example is only illustrative; actual steps and timeline will vary by situation

* This example is only illustrative; actual steps and timeline will vary by situation.

45

46

For more information, please visit deliver.jsi.com.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT

John Snow, Inc.

1616 Fort Myer Drive, 11th Floor

Arlington, VA 22209 USA

Phone: 703-528-7474

Fax: 703-528-7480

Email: [email protected]

Internet: deliver.jsi.com

Article 10 .pdf

Emerging Technologies for

Supply Chain Management

Edited by

Loo Saw Khuan and Santhiram R. Raman

EDITORS Loo Saw Khuan and Santhiram R. Raman

COPY EDITOR Jeanne Chow

LAYOUT AND DESIGN Leong Yin Ling

© 2018 Wawasan Open University

ISBN: 978-983-3910-06-9 (ePub)

This publication is available in Open Access under the Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International (CC- BY-SA 4.0) license. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 444 Castro Street, Suite 900, Mountain View, California, 94041, USA.

PUBLISHED BY WOU Press, Wawasan Open University (KPT/JPT/DFT/US/P01) Wholly owned by Wawasan Open University Sdn. Bhd. (700364-W)

54, Jalan Sultan Ahmad Shah, 10050 Penang. Tel: (604) 2180333 Fax: (604) 2279214 Email: [email protected] Website: www.wou.edu.my

Professor Dr. Premkumar Rajagopal is one of Asia’s leading Strategic Planning and Supply Chain Trainer cum Researcher with more than 15 years of hands-on experience in an international business environment. He was the Supply Chain Manager for Intel Technology, Penang and was primarily responsible for designing and implementing business strategies relating to Intel’s global supply chain initiatives. He has wide management exposure in different areas of business, having held key management positions in logistics operations, inventory management, manufacturing integration and quality.

Dr. Shardul Phadnis is an Assistant Professor at Malaysia Institute for Supply Chain Innovation. Dr. Phadnis examines the design and adaptation of business models from the supply chain perspective. His research falls in the area of strategic decision making and long-range planning, and contributes to the scholarly domains of managerial cognition, dynamic capabilities, scenario planning and supply chain strategy. Some recent applications of his research include a long-range planning process for the U.S. freight transportation infrastructure, scenarios for formulating supply chain strategies for global convenience store and chemical firms, and a system for monitoring business environment and guiding adaptation of supply chain strategy of a global beverage firm. Dr. Phadnis holds a Ph.D. in Engineering Systems from Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). Before starting his doctoral studies, Dr. Phadnis worked in the manufacturing industry for seven years. He developed and led the Lean/Continuous Improvement program at a design-to- manufacture firm, and applied ideas from Lean Manufacturing and Theory of Constraints to make operational improvements in numerous projects.

Mr. Jason Tan Khee Kwong has degrees in MSc (Transports & Logistics), LLB, B. Com. (Accounting and Finance), CMILT and MLogM. A proud father of three young daughters, Jason is the Group Chief Operating Officer of the MTT Group of Companies, which is a group with core business in total logistics services, township and property development, education, information and software solutions, and business services and consultancy. He is also the Chief Executive Officer of the total logistics division, managing subsidiaries of the logistics division, having direct reporting from general managers and some managers of each subsidiary. Due to his passion in education, he is also the Secretary to the governing

Notes on Contributors

body of the Prince of Wales Island International School. Prior to joining the MTT Group, he was an Associate Lecturer in the University of Western Australia in the Faculty of Business. Believing in the significance of developing human capital, he is a Certified NLP Master Practitioner of American Board of NLP (ABNLP), a Certified Coaching and Mentoring Professional recognised by the International Coach Federation, as well as a certified trainer under the TTT Scheme of Pembangunan Sumber Manusia Berhad (PSMB). He is involved in several community services including being the Secretary General of The Society of Logisticians Malaysia since 2012, the Vice Chairman of The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (Penang Section) since 2014, the Secretary to the Penang Philharmonic management board since 2009, the Chairman of Kwang Hwa Primary School alumni and member of the Kwang Hwa Primary School governing board since 2013. He is passionate in orchestral music, teaching and learning, helping children, youth and adults in personal development and achieving breakthrough goals.

Ms. Annie Khor Seow Keow graduated from Northern Illinois University with a Bachelor of Science in Mathematics and Chemistry (magna cum laude) and a Master in Business Administration. Annie is the APAC cluster 4 and country Chief Information Officer for Schenker Logistics covering Malaysia, Indonesia and India. Annie has been with Schenker Logistics since 2007. Prior to joining Schenker, Annie was the General Manager for BAX Global Malaysia from 2001 to 2007. She is a versatile person with more than 28 years of experience in both technical and business areas, with over 15 years in the logistics industry. She has extensive experience in leading and managing IT as well as contract logistics. Annie is passionate about innovation and how it can contribute to improvements in the effectiveness and efficiency of an operation or company. She believes in practical applications and believes that people provide the competitive advantage while innovation assists.

Mr. Francis Seow Hai Swee is the CEO of Act Management, Inc. He is also the Chief Corporate Consultant and Senior Principal Facilitator with over 30 years of working experience in Supply Chain Management and has a good mix of different products and exposure in different organisations. He is a Certified Trainer for (HRDF) Human Resource Development Fund. Sony, Acer, Jabil, Philips and Intel are a few multinational organisations that have

benefited from his expertise. His vast experiences and knowledge in the Senior Management capacity has enabled him to train and develop various management staff to succeed in cost reduction, inventory reduction, waste reduction and logistics cost reduction.

Dr. Loo Saw Khuan graduated from Universiti Sains Malaysia with a Doctor of Philosophy (Purchasing and Supply Chain Management), Heriot-Watt University (U.K.) with a Master of Business Administration, and Universiti Sains Malaysia with a Bachelor of Social Science in Economics (Honours). Dr. Loo has been involved in university education since 2008. She is the Senior Lecturer for purchasing and supply chain management courses. She is the Programme Coordinator for Bachelor of Business (Hons) degree in Logistics and Supply Chain Management (on-campus learning) and Graduate Diploma in Supply Chain Management (open distance learning). She is also the Course Coordinator and internal examiner for the final project papers of the Master’s degree. On the international front, Dr. Loo is a member of the Institute for Supply Management. Prior to joining Wawasan Open University, Dr. Loo has more than 17 years of industrial working experience in various multinational companies, local contract manufacturers and public listed companies. She held the positions of senior Supply Chain Manager and Purchasing Manager.

Dr. Quah Hock Soon received his doctorate in Technology Management from Northern University Malaysia, Master of Business Administration and Bachelor of Applied Science (Honours) from Universiti Sains Malaysia. He has accumulated more than 15 years of working experience in multinational companies in fields related to manufacturing, supply chain and logistics.

Dr. Au Yong Hui Nee graduated from Universiti Sains Malaysia with a Doctor of Philosophy in Technology Management, University of Tsukuba (Japan) with Master of Arts in Economics, and Universiti Putra Malaysia with a Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Resource Economics. Dr. Au Yong is the Dean and Assistant Professor for the Faculty of Business and Finance in Universiti Tunku Abdul Rahman. She was the Programme Coordinator for Bachelor of Business (Hons) in Logistics and Supply Chain Management. She has published fifteen articles in indexed journals such as the Web of Science and Scopus indexed journals and Conference Proceedings lists. She has also published over fifty refereed journal articles and

conference papers. She served as the reviewer for five indexed international journals. She has been involved in several research and consulting projects. She received research grants to the amount of US$30,000 between 2015 and 2017. She is a Monbukagakusho scholar. Prior to joining the academic, she has more than seventeen years of extensive experience in the government-linked corporation and Fortune 500 multinational companies managing information technology, supply chain logistics and corporate compliance. She held a managerial position at Sharp Asia Parts Centre, a regional distribution centre. She was the founding manager of the data analysis department and QESH management system department of technology companies.

Mr. Chong Fook Suan graduated with Master of Engineering (Integrated Logistics Management) from RMIT University, Australia. Mr. Chong is a Chartered Member of The Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (UK) since 2002. He has 30 years of working experience in logistics, freight transport and warehousing industry. He has served with international transport companies, third-party logistics service providers and manufacturers. On the academic side, Mr. Chong is the Programme Coordinator for the Bachelor of Business in Logistics and Supply Chain Management (ODL). He is the Programme Coordinator for the Graduate Diploma in Sales and Services Management (ODL), a programme specially tailored to meet the sales and after-sales needs of Perodua (Perusahaan Otomobil Kedua Sdn Bhd). At the postgraduate level, Mr. Chong is the Project Coordinator and Course Coordinator for the capstone Project courses in two Master level programmes. In this connection, he is the Residential School cum Project Workshop Coordinator who organises this biannual event. He is an assessor in the APEL (Accreditation of Prior Experiential Learning), an evaluation which comes under the ambit of the MQA (Malaysian Qualifications Agency).

Mr. John Tan Chin Leong graduated with Master of Business Administration from the University of Portsmouth (UK), a Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport (UK), and Advanced Diploma in Logistics and Transport. He has more than 20 years of working experience in the logistics field. He is also the tutor for logistics and supply chain courses at Wawasan Open University.

Contents

Foreword

Introduction

Chapter 1 Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Dr. Shardul Phadnis

Chapter 2 Robotics in Supply Chain Ms. Annie Khor Seow Keow and Dr. Au Yong Hui Nee

Chapter 3 Big Data in Supply Chain Dr. Quah Hock Soon, Mr. Jason Tan Khee Kwong and Mr. Chong Fook Suan

Chapter 4 Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Dr. Loo Saw Khuan and Mr. Francis Seow Hai Swee

Chapter 5 The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain Professor Dr. Premkumar Rajagopal, Mr. John Tan Chin Leong and Dr. Loo Saw Khuan

1

5

7

25

39

45

62

1Foreword

The two-day roundtable entitled Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management bringing together academics and practising professionals in related fields, held in Wawasan Open University (WOU) on 12 – 13 January 2017, was most timely and appropriate indeed. I would like to congratulate WOU’s School of Business and Administration (SBA) for taking the initiative to organise this roundtable. I also commend Dr. Loo Saw Khuan in making the effort to be the project leader of this roundtable and for co-editing this publication, based on the papers and proceedings presented in the roundtable, for future reference and action.

Here is a quick historical flashback. In the early 1970s, Penang pioneered the export-oriented industrialisation for Malaysia, and indeed, the whole of South-East Asia, through the establishment of Free Industrial Zones (FIZs) to attract multinational corporations (MNCs) such as, Intel, Hewlett Packard, Motorola, Siemens, Osram, Hitachi, Sony, etc., to set up manufacturing plants here for the electronics and related industries. Besides incentives such as free duty and tax holiday granted by the federal government, the attractive factors then were hard-working and trainable labour, well-planned industrial land with utilities, adequate transportation infrastructure, efficient government services, etc., all at very competitive costs.

From the 1980s, local suppliers emerged to supply parts and components and to provide supporting services to MNCs. The MNCs and local Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs) also sourced from suppliers from other parts of the country, the region and the world. Starting in the 1990s, the industry moved towards high-tech and high value-added products. The technological level of products became more sophisticated with corresponding advancement in parts and components, again, sourced from all over the world. Hence, supply chain management (SCM) became more sophisticated, with increasing and more integrated involvement of I.T., robotics and artificial intelligence (A.I.). Meanwhile, many MNCs and even some SMEs operating here started to move into design and development (D & D) and even research. In fact, the pace of development has accelerated tremendously, at a dazzling speed, over the past decade.

Foreword

2 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Therefore, with the advent of Industry 4.0, the traditional supply chain model is being rapidly transformed into Supply Chain 4.0 with digitisation and integration of the entire process, from D & D, manufacturing, marketing, delivery, to customer service. The increasingly integrated supply chain eco-system has enhanced efficiency, transparency, communication, collaboration, flexibility and responsiveness among supply chain partners, to ensure accurate demand forecast, to reduce order lead time and save costs, to enhance product and service quality, and to increase customer satisfaction.

Hence, the main objective of the roundtable was to examine the emerging technologies for supply chain in the global market, to compare them to the present practices in the Malaysian context, so as to prepare the Malaysian supply chain management professionals to adopt, adapt and apply these new technologies, so as to further improve the SCM, especially for SMEs.

It is important and imperative for companies to be keenly aware that SCM has become the heart and the circulatory system of the company’s entire value chain processes which need to be fully digitised. Supply Chain 4.0 happens when supply chain is incorporated into and drives Industry 4.0. It also implies that supply chain partners, such as suppliers, customers, distributors, retailers and transporters must be connected to Supply Chain 4.0 which should include Procurement 4.0, Logistics 4.0, smart warehousing, prescriptive supply chain analytics, effective spare parts management and integrated planning and execution, etc.

However, it must be realised that, besides positive contributions as briefly described above, Supply Chain 4.0 comes with some challenges or even negative impacts. Supply Chain 4.0 requires substantial investment in hardware and software. The local SMEs may encounter a lot of barriers, costs and challenges to adopt and apply the emerging technologies. How can MNCs assist and support their SME suppliers to adopt the technologies? How can the government provide grants and incentives for the SMEs more effectively?

3Foreword

Supply chain professionals in the manufacturing sector who are used to the extensive use of MRP (material requirement planning) systems will have to figure out how to incorporate their current MRP system with the emerging technologies of Big Data and Internet of Things. How can we effectively encourage and equip supply chain professionals to be data and technology-savvy to stay relevant in their professional field?

This leads us to the educational question of how we can effectively train supply chain professionals to be technology-savvy in the first place. In the past, industry might prefer to hire procurement professionals with engineering or technical qualifications so that they can contribute to value engineering and quality improvement of materials and components purchased from suppliers. However, with emerging technologies of artificial intelligence, Big Data and 3D printing, they may now prefer procurement professionals with information technology qualifications. Hence, should we train the supply chain students to be technology-savvy or alternatively, provide our information technology students or data scientists knowledge on SCM?

For supply chain academics, they need to equip themselves with the emerging technologies so that they could impart the required knowledge to the students, who may be more technology-savvy than their teachers! Should all the courses of supply chain programmes be incorporated with emerging technologies? Should universities offer programmes with double degrees in supply chain and information technology?

Moreover, the utilisation of robotics, artificial intelligence, self- driving vehicles and big data may result in unemployment to many white-collar and blue-collar employees. What are the social impacts due to job loss of the warehouse workforce? We need to consider whether investment in automation is more cost saving than human investment. How can the affected employees, such as clerical staff, be trained effectively to migrate to a higher level task which includes decision making? To what extent can all forms of automation reduce our dependence on foreign migrant workers?

4 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The above are pressing issues and relevant questions, some of which were answered well in the roundtable. Others need further deliberation, exploration and experimentation. Hence, the roundtable was a good start. I believe that the participants would have learned a lot and forged friendship for future collaboration in more effectively applying emerging technologies to improve SCM in practice and SCM programmes in universities. I look forward to WOU continuing to play a leading role in this area.

Tan Sri Dr. Koh Tsu Koon Pro-Chancellor of Wawasan Open University Chairman of Wawasan Education Foundation

5Introduction

This collection of papers explores the research and practices on the broad theme of “Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management”. The papers were given at the roundtable entitled “Emerging Trends of Technologies in Supply Chain Management” that the School of Business and Administration organised in collaboration with Penang Skills Development Centre on 12th and 13th of January 2017. There were twenty-four academics and twenty- six industry practitioners who attended the two-day roundtable to exchange information pertaining to the emerging technologies for supply chain management. The emerging technologies discussed in the roundtable were Supply Chain 4.0, Internet of Things (IoT), big data, electronic procurement and robotics in warehouse.

Emerging technologies for supply chain management may include robotics, smart warehousing, 3D printings, big data, IoT and artificial intelligence. These technologies are now affecting every component of supply chain, namely customer fulfilments, supplier sourcing, purchasing, distribution, transportation and warehousing. These emerging technologies potentially contribute to effectiveness, efficiency, shorter lead time and cost savings to supply chain. However, the emerging technologies may potentially cause job loss to lower level or clerical workforce. In order to stay relevant in the industry, supply chain professionals need to be well versed to utilise these emerging technologies.

The IoT is the network of physical devices, vehicles and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators and connectivity which enables these objects to connect and exchange data. Machine to machine (M2M) connection is the new frontier of IoT, which refers to all technologies that allow systems to communicate with other devices of the same type. Apart from this, there are machine to person (M2P) and person to person connections. With all these connections of IoT, supply chain professionals could connect and exchange data very effectively with all their supply chain partners, namely suppliers, customers, transporters, distributors, retailers and warehouses. The related supply chain partners will have full visibility into the needs and changes of each other in real time.

Automated robotic applications such as self-driving trucks and automatic drones now become viable solutions for warehousing and transportation. The advantage of robotic applications is that

Introduction

6 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

they are capable to work 24 hours every day. However, robots may not be able to perform high level decision makings for warehousing and shipping. Hence, savvy companies come out with synergistic scenarios where robots perform repetitive and routine tasks so that humans could focus on strategic tasks. Alternatively, a co-robot or cobot is a robot which could be physically interacting with humans to perform tasks. These cobots are potentially very useful for loading, unloading and picking of products in the warehouse.

The artificial intelligence could be utilised by purchasing professionals to source, identify and match the items with the suitable suppliers. It can also be used to alert purchasing professionals about the potential price increase and commodity shortage. In addition, the artificial intelligence can be used to alert supplier contract renewal and administration.

The technology of 3D printing is very useful for products with high mix/low volume. It can be used to print spare parts, sunset products or aftermarket products. It also contributes to inventory reduction and cost savings by eliminating tool and die fabrication.

The advent of technology and its application to the Supply Chain Management processes can either be viewed as a disruptive intrusion into the functioning of the processes or an opportunity to embrace the new digital approach. This will lead to enormous benefits to the Supply Chain Industry. This excellent collection of articles will be an invaluable resource material to students and practitioners of Supply Chain Management.

Editors

Dr. Loo Saw Khuan Senior Lecturer School of Business and Administration Wawasan Open University

Professor Dr. Santhiram R. Raman Dean School of Education, Languages and Communication Wawasan Open University

Chapter 1 Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application Dr. Shardul Phadnis

Abstract

Management and technology experts believe that Internet of Things (IoT) has the potential to radically transform today’s supply chains. Several practice-focused publications describe various ways in which IoT capabilities can affect the supply chains in positive and negative ways. However, no generic framework describing the peculiar effects of IoT on supply chains has yet emerged. This paper presents a theoretical framework to articulate the distinct ways in which the IoT can influence the management of supply chains. The use of this framework is illustrated by applying it to identify opportunities for improving two supply chains: the supply chain described in the famed “Beer Distribution Game” and a revised version of that supply chain. This framework, grounded in the foundation of organisational information processing theory, can be of practical use in guiding organisations to envision novel ways in improving the performance of their supply chains by deploying the IoT capabilities.

Introduction

Internet of Things (henceforth, “IoT”) is defined as “a network of physical objects that contain embedded technology to communicate and sense, or interact with their internal states or the external environment” (World Economic Forum 2015). It is considered a key technological development that will contribute to the emergence of the Fourth Industrial Revolution (i.e., Industry 4.0), and is counted among the nine component technologies in the Industry 4.0 platform (Rose, Lukic, Milon and Cappuzzo 2016). Despite its argued revolutionary potential, the implications of IoT remain unclear to a vast majority of firms (The MPI Group 2016). The World Economic Forum (2015) equates this state of ambiguousness with the state of understanding of the potential applications of the Internet in 1990s; it predicts that the IoT will dramatically transform the world just as the Internet did.

8 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The juxtaposition of IoT’s revolutionary potential and the lack of understanding of its implications are troublesome for the firms seeking to harness the technology’s capabilities to seek competitive advantage. Given the technology’s newness, a few cases of success or failures of firms using IoT have been documented. Therefore, it remains unclear what a firm needs to do to improve the performance of its supply chain using the IoT capabilities. This paper seeks to shed some light on this matter by making three contributions. One, the paper highlights the salient features of the IoT that distinguish it from the present-day solutions commonly used for managing the supply chains. This distills the unique features of IoT as a technology that provides an information ecosystem for managing supply chains. Two, this paper presents a framework that can be used to envision the applications of IoT to improve performance of supply chains. Finally, the paper applies this framework to explore the ways in which IoT capabilities can be used to improve the supply chain in the “Beer Distribution Game” — one of the most widely-played management simulation games in the world (Sterman 1989), and a related version of that supply chain.

The rest of this paper is organised as follows. The Literature Review section provides a brief review of the pertinent literature. I summarised a few fundamental publications of IoT, and highlighted that IoT is an information technology revolution. I reviewed a few seminal works in the management literature that explore the role of information on the operational performance of supply chains. Building on this foundation, I propose a generic framework to explore novel opportunities for improving the performance of supply chains using IoT capabilities. The next section examines a Framework envisioning the effects of IoT on supply chains, and illustrates the application of this framework to use the IoT capabilities to improve the supply chain in the “Beer Distribution Game” (Sterman 1989) and a variation of the supply chain. The reason for choosing this supply chain is threefold: the “Beer Distribution Game” is one of the best-known management simulation games and has been played by thousands of people worldwide. The supply chain in this game is simple and representative of real-world supply chains, and the game is designed to demonstrate the effect of information availability (local vs. global) on the performance of supply chains. The last section concludes the paper by commenting on the efficacy of IoT for improving supply chain performance.

Literature Review

The IoT has been called “a global infrastructure for the information society, enabling advanced services by interconnecting (physical and virtual) things based on existing and evolving interoperable information and communication technologies” (Rose, Eldridge and Chapin 2015). It has also been described as “the point in time when more “things or objects” were connected to the Internet than people” (Evans 2011), which is estimated to have been reached between 2008 and 2009. The same report predicts that by year 2020, 50 billion devices will be connected to the Internet; another report predicts that the number will reach 100 billion by 2025 (Rose, Eldridge and Chapin 2015). The explosive growth of connected devices is no longer limited to smartphones and tablet computers, which provided the impetus for the trend. A recent definition of IoT by Rose et al. (2015) highlighted the increasing variety of “things” being connected to the Internet: “consumer products, durable

9Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

goods, cars and trucks, industrial and utility components, sensors, and other everyday objects are being combined with Internet connectivity and powerful data analytic capabilities that promise to transform the way we work, live and play”. Rose et al. (2015) identified five technological advances as the enablers of the IoT revolution: ubiquitous connectivity, widespread adoption of the IP-based networking, cloud computing, miniaturisation of computing devices, and advances in data analytics. The different definitions of the IoT have one thing in common: they all project the IoT as a revolution of the information and communications technology. It is important to recognise this aspect when exploring the implications of IoT for supply chains. The important role of information in the management of supply chains has been examined in the scholarly and practitioner-focused literature. Deficient information sharing is one of the primary causes of emergence of the “Bullwhip effect,” a term used to describe the phenomenon in which a manufacturer of a product experiences high variability in the orders for that product compared to the retailer selling it, even when the market demand for the product had no variation (Sterman 1989). Lee et al. (1997) attribute this effect to the distortion of information about the market demand as the information travels from the retailer to the manufacturer through the parties involved in the supply chain. Due to the negative effect of variability on the efficient functioning of a supply chain, the bullwhip effect and the potential remedies to eliminate it have been extensively studied. Some of today’s widely-used industry practices, such as sharing point-of-sales data with the manufacturer, vendor managed inventory (VMI), etc., are intended to alleviate the deleterious consequences of the bullwhip effect.

Various types of information pass through the supply chains and influence their operations. Lee and Whang (2000) described five types of information shared in a supply chain: inventory levels, sales, demand forecasts, order status, and production schedule. The information transfer takes place via different modes such as direct information transfer (through electronic data interchange, vendor manager inventory, etc.), transfer through a third party, or through an information hub. The information shared influences the behaviours of the parties using it. As a result, any distortion of the information can cause unintended disturbances in the supply chain. Lee et al. (1997) suggested four potential causes of information distortion that create the bullwhip effect.

1. Demand signal processing, in which the retailer’s orders to the wholesaler (who would then order from a distributor or the manufacturer) are based on the updated demand forecast, instead of the actual demand.

2. Rationing game, in which the retailer orders more than what is needed if he/she anticipates that the wholesaler would allocate less than what was ordered.

3. Order batching, in which the retailer orders periodically from the wholesaler and, as a result, the finite demand information is lumped into one order.

4. Price variations, in which retailer orders different order quantities in response to the actual and anticipated changes in price.

10 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The net result of each of these four is that the orders placed by the retailer to the wholesaler exhibit a pattern different from that of the market demand.

Human biases also influence the information shared in the supply chain. Croson and Donohue’s (2006) examination of the behavioral causes of bullwhip effect showed that the decision makers’ under-weighing of the supply line — i.e., not considering fully the amount of goods ordered but not received yet, as partly responsible for the phenomenon. Furthermore, their study showed that the tendency to underweigh the supply line persisted even when information on inventory levels was shared with the decision makers. Thus, it is not just the distortion of information shared in the supply chain that leads to the bullwhip effect; natural biases present in human decision making are also partly responsible. Adverse effects of human involvement in the making of operational decisions are also observed in other decisions made in supply chains. For instance, Schweitzer and Cachon (2000) showed through experiments that human decision makers order suboptimal quantities when making one-time purchase decisions, such as ordering goods to fulfil a season’s demand. These deviations from the optimal quantity are systematic, and can result in potential loss of revenue, especially more for high-margin products (Ho, Lim and Cui 2010). Some fundamental human biases, such as overconfidence, are shown to be the root causes of this effect (Ren and Croson 2013).

Such supply chain maladies related to information exchange and human decision-making biases may be cured by using a different information and decision-making ecosystem such as the IoT. Some of the emerging researches on implications of IoT for supply chain management suggest that the IoT capabilities can help companies improve the efficiency of their supply chain operations and facilitate innovation (Rong, Hu, Lin, Shi and Guo 2015). In addition, IoT capabilities can also be used to track goods geographically and over time (as well as people; however, ethical ramifications of tracking people need to be considered), provide improved situational awareness, facilitate sensor- driven decision making, automate production processes, optimise resource use, and allow real-time sensing of unpredictable conditions (Chui, Löffler and Roberts 2010).

A study of the IoT in logistics (Macaulay, Buckalew and Chung 2015) jointly published by the leaders in the domains of IoT (CISCO) and logistics (DHL), notes that IoT can enhance an organisation’s capabilities for measuring, controlling, automatising, optimising, learning, and monitoring various activities in the supply chain. The paper provides examples to illustrate how IoT could improve the outcomes of logistics processes. These examples include improvement of operational efficiency (fleet and traffic management, resource and energy monitoring, and connected production floor), improvement of safety and security (equipment and employee monitoring, health monitoring, physical security), enhancement of customer experience (connected retail, context-aware offers to customers), and creation of new business models (firms become service providers, usage-based insurance). The report concludes by providing three use-cases of IoT in logistics: warehouse operations, freight transportation, and last-mile delivery.

11Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

A few studies have explored the effects of IoT in specific industries. A graduate thesis and a subsequent article by researchers at the Malaysia Institute for Supply Chain Innovation explored the implications of IoT on the chemical industry (Phadnis 2015; Ravi and Wu 2015). The researchers mapped the existing flows of goods and information at a construction chemicals business, documented the state- of-the-art of the IoT capabilities, and then conjectured various ways in which IoT capabilities could realistically be employed to enhance various activities in the supply chain (such as process control, production planning, procurement, order fulfilment, etc.). They noted several potential benefits from the application of IoT: lower variability in ordered and shipped quantities, higher revenue with the same or lower finished goods inventory levels, lower work-in-progress and raw material inventories, fewer lost sales, automated procurement and production planning, improved process quality and safety, and so on.

Another study explores the impact and the applications of IoT on the high-tech industry (Biswas, Ramamurthy, Edward and Dixit 2015). This whitepaper describes how IoT can increase sales and improve operations for four types of firms in the high-tech industry: semiconductor firms, contract manufacturers, distributors, and original equipment manufacturers (OEMs). The potential improvements in supply chain operations resulting from the application of IoT cited in the study include increase in the yield of semiconductor fabrication facilities, improvement of asset utilisation, predictive maintenance, facilitation of anti-counterfeiting measures, improvement of product quality through more effective collaboration between the OEM and its supplier for product design and development, and so on.

The extant studies exploring the potential effects of using IoT to manage supply chains typically identify specific benefits (and threats). Some of these studies list the implications of IoT in more generic terms (e.g., Chui et al. 2015; Macaulay et al. 2015; Phadnis 2015; Rong et al. 2015; etc.), while others discuss them in the context of particular industries (e.g., Biswas et al. 2015; Macaulay et al. 2015; Ravi and Wu 2015). However, no comprehensive framework for exploring the implications of IoT for the management of supply chains has yet emerged in the literature. The present study seeks to fill this gap by providing a generic framework that can be used to explore novel opportunities for enhancing the performance of supply chains in a chosen industry.

Framework for Envisioning Effects of IoT on Supply Chains

Given that IoT provides a new way of gathering and sharing information to make operational decisions for managing the supply chain, the proposed framework is based on the theoretical foundation of information processing and decision making in management. In the theoretical discourse on the association between information processing and decision making in organisations, Tushman and Nadler (1978, 614) noted that “information processing refers to the gathering, interpreting, and synthesis of information in the context of organisational decision making.” They elaborated the distinction between data and information by noting that information refers to the data that are “relevant, accurate, timely and concise” that can “effect a change in knowledge.” In another influential

12 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

early work on information processing in organisations, Kiesler and Sproull (1982) called “managerial problem sensing” a precondition for managerial decision making and action, and suggested that problem sensing consists of three processes: noticing (i.e., gathering data), interpreting the data to assign it actionable meaning, and incorporating the information with other information. These three processes parallel the three steps in organisational information processing identified by Tushman and Nadler (1978). The gathering data, interpreting it into information, and the change in knowledge effected by incorporation of new information, also called sense making, is central to the functioning of organisations because “it is the primary site where meanings materialise” and “inform and constrain (organisational) identity and action” (Weick, Sutcliffe and Obstfeld 2005). Thus, data gathering, data sharing, data interpretation and decision making are the fundamental processes in the information processing model of organisations.

Building on this theoretical foundation, I propose a framework for exploring the effects of IoT capabilities on the performance of supply chains. The framework consists of three components: data gathering, data sharing, and interpretation and decision making. For each component, the framework describes the salient ways in which IoT differs from the information technology solutions used for managing supply chains at present. The framework is presented in Figure 1 as described below.

Figure 1 Framework for exploring opportunities to improve supply chain performance using Internet of Things (IoT )

13Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

Data Gathering

One of the fundamental drivers of the growth of IoT is the increasing variety of objects connected to the Internet. As Macaulay et al. (2015) pointed out, “with the advent of IoT, Internet connections now extend to physical objects that are not computers in the classic sense and, in fact, serve a multiplicity of other purposes.” Such objects may include “consumer products, durable goods, cars and trucks, industrial and utility components, sensors, and other everyday objects” (Rose et al. 2015). Different objects will collect and share different types of data, such as heart rate from a fitness tracker, driving speed of a car, or level of ink remaining in a printer cartridge. Thus, a natural consequence of the variety of objects connected to the Internet is that an IoT information ecosystem will gather more types of data.

The number of objects connected to the Internet is projected to reach 50 billion by 2020 (Evans 2011) and 100 billion by 2025 (Rose et al. 2015). This equates to an average of more than six connected objects per living human being by 2020 and over twelve by 2025. Thus, the same kind of data may be available from multiple sources. One example of this is the driving speed data from multiple connected cars in one geographic area. This information can be used to compute the average and variance of driving speed at a particular location at a given time. Thus, the IoT information ecosystem will also have more sources contributing the data of a given kind. More data points enable computation of reliable statistics.

Finally, due to their automated nature, data collection and transmission can both be performed more frequently than what may be plausible with the human involvement in either collection and/ or transmission of data. Therefore, the third distinguishing feature of the IoT information ecosystem is that it allows more frequent data collection.

Data Sharing

A second fundamental driver of the growth of IoT is the widespread ability to connect computational devices to the Internet (Rose et al. 2015). In IoT, communication among devices is enabled not only by the commonly-used information technologies such as wired connections, local wireless networks (e.g., Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, RFID), and wide-area telecommunication networks (e.g., EDGE, 3G, LTE), but also by “operational technologies” such as the “more specialised, and historically proprietary, industrial network protocols and applications that are common in settings such as plant floors, energy grids, and the like” (Macaulay et al. 2015, 4). The “always-on” connectivity allows the devices to share the collected data instantaneously.

The automated nature of data sharing also obviates the need for human operators to collect, process, or analyse the data before it is shared. Sharing data in the raw form is advantageous because the data get shared without getting subjected to human biases that are known to influence selective collection and processing of data (Ditto and Lopez 1992; Edwards and Smith 1996; Kunda 1987). One of the

14 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

robust findings in psychology informs that people “are likely to examine relevant empirical evidence in a biased manner” when they hold strong opinions about the issue (Lord, Ross and Lepper 1979). Automated data sharing can circumvent this problem. Therefore, the second key feature of an IoT information ecosystem is that data are shared without distortion.

Finally, connectivity over the Internet allows the connected devices to exchange data with each other or a common cloud-based platform directly (with the appropriate communications protocol), regardless of their place in the supply chain. Thus, a firm can exchange relevant data with another firm in its supply chain even if the firms are not direct suppliers or customers of each other. For example, the point-of-sales data at a retail store does not have to reach the product’s manufacturer from the retailer, through a distributor and a wholesaler; the point-of-sales data at a store can be sent either directly to the manufacturer or uploaded to a cloud-based platform where the manufacturer can access it. Thus, the third distinguishing feature of the IoT information ecosystem is that it allows data to be shared in a non-serial fashion with the supply chain partners.

Interpretation and Decision Making

Another fundamental driver of the growth of the IoT is the advances in data analytics (Rose et al. 2015). Macaulay et al. (2015, 6) noted that “the use of analytics and complementary business applications (e.g., data visualisation) is crucial if organisations are to capture and make sense of the data generated from connected devices”. The automated processing of data ensures that the analysis is not influenced by human biases (e.g., Kunda 1987; Lord et al. 1979). It also ensures that data are analysed consistently using the predefined algorithms. Of course, the use of algorithms is not a panacea: the design and selection of algorithms themselves are not immune to human biases and can arguably have monumental consequences, such as the 2008 Global Financial Crisis (O’Neil 2016). Firms need to be aware of these dangers. However, well-designed algorithms can make data processing consistent and free it from the vagaries of biased human decision making. Thus, one salient feature of the IoT information ecosystem is its algorithmic decision making.

The second important feature of IoT-based decision making is the ability to get quick and frequent feedback. Due to the automated collection and instantaneous sharing of data, an IoT-controlled system can take several small actions, measure outcomes, obtain feedback, and make corrections based on the feedback. This rapid action-correction loop could be prohibitively expensive with human involvement in data collection, sharing or decision making. Management research has long established that “if the action-outcome-feedback links are short and frequent, the individual (or, firm) is in a good position to learn about, and thus comprehend, the probable effects of actions on outcomes: short links enhance the ability to improve decision making by taking corrective actions” (Hogarth and Makridakis 1981, 120). Thus, the second key feature of the IoT information ecosystem is the feedback-based nature of decision making.

15Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

Finally, the vast amount of data collected through IoT devices can enable predictive decision making. More accurate forecasts, enabled by larger volume of relevant data, can help optimise a particular system with fewer resources. For example, more data about sales or online searches can help predict demand with smaller variance, and as a result, a supply chain can provide the same level of product availability with smaller inventory. Thus, the third distinguishing feature of the IoT information ecosystem is the predictive decision making.

Application of the Framework

In this section, I demonstrate the use of the above framework by applying it to envision opportunities for improving the performance of an existing supply chain using IoT capabilities. I use the supply chain depicted in the “Beer Distribution Game” (Sterman 1989) and one variation of it for the demonstration. I choose this supply chain because of its simple structure and its familiarity to a large number of management scholars and practitioners. I begin with a brief description of the supply chain in the Beer Distribution Game and follow it up with a depiction of the modified supply chain designed by deploying IoT capabilities.

The “Beer Distribution Game”

The “Beer Distribution Game” is a “role-playing simulation of an industrial production and distribution system” (Sterman 1989, 326). It was developed in the 1960s at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology to demonstrate some key dynamics in the supply chain. It has been played all over the world by thousands of people “ranging from high school students to chief executive officers and government officials” (Sterman 1989). The supply chain in the game delivers one product (i.e., cases of beer) through four stages or echelons — retailer, wholesaler, distributor and factory, with only one firm at each echelon. The retailer orders the product from the wholesaler to meet the market demand; the wholesaler fulfils the demand from its inventory, and orders the product from the distributor, who in turn, fulfils the demand from its inventory and orders the product from the factory, which produces (i.e., brews) the necessary quantity to meet the demand. There is a lag of two weeks between the placement of an order and receipt of the goods between each pair of consecutive stages. The game is played over several “periods,” with each period equivalent to one week. The objective of the game is to minimise the total cost for the supply chain over the duration of the play. Each case of beer carried in the inventory costs $0.50 per week, and each lost sale due to not having any inventory at the retailer costs $1 per week.

Each firm, manned in the game by a player, has to make only one decision in each period: determine the quantity to order in the next period. The only exception is the factory, which decides the quantity of beer to produce (i.e., place an order on itself ). The key feature of this game is that each player (i.e., firm) “has good local information but severely limited global information” (Sterman 1989, 328). The players are told not to communicate with each other; thus, no player except the retailer

16 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

has any knowledge of the consumer demand in the market. Furthermore, the market demand is not known in advance; the retailer discovers the market demand as the game progresses. The players are told of the two types of costs incurred in the game and the game’s objective of minimising the total cost. However, they are not given specific guidelines for determining their order quantities. Thus, each player may decide the quantity to order based on the quantity of the product ordered by his/ her customer, his/her interpreted pattern of customer’s orders, his/her anticipated future orders, and any other metrics he/she considers relevant for determining the order quantity.

The customer demand is set at four cases per week for each of the first four weeks of the game. The demand experiences one unannounced one-time increase to eight cases per week in week five; after that, the demand remains stable at eight cases per week for the rest of the game. This one small change creates major fluctuations in the supply chain. Sterman (1989) noted that almost all runs of the Beer Distribution Game exhibit the same three qualities: oscillation, amplification, and phase lag. Order quantities and inventory levels of all four firms oscillate over time. The inventory levels of the retailer decline first, followed by the decline in inventory levels of wholesaler, distributor, and the factory in that order. The declines generally cause severe shortages throughout the supply chain. To compensate for this, the players increase their order quantities. This swings the inventory levels in the opposite direction, and the “inventory in many cases substantially overshoots its initial levels” (p. 330). The magnitude of orders is amplified from the retailer to the factory; the peak order rate at the factory can be about twice as high as that at the retailer. Finally, because of the time lags between the stages, the order quantities exhibit a phase lag, such that the peak orders at the factory occur, on average about four weeks after the peak orders at the retailer.

These phenomena are also observed in the real world. Sterman (1989, 3) noted that the “production- distribution networks in the real economy exhibit the three aggregate behaviours generated in the experiment, i.e., oscillation, amplification from retail sales to primary production, and phase lag.” The oscillations are caused by the failure to account for the goods in the pipeline (i.e., the products ordered but not received yet) when placing orders, as well as incorrect assumptions about market demand. The amplifications are the result of lack of visibility to the true demand for the parties’ upstream in the supply chain and their over-adjustments to the disturbances observed in their own demand. Another result of the lack of visibility is that the players representing the firms’ upstream in the supply chain have incorrect assumptions about the true demand. Sterman (1989, 335) showed that “the majority of subjects (playing the wholesaler, distributor, or factory roles in the game) judge that customer demand was oscillatory,” when in reality, it is stable throughout the game barring one fluctuation in week five. Finally, the phase lag is a natural result of the time lags in the placement of orders by the parties in the supply chain.

Overall, three aspects of this supply chain engender this phenomenon: lack of visibility of market demand to all parties except the retailer, the time lag between placing and receiving the orders, and the failure to keep track of the inventory in transit. The decision makers in the game use an anchoring-and-adjustment heuristic (Tversky and Kahneman 1974) to determine the order quantity:

17Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

they anchor on the expected demand from their customers and then adjust the order quantity to “reduce the discrepancy between the desired and actual stock” and “maintain an adequate supply line of unfilled orders” (Sterman 1989, 324).

“Beer Distribution Game” with IoT Ecosystem

In this section, I describe how the framework presented earlier can be used to think of ways in which the potential causes of the undesirable dynamics in the Beer Distribution Game’s supply chain can be mitigated by deploying IoT capabilities. To do this, I present a list of initiatives, envisioned with the help of the framework, to improve the supply chain performance using IoT capabilities. The initiatives are presented in Table 1 below. I first present three initiatives targeted to improve the performance of the supply chain described in the Beer Distribution Game (Section I of Table 1), which is a rather simplified version of a real-world supply chain. Following this, I present four initiatives to improve the performance of a modified version of the supply chain based on the game (Section II of Table 1).

Initiatives to improve supply chain performance using IoT capabilities

Data gathering Data sharing Decision making

M o

re d

at a

ty p

es

M o

re d

at a

so u

rc es

H ig

h er

fr

eq u

en cy

In st

an ta

n eo

u s

W it

h o

u t

d is

to rt

io n

N o

n -s

er ia

l

A lg

o ri

th m

ic

Fe ed

b ac

k- b

as ed

P re

d ic

ti ve

Section I: Supply chain in “Beer Distribution Game”

1. Sharing retailer’s point-of- sales data with other firms in the supply chain

  

2. Forecasting customer demand based on point- of-sales data and share within the supply chain

  

3. Multi-echelon inventory optimisation, with real- time visibility of inventory in the supply chain

     

18 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Section II: More realistic supply chain based on “Beer Distribution Game” (one factory; multiple products; multiple retailers and wholesalers)

1. Predicting sales of different products at different retail stores based on consumers’ electronic footprint, listing of local events, weather conditions, etc.

   

2. Unscheduled expedited deliveries based on real- time product availability at retail stores using centralised storage

     

3. Customised product packaging for individuals and events

   

4. Product promotions customised to individual consumers, for specific time of the day and offered at specific retail stores

     

Table 1 Initiative to improve performance of supply chain in the “Beer Distribution Game” using IoT capabilities

Initiatives for Supply Chain in “Beer Distribution Game”

The first initiative is to share point-of-sales data from the retailer with the wholesaler, distributor and the factory. This involves collecting new type of data (i.e., retail sales), and sharing it without distortion (i.e., sharing raw sales data, instead of order data from retailer and other firms) in non-serial manner (i.e., the sales data is sent directly from the retailer to the wholesaler, distributor, and factory, instead of having to traverse serially through the supply chain). This provides complete visibility to all the players about the nature of market demand, and can help make correct assumptions about market demand by three firms that do not see the market demand directly. This can result in lowering the total cost by reducing the overall inventory carried in the supply chain, while simultaneously increasing product availability by reducing the stock-out situations.

19Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

The second initiative is to forecast customer demand based on point-of-sales data and share it with all firms in the supply chain. This initiative is enabled by the first one. Besides the features of the framework used to enable the first initiative, this initiative involves the use of algorithmic and predictive decision making (i.e., a forecasting heuristic to predict demand, although a very simple forecasting algorithm can suffice in the Beer Distribution Game) instead of relying on manual judgment to determine order quantities, as done in the game. It also involves the use of more types of data: the firms can develop one forecast of the market demand and share it among all four parties in the supply chain. The benefit of this initiative is that it allows all parties in the supply chain to work to meet one common goal. The outcome of this initiative is the same as the first: it can lower cost by reducing inventory in the supply chain and, simultaneously, increase product availability.

The third initiative is to provide real-time visibility of inventory in the supply chain and use multi- echelon inventory optimisation. Inventory visibility in the supply chain described in the Beer Distribution Game can be enabled by attaching RFID tags or similar sensors to the cases of product shipped, which can be scanned and geotagged as they move from one facility to another. This initiative involves the use of more types of data (i.e., product location) collected from more sources (i.e., the location data is collected from several cases of beer from a single batch) and shared instantaneously, without distortion (i.e., raw location data, instead of a summary report about the amount of product at a location) in a non-serial manner (i.e., shared with all parties in the supply chain through a common platform), so that the inventory in the supply chain could be optimised using sophisticated algorithms (i.e., using multi-echelon inventory management algorithms, instead of manually determining the optimal inventory levels at each echelon). The benefit of this initiative may be particularly evident when the consumer demand experience a small change — which disturbs the equilibrium in the game and causes severe oscillations of inventory levels and order quantities in the supply chain — as the adjustments to the inventory levels are based on a multi-echelon inventory optimisation algorithm, instead of the overcorrection of a human decision maker typically observed in the game. Thus, the result is a more cost-effective response to unexpected changes in demand.

Initiative for Revised “Beer Distribution Game” Supply Chain

The following describes a more realistic version of the supply chain based on the game, without deviating too far from the original design, to demonstrate the benefit of the proposed framework for identifying opportunities for improving performance of the supply chain. Assume that the supply chain consists of one factory, one or more distributors and wholesalers, and multiple retailers each with one or more stores. We still assume that the supply chain delivers the same category of product, but now assume that there are multiple product variants made by the factory and delivered through the supply chain. We assume that consumers have preferences amongst the different variants of the product. Section II in Table 1 presents four initiatives for improving this supply chain.

20 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The first initiative is to predict sales of different products at different stores (i.e., different geographic regions). This initiative uses more types of data (i.e., consumer profiles based on web and social media activity, geotrack records from mobile phones or fitness trackers, listing of events that influence product consumption in a region, regional weather, etc.) collected from more sources (i.e., from more consumers), shared in a non-serial manner (i.e., over a cloud platform with all parties in the supply chain) and processed to identify demand patterns using predictive machine learning algorithms. The benefit of this initiative is that it enables the use of causal forecasting models to predict demand. This can forecast demand more accurately based on the demand drivers, instead of using simple time-series extrapolations of historical patterns. This can improve product availability as well as reduce product spoilage due to inventory aging and obsolescence.

The second initiative is to offer unscheduled expedited deliveries from a centralised warehouse, based on real-time product availability at retail stores. This initiative uses data about stock levels in retail stores collected frequently (i.e., using real-time inventory updates based on point-of-sales transactions), transmitted instantaneously and without distortions (i.e., as raw inventory data) in a non-serial manner (i.e., shared with all relevant supply chain players over a common platform) for algorithmic predictive analysis to determine if any unscheduled expedited deliveries need to be made to any stores to avoid loss of sales due to product stockouts. The benefit of this initiative is that it allows a retailer to augment periodic store replenishments with expedited deliveries to minimise stockouts and lost sales. Thus, the supply chain becomes more agile in responding to unexpected changes in the market demand.

The third initiative is to allow products to be customised for individuals and/or for special occasions, such as birthdays, anniversaries, and other special events. This initiative relies on the use of more data (i.e., consumer biographic details and product preferences from social media, product and/or packaging designed by consumers for the special event on the company’s social media interface), more sources of data (i.e., data from more consumers) shared without distortion in a non-serial manner (i.e., shared by consumer directly with the producer, instead of going through the retailer). The benefit of this initiative is that consumers can customise products for their own events, and the producer’s factory can ship the product directly to the consumer instead of sending the customised product through the four-tiered supply chain.

The fourth initiative is to create product promotions customised for individual consumers, for specific time of the day, and offered at convenient retail stores. This initiative relies on usage of more types of data (i.e., consumer’s social media profiles, shopping habits and product preferences, present location, etc.) collected from more sources of data at high frequency (i.e., data collected regularly for a large number of consumers), as well as algorithmic and predictive decision making (i.e., the use of algorithms to identify the optimal offers for each consumer for a specific time of the day and offered at a particular retail location). Furthermore, the algorithms can be feedback-based so they can learn by measuring the “hit rate” (i.e., the proportion of time a consumer bought the marketed product) and updating the algorithm itself to improve the hit rate. This can increase sales due to better matching of product offering with customer needs (i.e., higher value).

21Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

In conclusion, this section portrays the use of the framework to identify opportunities for improving the performance of a supply chain. In this case, the illustration is made by identifying the opportunities for the supply chain in the “Beer Distribution Game,” and then for a more realistic version of the same supply chain. The examples presented for this context are meant to be illustrative and not exhaustive. The opportunities for improving the supply chains described above are practically unlimited; the few initiatives mentioned in this paper are a small tip of the iceberg.

Discussion

It is widely believed that the IoT will radically transform today’s supply chains. Several publications describe the potential benefits and threats of IoT (e.g., Biswas et al. 2015; Chui et al. 2010; Evans 2011; Macaulay et al. 2015; Phadnis 2015; Rose et al. 2015; The MPI Group 2016). However, no generic framework has yet emerged that can describe IoT’s implications for supply chains. This study takes a step to fill this gap in the literature. It presents a framework, based on the theoretical foundation of information processing in organisations, to explore the implications of IoT for the management of supply chains.

One of the basic tenets of the information processing model of organisations states that “the greater the task uncertainty, the greater the amount of information that must be processed among decision makers during task execution in order to achieve a given level of performance” (Galbraith 1974, 28). Given that a fundamental task of supply chain managers is to make operational decisions that seek to achieve an optimum level of performance in uncertain conditions, the proposed framework can help one explore the opportunities for deploying the IoT capabilities to elevate the performance of supply chains from their present levels.

The proposed framework is illustrated by applying it to identify opportunities for improving the performance of two supply chains: supply chain in the “Beer Distribution Game” (Sterman 1989) and a version of that supply chain modified to include more real-world features. The opportunities presented here are certainly not exhaustive, but are chosen to illustrate the framework in a concise manner.

Although this paper focuses on identifying opportunities for improving supply chain performance using the IoT, several issues need to be addressed before the implementation can be realised. Firms in a supply chain collaborating through a cloud-based IoT solution need to ensure that the devices used for collecting and sharing information are secure to prevent malicious hacking of the network or snooping attempts for industrial espionage. Firms will also need to use devices and cloud platforms with compatible information-exchange protocols to enable inter-device communication. Uninterrupted power supply and network connectivity will be necessary for optimum performance of a supply chain’s IoT implementation. Furthermore, ethical issues related to individual privacy

22 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

need to be addressed before information about individual consumers can be collected and used for commercial purposes. Data ownership issues will also need to be addressed for the data collected from consumers as well as individual firms.

Assuming the implementation hurdles can be overcome, the opportunities for improving performance of supply chains by leveraging IoT capabilities are practically limitless. They are bounded only by our creativity. A framework based on a strong theoretical foundation, such as the one presented in this study, can help practitioners identify such opportunities. After all, we strongly believe that “nothing is as practical as a good theory” (Lewin 1945).

References

Biswas, D, Ramamurthy, R, Edward, S P and Dixit, A (2015) The internet of things: Impact and applications in the high-tech industry, Teaneck, NJ (USA): Cognizant.

Chui, M, Löffler, M and Roberts, R (2010) ‘The internet of things’, McKinsey Quarterly (2), 70 – 79.

Croson, R and Donohue, K (2006) ‘Behavioral causes of the bullwhip effect and the observed value of inventory information’, Management Science, 52(3): 323 – 336.

Ditto, P H and Lopez, D F (1992) ‘Motivated skepticism: Use of differential decision criteria for preferred and nonpreferred conclusions’, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 63(4): 568 – 584.

Edwards, K and Smith, E E (1996) ‘A disconfirmation bias in the evaluation of arguments’, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 71(1): 5 – 24.

Evans, D (2011) The internet of things: How the next evolution of the Internet is changing everything, San Jose, CA: Cisco Internet Business Solutions Group.

Galbraith, J R (1974) ‘Organization design: An information processing view’, Interfaces, 4(3): 28 – 36.

Ho, T H, Lim, N and Cui, T H (2010) ‘Reference dependence in multilocation newsvendor models: A structural analysis’, Management Science, 56(11): 1891 – 1910.

Hogarth, R M and Makridakis, S (1981) ‘Forecasting and planning: An evaluation’, Management Science, 27(2): 115 – 138.

Kiesler, S and Sproull, L (1982) ‘Managerial response to changing environments: Perspectives on problem sensing from social cognition’, Administrative Science Quarterly, 27(4): 548 – 570.

23Internet of Things and Supply Chains: A Framework for Identifying Opportunities for Improvement and its Application

Chapter 1

Kunda, Z (1987) ‘Motivated inference: Self-serving generation and evaluation of causal theories’, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 53(4): 636 – 647.

Lee, H L and Whang, S (2000) ‘Information sharing in a supply chain’, International Journal of Manufacturing Technology and Management, 1(1): 79 – 93.

Lee, H L, Padmanabhan, V and Whang, S (1997) ‘Information distortion in a supply chain: The bullwhip effect’, Management Science, 43(4): 546 – 558.

Lewin, K (1945) ‘The Research Center for Group Dynamics at Massachusetts Institute of Technology’, Sociometry, 8(2): 126 – 136.

Lord, C G, Ross, L and Lepper, M R (1979) ‘Biased assimilation and attitude polarization: The effects of prior theories on subsequently considered evidence’, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 37(11): 209 – 2109.

Macaulay, J, Buckalew, L and Chung, G (2015) Internet of things in logistics: A collaborative report by DHL and CISCO on implications and use cases for the logistics industry, Troisdorf, Germany: DHL Customer Solutions & Innovations.

O’Neil, C (2016) Weapons of math destruction: How big data increases inequality and threatens democracy, New York: Crown Publishers.

Phadnis, S S (2015) Connecting supply chains to the Internet of Things, Supply Chain Frontiers, http:// ctl.mit.edu/pub/newsletter/supply-chain-frontiers-58-connecting-supply-chains-internet-things (Accessed 3 November 2017)

Ravi, R and Wu, L (2015) Demystifying Industry 4.0: Implications of internet of things and services for the chemical industry, Unpublished master’s thesis, Shah Alam, Malaysia: Malaysia Institute for Supply Chain Innovation.

Ren, Y and Croson, R (2013) ‘Overconfidence in newsvendor orders: An experimental study’, Management Science, 59(11): 2502 – 2517.

Rong, K, Hu, G, Lin, Y, Shi, Y and Guo, L (2015) ‘Understanding business ecosystem using a 6C framework in Internet-of-Things-based sectors’, International Journal of Production Economics, 159: 41 – 55.

Rose, J, Lukic, V, Milon, T and Cappuzzo, A (2016) Sprinting to value in Industry 4.0, Boston Consulting Group.

24 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Rose, K, Eldridge, S and Chapin, L (2015) The internet of things: An overview, Geneva, Switzerland: The Internet Society.

Schweitzer, M E and Cachon, G P (2000) ‘Decision bias in the newsvendor problem with a known demand distribution: Experimental evidence’, Management Science, 46(3): 404 – 420.

Sterman, J D (1989) ‘Modeling managerial behavior: Misperceptions of feedback in a dynamic decision making experiment’, Management Science, 35(3): 321 – 339.

The MPI Group (2016) The internet of things has finally arrived, The MPI Group.

Tushman, M L and Nadler, D A (1978) ‘Information processing as an integrating concept in organizational design’, Academy of Management Review, 3(3): 613 – 624.

Tversky, A and Kahneman, D (1974) ‘Judgment under uncertainty: Heuristics and Biases’, Science, New Series, vol. 185, no. 4157: 1124 – 1131.

Weick, K, Sutcliffe, K M and Obstfeld, D (2005) ‘Organizing and the Process of Sensemaking’, Organization Science, 16: 409 – 421.

Chapter 2 Robotics in Supply Chain Ms. Annie Khor Seow Keow and Dr. Au Yong Hui Nee

Introduction

Ernst & Young (2015) identified six megatrends that have the present and future capabilities to disrupt and reshape the world. These are: digital future; entrepreneurship growth, global marketplace; urban world; resourceful planet; and health re-imagined. Hausmann et al. (2015) elaborated on McKinsey’s seven important trends that are shaping or will shape the Transport and Logistics sector over the coming years:

1. New solutions from unexpected competitor.

2. The digital frontier.

3. Burdening capital expense (capex) as a prerequisite for competitiveness.

4. The impact of deregulation on growth and competition.

5. Consolidation and cooperation across the network.

6. Increased volatility of demand and input factors, and

7. Megacities and selected emerging trade routes.

More recently, according to the Logistics Bureau (2017), the six supply chain trends you cannot afford to ignore are:

1. Warehouse Robotics in the Supply Chain.

2. Autonomous Road Transportation.

3. The Blurred Line Between Logistics and Technology Services.

4. The Appeal of Supply Chain Social Responsibility.

26 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

5. The Race for the Last Mile, and

6. The Rise of the Virtual Logistics Team.

In a survey of managers at freight forwarders by the shipping software company Freightos Ltd., 68% said warehouse robotics would profoundly impact their industry (Chao 2016). According to the report from Tractica (2017), a market intelligence firm, warehousing and logistics robot units will grow from 40,000 units in 2016 to 620,000 in 2021. According to the market research study released by Technavio (a leading market research company with global coverage), the global material handling robotics market is expected to exceed USD20 billion by 2019, growing at a Cumulated Average Growth Rate (CAGR) of more than 8% during the forecast period (Modern Materials Handling 2016). Robotic shipments are expected to reach USD22.4 billion in global market value by the end of 2021, up from an estimated USD1.9 billion in 2016 (Reese 2017). Morgan Stanley quotes an International Federation of Robotics report that says 1.3 million new robots will be installed in factories over the next three years (Garcia 2017). Financially, Manyika et al. (2015) quoted McKinsey’s estimation of a potential economic impact on the scale of USD3.9 trillion – USD11.1 trillion in 2025 for Internet of Things (IoT) applications. According to the World Economic Forum (WEF), by 2022, 1 trillion sensors will be connected to the Internet, unleashing a torrent of data. By using technology such as machine learning, Artificial Intelligence (AI) and IoT to improve supply chain transparency, leaders in the back office are able to drive product excellence, accelerate time to market and develop new products and services (Patel 2016).

The head of logistics at SAP, Hans Thalbauer says the future of the digital supply chain is robotics and automation; industries are becoming smarter, as the entire process, from demand to delivery, occurs automatically; however, robotics and automation need to be effectively integrated into the overall business processes (Francis 2017). In an annual survey by the logistics industry group, MHI and Deloitte, 80% of manufacturing and supply chain executives said that the digital supply chain will be the predominant model within five years, while 61% of respondents said robotics and automation are a source of either disruption or competitive advantage. Within the next two years, Robotics and Automation adoption is expected to reach a 63% adoption rate, followed by IoT at 54% and Predictive Analytics at 52% (BusinessWire 2017).

Accordingly, the International Labour Organisation said about 56% of Southeast Asian salaried employment is at risk of displacement by technology over the next 20 years (Garcia 2017). Across the economy, almost 25 million jobs will be lost to automation in the next 10 years, while the new technology will create 15 million jobs, according to the research firm, Forrester (Clark and Bhasin 2017).

27Robotics in Supply Chain

Chapter 2

Based on Accenture’s Strategy Supply Chain Workforce Research 2016, supply chain executives believe digital advances will augment the supply chain workforce. They expect supply chain roles over the next three years to change most significantly in the following ways:

1. 65%: More forward looking, with strategic decisions to support business goals.

2. 51%: More data-driven decision making requiring more analytical skills, and

3. 46%: More automation of transactional activities and exception handling (Kreutzer, Meyer and Puertas 2017).

Industry 4.0, which started with the computerisation/automation of the manufacturing environment is now spilling onto the supply chain area.

The following sections will elaborate on the robotics and innovations occurred at DB Schenker, scrutinisation into the emerging trends of robotics and automation in the supply chain sector, and followed by the discussion held during the SCM Seminar held on 12 and 13 February 2017.

Robotics and innovations in DB Schenker: implementing the next generation of e-commerce in supply chain

Since the beginning of trade, man has constantly been on the lookout for ways and means to improve the supply chain, be it to resolve an operational difficulty or to improve the effectiveness and efficiency of the supply chain. Technology has played an important role in these improvements, in the form of robotics (including automation) and innovation.

The early forms of robotics in the supply chain tend to be rigid, inflexible and mechanised with large form factors. Their roles are mainly in the material handling arena and range from the simple pallet jacks and forklifts. Later forms tend to be more automated and included the conveyor belts and Automated Storage and Retrieval Solutions (ASRS). The technological advancements in robotics today have produced robots that are flexible, versatile and come in all sizes.

The demand of the marketplace and the boom of e-commerce has resulted in the next wave of technology innovation in Artificial Intelligence (AI) or robotic automation applications leveraging on cloud computing and IoT. Out of these innovations is the Automated Guided Vehicles (AGV), an ASRS goods-to-man picking solution that is essentially a robot that utilises barcodes, QR codes, etc., to navigate the warehouse. This system improves efficiency and accuracy in storing and picking of goods.

28 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

There were three initial competing AGVs in the American and Europe markets (Wurll 2015):

1. Kiva Systems founded in 2003 and acquired by Amazon in 2012.

2. G-Com System developed by Grenzebach in collaboration with Swisslog and introduced at BLG Logistics, Frankfurt, Germany in 2014.

3. Swisslog’s CarryPick System implemented for Lekmer at DB Schenker, Stockholm Arlanda, Sweden in 2015.

E-commerce companies such as Amazon in the USA, pioneered the AGVs in its supply chain, with logistics companies such as DB Schenker in Sweden, Europe adopting the solution to participate in the e-commerce boom. When Amazon acquired Kiva Systems (now known as Amazon Robotics) in 2012, they gained competitive advantage in improved order picking productivity, reduction in labour needs and reduction in training time. The use of robots also improves product inventory control and increases order accuracy.

DB Schenker Logistics is the first 3PL worldwide to implement the Swisslog’s CarryPick system, an Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV), a goods-to-man picking solution. The adoption of this solution is part of DB Schenker’s strategy to strengthen its position in the e-commerce logistics market by implementing the next generation of e-commerce.

Combined with an integrated parcel delivery system, the solution is currently being implemented for Lekmer.com, one of Scandinavia’s largest online toy retailers. The modular CarryPick goods-to- man system uses low-profile self-driving robot vehicles (AGVs guided by QR codes on the floor) to drive underneath mobile racks and deliver them to the picking workstations. From there, workers pick and place the requested items in shipping boxes. This implementation resulted in a reduction of real estate by 20% and manpower by 65%.

29Robotics in Supply Chain

Chapter 2

Figure 1 Rack layout in CarryPick System (Wurll 2015)

The CarryPick Systems enhanced productivity through improved order fulfilment in picking, packing and shipping process through goods-to-man system, resulted in speeding up of warehouse operations and decreasing labour requirements. It improves productivity by reducing training and down time, and increasing order accuracy and product inventory accuracy. It also resulted in electricity cost savings as the warehouse can be kept dark.

Figure 2 An AGV drives underneath mobile racks (DB Schenker 2017)

30 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Since 2015, top pure-play logistics corporations have made 26 investments and/or acquisitions totalling 13 each year, while logistics tech start-ups were on pace to raise $5 billion through over 300 deals in 2016, according to CB Insights, a venture capital database (Robotics and Automation News 2017). uShip, the online shipping marketplace and freight automation software provider, has closed a $25 million Series D round led by DB Schenker, one of the world’s largest logistics companies and an existing uShip partner. DB Schenker’s funding comes on the heels of unprecedented investment in logistics and supply chain technology. DB Schenker is investing in shaping the future of digital logistics. In July 2016, DB Schenker and uShip announced a milestone five-year agreement worth tens of millions to create Drive4Schenker, an online trucking platform, powered by uShip PRO, uShip’s enterprise freight automation technology. Also, Drive4Schenker recently launched in Germany will continue to be rolled out across Europe, optimising management of 5,000 loads per day with 30,000 DB Schenker transport providers. Expanding its successful partnership will expedite and streamline transport management and help DB Schenker, as a market leader in European land transport, to handle even larger volumes of freight.

AKTA project is another DB Schenker project. The Automation of Kitting, Transport and Assembly (AKTA) project is being funded by VINNOVA, Swedish Agency for Innovation Systems, and will be conducted between Autumn 2016 and Winter 2018. The project has a budget of over Swedish Krona (SEK) six million (approximately USD750,000) and is being conducted in partnership with FlexLink, AB Volvo, Schenker Logistics AB, Lorentzen & Wettre AB, CEJN AB, Väderstad AB and Mälardalen University, and Robotdalen (Robot Valley).

Emerging trends of robotics and automation in supply chain

In the past decade, Radio-frequency identification (RFID) is a device much used in supply chain applications. RFID is an embedded device which may be considered to be the intelligent agent of the product to which it is attached, since it can actually direct the entire lifecycle of the product, including its use in automated decision making and control functions connected with the product in subsequent manufacturing downstream of the supply chain (Kiritsis et al. 2003). Results indicate that RFID appears to be a disruptive technology as it supports new business models, entails major redesign of existing processes and fosters a higher level of electronic integration between supply chain members (Louis et al. 2005). RFID real-time data can be used to support dynamic scheduling in manufacturing and supply chain management so as to control production execution and logistics planning (Brewer et al. 1999).

Reported by Poon et al. (2009), RFID technology was adopted to facilitate the collection and sharing of data in a warehouse, and the feasibility of radio frequency identification case-based logistics resource management system (R-LRMS). According to Zhong et al. (2015), radio frequency identification (RFID) has been widely used where production resources attached with RFID facilities are converted into smart manufacturing objects (SMOs), and enormous data could be collected and used for supporting further decision-making in a holistic Big Data approach from massive RFID-enabled shopfloor logistics data.

31Robotics in Supply Chain

Chapter 2

Tsai (2011) found two major benefits after the RFID system was implemented in the semiconductor testing company, one being to improve efficiency, reduce human error, and eliminate manual processes, while the other was enterprise process automation. However, the use of RFID is not without obstacles. According to Angeles (2005), one of the major technical issues with RFID readers is the collision problem which occurs when readers are reading many chips in the same field. Therefore, RFID technologies should be implemented proactively, i.e. make the ROI case, choose the right RFID technology, anticipate RFID technical problems, leverage pilot project learning experiences, and manage the IT infrastructure issues of data management concerns and integration with back- end applications.

For Industry 4.0 to be realised, the supply chain has to become a completely integrated ecosystem that is fully transparent to all the players involved — from the suppliers of raw materials, components and parts, to the transporters of those supplies and finished goods, and finally to the customers demanding fulfilment. Companies that get there first will gain a difficult-to-challenge advantage in the race to Industry 4.0. The real goal will be the many new business models and revenue streams, which digital supply chain will open up (Schrauf and Berttram 2016). Industry 4.0 technologies can enable greater operational flexibility, reduce operational costs, drive more modular and adaptable automation, and promote business growth (Taliaferro et al. 2016).

According to Brody and Pureswaran (2013), three new technology revolutions — 3D printing, intelligent robotics and open source electronics promise unprecedented supply chain upheaval, thus companies and governments must understand and prepare for this new software-defined supply chain. Lee et al. (2016) suggested that the Technological Disruptions in Delivery are Advanced Algorithms and Analytics, Drones, Delivery Robots and Driverless or Autonomous Cars.

According to Merlino and Sproģe (2017), a new wave of Artificial Intelligence applications can approach and solve definitely many problems of Planning and Control of Supply Chain, while robotics is already transforming all the operational areas in Materials Handling as Amazon or Ali Baba, and Big Data new approaches can fully exploit the strategic potential of information available in supply chain areas.

Regionally, Kerry Logistics, a leading logistics service provider in Asia, has introduced six fully automated and programmed robotic butlers at its flagship facility PC3 in Hong Kong to meet the ever-growing consumer demands in online shopping, to become one of the first 3PLs in Asia to adopt robotic butlers in its operations to enhance fulfilment efficiency and accuracy (Kerry Logistics 2015). In Malaysia, MIMOS, the national R&D centre in ICT, is collaborating with China on research and development on smart manufacturing technology (Sebastian 2015). Johor Corp (JCorp) and Malaysian Investment Development Authority have invited Beijing Huize Boyuan Robot to invest RM15 billion on Robotic Future City, an industrial robotics hub and an R&D centre that creates 1,000 job opportunities (The Star, 30 April 2017).

32 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

In terms of human resources, Gartner, Inc. (a leading research and advisory company for business leaders) predicts that by 2020, 10 per cent of large enterprises in supply-chain-dependent industries will have created a chief robotics officer (CRO) position to oversee the blending of human and robotic workers (Pettey 2017), and high-velocity distribution centres need highly trained professionals to manage these highly automated operations, such as IT engineers, maintenance employees, and operations analysts (Taliaferro et al. 2016).

Roundtable discussion: robotics and automation in supply chain sector in Malaysia

At the moment, the use of robotics in Malaysia is still very minimal, on a “need-to” basis due to the cost of robotics versus “cheap” labour. As such, many businesses are not yet ready and they are still very complacent with the existing conditions. Some businesses still want to see the success/workability of the technology e.g., RFID before investing or implementation.

Between Multi-National Companies (MNCs) and Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs), MNCs are more willing to make the switch to robotics due to their massive scale and complexity of operations, while the SMEs are less willing or unable to invest in robotics due to the high cost involved. Having said that, even for the MNCs, the decisions to switch to robotics are normally made by their Head Office. The decisions to go robotics are normally made based on the basis of product consistency or complexity, health, safety and security, rather than on human resource cost justification.

Adoption of robotics and automation has both positive and negative impacts. On the positive side, robotics and automation improve consistency and can be error-free; they have the ability to work round the clock and can handle hazardous, repetitive, complex and/or intricate tasks. These can result in total cost reduction. As robotics can be implemented in the entire supply chain from production to warehousing to logistics, the costs saved can be substantial and can be allocated to other areas.

In addition, robotics and automation in supply chain offer new career choices or vocation for the workforce. The new career choices are in the area of design, development, configuration and implementation, handling, monitoring, and maintenance of the hardware and software related to the robotics and automation.

On the other hand, the adoption of robotics and automation poses a threat to the workforce especially the blue collar workers as their career could be affected. This can have significant social and ethical impact on the community. However, this can be addressed positively with forward planning by the regulators, educators and employers through retraining, introduction of new courses for the new vocation, and having new legislation to both embrace the innovation while protecting the party at threat at the same time.

33Robotics in Supply Chain

Chapter 2

It must also be noted that adoption of robotics and automation to an existing infrastructure of warehouse and distribution centre especially for e-commerce 3PLs can be challenging and costly. Data security against security risks is the top priority to avoid harmful attacks that could affect the entire operations (DHL Trend Research 2016, 2017). Autonomous technology such as vision-guided vehicles (VGVs) has to comply with safety regulations to avoid its effect to lives.

In addition, there are two competing labour factors facing the logistics industry that will significantly give rise to the adoption of automation technologies e.g., collaborative robotics:

1. An increasingly complex customer need for more logistics workers driven by the e-commerce revolution and its need for more parcel shipments.

2. Another factor is the need to cope with the decline in the size of the available workforce due to aging population (DHL Trend Research 2016, 2017).

Nevertheless, robots will increasingly be able to do more complex jobs, but there will always be a need for people for the most complex jobs and for the running of the machines in a hybrid system (Mizar 2016).

In order to achieve an optimum return on investment, the challenging requirements that influence a right option of warehouse automation programme include the order volumes; mix, weight and size of items; and the amount of lead time needed to fulfil orders with the upfront capital investment (Hardin 2016) in hardware, software and computing power to run advanced algorithms in real time (DHL Trend Research 2016).

According to Ames (2016), the easiest way to go robotic is to start from scratch, incorporating any required features like charging stations, Wi-Fi networks, and smooth floors into the design of a brand-new building. Though this approach is more expensive than adding robotics to an existing warehouse, it avoids the challenges of overlaying a new robotic system onto the existing systems. Furthermore, the use of computer vision transforms standard pallet trucks and tow tractors into driverless vision-guided vehicles (VGVs) that these VGVs do not require lasers, wires, magnets or tapes common to traditional AGVs. While AGVs offer some flexibility with floor designs, the floor may still require precise design and installation depending on the specific application or the load imposed (Hardin 2016). Nevertheless, the next-generation robots have changed to become lighter, more flexible, easier to program, cost-effective and thus more affordable (DHL Trend Research 2017), and require less infrastructure, using unobtrusive technologies for navigation instead of relying on permanent hardware like wires, magnets or beacons (Ames 2016).

34 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

On the implementation of robotics and automation in Malaysia, Malaysia appears to be far behind the robotics and automation trend. According to a study on Malaysia’s automation investment, only 30% of Malaysian manufacturers have started to invest and leverage on modern technology despite being receptive to the concept of industry 4.0 (Malaysia Productivity Corporation 2017). For instance, state skills development centres such as Penang Skills Development Centre (PSDC) has just started to train the necessary manpower for Industry 4.0 in Malaysia. There is still lack of local technical support and talent in robotics. Furthermore, adoption of automation needs to be thoroughly considered to avoid unnecessary capital expenditures. In addition, most businesses are still doubtful of the ROI of adopting robotics and automation in view of the “cheap” labour condition in Malaysia. Moreover, if the ROI period is too long, the ROI becomes untenable as the robotics and automation generally requires an upgrade every 5 years. Thus, robotics and automation in Malaysia are generally seen in the MNCs where their Head Office mandated it, or in the public/government arena such as seaports.

As the business environment and its ecosystem change to meet Malaysia’s ambition of being a developed nation by 2020, and should the availability of the right human resource becomes scarce, adoption of robotics and automation in Malaysia will happen sooner than later.

Conclusion

According to HKTDC (2017), online sales only account for around 1 – 2% of Malaysia’s total retail sales, while Wong (2017) estimates 5% of e-commerce penetration in Malaysia as of 2017. Proliferation of automation in supply chain is very much contributed by the intensification of e-commerce that requires an efficient supply chain to satisfy the needs of the consumers. The innovating logistics companies are those with close partnership or subsidiaries with an e-commerce platform such as DB Schenker in Europe, Amazon Logistics in US and Cainiao Network in China. The business environment in Malaysia is changing. With Malaysia’s ambition to be a developed country by 2020, Malaysia will actively pursue to have a part in the lucrative and booming e-commerce business. Quoted by EnterpriseTV (2017), iPay88 says that surpassing the RM3 billion mark (value of transacted e-commerce) in year 2016 is only the beginning for the potential growth for Malaysia. With Alibaba Group’s regional logistics hub at Port Klang Free Zone (PKFZ) as the first Digital Free-Trade Zone (DFTZ), inevitably it will revolutionise its retailing sector in Malaysia. Led by the Government, the industry has to invest to ride on the digital economy, move on to create value, and continue to be competitive in the global marketplace.

35Robotics in Supply Chain

Chapter 2

References

Ames, B (2016) Fewer restrooms, more charging stations: How robots will transform the warehouse, Material Handling, http://www.dcvelocity.com/articles/20161122-fewer-restrooms-more-charging- stations-how-robots-will-transform-the-warehouse/ (Accessed 22 November 2016)

Angeles, R (2005) ‘RFID Technologies: Supply-Chain Applications and Implementation Issues’, Information Systems Management, Winter: 51 – 65.

Brewer, A and Sloan, N (1999) ‘Intelligent tracking in manufacturing’, Journal of Intelligent Manufacturing, 10(3): 245 – 250.

Brody, P and Pureswaran, V (2013) The new software-defined supply chain, IBM Global Services, NY: USA.

Business Wire (2017) 80% of Manufacturing and Supply Chain Executives Say the Digital Supply Chain Will Be the Predominant Model within Five Years, http://www.businesswire.com/news/ home/20170405005008/en/80-Manufacturing-Supply-Chain-Executives-Digital-Supply (Accessed 5 April 2017)

Chao, L (2016) ‘Robots Gain Traction with Supply Chain Managers’, The Wall Street Journal, 6 April 2016.

Clark, P and Bhasin, K (2017) Amazon’s Robot War Is Spreading: A slew of new automation specialists appear on the warehouse battlefield, Bloomberg, https://www.bloomberg.com/news/ articles/2017-04-05/robots-enlist-humans-to-win-the-warehouse-war-amazon-started (Accessed 5 April 2017)

DB Schenker (2017) DB Schenker implementing next generation e-commerce, https://www.dbschenker. cz/log-cz-en/news-media/press-releases/14016824/next-generation-ecommerce.html (Accessed 26 April 2017)

DHL Trend Research (2016) Robotics in Logistics, Troisdorf, Germany.

DHL Trend Research (2017) Logistics Trend Radar Version 2016, https://delivering-tomorrow.com/ wp-content/uploads/2017/03/dhl-logistics-trend-radar-2016.pdf (Accessed 28 February 2018)

EnterpriseTV (2017) Malaysia’s e-Commerce Surpasses RM3 Billion in Value in Year 2016, http://www. enterprisetv.com.my/malaysias-ecommerce-surpasses-rm3-billion-in-value-in-year-2016/ (Accessed 11 January 2017)

36 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Ernst & Young (2015) Megatrends 2015: Making sense of a world in motion, http://ey.com (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Francis, S (2017) SAP logistics boss says ‘robotics and automation are the future’, Robotics and Automation News, https://roboticsandautomationnews.com/2017/01/19/sap-logistics-boss-says-robotics-and- automation-are-the-future/10692/ (Accessed 19 January 2017)

Garcia, T (2017) Nike, Adidas adding robots to supply chain to deliver shoes customers want faster, MarketWatch, http://www.marketwatch.com/story/nike-adidas-adding-robots-to-supply-chain-to- deliver-shoes-customers-want-faster-2017-06-07/print (Accessed 8 June 2017)

Hardin, W (2016) E-commerce and the Drive to Automate the Supply Chain, IEEE Global Spec, http://insights.globalspec.com/article/3015/e-commerce-and-the-drive-to-automate-the-supply- chain (Accessed 4 August 2016)

Hausmann, L, Nangia, I, Netzer, T, Rehm, W and Rothkopf, M (2015) Pathway to value creation, McKinsey, http://www.mckinsey.com (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Hong Kong Trade Development Council (HKTDC) (2017) Malaysia: Online Retailing Opportunities, http://economists-pick-research.hktdc.com/business-news/article/Research-Articles/Malaysia-Online- Retailing-Opportunities/rp/en/1/1X000000/1X0A94DB.htm (Accessed 24 February 2017)

Kerry Logistics (2015) Kerry Logistics Deploys the Award-winning Robotic Fulfillment Solution to Meet e-Commerce Demands, https://www.logisticshandling.com/articles/2015/09/23/kerry-logistics- deploys-award-winning-robotic-fulfilment-solution-to-meet-e-commerce-demands/ (Accessed 14 September 2015)

Kiritsis, D, Bufardi, A and Xirouchakis, P (2003) ‘Research Issues in Product Lifecycle Management and Information Tracking Using Smart Embedded Systems’, Advanced Engineering Informatics, 17: 189 – 202.

Kreutzer, B, Meyer, M A and Puertas, F (2017) Liberating the supply chain workforce: How artificial intelligence, robots and prescriptive analytics will boost human potential, Accenture.

Lefebvre, L A, Lefebvre, E, Bendavid, Y, Wamba, S F and Boeck, H (2005) ‘The potential of RFID in warehousing activities in a retail industry supply chain’, Journal on Chain and Network Science, 5: 101 – 110.

Lee, H L, Chen, Y W, Gillai, B and Rammohan, S (2016) Technological Disruption and Innovation in Last-Mile Delivery, White Paper, Standford Graduate School of Business.

37Robotics in Supply Chain

Chapter 2

Logistics Bureau (2017) 6 Key Supply Chain and Logistics Trends to Watch in 2017, http://www. logisticsbureau.com/6-key-supply-chain-and-logistics-trends-to-watch-in-2017/ (Accessed 24 January 2017)

Malaysia Productivity Corporation (MPC) (2017) 24th Productivity Report 2016/2017, http://www. mpc.gov.my/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Productivity-Report-2017.pdf (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Manyika, J, Chui, M, Bisson, P, Woetzel, J, Dobbs, R, Bughin, J and Aharon, D (2015) The Internet of Things: Mapping the Value Beyond the Hype, McKinsey Global Institute, http://www.mckinsey. com/mgi (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Merlino, M and Sproģe, I (2017) ‘The Augmented Supply Chain’, 16th Conference on Reliability and Statistics in Transportation and Communication (RelStat’2016), 19 – 22 October 2016, Riga, Latvia, Procedia Engineering, 178: 308 – 318.

Mizar, S P (2016) The rise of robots in supply chain, Future Ready Singapore, https://www. futurereadysingapore.com/2016/the-rise-of-robots-in-supply-chain.html (Accessed 12 January 2016)

Modern Materials Handling (2016) Global material handling robotics market to exceed $20 billion by 2019, http://www.mmh.com/article/global_material_handling_robotics_market_to_exceed_20_ billion_by_2019 (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Patel, V (2016) Automation, robots and A.I: The rise of the supply chain machines, Digital Supply Chain, http://www.supplychaindigital.com/scm/automation-robots-and-ai-rise-supply-chain-machines (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Pettey, C (2017) The Rise of the Chief Robotics Officer, Gartner, http://www.gartner.com/ smarterwithgartner/the-rise-of-the-chief-robotics-officer/ (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Poon, T C, Choy, K L, Chow, H KH, Lau, H C W, Chan, F T S and Ho, K C (2009) ‘A RFID case- based logistics resource management system for managing order-picking operations in warehouses’, Expert Systems with Applications, 36: 8277 – 8301.

Reese, H (2017) Robots in warehouses to jump 15X over next 4 years, but won’t take all the jobs, TechRepublic, http://www.techrepublic.com/article/robots-in-warehouses-will-expand-to-620000- by-2021-according-to-report/ (Accessed 6 March 2017)

Robotics and Automation News (2017) uShip raises $25 million to fund logistics automation plan, https://roboticsandautomationnews.com/2017/02/17/uship-raises-25-million-to-fund-logistics- automation-plan/11407/ (Accessed 17 February 2017)

38 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Schrauf, S and Berttram, P (2016) Industry 4.0: How digitization makes the supply chain more efficient, agile, and customer-focused, PWC.

Sebastian, L (2015) Malaysia-China Relations Set To Intensify With Technology Collaboration.

The Star (2017) Robot firm wants to invest RM15 bil, http://www.thestar.com.my/news/ nation/2017/04/30/robot-firm-wants-to-invest-rm15bil-johor-in-final-talks-to-clinch-china-deal/ (Accessed 30 April 2017)

Taliaferro, A, Guenette, C A, Agarwal, A and Pochon, M (2016) Industry 4.0 and distribution centers, Transforming distribution operations through innovation, Deloitte, https://dupress.deloitte. com/dup-us-en/focus/industry-4-0/warehousing-distributed-center-operations.html (Accessed 12 September 2016)

Tractica (2017) Warehousing and Logistics Robot Shipments Will Reach 620,000 Units Annually by 2021, https://www.tractica.com/newsroom/press-releases/warehousing-and-logistics-robot-shipments-will- reach-620000-units-annually-by-2021/ (Accessed 2 March 2017)

Tsai, Y S (2011) ‘An RFID-based manufacture process control and supply chain management in the semiconductor industry’, International Journal of Information Technology and Management (IJITM), 12(1/2): 85 – 105.

Wong, C K (2017) eCommerce penetration in Malaysia is now 5% of retail sales (2017f ), http:// www.ecinsider.my/2017/03/ecommerce-penetration-malaysia-is-5pct-of-retail-sales.html (Accessed 30 March 2017)

Wurll, C (2015) Robogistics: Robotics in Logistics, Swisslog Automation GmbH, https://www. ostwestfalen.ihk.de/fileadmin/user_upload/20151022-PR-WuC-E-1-Robogistics_-_Robotics_in_ Logistics.public_Vortrag_Dr._Wurll.pdf (Accessed 28 February 2018)

Zhong, R Y, Huang, G Q, Lan, S L, Dai Q Y, Xu, C and Zhang, T (2015) ‘A big data approach for logistics trajectory discovery from RFID-enabled production data’, Int. J. Production Economics, 165: 260 – 272.

Chapter 3 Big Data in Supply Chain Dr. Quah Hock Soon, Mr. Jason Tan Khee Kwong and Mr. Chong Fook Suan

Abstract

Big data offers vast prospects in transforming supply chain. Application of data, storage, analysis and being connected to the Internet of Things (IOT) has brought new commercial opportunities in supply chain management. Innovative means of data consumption and analysis provide business intelligence on predicting demand trends, assisting business analytics or predictive models for e-commerce supply chain. An effective design of the supply chain at the enterprise level can be achieved through the integration of information system infrastructures which include hardware such as sensors, RFID, QR codes, barcodes and other technology means that provide competitive advantage. The abundance of data also provides challenges to supply chain managers. With the right level of data governance and business model, big data offers new sources of economic value in supply chain.

Introduction

Big data is no longer a new concept. The International Data Corporation (Morris et al. 2014) predicts that digital data will grow from 2.8 trillion gigabytes in 2012 to 40 trillion gigabytes by 2020. Implications on the domain of supply chain operation model (SCOR) can be seen on processes related to supply planning, sourcing, make and deliver processes. In the planning stage, data are analysed to predict market and consumer trends. During the sourcing process, big data enables more effective and faster supplier search, supplier negotiations, supplier evaluation and supplier selection. Data connectivity and databases are used during the make process to ensure the right supply-demand of inventories, schedules and automation of process within the array of manufacturing processes. In the shipment delivery stage, the various applications of big data improve the precision and delivery cycle time. Disruptive progress on Internet of Things (IOT) and e-commerce compel corporate leaders and operations managers to innovate and invest in the application of big data in the supply chain. Big data in supply chain is already here.

40 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Data explosion and ripe for commercialisation

Conceptually, big data is a term that describes the large volume of data. Industry players have categorised big data into three (3) mainstreams, namely Volume, Variety and Velocity, since early year 2000. Enormous sources of data acquired from business transactions, social media and machine- to-machine interactions from different organisations in the value chain pose data storage challenges. New technology such as Hadoop (an open source, Java-based programming framework) supports the processing and storage of extremely large data sets in a distributed computing environment. Innovations in RFID tags, sensors and smart metering addressed the velocity of data streams to manageable real time. The variety of data exists in structured or unstructured format. The structured data exist in numeric forms such as traditional databases or unstructured text documents, email, video, audio, stock ticker data and financial transactions. Recent development has also identified that data variability affects handling, and veracity affects quality of data and subsequently accurate analysis. The challenges related to data volume, variety, velocity, variability and veracity keep increasing.

As data centric technologies mature and become more accessible, organisations in supply chain are innovating new approaches to apply and introduce new data-driven products and services. Figure 1 illustrates the benefits of big data.

Fuel Innovation

Drive Profitability

Increased Operational Effectiveness

29%

42%

29%

Figure 1 Benefits of big data (Hagen, C and Khan, K 2014)

41Big Data in Supply Chain

Chapter 3

The value from big data comes from the processing and analysis of it to provide insights on products and services. The insights link suppliers, manufacturers and retailers to customers into a more efficient supply chain. The commercialisation of big data in supply chain requires significant efforts to align the data value with targeted users, the breadth and depth of service offered, improving the customer support infrastructure and data storage accessibility. The sweeping changes in big data technologies and management approaches need to be accompanied by dramatic shifts in the manner data supports decisions and product/service innovation.

Big data enables supply chain in a big way

Conceptually, a supply chain involves bidirectional flows of information, products and cash. The bidirectional flows between suppliers, service providers, manufacturers and final customers occur through different supply nodes. Transactional data have been conventionally designed as Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Advanced Planning System (APS) or even customised supply chain execution tools to improve supply chain response between stakeholders. With the advent of data explosion, the pervasive use of big data in data mining and analytics transforms supply chain through new forms of data, solves existing business problems and creates new opportunities. For example, e-retail giant Amazon.com handles millions of back-end operations everyday, as well as queries from more than half a million third-party sellers in a capacity of terabytes. eBay uses two data warehouses (in petabytes range) as well as Hadoop cluster for search, consumer recommendations and merchandising (Wikipedia). Essentially, big data enables the supply chain in multiple ways as articulated in the following framework:

1. Responsive sensing analytics: The traditional supply chain model relies on historical data such as order or shipment data, to sense demand and react with series of supply chain solutions. However, such a business model creates a disadvantage where the supply chain is poor at sensing and responding to demand and supply changes. Recent development in data mining, text mining, and rule-based ontologies allow supply chain operations to understand their customers better. The digitalisation of business has allowed supply chain organisations to listen cross-functionally to customer sentiments and use advanced analytics to test market response. The data related to these feedback mechanisms is either sourced from internally-established data warehouse, procured from large database service providers or from social media.

2. Predictive supply chain scenario planning: Current data structure within the supply chain is somewhat hard coded. Often, the data structure produces response based on average value and non-complex “if-then-else” logic. The disadvantage is the inherent inflexibility to support complex scenario planning. Supply chain managers who need more flexible options are turning to predictive analytics or rules-based ontologies to map out “multiple ifs to multiple then” through learning systems.

42 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

3. Making delivery channels effective and visible: Competitive development in e-commerce makes supply chain managers reconsider their delivery channel programmes. Rapid digitalisation of data and the widespread use of digital devices on various platforms offer new business solutions to different industries. For example, in the brick-and-mortar retail industry and the fast-moving goods supply chain, operation managers are aware that consumer decisions are made on the shelf but the data they see and respond to every day is limited to their own company data. The enormous data integration (ranging up to petabyte) acquired through Point of Sales, Radio Frequency Identification Tag (RFID), barcode information from mobile, social and e-commerce data enables the smooth integration of the supply chain delivery mechanism to rely heavily on sensors, which in turn rely more on the volume of data. RFID sensors send high volumes of data in different format or pattern, with improved recognition system and adaptive infrastructure which makes the delivery channel more effective and efficient. The volume, depth and variety of data transacted across supply chain organisations provide real time data feed. The impact of geolocation, mapping data and visualisation of supply sensing transmission through sensors on items, totes, trucks and rail cars, or containers transforms supply chain visibility.

4. Digitised manufacturing and services: The advent of IOT requires supply chain managers to think differently in the manufacturing and service sectors. The extensive expectation of mobility and digital inputs from sensors requires manufacturers to react in real time rather than to event-based execution model. Production scheduling, planning and maintenance programmes are facilitated by machine output or machine learning through extensive data transacted. In the service sector, the use of such mobility and digital inputs transforms the service industry. For example, airplanes automatically communicate the performance status of the equipment on board upon landing, expensive earth movers in remote locations transmit signals regularly, and electricity-generating windmills send signals at regular intervals to control towers. These signals are then used to plan the maintenance servicing and parts replacement. The manner of data streaming at high volumes and high variety transforms the IOT in the service industry.

The enormous data application represents a critical source of business insights and information that creates a competitive advantage for the multiple stakeholders in a supply chain. Big data improves operational efficiency and profitability through speed or visibility, thus improving the overall stakeholders’ relationship. The enhanced agility and responsiveness leads to competitive and shorter time to market especially in the supply chain IOT, and ultimately higher revenue recognition and competitive advantage.

43Big Data in Supply Chain

Chapter 3

Getting the supply chain ready

In order to harvest the positive impact on the supply chain, organisations need to innovate the approaches on big data. Firstly, the supply chain stakeholders need to redesign the market dynamics to reflect end-consumers by incorporating and segmenting the data usage and analysis in business processing to different target market. It needs to consider how different consumer groups across the value chain will consume and benefit from the data. Secondly, the supply chain manager needs to adjust, modify, implement incremental improvements, or re-engineer the manufacturing or service model to take advantage of the data stream. Improvement or investment within the upstream to downstream data chain management (hardware or software) should not be ignored. For example, part of resolving data-related issues may require reloading of data sets, running queries to ensure data integrity and consistency, or conducting data quality checks. Effective change management is required to deliver the optimised business processes which translate to increase or create new revenue streams. Responsive and agile supply chain needs to design effective alternate data storage infrastructure. An optimal data storage infrastructure should deliver targeted service quality with optimised service delivery costs. This in turn supports data replication strategy within the supply chain network, thus improving retrieval data. Staying ahead of the game through data analysis, visualisation of data sets, statistics, algorithm, machine learning, knowledge on open sources tools, or programming languages help a supply chain’s product and service research development. Unknowingly, many technology or service-based companies are sitting on untapped sources of revenue in the form of operational data. It is important that enterprises leverage their human resource and staffing teams to attract and retain these skill sets to support their data-driven product portfolio.

Conclusion

Supply chain companies intending to increase efficiency and profitability should be cognisant of the impact and potentials of big data. While recognising the technical investment, industries in supply chain should institute operational efficiencies into the supply chain. Productivity, collaboration, speed and visibility can be maximised while time spent on manually monitoring events can be minimised. Improving visibility through data connectivity improves the relationship between multiple supply chain stakeholders such as vendors, suppliers, carriers, distributers, warehouses, and customers. Precise data analytics and predictive models help supply chain companies to identify issues early and proactively respond before problems surface. With big data, supply chains should be more agile and responsive. Big data revolution is here and it is timely for the supply chain to engage and reap the benefits.

44 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

References

Antai, I and Olson, H (2013) ‘Interaction: a new focus for supply chain vs. supply chain competition’, International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management, 43(7), pp. 511 – 528.

Chae, B, Sheu, C, Yang, C and Olson, D (2014) The impact of advanced analytics and data accuracy on operational performance: A contingent resource based theory (RBT) perspective, Decision Support Systems, 59(1), pp. 119 – 126.

Columbus, L (2015) Ten ways big data is revolutionizing supply chain management, Forbes, https:// www.forbes.com/sites/louiscolumbus/2015/07/13/ten-ways-big-data-is-revolutionizing-supply chain- management/#5ed945ae69f5 (Accessed 10 May 2017)

Hagen, C and Khan, K (2014) Big Data: Go Big or Go Home? Supply Chain Insights, http:// iveybusinessjournal.com/publication/big-data-and-analytics-go-big-or-go-home/ (Accessed 10 May 2017)

Morris et al. (2014) A Software Platform for Operational Technology Innovation, International Data Corporation, https://www.predix.com/sites/default/files/IDC_OT_Final_whitepaper_249120.pdf (Accessed 10 May 2017)

Sethuraman, M S (2012) Big data’s impact on the data supply chain, Cognizant.

Vasan, S (2014) Impact of Big Data and Analytics in Supply Chain Execution, Digital Supply Chain, http://www.supplychaindigital.com/logistics/impact-big-data-and-analytics-supply-chain-execution (Accessed 10 May 2017)

Wamba, S F and Akter, S (2016) Big Data Analytics for Supply Chain Management: A literature review and research agenda, http://rd.springer.com/chapter/10.1007%2F978-3-319-24626-0_5 (Accessed 10 May 2017)

Zuk, J (2015) Five Critical Components to Commercializing Data-Driven Products, http://insidebigdata. com/2015/06/04/five-critical-components-to-commercializing-data-driven-products/ (Accessed 10 May 2017)

Chapter 4 Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends Dr. Loo Saw Khuan and Mr. Francis Seow Hai Swee

Introduction

Electronic procurement (e-procurement) is the use of electronic methods in every stage of the procurement processes from identification of requirement, through to supplier sourcing, request for quotation, purchase order issues, payment and contract management. The current technology of e-procurement has been available since beginning of 21st century. The issue is, not all procurement professionals have been fully implementing this e-procurement until now. Nevertheless, the emerging trends of procurement technologies such as artificial intelligence, Procurement 4.0, Big data, 3D printing and Internet of Things (IoT) have begun to affect procurement professionals.

A study conducted for 830 procurement decision makers across the United Kingdom, Europe and North America shows that 68% of companies have automation, 59% implement e-sourcing, 54% have predictive analytics and 54% have IoT. However, most of the companies which adopted these technologies are located in North America and their workforce is greater than 3000. In addition, North America is 8% more likely to adopt these technologies as compared to Europe. In spite of the importance of technologies in procurement, talent in technology is only ranked as the sixth most important skills and only 17% of procurement department claim the technology skills gap (Avery 2015). This scenario poses a challenge to procurement professionals who have yet to adopt the emerging technologies, especially those located in developing countries.

Current technology of electronic procurement

The two core processes of e-procurement (electronic procurement) are e-sourcing and e-requisition. E-sourcing uses the Internet to make decisions and form strategies pertaining to how and where to obtain products and services. E-sourcing is more for contractual processes with the tools of e-tendering and e-RFQs (request for quotation and e-auctions) (Baily, Farmer, Crocker, Jessop and Jones 2008). E-requisition is the web-based application used to process and monitor purchase requisition; it is more transactional with the tool such as e-catalogues. E-requisition may be called as e-ordering.

46 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The main predictor for adoption of e-procurement techniques was perceived drivers. The perceived drivers included better decision making, better inventory management, increasing order accuracy, increasing the visibility of suppliers’ products, reducing cycle time for order completion, easy to try or switch to new suppliers, reducing inventory cost, reducing price and reducing transaction cost. Internal and information barriers were significant predictors for e-procurement in the new buying situations. The internal barriers of e-procurement comprised of lack of IT system integration with the partners, inadequate technological infrastructure of business partners, inadequate in-house technological infrastructure and IT personnel, changing the way people work, lack of top management support, lack of corporate strategy and high technological implementation cost. Information barriers of e-procurement included the concerns about security, confidentiality and privacy of information exchange (Abu-Elsamen, Chakraborty and Warren 2010). The electronic execution of procurement activities improved supplier partnership, supplier performance, buyer performance, process integration and process automation (Tai, Ho and Wu 2010).

Organisation acceptance is likely to be a stronger predictor of performance than intensity of use for e-procurement of MRO (maintenance, repair and overhaul) items. It is because indirect materials and services are distributed across different departments. Hence, the potential benefits of e-procurement are expected to be greater when the application is deployed organisation-wide. However, multiple dimensions of infusions can interact with one another and affect performance. The research suggested that when the intensity level is low, higher performance can be achieved through higher acceptance. However, when the intensity is high, performance does not receive an additional benefit from higher acceptance. As such, procurement managers may need to focus more on the level of organisational acceptance rather than the level of intensity of use in order to increase the potential benefits. It is suggested to focus on improving one usage dimension at a time in order to successfully infuse e-procurement in that dimension, before turning attention to the other dimension, akin to a staged implementation approach (Yu, Mishra, Gopal, Slaughter, Mukhopadhyay 2015).

Blue Cross Blue Shield of Rhode Island (BCBSRI) implemented the procure-to-pay solution to tie in all the processes, goals and strategies. It selected Puridiom 4.0 Enterprise Cloud solution, which enabled automation of the antiquated and manual P2P (procure to pay, from point of order to payment). This subsequently enhanced the procurement team’s ability to influence supplier spend or total spending on suppliers. Furthermore, the solution enabled suppliers to transact electronically with BSBSRI. It also increased efficiency of the cost accounting and finance teams, while allowed the procurement team to negotiate fast-pay discounts. In addition, it allowed the company to track cost saving and ensured it ties in with the budget; it assisted in measuring and improving supplier performance. It assisted procurement to focus its resources on high value items and strategic activities.

47Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

A case study of e-requisition

A case study of e-requisition was conducted in a multinational company located in Malaysia. A comparison was made between the MRO purchase before and after using e-requisition. Before the implementation of e-requisition, the traditional MRO purchase involved a lot of processes with long lead time. It starts with the requestor who submits the request using purchase requisition (PR) to the procurement department manually. The procurement department will consolidate all the requisitions from various departments to finalise the total requirement. Once the quantity is determined, the procurement department will send out an RFQ (Request for Quotation) to at least 4 to 5 qualified suppliers. The qualified suppliers will have to produce a sample each, together with quotation for approval. Upon receipt of samples with price, the procurement department will call for a tender committee comprising of the requestor’s department heads, finance, procurement and warehouse, to decide on the price and quality of samples. Once finalised, the purchasing department will place orders for the uniforms from the approved supplier decided by the tender committee. Then, the supplier will deliver the uniforms and shoes to the warehouse once an order is placed by the buyers. The warehouse will keep the uniforms and shoes as a stock item. When required, each individual department will take out the uniforms and shoes from the warehouse accordingly.

Kindly refer to the following Figure 1 for the traditional purchasing flow which takes almost 32 days.

Acknowledge Quotations

(Tender Committee)

P/R

2 W/D # Full Specification # Possible Suppliers # Required Date

User Briefing to Tender

Committee

3 W/D

8 W/DPublic Advertisement (3 Major Local Newspapers)

# Artwork Confirmation # Mailing to PO Box # Collection by Agent # Courier Services to SCM

Select and Shortlist Suppliers (Tender

Committee) # Witness Tender Submission # Co. Basic Requirement # Select a Shortlist of Suppliers # Inform Shortlisted Suppliers

# Detailed Job Explanation # Site Viewing # Request Quotations

3 W/D 3 W/DBriefing to

Suppliers

# Open Tender Box # Compiling of

Quotations

3 W/D

# User Explanation # Cost Table Comparison # Finalise Section

Tender Meeting

3 W/D

5 W/D2 W/D Apply Sanction

User’s Responsibility

Issue P/O

P/O to Suppliers

Open Tender — With Tender Committee

Standard Process Lead Time Example: 32 W/Days

Figure 1 A traditional purchasing flow

48 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

However, after implementing e-requisition, the purchasing cycle is reduced tremendously. The procurement department can send the employees’ data to the qualified supplier pertaining to the name of each employee, date of employment, size of uniforms and shoes. The supplier can utilise all the employees’ information to prepare the uniforms and shoes as required. The shoes and uniforms will be delivered to the employees personally when they are due for collection. In this way, the warehouse does not have to keep the inventory. The company can eliminate the inventory-carrying costs. The employees can key in their employees’ number and acknowledge the receipt with a password and the receiving data can be forwarded to the Finance department for payment. In this process, the Finance department can verify the actual receipt of the uniforms and shoes from the employees personally. This process will eliminate all paperwork such as purchase requisitions, purchase orders, acknowledgement of receipt from the warehouse, inventory recording at the warehouse, and also matching of documents by the Finance department.

E-sourcing

Tata Motors used the e-sourcing of Ariba Sourcing to manage the procurement of direct materials, indirect goods, services and MRO. It saved $175 million from the cost base after two years. The e-sourcing Tata Motors started with direct materials as it comprised three-quarters of the vehicle cost (Supply Chain Europe 2007).

E-auctions create an environment where suppliers bid against each other for a contract. This environment encourages competition with the result that goods and services are offered at their current market value (CIPS). In order to hold a successful e-auction event, the procurement must understand the supplier market, identify potential suppliers, assess their capabilities and the total cost of doing business with suppliers, present suppliers with a complete set of prints, specifications and requirements, and honestly communicate the way in which competing suppliers will be judged and selected. Online auctions can be efficient and bring cost saving if the process is executed properly. Hence, a critical component to a successful auction is a dedicated buyer who is willing to allocate sufficient resources to design an equitable and well-specified auction event. However, price is only one dimension in a buyer-supplier relationship. There is a need to incorporate non-price attribute into the assessment of auction success (Elmaghraby 2007).

49Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

A new business process is involved to convert a traditional business process to an electronic format. Two factors of successful design of e-business protocols include identifying the functional difference between traditional and e-business, and recognising functional limitations of cryptographic technology when it is applied to the actual business process. The security requirements for an e-tender submission protocol are submission hiding, submission binding and submission time integrity. Submission hiding ensures no party can reveal any electronically submitted e-tender document before the designated tender opening. This is to ensure the security of every party’s tender strategy before the tender closing time. Submission binding could detect any party who altered or deleted any tender submission after the tender closing time. This will prevent the business conspiracy between the principal and its favoured tenders. Submission time integrity is to ensure that the time of tender submission can be recorded in a reliable manner. This is to provide reliable evidence on whether a tender is submitted on time (Du, Foo, Boyd 2008).

A case study of e-sourcing

A case study of a company in Penang discovered many benefits of e-sourcing by using the tools of e-bidding or e-tendering. The lead time required from request till complete of the sourcing procedure without e-sourcing will take about 20 days, with various manpower involved. However, by using e-sourcing, the procurement department can reduce 50% of the total processing time (from 20 days to 10 days) through e-bidding. The process is also reduced from 8 steps to 7 steps. This method is transparent. It also creates a level playing field for all vendors. The details are illustrated in the following Figure 2.

Typical sourcing workflow of 20 days processing time (8 steps)

Sourcing requirement

Internal requests for

quotation (RFQ)

Multiple requests for

quotation to multiple suppliers

Wait for suppliers' response

Consolidate and

compare quotations

Price verification

and negotiation

Shortlist suppliers

Issue purchase

order (32 days)

50 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

E-sourcing workflow of 10 days processing time with e-bidding from the 3rd to the 5th step (7 steps)

Sourcing requirement

Internal request for quotation

(RFQ)

Post RFQ online for e-bidding

E-bidding system send

invitations for suppliers to bid online

Suppliers responded in

e-bidding and prices are ranked

Shortlist suppliers based

on the lowest price

Issue purchase

order (10 days)

Figure 2 The processing time of typical sourcing vs. e-bidding sourcing

The advantages of e-sourcing by using the tools of e-bidding or e-tendering are summarised as follows:

1. Procurement professionals do not have to take the suppliers to visit the site.

2. It is sufficient to obtain a blueprint with all technical specifications for various types of items, brands and models indicated as per requirement, and forward to all qualified suppliers for quotation.

3. In the event, any supplier who needs more information can indicate their requests in the bulletin board. The reply will be notified to all invited suppliers.

The case study also found that e-sourcing could reduce costs in the following ways:

1. Reduce time in obtaining quotations.

2. Reduce manpower.

3. Create level playing field with proper control.

4. Demonstrate fairness and transparency with audit trails.

5. Eliminate accusations or allegations of unfair practices.

51Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

The following Figure 3 shows an example of how e-bidding enables price reduction. The bidding started with the lowest quote at RM3.2 million. The e-bidding allowed the competitors to see each other’s price though the names of the competitors were not disclosed. As such, all the three vendors were given equal opportunity to review and revise their price. The bidding started at 10:00 am and ended at 11:30 am on that particular day. By allowing auto time extension of 15 minutes to 11:45 am, they were able to achieve the cost reduction from RM2.75 million to RM2.7 million as shown in the chart (additional reduction of RM50K).

Reduce Manpower through Technology Example of e-bidding price reduction

3,200,000

3,100,000

3,000,000

2,900,000

2,800,000

2,700,000

2,600,000

10 :0

9: 32

10 :1

7: 09

10 :2

1: 01

11 :1

5: 15

11 :1

8: 42

11 :2

0: 04

11 :2

3: 06

11 :2

5: 53

11 :2

9: 15

11 :3

0: 33

11 :3

9: 35

11 :4

0: 44

11 :4

1: 11

11 :4

2: 48

11 :4

4: 15

11 :4

6: 22

11 :4

7: 08

11 :5

2: 17

11 :5

4: 09

11 :5

5: 11

11 :5

7: 03

Vendor A Vendor B Vendor C

Auto time extension

• 3 vendors bid to supply engineering services

• Bid starting at $3.2 mil is the lowest RFQ received

• After e-bidding, savings of another $500,000 or 15% is achieved

Figure 3 E-bidding price reduction

For example, there is a company named BidAsia, which provides an online procurement auction platform for bidders to compete dynamically with multiple bid price submissions in real time. Buyers get instant responses from suppliers. Table 1 shows the three options of its quotation. The prices are just a guide and it may change from time to time depending on demand and supply.

52 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Item Description Unit price MOQ Amount

Option 1 Annual subscription to 10 bidding projects at www.BidAsia.net e-bidding software as a service (SaaS).

Period of subscription: 12 calendar months from date of invoice or usage of up to 10 bidding projects, whichever comes first.

RM1000.00 10 projects RM10,000

Option 2 Annual subscription to 50 bidding projects at www.BidAsia.net e-bidding software as a service (SaaS).

Period of subscription: 12 calendar months from date of invoice or usage of up to 50 bidding projects, whichever comes first.

RM600.00 50 projects RM30,000

Option 3 Annual subscription to 200 bidding projects at www.BidAsia.net e-bidding software as a service (SaaS).

Period of subscription: 12 calendar months from date of invoice or usage of up to 200 bidding projects, whichever comes first.

RM300.00 200 projects RM60,000

Table 1 Example of quotations

The status of e-procurement in Malaysia

E-procurement is quite common for multinational companies which use enterprise software such as SAP Solutions or Oracle Database. However, some multinational companies and SMEs in Malaysia have yet to practise e-procurement. Some companies in Malaysia still send the hard copy of purchase orders to suppliers. A case study research on a multinational company in Penang revealed that printed purchase orders were faxed to suppliers before they were sent by postal service. Another case study with a multinational company in Penang showed that scanned copies of purchase orders were emailed to suppliers before they were sent by postal service.

53Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

Emerging trends of technologies in procurement

Emerging trends of technologies affecting procurement management include Procurement 4.0, Big data, Internet of Things (IoT), 3D printing, robotics and cognitive procurement. Emerging trends of technologies require procurement managers to possess critical thinking to identify information that is both relevant and actionable. Procurement must have associative thinking to look clearly at unrelated factors and see a previously undetected connection; it includes the ability to recognise patterns and decide what they mean. Procurement must make fast decisions, and be proactive to come out with real-time solutions to manage real-time data. The emerging technologies require procurement to master mainstream technology to solve procurement problems. The IoT will provide plenty of information which requires procurement to be innovative in using it (APN Consulting 2017). A supply chain roundtable conducted in Penang in year 2017 discovered that the abovementioned emerging technologies in procurement are still in the infancy stage and are not commonly adopted by multinational companies located in Penang.

Procurement 4.0 and big data in procurement

In Procurement 4.0, the strategic procurement is crucial and the procurement workforce is shrinking because it becomes autonomous in many aspects. Traditional purchasing will become obsolete.

Due to the knowledge of purchased materials and supply markets, procurement could increase its distinctive value proposition from being a cost centre to a profit centre. Procurement could utilise customer data to manage their incoming transportations and material inventory. Procurement could also share the customer data with their suppliers. In turn, suppliers are capable of designing products which are efficient in cost and function.

New technologies in Industry 4.0 will lead to changes of purchased items in procurement. Procurement will be required to source more frequently for new technology items, such as intelligent sensors, communicating actuators and associated controllers and software. The purchase of electronics items will grow but others may shrink or disappear. Moreover, the service procurement will increase tremendously which leads to many contracting approaches. There will be many intellectual property implications around the ownership of the data collected by sensors when the end products are sold and in use. Who owns the rights to this data, the sensor supplier, the control system or the software provider?

In order for data integration to take place, procurement will need to get suppliers on board. Data integration will then lead to supplier risk management to detect supplier failure (Geissbauer, Weissbarth, Wetzstein 2016). Procurement could use digital supplier scorecards, objectives and improvement tracking. Automated tracking of target achievement could be used as well (Schreiber, Janssen, Weaver, Peintner 2016). As Procurement 4.0 data integration takes place, procurement will play an integral role in getting suppliers on board and optimising the end-to-end supply chain.

54 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

“Big data” is defined as any analysis activity with a purpose to get more insight from the large amount of data in order to generate business values. Many procurement organisations have yet to fully leverage this large amount of data from internal and external sources. Big data is helpful in updating the risks from suppliers and sourcing markets, such as natural disasters or bankruptcies. Big data solution could discover new opportunities to reduce sourcing costs. Big data could potentially improve efficiency from 10% to 30%. With big data, data-oriented evidence for all product quality and delivery issues becomes possible. The first step of big data initiative is to generate hypotheses on what correlations among the available data might have actual business value. The second step is to identify all potentially relevant data sources to support the business case. The third step is to quickly build prototypes to verify correlations and support the hypotheses. The final step is to implement a robust IT-based solution specifically for the most urgent and critical correlations. It is important to start small with rapid prototypes before implementing a full-fledged solution (Sauter 2014).

Smart technologies and algorithms allow huge volumes of data from various sources to be aggregated, processed and analysed. The resulting analyses can be used to understand suppliers and supply markets which can automatically drive procurement decisions. The big data could provide information to optimise maintenance services and the inventory management of spare parts (Geissbauer, Weissbarth and Wetzstein 2016).

Predictive information about where and when to expect the next failure will offer an opportunity to optimise maintenance services and the availability of spare parts. Procurement is to ensure that the analysis of big data is maximised to benefit both the focal companies and their suppliers (Geissbauer, Weissbarth and Wetzstein 2016).

Supplier innovation management could be achieved by linking the R&D strategy with the procurement strategy supported through digital dashboards. Procurement could establish laboratories to be shared with the key suppliers with the intention to encourage innovation through design thinking and rapid prototyping. Big data and advance analytics could be utilised to detect new technologies, material substitutes and new suppliers. In addition, crowd sourcing is another way of innovation (Schreiber, Janssen, Weaver and Peintner 2016).

Digital technologies contribute to collaboration of procurement in the entire value chain, from sourcing to contract negotiations; order delivery; payment and supplier management. Digital procurement processes include digital request for quotations, supplier financial analysis, procurement risk analysis, verification and e-signatures. These processes go beyond purchase-to-pay, with only limited manual support required. They reduce costs and free up highly qualified procurement staff from routine and repetitive tasks (Geissbauer, Weissbarth and Wetzstein 2016).

55Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

Internet of Things (IoT) and procurement

IoT will enable procurement to know exactly what is being used and what is needed. The ability to forecast the needs will also improve procurement and contract management. IoT requires procurement to be flexible and efficient. Procurement workflows will need to be mobile and connected just like everything else. Procurement will be able to analyse the insights from users’ purchases and activities in a mobile and connected way (Spend Matters 2015). IoT may improve the communication and trust between buyers and suppliers.

IoT may help procurement to gain visiblity in their spending and to analyse the suppliers and the equipment they use. IoT could provide updates about the new suppliers and directly send them an invitation for quotation after the necessary approvals. IoT assists procurement to create and monitor supplier contracts. It also alerts procurement for any suppliers who do not fulfil the contractual commitments (Bhavesh Shah 2015).

IoT will automate tactical tasks of procurement, which enable procurement functions to be more strategic. One of the challenges of IoT is that procurement will have to align processes and systems with other business units, which may have different processes and needs of IoT. With greater process automation and intelligence data, it is a real challenge for procurement to find staff with technological skills in addition to business degree graduates with passion for procurement (York 2015).

IoT enables devices and solutions for procurement to monitor inventory and issue orders. IoT could alert procurement when inventory is getting low in the warehouse. IoT provides insightful window of performance for outsourcing suppliers. In order to realise the benefits of IoT, procurement must have the right systems and processes in place to manage the high volume of data from IoT devices and solutions (Kinder 2014).

Due to the growth of new technology and process digitisation, procurement needs to change and update the traditional procurement methods. New suppliers with breakthrough technologies may be required. Long-term contract of 3 years with suppliers may not be applicable for certain areas of procurement. Alternatively, supplier contracts need to incorporate the opportunites to adopt new technologies (Granger 2016).

3D printing and procurement

The engineers may try to use 3D printing to bypass procurement, as parts will be made at the point of use rather than in a distant factory. It potentially shifts some global sourcing to local sourcing. As costs reduce, it may become cheaper and easier to procure certain specialised 3D printed items from suppliers on a local basis, rather than plan and procure through larger distribution networks. This will lead to a change in working practices, which could have a knock-on effect in other areas of the enterprise and alter timings across the board.

56 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

“3D printing enables much faster prototyping, shorter lead times and creates an environment where direct communication of standard design files is much easier. 3D printing has high potential value for rapid prototyping and manufacturing of customised, unique and complex products and parts. For many high volume, standardised and cheap items though, mass-production will likely remain the manufacturing technique of choice for the foreseeable future” (Spend Matters 2015).

3D printing enables “less push and more pull” of supplier delivery. It could reduce obsolescence caused by economic of scale. It encourages Just-in-time inventory, less stocking of raw materials and work in progress by utilising on-demand production. Suppliers could perform 3D printing in smaller factories close to the buyers in order to achieve localisation and lower shipping costs. However, 3D printing triggers unanswered questions to intellectual property rights. Instead of selling physical goods, the right of the design could be sold (Wilson 2015). There is potential threat or legal risks when companies use 3D printing for objects under patent protection. Procurement could work with suppliers to produce driven mass customisation and build to order products (Cube 2014).

Ford used 3D printing to make prototypes of automotive parts in 2013. General Motor used 3D printing to save the time required to make prototypes in the year 2014. 3D printing contributes to cutting down tooling costs (Cube 2014). Any increase of unit price from 3D printing is now offset by the elimination of shipping and inventory carrying costs (Cube 2014). Anything the company can print by themselves may not be purchased externally. Suppliers just need to send the data for printing. It means MRO and spare parts may not need to be purchased but printed internally. Only bulk items need to be purchased (Gracht, Guinipero and Schueller 2016).

Robotics and procurement

Procurement automation is no longer optional. In fact, it is a key strategy to achieve operational excellence (Supply Chain Management Review 2012). The procurement trend now is, old jobs are going away and new jobs are emerging. Most traditional or repetitive procurement activities are now automated. These include purchase order generation, change of orders, spend analytics and exception detection. Even sourcing functions are going to be performed by cognitive tools that effectively learn from human professionals. These functions may include supplier identification, request for quotation, analysis and scoring. Negotiation could be steamlined as standard agreements and click- through of terms for ordinary purchases. Ultimately, the fewer jobs that remain are going to have higher competency, higher pay and are more strategic. Managing supplier relationships becomes more important than negotiating supplier contracts (Huber 2015). The robots can send out requests for bids and procurement will be notified once the bids have been received. The procurement can then decide which bid to accept based on the information provided by the robot (Jain and Woodcock 2017).

57Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

Cognitive procurement

Cognitive procurement is the application of cognitive computing systems, which combines a series of capabilities including big data analytics, nature language processing and machine learning, to analyse and process large volume of data and provide procurement with the enhanced intelligence and guidance needed to make smarter and faster decisions in supplier management (Bartolini 2017). Hence cognitive procurement is also known as application of artificial intelligence (AI) in procurement. Cognitive procurement could potentially be utilised for spot buying. Once pricing falls below a certain threshold , the system could identify it and alert category managers to purchase the commodity. The notification could also suggest which market to focus on, which suppliers to contact and the best negotiation strategy (Bartolini 2017).

Cognitive procurement could present an “in context” data-driven and scientifically-based approach to procurement that analyses large volumes of internal data. This will enhance the decision making process of procurement (Bartolini 2017). For example, if the analysis requires five suppliers to bid for an e-sourcing, the sourcing tool may pause the decision until the five suppliers are invited. In addition, the tool could propose suppliers based upon the criteria included.

Cognitive procurement contributes to dynamic supply risk modelling and alerting. It could leverage the power of multiple data sources in order to stay abreast of the future risk landscapes. It can also automatically adjust themselves in accordance to the risk land scapes changes (Bartolini 2017) . For instance, if a political unstability happens in the country of a supplier, cognitive procurement will provide an early warning to enable procurement to prepare for contingency plans.

By generating real-time visibility of spend data, cognitive procurement helps to drive cost reduction, cost compliance and any exceptions. The Singapore government used artificial intelligence to identify and prevent procurement fraud. The artificial intelligence algorithm analyses procurement request and tender approvals (Darbie and Chandra 2016). If this is the case, artificial intelligence could potentially be used to identify and prevent procurement fraud in industrial organisations.

Cognitive procurement could be used to analyse the supplier contracts by identifying the various clauses and terms, build a library of the most commonly-used contracts and capture important metadata in the contracts. In addition, cognitive procurement has the capability to proactively alert procurement of critical upcoming events on contract deadlines, renewals and thresholds. Furthermore, cognitive procurement could recommend new contracts based on the frequency usage of existing contracts and similarities between contracts. A machine can learn and it means that its recommendations will become more accurate over time. If the procurement staff accepts or rejects recommendations, the system will learn from them to develop a preference scheme (Maltaverne 2017).

Predictive maintenance and cognitive procurement will order replacements parts before a machine breaks down. As such, procurement could focus their attention on the process efficiency of strategic MRO procurement tasks (Gracht, Guinipero and Schueller 2016).

58 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Cognitive procurement could estimate the global sourcing potential for an item by comparing its unit price, quality and technology requirement with the current database. Cognitive procurement could assess which supplier is most likely to meet the sourcing needs. In addition, it can recommend selecting a specific supplier. After the suppliers are selected, the system will continue to monitor the selected suppliers based on their promised delivery, quality and cost reduction. A series of automated mitigating actions will be triggered for exceptions; procurement will only be alerted if the actions fail to get the supply back on track (Jain and Woodcock 2017).

Procurement staff will become an expert on the procurement of professional services. Procurement activities such as supplier audits, supplier meetings and supplier workshops could take place in the virtual worlds. Procurement professionals could carry out these activities with a headset and personal avatar. In this scenario, the procurement’s added value depends on data management insight and intelligent algorithms. Future procurement requires a substantial commitment to technology as well as internal and external IT expertise. Procurement becomes intensively digitalised, automated, autonomous and networked. Digital talents become very important for procurement. Procurement must become the company’s central business partner for innovation. Procurement has to be more interdisciplinary level, developing more technical skills and participating in product development process. Procurement does not replace globalisation with localisation, but rather combines both strategies to create maximum value (Gracht, Guinipero and Schueller 2016).

Blindly trusting artificial intelligence could be a risk. Hence, machines should not only present results, but should briefly explain how the results are derived. Procurement professionals should demonstrate critical thinking and have the final say, but not the machine. The enormous cost to gather enough data to train the machine poses another challenge to cognitive procurement (Maltaverne 2017). Therefore, the procurement professionals have to assess the potential of cognitive procurement to decide the timelines of adopting it.

With many jobs taken by artificial intelligence, procurement professionals will have to focus on strategic directions, genuine skills and judgments that are not easily replicated by artificial intelligence (Smith and Osagie 2016). Procurement professionals are recommended to develop a big data strategy; invest in building data science talent and capabilities; maintain and build organisational expertise; track innovations and stay abreast of the cognitive procurement technology marketplace and prepare, knowing that the pursuit for cognitive procurement is going to be iterative (Bartolini 2017).

Conclusion

The current technology of e-procurement has proven to be beneficial for multinational companies located in Malaysia. Electronic procurement has reduced their purchasing cycles and purchasing costs significantly. Further research is required to review the impact of e-procurement in small and medium enterprises in Malaysia.

59Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

The emerging technologies of procurement are supposed to further enhance the procurement functions. Big data could potentially reduce sourcing cost and improve procurement efficiency. IoT will enable procurement to gain visibility in every stage of the purchasing activities. Instead of buying from overseas suppliers, 3D printing is an alternative solution to produce low volume items, spare parts and prototypes. Artificial intelligence will take over the repetitive roles in supplier selection and contract management so that procurement could focus on strategic and judgemental roles. However, digital talents are crucial for procurement professionals to succeed in these emerging technologies.

References

Abu-Elsamen, A, Chakraborty, G and Warren, D (2010) ‘A process-based analysis of e-procurement adoption’, Journal of Internet Commerce, 9: 243 – 259.

APN Consulting (2017) Procurement in the age of IoT: What skills do tomorrow’s manager need? http:// apnconsultinginc.com/articles/procurement-in-the-age-of-iot-what-skills-do-tomorrows-managers- need/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Avery, S (2015) Procurement: Internet of Things Technology to Have Impact, The purchasing center, http://www.mypurchasingcenter.com/technology/technology-articles/procurement-internet-things- technologies-have-impact/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Baily, P, Farmer, D, Crocker, B, Jessop, D and Jones, D (2008) Procurement principles and management, Pearson Education.

Bartolini, A (2017) Cognitive Procurement: The Age of Intelligence, Ardent Partners, https://public.dhe. ibm.com/common/ssi/ecm/wh/en/whl12345usen/WHL12345USEN.PDF (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Bhavesh Shah (2015) Procurement’s Internet of Things, Zyrus, https://www.zycus.com/blog/ procurement-technology/procurements-internet-of-things.html (Accessed 22 June 2007)

BidAsia (2018) http://www.BidAsia.net (Accessed 27 July 2017)

Cube, S (2014) Procurement in the Age of 3D Printing, My Purchasing Center, http://www. mypurchasingcenter.com/purchasing/industry-articles/procurement-age-3d-printing/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Darbie, A and Chandra, M (2016) Artificial Intelligence: The next big thing in Supply Chain Management, http://www.financialexpress.com/industry/artificial-intelligence-the-next-big-thing- in-supply-chain-management/329033/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

60 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Du, R, Foo, E and Boyd, C (2008) ‘Designing a secure e-tender submission protocol’, Electronic Commerce Research, 8:115 – 142.

Elmaghraby, W (2007) ‘Auctions within E-Sourcing Events’, Production and Operations Management, 16(4): 409 – 422.

Geissbauer, R, Weissbarth, R and Wetzstein, J (2016) Procurement 4.0: Are you ready for the digital revolution? http://www.strategyand.pwc.com/reports/procurement-4-digital-revolution (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Gracht, H, Guinipero, L and Schueller, M (2016) Future-proof procurement, KPMG, https://assets. kpmg.com/content/dam/kpmg/pdf/2016/04/kpmg-studie-future-proof-procurement-sec.pdf (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Granger, E (2016) The Internet of Things driving procurement change — procurement news, Procurious, https://www.procurious.com/procurement-news/internet-of-things-procurement-change (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Huber, B (2015) The cheese has moved, SDC Supply & Demand Chain Executive, http://www. sdcexec.com/article/12036122/a-key-trend-affecting-procurement-is-the-basic-fact-that-old-jobs- are-going-away-and-new-jobs-emerging (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Jain, K and Woodcock, E (2017) A road map for digitizing source-to-pay, McKinsey & Company, http://www.mckinsey.com/business-functions/operations/our-insights/a-road-map-for-digitizing- source-to-pay (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Kinder, P (2014) The Internet of things: positive for procurement? Supply Management, https://www. cips.org/supply-management/opinion/2014/july/the-internet-of-things-positive-for-procurement/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Maltaverne, B (2017) ‘Cognitive Procurement — What Are the Implications?’ Media Center, https:// www.ibisworld.com/media/2017/03/27/cognitive-procurement-implications/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Maltaverne, B (2017) How will AI transform contract management, Counselytics, http://counselytics. com/tag/artificial-intelligence/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Sauter, P (2014) Big Data in Procurement, Arthur D. Little, http://www.adlittle.de/uploads/ tx_extthoughtleadership/ADL_2014_Big_Data_in_Procurement_01.pdf (Accessed 22 June 2007)

61Technologies for Procurement: Current Trends and Emerging Trends

Chapter 4

Schreiber, B, Janssen, R, Weaver, S and Peintner, S (2016) Procurement 4.0 in the digital world, Arthur D. Little, http://www.adlittle.com/downloads/tx_adlreports/ADL__Future__of__ Procurement__4.0.pdf (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Smith, P and Osagie, S (2016) The Future of Procurement, Spend Matters UK/Europe, https://static1.squarespace.com/static/565daedbe4b045fcae42da15/t/57456a9222482eba ae232636/1464167058836/The_Future_of_Procurement_Spend_Matters_January_2016.pdf (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Spend Matters (2015) 3 Ways 3D printing will revolutionize the modern supply chain (and 1 important way it won’t), http://Spendmatters.com/2015/01/06/3-ways-3d-printing-will-revolutionize-the- modern-supply-chain-and-1-important-way-it-wont (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Spend Matters (2015) What to do with purchasing information provided by the IoT, http://spendmatters. com/2015/08/06/what-to-do-with-purchasing-information-provided-by-the-internet-of-things/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Supply Chain Europe (2007) Automotive transformation with e-sourcing, http://connection.ebscohost. com/c/articles/67116980/automotive-transformation-e-sourcing (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Supply Chain Management Review (2012) Procurement Automation: ‘How to do it right’, http:// www.scmr.com/article/Procurement_Automation_How_to_do_it_Right (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Tai, Y, Ho, C and Wu, W (2010) ‘The performance impact of implementing Web-based e-procurement systems’, International Journal of Production Research, 48(18): 5397 – 5414.

Wilson, M (2015) Future of 3D printing and your procurement management, Afflink, https://www. afflink.com/blog/future-of-3d-printing-and-your-procurement-management (Accessed 22 June 2007)

York, M (2015) What will the IoT mean for procurement? Part I, CPO Rising, http://cporising. com/2015/03/19/what-will-the-internet-of-things-mean-for-procurement-part-i/ (Accessed 22 June 2007)

Yu, S, Mishra, A N, Gopal, A, Slaughter, S and Mukhopadhyay,T (2015) ‘E-procurement infusion and operation process impact in MRO procurement: Complementary or substitutive effects?’, Production and Operations Management, 24 (7): 1054 – 1070.

Chapter 5 The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain Professor Dr. Premkumar Rajagopal, Mr. John Tan Chin Leong and Dr. Loo Saw Khuan

Introduction

Industry 4.0 refers to the current trend of automation and data exchange in manufacturing technologies. It consists of cyber-physical systems, the Internet of Things (IoT), cloud computing and cognitive computing. Supply chain is an important pillar of Industry 4.0 as supply chain includes the flow of products or services from the first supplier until the end customer. Supply Chain 4.0 happens through the application of Industry 4.0 innovations in supply chain.

This paper explains the impact of Industry 4.0 on supply chain, with emphasis on digitalisations of supply chain. Digital supply chain may be defined as supply chain that has been driven by innovation of information technologies. Today the digital environment has evolved over time and technology has been part of the human lifestyle. Technology innovation is ever competing to improve or replace the current systems. The future of supply chain will change with ever-changing technologies.

Automation has affected supply chain with examples of autonomous shipping trucks and warehouse robotics. More and more areas may be automated with new technology being introduced to the supply chain and the trend will continue. Hence, supply chain professionals need to get prepared to master these technologies in order to stay relevant.

This article starts with how industry revolution affects supply chain and ended with the status of Supply Chain 4.0 in the Malaysian context.

Industry revolution and supply chain revolution

The First Industrial Revolution is widely taken to be the shift from our reliance on animals, human effort and biomass as primary sources of energy to the introduction of mechanical production facilities by utilising water and steam power. The term supply chain was not used in those days. Sugarcane molasses were shipped from Caribbean to New England for distilleries to transform it into rum. Besides consuming locally, the drinks were sold in bottles and barrels in Europe and Atlantic. However, shipment across countries was not common in other parts of world.

63The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain

Chapter 5

The Second Industrial Revolution started at the end of the 19th century and the first two decades of the 20th century, and brought major breakthroughs in the form of electricity distribution, both wireless and wired communication, the synthesis of ammonia and new forms of power generation. The industrial revolution in this stage introduced labour division and mass production. The term supply chain was still not common at those days. However, global supply network was initiated with the introduction of steamships. Raw cottons from southern United States were shipped to the cotton mills in England. The finished cloth was then shipped to the whole world.

The Third Industrial Revolution started in 1950s with the development of digital communication systems, with advanced computing power that enables new ways of generating, processing and sharing information. This contributed to automation in production. Shipping revolution started and the term logistics was used by introducing standardised containers that could be sealed and loaded into ships. In addition, the standardised containers could be passed on to the trucks and trains. By 1990s, the term “supply chain” was introduced. The technologies of mobile telephony and Internet were used for information sharing among the supply chain partners, namely suppliers, distributors, transporters, retailers and manufacturers.

The Fourth Industrial Revolution involves entirely on new capabilities for human beings and machines by using cyber-physical systems. While these capabilities are reliant on the technologies and infrastructure of the Third Industrial Revolution, the Fourth Industrial Revolution represents totally new ways whereby technology becomes embedded within societies or even human bodies (Davis 2016). We are now at the beginning of a revolution that is fundamentally changing the way we live, work and relate to one another. The current industrial revolution gives birth to Supply Chain 4.0.

Supply Chain 4.0

Knut Alicke et al. (2016) explains that in Supply Chain 4.0, supply chain management applies Industry 4.0 innovations with IoT, advanced robotics, analytics and big data to jump start performance and focus on customer satisfaction. Supply chain concept has gone through tremendous changes over the years and is heading towards Industry 4.0 or digitisation and automation, which will lead to the following:

1. Speed — it enables faster processing in terms of lead-time to meet customer demand in the supply chain.

2. Agile and flexible to changes as demanded by customers.

3. Customised in nature to fulfil customer needs.

64 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

4. Accurate data recording within the supply chain.

5. Efficiency which leads to high performance and great results.

Customer perspectives are a great concern of late and more emphasis need to be addressed constantly. With the new technology today, consumers are more demanding and tend to source effortlessly via social media that is widely available at their fingertips.

The following are some of contributions from Supply Chain 4.0:

1. Automated factory production provides constant feedback on production capacity and information on shipment-production status.

2. Autonomous trucks move products to warehouses with live transit-location updates via satellite link.

3. Automated warehouses use machine to handle all operations, from picking to transporting products, with continuous information on product status.

4. Products are dispatched from warehouses to stores and online retailers based on anticipated demand.

6. Customers could track order status and input a new delivery destination.

7. Drones perform last-mile delivery and return pickups.

Automation of both the physical and planning from end to end into a single seamless supply chain with minimal human intervention will happen in the future. The network will self-setup and is continuously optimised to ensure optimal fit for the business requirements where the system leverages high degree of transparency and dynamic planning to drive advanced demand, for example special delivery times with low truck utilisation.

Supply Chain 4.0 increases operations efficiency

By leveraging on Supply Chain 4.0, it will improve all areas of supply chain management. At the end, the improvement enables a step change in service, cost, capital and agility.

65The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain

Chapter 5

The value drivers are the key strategic tactics that will be driven across the end to end supply chain through planning, physical flow, performance management, order management, collaboration and supply chain strategy to achieve the whole objectives of managing the organisation’s capital, cost and service to maintain its agility.

By implementing Supply Chain 4.0, there is potential increase of operational effectiveness of supply chains through adopting new technologies and eliminating waste. This potential may include 30% lower costs, 75% fewer lost sales and decrease in inventory of up to 75%, while increasing the agility of the supply chains (Alicke et al. 2016).

Transformation into digital supply chain

Understanding Supply Chain 4.0 is one aspect. Wanting to be transformed into a digital chain would require three key enablers which are; a clear definition, new capabilities and a supportive environment.

Recruiting of data specialists is typically required for the new capabilities of digital supply chain. The final prerequisite is the implementation of a two-speed architecture/organisation. This means that the establishment of the organisation and IT landscape must be accompanied by the creation of an innovation environment with a start-up culture (Alicke et al. 2016).

According to Mussomeli et al. (2015), there is a shift from a linear traditional supply chain (Figure 1) into a digital supply chain network (Figure 2). The digital connectivity and technology capabilities should reduce the latency between new information and material movements. Stakeholders have very little visibility in the linear supply chain compared to the digital supply network capabilities. The digital supply networks create connectivity with a multidirectional communication system in contrast to a traditional disconnected system.

Figure 1 Traditional supply chain

66 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Figure 2 Digital supply chain network

The system may look simple in the diagram, however the complexity is immense and a lot of study from stakeholders is required to look at the nitty-gritty of the implementation, taking into account its returns.

Schrauf et al. (2016) illustrated that supply chain will change with the advent of digital supply chain, silos will dissolve and every link will have full visibility throughout the network. The digital supply chain is based on the concept of Industry 4.0 whereby companies are orientating themselves towards a full implementation of digital technologies throughout the supply chain.

The following are the four stages of maturity towards a digital supply chain:

1. Digital novice. These companies have yet to embark on the journey. Their supply chain processes remain discrete, carried out by individual departments and business units.

2. Vertical integrator. Companies at this stage have managed to integrate their supply chain processes internally, across departments and functions.

3. Horizontal collaborator. In this stage, companies have learned to work with their supply chain partners to set business goals, define and carry out common processes, and achieve a fair degree of transparency throughout the chain.

67The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain

Chapter 5

4. Digital champion. These companies have achieved the highest level of collaboration with partners and transparency in operations, while developing mutually beneficial processes and analytical techniques to optimise the whole supply chain.

Digital supply chain is simply called Supply Chain 4.0 and is very much an Industry 4.0 concept with the implementation of digital technologies.

Current practices of Supply Chain 4.0

Hoberg and Alicke (2016) of McKinsey & Company explained the importance of customer experience as they are the source of income to any organisation. With the implementation of Supply Chain 4.0 especially with digital capabilities, customers will benefit from more choices, and added convenience with simpler and more reliable processes.

Within any organisation, all the departments need to work together to a seamless integrated process supported by technology so that their customers see the entire organisation as one. Organisations need to continuously improve and look for opportunities to provide the best customer experience in order to sustain their business with the aid of technologies.

“Tomorrow’s challenges” shows that a company like Adidas sees the need to use whatever resources they could leverage in its entire supply chain including technology to gain more sales and grow their business. The use of machine and devices to meet customers’ demand as continuous improvement is the key to the success of every organisation to be ahead of competition. The initial investment may sound costly but over the long strategic plan, it can recover the returns.

Likewise Amazon also shares the same experience and has put in effort to beef up its supply chain in embracing technology into its system in order to stay competitive.

In short, the digital revolution is creating a whole new paradigm for what used to be the supply chain. It was once about delivering the right quality at the lowest cost, with the agreed service level; now it is about increasing sales, creating more value and capturing it (Cordon 2017).

Logistics, an important element of supply chain which focuses on transportation, distribution and warehousing, is also greatly impacted by Industry 4.0. Tronina (2017) illustrated that logistics would focus even harder on information technology, digitalisation and optimisation of logistic processes by using the cutting edge innovations of the world class modern technologies. Modern logistics, so called Logistics 4.0, is more often and more readily implemented in modern enterprises that want to develop their business. Logistics companies, especially those large, dynamic companies wishing to compete in the rapidly growing market, need to strive to be a market leader by all means if they want to maintain their status and position in the market.

68 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The competition between enterprises is visible considering the choice of technologies, development of ready-made tools and implementing them depending on the needs of given companies, or establishing cooperation with implementing companies which create custom-ready solutions for TSL industry (such as transportation, shipping and logistics companies).

Internet of Things (IoT ) in logistics

Logistics, an important element of supply chain is affected by IoT. Robert Bosch GMBH corporate website (2017) explains the hectic activity in a logistics centre and how Bosch implements Industry 4.0. In 2016, Bosch has initiated to automate its forklift trucks that are driving between warehouse shelves and storage areas, picking up the goods at exactly the right place, and then placing them right where they belong.

Many new ways of optimising processes are emerging for the company capitalising the Cloud. The forklift trucks are more efficient with the available data input into its systems to enable the most efficient route to be used and driving profiles are constantly stored in the database. The database also benefits the manufacturers of forklift trucks. They can make their customers additional offers and equip their vehicles with sensors and software from the start. Retrofitting would no longer be necessary if the forklift trucks were to one day become part of the networked intra-logistics.

Flexibility is the key to enable agile capabilities in Industry 4.0. Zenoway solution is currently being introduced at the Bosch site of BSH Hausgeräte GmbH in Traunreut near Munich. Data is considered the basis for intelligent production and new business models in logistics, where IoT-Clouds is the key to efficiently use data.

Forster (2017) explains that a digital supply chain is a basic requirement for Logistics 4.0 for the future. Visibility is essential today and the transportation businesses greatly rely on IoT. Digital supply chain is getting more important for companies that have great concerns on Industry 4.0. Hence, development for the next generation is inevitable though it is still in the infancy stage. Proactive companies can take the opportunities to spearhead projects in developing future digital systems and gadgets to support the logistics industry.

Kennedy (2017) on “How will the driverless revolution change transportation service?” emphasised the effects of the way service industry in particular transportation has evolved over time, whereby currently the technology has widely changed the way the business has been run.

Companies like Uber, Google and Tesla believe in technology and thus they keep on investing on self-driving technology and it will soon hit our roads. The impact will definitely take over some of the human tasks; at the same time, transportation companies will benefit, as they do not have to deal with drivers’ issues, while at the same time, able to run their operations more efficiently.

69The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain

Chapter 5

At this moment, the legal issues have to be addressed by government if they allow driverless commercial vehicles on the roads. Some countries may embrace this new concept, which is not seen in some other countries. In due time, there is a possibility to see driverless commercial vehicles operating and most likely to start in a more developed country due to its infrastructure and mature society.

Outlook in Malaysia on Supply Chain 4.0

In any situation, there seems to be two sides of a coin. It can be seen as a threat or an opportunity to embrace the new approach of the digital world. How is that in the context of the Malaysian scene? In some public news and articles published, there are many views and news related to Industry 4.0 in the country and it includes Supply Chain 4.0. The Ministry of International Trade and Industry (MITI) has been quite active in initiating the move to include some of the local Malaysian companies to participate in Industry 4.0.

Capabilities need to involve a large group to enable the concept of Supply Chain 4.0 to be realised, and it also includes stakeholders, not just the industry players but also from the government departments concerned. A task force has been set up with the various agencies within the government departments and their areas of responsibility, namely:

1. Infrastructure and ecosystem — the Ministry of Communication and Multimedia

2. Funding and incentives — the Ministry of Finance

3. Talent and human capital — the Ministry of HR & Ministry of Higher Education

4. Technology and standards — the Ministry of Science, Technology and Innovation

5. SMEs and Industry 4.0 — the Ministry of International Trade and Industry

They had included some main players from the different industries in a seminar, including some of the government agencies to see how the government can assist in any way to realise that Malaysia is heading towards the future. A timeline chart has been planned for year 2017 to move forward in the cabinet.

70 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

• Initial Benchmarking

• WG Engagement with Ministry

• Completion of MIDA's Future of Manufacturing: Industry Study

• Drafting of National Policy on Industry 4.0

• 1st WG Coordination Meeting On The National Industry 4.0 Roadmap

• Industry 4.0 High Level Coordination Meeting

Continuous engagement

with stakeholders

Industry 4.0 Seminars for Government Officials and

SMEs

Tabling of Draft National Policy on Industry 4.0 to the Cabinet

MITI Brainstorming

Industry 4.0 National

Workshop

Figure 3 Timeline chart for year 2017 Source: Ministry of International Trade and Industry (MITI)

By end 2017, the government drafted the National Policy on Industry 4.0 which also included the national vision TN50 and tax budgeting for year 2018 for planning ahead.

The industry players and their stakeholders have to ponder as below:

1. Comprehensive national level strategy — no clear overarching policy on Industry 4.0.

2. Infrastructure and ecosystem — energy, telecommunication, ecosystem gaps.

3. Targeted incentives and funding — broad-based.

4. Human capital and talent — labour intensive and mismatch of skill sets.

5. High initial investment — substantial capital expenditure.

6. Lack of standards and technology — harmonisation, integration, reliability.

Resources are the key to future planning and to enable this to materialise, all the stakeholders need to look at this area where there may be job loss due to the changes. In fact, this has been shown in the previous industry evolution whenever new equipment and/or gadgets were being introduced. For example, the computers have replaced many clerical jobs and automation has taken over certain manpower in the manufacturing industry.

71The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain

Chapter 5

The Malaysian Government not only looks at the big players but also the small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) as this group of business may have limitations in their resources and may face difficulties when competing with the bigger players. SMEs may still operate as Industry 2.0 and it is a challenge for those players to upgrade into Industry 4.0. Hence, there are initiatives to organise awareness programmes for multinational companies to share their experience and expertise of Industry 4.0 with the SMEs.

Penang State Development Corporation (PSDC) is proactive in identifying talent gaps of Industry 4.0 in order to send employees for appropriate training. Naturally there is a need to prepare the future of human resources with the right talent and skills. However, it is always the question of when and what type of courses are appropriate for the future and jobs that may not exist yet.

PSDC is spearheading Industry 4.0 in the manufacturing industry particularly in Penang where they are indeed keeping abreast of the progress of economic businesses in the state. PSDC has been constantly in touch with most of the manufacturers, both SMEs and MNCs alike. Some of the PSDC initiatives include awareness seminars jointly organised by PSDC, MIDA and MNCs in the field.

At this point, PSDC has supported the government initiatives to drive towards the implementation of Industry 4.0 and this is just the first step in the journey towards the future. Through PSDC’s experiences in managing the economic growth for Penang and its industry players, all the stakeholders may be roped in together to ensure that the change can be implemented effectively.

An article by Lim (2017) depicts a survey conducted by the Federation of Malaysian Manufacturers and Malaysian Institute of Economics Research. It shows that only 12% of the respondents were fully aware of Industry 4.0. 41% of the respondents were somewhat aware, while 28% needed more information about Industry 4.0. The balance 19% respondents were not aware at all. Industry experts opined that most companies in Malaysia are still at Industry 2.0 due to the nature of their business, while some international companies have already embarked towards Industry 4.0.

As cyber-businesses transformed retail beyond purchasing convenience which allows consumers to be well-informed and have variable choices, logistics services (door-to-door) become essential. Consumers have the convenience of purchasing wherever that is/are available through the Internet via IoT and have the merchandise delivered to their doorstep. The automobile industry in Malaysia is also getting ready in anticipating the future trend of global sourcing through e-commerce.

Understanding the market forces is of utmost importance to every business and to compete, suppliers must understand their consumer needs and reflect quickly through the supply chain. Constant change is essential in today’s business environment and being able to react to consumer needs quickly is of utmost importance (Sahari 2017).

72 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

The Higher Education Ministry (MOHE) has initiated programmes in higher institutions in Malaysia to address the challenges of Industry 4.0. The aim is to prepare the university to produce well- balanced graduates with holistic, entrepreneurial and innovative qualities. MOHE will be sharing their ongoing efforts in redesigning the country’s higher education (Nor Ain Mohamed Radhi 2017).

Findings from industry players in Malaysia

A roundtable on Supply Chain 4.0 with participation of 50 supply chain experts held on 12 – 13th January 2017 in Penang concluded that Malaysia is still in the early stage of Supply Chain 4.0. Academics and industry experts shared the insights and outcomes of Industry 4.0. Industry experts mentioned that automation has been implemented in their overseas headquarters to take over human tasks with increased efficiency. Their headquarters see better revenue in the long run and costs being reduced. Even driverless vehicles are in the pipeline to be a reality in the overseas headquarters. However, automation and autonomous vehicles have yet to be implemented in the Malaysian operations. Some multinationals located in Penang have already planned to adopt Industry 4.0 due to their corporate strategic planning. However, the local players were still discussing how to adapt the uncertain future of Industry 4.0. Some participants have shared that their corporate level has embarked into Industry 4.0 at their corporate office level, however it has not reached Malaysia at this point of time. It may be due to many reasons such as business needs or strategic approach.

At this moment, Industry 4.0 in Malaysia is still lacking participation from members of the supply chain. Many multinational companies may have initiated Industry 4.0 internally, however it is only shared to a limited fraction of their members. Not much effort and collaboration has been done to engage their suppliers and customers pertaining to Industry 4.0. Even though companies sent participants to seminars, not all stakeholders are involved, and it may not include employees from the supply chain.

Conclusion

The findings in this article conclude that Supply Chain 4.0 will increase operational efficiency in the whole supply chain and IoT will be very useful for logistics. A linear traditional supply chain is crucial to be transformed to a digital supply chain. However, in a clear definition, new capabilities and supportive environment will be required to achieve a digital supply chain.

Supply Chain 4.0 has been implemented by global brands such as Adidas and Amazon. However, many companies in Malaysia are still in the initial stage of understanding Industry 4.0, especially the local SMEs. For multinational companies located in Malaysia, they may witness the implementation of Industry 4.0 in their overseas headquarters, but they have yet to implement it in companies located in Malaysia. As such, the Malaysian Government has initiated to create awareness of Industry 4.0,

73The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Supply Chain

Chapter 5

in order to encourage Malaysian companies to be competitive as a global player in all respect of industries. Malaysian companies will have to “follow” the trend with Industry 4.0, and subsequently enable Supply Chain 4.0 as one of the important pillars of Industry 4.0.

As we conclude this chapter pertaining to Supply Chain 4.0 with the principles of Industry 4.0, it clearly shows that some SMEs in Malaysia are at Supply Chain 2.0, while some multinational companies are at Supply Chain 3.0. A small number of multinational companies in Malaysia may have already geared up towards digital supply chain or Supply Chain 4.0 but there are still much to be done. Thus, the future still remains a challenge of uncertainty and higher learning programmes need to be redesigned accordingly to suit the digital world of e-commerce and automation. What remains constant is “change”.

References

Alicke, K et al. (2016) Supply Chain 4.0 in consumer goods, McKinsey & Company, http://www. mckinsey.com/industries/consumer-packaged-goods/our-insights/supply-chain-4-0-in-consumer- goods (Accessed 16 August 2017)

Cordon, C (2017) Supply Chain 4.0, IMD, https://www.imd.org/publications/articles/supply- chain-4.0/ (Accessed September 2017)

Davis, N (2016), What is the fourth industrial revolution? World Economic Forum, https://www. weforum.org/agenda/2016/01/what-is-the-fourth-industrial-revolution/ (Accessed 19 March 2018)

Deloitte University Press (2016) The rise of the digital supply network — Industry 4.0 enables the digital transformation of supply chains, Deloitte Development LLC.

Forster, P (2017) Without a digital supply chain, there is no Logistics 4.0, https://www.transporeon. com/blog/en/digital-supply-chain-logistics-4-0/ (Accessed 19 October 2017)

Hoberg, K and Alicke, K (2016) How supply chain 4.0 creates game-changing customer experience, Mckinsey & Company, http://digiplus.runwise.co/supply-chain-4-0-creates-game-changing- customer-experience/ (Accessed 19 October 2017)

Industry 4.0 seminar for SMEs (MITI) Malaysia (15 June 2017) Paving the way for Industry 4.0 among Malaysia SMEs, http://iplast40.com/industry-4-0-seminar-smes-miti-malaysia/ (Accessed 14 August 2017)

Kennedy, L (2017) ‘How will the driverless revolution change transportation service?’ Tomkins International, http://supplychainbeyond.com/will-driverless-change-transportation-services/ (Accessed 20 October 2017)

74 Emerging Technologies for Supply Chain Management

Lim, Lay Hsuan (2017) Are we ready for smart manufacturing? Leaderonomics Media Sdn Bhd, https:// leaderonomics.com/business/ready-smart-manufacturing (Accessed 20 March 2018)

Ministry of International Trade and Industry (2017) Government role in Industry 4.0, http://www. miti.gov.my/index.php/pages/view/4172?mid=553 (Accessed 14 August 2017)

Ministry of International Trade and Industry (2017) Embracing the Future of Manufacturing, Industry Workshop, http://ent.evenesis.com/SITE/Industry-4.0-National-Policy-Workshop.aspx (Accessed 14 August 2017)

Mussomeli, A et. al. (2015) The rise of the digital supply network, https://www2.deloitte.com/content/ dam/insights/us/articles/3465_Digital-supply-network/DUP_Digital-supply-network.pdf (Accessed 28 January 2019)

Nor Ain Mohamed Radhi (2017) MOHE taking steps to address Industry 4.0, https://www.nst.com.my/ news/nation/2017/11/306569/mohe-taking-steps-address-industry-40 (Accessed 30 October 2017)

Penang Skills Development Centre (2017) ‘Industry 4.0’, http://www.miti.gov.my/miti/resources/ Industry4Point0/PSDC_Small_and_Winning_Big_Strategy.pdf (Accessed 20 March 2017)

Robert Bosch GMBH corporate website (2017) Logistics 4.0 — forklift fleets are becoming safer and transport distances shorter, https://www.bosch.com/explore-and-experience/logistics-4-0/ (Accessed 21 August 2017)

Sahari, M (2017) Industry 4.0 – Understand market forces and anticipate changes, http://www. madanisahari.com/search?q=Understand+market+forces+and+anticipate+changes%2C+ (Accessed 20 March 2018)

Schrauf, S and Bertram, P (2016) Industry 4.0: How digitization makes the supply chain more efficient, agile and customer-focused, https://www.strategyand.pwc.com/reports/industry4.0 (Accessed 14 March 2018)

Schwab, K (2017) The Fourth Industrial Revolution, World Economic Forum, https://www.weforum. org/about/the-fourth-industrial-revolution-by-klaus-schwab (Accessed 14 August 2017)

Schwab, K (2017) What is the fourth industrial revolution? World Economic Forum, https://www. weforum.org/agenda/2016/01/what-is-the-fourth-industrial-revolution/ (Accessed 14 August 2017)

Tronina, P (2017) Logistics 4.0 — what does the business need, http://www.trans.eu/en/news/logistics- 4-0-what-does-the-business-need (Accessed 21 August 2017)

Roundtable on Emerging Trends of Technologies in Supply Chain Management

Project Leader: Dr. Loo Saw Khuan Secretariat: Associate Professor Dr. Intan Osman

Mr. Prakash Arumugam Ms. Lim Wei Chen

Mr. Chong Fook Suan Dr. Chuah Poh Lean

Ms. Lilian Yap Dr. Norizan Baba Rahim Ms. Lalitha Ramasamy

Dr. Alexandra Kang Ms. Kajari B. Shankar

Dr. Lim Gee Nee Mr. Yeoh Koay Kheng

Ms. Goh Pei Ling Ms. Ng Saw Khum

Acknowledgement

The School of Business and Administration, WOU and Penang Skills Development Centre would like to place our appreciation to

Emeritus Professor Dr. G. Dhanarajan of the Institute of Research and Innovation, WOU

for the support and funding towards this roundtable and the publication of this book.

Wawasan Open University (KPT/JPT/DFT/US/P01) Wholly owned by Wawasan Open University Sdn. Bhd. (700364-W)

54, Jalan Sultan Ahmad Shah, 10050 Penang. www.wou.edu.my

Article 11 .pdf

Chapter 6

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience

Roberta Pinna, Pier Paolo Carrus and Fabiana Marras

Additional information is available at the end of the chapter

http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

1. Introduction

The aim of this study is to present the emerging trends in the Pharmaceutical Supply Chain Management and Logistics flow redesign. Logistics and Supply Chain innovation are becoming a highly topical issue in the international research agenda, as well as in practice. The reason is that economic and political factors are raising the attention to healthcare issues: the process of local health corporatization, which involves the introduction into the National Health System of control mechanisms similar to the competitive market models; the aging of population; the increasing demand for healthcare services; the rising cost of inpatient and outpatient care; new technologies and new drugs that will continue to drive up the total healthcare cost. Indeed, limited resources and a steady growth in spending, hence, the need of a public health ration‐ alization, especially for meeting increasingly quality demands. All this requires a profound transformation that affects not only the processes of diagnosis and treatment, but also those of support, especially logistics, which is essential for the processes of service differentiation, efficiency, quality and safety processes improvement.

However, the logistics process of pharmaceutical products in the healthcare sector accuses a relevant gap compared to other sectors: hospital companies tend to behave like “individual agents” with their own purchasing offices, a pharmacy and an internal distribution system based on order-delivery process. Additionally, they have to manage very different kinds of goods, taking care of the impact in the process of patients care. Consequently, a large number of transactions sent to different vendors and purchases of large quantities of drugs from individual departments with the resulting generation of high inventory and storage costs. As a natural consequence of this diversity of assets to manage, the organizational responsibility

© 2015 The Author(s). Licensee InTech. This chapter is distributed under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution License (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0), which permits unrestricted use, distribution, and reproduction in any medium, provided the original work is properly cited.

of the logistics function is often fragmented and dispersed across multiple organizational units, with clear coordination and integration problems.

In order to optimize the inventory control and reduce the material handling costs of pharma‐ ceutical products, it is necessary to manage the Supply Chain following an integrated per‐ spective, capable to overcome boundaries between professional specializations and organizations involved in the materials flow from warehouses to wards. This appears to be even more important for the Italian National Health Service, where all the discussions are concentrated in the fact that the hospitals’ costs should be decreased, even if the materials managers’ duties are still not defined. The state of the art shows that Italian hospital companies are in a condition of delay from the point of view of materials management, from which only recently they have been trying to get out, analyzing and rationalizing their Supply Chain processes [1].

Due to the critical role Supply Chain play in the healthcare sector, cost control and the optimization of material flows of drugs have been the subject of numerous studies, and different approaches and methods have been suggested in the literature [2-10]. They indicate that, starting from the traditional healthcare Supply Chain Management, some organizations are applying innovative transformations in the way of centralization, that is the aggregation under a single organizational unit of all the business functions involved in the overall process of pharmaceuticals purchasing and logistics. The application of these new models, capable of ensuring both the maximum efficiency and cost containment, has proven to allow the ach‐ ievement of the objectives prescribed by the Italian’s National Health Plan, which was developed in 1992 in order to find solutions that improve healthcare services and contain long- term costs increase.

According to these premises, in this chapter we explore the possibilities of Supply Chain and Logistics flows optimization and innovation in the Italian healthcare sector, through a process reengineering project. The literature review and an in-depth analysis of an Italian Local Healthcare Company help us to explain how changes in the pharmaceutical logistics flow can improve efficiency and reduce costs.

2. Healthcare supply chain: Definition and characteristics

The Supply Chain (SC) is a process that includes all the activities ranging from the identification of a customer need through product selection, negotiation with suppliers, payment, storage, distribution and redistribution. It is a set of three or more entities directly involved in the upstream and downstream flows of products, services, finances, and information from a source to a customer [11-13].

The Supply Chain Management (SCM) therefore, refers to upstream and downstream relation‐ ships with suppliers and customers and to solving problems of functional divisions that occur within and between organizations. In other words, it extends the concept of partnerships into a multi-firm effort to manage the total flow of goods from the supplier to the ultimate customer,

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains118

to achieve greater benefits. SCM was developed initially in the context of manufacturing, but its introduction is beneficial to the healthcare sector, where it shows an important impact on hospital performance, in terms of reducing wastes, preventing medical errors, improving quality of care, service and operational efficiencies [14].

In particular, the healthcare SC in the Italian context generally consists of four main actors: 1) producers (pharmaceutical companies); 2) purchasers (dealers/depositaries and wholesalers); 3) providers (healthcare organizations and pharmacies); 4) patients (Figure 1).

Figure 1. Healthcare Supply Chain

Producers produce goods such as pharmaceuticals, medical devices and implants, and medical/ surgical supplies that are necessary in the delivery of healthcare. Purchasers consist of group purchasing organizations (GPO) and distributors who facilitate the payment for and the shipment of goods from producers to providers. Among them, the main actors are depositaries and wholesalers. The difference between these two subjects is fundamentally linked to the acquisition of the goods ownership: depositaries work in deposit account and they are paid on the basis of a fee-for-service; they carry out temporary storage of products and send them to providers. Wholesalers acquire the ownership of pharmaceuticals and the related business risk, buying the availability of pharmaceuticals from the industry or by depositories. They must satisfy the demand of providers quickly, with a widespread distribution and through the management of a large number of references. To the actors of healthcare SC described above we must add providers, who may purchase goods from purchasers or directly from the producers. They use pharmaceuticals to administer healthcare services to patients. In partic‐ ular, pharmacies can distribute pharmaceuticals to dismissed patients or to patients who, due to debilitating diseases, cannot get to the hospital to access the necessary pharmaceuticals to their treatment assigned. Patients (both hospitalized and dismissed) are the final customers of the healthcare process.

Healthcare SCM includes business activities and operations that integrate a continuous, seamless flow of materials and services for healthcare delivery [15]. One of the biggest challenges facing healthcare SCM operationally is maintaining sufficient inventory levels to sustain quality and timely patient care reducing wastages, and for this reason, it is designed to assure a high service

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

119

level by maximizing the resource allocation, in order to respond effectively and promptly to the patient care needs. Healthcare SCM processes have three types of flows: physical, informa‐ tion and financial flows. The physical flows includes the supply of pharmaceuticals, medicals, surgical consumables, medical devices, hygiene consumables, food supplies, equipment and other supplementary products necessaries to support doctors, nurses and of course patients. Information and financial flows are related to SC decisions for effective product flow and organizational performance improvement. A successful SCM requires planning, managing and controlling these flows through the integration of key processes [15-19].

Due to the growing influence of patient-associations and to the necessity to deliver health services in a more efficient and effective way, many healthcare organisations have started projects in the area of patient logistics, clinical pathways, data interchange [20]. Moreover, the redesign of hospital services and the implementation of integrated care programmes are frequently addressed as being critical strategies to decrease resource utilization and improve healthcare quality. During the last ten years an impressive number of studies, originated in different disciplines like economics, organisational behaviour and logistics, have drastically enlarged our knowledge regarding the healthcare sector [16, 21-23].

Although many healthcare organizations have recognized the importance of adopting SCM practices, the application of techniques, methods and best practices originally developed in the industrial setting is often problematic. Their implementation has proven to be more complex primarily because it handles a diversity of items in widely varying quantities, in response to the large number of diagnosis types and procedures. Secondly, it requires the participation of many different stakeholders and it is highly influenced by legislations and healthcare professionals [14, 24, 25]. Furthermore, healthcare is a customer driven service, which means that customers are an effective part of the process [26, 27]. However, literature and practice suggest that numerous opportunities exist to reduce costs and improve delivery of healthcare by improving the efficiency and quality of healthcare SC operations. The key drivers of these opportunities are cost and quality of healthcare, and this is the reason why they are two of the most discussed and debated issues of our time. Healthcare SC innovation has been regarded as a critical success factor for organisational performance: it refers to tools that can improve organisational processes needed for effective SCM through seamless interactions with suppliers, manufacturers, distributors and customers. Thus, it allows reductions in cost and lead time, creation of new operational strategies, provision of quality and development of flexibility for dealing with rapid changes in the socio-economic context.

3. The pharmaceuticals logistic management

In healthcare the term logistics encompasses the set of techniques, methodologies, tools and infrastructure used in the management of the physicals flows (such as drugs and surgical medical products) and the associated information flows, from the acquisition in the market to the distribution to wards (Figure 2). The proposed definition allows us to make some important specifications as regards to purposes and contents.

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains120

With reference to the first aspect, the pharmaceutical logistics is the task of placing the right drugs and medical supplies, in the right quantities, in the right conditions, at the right health service delivery points, at the right time, for the right patients/users and for the right cost [28]. In other words, logistics seeks to pursue simultaneously efficiency – economical use of resources –, effectiveness – service level maximization – and cost-effectiveness – long term capacity to achieve the economic equilibrium. Referring to the content on the other hand, the logistics system is a set of activities (procurement, storage, physical distribution) that must be managed in an integrated manner.

 

With reference to the first aspect, the pharmaceutical logistics is the task of placing the right drugs and medical supplies, in the right quantities, in the right conditions, at the right health service delivery points, at the right time, for the right patients/users and for the right cost [28]. In other words, logistics seeks to pursue simultaneously efficiency – economical use of resources –, effectiveness – service level maximization – and cost-effectiveness – long term capacity to achieve the economic equilibrium. Referring to the content on the other hand, the logistics system is a set of activities (procurement, storage, physical distribution) that must be managed in an integrated manner.

Figure 2. The pharmaceutical logistics process As some authors point out [28], the mains objectives of a good logistics include:

 improve information systems for accurate collects and reports data when and where needed;

 improve forecasting/procurement;  improve distribution activities;  obtain clean, secure, organized storage;  implement a good transportation system.

The increased complexity that characterizes the management of logistics flows within the healthcare companies is linked to different aspects (Figure 3):

1. Healthcare companies manage at least three broad categories of goods characterized by markedly different physical, logical and managerial requirements, with important problems of storage space;

2. Logistics organizational responsibility is often fragmented and dispersed among several organizational units with obvious problems of coordination and integration;

3. Healthcare companies treat patients, and this introduces elements of natural variability. 4. Last but not less important point, logistics has an important impact on the processes of care,

that is on the quality and safety of care provided to patients. When healthcare actors communicate and share information, they are more likely to improve the quality in terms of patient safety, cycle time reduction and operational efficiency [29-32]. The safety of patients is the top priority in healthcare, and pharmaceutical managers play a crucial role in protecting their interest: their biggest responsibility is to ensure that the products purchased

HOSPITAL

Procurement

Distribution

Storage

S u p p l i e r

PATIENTS WARDS

Storage Drugs delivery 

PHARMACY

Figure 2. The pharmaceutical logistics process

As some authors point out [28], the mains objectives of a good logistics include:

• improve information systems for accurate collects and reports data when and where needed;

• improve forecasting/procurement;

• improve distribution activities;

• obtain clean, secure, organized storage;

• implement a good transportation system.

The increased complexity that characterizes the management of logistics flows within the healthcare companies is linked to different aspects (Figure 3):

1. Healthcare companies manage at least three broad categories of goods characterized by markedly different physical, logical and managerial requirements, with important problems of storage space;

2. Logistics organizational responsibility is often fragmented and dispersed among several organizational units with obvious problems of coordination and integration;

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

121

3. Healthcare companies treat patients, and this introduces elements of natural variability.

4. Last but not less important point, logistics has an important impact on the processes of care, that is on the quality and safety of care provided to patients. When healthcare actors communicate and share information, they are more likely to improve the quality in terms of patient safety, cycle time reduction and operational efficiency [29-32]. The safety of patients is the top priority in healthcare, and pharmaceutical managers play a crucial role in protecting their interest: their biggest responsibility is to ensure that the products purchased for clinical use are good quality ones. This can be achieved by developing a product evaluation system, consisting of well-defined parameters, to guarantee that only approved products can enter a hospital’s stockroom. Additionally, timely placement factor is probably not as crucial in any other field as it is in healthcare delivery, where delay of a few seconds can cost a life.

Figure 3. Factors of complexity in the pharmaceutical logistics process.

3.1. Pharmaceutical logistics and information systems

Managers operating in the pharmaceutical logistics process face many problems related to data quality: products are various and constantly changing, and this results in product data that is often inaccurate and obsolete; furthermore, product identification codes may not be consistent between hospitals in the same network or even between floors of the same hospital. The effects of poor data quality are widespread throughout the healthcare SC: incorrect product data leads

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains122

to increased costs due to pricing errors, and this results in wasted time and rework for managers trying to resolve rebate, return, and credit issues with suppliers. In addition, the quality of healthcare can be adversely impacted, because data problems can result in healthcare procedure delays due to necessary products not being on hand [33].

Optimization of information storage and use requires that the organization and storage of data throughout the SC is consistent, so that all the data are accessible to multiple entities at different levels. The results are well coordinated movements of inventories, products that are delivered quickly and reliably when and where they are needed, as well as high responsiveness to short lead times [34]. A solution is given by implementing a Logistics Management Information System (LMIS): managers gather information about each activity in the system and analyse that information to coordinate future actions [28]. The LMIS provides method feedback for [35]:

• tracking the storage and movement of goods at every level within the supply system in order to obtain stocks ready for use in healthcare structures;

• ensuring proper stock rotation so that items of earliest expiry dates are used first;

• enabling managers to know the total amounts of commodities that are within the supply and where they are located.

The purpose of LMIS is to collect, organise, and report the logistics data in order to improve the customer service by improving the quality of management decisions. A well-functioning LMIS provides decision makers with accurate, timely, and appropriate data for managing and monitoring the flow of supplies, accounting for products, reducing supply imbalances, and improve costeffectiveness.

There are four essential data items in any LMIS (Table 1):

Stock on hand Quantities of usable stock available at all levels of the system.

Rate of consumption An average of stock dispensed to users during a particular period of time.

Losses Include the quantity of stock removed for any reason other than consumption.

Adjustments They are created when quantities are issued to or received from other facilities at the same level.

Table 1. Types of LMIS data items.

These data must be available for every product, at every level, and in all times. The additional data item is known as service statistics and it may be added depending on the needs of the users. It helps logistics managers to evaluate the success of health programs. Essential data can be recorded through three different recording systems:

1. the stock keeping records keep quantity of stock on hand and quantity of losses information about products, and they are completed by anyone who receives or issues stocks from storage, or who takes a physical inventory of stock;

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

123

2. the transaction records keep information about the movement of stock from one storage facility to another and are prepared by the warehouse personnel or nurses at both issuing and receiving facilities when a facility issues or requests supplies;

3. the consumption records keep information about quantity of each item dispensed to the customer (dispensed-to-user data) and they are completed by the service personnel at the service delivery point whenever supplies are dispensed to the customers. Only the transaction records move from one facility level to another with the product, while both stock keeping and consumption records remain where they are prepared.

At the end of a certain period, particularly monthly or quarterly, reports should be prepared and sent to the higher levels in the logistics systems for decision making, policy making, and planning. Reports are used to move the essential data to the logistics decision makers and the data should be available to the managers in a form suitable for decision making. For this reason, literature suggests six “rights” for LMIS data: the managers must receive the right data (essential data), in the right time (in time to take action), at the right place (where decisions are made), in the right quantity (having all essential data from all facilities), in the right quality (correct or accurate), and for the right cost (not spend more to collect information than spend on supplies) [28].

Additionally, the summary report contains all essential data items for a specific facility and for a specific time period (usually monthly or quarterly) in the form of simple report, aggregate summary report, or report and request report. The feedback report informs the lower levels about their performance and even inform higher level managers about how the system is performing.

4. The Italian National Health Service: Mains trends and change forces

The Italian National Health Service (NHS) is the institution through which the State guarantees its citizens the constitutional right to health (article 32 of the Italian Constitu‐ tion), in conditions of equality throughout the national territory. The NHS is a public system with universal nature, that is to say that it guarantees healthcare to all citizens (all citizens are equal and enjoy equal rights); it is funded through general taxation, direct incomes (health tickets) and fees. The NHS is organized according to the National Health Plan, from which the Regional Health Plans are derived, and it includes the primary healthcare (serv‐ ices to which citizens have direct access) and secondary and tertiary healthcare (services to which citizens access via the General Practitioner).

The public healthcare service considers different levels of responsibility and government at central, and regional level. In particular, at the national level, the Ministry of Health has the responsibility to guarantee all citizens the right to health, ensure equity, quality and efficiency of healthcare and promote actions of improvement, innovation and change. The middle level has the task of setting the basic level of benefits that the health service is required to provide to all citizens, for free or with a cost-sharing. In addition, it allocates resources devoted to healthcare. The regional level has legislative, administrative, planning, funding and monitoring

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains124

responsibilities for the essential levels of assistance, and functions are established by the Regional Health Plans for three years. Services are operationally delivered from ASL through internal structures, according to agreements with other public health institutions (Hospitals Companies, Hospitalization and Healthcare Institutes, University Polyclinics) or with accred‐ ited private structures and healthcare providers.

The need for change the management of public healthcare structures is due to some funda‐ mental reasons: 1) the process of local health corporatization, which involves the introduction of control mechanisms into the national healthcare system. Hospitals assume managerial and economic-financial autonomy, and they must set their own goals for quality of service and cost management in order to ensure the survival over time; 2) limited resources and a steady growth in spending, hence, the need for a public health rationalization, especially for meeting increas‐ ingly quality demands. All this requires a profound transformation that affects not only the processes of diagnosis and treatment, but also those of support, especially logistics, which is essential for the processes of service differentiation and quality improvement [36]. As some researchers point out [37-40] a significant portion of healthcare costs can be reduced by implementing effective pharmaceutical SC through the redesign and reorganization of the materials and information flows with the aim to optimize inventory control and reduce material handling costs. Actually, the pharmaceutical logistics in most of the Italian Hospitals is characterized by dispersion and fragmentation, which does not allow efficiency and patient safety. In particular, the current organization is expressed by a multiplication of warehouses, diversified by product type and destination end-users; the growth of managed products types; the absence of economies of scale in the procedures for storage, with a duplication of used resources; a high number of transactions addressed to a multitude of suppliers.

All these has contributed to the continuous improvement of the healthcare organizational and management complexity and to the increase in transactions put into place within them. Hence, the need to make radical changes in the way healthcare companies operate and to provide clear logistics objectives. In particular, they must ensure a multi-dimensional decision making process that involves more figures and professional skills, in order to analyze the operational needs across the board (technical, health, economic and organizational aspects), together with a graduated scale of intervention, of increasing complexity and directed to the realization of an operational model based on pre-assessments of opportunities.

In the healthcare sector there is a growing awareness of the significant weight that investment in consumables and the cost of managing them have on the corporate balance sheet. Therefore, in order to increase the efficiency it is necessary to operate in the direction of simplifying the flows of materials and replace the current high level of stocks with a greater amount of accurate information available in real time about the various stages of the SC.

Unlike what happened in manufacturing companies, in which the SCM is a strategic element of management, in the world of healthcare it is still anchored, in most cases, to a distribution with the traditional system (Figure 4): a distribution source – pharmacy – in every hospital decides what and how to buy according to requests, and delivers medications to the wards (Cost Centers – CC), where a standard stock of frequently prescribed drugs is always available.

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

125

As a consequence, this system produce highs inventory costs, and deals with different problems related to:

• the high value of departments fixed deposits;

• the difficult drug consume control at the ward level;

• the high risk of product obsolescence;

• the staff time devoted to administrative and medical medication management;

• the wards stocks location;

• unpredictability of requests for wards and frequency of urgent requests;

• the risk of failure in the early stages of association and patient care, preparation, adminis‐ tration and manual transcription of prescriptions from paper medical records to the nursing register paper.

 

intervention, of increasing complexity and directed to the realization of an operational model based on pre-assessments of opportunities. In the healthcare sector there is a growing awareness of the significant weight that investment in consumables and the cost of managing them have on the corporate balance sheet. Therefore, in order to increase the efficiency it is necessary to operate in the direction of simplifying the flows of materials and replace the current high level of stocks with a greater amount of accurate information available in real time about the various stages of the SC. Unlike what happened in manufacturing companies, in which the SCM is a strategic element of management, in the world of healthcare it is still anchored, in most cases, to a distribution with the traditional system (Figure 4): a distribution source – pharmacy – in every hospital decides what and how to buy according to requests, and delivers medications to the wards (Cost Centers – CC), where a standard stock of frequently prescribed drugs is always available. As a consequence, this system produce highs inventory costs, and deals with different problems related to:

 the high value of departments fixed deposits;  the difficult drug consume control at the ward level;  the high risk of product obsolescence;  the staff time devoted to administrative and medical medication management;  the wards stocks location;  unpredictability of requests for wards and frequency of urgent requests;  the risk of failure in the early stages of association and patient care, preparation,

administration and manual transcription of prescriptions from paper medical records to the nursing register paper.

Figure 4. Traditional system of drugs management.

However, starting from this traditional healthcare SCM [7-9], some healthcare realities are testing the centralized managing: a unique district or regional center among multiple hospitals recognizes needs, contacts the supplier and deals with pharmaceutical management. Therefore, the general future trend seems to be the aggregation under a single organizational unit of all business functions involved in the overall process of purchasing and logistics. 5. The Healthcare Supply Chain redesign: an Italian experience The Local Healthcare Company n. 8 of Cagliari – Sardinia, Italy – (hereinafter ASL) [41] was formed in 1995 from the merger of former Local Health Units. It has authority in 71 municipalities, with an area of approximately 4,569 square kilometers (equal to 19% of the total regional area of Sardinia) and for a population of about 550.000 inhabitants. It occupies a number of approximately 6,000

CC

Hospital Pharmacy

Hospital Pharmacy

Hospital Pharmacy

Hospital Pharmacy

Hospital Pharmacy

Supplier A Supplier B Supplier C

Hospital Pharmacy

CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC

Figure 4. Traditional system of drugs management.

However, starting from this traditional healthcare SCM [7-9], some healthcare realities are testing the centralized managing: a unique district or regional center among multiple hospitals recognizes needs, contacts the supplier and deals with pharmaceutical management. There‐ fore, the general future trend seems to be the aggregation under a single organizational unit of all business functions involved in the overall process of purchasing and logistics.

5. The healthcare supply chain redesign: An Italian experience

The Local Healthcare Company n. 8 of Cagliari – Sardinia, Italy – (hereinafter ASL) [41] was formed in 1995 from the merger of former Local Health Units. It has authority in 71 municipalities, with an area of approximately 4,569 square kilometers (equal to 19% of the total regional area of Sardinia) and for a population of about 550.000 inhabitants. It occupies a number of approximately 6,000 employees distributed among 7 hospitals units, 20 clinics and 10 accred‐

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains126

ited nursing homes. For dimensions, characteristics, geographical distribution and organiza‐ tion it is considered as one of the most complex healthcare companies currently operating in Italy. The extent of the territory, the population served, services and resources managed place it among the top five national healthcare companies.

In order to complete the process of SC redesign and pharmaceutical logistics reorganization, among the ASL has been set up the experimentation of the Pharmaceutical Department, with the aim to coordinate all the activities in the drugs area, in order to ensure uniform and centralized processes and procedures (Table 2).

Ensure the organization and operation of activities and processes aimed at the government of pharmaceutical care;

Ensure the quality of service delivery, at both hospital and community level;

Promote the development of integrated actions for the clinical management of drugs and medical devices;

Support the human resources training process for the improvement of professional qualification;

Identify guidelines for carrying out the activities of clinical pharmacy and patient care at hospital, outpatient, home and residential level;

Act within the criteria of effectiveness, efficiency, appropriateness and transparency.

Table 2. Pharmaceutical Department functions.

The organizational structure has been defined according to the functions of pharmaceutical care, attributing coordination and management specialist of the main tasks to specific operat‐ ing units. This reorganization also took into account the problems related to the government of pharmaceuticals expenditure and the information derived from the ministerial projects relating to drugs policies. For this reason, in order to facilitate the reorganization and ration‐ alization of processes, the Department consists of six operational units (Table 3):

Operational Units:

Pharmaceutical Assistance in Agreement

Hospital Parmaceutical Assistance

Direct Distribution

Pharmacovigilance and Pharmacoeconomics

Pharmaceutical Warehouse

Central Pharmaceutical Unit

Table 3. The Pharmaceutical Department structure.

With this configuration, skills are reconfigured and redistributed in order to provide greater support to corporate governance to all the units of the network. In particular:

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

127

1. The Pharmaceutical Assistance in Agreement Unit develops activities and processes related to the pharmaceutical assistance organization in the territorial field and to the adminis‐ trative control of the prescribing activities carried out by the healthcare personnel.

2. The Hospital Parmaceutical Assistance Unit guarantees the supply and distribution of medicines, medical supplies and medical surgical devices to hospitalized and discharged patients.

3. The Direct Distribution Unit ensures the direct delivery of drugs to patients in their own home, or the dispensing to the patient via pharmacies affiliated with the ASL, in accord‐ ance with specific agreements.

4. The Pharmacovigilance and Pharmacoeconomics Unit develops activities and processes to facilitate the proper use of medications, guide treatment decisions and formulate strat‐ egies and programs aimed at the appropriateness and containment of pharmaceutical expenditure.

5. The Pharmaceutical Warehouse Unit manages the inventory of drugs through the distribu‐ tion to the hospitals and the supply requests for the Central Pharmaceutical Unit. Additionally, it ensures, through the consumption analysis, rationalizing processes, avoiding the accumulation of stocks not justified by current usage or predictable, at the central level, in peripheral storages and wards. It also optimizes the inventory through the definition of procedures, distribution processes and balanced choices in terms of frequency distribution and minimization of inventories at the peripheral level. Finally, it prepares detailed perspective programs for the supply, in order to rationalize the timing for the execution of supply contracts and the preparation of new contracts.

6. The Central Pharmaceutical Unit governs the centralized purchasing process of drugs and medical surgical devices at the company level. It operates with the Pharmaceutical Warehouse Unit for the management of supply contracts and whit the Purchases Service for the preparation of new contracts. It also operates with the Pharmacovigilance and Pharmacoeconomics units for the technical evaluation of drugs to be purchased, and for the choice of substitutes and new products. Additionally, it prepares needs programs to fit the timing of supplies, preventing stock breakages or increased costs for the company due to urgent situations. It contributes for the implementation of regional guidelines for the realization of the regional program about rationalization and containment of phar‐ maceutical expenditure and strategic planning in the field of corporate purchases. Hence, it operates in order to constantly ensure the availability of drugs and medical devices.

5.1. Pharmaceutical Logistics Hub Project

The current logistics organization of the ASL presents strengths but especially criticalities. In particular, the presence of six pharmaceutical warehouses located in six different hospitals guarantees some advantages when compared to a possible centralized management of ware‐ houses:

a. a reduction of the time for the procurement of health goods by Cost Centers;

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains128

b. the optimization of emergencies management;

c. a cost reduction for the transport of goods from the pharmacy to the user centers.

Conversely, weaknesses resulting from the presence of six pharmaceutical warehouses are the following:

a. the replication of the same activities in the six hospitals, such as order management, receiving and distribution to Cost Centers;

b. inefficient management of stocks, as each pharmacy define their own needs independently from the others, with a resulting disproportionate total data compared to the real needs of the company;

c. ineffective management of stocks, because each pharmacy is completely independent from the other, whereby in case of drug stock breaking in a pharmaceutical warehouse the pharmacy purchase it even if it is present in sufficient quantity. In fact, the exchange from one warehouse to another is activated only in case of emergency;

d. the need for a large number of operators resulting from the localization of stocks in the different six warehouses and from the replication of the same activities;

e. a difficult inventory management with the multiplication of activities and different timings for each pharmaceutical warehouse;

f. inadequate places with inappropriate surfaces and volumes, architectural barriers that make it inadequate the storage and handling of goods;

g. high risk of consistent stocks in the wards.

The aim of the project is the outsourcing of logistics services and the unification and stand‐ ardization of all the logistics procedures related to the supply, storage and distribution of health and non-health goods in the ASL, by improving the effectiveness, efficiency and safety of all logistics processes. The main objective is the rationalization of pharmaceuticals man‐ agement, in order to contain risks associated with clinical processes for medication manage‐ ment, and to improve efficiency and effectiveness of supply logistics management, storage and distribution/administration of pharmaceuticals and medical devices. The overall project involves the concentration of existing warehouses in one site, and the structuring of stocking points of proximity, coinciding with the current hospital pharmacies and local pharmaceutical services, together with the centralized management and unified inventory of materials through an integrated information system (Figure 5).

The project involves the reengineering of the main logistics processes (order management, procurement, inventory management, distribution) through the centralization of the commons activities, in order to contain the pharmaceutical expenditure.

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

129

2

Figure 5. The reorganized pharmaceutical management with the Centralized Warehouse.

This centralization will cause an effect even in the organization of the drugs and medical devices procurement requests process to Cost Centers, which will be managed exclusively by computerized means (Figure 6). As already pointed out, the reengineering includes the transition from an empirical management of inventories to a computerized management (Figure 6). Therefore, it becomes essential to implement an information system with the

indication of under-stock and reorder point for drugs and medical devices in stock in pharmacies, in order to create a virtuous circle that will eliminate the empirical management, which in the past has led to frequent stock-outs, with obvious negative consequences. The redesign provides, firstly, the analysis of historical consumption data, the definition of under-stocks and reorder point by the pharmacist and, in the next phase, the weekly print execution of under-stocks by administrative

operators. At this point pharmacists validate the under-stocks for the order execution, the administrative operators predispose the supply orders and pharmacist validates orders. Finally, the administrative operators send orders to the economic operators. The pharmacist then will provide for the periodic revaluation of under-stocks and reorder point of pharmaceuticals and medical devices in stock.

Supplier A Supplier B Supplier C

Orders Center

HUB

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC

ACTIVITY

HOSPITAL

PHARMACISTS

ADMINISTRATIVE

OPERATORS

WAREHOUSE

OPEWEEKLY PRINT

OF DRUGS AND

UNDER-STOCKS

ANALYSIS OF HISTORICAL

CONSUMPTION DATA

DEFINITION OF UNDER-

STOCKS AND

REORDER POINT

WEEKLY PRINT OF DRUGS

AND UNDER-STOCKS

UNDER-STOCKS

VALIDATION FOR ORDER

PROPOSAL

ORDERS PREPARATION

UNDER-SWEEKLY PRINT

OF DRUGS AND UNDER-

STOCKS

ORDERS DISPATCH

PERIODIC

UNDEORORDERS

PREPARATION

OR

YES

Figure 5. The reorganized pharmaceutical management with the Centralized Warehouse.

This centralization will cause an effect even in the organization of the drugs and medical devices procurement requests process to Cost Centers, which will be managed exclusively by computerized means (Figure 6).

As already pointed out, the reengineering includes the transition from an empirical manage‐ ment of inventories to a computerized management (Figure 6). Therefore, it becomes essential to implement an information system with the indication of under-stock and reorder point for drugs and medical devices in stock in pharmacies, in order to create a virtuous circle that will eliminate the empirical management, which in the past has led to frequent stock-outs, with obvious negative consequences. The redesign provides, firstly, the analysis of historical consumption data, the definition of under-stocks and reorder point by the pharmacist and, in the next phase, the weekly print execution of under-stocks by administrative operators. At this point pharmacists validate the under-stocks for the order execution, the administrative operators predispose the supply orders and pharmacist validates orders. Finally, the admin‐ istrative operators send orders to the economic operators. The pharmacist then will provide for the periodic revaluation of under-stocks and reorder point of pharmaceuticals and medical devices in stock.

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains130

2

Figure 5. The reorganized pharmaceutical management with the Centralized Warehouse.

This centralization will cause an effect even in the organization of the drugs and medical devices procurement requests process to Cost Centers, which will be managed exclusively by computerized means (Figure 6). As already pointed out, the reengineering includes the transition from an empirical management of inventories to a computerized management (Figure 6). Therefore, it becomes essential to implement an information system with the

indication of under-stock and reorder point for drugs and medical devices in stock in pharmacies, in order to create a virtuous circle that will eliminate the empirical management, which in the past has led to frequent stock-outs, with obvious negative consequences. The redesign provides, firstly, the analysis of historical consumption data, the definition of under-stocks and reorder point by the pharmacist and, in the next phase, the weekly print execution of under-stocks by administrative

operators. At this point pharmacists validate the under-stocks for the order execution, the administrative operators predispose the supply orders and pharmacist validates orders. Finally, the administrative operators send orders to the economic operators. The pharmacist then will provide for the periodic revaluation of under-stocks and reorder point of pharmaceuticals and medical devices in stock.

Supplier A Supplier B Supplier C

Orders Center

HUB

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

Hospital

Pharmacy

CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC CC

ACTIVITY

HOSPITAL

PHARMACISTS

ADMINISTRATIVE

OPERATORS

WAREHOUSE

OPEWEEKLY PRINT

OF DRUGS AND

UNDER-STOCKS

ANALYSIS OF HISTORICAL

CONSUMPTION DATA

DEFINITION OF UNDER-

STOCKS AND

REORDER POINT

WEEKLY PRINT OF DRUGS

AND UNDER-STOCKS

UNDER-STOCKS

VALIDATION FOR ORDER

PROPOSAL

ORDERS PREPARATION

UNDER-SWEEKLY PRINT

OF DRUGS AND UNDER-

STOCKS

ORDERS DISPATCH

PERIODIC

UNDEORORDERS

PREPARATION

OR

YES

Figure 6. Inventory management in case of centralized warehouse

5.2. The rationalization of pharmaceuticals flows

Actually, the predominant activity of the pharmacists is represented by the orders issuance, which requires the 20% of their time/work; the control of healthcare goods entering and leaving the ASL requires approximately the 60% of the time/work available; the remaining 10% of the workload is dedicated to procurement practices, and only the 10% of the time is dedicated to give information in the wards. Therefore, it is clear that the management proc‐ esses related to logistics absorb almost all the work of the pharmacist, which is mainly spent in non-strategic activities and that may be delegated to non-management figures.

With regard to the orders management, the phase of issuance actually entails that each hos‐ pital pharmacy produce supply orders for the same supplier, the same drug and the same day, with a useless replication activity. Additionally, inventories are not managed according to a computerized management with under-stocks and reorder point, but with a merely em‐ pirical verification. This generates the emission of orders for the same supplier at a distance of a few days, with obvious managerial repercussions.

Conversely, with the centralized warehouse, the under-stock and reorder point will be indi‐ cated and orders will be created on the basis of computerized data, assembling goods for the same supplier with a reduction in the number of orders: it will be generated only one order, and not six different orders for the same supplier. Additionally, the order will be prepared

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

131

on the basis of a date processed electronically and not according to an empirical verification. In the centralized warehouse there will be an area dedicated to the acceptance of drugs and medical devices in stock, followed by a qualitative and quantitative control, with the load‐ ing of transport documents in the computer system, followed by the print of the position in the central warehouse and the storage of medicines and medical devices.

As regards to medical devices in transit, after the qualitative and quantitative control and the loading of the document in the computer system, the delivery of the material will take place. The expected result is a significant reduction of supply orders and a consequent re‐ duction in the number of bills that will affect positively the timing of their settlement. In ad‐ dition, the replication of activities in the various hospital pharmacies by pharmacists will be avoided, allowing a reduction in the time/effort devoted to the orders issuance manage‐ ment, and consequently prescription appropriateness increase.

3

Figure 6: inventory management in case of centralized warehouse

5.2 The rationalization of pharmaceuticals flows

Actually, the predominant activity of the pharmacists is represented by the orders issuance, which requires the 20% of their time/work; the control of healthcare goods entering and leaving the ASL requires approximately the 60% of the time/work available; the remaining 10% of the workload is dedicated to procurement practices, and only the 10% of the time is

dedicated to give information in the wards. Therefore, it is clear that the management processes related to logistics absorb almost all the work of the pharmacist, which is mainly spent in non-strategic activities and that may be delegated to non- management figures. With regard to the orders management, the phase of issuance actually entails that each hospital pharmacy produce supply

orders for the same supplier, the same drug and the same day, with a useless replication activity. Additionally, inventories are not managed according to a computerized management with under-stocks and reorder point, but with a merely empirical verification. This generates the emission of orders for the same supplier at a distance of a few days, with obvious managerial repercussions.

Conversely, with the centralized warehouse, the under-stock and reorder point will be indicated and orders will be created on the basis of computerized data, assembling goods for the same supplier with a reduction in the number of orders: it will be generated only one order, and not six different orders for the same supplier. Additionally, the order will be prepared on the basis of a date processed electronically and not according to an empirical verification. In the centralized warehouse there will

be an area dedicated to the acceptance of drugs and medical devices in stock, followed by a qualitative and quantitative control, with the loading of transport documents in the computer system, followed by the print of the position in the central warehouse and the storage of medicines and medical devices. As regards to medical devices in transit, after the qualitative and quantitative control and the loading of the document in the computer system, the delivery of the material will take place. The expected result is a significant reduction of supply orders

and a consequent reduction in the number of bills that will affect positively the timing of their settlement. In addition, the replication of activities in the various hospital pharmacies by pharmacists will be avoided, allowing a reduction in the time/effort devoted to the orders issuance management, and consequently prescription appropriateness increase. As regards the procurement process managed, the Figure 7 shows how the process will change with the exclusive use of the

computerized procedure. The figure describes the new drugs and medical devices procurement requests process to Cost Centers. It will start with the “coarse profile” preparation, on the basis of historical consumption by Cost Centers, to be followed by a custom profiling managed by the pharmacist. The next phase will involve the preparation of the computerized request of the Cost Center and the subsequent electronic transmission to the pharmacy. At this point, the pharmacist performs

qualitative and quantitative computerized assessment of health goods required, and prints the request that is then delivered to warehouse personnel, who will provide for the preparation of pharmaceuticals and medical devices. If a discrepancy turns out during the preparation, it will be reported and the appropriate changes in the information technology will take place. At this point, the administrative operator closes the request, and the computerized unloading to Cost Centers will take place. The

final demand of drugs and medical devices will be printed and delivered to Cost Centers. The expected result of this innovation is a constantly updated inventory and a full Cost Centers expenditure monitoring, as well as the possibility of providing an annual program of supply on the basis of consumption data.

ACTIVITY COST

CENTER

HOSPITAL

PHARMACIST

WAREHOUSE

OPERATORS

COMPUTER

TECHNICIAN

ADMINISTRATIVE

OPERATORS

HISTORICAL

CC PROFILE

DEFINITION

PERSONALIZED

PROFILE

DEFINITION

TELEMATIC

REQUEST

PREPARATION

TELEMATIC

REQUEST

DISPATCH

COMPUTERIZED

EVALUATION

COMPUTERIZED

VALIDATION

COMPUTERIZED

UNLOADING TO

CC

PRODUCTS

PREPARATION

DELIVERY AND

TRANSPORT TO

CC

Figure 7. The reorganized procurement process to Cost Centers

As regards the procurement process managed, the Figure 7 shows how the process will change with the exclusive use of the computerized procedure. The figure describes the new drugs and medical devices procurement requests process to Cost Centers. It will start with the “coarse profile” preparation, on the basis of historical consumption by Cost Centers, to

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains132

be followed by a custom profiling managed by the pharmacist. The next phase will involve the preparation of the computerized request of the Cost Center and the subsequent electron‐ ic transmission to the pharmacy. At this point, the pharmacist performs qualitative and quantitative computerized assessment of health goods required, and prints the request that is then delivered to warehouse personnel, who will provide for the preparation of pharma‐ ceuticals and medical devices. If a discrepancy turns out during the preparation, it will be reported and the appropriate changes in the information technology will take place. At this point, the administrative operator closes the request, and the computerized unloading to Cost Centers will take place. The final demand of drugs and medical devices will be printed and delivered to Cost Centers. The expected result of this innovation is a constantly updated inventory and a full Cost Centers expenditure monitoring, as well as the possibility of pro‐ viding an annual program of supply on the basis of consumption data.

6. Conclusions

The motivation for this research field is driven by the need to lower healthcare costs and to improve patient care quality by identyfing opportunities for healthcare organizations to improve their logistics processes, considering that hospitals represent the largest cost compo‐ nent of the national healthcare expenditures in most of the countries.

In the first part of the chapter we have provided general definitions and charactersitics of Healthcare Supply Chain and pharmaceutical logistics. We have emphasized the importance of both concepts in relation to emerging trends in healthcare system. Healthcare Supply Chain has become an important research topic in the past decade and its popularity is still increasing. This has resulted in the need to reenginering the Healthcare Supply Chian and, in particular, the pharmaceutical management, the importance of which is fundamental to the delivery of quality services to patients and reduction of costs.

There are two opportunities in this work where reenginering is applied: a) centralized supply system, and b) material management. In the redisigned system, several benefits have been achieved, in terms of:

1. cost and inventory reduction, due to more frequent deliveries, and the minimization of hospital central stores;

2. staff reduction in terms of amount of work of both hospital pharmacies and patient care staff, previously occupied in the point-of-use replenishment;

3. higher level of service;

4. exploitation of economies of scale, due to large orders and the absorption of uncertainty on the estimates due to the large numbers.

The transformation of the SCM model requires three mains conditions: collaborative governance structures, efficient processes and integrated information system. The right governance structure for SCM allows hospitals to maintain the balance between reducing costs and providing high-

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

133

quality care. It requires that the SCM governance evolves to a collaborative approach involving all stakeholders, without which all other efforts to move to the transformation model simply will fail. This collaboration requires the appropriate governance structure and processes. Indeed, when processes are fragmented or incomplete, they cause errors in terms of ordering the wrong item or wrong quantities of an item.

At last, automating and integrating IT systems will allow hospitals to seamlessly link their logistics processes. The centralized management requires that hospitals in the network dialogue continuously with the warehouse, together with a flow of information that travels in both directions (from the hospital to the Central Warehouse and vice versa).

Acknowledgements

Fabiana Marras gratefully acknowledges Sardinia Regional Government for the financial support of her PhD scholarship (P.O.R. Sardegna F.S.E. Operational Programme of the Autonomous Region of Sardinia, European Social Fund 2007-2013-Axis IV Human Resources, Objective l.3, Line of Activity l.3.1.).

Author details

Roberta Pinna*, Pier Paolo Carrus and Fabiana Marras

*Address all correspondence to: [email protected]

Department of Economics and Business, University of Cagliari, Italy

References

[1] Cagliano A.C., Carcangiu C.E., Pilloni T., Rafele C. Supply Chain Ospedaliere: Esper‐ ienze a Confronto. In: proceedings XXXVI Convengo Nazionale Ingegneria e Impian‐ tistica Italiana, 11-12 June 2009, Roma, Italia.

[2] Chunning, Z., Kumar, A. JIT application: process-oriented supply chain management in a health care system. In: Management of Innovation and Technology, 2000. ICMIT 2000. Proceedings of the 2000 IEEE International Conference on; (2) 788-791, 12-15 November, Singapore.

[3] Rivard-Royer H., Landry S., Beaulieu M. Hybrid stockless: A case study: Lessons for health-care supply chain integration. International Journal of Operations & Produc‐ tion Management 2002; 22(4) 412-424.

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains134

[4] Kumar A., Ozdamar L., Zhang C. N. Supply chain redesign in the healthcare indus‐ try of Singapore. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 2008; 13(2) 95-103.

[5] Parker J., DeLay D. The future of the healthcare supply chain. Healthcare financial management: journal of the Healthcare Financial Management Association 2008; 62(4) 66-69.

[6] Agwunobi J., London P. A. Removing costs from the health care supply chain: les‐ sons from mass retail. Health affairs 2009; 28(5) 1336-1342.

[7] Bensa G., Giusepi I., Villa S. Riprogettare la logistica nelle aziende sanitarie: esper‐ ienze a confronto. In: Cantù E. (ed.) Rapporto OASI 2009. L’aziendalizzazione della sanità in Italia. Milano: Egea; 2009. p331-366.

[8] Kazemzadeh R. B., Sepehri M. M., Jahantigh F. F. Design and Analysis of a Health Care Supply Chain Management. Advanced Materials Research 2012; 433-440(2012) 2128-2134.

[9] Smith B. K., Nachtmann H., Pohl E. A. Improving Healthcare Supply Chain Process‐ es Via Data Standardization. Engineering Management Journal 2012; 24(1).

[10] Pinna R., Carrus P.P., Marras F. The Drug Logistics between Efficiency and Safety for Patients: The Experience of an Italian Region. In: proceedings of the 17th Toulon-Ver‐ ona Conference Excellence in Services, 28-29 August 2014, Liverpool, UK.

[11] Colletti J. J. Health care reform and the hospital supply chain. Hospital material man‐ agement quarterly 1994; 15(3) 28-35.

[12] Mentzer J.T., DeWitt W., Keebler J.S., Min S., Nix N.W., Smith C.D., Zacharia Z.G. Defining supply chain managemen. Journal of Business Logistics 2001; 22(2) 1-25.

[13] Meijboom B. R., Bakx S. J., Westert G. P. Continuity in health care: lessons from sup‐ ply chain management. The International journal of health planning and manage‐ ment 2010; 25(4) 304-317.

[14] Ford E. W., Scanlon D. P. Promise and problems with supply chain management ap‐ proaches to health care purchasing. Health care management review 2006; 32(3) 192-202.

[15] Lee S. M., Lee D., Schniederjans M. J. Supply chain innovation and organizational performance in the healthcare industry. International Journal of Operations & Pro‐ duction Management 2011; 31(11) 1193-1214.

[16] Beier F.J. The management of the supply chain for hospital pharmacies: a focus on inventory management practices. Journal of Business Logistics 1995; 16 (2) 153-73.

[17] Bowersox, D. J., D. J. Closs. Logistical Management: The Integrated Supply Chain Process. New York: McGraw-Hill; 1996.

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

135

[18] Lambert D. M., Stock J. R., Ellram L. M. Fundamentals of logistics management. Bos‐ ton: Irwin/McGraw-Hill; 1998.

[19] Shou Y. Perspectives on Supply Chain Management in the Healthcare Industry. 2nd International Conference on Science and Social Research 2013, Atlantis Press.

[20] Aptel O. Pourjalali H. Improving activities and decreasing costs of logistics in hospi‐ tals: a comparison of US and French hospitals. The International Journal of Account‐ ing 2001; 36(1) 65-90.

[21] Jarrett P. G. Logistics in the health care industry. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management 1998; 28(9/10) 741-772.

[22] Jennett P.G., Igras E., Harrison A.C., Premkumar K. Health information technology, its role in healthcare management: a regional case study, International Journal of Health Care Technology and Management 1999; 11 (1/2) 1-10.

[23] Bazzoli G.J., Dynan L., Burns L.R., Yap C. Two decades of organizational change in health care: what have we learned? Medical Care Research and Review 2004; 61 (3) 247-331.

[24] Bhakoo V., Chan, C. Collaborative implementation of e-business processes within the health-care supply chain: the Monash Pharmacy Project. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 2011; 16(3) 184-193.

[25] AbuKhousa E., Al-Jaroodi J., Lazarova-Molnar S., Mohamed N. Simulation and Mod‐ eling Efforts to Support Decision Making in Healthcare Supply Chain Management. Scientific World Journal 2014; 1-16; Article ID 354246.

[26] Rossetti M. D., Liu Y. Simulating SKU proliferation in a health care supply chain. In: M. D. Rossetti, R. R. Hill, B. Johansson, A. Dunkin and R. G. Ingalls (eds.) Proceed‐ ings of the 2009 Winter Simulation Conference; 2365-2374. 13-16 December, Austin, TX; 2009.

[27] Aronsson H., Abrahamsson M., Spens K. Developing lean and agile health care sup‐ ply chains. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 2011; 16(3) 176-183.

[28] Chikumba P. A. Application of Geographic Information System (GIS) in Drug Logis‐ tics Management Information System (LMIS) at District Level in Malawi: Opportuni‐ ties and Challenges. Master Thesis. University of Oslo; 2009.

[29] Carr A. S., Pearson J. N. Strategically managed buyer–supplier relationships and per‐ formance outcomes. Journal of operations management 1999; 17(5) 497-519.

[30] Kotabe M., Martin X., Domoto H. Gaining from vertical partnerships: knowledge transfer, relationship duration, and supplier performance improvement in the US and Japanese automotive industries. Strategic management journal 2003; 24(4) 293-316.

Applications of Contemporary Management Approaches in Supply Chains136

[31] Prahinski C., Benton W. C. Supplier evaluations: communication strategies to im‐ prove supplier performance. Journal of operations management 2004; 22(1) 39-62.

[32] Giunipero L., Handfield R. B., Eltantawy, R. Supply management’s evolution: key skill sets for the supply manager of the future. International Journal of Operations & Production Management 2006; 26(7) 822-844.

[33] Carrus P. P., Pinna R. Information Technology and Supply Chain Management Coor‐ dination: The Role of Third Party Logistics Providers. International Journal of E-Serv‐ ices and Mobile Applications (IJESMA) 2011; 3(4) 21-36.

[34] Pinna R., Carrus P.P., Pettinao D. Supply Chain Coordination and IT: the role of third party logistics providers. In: D’Atri A., De Marco M., Braccini A.M., Cabiddu F., (eds) Management of the Interconnected World. Springer; 2010. p299-306.

[35] Roy S., Sivakumar K., Wilkinson L.F. Innovation generation in supply chain relation‐ ships: a conceptual model and research propositions. Journal of the Academy of Mar‐ keting Science 2004; 32(1) 61-79.

[36] Cagliano A., Carlin A., Grimaldi S. La logistica del farmaco in ambito ospedaliero. In: proceedings XXXIV Convegno nazionale ANIMP OICE UAMI, 26-28 April, 2007, Iso‐ la d’Elba, Italia.

[37] Haavik, S. Building a demand-driven, vendormanaged supply chain. Healthcare Fi‐ nancial Management 2000; 54(2) 56-61.

[38] Poulin, E. Benchmarking the hospital logistics process. CMA Management 2003; 77(1) 20-23.

[39] De Vries, J. The shaping of inventory systems in health services: a stakeholder analy‐ sis. International Journal of Production Economics 2011; 133(1) 60-69.

[40] Bhakoo V, Singh P., Sohal A. Collaborative management of inventory in Australian hospital supply chains: practices and issues. Supply Chain Management: An Interna‐ tional Journal 2012; 17(2) 217-230.

[41] ASL Cagliari. http://www.aslcagliari.it/index.html (accessed 15 September 2014).

Emerging Trends in Healthcare Supply Chain Management — An Italian Experience http://dx.doi.org/10.5772/59748

137

Article 12 .pdf

Supply Chain 2020

Next generation supply chain: Supply chain 2020

July 2013

Copyright © 2013, by McKinsey & Company, Inc.

Next generation supply chain: Supply chain 2020

Knut Alicke Balaji Iyer

2

3 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

Contents Acknowledgements 5

Introduction 7

1. Key trends shaping supply chains 9

2. Implications for the next generation supply chain 15

4

5 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

Acknowledgements We would like to thank Sumit Dutta, a partner in our Mumbai office, and Muthiah Venkateswaran, an associate partner in our Chennai office, for their contributions to this whitepaper.

We would like to thank Insa Mareen Wente, a consultant based in our Hamburg office; Kerstin Kubik, a knowledge expert based in our Vienna office; and Markus Leopoldseder, a director of knowledge (supply chain management) based in our Vienna office, for their contributions.

We would also like to thank Vineeta Rai for the editorial support; Kulsum Merchant for the support in external relations; J Sathya Kumar and Nipun Gosain for their visual aids support.

This whitepaper is not based on any primary research that we conducted; it synthesises our perspectives gained from past research and experience in serving multiple stakeholders of supply chains over many years. For the experience and perspectives, we acknowledge our supply chain practice without whose efforts this whitepaper could not have been published.

Finally, we would like to thank the Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) and CII Institute of Logistics for the opportunity and the forum to provide our perspective on supply chain evolution.

This work is independent and has not been commissioned or sponsored in any way by any business, government or other institution.

Knut Alicke Master Expert, McKinsey & Company

Balaji Iyer Engagement Manager, McKinsey & Company

6

7 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

Introduction The supply chain will be a key element to shape the future of businesses. Many corporates have long demonstrated that supply chain management is a tool for competitive advantage. It will evolve as a top priority for CEOs across organisations over the next few years.

Due to the difficulty in managing short-term growth and profitability, companies will tend to focus on extreme cost controls. It is equally important to plan the future and supply chain will be a key element in shaping the future of businesses. As companies look for ways to compete in such volatile environments, they will need to master supply chain evolution and make it a distinctive competitive advantage.

McKinsey & Company’s whitepaper, Next generation supply chain: Supply chain 2020, provides a perspective on the key trends that will drive the next generation supply chain, and describes their potential implications.

Five key trends will drive the next generation supply chain: innovations in businesses; uncertainties together with shorter and tougher business cycles; expanding and demanding consumer base; converging wages and increasing costs; and the evolution of big data. Each of these will have a significant bearing on the way today’s supply chains operate, and will drive the next generation supply chain.

Four key implications of the trends are: evolution of a smart, segmented and customer-centric supply chain; transformation to an agile, robust and sustainable supply chain; emergence of Supply Chain as a Service (SCaaS); and development of relevant and capable supply chain.

Organisations must evolve continuously to stay at the top. For companies to gain a competitive edge, the supply chain leaders will have to factor in these trends and their potential implications on the business. They will have to develop their supply chain strategy by taking into account the design of future logistics networks, improving the responsiveness of the supply chain, and working towards supply chain operational excellence.

We hope this whitepaper will contribute to the on-going organisational discussions on their preparedness to face the future and build the next generation supply chain.

8

9 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

1. Key trends shaping supply chains

Companies evolve over time with changing business dynamics; in parallel, they lead to supply chain evolutions. Supply chain management will remain a key source of competitive advantage and it is critical to master its evolution. Companies will need to understand the underlying trends that shape supply chains and develop the next generation supply chain.

FIVE KEY TRENDS SHAPE THE SUPPLY CHAIN Within a continuously changing environment, multiple trends influence the way businesses operate. This whitepaper aims to bring to the fore five key trends that will deeply impact the way supply chains evolve.

The trends are: innovations in businesses; shorter and tougher business cycles; expanding and demanding consumer base; converging wages and increasing costs; and the evolution of big data. Each will have a major impact on the way today’s supply chains operate, and will drive the next generation supply chain.

Innovations in businesses will have far-reaching implications on the supply chains of the future. A quick look at the past highlights the fact that innovations fundamentally change the way a supply chain operates—in transport such as the container, in handling such as bar codes and robots, in daily supply chain management with IT systems. The future will have to evolve with new innovations. Potential innovations that can drive changes to the supply chain are highlighted in Exhibit 1.

Exhibit 1

Nine potential economically disruptive technologies

SOURCE: McKinsey Global Institute analysis

3D printing Additive manufacturing techniques to create objects by printing layers of material based on digital models

Advanced materials Materials designed to have superior characteristics (e.g., strength, weight, conductivity) or functionality

Advanced oil and gas exploration and recovery Exploration and recovery techniques that make extraction of unconventional oil and gas economical

Autonomous and near-autonomous vehicles Vehicles that can navigate and operate with reduced or no human intervention

Cloud technology Use of computer hardware and software resources delivered over a network or the Internet, often as a service

The Internet of Things Networks of low-cost sensors and actuators for data collection, monitoring, decision making, and process optimisation

Automation of knowledge work Intelligent software systems that can perform knowledge tasks involving unstructured commands and subtle judgements

Mobile Internet Increasingly inexpensive and capable mobile computing devices and Internet connectivity

Advanced robotics Increasingly capable robots with enhanced senses, dexterity, and intelligence used to automate tasks or augment humans

10

The impact of these innovations on supply chains will vary across industries, but will be significant across all of them. It is important for businesses to map the impact of these innovations on their supply chains as they plan their future.

Uncertainties, shorter and tougher business cycles are here to stay. Volatility in business/with partners has always remained a challenge. Business risks driven by uncertainties in the value chain, non-economic factors, macro-regulatory environment and global interconnections have increased in frequency and intensity (Exhibit 2). This has expanded the boundaries of global supply chains’ search for the right partners and customers.

Experts suggest that, in the future, economic cycles that were witnessed once in 10 to 15 years could be witnessed once in 5 years. Recent history brings such a reality closer home; the world experienced one major crisis approximately every 5 years—the Asian banking crisis in the late 1990s, the dotcom bust in the early 2000s, the sub-prime crisis in the late 2000s. It takes time to recover from a crisis—the automotive industry example suggests that markets take 12 to 18 months to recover to the pre-crisis levels, leading to supply–demand imbalances and extreme highs and lows in asset utilisation (Exhibit 3).

Exhibit 2

Unforeseeable risks have increased in frequency and intensity

SOURCE: McKinsey Agile Operations

Uncertainty rises…▪ Unexpected changes in demand

▪ Increased demand for customisation

▪ Price volatility ▪ Supplier insolvency

▪ Credit availability ▪ Exchange rate

fluctuations ▪ Euro crises impact ▪ Trade protectionism

▪ Global supply and demand networks amplify and transmit changes at unprecedented pace

▪ Natural disasters ▪ Adverse weather▪ Political unrest

11 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

As the next generation supply chains evolve, it is important for professionals to manage global volatility and build a resilient and flexible supply chain—one that is able to react to risks and return to the original state from any shock within a short span of time.

Expanding and demanding consumers will add to the complexity the supply chain handles. New cities will emerge and these and existing cities will cater to a large population. India will see more than 1,000 new urban centres over the next 20 years and China will see more than 60 per cent of retail demand coming from tier 3/4 cities (Exhibit 4). Increasing demand from across the country will drive supply chain network complexity and challenges in efficient last mile distribution.

Exhibit 3

100%

Future1211100908072006

Development of volume demand

Tougher business cycles lead to supply chain imbalances

Index – units per year

COMMERCIAL VEHICLE MANUFACTURER

SOURCE: McKinsey Agile Operations

ForecastActual

Large ranges lead to major supply – demand imbalances and extreme highs and lows in asset utilisation

12–18 months

12

Around 100 million Indian households will move up to the middle class; there will be a four-fold increase in per capita disposable income in India. Consumers will become more demanding— as seen in the US, there will be a strong shift towards web-based/web-influenced sale highlighting the growing need for convenience (Exhibit 5). Consumers’ demand for customisation is moving beyond luxury purchases—customisation is a feature of shoes and apparel too. A common plan for all customers or products will cease to yield the desired results. As preferences change, it is critical to plan effectively to meet what key segments desire.

Exhibit 4

Rapid urbanisation drives growth, new urban centres will evolve

SOURCE: India urbanisation report, MGI; McKinsey’s China Consumer Center survey; Nielsen

Tiers 3&4 <1 MN

Tier 2 1-4 MN

Tier 1 >4 MN

2010E

360

220

43

97

2030E

590

331

104

155

6,000

10 13

1,000

5,000

5532

Cities with 1mn+

India: Population by tier Million

China: FMCG market growth RMB billion

2015E2010

453

T3+T4 (~840 cities)

T1+T2 (~40 cities)

869

37%

63%

56%

44%

Rural conversion

Number of citiesx

13 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

Converging wages and increasing costs will drive changes to the manufacturing and distribution set-up. The wage advantage of India and China is reducing as countries like Thailand, Indonesia, Mexico and Egypt bridge the gap (Exhibit 6). With rising fuel prices, increasing logistics costs and volatile business environments, businesses will look to nearshore production to meet the demand.

Exhibit 5

Strivers (500–1,000)

Seekers (200–500)

Aspirers (90–200)

Deprived (<90)

Globals (>1,000) 1.2

10.9 91.3

101.1

2.4

HouseholdsHousehold income Disposable income

2.0

3.1 11.4

5.4

1.6

Strivers (500–1,000) Seekers (200–500) Aspirers (90–200)

Deprived (<90)

Globals (>1,000) 9.5

94.9 93.1

49.9

33.1 21.7

30.6 13.7

2.6

20.9

MNIndian rupees (000) Indian rupees (TRN)

20 05

20 25

E

SOURCE: McKinsey Global Institute; Forrester 1 Consumers who research purchases online but buy the product in store

56 47

100% =

2016E

3,799

44

9

2011

2,977

37

7

Offline

Web influenced offline1

Online

Indian middle class (Seekers & Strivers) will grow from 13+ million to 125+ million households Indian households’ disposable income will see 4x growth

Demographic landscape will undergo major changes, web linked sales will grow

U.S. retail sales USD billion

14

Big data is already here. The world is creating and storing data at a rapid pace, much faster than in the past. The data is getting captured and distributed across multiple nodes in real time. With significant improvements in analytics capabilities, analysing big data will provide key insights and has the potential to develop innovations that lead to competitive advantages. Supply chain managers will be well positioned to benefit from big data—they can make business decisions based on real time data across the entire supply chain.

□ □ □

Exhibit 6

Cross-sector manufacturing labor hourly wage USD

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Malaysia

Argentina

Russia

Mexico

Indonesia

Egypt

China

20171413121110090807062007

Thailand

India

SOURCE: The Economist Intelligence Unit 2013

Labor cost of ‘classical’ manufacturing outsourcing countries rising

15 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

2. Implications for the next generation supply chain

The five key trends will have important implications for the next generation supply chain. In this section, we present four potential implications. Organisations should proactively consider and evaluate the relevance of these implications to their businesses as they plan to develop the future supply chain.

FOUR POTENTIAL IMPLICATIONS ORGANISATIONS SHOULD CONSIDER A smart, segmented and customer-centric supply chain will evolve. Innovations in technology, businesses and society will drive supply chain evolution. Advancements in robotics and product identification technology have led to robots replacing humans in material handling operations. Currently, robots are used in the warehousing operations of multiple US e-commerce ventures and are expected to drive the next generation supply chain with faster and better pick-up and packing. A retail chain in South Korea created virtual stores in subways to convert ‘dead time’ into productive shopping time for metro travellers. Customers can scan and order from a virtual planogram in the metro.

It is interesting to conceptualise an ‘autonomous’ container—a smart container that knows what goods it carries, the location to which it carries them, and the time the goods are expected at the destination. The smart container could automatically navigate through liners, get loaded in the optimal liner and continue to communicate to aid the monitoring of transit.

As consumers become demanding, supply chains will become more complex and responsive. Supply chains will devise micro segments and provide tailored offerings to satisfy the growing and demanding consumers. The advent of social networking has provided the potential to understand customer mindsets, and organisations will increasingly tap leads through social media for targeted promotions. The supply chain has to be geared to capture interested consumers and provide products/services on time every time. Execution will require innovative multi-tier controlling across the supply chain.

Community-based crowd forecasting could be an option to improve forecasting accuracy. In such an instance, people with different knowledge backgrounds can be formed as a community and leveraged to work on given datasets to drive forecasts independently.

Supply chains will become agile, robust and sustainable. Product life cycles will get shorter. Retail supply chains might have to manage with new products once every 12 months. Supply chains could move into a push–pull–flush model; the new product follows the ‘push model’ for approximately 3 months, for the next 6 months it evolves into a ‘pull-based’ supply chain, and in the last 3 months the supply chain is flushed out and gets ready for the new variant (Exhibit 7).

16

To master the shorter product life cycles and volatile business environments, supply chains will build agility across the chain. Supply chains can become agile by focusing attention across five functions—production, capital asset, purchasing, product development and planning (Exhibit 8). Production agility will have a manufacturing/supply set-up that can ramp up/down quickly, has flexible processes and flexibility in labour. Capital asset agility will build a flexible footprint, platforms and machines. Purchasing agility will be driven by supplier development, collaboration in planning, co-location, outsourcing, and appropriate risk management including regular portfolio risk analysis and mitigation plans. Modularisation and concurrent cross- functional product development will drive agility in product development. An agile planning organisation will strive to shape consumer demand, focus on segmentation, drive end-to-end planning, improve accuracy in forecasting supported by scientific inventory strategy, and drive excellence in execution through “war rooms”— a central room where empowered decision makers using facts collaborate, plan, execute, review and improve the performance of the supply chain.

As wages and transportation costs increase and the benefits of offshoring start to decline, more supply chains will work to find alternatives to existing supply chain locations, partners and structures. With a stable geo-political environment one can expect the manufacturing bases to reorganise for future growth, adopt nearshoring and evolve new distribution models (Exhibit 9). New hubs will evolve and new partnerships will be formed.

Exhibit 7

120

Fundamental rethinking required for short life cycle of today‘s products

SOURCE: McKinsey

3 6 3

Push Pull Flush

▪ Initial ramp-up of the markets

▪ Flexible manufacturing ▪ Fast delivery ▪ Immediately react to

changes in market demand

▪ Leverage alternative channels to free up for additional volumes

Months

Push-pull-flush of products Demand

17 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

Exhibit 8

▪ Supplier selection; develop

▪ Make or buy; Contracting strategies

▪ Risk transfer

Key to build agility across functions

▪ Labour flexibility

▪ Ramp up/down capabilities

▪ Process design flexibility

▪ Asset footprint

▪ Asset flexibility

▪ Modularisa- tion/standar- disation/late differentiation

▪ Diversified R&D funnel

Agile Organisation

Production agility

Capital productivity

agility Purchasing

agility

Product development

agility Planning agility

9

10

641

2

3

5 7

8

▪ Demand shaping

▪ Inventory strategy

▪ End-to-end planning

▪ Forecasting ▪ War room

11

12

13

14 15

SOURCE: McKinsey Agile Operations

Examples of levers

Exhibit 9

Supply chains will return to more localised, region-for-region set-up

Regional, self-organising clusters, e.g., joint transportation to port

Outsourcing/global sourcing

Customer

1980

2010

2020

18

Supply chain as a service (SCaaS) could become a business option. The ability to capture and analyse data is better than ever before. So, supply chain management will become real time. New methods to capture data will evolve, analytics will be automated and decisions can be made in real time. With the increasing number of specialists in data management and analytics, supply chain could evolve as a service. SCaaS providers can add value by capturing and analysing information for supply chain management and business decisions. This requires, in addition to data and analytics, trusted relationships, people capabilities and clear service level agreements (Exhibit 10). As an example, with the usage of robotics and identification technologies, the need to solve challenges in inventory management across the supply chain and increase customer convenience, solution providers have created online product availability maps and real time planograms—a store manager can find out what the shelves stock, FMCG companies can know about the shelf space allocations, and a customer can virtually see the entire shop and order online.

Supply chains will communicate their relevance and impact to the board. Supply chain managers will have to drive supply chain impact, communicate what the board says and enable change management. Supply chain impact will move from just focusing on the traditional cost of logistics, warehousing and administration to include impact of lost sales, inventory holding and obsolescence costs. For example, availability will be a key metric, as research suggests 50 per cent of stock outs lead to lost sales for the retailer and manufacturer as customers move to another brand or delay/cancel the purchase. The increasing significance of supply chain impact will lead to changes in the way supply chains managers communicate. In addition to the data

Exhibit 10

New business models like SCM as a Service (SCaaS) could evolve

Supplier Production

SCaaS

Payment based on 'on-time' delivery

Delivery of goods

Payment based on 'on-time' delivery

Information Information

In addition to data, this requires Trust of customer Capabilities of own people Clear SLAs and new payment models (pay by service)

19 Next generation supply chain Supply chain 2020

points such as number of shipments, vehicle turnaround time and inventory, supply chains will have to communicate with the board on issues like revenue impact, return on capital impact, and bottom line impact of the supply chain performance. These changes will have to be driven by appropriate development of supply chain talent. Today, only one-fourth of companies have an end-to-end supply chain representative in the board room. Supply chains of the future will have dedicated functional leaders, and companies will start to focus on the transformation of the supply chain through dedicated supply chain academies, and develop change agents to achieve supply chain excellence.

□ □ □

Organisations must act on the trends that impact businesses of the future and the implications on the supply chain. Today’s supply chain will evolve to keep pace with the changes and organisations will build the next generation supply chain.

20

Supply chain 2020 July 2013 Layout by Visual Aids India Copyright © McKinsey & Company www.mckinsey.com

Article 13 .pdf

KEY LOGISTICS TRENDS IN LIFE SCIENCES 2020+

A DHL perspective on how to prepare for future growth

Powered by Solutions & Innovation: Trend Research

Preface 3

Introduction and Executive Summary 4

1. Megatrends 6

2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector 8

2.1. Shifting Disease Patterns 8

2.2. Better-informed Patients 9

2.3. New Health Markets 10

2.4. Growing Competition 11

2.5. Increasing Cost Pressure 12

2.6. Outsourcing and More Complex Supply Chains 13

2.7. More Stringent Regulation 15

2.8. Innovation 16

3. Logistics Implications and Required Actions 18

3.1. Differentiating Supply Chains 18

3.2. Empowering the Consumer 18

3.3. Building Up Local Capabilities 20

3.4. Increasing Supply-chain Transparency and Visibility 21

3.5. Maintaining Supply-chain Adaptability 21

Sources 23

For More Information 27

2 Table of Contents

Dear Reader, We live in a world of 24-hour news coverage with the internet, TV, radio, newspapers and magazines all vying for our attention across multiple devices. For business leaders, there’s an intense pressure to be constantly connected to information channels and always keep up-to- date with the latest business headlines, viewpoints and trends.

The abundance of opinion and plethora of ‘must-read’ stories can be bewildering. It can cloud the ‘real’ issues and leave the practitioner unaware of and disoriented regarding key opportu- nities and challenges of the future.

With this white paper, DHL seeks to cut through the extraneous chatter and white noise. Our aim is to extract the key trends for ‘2020 and beyond’ that are relevant to you — logistics decision-makers with pharmaceutical and medical device manufacturers — and thus provide suggestions for your focus, consideration and action.

The structure of the white paper follows a three-stage approach:

• Collection and analysis of the most important megatrends • Identification of the key challenges for the life sciences sector resulting from these macro

changes in society, technology, the economy, the environment and politics

• Deriving the respective logistics implications, pinpointing areas where action is required We hope to provide a comprehensive repository of knowledge for our customers and part- ners. Our aim is to stimulate collaborative discussion throughout our networks and alliances, resulting in new ideas, innovative projects and solutions, and creating value for all involved.

This white paper benefited tremendously from cooperation with Z_punkt The Foresight Company, a leading foresight consultancy.

We now invite you to peruse our view of the ‘Key Logistics Trends in Life Sciences 2020+’.

Please feel free to share it with your colleagues and peers, and don’t hesitate to share your thoughts, observations and insights with us.

Yours faithfully,

Dr. Markus Kückelhaus Dr. Michael Terhoeven

3Preface

Introduction and Executive Summary

Over the past decade the global life sciences sector has experienced healthy growth. The world market for pharmaceuticals, for example, has doubled within a decade. It has reached a value of about USD 1 trillion and is expected to grow by another 3 to 6 per cent per annum until 2016 (IMS 2012a). Strong growth rates until 2020 are also forecast for the market for medical devices.

Logistics has long been considered a basic support- ing function within the life sciences sector. However, the importance of logistics is growing for a number of reasons: (1) the increasing relevance of emerging markets and globalization of supply chains, in turn (2) driving increasing regulatory efforts in particu- lar around temperature management and, finally, (3) a changing product portfolio that, on the one hand, allows new direct-to-market approaches notably for specialties and, on the other hand, requires differen- tiated ‘value-focused’ approaches for value products

and generics, where the cost of logistics drives a larger share of total cost.

This white paper is intended to contribute to the endeavor of managing the resulting challenges. Its aim is to systematically identify the most important required actions for life sciences logisticians for the coming years.

Our key findings for life sciences logistics

include the following:

1. We expect a shift from undifferentiated logistics structures to more differentiated supply chains, with the mode of transportation, warehousing and depth of distribution tailored to different life sciences product categories.

2. We believe that manufacturers in the life sciences sector will build up direct-distribution channels to the end consumer. They will either develop their own e-commerce operations or distribute their products via third-party platforms.

3. We see pharmaceutical and medical device manu- facturers expanding their capabilities to tier-2 and tier-3 cities and sometimes even to rural areas in emerging countries. However, there are likely to be differentiated approaches to depth of distribution and to implementation strategies.

4. In future, we expect that better visibility in the supply chain will be required not only for product security and integrity, but also because of the need to control and optimize logistics processes (for example, with outsourcing and emergency logistics complementing slower-mode transpor-

tation and demand-driven supply chains). At the same time, visibility will enable differentiation and create value (for example, with direct-distribution models, mentioned in 2. above).

5. Finally, we foresee the need for manufacturers in the life sciences sector to keep supply chains flexible to adapt to new regulatory standards and the distribution requirements of innovative prod- ucts. We expect more temperature-differentiated supply-chain solutions, as well as infrastructures adaptable for product bundles and more personal- ized medicines and implants.

© g

et ty

im ag

es /C

ul tu

ra S

ci en

ce /R

af e

Sw an

4 Introduction and Executive Summary

From Megatrends – to Challenges – to Logistics Implications

Demographic Changes and Urbanization

Changing Competitive Landscape

Consumerism Technological

Progress

Shifting Centers of Economic Activity

Climate Change and Environmen- tal Pollution

1. Megatrends

New Health

Markets

More Stringent

Regulation

Shifting Disease Patterns

Growing Competition

Innovation

Better- informed Patients

Outsourcing and More Complex

Supply Chains

Increasing Cost

Pressure

2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

Empowering the Consumer

Building Up Local

Capabilities

Increasing Supply-chain Transparency and Visibility

Maintaining Supply-chain Adaptability

Differentiating Supply Chains

3. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

bold = exemplary impact route from megatrend to life sciences logistics

Our approach follows three steps:

As a first step, the most important megatrends in the environment of healthcare are briefly reviewed.

In the second step, we identify the key challen- ges for the life sciences sector resulting from these macro changes in society, technology, economy, environment and politics.

For the third step, we extract the respective logistics implications and required actions.

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

5Introduction and Executive Summary

1. Megatrends

Megatrends are long-term transformation processes with a broad scope and a potentially dramatic impact (Z_punkt 2012). They will shape the life sciences sector as well as many other industries over the next few decades. Demographic Changes and Urbanization can be considered the most influential megatrend. The global population is expected to increase from 6.9 billion people in 2010 to 8.0 billion in 2025, with growth found almost exclusively in developing countries. At the same time, the popula- tion in almost all countries is aging. The average age in Germany will rise from 44 in 2010 to 48 in 2025, while the median age in China will increase from 35 to 40 during the same period (UN 2010). This will be accompanied by a growing demand for health- care and a shift towards age-related disease patterns. Apart from population growth and aging, mankind will witness an unprecedented migration from rural to urban areas. By 2025, the share of people living

in cities, globally, will have increased to 58 per cent from 52 per cent in 2010 (UN 2011). This shift will have direct consequences for healthcare infrastruc- tures and logistics.

Cities are also the place for modern lifestyles, which are at the core of the Consumerism megatrend. There is a global trend towards individualization, mean- ing that in almost all societies worldwide traditional relationships will decrease in importance, whereas individual choice and responsibility will grow. This will lead to rising health awareness and more dif- ferentiated demand for products in healthcare and life sciences, as well as in other sectors.

The consumerism trend in emerging economies will go hand in hand with global Shifting Centers of Economic Activity. This megatrend underlines that economic growth in the emerging world is much

© g

et ty

im ag

es

© C

yr il

C om

ta t

– Fo

to lia

.c om

6 1. Megatrends

proteomics, biomics) is expected to be impressive and will have an impact on healthcare treatments and products. On the other hand, economic growth is still associated with an increased burning of fossil fuels. This will lead to Climate Change and Environ- mental Pollution, primarily in fast-growing mega- cities facing new healthcare challenges. Experts assume that globally urban air pollution is respon- sible for 1 million premature deaths and 1 million prenatal deaths each year (UNEP 2013).

faster than in industrialized countries. From 2010 to 2030, GDP (gross domestic product) in Europe is expected to increase by 50 per cent, while GDP in the BRIC countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China) will rise by 190 per cent, almost tripling economic production (PwC 2011a). This megatrend will lead to rising incomes in the emerging world and rising export opportunities for life sciences manufacturers. At the same time, we will see a Changing Competi- tive Landscape with pharmaceutical and medical device manufacturers, for example, from India and China, entering the global market.

Economic growth is associated with several other megatrends. The first of which is Technological Progress, which, during the next decade, will still be characterized by increasing digitization. Driven by information technology, the progress in neu- rology (imaging) and biotechnology (genomics,

© g

et ty

im ag

es

© g

et ty

im ag

es

71. Megatrends

2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

The megatrend-based challenges for the life sciences sector during the next decade are manifold and they will have specific implications for logistics. We have identified eight challenges covering very different aspects of healthcare from shifting disease patterns, growing competition and cost pressure to new and partly disruptive technological innovations that are approaching market readiness.

2.1. Shifting Disease Patterns

As a result of longer life expectancies, changing life- styles and environmental influences, such as climate change, and air and water pollution, the frequency and relative impact of diseases will shift (IHME 2010). We expect that the healthcare and life sci- ences sector has to prepare to treat certain diseases more often, in other places than today and even to deal with new diseases.

Firstly, lifestyle diseases, such as type 2 diabetes, cancer, cardiovascular diseases and psychological illnesses, will become more common globally. The main reasons are a high-calorie diet, physical inac- tivity and higher levels of stress, increasingly also in developing countries. For 2030, the WHO (World Health Organization) estimates that about 8 per cent of the world’s population could suffer from

diabetes alone, costing the world about 5 per cent

of global GDP. In 2010, 8 million people died from cancer, over a third more deaths than back in 1990. And for 2030, the incidence of cancer is estimated to grow by another 75 per cent, with cases nearly doubling in some developing countries (The Lancet 2010 and 2012) (see Figure 1).

On the other hand, the proportion of muscu- lar and skeletal diseases as well as mortality and morbidity due to infectious diseases are likely to continue to decline on a global scale with multiple

advancements being made in healthcare, and in lift- ing millions of people out of poverty.

At the same time, tropical and infectious diseases continue to pose threats to public health. In the future, rapid urbanization and globalization of travel and trade as well as global warming will in- crease the risk of a partial trend reversal with more outbreaks, new diseases and pandemic threats. In an increasingly globally linked world, the spread of diseases is much more rapid (e.g. SARS, swine flu).

1. New Cases of Cancer Worldwide (in Millions)

25

20

15

10

5

0 2008 2030

12.7

20.7

Source: The Lancet 2012

The shift in disease patterns is expressed, among other ways, by the increasing incidence of cancer. 12.7 million new cases of cancer were reported in 2008, globally. This number is expected to rise to 20.7 million by 2030.

© g

et ty

im ag

es

8 2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

Climate change will also lead to a shift in disease risks (The Lancet 2009). Rising temperatures will affect the geographical range and seasonality of mosquitos and related vector-borne diseases like malaria. Generally, pathogens that cause diarrheal disease reproduce more quickly in warmer condi- tions (EPA 2012).

The first signs of such a trend reversal can already be seen. In China, for instance, mortality and morbidity of notifiable infectious diseases have started grow-

ing again since 2002 (Zhang/Wilson 2012). Also, worldwide cholera incidents have increased steadily since 2004, especially in sub-Saharan Africa, Asia and more recently in the Caribbean (WHO 2013b).

2.2. Better-informed Patients

Primarily thanks to the Internet, we see today’s pop-

ulation being better informed about health issues. People are questioning more carefully the value of medicines, medical procedures and claims of medi- cal superiority. Information asymmetries between physicians and patients are narrowing, and there are more opportunities for patients to influence treat- ment decisions. With growing health awareness, the perception of health is changing generally. The focus on the absence of disease is shifting to a concept of health as a state of comprehensive well-being. Many people want to exercise more and gain control of their own health.

At the same time, self-medication is booming. The market for OTC (over-the-counter) medicines is forecast to grow by 8.3 per cent annually until 2016 (IMS 2013), thereby continuing to outgrow the total pharmaceutical market. World revenue for OTC medicines could reach USD 81 billion by 2014 (Visiongain 2012), supported by a trend for drugs to move from prescription-only to OTC use (Rx-to- OTC switching) (see Figure 2).

The self-medication trend is accompanied by more and more people tracking their health, bodily func- tions and even behavior (the most extreme expres- sion of which is the Quantified Self movement).

Better-informed patients are more open to self-medica- tion in many cases. The trend towards self-medication is expressed by an estimated growth in over-the-counter medicines (OTC) over the coming years. Globally, an 8.3 per cent increase until 2016 is expected.

2. Forecast OTC Growth from 2011 to 2016

20%

15%

10%

5%

0% Global Europe

Source: IMS 2013

© g

et ty

im ag

es

North America

Southeast Asia

Latin America

8.3%

4.2%

2.1%

17.1% 15.4%

92. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

The concept is making its way into the mainstream in industrialized countries, as ever smaller and cheaper devices enable convenient digital health tracking. In the US, 69 per cent of adults already track their own health records, 34 per cent of which

share their data online (Fox/Duggan 2013). With further progress in the fields of sensing and min- iaturization, the idea of having a portable, multi- functional health diagnostic device could increase the quality of diagnostics but also alter the role of physicians in the future. Analyzing data and giving recommendations, and even coaching for behavioral changes will become more important.

2.3. New Health Markets

As the global economy shifts its center of gravity from the US, Europe and Japan towards China and other emerging countries, global pharmaceutical markets will also shift their center of gravity to these regions (Quah 2011) (see Figure 3). Markets like Bra- zil, Russia, India, China (BRIC), Mexico and Turkey will

play an ever-more important role. Already today, they represent one of the fastest-growing segments of the global pharmaceutical and medical device industries, promising to grow at double-digit rates over the next decade. In 2020, these countries could account for nearly a third (USD 500 billion) of the expected global pharmaceutical sales of USD 1.6 trillion (PwC 2012a). In 2011, their share was approximately 19 per cent.

By 2020, China alone could well have become a

bigger force in this market than Europe. According to PwC projections, China and India will have the highest health spending increase globally in abso- lute figures until 2020, as their economies grow and they extend their currently underdeveloped health systems (PwC 2011b). In China, health spending, including spending on a new health infrastructure, is expected to increase by 166 per cent between 2010 and 2020. A 140 per cent increase is expected in India within the same period.

On the other hand, global health markets are charac- terized by rising health disparities within most coun- tries. People’s health conditions will diverge espe- cially in those countries with fast urbanization, such as India, which will increase its urban population from 380 million in 2010 to about 540 million in 2025 (UN 2011). Urban populations tend to have a better health status than rural populations; however intra-urban health disparities will also increase, particularly in

The BRIC countries do not only have high economic growth rates, they also form some of the most important new health markets in the coming years. Pharmaceutical spending in China, for example, is expected to grow from USD 67 billion in 2011 to USD 161 billion in 2016.

Source: IMS 2012b

3. Pharmaceutical Spending in BRIC (in Billion USD)

China Brazil India Russia

200

150

100

50

0

67

161

30 47

14 29 27

16

2011 2016 Source: IMS 2012b

© h

rd in

a –

dh fo

to .d

e

10 2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

fast-growing centers and megacities. Some experts argue that the health status of the urban poor is on a par with that of rural populations (Ivins 2012).

2.4. Growing Competition

We expect that the competitive environment for

pharmaceutical companies will become increasingly

challenging, and this stems from a small number of developments.

Firstly, the mix of spending between innovative (and patented) products and generics is shifting towards the latter, reducing barriers to entry and increasing competition. The share of generic drugs as a propor- tion of spending on medicines could increase to as

high as 39 per cent in 2015, up from 20 per cent in

2005 (IMS 2011) (see Figure 4). Over USD 220 billion of sales are at risk from patent expirations between 2013 and 2018 (EvaluatePharma 2012). Even in

industrialized countries, generics account for the ma- jority of prescriptions, and governments and payers continue to encourage their use as they try to man- age overall costs. In the US, about 80 per cent of all prescriptions written today are for generics – up from only 19 per cent in 1984 (Department of Health and Human Services 2013). It is forecast that this number could climb to 85 per cent in 2015 (Looney 2012).

Secondly, a growing share of these generics in the industrialized world comes from manufacturers in emerging countries, notably India. The value of Indian exports of drugs, pharmaceuticals and fine

chemicals grew by 270 per cent between 2002 and

2011 (Government of India 2012). It is likely that in the next decade pharmaceutical manufacturers from the emerging world will also develop innova- tive medicines in their own labs. Global manufac- turers will react by integrating successful manufac- turers in the emerging markets and slowly shifting their research and development (R&D) resources into these countries.

Similarly, inexpensive technology for emerging markets, but also from emerging markets, is about to transform the sector for medical devices. Companies are increasingly realizing that the current innova-

tion paradigm, in which healthcare innovation must

achieve a device more high-tech, more sophisticated,

more complex and hence more expensive, will no

longer guarantee success. This is especially true for resource-poor settings in developing countries. ‘Fru- gal innovations’ which focus on very basic user re- quirements are not only expected to spread in these regions. They could also spread to Western markets and cost-effectively replace more expensive solutions. For example, Bangalore-based Forus Health has developed a portable and rather inexpensive pre- screening device that allows patients to check their eye conditions and defects (The Times of India 2012). It costs about a quarter of comparable, established

4. Global Pharmaceutical Spending by Segment (in Billion USD)

1500

1000

500

0 2005 2010 2015

Source: IMS 2011

124 231

427 77

88 548

580

61

424

Brand Other Generic

The segment of generic drugs is expected to grow from USD 124 billion in 2005 to USD 427 billion in 2015. This growth will also mean increased competition between manufacturers as entry barriers in the generics segment are relatively low.

112. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

devices. Big Western companies like General Electric and Siemens are starting to develop cheaper medical devices as they are feeling growing pressure from competitors in new markets.

Thirdly, producers of both innovative products and generics are being confronted with a growing number of counterfeits which are deliberately and fraudulent- ly mislabeled with respect to identity and/or source. The WHO estimates that 10 per cent of the medicines

in circulation are counterfeit, with the majority of

cases reported from developing countries (Bale 2000). The number of reported cases has increased steadily over the past decade, also in the big Western markets. The 170 cases that were investigated in the US in 2012 represent a new all-time high, up from about 10 to 30 cases at the beginning of the 21st century and 50 to 70 in the late 2000s (FBI 2012). According to some estimates only about 5 per cent of cases are reported in the US, thus real numbers could be far higher. A main driver for the rise in counterfeiting is seen in the stretching of pharmaceutical supply chains across continents, which makes comprehensive controls more difficult.

2.5. Increasing Cost Pressure

We expect that the pressure to contain or drive

down health system cost will continue. In the US, healthcare expenditure per person has risen by almost 78 per cent since 2000 to USD 8,700 in 2011 (Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services 2012). In Europe, the proportion of healthcare costs as a share of GDP is predicted to rise from 6.7 in 2008 to 7.6 per cent by 2020 (see Figure 5). And in China healthcare spending might almost triple between 2010 and 2020 to USD 1 trillion per year by 2020 (Bloomberg 2012). Aging populations count as a key factor for growing cost pressures within many of

the world’s most advanced health systems.

Managing access to healthcare providers, pharma- ceuticals, medical devices and procedures will thus become an increasingly crucial factor for managing the cost of healthcare in industrialized countries. Increasing constraints and limits on reimburse- ment will support the shift towards self-medication and OTCs. According to a US study, every dollar spent on OTC medicines saves between USD 6 and

7 for the US healthcare system as a whole (Booz & Company 2012).

Health spending as a percentage of US GDP is expected to increase from 16.6% in 2008 to 26.3% in 2020. Howe- ver, the pressure to contain health system cost is rising in almost every country.

5. Health Expenditure (as Percentage of GDP)

Source: McKinsey 2012, CMS GOV. 2013 and European Commission 2012

30%

20%

10%

0% China USA EU 27

7.0%

26.3%

7.6%

2008 2020

16.6%

6.7% 4.6%

© g

et ty

im ag

es

12 2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

Moreover, pressure on cost of healthcare is likely to show regional spikes, as the financial crisis, the economic downturn and slow recovery have further tightened the budgetary situation in many coun- tries. According to OECD figures, member states had to borrow USD 16 trillion in 2010 alone (OECD 2010). Public health programs are a prime target of cost-cutting efforts, not to mention ‘legacy’ is- sues. For example in markets with the highest debt problems in Europe, like Spain, Italy, Portugal and Greece, payers owe more than EUR 12.5 billion in unpaid bills to the pharmaceutical industry.

2.6. Outsourcing and More Complex

Supply Chains

Rising cost pressure in healthcare systems will also have an impact on the operating models of manu- facturers of pharmaceuticals and medical devices. Overall, we expect more differentiated and thus more

complex set-ups with value add and supply chains dif-

ferentiated by product and region. This particularly applies to R&D, manufacturing and distribution.

In R&D, firstly, we assume continued outsourcing to contract research organizations (CROs), the biggest of which have already developed into truly global corporations (MedCity 2012). Innovators will need to decide and manage own, in-house clinical devel- opment and integrated CRO offerings, as well as un- bundled set-ups, e.g., splitting specialist laboratory and logistics tasks. Furthermore, early research and development as such will increasingly be outsourced to universities and start-ups.

Secondly, outsourcing is playing an ever more important role with regard to the manufacturing of

medical devices and pharmaceuticals. This is illus- trated, for example, by the market for pharmaceuti- cal contract manufacturing organizations (CMOs), which is expected to grow from USD 32 billion in 2011 to USD 60 billion by 2018 (Scrip Insights 2012 and Morrison 2012) (see Figure 6). Outsourcing is no longer limited to precursor chemicals of active pharmaceutical ingredients (APIs). As cost and competitive pressure have increased, the tendency to outsource has moved even closer to the core of supply chains (Bottomley/Houlton 2013). More and more, API manufacturing is being outsourced, ei- ther in a contract manufacturing set-up or in ad-hoc short-term agreements.

The fact that outsourcing plays a more important role in life sciences is expressed by the growing market for phar- maceutical contract manufacturing organizations. Their revenues are expected to increase from USD 32 billion in 2012 to USD 60 billion in 2018.

6. Revenues of Pharmaceutical Contract Manufacturing Organizations (in Billion USD)

60

40

20

0 2008 2010 2012

Source: GBI Research 2013

32

60

26

21

© k

ik ke

rd ir

k –

Fo to

lia .c

om

2018

132. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

As a consequence, about 80 per cent of the APIs used

in US drug manufacturing are already coming from

outside the country (Deborah 2011).

Also subsequent manufacturing stages are in scope of outsourcing. Primarily, for mature products, filling and finishing is increasingly being shifted to contract manufacturers.

For more innovative specialties and niche products,

late production stages can be outsourced or post-

poned with late-stage customization depending on

local demand. A similar set-up might also be the result of specific regulatory requirements: some governments enforce local partnerships to support the local pharmaceutical industry. In other coun- tries, special serialization requirements have to be implemented locally.

Thirdly, outsourcing is playing an increasingly important role in the distribution of medical devices

and pharmaceuticals. On the one hand, there is legacy infrastructure that is no longer considered ‘core’, for example, owned warehouses for finished product. On the other hand, 3PL, 4PL and control tower concepts (3PL and 4PL refer to third- and fourth-party logistics) cover tactical and admin- istrative logistical activities as well as specialist services, for example, temperature management, emergency or courier shipments, recall manage- ment and patient assistance programs. Supply-chain

visibility is an important if not essential enabler for the more advanced outsourcing approaches; there- fore, IT investments and outsourcing often go hand in hand.

In general, we expect more differentiated operat- ing models with a broader and more differenti- ated spectrum of service providers, depending on product characteristics. For specialties, for example, there will be an increasing build up of ownership down to the point of application (direct-to-hospital/ pharmacy).

7. US FDA Drug Approvals

60

50

40

30

20

10

0 1996 2000 2004 2008 2012

53

27 24

36 39

Source: FDA 2012

Stricter drug approval requirements are one example of a more stringent regulation in the life sciences sector. The number of new drugs approved by the FDA decreased from 53 in 1996 to 24 in 2008. Since then, the number has increased again.

14 2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

2.7. More Stringent Regulation

Due to more complex supply chains, among other things, policy makers worldwide are enforcing stricter regulations for manufacturing and logistics.

Selected manufacturing problems and growing

public pressure have caused the US Food and Drug

Administration (FDA) to strengthen GMP standards (Good Manufacturing Practices) and control them more strictly. Within a decade, the number of FDA warning letters sent to medical device manufactur- ers has increased threefold, from 61 letters in 2002 to 181 in 2012 (ECA 2012). Also, the number of FDA inspections of drug and biologics manufacturers has grown continuously. In the years to come, the FDA expects domestic GMP inspections to decrease and more inspections in the foreign arena (FDA 2013) reflecting the trend towards more globalized supply chains. At the same time, most emerging countries themselves are increasing their regulatory require- ments. China published new GMP guidelines in 2012 and is calling on pharmaceutical companies to pur-

sue GMP certification by the end of 2013.

Hand in hand with GMP standards, governments and international organizations such as the WHO, have established and increased their requirements for Good Distribution Practices (GDP). These stan- dards define how life sciences products, particularly pharmaceuticals, have to be stored, transported and

handled. Higher GDP standards are looming in a number of countries. New guidelines will come into force during 2013 in Brazil, the European Union and China; Singapore is currently drafting new GDP standards (ColdChainIQ 2013). Key new require- ments in the European Union, for example, include

risk assessment of delivery routes, temperature

monitoring and reporting of temperature excursions and the use of dedicated vehicles where possible.

Authorities have not only raised the GMP and GDP standards for pharmaceuticals already on the mar- ket, they have also tightened their requirements for the approval of new drugs. This is perceived as a key driver for increasing risk and cost, as well as adding time for the development of new drugs. While the FDA approved 176 new medicines between 1996 and 1999, that number fell to 88 for the four years between 2007 and 2010 (Miller 2011). At least the FDA’s drug approvals reached a 15-year high in 2012 with 39, after trending in the lower 20s for most of the last decade (see Figure 7).

Meanwhile, according to a study from the UK, the average cost of developing a new drug has increased

tenfold since the 1970s (OHE 2012). One of the most cited studies on pharmaceutical innovation pro- cesses estimated the costs for a new drug at USD 802 million on average (DiMasi 2003). Another more recent study sees average costs ranging between USD 1.3 billion and USD 1.7 billion per new drug (Collier 2009).

152. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

2.8. Innovation

Although, the annual output of new drugs has been rather flat over the past decade, we are optimistic about the innovative outlook of the industry – one of the main commercial success stories of the past decade has been biopharmaceuticals (see Figure 8). We believe that innovation will continue to shape the sector driven by a number of advances in related fields.

Sequencing the human genome is becoming ever

cheaper and faster: costs to read an entire human

genome are down from USD 95 million in 2001 to

USD 1,000. By 2020, genetic testing could become a part of mainstream medical practice and could pave the way for stratified or even personalized medicine, in which treatments are tailored to groups of patients (‘strata’) or even individuals. Many new biomarkers have already been identified and many more are currently under development, enabled by the decreasing cost of testing and computing. Researchers hope to achieve similar breakthroughs

in the field of gene expression in the next few de-

cades and be able, for example, to develop so-called epigenetic drugs which can block or unblock genes involved in certain diseases. A truly personalized medicine, however, might also depend on refining our understanding of the human microbiome – the totality of all microorganisms inhabiting the human body and their interaction –

the analysis of which is becoming an increasingly important research subject (NIH 2013).

Slightly less speculative, more effective vaccines for a much wider range of diseases are expected. New vaccination-delivery technologies are also expand- ing the ways in which it is possible to prime immune systems towards specific antigens. Some experts pre- dict that vaccines will increase in their commercial relevance as they drive down public health costs in a very effective way.

Regenerative medicine, which includes the replace-

ment or repairing of human cells, tissues or organs,

is also regarded as a future growth field. Just recently, 3D printing was used for the first time to replace 75 per cent of a patient’s skull (OPM 2013). With further advances the engineering of even more complex structures (e.g. artificial muscles and organs) will become possible.

8. Global Biopharmaceutical Market Sales (in Billion USD)

200

150

100

50

0 2012 2017

109

166

Source: IMarc 2012

Biopharmaceuticals form a rather innovative segment in the life sciences sector. The global market for biophar- maceuticals is expected to grow from USD 109 billion in 2012 to USD 166 billion in 2017.

© g

et ty

im ag

es

16 2. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

Technical advances in robotics (e.g. autonomous

navigation) are opening the field for new applica-

tions. Semi-autonomous care and cleaning robots will enter hospital environments. Robot-assisted surgeries are becoming more and more common- place. Thanks to advances in mobile technology, augmented reality solutions are beginning to spread into more practical applications, enabling more accuracy in various medical practices. For example, an augmented overlay helps healthcare profession- als to perform highly accurate joint arthrography injections (Hall 2012). IT and telecommunications progress is also enabling tele-medical applications.

Remote medical consultation and advice (within countries or across borders) can be implemented based on teleconference technology. In a more advanced version, sensors in the patient’s clothing

or home can support remote diagnosis and treat-

ment. Also remote tele-surgeries will become more common in the future. One of the earliest remote surgeries was conducted in 2001 with a surgeon in New York City performing a cholecystectomy on a patient in France (IRCAD 2001).

There are many more visions about the future of healthcare. One thing for sure is that the life sciences sector will change its face during the next decade. And life sciences logistics will be part of this change.

© R

ik en

R es

ea rc

h, J

ap an

172. Challenges for the Life Sciences Sector

3. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

drugs and medical devices might be distributed from a single global or regional distribution center directly to the hospital (pharmacy or ward) or even the physician specialist at point of care. The move towards differentiated supply chains is driven by several things: by increasing pressure to optimize cost or maximize value for products that differ by volume and value; by the requirement for lead-time service levels (acute versus chronic treatment); by new requirements for temperature management or documentation; and by specific regulatory regimes.

We believe that by 2025 most companies providing

medical devices and pharmaceuticals will have tailored

their supply chain along these product categories:

a. High-value/specialty drugs and implants

b. Innovative standard drugs and devices

c. Generic drugs and frugal/low-tech devices

d. OTCs, nutraceuticals and consumer medical devices

In addition, supply chains will also be differentiated within each product category, for example into cold- chain and non-cold-chain specialty drugs.

Particularly because of the strong growth in de- mand for generic drugs and specialty drugs, more specific supply chains for these two segments are initially expected to emerge.

3.2. Empowering the Consumer

Many companies in the life sciences sector are fac- ing a challenge: they must decide if, when, and to what extent they should develop a direct-distribu- tion channel to the end consumer. Direct-to-con- sumer (DTC) distribution is increasing in relevance.

Challenges for the life sciences industry will have many consequences for logistics within the sector. Shifting disease patterns and innovative products will have an impact on what is stored and transported. Regulation, competition and cost pressure will affect logistics pro- cedures. Market changes and more decentralized sup- ply chains will lead to new transportation routes. The fastest growth is expected in markets where adequate logistics infrastructures are not yet fully developed. However, in the more established markets we also see logistics demand being subject to change.

3.1. Differentiating Supply Chains

Worldwide, the globalization and digitalization of the economy are impacting supply chains. The changing nature and growing number of distribu- tion channels is most evident in the consumer and retail sectors, which are undergoing rapid changes, and can serve as an example of the changes awaiting the life sciences industry. Thus far, supply chains in the life sciences sector have had a rather specific and undifferentiated logistics structure. In future, it will be increasingly necessary to implement a more dif-

ferentiated approach to supply-chain structure and

organization.

Going forward, companies will tailor the mode of

transportation, warehousing and depth of distribu-

tion in each country to different pharmaceuticals

and medical devices. For example, generic drugs and consumer medical devices may be transported via ocean and long-haul road freight (and selected high- er value modes for ‘emergency’ situations, when a standard, slow-mode shipment misses a checkpoint or encounters a hold up) while specialty drugs will be shipped using air freight, express or even courier services. Generic drugs may be distributed over several logistical steps involving several distributors and transport providers while high-value specialty

18 3. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

Sales of products in the OTC category have been growing faster than other pharmaceutical prod- ucts in the past few years. New kinds of products catering to the consumer desire for private health monitoring are emerging, for example, smartphone apps and add-on devices allow testing and digital recording of blood sugar values for diabetic patients. And for the enthusiast of the Quantified Self move- ment, they provide the basis for evaluating a broad range of health indicators at home or on the go.

Also, the internet is an increasingly important chan- nel for consumer health information. An impressive 42 per cent of the adult population, according to a US study, rely on social media for health-related consumer reviews on medications, treatments, physicians, hospitals and insurers (PwC 2012b). This is especially true for patients suffering from rare diseases who are often organized in online support groups. Supporting such communities will increase in relevance in the future.

With a more long-term perspective, one can also expect changes in the prescription drug segment

towards a more consumer- or patient-oriented supply chain. In the US, direct-to-home delivery schemes of prescription drugs for patients with chronic diseases are a cost-effective reality. The in- crease of tele-medicine and home care will drive the need for home delivery of drugs. However, technical and regulatory hurdles remain, and with regulations differing in each country, the international imple- mentation of such schemes may remain a long-term challenge.

Against the backdrop of growing direct-to-consum- er segments, online information and tele-medicine, manufacturers in the life sciences sector have to

determine whether they want to develop their own

e-commerce operation and, if so, whether it should

be organized by establishing their own fulfillment

capability or by distributing their products via a

third-party platform. Building on a wide range of experience in supporting e-commerce retailers in their logistics processes, logistics service providers are well equipped for advising and supporting com- panies in the life sciences sector in their quest for a more direct channel to the end customer.

© f

uz zb

on es

– F

ot ol

ia .c

om

193. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

3.3. Building Up Local Capabilities

The remarkable growth in many emerging econo- mies provides opportunities for increasing sales of medical devices and pharmaceuticals. Rapid growth is projected not only for the aforementioned OTC products, but also for pharmaceutical products in general. Take the BRIC markets, for example: pharmaceutical spending is projected to more than double in China and India and to grow by over 50 per cent in Russia and Brazil between 2011 and 2016 (IMS 2012b). Almost all companies have estab- lished capabilities to export into China. However, their capabilities do not necessarily reach far into fragmented markets. Some manufacturers operate the complete distribution via a single ‘national’ lead wholesaler and some cater directly for key hospitals in tier-1 cities. With economic growth reaching more remote areas, pharmaceutical and medical device

manufacturers are facing the challenge of expand-

ing their marketing and sales capabilities, as well as

their distribution capabilities to tier-2 and tier-3 cities

in the most effective way. Beyond that, economic opportunities are not restricted to urban areas.

Those 3.3 billion people living in rural areas (UN 2011) – this number will remain constant until 2025 – are in need of medical devices and pharma- ceuticals. More and more, companies perceive these markets “at the bottom of the pyramid” as a growth opportunity (Prahalad 2005). Solutions for these markets often entail innovative product and logis- tics concepts, sometimes as simple as a singly blis- tered Aspirin (ASA) pill sold at an affordable price by part-time mobile traders. Many pharmaceutical companies have already established training pro- grams for rural physicians or nurses in China, India and Northern Africa (examples in Staton 2013) and some of these ventures are already accompanied by the build-up of local logistics infrastructures.

However, when deciding on how to (further) de- velop local capabilities, each growth region needs a specifically tailored solution. Companies must decide whether to build-up their own logistics infrastruc-

tures, and how broad they want their in-country

presence to be. Life sciences companies have to

decide if they want to organize their distribution

only via one leading wholesaler or if they want to

© G

et ty

Im ag

es /T

A O

Im ag

es R

M

20 3. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

organize distribution, for example, to the 100 most

important wholesalers and the 20 largest hospitals

as well as the top 3 pharmacy chains. Besides the

depth of distribution, decisions have to be made on

whether the distribution should be implemented in-

house or with the support of logistics service provid-

ers, possibly in a 3PL or 4PL set-up.

3.4. Increasing Supply-chain Transparency

and Visibility

Supply-chain security (primarily regarding the pre-

vention of product theft) and supply-chain integrity

(to ensure the quality, functionality and authenticity

of products) are becoming even more important in

the life sciences sector. As mentioned above, it is estimated that, already today, 10 per cent of all phar- maceuticals are counterfeit (Bale 2000). Further- more, about 50 per cent of medicines sold through websites are fake drugs (Carrington 2011). The increase in counterfeit drugs is adding to require- ments for proof of origin and product traceability along the supply chain.

At the same time, better visibility in the supply chain

is essential to control and optimize logistics process-

es. Traditionally, companies in the pharmaceutical and medical devices sector have used a push logis- tics approach to distribution, which is characterized by well-filled warehouses throughout the supply chain, season and product lifecycle. Given increasing cost pressures, it can be expected that overall inven-

tories will have to become leaner and supply chains

more efficient by changing to a pull or demand-driv-

en approach. However, it is only possible to control and manage inventories if they are sufficiently vis- ible. The need for increased supply-chain visibility will be highest in the generics and OTC segments, where cost pressures are especially strong, as well as in the specialty drugs segment, where inventories tie

up large amounts of capital due to the high prod- uct values involved. For specialties, we perceive an option to transform the respective supply chain to

a direct-distribution model with a single regional

or global distribution center generating visibility to

multiple points of sale at one stroke.

The optimization of supply chains will also lead to an increased incidence of stock-out situations, ranging from local, short-term shortages to regional drug shortages, due to manufacturing issues that require dedicated shortage-management efforts. Again, increased visibility of inventories will be essential. Potential excess supplies of product in one place can be moved in time to prevent supply shortages in other places. The same would be true in a local epidemic or even pandemic scenario, when demand for a specific product suddenly shoots up.

Greater supply-chain visibility is also a necessary con-

dition to maximize value creation from outsourcing of

logistics services, both in temporary and permanent

set-ups. Therefore, when investing in infrastructure

and software solutions for supply-chain visibility,

most companies also redesign their supply chains and

implement 3PL or 4PL concepts and vice versa.

3.5. Maintaining Supply-chain Adaptability

For well over a century, the life sciences sector has been a source of innovative products that have helped to increase the welfare of societies around the world. From today’s point of view, innovative solu- tions can be expected from this sector in the decades ahead. Some innovations might disrupt the status quo and bring massive changes within a relatively short timeframe, but most innovations will unfold their potential over time. Life sciences logistics, in any case, must be ready to react and adapt to the

new requirements resulting from these innovations.

213. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

Below, we have collected a few first signals and examples reflecting the need to keep supply chains adaptable.

Firstly, we can see increased relevance and dif- ferentiation in temperature management: in most regulatory regimes medicinal products are stored under controlled room temperature (CRT – mostly interpreted as 2 to 30 degrees Celsius). Controlled temperature conditions are increasingly demanded – and are entering the regulatory dialogue – in transport, transit and ‘ship-to-label’ (requiring the same narrow and specific conditions for transport as for long-term storage). At the same time, the number of drugs requiring cold-chain storage and transportation (2 to 8 degrees Celsius) will increase further with the rising share of biopharmaceuticals (IMarc 2012). Additional temperature regimes are emerging – 15 to 25 degrees Celsius, frozen (-20 de- grees Celsius), deep frozen, ‘ultra-low’ or even cryogenic – and this illustrates the need to develop temperature-differentiated supply-chain solutions.

Secondly – supply chains have to remain adapt- able for product bundles. Very different logistics requirements have to be combined effectively when heterogeneous products are bundled in the supply chain and shipped jointly to the point of application. These bundles might consist of a pharmaceutical drug together with nutritional and care products or of several implants bundled with the respective surgery equipment (requiring return logistics on top of the bundling). Product bundles are getting more relevant not only to serve rare-disease patients but also to treat more common but complex diseases.

Thirdly, there are life sciences growth fields, in which supply-chain adaptations can be considered rather strategic and logistics becomes a differentiator and key success factor. These include the above- mentioned shortage-management and pandemic logistics as well as e-commerce solutions for B2C segments or the rare-disease pharmaceutical and care bundles described above.

© m

ar ka

ra –

F ot

ol ia

.c om

22 3. Logistics Implications and Required Actions

Sources

Bale 2000 Pharmaceutical Counterfeiting: Issues, Trends, Measurement. URL: http://www.oecd.org/sti/ind/35650404.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

Bloomberg 2012 China Health-Care Spending May Hit $1 Trillion by 2020. URL: http://www.bloomberg.com/news/2012-08-29/china- health-care-spending-may-hit-1-trillion-by-2020.html Accessed: 19.04.2013

Booz & Company 2012 The Value of OTC Medicine to the United States. URL: http://www.yourhealthathand.org/images/uploads/The_ Value_of_OTC_Medicine_to_the_United_States_BoozCo.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

Bottomley/Houlton 2013 Pharma Manufacturing Trends and Opportunities in 2013. URL: http://www.pharmaasia.com/article/pharma-manufacturing- trends-and-opportunities-in-2013/9772 Accessed: 19.04.2013

Carrington 2011 The Economics of Counterfeit Drugs. URL: http://carrington. edu/blog/programs/pharmacy-technology/the-economy-of- counterfeit-drugs-infographic/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services 2012 National Health Expenditures. URL: http://www.cms.gov/ Research-Statistics-Data-and-Systems/Statistics-Trends-and- Reports/NationalHealthExpendData/downloads/tables.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

CMS GOV. 2013 National Health Expenditure Projections 2011-2021. URL: http://www.cms.gov/Research-Statistics-Data-and- Systems/Statistics-Trends-and-Reports/NationalHealthExpend- Data/Downloads/Proj2011PDF.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

ColdChainIQ 2013 A One Page Guide to Global GDP Guidelines. URL: http://www.coldchainiq.com/regulatory-resources/white- papers/a-one-page-guide-to-global-gdp-guidelines/ Accessed: 24.04.2013

Collier 2009 Drug development cost estimates hard to swallow. URL: http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC2630351/ Accessed: 22.04.2013

Deborah 2011 Securing the Pharmaceutical Supply Chain. URL: http://www. fda.gov/NewsEvents/Testimony/ucm271073.htm Accessed: 19.04.2013

Department of Health and Human Services 2013 Postmarketing Surveillance of Generic Drug Usage and Substi- tution Patterns. URL: http://grants.nih.gov/grants/guide/rfa- files/RFA-FD-13-022.html Accessed: 19.04.2013

Finally, life sciences logistics will play an impor- tant role with the emergence of truly personalized medicine, for example, 3D-printed implants, organs or genetically enhanced autologous stem cells where the donor and the recipient are the same person. This potential new healthcare paradigm will require a different type of logistics to realize a ‘logistics of one’, closer to clinical-trial logistics than today’s standard life sciences fulfillment logistics.

By developing and maintaining the ability to adapt

supply chains, companies in the life sciences sector

will be well prepared to seize the opportunities

ahead.

It is DHL’s vision to be the leading logistics provider

to the life sciences sector.

© F

ra nk

W oj

ci ec

ho w

sk i

23Sources

DiMasi 2003 The price of innovation: new estimates of drug development costs. URL: http://moglen.law.columbia.edu/twiki/pub/LawNet- Soc/BahradSokhansanjFirstPaper/22JHealthEcon151_drug_de- velopment_costs_2003.pdf Accessed: 22.04.2013

Downey 2012 Bio-CMO Industry Trends. URL: http://www.contractpharma. com/issues/2012-05/view_features/bio-cmo-industry-trends/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

Eglovitch 2013 FDA Aims to Improve Drug Quality. URL: http://www.xavier- pharmalink.com/wp-content/uploads/2010/08/Gold_Issuing- 40DrugGMPWarningLetters.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

ECA 2012 Medical Devices Warning Letter Statistics 2012. URL: http:// www.gmp-compliance.org/eca_news_3399_7806,7689,7710,770 7,7381.html Accessed: 25.04.2013

EPA 2012 Human Health Impacts & Adaptation. URL: http://www.epa. gov/climatechange/impacts-adaptation/health.html Accessed: 19.04.2013

European Commission 2010 Projecting Future Healthcare Expenditure at European Level: Drivers, Methodology and Main Results. URL: http://ec.europa. eu/economy_finance/publications/economic_paper/2010/pdf/ ecp417_en.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

European Commission 2012 Health and Health Systems. URL: http://ec.europa.eu/eu- rope2020/pdf/themes/health_and_health_systems.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

Eurostat 2012 Total general government expenditure on social protection and health by country 2002 and 2010. URL: http://epp.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/statistics_explained/in- dex.php?title=File:Total_general_government_expenditure_on_ social_protection_and_health_by_country_2002_and_2010_ (%25_of_GDP_and_millions_of_euro_in_2010).png&filetimest amp=20120801091927 Accessed: 19.04.2013

EvaluatePharma 2012 World Preview 2018 – Embracing the Patent Cliff. URL: http://www.evaluategroup.com/public/EvaluatePharma- World-Preview-2018-Embracing-the-Patent-Cliff.aspx Accessed: 19.04.2013

FBI 2012 Congressional Report Pro IP Act Annual Report 2012. URL: http://www.justice.gov/dag/iptaskforce/proipact/fbi-pro- ip-rpt2012.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

FDA 2012 Development Approval Process. URL: http://www.fda.gov/downloads/Drugs/DevelopmentAp- provalProcess/UCM071436.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

FDA 2013 FDA Budget Summary for the Fiscal Year 2014. URL: http://www.fda.gov/downloads/AboutFDA/ReportsManu- alsForms/Reports/BudgetReports/UCM347422.pdf Accessed: 24.04.2013

Fox/Duggan 2013 Tracking for Health. URL: http://www.pewinternet.org/~/ media//Files/Reports/2013/PIP_TrackingforHealth_PDF.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

GBI Research 2013 Contract Manufacturing Organizations to 2018. URL: http:// www.gbiresearch.com/Report.aspx?ID=Contract-Manufactur- ing-Organizations-to-2018-Cost-Advantages-and-Improving- Quality-Standards-Build-Confidence-and-Encourage-Foreign- Investment-in-Asian-CMOs&ReportType=Industry_Report& coreindustry=ALL&Title=Pharmaceuticals_and_Healthcare Accessed: 19.04.2013

Government of India 2012 Department of Pharmaceuticals. Annual Report 2011-2012. URL: http://pharmaceuticals.gov.in/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

Hall 2012 Augmented reality with MRI accurately finds path for arthrog- raphy. URL: http://www.fiercehealthit.com/story/augmented- reality-mri-accurately-finds-path-arthrography/2012-08-15 Accessed: 03.05.2013

Herper 2012 The Truly Staggering Cost Of Inventing New Drugs. URL: http://www.forbes.com/sites/matthewherper/2012/02/10/ the-truly-staggering-cost-of-inventing-new-drugs/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

IHME 2010 GBD 2010 change in leading causes and risks between 1990 and 2010. URL: http://www.healthmetricsandevaluation.org/ gbd/visualizations/gbd-2010-change-leading-causes-and-risks- between-1990-and-2010 Accessed: 19.04.2013

IMARC 2012 Global Biopharmaceutical Market Report & Forecast (2012-2017). URL: http://www.imarcgroup.com/global-biopharmaceutica- market-report-forecasts-2012-2017/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

IMS 2011 The Global Use of Medicines: Outlook through 2015. URL: http://www.imshealth.com/deployedfiles/ims/Global/Content/ Insights/IMS%20Insti-tute%20for%20Healthcare%20Informat- ics/Global_Use_of_Medicines_Report.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

24 Sources

IMS 2012a IMS Health Market Prognosis. URL: http://www.imshealth. com/deployedfiles/ims/Global/Content/Corporate/Press%20 Room/Top-Line%20Market%20Data%20&%20Trends/2011%20 Top-line%20Market%20Data/Regional_Pharma_Market_by_ Spending_2011-2016.pdf. Accessed: 19.04.2013

IMS 2012b The Global Use of Medicines: Outlook Through 2016. URL: http://www.imshealth.com/deployedfiles/ims/Global/ Content/Insights/IMS%20Insti-tute%20for%20Healthcare%20 Informatics/Global%20Use%20of%20Meds%202011/Medicines_ Outlook_Through_2016_Report.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

IMS 2013 The Rising Tide of OTC in Europe. URL: http://www.lmi.no/media/3025409/andy_tisman_how_is_ the_otc_market_developing.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

Innovation.org 2007 Drug Discovery and Development. Understanding the R&D Process. URL: http://www.innovation.org/drug_discovery/ob- jects/pdf/RD_Brochure.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

IRCAD 2001 Operation Lindbergh. A World First in TeleSurgery: The Surgi- cal Act Crosses the Atlantic. URL: http://www.ircad.fr/event/ lindbergh/lindbergh_presse_en.pdf Accessed: 25.04.2013

Ivins 2012 Inequality Matters. BRICs inequality fact sheet. URL: http:// www.iadb.org/intal/intalcdi/PE/2013/10774.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

Kondro 2012 Health disparities among income groups becoming more pronounced. URL: http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/ PMC3447030/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

KPMG 2013 2013 M&A Outlook Survey. URL: http://www.kpmg.com/US/ en/IssuesAndInsights/ArticlesPublications/Documents/outlook- survey-MA-2013.pdf Accessed: 23.04.2013

Looney 2012 Pharma 2012. Hard Times Before the Harvest. URL: http://www.pharmexec.com/pharmexec/article/articleDe- tail.jsp?id=755087&pageID=1&sk=&date= Accessed: 19.04.2013

McKinsey 2012 McKinsey & Co. Report on Healthcare. URL: http://www. bloomberg.com/news/2012-08-29/china-health-care-spending- may-hit-1-trillion-by-2020.html Accessed: 19.04.2013

MedCity 2012 INC Research tops CRO quality ranking as M&A shapes pharma outsourcing. URL: http://medcitynews.com/2012/03/ inc-research-tops-cro-quality-ranking-as-ma-shapes-pharma- outsourcing/ Accessed: 23.04.2013

Miller 2011 Regulatory Trends, Real And Imagined. URL: http://www.forbes.com/sites/henrymiller/2011/07/20/ regulatory-trends-real-and-imagined/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

Morrison 2012 CMO Pharma Biz set to Boom thanks to uptick in Asian activities. URL: http://www.outsourcing-pharma.com/Contract-Manu- facturing/CMO-pharma-biz-set-to-boom-thanks-to-uptick-in- Asian-activities Accessed: 19.04.2013

NIH 2013 Human Microbiome Project. URL: http://commonfund.nih.gov/hmp/ Accessed: 25.05.2013

OECD 2010 From Crisis to Recovery. 5. Pensions and the Crisis. URL: http:// www.oecd.org/insights/46154604.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

OHE 2012 Office of Health Economics. The R&D Cost of a New Medicine. URL: http://www.ohe.org/publications/article/the-rd-cost-of-a- new-medicine-124.cfm Accessed: 19.04.2013

OPM 2013 OsteoFab™ Patient Specific Cranial Device Receives 510(k) Approval. URL: http://www.oxfordpm.com/news/ar- ticle/2013-02-18_osteofab_patient_specific_cranial_device_ receives_510k_approval_-_osteofab_implants_ready_for_us_ market_and_beyond Accessed: 25.05.2013

Pembroke 2012 Largest U.S. Pharmacies Ranked by Total Prescription Revenues. URL: http://www.pembrokeconsulting.com/pdfs/Pembroke- Pharmacy-Market-Share-2011E.pdf Accessed: 25.04.2013

Prahalad 2005 Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid. 2005, Pearson Education, New Jersey, United States.

PwC 2011a The World in 2050. URL: http://www.pwc.com/gx/en/ world-2050/index.jhtml. Accessed: 19.04.2013

PwC 2011b Build and Beyond: The (r)evolution of healthcare PPP. URL: http://www.pwc.com/us/en/health-industries/publications/ build-and-beyond.jhtml Accessed: 19.04.2013

PwC 2012a Pharma 2020: The vision. Which path will you take. URL: http:// www.pwc.com/gx/en/pharma-life-sciences/pharma-2020/phar- ma-2020-vision-path.jhtml Accessed: 19.04.2013

PwC 2012b Social media “likes” healthcare. URL: http://www.pwc.com/us/ en/health-industries/publications/health-care-social-media. jhtml Accessed: 19.04.2013

25Sources

Quah 2011 The Global Economy’s Shifting Centre of Gravity. URL: http://www.globalpolicyjournal.com/articles/world-econ- omy-trade-and-finance/global-economy%C3%A2%E2%82% AC%E2%84%A2s-shifting-centre-gravity Accessed: 19.04.2013

Scrip Insights 2012 The CMO Market Outlook to 2017. URL: http://www.prnews- wire.com/news-releases-test/the-cmo-market-outlook- to-2017-149988835.html Accessed: 19.04.2013

Staton 2013 Sanofi embarks on doc-training in Morocco to boost diabe- tes, epilepsy care. URL: http://www.fiercepharma.com/story/ sanofi-embarks-doc-training-morocco-boost-diabetes-epilepsy- care/2013-04-18 Accessed: 19.04.2013

The Lancet 2009 Managing the health effects of climate change. 16 May 2009. Volume 373, Issue 9676.

The Lancet 2010 Global Burden of Disease Study 2010. URL: http://chronisante. inist.fr/IMG/pdf/1-s2.0-s0140673612621333-main.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

The Lancet 2012 Global cancer transitions according to the Human Development Index. URL: http://www.thelancet.com/journals/lanonc/article/ PIIS1470-2045(12)70211-5/abstract Accessed: 19.04.2013

The Lancet 2012 Global cancer transitions according to the Human Develop- ment Index (2008–2030). 1 August 2012. Vol. 13, Issue 8, Pages 790–801.

Tisman 2013 The Rising Tide of OTC in Europe. URL: http://www.lmi.no/ media/3025409/andy_tisman_how_is_the_otc_market_devel- oping.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

The Times of India 2012 Innovation that detects eye problems quickly & at low cost. URL: http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2012-05-29/ science/31887646_1_eye-problems-eye-disease-narayana-neth- ralaya Accessed: 25.04.2013

UN 2010 World Population Prospects. The 2010 Revision. URL: http://esa. un.org/wpp/unpp/panel_indicators.htm. Accessed: 19.04.2013

UN 2011 World Urbanization Prospects, the 2011 Revision. URL: http:// esa.un.org/unup/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

UNEP 2013 Urban Air Pollution. URL: http://www.unep.org/urban_envi- ronment/issues/urban_air.asp Accessed: 25.04.2013

Unknown 2013 Industry Overview: Pharmaceuticals and Biotech. URL: https://www.wetfeet.com/articles/industry-overview- pharmaceuticals-and-biotech Accessed: 19.04.2013

Visiongain 2012 World OTC Pharmaceutical Market 2012–2022. URL: http://www.visiongain.com/Report/833/World-OTC- Pharmaceutical-Market-2012-2022 Accessed: 19.04.2013

WHO 2011 Global status report on non-communicable diseases 2010. URL: http://www.who.int/nmh/publications/ncd_report_full_en.pdf Accessed: 19.04.2013

WHO 2013a Diabetes. Fact sheet Number 312. URL: http://www.who.int/ mediacentre/factsheets/fs312/en/ Accessed: 19.04.2013

WHO 2013b Global Health Observatory URL: http://www.who.int/gho/epi- demic_diseases/cholera/cases_text/en/index.html Accessed: 19.04.2013

Z_punkt 2012 Megatrends. Update. URL: http://www.z-punkt.de/fileadmin/ be_user/D_Publikationen/D_Giveaways/Megatrends_Update_ DE.pdf. Accessed: 19.04.2013

Zhang/Wilson 2012 Trends in Notifiable Infectious Diseases in China: Implications for Surveillance and Population Health Policy. URL: http:// www.plosone.org/article/info:doi/10.1371/journal.pone.0031076 Accessed: 19.04.2013

26 Sources

FOR MORE INFORMATION about the ‘Key Logistics Trends in Life Sciences 2020+’, contact:

Dr. Markus Kückelhaus DHL Customer Solutions & Innovation Junkersring 57 53844 Troisdorf, Germany Phone: +49 2241 1203 230 Mobile: +49 152 5797 0580 e-mail: [email protected]

Dr. Michael Terhoeven DHL Customer Solutions & Innovation Heinrich-Brüning-Str. 5 53113 Bonn, Germany Phone: +49 228 182 30282 Mobile: +49 170 227 3726 e-mail: [email protected]

RECOMMENDED READING

LOGISTICS TREND RADAR

LOGISTICS TREND RADAR

Delivering insight today.

Creating value tomorrow!

Version 1: April 2013

Powered by Solutions & Innovation: Trend Research

90302075_v5.indd 1 22/04/2013 18:05

http://www.dhl.com/trendradar

PUBLISHER DHL Customer Solutions & Innovation Represented by Martin Wegner Vice President Solutions & Innovation

DP DHL Research und Innovation GmbH Tulpenfeld 1 53113 Bonn, Germany

PROJECT DIRECTOR Dr. Markus Kückelhaus Solutions & Innovation, DHL

Dr. Michael Terhoeven Strategy and Development Life Sciences & Healthcare Sector Customer Solutions & Innovation (CSI), DHL

Monika Nordmann Marketing Director Life Sciences & Healthcare Customer Solutions & Innovation (CSI), DHL

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND EDITORIAL OFFICE Katrin Zeiler Solutions & Innovation, DHL

Global Media Relations Silje Skogstad SVP Global Media Relations

Dr. Diane Rinas

IN COOPERATION WITH

Holger Glockner Kai Jannek Johannes Mahn Cornelius Patscha Version 1: June 2013

27Imprint

Article 14 .pdf

This primer provides a new way of thinking about the future of supply chains—bringing together the top procurement priorities of leading global businesses and the key forces of change reshaping the very business models that have given rise to global supply chains—to enable supply chain leaders to envision and manage future-fit supply chains.

Deepening our understanding of both sets of drivers and their potential implications for supply chains creates a powerful lens through which to reimagine the ways that all parties to global supply chains create value and contribute to a more just and sustainable world. Supply chain leaders, and the organizations with which they work, should seize this moment of significant change to design and implement new supply chain management models. This primer sets out five specific recommendations to help supply chain leaders build future-fit supply chains that both drive progress on top procurement priorities and advance the sustainable business agenda.

The information here is gathered from a series of interviews and leadership dialogues with companies in our membership on the front lines of these changes; review of thought leadership from think tanks, academics, and practitioner surveys; as well as BSR’s experience helping companies in all industries evolve their approaches to supply chain sustainability.

In the months ahead, BSR will convene a series of targeted dialogues, experiential futures workshops, and a collaborative initiative that will incubate and expand on these solutions in real time, sharing and elaborating on new models that leading companies are already putting in place. We invite you to be a part of shaping the future of supply chains that we would all like to see—one in which supply chains enable human rights, climate resilience, women’s empowerment, and inclusive economies on a global scale.

Please contact us to learn more and share your thoughts.

Area of Expertise Supply Chain

Future of Supply Chains 2025 A primer on the forces of change that will reshape supply chains from today to 2025 and recommendations for how companies can develop their supply chains to be fit for the future.

5 Innovating and Collaborating with Suppliers Supplier relationship management is at the heart of many leading procurement organizations today. Looking to the future, procurement teams will increasingly look to suppliers for innovation in products and processes, and to partner on areas of mutual benefit. For example, companies describe opportunities to strengthen demand planning and inventory management in tandem with suppliers. Others highlight a need to enhance their supplier development platforms in order to achieve public-facing sustainability goals, such as science-based climate targets.

1 Realizing Cost Savings and Optimizing Working Capital Delivering commercial benefit to the business is a core element of procurement that will continue to be crucially important from today through 2025. However, procurement leaders are looking to realize these goals in new ways in the future. Improvements in real- time data availability allow for more dynamic

decision-making, which can in turn support cost savings and enable procurement to more efficiently manage cash. For example, procurement can combine real-time demand data with historic trends to predict stock outages before they happen and direct replenishment. Improved technology can also allow for real-time insights into invoice approval status and facilitate faster transactions.

3 Improving Risk Prediction and Management Risk mitigation will continue to be paramount for procurement leaders through 2025, but the approach to delivering on this priority is changing. Legal requirements and stakeholder expectations for risk screening and due diligence are increasing, and procurement leaders will need to leverage more sophisticated tools, triangulate information and data from more sources, and scan for risks in deeper parts of the supply chain than ever before. In the past few years, there has been tremendous growth in the number of tools and technologies available to support supply chain risk prediction, and many of these include sustainability dimensions, such as environmental, ethical, and human rights risk monitoring. Procurement leaders are working to understand and test the capabilities of these tools and considering integration into and interoperability with existing systems across the business.

4 Providing Strategic Foresight to the Business at the Highest Levels CEOs increasingly look to CPOs to understand market dynamics, support business agility through foresight, and enable differentiation through innovation with suppliers. In 2025, the role of the CPO may include even more focus on providing this kind of strategic foresight to the business, understanding forces of change and uncertainty, and translating weak signals about supply chains into valuable business intelligence. Oxford Economics and SAP found that procurement executives among high-revenue-growth companies are more likely to say procurement within their company is becoming more strategic and more collaborative, and also that procurement data and information is being used across the company.2

Top Procurement Priorities to 2025

1 Key external sources include: Oxford Economics: Future of Procurement, 2016: https://www.oxfordeconomics.com/recent-releases/the-future-of-procurement; KPMG Global Consumer Executive Top of Mind Survey, 2017: https://home.kpmg. com/xx/en/home/insights/2017/06/top-of-mind-survey-2017.html; Procurement Leaders publications and blogs: https://www.procurementleaders.com/blog; The Future Of Supply Chain Planning, Forbes, 2017: https://www.forbes.com/sites/ kevinomarah/2016/10/27/the-future-of-supply-chain-planning/#2c5bcce31ab8.

2 https://www.oxfordeconomics.com/recent-releases/the-future-of-procurement

2 Rationalizing the Supply Base While not a new trend, procurement professionals describe reducing the number of suppliers and third parties in their supply chains as a high priority for the future. Simplifying supply chains creates business efficiencies and can help to reduce uncertainty and risk. A more streamlined supply chain increases the importance of each supplier relationship, creating incentives for companies and suppliers to collaborate on development opportunities and innovation projects. It is also critical that this rationalized set of suppliers is fit for the future, keeping pace with technological advances and aware of how global trends are shaping their businesses. Working with a smaller number of suppliers creates the conditions under which traceability, supplier partnership, and supplier-enabled innovation can flourish.

Based on BSR’s engagement with procurement leaders within our network, targeted dialogues held with senior leaders in 2017, and a review of external insights on Chief Procurement Officer (CPO) priorities and procurement trends,1 we have identified five key procurement priorities that shape the procurement function’s mandate today and will continue to influence supply chain management through 2025.

2 Global Climate Change and Resource Scarcity While the exact effects of climate change in supply chains cannot be precisely predicted, supply chains are particularly vulnerable to the impacts of climate change due to their reliance on raw materials and concentration in countries likely to be impacted by climate change. In BSR’s report on this topic in 2015, we found that companies were already identifying climate impacts to their supply chains—including changes in quality and

availability of raw materials, commodity price volatility, severe supply disruptions due to natural disasters, and worker health impacts due to rising temperatures. These impacts are likely to increase in frequency and severity as global temperatures continue to rise. For example, according to the WHO, ILO, and UNDP, by 2030, productivity losses related to heat-related workplace disruption and injury could rise above US$2 trillion.4 Based on BSR’s analysis of supplier information reported to CDP, most suppliers do not have the tools to evaluate or manage the potential impacts of climate change and resource scarcity to their businesses.5

3 Human Migration on a Mass Scale Transnational labor migration is an established trend, but the past several decades have seen an increase in mass migration, with more than 240 million people living outside their countries of birth.6 More recently, we breached an ominous global milestone: the greatest number of forcibly displaced people ever recorded. By the end of 2016, a staggering 65 million individuals had been forcibly displaced—a rate equivalent to 20 people forced to flee their homes due to persecution, violence, or conflict every minute.7 Internal migration within countries like China also contributes to changing labor dynamics and is projected to increase.8 This mass movement of people and the circumstances of their migration have shifted economic potential within countries and introduced new challenges and opportunities for companies seeking to respect and support human rights across their global supply chains. For example, migrants are particularly vulnerable to labor abuses due to language barriers, lack of formal networks, and limited legal protections.

4 Shifting Consumer Demands and Changing Market Demographics Advances in digital technology have enabled high levels of personalization in marketing and product design and fuel the growing on-demand economy.9 In the U.S. alone, consumers are spending nearly US$60 billion in on-demand services such as online marketplaces and transportation.10 Adding complexity to this trend, as companies look to meet demand for custom goods and faster delivery times in some parts of the world, they are also looking for growth opportunities in new markets and among new customer groups, including “base-of-the-pyramid” populations. These dynamics are likely to push companies in a range of industries to site sourcing and finished goods manufacturing to be closer to end customers. By 2025, many supply chains may shift from global flows of goods and services to national, regional, and local networks of buyers and suppliers.

Key Forces of Change to 2025

3 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/report-view/automation-sustainable-transition-jobs-workforce 4 http://www.ilo.org/wcmsp5/groups/public/---dgreports/---dcomm/documents/genericdocument/wcms_476051.pdf 5 https://www.cdp.net/en/research/global-reports/global-supply-chain-report-2017 6 https://publications.iom.int/system/files/global_migration_trends_2015_factsheet.pdf 7 http://www.unhcr.org/dach/wp-content/uploads/sites/27/2017/06/2016_Global_Trends_WEB-embargoed.pdf 8 http://www.ilo.org/wcmsp5/groups/public/---asia/---ro-bangkok/---ilo-beijing/documents/publication/wcms_158634.pdf 9 https://www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/ch/Documents/consumer-business/ch-en-consumer-business-made-to-order-consumer-review.pdf 10 https://hbr.org/2016/04/the-on-demand-economy-is-growing-and-not-just-for-the-young-and-wealthy

1 Widespread Adoption of Technology, Including Automation, Across the Value Chain

Technological advances are catalyzing the digitalization of supply chain management, changing how products and services are made and delivered, and enabling the creation and sharing of supply chain information in new ways by a more diverse set of actors. Companies are digitally transforming the management of their supply chains by piloting and applying technologies such as

machine learning, blockchain, and augmented reality to traditional supply chain management activities. Supply chains are becoming hyper-transparent as suppliers, workers, and communities access increasingly sophisticated technologies and use them to create and share information about environmental and social performance. Automation and advanced manufacturing are already having significant impacts on supply chains and will continue to reshape the labor force and the total costs of sourcing, especially in industries that are suited for automation (e.g. electronics), and in countries that have traditionally been the engines of global supply chains.3 These shifts are likely to have several implications for procurement leaders: altering the supplier base as some suppliers adopt new technologies while others are left behind, changing the landscape of common labor-related issues in supply chains, creating new challenges related to workforce displacement, and facilitating access to a huge volume of real-time supply chain information that is produced and validated by many supply chain actors.

Leveraging BSR’s research, consulting engagements, and collaborative initiatives focused on the key topics shaping business and sustainability, we identify five key forces of change likely to have significant impacts on supply chains from today to 2025. While we and other experts are confident that these trends will be relevant in 2025, significant uncertainty remains about the ways in which they will develop, precisely how they will impact supply chains in different industries and geographies, and how they will interact with and influence one another.

2 Build Responsible Regional Sourcing HubsGrowth in new markets and demographics and meeting customer demands for customized, on-demand goods and services will require understanding and meeting new consumption patterns and preferences, as well as providing goods and services in new locations and formats. In response, supply chain leaders will have an opportunity to develop nimble, regional supplier networks that can meet both commercial expectations and sustainability aspirations. Companies can build on the lessons learned in well-worn sourcing locations such as China to develop smart sourcing models in emerging hubs such as sub-Saharan Africa.13 Supply chain leaders will have the chance to embed social and environmental responsibility into the design of these regional sourcing hubs and to leapfrog supplier monitoring activities that have not delivered improvement, in labor conditions or environmental resilience.

1 Plan for the Supply Chain Impacts of Automation and Migration Mass migration on a scale previously unimaginable, combined with projections that significant numbers of workers will be displaced by automation, will increase volatility in supply chain labor dynamics; companies need to evolve their approaches accordingly. Companies can mitigate this volatility through fostering responsible and inclusive labor practices. For example, businesses sourcing from regions impacted by mass migration can re-direct resources to engage with industry peers and cross-border actors, including government, labor unions, and employers, to reinforce legal frameworks and insist on better enforcement of labor laws. Companies with supply chains that expect significant uptake of automation through 2025 can insist that key suppliers develop clear plans to support a sustainable workforce transition. Business can also support the empowerment of individual workers within their supply chains through enabling them to participate in and lead trade unions and other forms of worker representation, by using technology like mobile apps to help workers understand their legal rights, and through evolving technologies that directly gather workers’ views.12

The Supply Chain of the Future

5 Mixed Signals on Trade and Transparency In the years ahead, the business models that gave rise to global supply chains may be unwound by direct challenges to, or even simply uncertainty about, the durability of global trade agreements and norms. BSR member companies already report fundamental supply chain changes—such as reshoring, vertical integration, and increased sourcing from new geographies—as a consequence of the mixed signals in our global trade system and planned shifts in economic models, such as China’s pivot from a manufacturing powerhouse to a service economy with expansionist ambitions. Regulations that impact supply chain transparency and disclosure are similarly uncertain; legislation may be rolled back in some jurisdictions but strengthened in others. For example, as the U.S. looks to weaken the Dodd- Frank Act, which requires corporate disclosure on tax payments and on conflict minerals due diligence, France adopted the “duty of care” law, requiring French companies to implement due diligence plans to address human rights and environmental risks. As the U.S. regrettably announced its intent to withdraw from the Paris Agreement, hundreds of university presidents, mayors, and governors in U.S. cities and states redoubled their commitments to the international accord.11

11 https://mobile.nytimes.com/2017/06/01/climate/american-cities-climate-standards.html

12 https://betterwork.org/dev/blog/2017/06/05/our-vietnam-labour-law-guide-for-smartphones-has-been-updated/ 13 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/report-view/womens-economic-empowerment-sub-saharan-africa-business-action

To design a supply chain that is fit to flourish in 2025, supply chain leaders should anticipate how key forces of change will impact their supply chains, and look to evolve their supply chain management approaches accordingly. This inflection point is an opportunity for forward-thinking supply chain leaders to build future-fit supply chains that both drive progress on top procurement priorities and advance the sustainable business agenda.

Though there is significant uncertainty in how these forces of change will unfold, supply chain leaders can take concrete steps today to plan for a broad set of possible future scenarios.

Below are five recommendations for how companies can embrace and capitalize on the key forces of change that are changing supply chains, and achieve their top procurement priorities in the process. BSR will be working with companies over the next year to test these recommendations and identify other solutions to add to this initial list.

SUPPORTS THE FOLLOWING TOP PROCUREMENT PRIORITIES: Providing strategic foresight to the business Innovating and collaborating with suppliers Saving costs and optimizing working capital

SUPPORTS THE FOLLOWING TOP PROCUREMENT PRIORITIES: Improving risk prediction and management Providing strategic foresight to the business Innovating and collaborating with suppliers

4 Strengthen Supply Chain Transparency and Disclosure In the context of high levels of uncertainty about the future of global trade and of the regulations that shape mandatory corporate disclosures about sourcing practices, futuristic supply chain leaders can prepare for a variety of possible future scenarios through enhancing both visibility into supply chain practices and disclosures about those practices. Enhanced transparency will support supply chain leaders in the case that global trade is transformed by political shifts toward economic nationalism and will be valuable should free trade continue. Likewise, improving the quality and scope of supply chain disclosure will enable practitioners to stand ready should regulatory requirements increase and to weather the increased stakeholder scrutiny that is the likely corollary of a weaker regulatory environment.

14 http://wwwen.ipe.org.cn/

SUPPORTS THE FOLLOWING TOP PROCUREMENT PRIORITIES: Providing strategic foresight to the business Innovating and collaborating with suppliers

3 Digitalize Supplier Assessment and Engagement With more data about supply chains produced and disseminated than ever before, supply chain leaders have the opportunity to rethink how they collect and interpret supply chain information. Practitioners will need to hone in on the supply chain information that is decision-useful in a sea of available data and dashboards and will need to reconsider which data they need to commission and how it is collected. Supply chain leaders looking to the future should firmly weigh the value of investing resources in a battery of one-time, on-site supplier audits when open access channels, such as the IPE Blue Map, already publicize factory emissions and wastewater in real-time, and numerous digital platforms exist today to assess worker satisfaction and engagement, as described by workers themselves.14 In supply chains likely to be disrupted by automation, recalcitrant labor issues such as wages, working hours, and safety are likely to be supplanted by new challenges like responsible down-sizing and re-skilling of supply chain workers. Today’s audit and remediation processes will hardly be fit for purpose to support responsible factory closures or retraining programs, and therefore supply chain leaders planning for the impact of automation will need to guide their teams from a focus on corrective action plans toward leading a sustainable transition in partnership with their suppliers.

5 Embed Climate-Smart Supply Chain Planning To prepare for the changing physical environment and other supply chain risks related to global climate change, companies will need to factor climate risk and preparedness into supply chain planning models, seek alternative materials and resources where necessary, and look for new ways to secure supply and minimize disruptions in their supply chains. This will also mean partnering with suppliers that share a commitment to climate awareness and action and providing incentives and access to technical and management skill-building to suppliers that lag behind peers. Suppliers situated in jurisdictions that have already made policy commitments to transition to low-carbon economies— such as China and India—are likely to accelerate their contributions to global buyers’ visions of climate-smart supply chains. In all industries, climate-smart supply chain planning should become a fundamental part of good supply chain management from today to 2025.

SUPPORTS THE FOLLOWING TOP PROCUREMENT PRIORITIES: Saving costs and optimizing working capital Improving risk prediction and management Providing strategic foresight to the business Innovating and collaborating with suppliers

SUPPORTS THE FOLLOWING TOP PROCUREMENT PRIORITIES: Improving risk prediction and management Providing strategic foresight to the business Saving costs and optimizing working capital

BSR is a global nonprofit organization that works with its network of more than 250 member companies and other partners to build a just and sustainable world. From its offices in Asia, Europe, and North America, BSR develops sustainable business strategies and solutions through consulting, research, and cross-sector collaboration. Visit www.bsr.org for more information about BSR’s 25 years of leadership in sustainability.

Copenhagen | Guangzhou | Hong Kong | New York | Paris | San Francisco | Shanghai | Tokyo

BSR’s Work

Resources

Contact Us Contact the Supply Chain team to discuss how these trends will shape your supply chains, how futures tools such as scenario planning can help your team and leadership plan for multiple possible supply chain futures, and how you can join our Supply Chain Futures Lab—a BSR Collaborative Initiative launching in 2018 as part of our Sustainable Futures Lab—to chart a course toward inclusive, resilient, and transparent supply chains to 2025 and beyond.

THE SUPPLY CHAIN LEADERSHIP LADDER This working paper introduces the Supply Chain Leadership Ladder, a maturity model for supply chain sustainability programs, which companies can use to develop their program toward deeper impact.15

THE DIGITAL, SUSTAINABLE FUTURE OF SUPPLY CHAINS With all the buzz about augmented reality, blockchain, and the Internet of Things, how can we elevate sustainability to a primary consideration in the digitalization of supply chains?16

INTRODUCING THE SUSTAINABLE FUTURES LAB BSR has launched a new Sustainable Futures Lab, which will enable foresight-driven engagement with a broad spectrum of changes across various domains that are reshaping the context for business and sustainability.17

AUTOMATION: A FRAMEWORK FOR A SUSTAINABLE TRANSITION This report helps companies navigate the business and social implications of automation and outlines how companies can prepare the workforce for the inevitable changes to come.18

A NEW ERA: OPTIMIZING CHINESE INDUSTRY IN THE AGE OF AUTOMATION This report details automation and other shifts in Chinese industry and the global supply chains operating in the country, as well as recommendations to prepare workforces in China for the workplaces of tomorrow.19

FROM AGREEMENT TO ACTION: MOBILIZING SUPPLIERS TOWARD A CLIMATE-RESILIENT WORLD This new report produced by CDP and written by BSR outlines the current state of supplier performance on climate-change management.20

BUSINESS ACTION FOR CLIMATE-RESILIENT SUPPLY CHAINS This report outlines how business can act on climate change by building resilience in the supply chain.21

Our Supply Chain Expertise Our team of experts works with companies to envision the supply chains of tomorrow and to put in place today sustainable and responsible supply chain practices at the corporate, buyer, and supplier levels. Drawing upon our deep experience across multiple industries and regions, we help companies develop strategic approaches, operationalize sustainable procurement, engage with suppliers, and build meaningful collaborations.

See more: https://www.bsr.org/en/expertise/supply-chain- sustainability

Tara Norton Managing Director, Supply Chain [email protected]

Meghan Ryan Manager [email protected]

15 https://www.bsr.org/our-insights/report-view/the-supply-chain-leadership-ladder 16 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/blog-view/digital-sustainable-future-of-supply-chains 17 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/blog-view/introducing-the-sustainable-futures-lab 18 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/report-view/automation-sustainable-transition-jobs-workforce 19 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/report-view/automation-optimizing-chinese-industry 20 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/report-view/bsr-cdp-climate-change-supply-chain-report-2015-2016 21 https://www.bsr.org/en/our-insights/report-view/climate-resilient-supply-chains

Contact Contact

Article 15 .pdf

Supply chain and risk management Making the right risk decisions to strengthen operations performance

This study analyses the supply chain operations and risk management approaches of global footprint companies and looks at their operations and financial performance in the face of supply chain disruptions. It proposes a framework and a set of principles to help companies manage today’s risk challenges and prepare for future opportunities. Using the framework, a company’s leaders can increase their awareness of where they and their competition stand.

Contents

Executive summary ...................................................................................................... 2 When mature risk management and operational resilience pay off ............................. 3 The challenges of a more global supply chain .............................................................. 4 What are the drivers of supply chain operations complexity? ...................................... 5 What are the sources of supply chain risk? ................................................................... 6 What parameters are supply chain operations most sensitive to? ................................ 7 How do companies mitigate against disruptions? ........................................................ 7 The supply chain and risk management maturity framework ...................................... 9 Four levels of maturity in supply chain operations and risk management ................. 11 Key insights—More mature capabilities lead to better operational performance ...... 14

1. Supply chain disruptions have a significant impact on company business and financial performance

2. Companies with mature supply chain and risk management processes are more resilient to disruptions than those with immature processes

3. Mature companies that invest in supply chain flexibility are more resilient to disruptions than mature companies that don’t

4. Mature companies that invest in risk segmentation are more resilient to disruptions than mature companies that don’t

5. Companies with mature capabilities in supply chain management and risk management do better along all surveyed dimensions of operational and financial performance than immature companies

Call to action ............................................................................................................... 23 Appendix A: Survey demographics and trends ........................................................... 24 Appendix B: Key performance indicator definitions ................................................... 29

Supply chain and risk management 2

The Global Supply Chain and Risk Management Survey is a study of the supply chain operations and risk management approaches of 209 companies with a global footprint. As globally operating organisations, they are exposed to high risk scenarios ranging from controllable risks, such as raw material price fluctuation, currency fluctuation, market changes or fuel price volatility, to uncontrollable ones such as natural disasters.

The findings validate five key principles that companies can learn from to better manage today’s risk challenges to their supply chains and prepare for future opportunities.

1. Supply chain disruptions have significant impact on company business and financial performance.

2. Companies with mature supply chain and risk management capabilities are more resilient to supply chain disruptions. They are impacted less and they recover faster than companies with immature capabilities.

3. Mature companies that invest in supply chain flexibility are more resilient to disruptions than mature companies that don’t.

4. Mature companies investing in risk segmentation are more resilient to disruptions than mature companies that do not invest in risk segmentation.

5. Companies with mature capabilities in supply chain and risk management do better along all surveyed dimensions of operational and financial performance than immature companies.

“Capability maturity” referred to in the above five principles was determined using our supply chain and risk management capability maturity framework. This framework assesses the degree to which companies are applying the most effective enablers of supply chain risk reduction (e.g., flexibility, risk governance, alignment, integration, information sharing, data, models and analytics, and rationalisation) and their associated processes. The model depicts where a company stands in relation to its competition and the rest of the industry.

According to the survey results, as many as 60% of the companies pay only marginal attention to risk reduction processes. These companies are categorised as having immature risk processes. They mitigate risk by either increasing capacity or strategically positioning additional inventory. This is not a surprise as the survey also shows that most of these companies are focused either on maximising profit, minimising costs or maintaining service levels.

The remaining 40% do invest in developing advanced risk reduction enabler capability and are classified as having mature processes. Our research validated that companies with mature risk processes perform operationally and financially better – something for CEOs and CFOs to note. Indeed, managing supply chain risk is good for all parts of the business—product design, development, operations and sales. Using the capability maturity model, companies can benchmark their ability to respond to risks, and then increase their capability maturity to gain competitive advantage.

Executive summary

In the past twelve months, more than 60% of the companies surveyed said that their performance indicators had dropped by 3% or more as a result of supply chain disruptions.

PwC | Research study3

On March 11, 20111 , Nissan Motor Company Ltd and its suppliers experienced a 9.0-magnitide earthquake as it struck off the east coast of Japan. The quake was among the five most powerful earthquakes on record. Tsunami waves in excess of 40 meters travelled up to 10km inland causing a “Level 7” meltdown at three nuclear reactors at Fukushima Dai-ichi. The impact of this multi-headed disaster was devastating. 25,000 people died, went missing or were injured. 125,000 buildings were damaged and economic losses were estimated at $200 billion.

In the weeks following the catastrophic earthquake, 80% of the automotive plants in Japan suspended production. Nissan’s production capacity was perceived to have suffered most from the disaster compared to its competitors. Six production facilities and fifty of the firm’s critical suppliers suffered severe damage. The result was a loss of production capacity equivalent to approximately 270,000 automobiles.

Despite this devastation, Nissan’s recovery was remarkable. During the next six months, Nissan’s production in Japan decreased by only 3.8% compared to an industry wide decrease of 24.8%. Nissan ended 2011 with an increase in production of 9.3% compared to a reduction of 9.3% industry wide.

How was Nissan able to successfully navigate a disruption of this magnitude?

When mature risk management and operational resilience pay off

1. To begin with, Nissan responded by adhering to the principles of its risk management philosophy. It focused on identifying risks as early as possible, actively analysing these risks, planning countermeasures and rapidly implementing them.

2. The company had prepared a continuous readiness plan encompassing its suppliers including: an earthquake emergency response plan; a business continuity plan; and disaster simulation training. Nissan deployed these advanced capabilities throughout risk management and along the supply chain.

3. Management was empowered to make decisions locally without lengthy analysis.

4. The supply chain model structure was flexible, meaning there was decentralisation with strong central control when required. This was combined with simplified product lines.

5. There was visibility across the extended enterprise and good coordination between internal and external business functions.

These capabilities allowed the company to share information globally, allocate component part supplies on higher margin products and adjust production in a cost-efficient way.

1 Nissan Motor Company Ltd: Building Operational Resiliency: William Schmidt, David Simchi- Levi, MIT Sloan Management, Case Number 13–150

Supply chain and risk management 4

Why this study? Counter-intuitive stories such as Nissan are at the heart of this study. The case illustrates that companies with highly mature capabilities in both supply chain management and risk management are able to effectively address risks, outperform the market and even gain competitive advantage.

We believe that linking the customer value proposition, sound supply chain operations, and robust risk management is key to success. Moreover, there are supply chain and risk management principles, frameworks, and processes that enable companies to address complex market challenges and achieve superior performance.

PwC launched the Supply Chain Risk Management Survey to assess how global organisations address these challenges and their impact on business operations. We wish to thank the MIT Forum for Supply Chain Innovation and Professor David Simchi-Levi for conducting the research in this report. The survey was distributed to members of the MIT Forum for Supply Chain Innovation and world-wide clients of PwC. In total, 209 companies completed the survey. Appendix A characterises the participant population.

When a company expands from a local or regional presence to a more global one, the operations strategy needs to be adjusted to align with the changes. The economic crisis in Europe is a good example of this. Due to the decrease in demand for many products and services in the continent, companies are changing strategies and seeking alternate global markets. That’s when operations become more complex. Transportation and logistics become more challenging, lead times lengthen, costs increase and end customer service can suffer. With a more a global footprint, different products are directed to more diverse customers via different distribution channels, which require different supply chains.

To address the challenge successfully, there are number of questions companies need to consider as their operations globalise.

1. What are the drivers of supply chain complexity for a company with global operations and how have they evolved over the recent past?

2. What are the sources of supply chain risk?

3. How can vulnerability and exposure to high impact supply chain disruptions be properly assessed and managed?

4. How can supply chain resilience be improved?

5. What supply chain operations and risk principles will guide the improvement of the company’s bottom line: the operations and financial performance?

Through this research, we aim to provide valuable insight in response to these questions.

The challenges of a more global supply chain

PwC | Research study5

What are the drivers of supply chain operations complexity?

Supply chains are exposed to both domestic and international risks. The more complex the supply chain, the less predictable the likelihood and the impact of disruption. In other words, exposure to risk is potentially higher. We asked survey participants their views on how key supply chain complexity drivers have evolved over the past three years. The responses are shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1. Evolution of supply chain complexity over the past three years

Over recent years, the size of the supply chain network has increased, dependencies between entities and between functions have shifted, the speed of change has accelerated and the level of transparency has decreased. Overall, developing a product and getting it to the market requires more complex supply chains needing a higher degree of coordination.

Dependencies between supply chain entities (*) have increased

Changes in the extended supply chain network configuration occur more frequently

New product introductions have been more frequent

Products and services have become less standard

The number of entities in the supply chain has increased

The relationships between supply chain entities have become less transparent

*suppliers, partners, customers

Agree/strongly agree

95%

94%

87%

80%

74%

38%

Supply chain and risk management 6

What are the sources of supply chain risk?

Risks to global supply chains vary from known-unknowns and controllable, to unknown-unknowns and uncontrollable ones.2 In the Nissan case, the devastating natural disasters were unknown-unknowns (difficult to quantify the likelihood of occurrence) and uncontrollable (you cannot manage the expected risk and its impact).

To understand the level of exposure to diverse and broad ranging sources of risk, we asked survey participants to identify the sources of risks faced by their supply chain. The results are shown in Figure 2.

Interestingly, all the top six risks, with the exception of environmental catastrophes, are known-unknowns and controllable to some degree.

Figure 2. Survey participants’ view on the greatest risk to which their supply chain is exposed

Raw material price fluctuation

Currency fluctuations

Market changes

Energy/fuel prices volatility

Environmental catastrophes

Raw material scarcity

Rising labour costs

Geopolitical instability

Supplier/partner bankruptcy

Change in technology

Unplanned IT disruptions

Counterfeiting

Other

Telecommunications outages

Cyber attacks

53%

47%

41%

38%

34%

28%

26%

22%

22%

20%

12%

11%

6%

5%

2%

2 Operations Rules: Delivering Value Through Flexible Operations, David Simchi-Levi, 2010, The MIT Press.

PwC | Research study7

What parameters are supply chain operations most sensitive to?

Respondents replied that their supply chain operations were most sensitive to reliance on skill-set and expertise (31%), price of commodities (29%) and energy and oil (28%), see Figure 3.

As an example of the energy and oil parameter, according to the Department of Energy Information Administration, U.S. diesel prices rose 9.5 cents per gallon in February 2012. Cognizant of the sensitivity and impact diesel prices have on their financial bottom line, shippers rapidly adjust budgets in order to offset the increased costs higher fuel prices produce.

How do companies mitigate against disruptions?

What kind of actions do our survey respondents currently take to reduce the exposure of their supply chain to potential disruptions or to mitigate the impact? Nissan had a well-thought out and exercised business continuity plan ready to kick into action to facilitate a quick recovery. 82% of respondents said they had business continuity plans ready. See Figure 4.

Figure 3. Parameters to which survey participants’ supply chain operations are most sensitive

Reliance on skill-set and expertise

Controlled price of commodities

Reliance on energy/oil

Regional concentration of manufacturing operations

Regional concentration of supply base

Reliance on a small supply base

Regional concentration of customers

Reliance on unique technology

Reliance on a small outsourcing base (e.g., transportation partners)

31%

29%

28%

27%

25%

22%

22%

17%

16%

Supply chain and risk management 8

Figure 4. Actions companies take to mitigate supply chain risk

Create and implement a business continuity plan

Implement dual sourcing strategy

Use both regional and global strategy

Pursue (1st and 2nd tier) supplier collaboration

Pursue demand collaboration with customers

Apply forward buying/hedging strategy

Increase inventory levels and safety stock

Establish distribution centres in multiple regions

Pursue near-shoring manufacturing strategy

Use component substitution strategy

Use regional strategy only

Use postponement or delayed differentiation strategy

Other actions

82%

79%

78%

72%

72%

60%

59%

59%

54%

48%

41%

33%

27%

PwC | Research study9

Strengthen supply chain and risk management

As Nissan illustrated, to reduce vulnerability and exposure to high impact supply chain disruptions, companies need advanced capabilities along two dimensions: supply chain management and risk management. But how can they understand the maturity level of their capabilities in these areas before designing ways to strengthen them?

The supply chain and risk management maturity framework

The seven supply chain and risk enablers of maturity

There are seven factors that enable stronger capabilities in both supply chain management and risk management. By matching their practices against these seven “enablers” companies can assess how mature or immature their capabilities are. This is the basis of our Supply Chain and Risk Management Maturity Model – an empirical framework that applies set questions across the seven enablers.

For each of the seven enabling areas, we asked survey respondents to answer questions concerning the extent to which they have implemented gradually advancing practices. The more developed the practices are, the more advanced the capabilities. The seven enablers are:

Supply chain and risk management 10

Figure 5. Survey participants’ view on which capability enabler they consider the most important

1. Risk governance—the presence of appropriate risk management structures, processes and culture.

2. Flexibility and redundancy in product, network and process architectures—having the right levels of flexibility and redundancy across the value chain to be able to absorb disruptions and adapt to change.

3. Alignment between partners in the supply chain—strategic alignment on key value dimensions, identification of emerging patterns and advancement towards higher value propositions.

4. Upstream and downstream supply chain integration— information sharing, visibility and collaboration with upstream and downstream supply chain partners.

5. Alignment and integration between internal business functions— alignment and integration of activities between company value chain functions on a strategic, tactical and operational level.

6. Complexity management/ rationalisation—ability to standardise and simplify networks and processes, interfaces, product architectures and product portfolios and operating models.

Alignment between partners in the supply chain

Alignment and integration between internal business functions

Upstream and downstream process integration and information sharing

Risk governance

Flexibility and redundancy in network, product and process architectures

Data, models and analytics

Complexity management

60%

49%

47%

44%

37%

28%

26%

7. Data, models and analytics— development and use of intelligence and analytical capabilities to support supply chain and risk management functions.

According to our survey, companies consider alignment between partners in the supply chain as the most important factor in enabling risk reduction (60%), see Figure 5.

Internal and external process integration are also very important (49%) and (47%). Risk governance (44%) and network flexibility and redundancy (37%) rank relatively high. Finally, despite recent advances, data, models and analytics (28%) and complexity management/ rationalisation (26%) are low on the priority list. As analytics continue to mature, this may change.

PwC | Research study11

Four levels of maturity in supply chain operations and risk management

Supply chain operations and risk management processes go hand-in- hand and complement one another. At lower maturity levels the processes are decoupled and stand-alone, but at high maturity levels they are fully intertwined. For developing and deploying capabilities to manage supply chain risk effectively, a high level of supply chain sophistication is an absolute pre-requisite. There are four levels of supply chain and risk management process maturity:

Level I: Functional supply chain management and ad-hoc management of risk. Supply chains are organised functionally with a very low degree of integration. They are characterised by high duplication of activities, internally and externally disconnected processes, and an absence of coordinated efforts with suppliers and partners. Product design is performed independently and there is little visibility into partners/suppliers’ operations. Inventory and capacity levels are unbalanced leading to poor customer service and high total costs. There is no risk governance structure and poor visibility into sources of supply chain risk. Only very limited vulnerability or threat analysis is performed. Risk is managed in an ad-hoc way with no prior anticipation or positioning of response mechanisms.

Level II: Internal supply chain integration and positioning of planned buffers to absorb disruptions. Supply chains are cross- functionally organised. Internal processes are integrated, information is shared and visibility is provided between functions in a structured way. Resources

are jointly managed and there is a higher level of alignment between performance objectives. Integrated planning is performed at strategic, tactical and operational levels – that leads to a single company plan. Risk management processes are documented and internally integrated. Basic threats and vulnerabilities are analysed. Scenarios concerning the base integrated plan are conducted to position targeted buffers of capacity and inventory to absorb disruptions. Postponement or delayed differentiation product design principles are explored to improve response to changing demand patterns. There is minimum visibility, however, into emerging changes and patterns outside the company.

Level III: External supply chain collaboration and proactive risk response. Supply chains feature collaboration across the extended enterprise. Information sharing is extensive and visibility is high. Key activities such as product design or inventory management are integrated between supply chain partners. External input is incorporated into internal planning activities. Interfaces are standardised and products and processes are rationalised to reduce complexity. Information sharing and visibility outside the company domain is exploited to set up sensors and predictors of change and variability to proactively position response mechanisms. Formal quantitative methodologies for risk management are introduced and sensitivity analysis is conducted. Suppliers and partners are monitored for resilience levels and business continuity plans are created.

Supply chain and risk management 12

Level IV: Dynamic supply chain adaptation and fully flexible response to risk. Companies are fully aligned with their supply chain partners on the key value dimensions across the extended enterprise. Their individual strategies and operations are guided by common objectives and fitness schemas. Their supply chain is fully flexible to interact and adapt to complex dynamic environments. Emerging value chain patterns resulting from this interaction are probed and identified and higher value equilibrium points are achieved. At this level, the supply chain is often segmented to match multiple customer value propositions. Risk sensors and predictors are supported by real-time monitoring and analytics. Risk governance is formal but flexible. Full flexibility in the supply chain product, network and process architecture and short supply chain transformation lead-times allow quick response and adaptability. Supplier segmentation is performed. Risk strategies are segmented based on supplier profiles and market- product combination characteristics.

Table 1 summarises the criteria used as a basis for the questions and the maturity levels.

PwC | Research study13

How mature are company capabilities?

The framework is a useful tool in evaluating each company’s capabilities. Importantly, according to our study, it shows that the majority of the companies have immature supply chain operations and risk management processes in place. See Figure 6.

Specifically, of the companies surveyed, only 41% were classified as having mature processes, based on their responses. 59% of companies have immature processes in place to effectively address incidents. Only a minority of companies (9%) are fully prepared to address potential challenges from supply chain disruptions in increasingly complex environments. Level I Level II Level III Level IV

17%

42%

32%

9%

Figure 6. Capability level company classification profile

Table 1. Capability maturity classification model

Supply chain management Risk management

L e ve

l I

Functional

Limited co-ordination between internal functions

Resources are locally owned and managed

Performance is measured separately based on functional Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

Absence of integrated plans

Ad-hoc

Ad-hoc risk management processes

No visibility into changes outside the functional domain

No planning of redundancy buffers towards potential disruptions

Can only absorb limited volatility around standard functional input parameters

L e ss m

a tu

re

L e ve

l II

Integrated

Information sharing and common planning activities between internal functions

Key resources and performance objectives are jointly managed

Buffer planning

Positioning of redundancy buffers based on a common, cross-functional plan

Basic risk governance processes

No visibility into emerging changes and patterns outside the company domain

L e ve

l III

Collaborative

Visibility, information sharing and integration of key activities between supply chain partners

Incorporation of external input into internal planning activities

Supply chain rationalisation

Proactive

Use of sensors and predictors to proactively position response mechanisms

Business continuity plans

Partner resilience monitoring

Quantitative risk management

M o

re m

a tu

reLe ve

l IV

Dynamic

Alignment on key customer value dimensions across the extended enterprise

Supply chain segmentation to match multiple customer value propositions

Identification of emerging value chain patterns in complex dynamic environments

Ability to adapt the supply chain to frequent changes in the value chain

Flexible

Investment in flexibility (processes, products, plants, capacity)

Management of pressure away from weak partners in the value chain

Risk strategy segmentation

14 Supply chain risk and management

Having assessed the maturity levels of the 209 companies in the survey, we then analysed their business and operational performance indicators over the last 12 months. Our aim was to understand the impact of disruptions on mature vs. immature companies.

The indicators cover a wide spectrum of company performance including profitability, efficiency and service. Both the scale of the impact and the time it took to recover to prior or

Key insights—More mature capabilities lead to better operational performance

improved levels of performance were measured. These are the key insights from the 209 companies surveyed.

1. Supply chain disruptions have a significant impact on company business and financial performance

To better understand the impact of disruptions, we assessed the performance of companies that faced at least three disruptive incidents over the last twelve months. (See Appendix B for performance indicator

definitions.) If indicators were negatively affected by 3% or higher, this was considered “significant impact.” As Figure 7 illustrates, 54% said that sales revenue was negatively affected and 64% suffered a decline in their customer service levels. Across all the operational KPIs examined, at least 60% reported a 3% or higher loss of value.

The importance of having mature capabilities in place to deal with supply chain disruptions is clear.

35%

54%

40%

69% 66% 67% 64% 65%

72% 68%

MV SR MS TSCC SCAU IT

Abbreviation list

MV Market value SR Sales revenue MS Market-share TSCC Total supply chain cost SCAU Supply chain asset utilisation

IT Inventory turns CSL Customer service level TSCLT Total supply chain lead time TSCLTV Total supply chain lead time variability OFLT Order fulfillment lead time

CSL TSCLT TSCLTV OFLT

Figure 7. Percentage of companies that suffered a 3% or higher impact on their performance indicators as a result of supply chain disruptions in the past twelve months

3 Information about disruption impacts is self-reported by survey participants.

PwC | Research study15

2. Companies with mature supply chain and risk management processes are more resilient to disruptions than those with immature processes

According to the survey results, companies with mature (maturity levels III & IV) supply chain and risk management processes are more resilient to disruptions than companies with immature (maturity levels I & II) processes. The more mature companies suffer lower impact and enjoy faster recovery.

Figure 8 shows the percentage of companies with more than 3 incidents that suffered an impact of 3% or higher on their performance as a result of supply chain disruptions in the last twelve months.

Only 44% of the companies with mature processes suffered a 3% or more decline in their revenue compared to 57% with immature processes. The higher resilience trend for mature companies is common for all the KPIs examined. The difference is striking in key areas such as total supply chain cost, order fulfilment lead times and lead time variability. These KPIs are among those most heavily impacted by supply chain disruptions, so mature companies gain a distinct advantage by investing in the proposed set of capabilities.

Supply chain and risk management 16

Figure 8. Difference in performance resilience to disruptions between more mature and less mature levels

MV SR MS TSCC SCAU IT CSL TSCLT TSCLTV OFLT

-13%

Less mature (Level I—Level II) companies

More mature (Level III—Level IV) companies

Abbreviation list

MV Market value SR Sales revenue MS Market-share TSCC Total supply chain cost SCAU Supply chain asset utilisation

IT Inventory turns CSL Customer service level TSCLT Total supply chain lead time TSCLTV Total supply chain lead time variability OFLT Order fulfillment lead time

41%

-13% -8% -28% -8% -10% -7% -10% -11% -19%

28%

44%

57%

44%

36%

52%

80%

67%

59%

70%

60%

66%

59%

69%

59%

67%

75% 78%

56%

PwC | Research study17

3. Mature companies that invest in supply chain flexibility are more resilient to disruptions than mature companies that don’t

Flexibility is critical to a company’s ability to adapt to change. A greater degree of flexibility in their businesses will allow companies to better respond to demand changes, labour strikes, technology changes, currency volatility, volatile energy and oil prices. However, flexibility does not come free, and the higher the level of flexibility the more expensive it is to achieve. Similarly, achieving a higher level of service can be costly. It’s a difficult trade- off between the desire to minimise costs vs. investing in flexibility or increasing customer service levels.

We asked the respondents to identify the key supply chain value drivers for their leading customer value proposition. High customer service level (34%) and flexibility (27%) were cited as the top two drivers followed by cost minimisation (22%) and efficient use of inventory (14%). See Figure 9.

Two distinctive groups emerge from this response:

• The cost-efficient group— mature companies that selected cost or efficiency as their key supply chain value driver.

• The flexible-response group— mature companies that selected flexibility or customer service levels as their key supply chain value driver.

When we compared the performance resilience of these two groups, we learned that the flexible-response group fared significantly better. The performance of cost-efficient companies suffered more from the changes and disruptions in their supply chain even though they possess

Efficient use of inventory and supply chain assets

Flexibility and

respons- iveness

High customer service levels

Total supply chain cost

minimisation

Other

14%

27%

34%

22%

3%

Figure 9. Key supply chain value driver to match customer value proposition

mature capabilities in deploying their strategy. Mature companies investing in flexibility, responsiveness and customer service, demonstrate higher performance resilience compared to companies whose strategies emphasise cost and efficiency. Figure 10 highlights the major differences.

Figure 10 also illustrates that the largest majority of cost-efficient companies (80%) face high variability in their supply chain lead times once a supply chain disruption takes place. This is interesting given that low variability is one of the key drivers of an efficient operating strategy.

Supply chain and risk management 18

Figure 10. Difference in performance resilience between mature cost-efficient and mature flexible-response companies

MV SR MS TSCC SCAU IT CSL TSCLT TSCLTV OFLT

-33%

Mature (Level III—Level IV) cost efficient companies

Mature (Level III—Level IV) flexible response companies

Abbreviation list

MV Market value SR Sales revenue MS Market-share TSCC Total supply chain cost SCAU Supply chain asset utilisation

IT Inventory turns CSL Customer service level TSCLT Total supply chain lead time TSCLTV Total supply chain lead time variability OFLT Order fulfillment lead time

46%

-6% -5% -6% -21% -18% -14% -26% -24% -32%

47%

53%

71%

64% 67%

53%

73%

47%

80%

56%

73%

41%

56%

47% 50%

13%

41%

36%

31%

PwC | Research study19

4. Mature companies that invest in risk segmentation are more resilient to disruptions than mature companies that don’t

Companies with different market value propositions prioritise different value dimensions in their supply chains. Today, companies often target different market segments and therefore have several customer value propositions. For example, one part of the product portfolio may emphasise price as key differentiator while another emphasises product innovation or product selection and availability.

We asked our survey respondents to identify the key value dimension of their leading customer value proposition. The top three choices were: Quality (23%), Innovation (14%) and Price (14%). See Figure 11.

Different value propositions – and the corresponding operating strategies—do not necessarily have the same risk profile. Value dimensions are not exposed to the same threats and vulnerabilities.

As a result, the management of supply chain risk – exposure reduction and mitigation strategies – may need to vary significantly based on the value dimension.

Consider a value proposition emphasising product innovation. The high speed of innovation, the corresponding lower forecast accuracy, the higher price risk and the higher supply risk will essentially determine the type of strategy the company deploys with its supplier. If the price risk or supply risk is higher as a result of the speed of innovation then it is more likely that flexible risk-sharing contracts, rather than a build-up of inventory buffers is appropriate. Thus, risk strategies needs to be segmented according to the value driver.

We asked survey respondents whether they actively pursued risk strategy segmentation. Almost 60% do and 40% don’t. See Figure 12.

We asked the 59% of companies that pursued risk segmentation, “What product differentiators do

Quality Innovation Price Brand Product selection

and availability

Customer experience

Delivery reliability

Value added services

Volume flexibility

23%

14% 14% 12% 11%

9% 8% 6%

3%

Figure 11. The key value dimension of the leading customer value proposition of survey participants

Supply chain and risk management 20

59%

41%

Companies that segment

their risk strategy

Companies that do

not segment their risk strategy

Figure 12. Percentage of companies that perform risk strategy segmentation

you use as a basis for risk strategy segmentation?” The top three choices were: strategic importance (56%), demand volatility (52%) and sales volume (45%). See Figure 13.

Companies with mature capabilities were clustered into two main groups: those that perform risk strategy segmentation and those that don’t. We then compared the performance resilience to supply chain disruptions for both groups. We observed that

Strategic importance

Demand volatility

Volume

Profit margin

Purchase price risk

Supplier historical performance

The stage of product in life cycle

The length of product life cycle

Other

56%

52%

45%

40%

31%

25%

23%

20%

5%

Figure 13. Key product differentiators for risk strategy segmentation

mature companies investing in risk segmentation based on different value propositions, demonstrate higher performance resilience than companies that do not invest in risk segmentation.

21

Figure 14 highlights the major difference between the two groups across operations and financial performance indicators. Of particular note is in the sales revenue category. Only 32% of the mature companies that segment their risk management strategy were significantly impacted as a result of incidents that occurred. This compares to 70% of mature companies that don’t segment—a 38% difference!

MV SR MS TSCC SCAU IT CSL TSCLT TSCLTV OFLT

55%

-44%

Mature companies that do not segment their risk management strategy

Mature companies that segment their risk management strategy

70% 70%

64%

46%

73%

52%

88%

50% 46%

50%

59%

90%

80% 82% 80%

46%

32%

17% 11%

-38% -53% -18% -21% -38% -44% -30% -23% -34%

Abbreviation list

MV Market value SR Sales revenue MS Market-share TSCC Total supply chain cost SCAU Supply chain asset utilisation

IT Inventory turns CSL Customer service level TSCLT Total supply chain lead time TSCLTV Total supply chain lead time variability OFLT Order fulfillment lead time

Figure 14. Difference in performance resilience based on risk strategy segmentation

Supply chain and risk management 22

5. Companies with mature capabilities in supply chain management and risk management do better along all surveyed dimensions of operational and financial performance than immature companies

We compared how company operations and financial performance differed between the mature and immature companies over the prior 12 months. As Figure 15 highlights, companies with mature capabilities in supply chain and risk management do better along all surveyed dimensions of operational and financial performance.

This finding suggests that there is a direct link between having mature supply chain and risk management capabilities and higher overall performance.

The capability maturity evaluation will enable company executives to gain insight into the risk position and maturity of the company measured in terms of their operations and financial performance.

80.3

56.8

Inventory days of supply (days)

75.5 71

C2C cycle time (days)

7.3% 4.8%

Obsolescence cost (% of total revenue)

88.1% 93.6%

On-time delivery performance

Supply chain lead time (days)

Total asset turnover EBIT marginInventory turnover

55.8 49.5

1.0 1.4

11.7% 13.7%

7.9

12.0

Less mature (Level I—Level II) companies

More mature (Level III—Level IV) companies

Figure 15. Business and financial performance difference between mature and immature companies

PwC | Research study23

Call to action

If your business suffered a significant disruption today, how confident are you in the resilience of your supply chain operations? Considering the following questions will help you start to understand where to focus your attention.

• How have changes in the business environment and in your company’s strategy and operations increased the complexity in the various elements of your supply chain?

• Which parameters is your supply chain most sensitive to?

• Do you regularly involve your risk management specialists? Is there an established risk management process to follow as changes are made in your supply chain?

• Are you serving multiple market segments with multiple customer value propositions? If so, do you segment and mitigate risks in your supply chain accordingly?

• How do you monitor the spectrum of internal and external risks to your supply chain?

• What trade-offs are you willing to make to mitigate risks in your supply chain (e.g., cost-effectiveness vs. flexibility)?

• Are your supply chain partners informed and updated on your business continuity plans?

• Do you have sufficient insight into your supply chain partners’ operations?

• Is there a shared understanding (from overall strategy, through to operations and out to supply chain partners) of the most important value drivers your supply chain should seek to prioritise and protect?

• Is this topic on the agenda of the CEO and/or COO, or is it time to have a conversation?

Supply chain and risk management 24

Figure 16 illustrates the geographical distribution of survey participants based on headquarters location.

Appendix A: Survey demographics and trends

Asia/ Middle East/

Africa

Europe Americas

16%

53%

31%

Figure 16. Distribution of survey participants’ headquarters by region

Figure 17. Distribution of survey participants by industry

Service Industries

Pharmaceutical & Chemicals

Automotive & Industrial

Products

Technology and Telecom

Retail and Consumer Goods

21%

31%

19% 18%

11%

PwC | Research study25

83% of the participating companies have their manufacturing operations dispersed in multiple geographic regions while only 17% have them in the same region as their headquarters.

The majority of survey participants (64%) are manufacturing companies.

Figure 19. Distribution of companies by scale of operations globalisation

Figure 18. Percentage of manufacturing vs. non- manufacturing survey companies

64%

36%

Manufacturing Non- Manufacturing

83%

17%

Operations across regions

Operations in one region

Supply chain and risk management 26

With 83% of the participants having operations across regions, we examined how the split of operations volume by regions compares with the split of their sales volume by region to get an indication of the use of regional vs. global operations strategies to meet demand. For the last 12 months, we observe that sales vs. operations volumes per region are mostly aligned indicating use of regional strategies by survey participants.

Figure 20. Comparison between manufacturing operations volume and sales volume by region

Europe AmericasAsia/ Middle East/

Africa

26% 24%

44% 44%

29% 32%

Operations Sales

PwC | Research study27

This is a comparison between the current and the future expected operations volume in 2015 by region based on the expectation of survey participants. America operations remain constant. A 3% growth is shown for Asia/Middle East/Africa and a corresponding 2% decline for Europe indicating a shift of operations from Europe to Asia/Middle East/Africa.

Figure 21. Comparison between current vs. future expected operations by volume

Europe AmericasAsia/ Middle East/

Africa

26% 29%

44% 42%

29% 29%

2012 2015

Supply chain and risk management 28

The current vs. future expected sales volumes in 2015 by region based on the expectation of survey participants are compared in Figure 22. Survey participants expect a drop in their sales volume in Europe by 2015 and increase in sales volumes in most of the other world regions with Asia/ Middle East/Africa growing the fastest.

Figure 22. Comparison between current vs. future expected sales volumes by region

Europe AmericasAsia/ Middle East/

Africa

24%

28%

44%

38%

32% 33%

2012 2015

PwC | Research study29

The key operations4 and financial performance indicators used in this study are described below:

Market value: The current market value of a company is the total number of shares outstanding multiplied by the current price of its shares. Recent research has shown that shareholder value can be significantly impacted by severe supply chain disruptions.

Sales revenue: The net revenues a company makes from the sale of its products. Supply chain disruptions or structural market shifts can impact a company’s ability to deliver the value proposition and lead to loss of sales volume and sales revenue.

Market share: The company’s sales over the period divided by the total sales of the industry over the same period. Loss of delivery capability or damaged brand image can lead to market-share loss, especially, when the impact of a supply chain disruption is long-lasting.

Earnings before income and taxes (EBIT) margin : The earnings before interest and tax (EBIT) divided by total revenue. EBIT margin can provide an investor with a clearer view of a company’s core profitability

Appendix B: Key performance indicator definitions

Total supply chain cost: The sum of fixed and variable costs to perform the plan, source, make and deliver functions for company products. Supply chain disruptions have an impact on total supply chain cost as a number of activities need to be expedited or redesigned across the various functions.

Supply chain asset utilisation: Supply chain asset utilisation is a measure of actual use of supply chain assets divided by the available use of these assets. A disruption can directly impact the usability of assets and resources or cause their re-positioning in order to recover. As a result, the utilisation of key assets and resources may deviate significantly from the set targets.

Inventory turns: Inventory turnover ratio measures the efficiency of inventory management. It reflects how many times average inventory was produced and sold during the period. A disruption or change may impact inventory efficiency either by introducing increased obsolescence or by changing inventory positioning and consumption plans.

Customer service levels: The probability that a customer demand is met. The loss of delivery, customer communication or customer service capability due to a supply chain disruption can impact customer service levels.

Order fulfillment lead time: The average actual lead times consistently achieved, from order receipt to order entry complete, order entry complete to start build, start build to order ready for shipment, and order ready for shipment to customer receipt of order.

Total supply chain lead time: In the absence of finished goods or intermediate (work in progress) inventory, it is the time it takes to source raw material, make a product and deliver it to the market. Supply chain disruptions can introduce significant delays across all stages of the supply chain.

Total supply chain lead time variability: Total supply chain lead time variability is the time variation around the total supply chain lead time mean. Exposure to incident disruptions introduces variability and fluctuations in the standard lead time levels within the supply chain.

4 David Simchi-Levi, Phil Kaminsky, Edith Simchi-Levi (2008). Designing and Managing The Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies and Case Studies,3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill Irwin

Supply chain and risk management 30

About the project team

Mark Strom Global and US Operations Consulting Leader, PwC, United States

Mark Strom is the global head of operations consulting services for PwC, leading a team across the network of more than 4,000 professionals. Mark and his colleagues specialise in helping clients realise strategic goals and competitive advantage by defining and implementing world- class operations. He draws upon a wealth of client experience in life sciences and technology companies. His expertise in strategic planning, business planning, product innovation, and product development has helped clients drive revenue growth and accelerated time- to-market. Mark holds an MBA from the Stanford Graduate School of Business.

Prof. David Simchi-Levi, MIT Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering and the Engineering Systems Division, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Prof. Simchi-Levi is considered to be one of the thought leaders in supply chain management. Prof. Simchi-Levi holds a Ph.D. from Tel Aviv University. His research currently focuses on developing and implementing robust and efficient techniques for logistics and manufacturing systems. He has published widely in professional journals on both practical and theoretical aspects of logistics and supply chain management. He is also the editor-in-chief of Operations Research, the flag-ship journal of INFORMS, the Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences.

Constantine G. Vassiliadis Principal Manager, PwC, The Netherlands

Dr. Vassiliadis holds a Ph.D. from Imperial College, London in Process Systems Engineering. He has been working as a consultant on supply chain improvement programmes with companies world-wide for the past fifteen years. In parallel, he is involved in supply chain research and thought leadership initiatives with leading academic institutions.

Jaap-Willem Bijsterbosch Partner, PwC, The Netherlands

Jaap-Willem Bijsterbosch is a partner for Value Chain Transformation in the Dutch practice. He was founder of the largest European SCM consulting firm TruEconomy, which was acquired by PwC late 2011. His specialisation as management consultant includes delivering large scale transformations from strategy to execution. He is also founder of the joint thought leadership program with MIT delivering bi-annually advanced thought leadership reports on Supply Chain Management.

Erik Diks Director, PwC, The Netherlands

Erik Diks is responsible for the Dutch Supply Chain Management competence. He holds a Ph.D. from Eindhoven University of Technology. His specialisation includes supply chain strategy, supply chain improvement projects (has six-sigma black belt) and supply chain planning. He is author of multiple supply chain publications and supply chain management books (2000, 2002, 2004).

Ioannis M. Kyratzoglou

Systems Design and Management Fellow, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Mr. Ioannis M. Kyratzoglou is a Fellow at the MIT’s Sloan School of Management and the School of Engineering. He holds a Master of Science and a Mechanical Engineer’s Degree from MIT. He is currently a Principal Software Systems Engineer with The MITRE Corporation. His interests are in software engineering and data analytics.

PwC firms provide industry-focused assurance, tax and advisory services to enhance value for their clients. More than 163,000 people in 151 countries in firms across the PwC network share their thinking, experience and solutions to develop fresh perspectives and practical advice. See www.pwc.com for more information. This publication has been prepared for general guidance on matters of interest only, and does not constitute professional advice. You should not act upon the information contained in this publication without obtaining specific professional advice. No representation or warranty (express or implied) is given as to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this publication, and, to the extent permitted by law, PricewaterhouseCoopers does not accept or assume any liability, responsibility or duty of care for any consequences of you or anyone else acting, or refraining to act, in reliance on the information contained in this publication or for any decision based on it.

© 2013 PwC. All rights reserved. Not for further distribution without the permission of PwC. “PwC” refers to the network of member firms of PricewaterhouseCoopers International Limited (PwCIL), or, as the context requires, individual member firms of the PwC network. Each member firm is a separate legal entity and does not act as agent of PwCIL or any other member firm. PwCIL does not provide any services to clients. PwCIL is not responsible or liable for the acts or omissions of any of its member firms nor can it control the exercise of their professional judgment or bind them in any way. No member firm is responsible or liable for the acts or omissions of any other member firm nor can it control the exercise of another member firm’s professional judgment or bind another member firm or PwCIL in any way. ST-13-0060

Project lead

Mark Strom, US and Global Operations Leader

Prof. David Simchi-Levi, MIT

Jaap-Willem Bijsterbosch, The Netherlands

Erik Diks, The Netherlands

Constantine Vassiliadis, The Netherlands

Leading authors & researchers

Prof. David Simchi Levi, MIT

Constantine Vassiladis, PwC

Ioannis Kyratzoglou, MIT

Editorial board

George Bradt, China

Reinhard Geissbauer, Germany

Glen Goldbach, US

Brad Householder, US

Christopher Michaelson, US

Joseph Roussel, France

Project team members

Koen Cobbaert, Belgium

Ayse Morali, Belgium

Viktoria Kaminski, Germany

Roble Elmi, The Netherlands

Piet van der Plas, The Netherlands

Ferdinand Booij, The Netherlands

Marcel Prinsenberg, The Netherlands

Stefanie van de Vuurst, The Netherlands

Simon Lok, The Netherlands

Stefan Schrauf, Germany

List of contributors

Country leads

Koen Cobbaert, Belgium

Stefan Schrauf and Viktoria Kaminski, Germany

Vincent Espie, France

Roberto Crippa, Italy

Sara Cavel, Switzerland

Neil Lewis, UK

Ifigenia Hatzopoulou, Greece

Emilios Melis, Greece

Brad Householder, US

Gabriella Varas and Octavio Carranza, Mexico

Megumi Morioka, Japan

Stefan Dent, Middle East

Ulrike Kussing, South Africa

Ravi G Menon and Nitin Soundale, India

Design & marketing

Shannon Schreibman, Global Advisory Marketing

Peggy Fresenburg, Missouri Design Studio

Tracy Fulham, Online Marketing

Article 2 .pdf

Linköping Studies in Science and Technology

Supply Chain Risk Management:

Identification, Evaluation and Mitigation Techniques

Division of Production Economics Department of Management and Engineering

Linköping Studies in Science and Technology Dissertations, No. 1459

Supply Chain Risk Management:

Identification, Evaluation and Mitigation Techniques

S. Nurmaya Musa

June 2012

Division of Production Economics Department of Management and Engineering

Linköping University SE 581 83 Linköping

SWEDEN

Identification, Evaluation and Mitigation Techniques

© S. Nurmaya Musa, 2012 “Supply Chain Risk Management: Identification, Evaluation and Mitigation Techniques”

Linköping Studies in Science and Technology, Dissertations, No. 1459 ISBN : 978-91-7519-866-8 ISSN : 0345-7524 Cover picture: © David Castillo Dominici (3D Chain Breaking) http://www.freedigitalphotos.net

Printed by: LiU-Tryck, Linköping Distributed by : Linköping University Department of Management and Engineering SE 581 83 Linköping, Sweden Tel: +46 13 28 1000

i

Abstract

Supply chains have expanded rapidly over the decades, with the aim to increase productivity,

lower costs and fulfil demands in emerging markets. The increasing complexity in a supply

chain hinders visibility and consequently reduces one’s control over the process. Cases of

disruption such as the ones faced by Ericsson and Enron, have shown that a risk event

occurring at one point of the supply chain can greatly affect other members, when the

disruption is not properly controlled. Supply chain management thus faces a pressing need to

maintain the expected yields of the system in risk situations. To achieve that, we need to both

identify potential risks and evaluate their impacts, and at the same time design risk mitigation

policies to locate and relocate resources to deal with risk events.

This dissertation aims to analyse how supply chain risks could be effectively managed. This

is done firstly by positioning the research agenda in supply chain risk management (SCRM).

Then, methods for effective management of supply chain risk are identified and analysed. In

order to find these, we develop a research framework in which the supply chain system is

divided into subsystems based on the operations of make, source and deliver; as well as on

material, financial and information flows. Furthermore, research questions are raised in order

to understand the impact of risks on supply chains, to identify the performance measures for

monitoring supply chains, and to determine risk mitigation strategies for improving system

performances.

This dissertation includes a bibliometric analysis of relevant literature of SCRM published in

recent years. Based on the co-citation analysis, we identify the changing interest in SCRM,

from performance-focused individual issues in the early years to integrated system issues

with management perspective in recent years. We also identify the growing importance of

information issues in SCRM. However, there is a relative lack of research into risk mitigation

focusing on information flows in the literature.

This dissertation also develops a conceptual model for analysing supply chain risk. The

adoption of tools from the established field of reliability engineering provides a systematic

yet robust process for risk analysis in supply chains. We have found that the potential use of a

stand-alone tool of Failure Modes and Effect Analysis (FMEA) or a hybrid application of

Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) and Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP), will be most appropriate

in SCRM.

Apart from above mentioned studies, this dissertation then includes three manuscripts

respectively investigating the risk mitigation policies in SCRM. First, we suggest a dynamic

pricing policy when facing supply yield risk, such as price postponement, where price is

determined only after receiving the delivery information. This postponed pricing, can

improve the balance between supply and demand, especially when the delivery quantity is

small, demand has a low uncertainty and there is a wide range when demand is sensible to

price change. In another paper, a system dynamics model is developed to investigate the

dispersion of disruption on the supply chain operation as well as along the network. Based on

this simulation model, policies are tested to observe their influence to the performance of the

ii

supply chain. The study results support the benefit of a dual-sourcing strategy. Furthermore,

information sharing, appropriate order splitting and time to react would further improve the

supply chain performance when disruption strikes. In the last paper, we study how capacity

should be expanded when a new product is introduced into the market. The major risk here is

due to a quick capacity expansion with large investments which could be difficult to recover.

Using the Bass diffusion model to describe demand development, we study how capacity

expansion, together with sales plan could affect the economics of the system. Using sales

information for the forecast, delaying the sales and adding initial inventories, should create a

better scheme of cash flows.

This dissertation contributes in several ways to the research field of SCRM. It plots research

advancements which provide further directions of research in SCRM. In conjunction with the

conceptual model, simulations and mathematical modelling, we have also provided

suggestions for how a better and more robust supply chain could be designed and managed.

The diversified modelling approaches and risk issues should also enrich the literature and

stimulate future study in SCRM.

Keywords: supply chain risk management, risk analysis, risk control, co-citation, system

dynamics, modelling

iii

Riskhantering i Försörjningskedjor: Tekniker för

Identifiering, Värdering och Bemötande

Ibland blir man försenad till arbetet eller skolan på grund av trafikstörningar. En förälder

måste ställa in ett viktigt arbetsmöte eftersom ett barn är sjukt och kan inte få tag på någon

barnvakt. En rapport som ska vara klar vid lunchtid kanske lämnas in för sent eftersom datorn

som användes för att skriva rapporten gick sönder. Mat som beställts på resturangen blev

över huvud taget inte serverad eftersom kocken blev akut sjuk och måste åka till sjukhus.

Störningar uppstår överallt och drabbar alla på ett eller annat sätt. Ingen kommer undan. Men,

innebär det verkligen världens undergång?

Trots allt brukar man ändå kunna komma i tid till jobbet om det finns alternativa

transportmedel eller om man kan ta en annan väg. Mötet kan kanske genomföras som en

telekonferens. Data sparade på en extern hårddisk kan kanske användas på en annan dator

och du kommer i slutänden att hinna lämna in rapporten i tid. En kort promenad till en annan

restaurang i närheten kan hålla hungern borta och kanske t.o.m. rädda livet på dig, man vet

trots allt inte vad det var som gjorde att kocken på den första resturangenen behövde åka till

sjukhus! Det här är några exempel som visar hur viktig och närvarande hantering av risk är

för att tillvaron ska fungera på ett bra sätt.

Liknande händelseförlopp finns i försörjningskedjor men de får vanligtvis större

konsekvenser eftersom försörjningskedjor med tiden har blivit allt mer omfattande. Den

ökande komplexiteten i försörjningskedjor gör det svårare att följa vad som händer, vilket

minskar möjligheten att styra processen. Exempel på störningar som t.ex. de som drabbade

Ericsson och Enron har visat att en störning som drabbar ett led i en försörjningskedja kan få

stora konsekvenser för andra led när störningen inte hanteras på ett bra sätt. Ledningen av

försörjningskedjor ställs därför inför allt större utmaningar för att kunna säkerställa systemets

funktion i situationer med risk. För att uppnå det behöver vi både identifiera potentiella risker

och utvärdera deras betydelse, samtidigt som riktlinjer utformas för att bemöta risk genom att

använda resurser för hantering av riskhändelser på ett bra sätt.

Avhandlingens mål är att analysera hur risk på ett effektivt sätt kan hanteras i

försörjningskedjor. Först positioneras arbetet i förhållande till forskningen i riskhantering i

försörjningskedjor (supply chain risk management, SCRM). Därefter identifieras och

analyseras metoder för effektiv ledning av försörjningskedjor. Den här avhandlingen bidrar

på flera olika sätt till forskningsområdet kopplat till SCRM. Den visar på hur forskningen

inom SCRM har utvecklats och pekar på så sätt ut områden för vidare forskning. I samband

med konceptuell modellering, simulering och matematisk modellering har vi också undersökt

flera olika verktyg för bemötande av risk och kommit med förslag på hur en bättre och mer

robust försörjningskedja kan utformas och ledas ur ett systematiskt perspektiv. Dessa olika

modelleringsansatser och riskfrågor kan också berika litteraturen och stimulera till fortsatta

studier inom SCRM.

iv

v

Acknowledgements

“Be kind, for whenever kindness becomes part of something, it beautifies it. Whenever

it is taken from something, it leaves it tarnished.” ~ Prophet Muhammad S.A.W. as

narrated by Imam Bukhari

This work benefited immensely from the advice, criticism and encouragement of many,

which includes (but is not limited to) the followings:

An immeasurable gratitude goes to my supervisor, Professor Ou Tang, who has supported me

throughout my dissertation with his patience and great knowledge whilst continuously

encouraging me to work in my own way. I have been extremely lucky to have a supervisor

who cared so much about my work, and who responded to my queries so promptly.

My appreciation also goes to Professor Jan Olhager, for acting as my second supervisor at

the beginning of my studies.

I appreciate the opportunity to collaborate and co-author some papers with Paola Cocca, Li

Juan, and Wei Shuoguo. I am also indebted to Nils-Erik Ohlson for the industrial discussions

and experience.

The Division of Production Economics has provided the support and facilities I have needed

to produce and complete my dissertation and the Ministry of Higher Education, Malaysia

together with University of Malaya has funded my studies. Thank you!

In my daily work, I have been blessed with a friendly and cheerful group of fellow

colleagues, especially the fellow doctoral students, who have lightened up most of my dark

and cold days in Sweden! I will always cherish the fika breaks (thank you Sweden for the

great tradition!), lunch-train, mini-golf tournaments, research seminars and many more.

Outside the office, I have also been blessed with wonderful friends, who have fast becoming

my extended family. Special thanks to Kristina Karlsson and family who have ‘adopted’ me,

Saima Basit, who has given me a very warm welcome when I first arrived, and Ola

Cederborg for the many talks (and food) we shared. I am also grateful for all corridor-mates

and friends in Malaysia and all over the world for keeping me entertained and informed

despite the differences and the distance. You know who you are!

To my family, thank you for all the love and support. In particular, I would like to thank my

elder sisters Ina and Amy for constantly share the stories of the little (and the not so little)

ones that I dearly miss, my brother Amirullah who has always been my benchmark, and my

younger sister Najihah for joining my journey in Sweden (and mostly for always bearing with

all my nonsense and tantrum). This dissertation is dedicated to my parents, who have always

supported, encouraged and believed in me, in all my endeavours. Ayah, now I can give and

claim real hugs and kisses!

Last but not least, Alhamdulillah.

vi

To my mom.

Asiah Che Yah

(22 nd

March 1946 ~ 30 th

November 2008)

“I carry your heart with me (I carry it in my heart)

I am never without it

(anywhere I go you go, my dear;

and whatever is done by only me is your doing, my darling)

I fear no fate (for you are my fate, my sweet)

I want no world (for beautiful you are my world, my true)

and it's you are whatever a moon has always meant

and whatever a sun will always sing is you

here is the deepest secret nobody knows

(here is the root of the root and the bud of the bud

and the sky of the sky of a tree called life;

which grows higher than the soul can hope or mind can hide)

and this is the wonder that's keeping the stars apart

I carry your heart (I carry it in my heart)”

~ E.E. Cummings

vii

Table of Contents

Abstract i

Riskhantering i försörjningskedjor: Tekniker för identifiering, värdering och bemötande iii

Acknowledgements v

Dissertation Outline ix

PART I: SUPPLY CHAIN RISK MANAGEMENT: IDENTIFICATION,

EVALUATION AND MITIGATION TECHNIQUES 1

1. Introduction 3

1.1. Background 3

1.2. Research objectives 4

1.3. Limitations 6

2. Literature Review in Supply Chain Risk Management 7

2.1. A general framework 7

2.2. Definitions of risk 8

2.3. Supply chain risk management 10

2.4. Supply chain risk issues 12

2.5. Research methods and approaches in literature 24

3. Approaches and Methods Adopted in this Research Project 27

3.1. Co-citation analysis 28

3.2. Reliability theory 29

3.3. Dynamic pricing 31

3.4. Sourcing policy 32

3.5. Bass diffusion 33

3.6. System dynamics 34

4. Overview and Summary of Papers 39

4.1. Overview 39

4.2. Summary of the contributions 41

4.3. Future research 44

5. References 45

PART II: PAPERS COLLECTION 59

Paper 1: Identifying Risk Issues and Research Advancements in Supply Chain Risk

Management

Paper 2: Assessing Supply Chain Risk Adopting Reliability Tools

Paper 3: Dynamic Pricing in the Newsvendor Problem with Yield Risks

Paper 4: Information Flow and Mitigation Strategy in a Supply Chain under Disruption

Paper 5: Capacity Expansion Policy and its Risk in New Product Diffusion

viii

ix

Dissertation Outline

“The ink of the scholar is more holy than the blood of the martyr.” ~ Prophet

Muhammad S.A.W.

This dissertation entitled “Supply Chain Risk Management: Identification, Evaluation and

Mitigation Techniques” consists of two parts. Part I comprises an introduction and a

summary of the research. Firstly, it presents research background, objectives and limitations.

Then, a thorough literature review in Section 2 has carefully positioned the dissertation in the

field of Supply Chain Risk Management. Section 3 summarises the approaches and methods

for managing supply chain risks which are used in the dissertation. Part I is concluded with

Section 4 which discusses the linkage between Part I and Part II, and which also highlights

research gaps and potential work to be conducted in future research.

To complement this dissertation, Part II consists of a collection of papers which are related to

the issues described in Part I and which were completed during the doctoral study

programme. There are five papers and these cover the research agenda (Paper 1), risk

analysis (Papers 2 and 4) and risk control (Papers 3, 4 and 5).

Paper 1:

Tang, O. and Musa, S.N., 2011. Identifying risk issues and research advancements in supply

chain risk management. International Journal of Production Economics 133, 25-34.

An earlier version of this article was selected and presented as plenary paper in the 15th

International Symposium on Inventories Research (ISIR) in Budapest, Hungary on 22 nd

till

26 th

August, 2008.

Paper 2:

Musa, S.N., Cocca, P. and Tang, O., 2012. Assessing supply chain risk adopting reliability

tools. Working paper, Department of Management and Engineering, Linköping University.

An earlier version of this paper has appeared in the Proceeding for the International

Conference on Advances in Production Management Systems (APMS2010) which was held

in Cernobbio, Lake Como, Italy on 11 th

~ 13 th

October, 2010.

Paper 3:

Tang, O., Musa, S.N. and Li, J., 2011. Dynamic pricing in the newsvendor problem with

yield risks. The manuscript has been accepted for publication in the International Journal of

Production Economics, doi:10.1016/j.ijpe.2011.01.018.

Paper 4:

Musa, S.N., Wei, S. and Tang, O., 2012. Information flow and mitigation strategy in a supply

chain under disruption. Working paper, Department of Management and Engineering,

Linköping University.

x

An earlier version of this paper has appeared in the Proceeding for the International

Conference on Production Research (ICPR 21), held on July 31 st ~ August 4

th , 2011 in

Stuttgart, Germany.

During the ICPR21, the author was selected as one of the ten recipients of the Young

Scientist Award (YSA). From among the papers selected for the award, this paper was chosen

as Best Paper.

Paper 5:

Musa, S.N. and Tang, O., 2012. Capacity expansion policy and its risk in new product

diffusion. Working paper, Department of Management and Engineering, Linköping

University.

1

PART I:

SUPPLY CHAIN RISK MANAGEMENT:

IDENTIFICATION, EVALUATION AND

MITIGATION TECHNIQUES

2

3

1. Introduction

“Never walk away from failure. On the contrary, study it carefully and imaginatively

for its hidden assets.”~ Michael Korda

One may be late to work or school due to a transportation delay. A parent might have to

cancel an important meeting at work when her child is sick with no babysitter in sight. A

report due at noon might need to be turned in a little late if the laptop used in preparing it is

corrupted. Food ordered may not arrive when the only chef in the restaurant suddenly needs

to be rushed to the hospital. Disturbances occur everywhere and to everyone. It does not play

favourites. Yet, does this mean the end of the world?

Nonetheless, if alternative transportation is readily available, you will still be at work in-time.

The meeting could still be conducted via a teleconference. Data saved in secondary data

storage can be used in another workstation and you might still meet the deadline. A short

walk to a neighbouring restaurant would keep your hunger away, and might even save your

life, for you never know what caused the chef from the previous restaurant to the hospital

anyway! For these reasons and many more, managing risk is important to have to go on in

life.

1.1. Background

Similar stories happen in supply chains. Many industrial cases have shown different

outcomes after risk events due to diverse actions (or lack of action) taken in facing supply

chain disturbances and disruptions. One typical example is Ericsson’s crisis in 2000. Since

Ericsson used a single-sourcing policy, a fire accident in its chips’ supplier immediately

disrupted the material supply. Ericsson’s loss was estimated to reach USD 400 million for its

T28 model (Norrman and Jansson, 2004). On the other hand, Nokia which also used the same

supplier, managed to avoid further disruption impact by quickly switching to backup sources.

This eventually resulted in an increase of up to 30% market share (Sheffi, 2005).

In June 2008, Volvo Cars reported a 28% reduction in sales compared with the same period

in previous year, with the biggest loss of about 50% in its SUVs. Fredrik Arp, then CEO of

Volvo Cars stated that “the weak dollar reduces the revenue and it will further reduce the

opportunities for R&D”. Another example is the Taiwan earthquake in December 2006,

which caused a breakage in the undersea cables and slowed down the internet. One

immediate effect was a prolonged waiting time for containers in the Shanghai sea port in

China, since all claim procedures rely on information systems.

The above examples show that any material, financial or information risk can create problems

in a supply chain. In the fire accident that occurred at Ericsson’s supplier, the material flow in

Ericsson was disrupted, and eventually affected the financial flow, while in the second case,

the volatility in the exchange rate disrupted Volvo Cars’ financial flow. Finally, a natural

disaster affected the flow of information, which resulted in turn in the disruption of port

4

operations. A single risk event can easily disrupt at least one of the supply chain flows. In

most cases, the impact of disruption can be observed along the supply chain. Any hiccup

within the supply chain will cause delays and even disruption (Buzacott, 1971). Most recent

incidents, such as the Arab Spring protests, the Sendai earthquake and the Thailand floods in

2011 have shown how such disruptions can severely affect even the most stable supply chain.

These are only a few examples from the numerous disruption cases affecting supply chains in

the last decade. The increasing numbers of research studies on supply chain disruptions

resulting from economic and political instability, volatile market dynamics, natural disasters

or human actions, have shown that risk issues are becoming the new norm in supply chain

operations (Berger et al., 2004; Christopher and Lee, 2004; LaLonde, 2004; Norrman and

Jansson, 2004; Poirier et al., 2007; Quinn, 2006; Tang, 2006a).

Similarly, practitioners have also shown increasing concern about the volatility of supply

chains. In a series of analysis on predicting supply chains for 2012, Gartner Inc. has indicated

the increasing importance of supply chain executives where the number of supply chain

executives elected as or reporting directly to the CEO has increased from 30% in 2005 to

68% in 2010 (Gartner Inc., 2011). More interestingly, the same study has observed

intensified emphasis on scalable risk assessment and management. Moreover, there is

increased interest in utilizing advanced technology to better manage diverse supply chains

activities.

Despite the increasing concern for risks shown by all members in a supply chain, different

disruption impacts affecting them are observed. An individual’s recognition of a problem and

preparedness when facing it, alter the impact of disruption and maintain the continuity of the

supply chain. On the other hand, without preparation and precaution, it requires time for the

system to recover from the impact (Hendricks and Singhal, 2005; Sheffi and Rice, 2005).

From the supply chain disruption cases presented here, as well as many others available in the

literatures, the question of what actually causes the vulnerabilities in a supply chain and how

to ensure its resilience, intrigued us. Therefore, the background above provides the

motivation for exploring risk issues affecting supply chain operations, and investigating how

risk can be managed. The following subsections will highlight the research objectives and

limitations. Next, in Section 2, the literature review of supply chain risk management is

presented. Based on the existing literature, risk definitions and supply chain risk management

processes are discussed. Then, in Section 3, the approaches and methods used in this

dissertation are presented. The correct application of these approaches and methods is a

potential aid in analysing different risks and mitigating the impact of disruption in supply

chains. Finally, in Section 4, the papers accompanying this dissertation are summarised.

1.2. Research objectives

This dissertation aims to analyse how supply chain risks can be effectively managed. Firstly,

this is done by positioning the research agenda in supply chain risk management (SCRM).

Then, methods for effective management of supply chain risk are identified and analysed. In

order to do this, the supply chain system is divided into subsystems based on the supply chain

5

operations of make, source and deliver; as well as on material, financial and information

flows. We believe that analysing smaller parts of the system in terms of flows is an alternative

and comprehensive way of dealing with the complicated risk issues in supply chains.

From these subsystems, we attempt to develop a framework, as presented in Figure 1, for

further exploration. This figure shows that the continuity of supply chain operations can be

affected by various risk events. A solid risk analysis process could identify the impact of

disruption on supply chains. This could be established by monitoring supply chain

performance, for example the production or financial performances. With a proper

implementation of risk control, for instance via risk mitigation strategies, the impact of

disruption on flows could be diminished, or even avoided.

Figure 1: A supply chain research framework

Also based on this framework, we specifically develop the following research objectives and

research questions (RQ) for this dissertation.

Objective I: Identifying Supply Chain Risk Management Agenda

To position this dissertation in the field of SCRM, it is important to identify the current

agenda in this field. The exploration of various definitions, for both terminology and

processes involved in this area, helps to clarify our research scope. The discovery of gaps

between practitioners and researchers should further identify the research opportunities in this

field. To achieve this objective, we hereby raise two research questions as follows:

RQ1: What risk issues should be considered in supply chain operations?

RQ2: How does a risk event affects supply chain operations?

6

Objective II: Identification of Effective Management of Supply Chain Risk

The second research objective focuses on finding how supply chain risk can be effectively

managed. To achieve this objective, an investigation of selected approaches and methods will

be conducted to analyse their competency and robustness in sustaining supply chain

operations. Using the selected mitigation policies, such studies will investigate the

consequence of supply chains under the influence of risks; both of mismatch risk and

disruptive operational risk.

We identify two main processes of SCRM, namely risk analysis and risk control. Hence, to

achieve the above objective, we raised three research questions. RQ3 focuses on risk analysis

and RQ4 and RQ5 on risk control. The research questions are as follows:

RQ3: How can we analyse supply chain performance from a risk management viewpoint?

RQ4: What kind of mitigation policies should be used for managing risk in supply chains?

RQ5: What modelling techniques and approaches are possible in this research area?

1.3. Limitations

Many articles have been published about SCRM, but our literature search is limited to

selected frequently cited journals and focuses on one database. These journals have been

categorised by us into business review journals, operations management journals, and

management science or operations research type of journals, while the database is limited to

Web of Science. The list of journals falling into these categories is referred to Table 1 in

Tang and Musa (2011). Although only selected journals and one database have been used, the

selections based on high-cited journals provide sufficient data and also help to eliminate

noise (Pilkington and Meredith, 2009).

There are many approaches and policies have been introduced and implemented in the

industries to ensure the robustness of complex supply chain. To explore all of them would be

an extensive task and require a lot more resources. Hence, in modelling the supply chain,

only selected mitigation policies are investigated. However, the selected policies are

sufficient to give the essence of how supply chains are affected in certain disruptive events.

The selection of research approaches and mitigation policies is also based on the results

obtained from Research Objective I.

This dissertation includes both conceptual and quantitative models. Data used in these

analyses are mainly second-hand. It is difficult to validate the models with real cases, for data

relating to risk issues is information which is confidential to the industry. Even when we were

given permission to investigate risk issues at a company for this research study, the

discussion is classified. Presenting risk issues affecting the company is like revealing the

vulnerabilities of the company as well as the supply chain.

7

2. Literature Review in Supply Chain Risk Management

“Everyone sees the unseen in proportion to the clarity of his heart, and that depends

upon how much he has polished it. Whoever has polished it more sees more – more

unseen forms become manifest to him” ~ Jalal ad-Din Rumi

In this section, we provide an introduction to supply chain risk management. By presenting

the relevant definitions and summarizing the important literature, we describe the background

to the field of this study.

2.1. A general framework

Earlier supply chain management focused on the material flows of the network and

broadened to include other flows, such as financial and information flows. We believe that a

risk event can create disruption in either one or a combination of these flows. Supply chain

risk could be mitigated if we have a detailed investigation and description of the root causes

of disruption from the aspect of these flows.

Similar ideas have been presented by Chopra and Sodhi (2004), Johnson (2001) and Spekman

and Davis (2004), who all identify the dimension of risk in the form of supply chain flows.

Spekman and Davis (2004) however go further, and concentrate on information sharing and

network relationships and add the security of internal information systems, relationships

forged among supply chain partners and corporate social responsibility to their risk

dimensions. Arlbjörn and Halldorsson (2002) share this idea of viewing risk on the flows of

material and information, but view the third perspective in terms of flow of services.

One important change in managing supply chain is the emphasis on integrating activities into

key supply chain processes instead of looking at individual functions. In the SCRM literature

too, we note that managerial aspects may not be the same for the inbound and outbound sides.

For instance, when discussing the risk in terms of supplier selection, a major concern is to

sustain the flow of raw material, whereas on the demand side, financial risk, such as a

customer’s possibility of bankruptcy, may become important.

However, there is no clear evidence of interlinking flows and of integrating activities in

previous studies. Therefore, in this study, we identify the flows in the form of material,

financial and information flows. In addition, we analyse the system as a process model of

source (supply), make (production) and deliver (demand). The foundation of this process

model is the Supply Chain Operations Reference (SCOR) model, for it has been widely used

among supply chain practitioners as well as researchers (Supply Chain Council, 2008). For

any supply chain irrespective of its complexity, these aspects, as well as the three flows,

provide a framework to describe the system. Risk issues will also be discussed based on these

perspectives.

8

From a perspective of flows, we define the material flow as physical movement of products

from suppliers to customers. Letters of credit, timely payment of bills, bankruptcy, payment

schedules, credit terms and suppliers’ contracts fall under the category of financial flows.

Information flow is used to keep all supply chain elements updated and hence provides

resources for decision making in the supply chain. Examples of information flow are order

status, order delivery and inventory status, among others.

Our vision of SCRM is illustrated in a framework presented in Section 1 (refer to Figure 1).

As mentioned above, supply chain operations are described as both flows and processes.

Decision variables such as design and control policies are determined and improved on the

basis of analysing performance measures just as in any supply chain. The only difference to

conventional supply chain management is that we also need to define how the external risk

events may influence supply chain operations.

2.2. Definitions of risk

In reviewing risk management literature, the first difficult question is, what is supply chain

risk? It is particularly difficult to distinguish risk and uncertainty in supply chain operations

management. In this section we therefore present relevant definitions.

Risk used to be simply linked to unexpected events. Christopher and Lee (2004) view risk as

the “effect of external events such as wars, strikes or terrorist attacks and impact of changes

in business strategy”. Kleindorfer and Saad (2005) follow the same line and relate risk to i)

operational contingencies; ii) natural hazards, earthquakes, hurricanes and storms; and iii)

terrorism and political instability. Quinn (2006) also refers the natural and man-made

disasters, to “catastrophic events” which are the source of risk.

Tang (2006a) defines risk as an operational as well as a disruption risk, but he however does

not distinguish between them. Looking at various perspectives of risk, Spekman and Davis

(2004) claim that risk definition can either be objective or subjective. Risk which relies on

probability alone, such as coin flipping or dice throwing, is considered to be objective.

However, when the consequences of risk need to be assessed along with its expectation of

occurrence, it is categorised as subjective risk.

Chopra and Sodhi (2004) present nine risk categories, which include disruptions, delays,

systems, forecast, intellectual property, procurement, receivables, inventory and capacity.

They also discuss the impact of implementing a single or combination of mitigation strategies

towards supply chain flows. There is no simple solution to managing supply chain risk. The

implementation of one strategy in mitigating a particular risk may cause the supply chain to

face another risk. Therefore it is important for all members of the supply chain to have a

common understanding of supply chain risk. Chopra and Sodhi (2004) propose the use of

‘stress testing’. Since each supply chain is unique, the risk mitigation strategies should be

tailored accordingly to suit the entire supply chain. Even though they are not explicitly

distinguished, the risk categories discussed by Chopra and Sodhi (2004) are established on

the basis of supply chain flows. However, a clear definition of the fundamentals of risk seems

to be lacking. In some of the risk categories, such as the forecast risk, where the authors

9

highlight the issues of the bullwhip effect, one may argue whether this could be considered as

operational uncertainty and could be managed with correctly operating supply chain.

We note that in operations management literature, the terms ‘uncertainty’ and ‘risk’ have

been used interchangeably. Supply risk usually refers to the occurrence of uncertainties that

may halt the inward flow of the supply chain (Harland et al., 2003; Tang, 2006a; Zsidisin,

2003). Zsidisin (2003) classifies supply risk as “the probability of an incident associated with

inbound supply from individual supplier failures or the supply market occurring, in which it

outcomes result in the inability of the purchasing firm to meet customer demand or cause

threats to customer life and safety”. On the demand side, even more cases of referring

demand risk to uncertainties, for example, the trend of rapid changes of customer demand and

the short life cycle of product resulting in fluctuated demand can be noticed. Johnson (2001)

defines risk in terms of operational deviations, such as “unpredictable demand, short product

life, rapid product turnover and seasonal changes”. In our opinion, these should be considered

to be the drivers for demand fluctuation.

Apart from supply and demand, uncertainty can take other forms, for instance technology

(Chen and Paulraj, 2004). There also exist different viewpoints on uncertainty. Instead of

looking at demand uncertainty as a fluctuation of demand volume, Lee (2002) believes that

demand uncertainty should be “the predictability of the demand”. A comparison of risk and

uncertainty is made by Khan and Burnes (2007). They conclude that risk is measurable and

manageable. On the other hand, however, uncertainty may not be measurable. Furthermore,

risk emerges as measurable “in the sense that estimation can be made of the probabilities of

the outcome”. These definitions follow the tradition in the research field of decision analysis.

Due to the fact that there is no clear guideline in defining risk, Khan and Burnes (2007)

suggest an in-depth study to define supply chain risk. Furthermore, with the expansion of

global supply chain, the orthodox definition of supply chain risk needs urgent revision

(Barry, 2004; Quinn, 2006).

In another set of literature, risk is viewed as the negative outcome after the impact of events.

Christopher and Lee (2004) look at it broadly as any negative consequence resulting from any

external event, whereas Paulson (2005) specifically identifies risk as “an event with negative

economic consequences”. However, some authors view risk as the variance of outcome, no

matter whether it affects the organisation positively or negatively (Spekman and Davis, 2004;

Crone, 2006).

Recent studies of supply chain risk discuss the elasticity of supply chain performance, which

Sheffi (2005) calls Supply Chain Resilient. With the aim of avoiding a risk event, minimizing

the effect as well as quickly returning to business, Sheffi defines risk as events with “high-

impact/low-probability”. Another significant development in this research is the introduction

of supply chain preparedness to risk events. Sheffi illustrates eight phases of disruption

profile. What distinguishes one disruption case from another is the severity and duration of

the disruption and this depends on the level of preparedness.

10

In our opinion, a better definition of supply chain risk should refer to i) probable events

which may occur suddenly, and ii) these events bring substantial negative consequences to

the system. Based on this definition, in this research we focus our study on two types of risk:

supply and demand mismatch, and unforeseen disruptive risk. In this dissertation which

discusses ways to manage supply chains, we tackle the individual risk, as well as the

combination of supply and demand risks as suggested by Johnson (2001).

2.3. Supply chain risk management

Kouvelis et al. (2006) view SCRM in terms of managing the uncertainty of demand, supply

and costs. Carter and Rogers (2008) define SCRM as “the ability of a firm to understand and

manage its economic, environmental, and social risks in the supply chain” which could be

materialised by the adoption of contingency planning and having a resilient and agile supply

chains.

There are also other notations related to risk management in supply chains. Rice and Caniato

(2003) define supply chain resilience as the ability of an organisation “to react to an

unexpected disruption and maintain operations after the event”. Resilience can be achieved

by employing high flexibility and adequate redundancy in the organisation. A more content-

oriented definition of resilience as “the ability of a system to return to its original state or

move to a new, more desirable state after being disturbed” is provided by Christopher and

Peck (2004). To Peck (2006), resilience brings the concept of an organisation’s “ability to

absorb or mitigate the impact of the disturbance”.

Contingency planning, which is interchangeably referred to as business continuity planning,

is an approach to prepare for the possibility of future emergency or disruption. This approach

involves continuous supplier assessment, development and maintenance of alternative

capacities, mirrored and backup information systems and specific emergency response plans

(Rice and Caniato, 2003).

In a recent study, Sodhi et al. (2012) claim that there are three gaps in SCRM. Similar to the

study presented by Tang and Musa (2011), they identify that there is no clear definition of

SCRM definitions, a lack in research on mitigating supply chain risk and a clear deficiency of

empirical studies in this area.

In this dissertation, we follow the definition of SCRM as provided by Tang (2006a), in which

SCRM is viewed as “the management of supply chain risk through coordination or

collaboration among the supply chain partners so as to ensure profitability and continuity”.

He separates the mitigation approaches into supply, demand, product and information

management.

After a fire incident affected their operations, Ericsson revised their SCRM which now

consists of a feedback-loop of risk identification, risk assessment, risk treatment and risk

monitoring (Norrman and Jansson, 2004). In addition, their new approach also includes

incident handling and contingency planning in parallel to the basic loop. Neiger et al. (2009)

categorise SCRM into the process of risk identification, risk assessment, risk analysis and

11

risk treatment. Knemeyer et al. (2009) identify Risk Management as a process of risk analysis

subsequently followed by risk perception. The elements of risk identification and risk

estimation fall into the process of risk analysis.

Especially in the case of a global supply chain, Manuj and Menzer (2008) believe that

managing risk should at least comprise the processes of identification, evaluation and

mitigation. Interestingly, they include time and the frequency of risk along with the common

risk dimensions, probability and impact. Risk dimension of time is viewed as the speed of

event, the speed of losses and the time for detection of the events. This time perspective

follows the same ideas as in Sheffi and Rice (2005), where the authors describe the disruption

profile by associating supply chain performance with time. Both studies stress the

significance of time to risk impact.

Figure 2: SCRM process

In Figure 2 we present our SCRM process which is constituted of two main elements; supply

chain risk analysis and supply chain risk control, henceforth referred to risk analysis and risk

control respectively. Note that the term risk assessment is also interchangeably used in

referring to risk analysis. The first process covers the identification, estimation and evaluation

of risk. Proper implementation of all stages in this process will result in the recognition of

potential risk events affecting supply chain. However, not all risk events fall under the

category of disruption risk events, and therefore the potential impact caused by an individual

risk event needs to be carefully estimated and evaluated according to the individual supply

chain operation’s definition. Paper 2 which is included in this dissertation, presents a further

discussion of the risk analysis stage and suggests the adoption of Reliability Engineering

approaches to provide a more structured and robust analysis.

With the completion of the risk analysis process, the supply chain will have a list of potential

risk events and an evaluation of how risks could impact it. In order to control a supply chain,

we then need to decide how to act upon the risks when the need arises. Various mitigation

strategies can be implemented to tackle different types of risk. It is vital to evaluate and

identify which mitigation strategy should be deployed and manipulated. In order to ensure the

12

continuity of all flows in a supply chain and the adaptability of mi

chain should be closely monitored and continuously reviewed.

different strategies for risk mitigation

2.4. Supply chain risk issues

In subsection 2.2 we presented risk definitions i

supply chain. In this subsection, we present important and common risk issues in supply

chain operations. The discussion will be based on the three flows that connect the

chain operations; material flow,

Figure 3).

Figure 3:

continuity of all flows in a supply chain and the adaptability of mitigation processes,

chain should be closely monitored and continuously reviewed. Papers 3, 4 and

for risk mitigation and control.

In subsection 2.2 we presented risk definitions in general as well as from the perspectives of

supply chain. In this subsection, we present important and common risk issues in supply

chain operations. The discussion will be based on the three flows that connect the

, financial flow and information flow (refer to Figure 1 and

Figure 3: Risk issues in supply chain

tigation processes, a supply

and 5, present

n general as well as from the perspectives of

supply chain. In this subsection, we present important and common risk issues in supply

chain operations. The discussion will be based on the three flows that connect the supply

(refer to Figure 1 and

13

In the following, we will first present the material flow risk. We categorise perspectives of

risk events in material flow by the supply chain operations; source, make and deliver. Apart

from these, we also add the supply chain scope to include essential issues such as the

logistics, political and cultural issues (Figure 3).

Then we discuss supply chain risk from the view points of financial flow and information

flow. We acknowledge that it is impossible not to link one individual issue to others. The

flows are related and interconnected, therefore cases of one flow disruption obstructing the

others are common. In fact, disruption creates a domino effect, as stated by Peck et al. (2003)

“given the interdependencies, it may be the business that is at risk from its supply chain or the

supply chain that is at risk from a business”. Therefore, when discussing the financial and

information flows, we present the risk events affecting the flows in general to avoid the need

in discussing the issues presented earlier.

2.4.1. Material flow risk

Material flow involves the physical movement within and between supply chain elements.

These include the transportation of goods, delivery movement, storage and inventories. In the

event of risk, the material flow will be disrupted due to transportation incapability, halted

manufacturing, lack of capacity, inability to access inventories and so on.

Source

Sourcing involves the acquisition of physical products or services. This segment will cover:

single sourcing risk, sourcing flexibility risk, supplier selection/outsourcing, supply product

monitoring/quality, and supply capacity (Figure 3).

Single sourcing risk: A minor fire accident in Philips’ clean room in March 2000 caused

Ericsson a major loss of USD400 million (Norrman and Jansson, 2004). Philips Electronics

N.V. is a Dutch firm in Albuquerque, New Mexico, USA that supplies 40% of their

production to Ericsson and Nokia (Peck et al., 2003). Ericsson’s failure, however, was not

because of not being responsive, but was mainly due to their single sourcing strategy. Unlike

Nokia, who quickly turned to alternative suppliers in the USA and Japan, Ericsson had no

substitute supplier (Peck et al., 2003). The Albuquerque accident provided Ericsson with a

wakeup call to develop and implement a better SCRM approach (Norrman and Jansson,

2004). Ericsson has now developed a risk management process that has a feedback-loop. The

process involves risk identification, risk assessment, risk treatment, risk monitoring, incident

handling and contingency planning and it runs by using a SCRM matrix to ensure that

responsibility is spread fairly (Norrman and Jansson, 2004).

While discussing the firm’s motivation and actions with regards to environment-related

supplier initiatives, Cousins et al. (2004) mention two potential exposures: technological and

strategic. Technological exposure is caused by over-reliance on a single or limited source for

a product, process or technology, whereas strategic exposure is due to high dependencies on a

sole supplier. Further, Cousins et al. (2004) perceive financial, performance, physical, social,

psychological and time loss, to be due to the risks of a single supplier “that may impact upon

14

the environment in a harmful way and that may fall foul of environmental legislation,

regulation or public opinion”.

Sourcing flexibility risk: Flexible supplier sourcing provides firms alternatives in the case of

capacity constraint or hazardous disruption. Despite the benefit in safeguarding and

preventing operations from coming to a halt, Kamrad and Siddique (2004) and LaLonde

(2000) note that switching suppliers involves hidden costs. The cost of switching is related to

relationship establishment among supply chain partners. While LaLonde (2000) views the

relationship risk from the perspective of the producer, Kamrad and Siddique (2004) analyse

the supply contracts from the perspective of the supplier’s reaction to sourcing flexibility. A

supply contract usually focuses on the profit maximization of the producer, ignoring the

reactions of the supplier in protecting their profit, for example, suppliers face ‘quantity risk’

when order levels change due to exchange rate fluctuations. Therefore, Kamrad and Siddique

(2004) focus on the dual optimization problems for both the suppliers and the producer, and

posit that for profit sharing, a supply chain should include supplier-switching options, order-

quantity flexibility, and reaction options.

Supplier selection/outsourcing: To facilitate focusing core competencies, outsourcing has

rapidly become a trend. However, challenges also come with opportunities. While

outsourcing in some way lowers manufacturing costs and provides better responsiveness to

many situations, on the other hand, it increases the variety of choices and concerns during the

supplier selection process. Hence selecting the right supplier has become more difficult. The

supplier selection process requires many parameters to be considered. At the very least,

supplier reliability, country risk, transport reliability and supplier's suppliers’ reliability

should be accounted for during the selection process (Levary, 2007). This has urged Levary

(2007), Kremic et al. (2006), Kirkwood et al. (2005) and Cigolini and Rossi (2006) to

develop various methods, models and systems.

When most companies started to outsource globally, the move was mainly cost-driven.

However, it did not take long before the unseen cost of outsourcing was unveiled (Crone,

2006; Fitzgerald, 2005; Kremic et al., 2006; Murphy, 2007; Stalk, 2006). Various taxes,

fluctuating currency exchange rates, import/export fees, the costs of longer transportations,

and suppliers’ audit costs are among the subjects of discussion.

Crone (2006) acknowledges the increasing problems of global supply chains especially on the

logistics. He claims that the cost risks on the supply side could be the result of “inputs to

transportation” (i.e. fuel) and “forced mode shifting”. In addition to the present major concern

of rising fuel prices, changing the mode of transportation to satisfy customer demand in a

timely manner would substantially increase the cost of outsourcing. Crone suggests using

transportation more effectively and re-examining sourcing strategy in order to “increase

stocking locations in order to be closer to the point of manufacture and/or use inventory to

reduce the need for product movement”. Kremic et al. (2006) identify the trends and benefits

of outsourcing and present its potential risks. They list additional indirect and social costs,

which respectively include contract monitoring/oversight, contract generation/procurement,

intangibles, and transition costs, and costs due to different culture and living styles. In

15

addition, they warn that the country’s dynamic evolvement must be taken into account, where

low-cost countries may not keep offering low-cost services and products when they

experience advances in development, achievement and demand (Fitzgerald, 2005).

Supply product monitoring/quality: Sourcing has limited producer’s control over the process

and decisions, especially if the supply network is extended. Lack of control usually results in

jeopardizing quality, especially when sourcing from low-cost countries (Murphy, 2007;

Fitzgerald, 2005). Murphy (2007) illustrates quality risk with the product safety and

contamination cases in China. Fitzgerald (2005) links poor quality to the incapability of the

supplier to produce according to the standard demanded. This lack of capability due to

limited skills and technology can be overcome when time and resources are invested in

developing the required standard.

Supply capacity: Taking the toy industry as the case, Johnson (2001) explores supply chain

risk and concludes that capacity limitation together with currency fluctuations are the major

risks for major supply disruptions. In order to reduce capacity constraints, the toy industry

outsources in two ways. First, outsourcing is used as a strategic solution which provides

companies the opportunity to focus on their core competencies. Secondly, outsourcing is the

answer to overcoming demand overflow. In both cases, manufacturers enhance the capability

of handling the volatility of demand due to seasonality, new product introduction and rapid

changes of customer demand. Nevertheless, outsourcing may also create the risk of lost

control in manufacturing fashion products with a short life cycle, as claimed by Johnson

(2001). Zsidisin and Smith (2005) believe that the risk of supplier capacity constraints can be

mitigated by implementing early supplier involvement (ESI). With this approach, the

supplier’s capacity and production flexibility be known beforehand, leading to a better

supplier selection. . This implementation also benefits the suppliers in that they can improve

planning with better forecast information.

Make

The major issues in this segment involve: product and process design risk, production

capacity risk, and operational disruption (Figure 3).

Product and process design risk: As mentioned before, the risk of inability to adapt to

product and process changes has urged the industry to involve suppliers at an early stage.

Motivated by “if you fail to plan, you plan to fail”, many have applied the principle of

concurrent engineering with suppliers involved in new product development. While Zsidisin

and Smith (2005) study this early involvement at the new product development stage,

Bowersox (1999) discusses this issue for product launch activity. Due to the large sum of

capital spent in positioning products on the market, it is important to involve suppliers and

customers early in order to obtain a robust design for product and process. With the computer

and apparel industries as examples, studies have illustrated that integrating supply chain

members in new product development will result among other things in aligned supply and

demand. Suppliers can improve the decisions about their capacity (Bowersox, 1999;

Handfield et al., 1999; Zsidisin and Smith, 2005).

16

While others examine product or process design separately, Peck (2005) attempts to integrate

both using value stream design. An efficient and seamless logistics pipeline would be useful,

but deceptively seductive. Using an extensive case study in the U.K., she reports that the

“adoption of lean and agile practises has made them increasingly reliant on the existence of a

reliable, secure and efficient communication, transport and distribution infrastructure”. Based

on a case study of Marks and Spencer, Khan et al. (2008) also investigate product and process

design and propose a framework for design-led supply chain risk management. Khan et al.

conclude that a well designed product and process flow will help an organisation to mitigate

risks which arise with production and suppliers.

Production capacity risk: In manufacturing, identifying resource capacity is crucial. One

important resource is technological capacity and skills. Handfield et al. (1999) claim that

technological risk could be mitigated with early supplier involvement. However, it is

necessary to acknowledge that this involves both advantages and disadvantages. If there is

“greater experience or expertise with the technology, (they) may have better information

about where the technology can be successfully applied”. With experience, some may absorb

the risk well, so it won’t flow to the rest of the supply chain. On the other hand, early supplier

involvement may result in a more difficult supplier selection process, because it is necessary

to ensure that the suppliers will develop with the technology evolvement.

Operational disruption: Kleindorfer and Saad (2005) study the variations of supply chain

design and relate them to supply chain disruption. They categorise operational disruptions

into three main sources; operational contingencies, natural disasters and political instability.

Focusing on these disruption risks and vulnerabilities, they develop a framework for

mitigating disruption risk in a cost-effective manner. This framework (SAM-SAC) includes

assessment and mitigation of risk, action strategies and conditions for implementation. In

total, ten principles should be understood and applied collectively for SAM-SAC framework.

Deliver

Demand uncertainties are still the major problem discussed in the supply chain (Abernathy et

al., 2000; Agrell et al., 2004; Ding et al., 2007; Fang and Whinston, 2007; Johnson, 2001; Li

et al., 2001; Sodhi, 2005; Yu, 1997; Zhang, 2006). The major issues are: demand volatility /

seasonality and balance of unmet demand and excess inventory (Figure 3).

Demand volatility / Seasonality: Johnson (2001) summarises the demand side risk as

“seasonality, volatility of fads, new product adoptions, and short product life”. To mitigate

demand risk, the toy industry can implement licenses, increase the number of channels and

increase product varieties. A successful licensing of Star Wars: Episode 1 led to high demand

for toys during a low demand period, and resulted in increased net earnings (Johnson, 2001).

Using multiple channels and placing products closer to customers at checkouts, cinemas,

restaurants and gas stations can neutralise demand levels and reduce the seasonality of a

product. Variation strategy can be realised for instance in rolling mix, when a new product is

introduced in small time intervals. The aim of the rolling mix is to produce collector’s items

with high variety and planned shortages, so that it will eventually create demand from

collectors. This has been successfully introduced by Mattel in their Hot Wheels range

17

(Johnson, 2001). Taking a similar industry as a case, Wong and Hvolby (2007) relate both

seasonality and volatility to production responsiveness and coordination, and further indicate

the importance of having quick response, accurate response and coordination.

Balance of unmet demand and excess inventory: Inventories allow manufacturers to be more

responsive to demand. However, an inaccurate demand forecast may result in excessive

inventories, which subsequently lead to capital tied up. Yu (1997) develops robust economic

order quantity (EOQ) models with significant uncertainties. The aim is to find an inventory

policy that performs well under different scenarios indicated by different outcomes of the

demand rate, order cost and holding cost rate. Yu proposes robustness criteria for

performance measure, which is minimizing the maximum of total inventory costs and

percentage deviation from optimality.

Another inventory risk is obsolescence, which is associated with rapid technology

evolvement and changes of customer demand. One famous case of inventory write-off is

Cisco’s $2.5 billion misread demand (Narayanan and Raman, 2004). Abernathy et al. (2000)

suggest differentiating the stock-keeping unit (SKU) within a production line when dealing

with risk associating to inventory. They support their argument with four different tests: i).

keeping stocks for major customer group, ii). having lower inventories, iii). having a balance

between the risk of stockout and inventories, and iv). differentiating the SKU where each

SKU is assigned with individual policy. Using simulation, they reinforce that by

differentiating SKU, manufacturers not only ease the risk of obsolete inventories, but also

secure higher profits.

Sodhi (2005) explores the risk of unmet demand and the point of having excess inventories in

tactical supply chain planning. He proposes “demand-at-risk” to quantify unmet demand and

“inventory-at-risk” to measure excess inventories. He also introduces deterministic and

stochastic linear programming models for capacity planning and reallocation.

Supply chain scope

In the above subsections, we focus on elements of the supply chain operations. Here we

describe issues associated from supply chain scopes: logistics, price volatility of commodity

and alternative energy, environment degradation and awareness, political risk, culture and

ethics, and supply chain partners’ relationships (Figure 3).

Logistics: The interconnection between nodes in a supply chain requires a well-designed

logistics to allow smooth operations. The extended network has an increased number of

logistics elements, such as transportation. Risks relating to transportation include rising fuel

costs, labour shortage, service reliability reduction, capacity constraint and port congestion

(Hauser, 2003; LaLonde, 2004, 2005). When logistics activities need to cross international

borders, custom delays (Hauser, 2003) and long queues from tighter security (LaLonde,

2005) are also common phenomena.

Price volatility of commodity/alternative energy: Tohamy (2008) reports an industrial survey

which claims that high price and instable commodity are the main issues in supply chain risk.

18

Such price hikes, especially those directly linked to logistics, have increased immediately the

cost of operating an extended supply chain.

Cudahy et al. (2008) realise that to become competitive in global operations, a company has

to be adaptable and responsive to changes. However, they also claim that “unfortunately, the

ability to predict and willingness to manage supply chain risk has not grown at the same pace

as supply chain extension”. According to Tohamy (2008), in mitigating commodity volatility

risk, manufacturers have to move away from the traditional supply chain management tools

to managing their supply chain by “explicitly accounting for risk and making decision based

on the potential costs and value that each risk introduces”. The expected financial impact and

the opportunity costs associated with each decision, must be considered.

Environment degradation and awareness: There is an increased public awareness of

environmental degradation, especially in the low-cost sourcing countries as China. Water

scarcity, earthquakes and thunderstorms have resulted in lost production capacity and halted

supply chain operations for months (Economy and Lieberthal, 2007). In the same study, the

authors categorise the environmental risks into four areas: water, energy, soil erosion and air

pollution. To continue sourcing in China, foreign companies are recommended to be well

aware of the risk associated with environmental degradation. Foreign companies should also

be proactive in implementing environmental protection efforts by introducing programmes to

build facilities and develop technologies that China requires for environmental protection.

Also many leading companies such as Hawlett Packard and Mattel, have required their

suppliers to comply with their standards on global corporate environment, operations and

quality.

Political risk: Many studies, such as that by Cudahy et al. (2008) view political risk from the

perspective of the sourcing country’s political instability, whereas Stalk (2006) has a different

viewpoint on political risk. He believes that the outsourcing risk to China has little to do with

the politics of import restriction, but that the main concerns now are political and

environmental barriers to port expansion. Meanwhile, Checa et al. (2003) emphasise the risk

associated with administration transition in a government. From the era of Bush Sr. to Bush

Jr., the US international policy has shifted from economic concern to broad security

protection. This has forced radical changes to our perceptions of which countries are and are

not safe for business. With the new order, more effort is required to evaluate political status

and assess the links between the political, economic, and financial factors of risk prior to

business venture.

Culture and ethics: Reputation damage due to unethical misconduct puts a big hole in a

company’s pocket. In February 2005, Wal-Mart was convicted guilty of using child labour

and of allowing them to use hazardous equipment. Even though they were fined a small

penalty by the U.S. Labor Department (USD135,540), the cost of damaged reputation is

immeasurable (Los Angeles Times, 2005). With manufacturing ventures in multiple

countries, it is necessary to be prepared for the risk of cultural difference and different ethical

values. There is distinctly different work culture and ethics between developed and

developing countries. Something which might be extremely unethical in developed countries,

19

might not be an issue for developing countries. Underage labour is considered as a normal

means for survival in Bangladesh, India and China, but it is an unacceptable to the ethics of

many other countries.

Supply chain partners’ relationships: The Enron Scandal that was first revealed in October

2001 not only caused Enron to file for its bankruptcy, but also severely affected their

auditors, Arthur Andersen LLP, which was then alongside PricewaterhouseCooper and Ernst

& Young, one of the biggest consulting firms. It was probably the biggest breach of trust and

proved that trust is the bedrock of a supply chain relationship (LaLonde, 2002). Securing

relationships with good contracts among supply chain partners can avoid misaligned

incentives which can cause hidden action and lead to profit loss (Narayanan and Raman,

2004). A secured relationship can be built by adopting monetary incentives especially when

there is limited insight into the other’s action, limited information or knowledge of the other

partners. Using the relationships between Whirlpool and Sears as an example, they argue that

a supply chain works well if its companies' incentives are aligned, i.e. if the risks, costs, and

rewards of doing business are distributed fairly across the network. Better contracts,

information sharing systems and trusting partners can improve supply chain partnership

(Reichheld and Schefter, 2000; Faisal et al., 2006).

2.4.2. Financial flow risk

Also known as cash flow, financial flow represents the received and spent cash streams.

Disruption in financial flow involves the inability to settle payments and improper

investment. In this part, we will discuss issues as illustrated in Figure 3 covering exchange

rate risk, price and cost risk, the financial strength of supply chain partners, and financial

handling/practise.

Exchange rate risk: A study of global sourcing strategies, in particular the impact of flexible

sourcing under the influent of uncertain exchange rates, is presented by Kouvelis (1999). He

proposes a framework to select suppliers and determine the quantity required from each

supplier in the presence of exchange rate uncertainty. He analyses sourcing strategies from

two approaches; first based on constant switchover cost and the second on the basis of time

and quantity flexibility. Time flexibility, quantity flexibility and risk sharing contracts are

considered in selecting suppliers and determining order quantity. Kouvelis (1999) claims that

in most cases, firm tends to continue sourcing from an expensive supplier due to the trade-off

of “hysteresis band”.

Other studies on the exchange rate and its influence on financial flow can be found in Carr

(1999), Goh et al. (2007) and Li et al. (2001), among many others. Li et al. (2001) discuss the

exchange rate risk and propose when to switch suppliers or facilities on the basis of the

fluctuation of the exchange rate. Goh et al. (2007) propose a stochastic model to maximise a

company’s global after-tax profit, which influences the financial flow. This is achieved by

acknowledging market demand uncertainties, exchange rates, tax rates and tariffs. While

many study the risk of exchange fluctuation, Carr (1999) discusses the opportunities of a

single currency. The transition from domestic currencies to the single Euro currency has

removed the worries of currency risks from among the European Union’s new challenges.

20

However, this transition has above all exposed the challenges of dealing with multiple

cultures and languages.

Price and cost risk: This risk may be associated with the exchange rate as indicated

previously. However, price and cost may also change due to various manufacturing

strategies. Papadakis (2006) studies the supply disruption effect on financial flows with

regard to the make-to-order and make-to-stock systems. She investigates the performance of

the personal computer industry during the Taiwan 1999 earthquake, and concludes that

component prices increased in the pull-type supply chains. van Putten and MacMillan (2004)

also explore the risk issue of cost and price. They discuss the inaccurate evaluation of cash

flows if managers tend to use real options and discounted cash flow (DCF) approaches

separately; real options tend to overestimate while DCF is more likely to underestimate the

value of uncertain projects.

Financial strength of supply chain partners: Hendricks and Singhal (2005) report the

vulnerability of financial flow and the long term effects associated with supply chain

disruptions. Their findings indicate that the affected firm’s stock price could be negatively

influenced before the disruption announcement is made, whereas during the post-

announcement period, the firm’s stock price may have positive or negative development

depending on their corrective actions. Many cases have shown that the vulnerability of the

financial strength of a supply chain member may easily affect the entire supply chain (Peck et

al., 2003; Tang, 2006b). For instance, the Asian financial crisis of 1997 caused many

manufacturing companies to operate in debt, or to declare bankruptcy (Hartley-Urquhart,

2006). The consequences spread to the entire supply chain. Their suppliers suffer from

unsettled raw material flow and costs while their customers endure market loss due to

unsatisfied order fulfilment.

Financial handling and practise: Hartley-Urquhart (2006) and Kerr (2006) discuss the risk

arising from the way in which financial flows are managed and handled. Associated with

global sourcing and outsourcing is also the increasing velocity and quantity of payments. The

adoption of supply chain financing includes early-payment programmes, inventory-

ownership solutions and consignment financing. The lack of control and visibility of the

procure-to-pay process further led Saks Inc. to an alleged illegal collection of excess vendor

markdown and suffer a total market capitalization drop by 20 percent. Further concerns raised

are the bank-clearing system, commercial laws and cross-border security measures. Extended

supply chains complicate financial flows. However, there is limited research in this area, as

pointed out by Hartley-Urquhart (2006), who believes that despite the pressing needs,

researchers tend to avoid this area due to highly integrated knowledge base required.

2.4.3. Information flow risk

Value adding activities in a supply chain are often triggered by information flows such as

demand information, inventory status and order fulfilment. Product and process design

changes and capacity status are other examples of information flows. Information flow may

also be seen as the bonding agent between material flow and the financial flow, for example,

when the physical part is delivered, the recipient will be informed of the delivery in terms of

21

delivery order and how much payment is due in the form of invoice to sender. This

information will trigger the recipient to make an appropriate payment to the sender. Hence

cash will flow in the opposite direction of the material flow. As presented in Figure 3, we will

discuss the following risk issues of information flows: information accuracy, information

system security and disruption, intellectual property and information outsourcing risk.

Information accuracy: Information accessibility, accuracy and efficiency are major

discussions relating to information flows (Bradley, 2001; Faisal et al., 2006, 2007; Geary et

al., 2002; Giermanski, 2000; Lee, 2002, 2004, 2007; Raman et al., 2001; Zsidisin and Ellram,

2003). Lee (2002) studies uncertainty from the perspectives of supply and demand. Demand

characteristics and uncertainty can be distinguished on how functional and innovative a

product is. On the other hand, the nature of the supply process can be stable for a mature and

established environment, or evolving for manufacturing processes and technology that are

still developing and changing. Lee (2004) argues that to be among the top supply chains, it is

necessary to have the triple-A characteristics: to be agile to changes, adaptable to

evolvement, and align the interest of all the firms in the supply network. The inaccuracy of

information could be mitigated by the adoption of information sharing and transparency,

taking the advantage of internet advancement. Despite acknowledging the increasing risks in

the information, material and financial flows, Lee (2007) looks at these challenges as

opportunities through advances in information technology. The foe could become friend by

creating awareness of the real situation.

Raman et al. (2001) discuss how the wrong use of action and policies dealing with inventory

data could trigger information inaccuracies. The inaccuracy could be at the checkout, where

the cashier carelessly assumes that two “similar” products are the same, for example

assuming honey flavoured and citron flavoured yogurt as the same. Data inaccuracy could

also be the result of reducing paperwork, for instance Giermanski (2000) highlights the

difficulty of moving materials across the US border to Mexico due to the non-existence of

custody documentation. The lack of a bill of lading increases the risk of bearing costs for

material damage and lost. Using the agency theory to investigate supply risk management,

Zsidisin and Ellram (2003) argue that a well aligned information flow results in more

symmetric information which could further reduce the risk sources.

Many companies have lost business due to inability to match supply and demand (Bradley,

2001; Chopra and Sodhi, 2004; Faisal et al., 2007). Bradley (2001) illustrates his personal

experience in getting an extra snow shovel, right after hearing a snow storm warning. Shovels

were sold out at the particular store he visited, while at other stores nearby, there are plenty of

them. If the store owner had been able to forecast accurately, he might have made more profit

that day. Using chaos theory, Bradley (2001) identifies that information flow should be faster

and allow compressing cycle times to avoid any lost business. Geary et al. (2002) suggest

implementing a flawless information and material flow system that should be used by all

supply chain members to combat uncertainty and improve performance

Information system security and disruption: A survey was conducted in India to ascertain

what seems to be obstructing supply chain partners in facilitating an information system. The

22

study results show that the threat of information security ranks fourth after trader’s capability,

resistance to changing the system and a low level of supply chain integration (Jharkharia and

Shankar, 2005). Furthermore, according to the survey, fear of information breakdown ranks

sixth after trust deficiency. The results of a correlation matrix show that information security

and breakdowns are a major concern of supply chain information disruption.

Finch (2004) defines an information system on three levels: application, organisational and

inter-organisational. He classifies data information security risks as application level risk,

when it is associated to the technical or implementation failure of an application resulting

from either internal or external factors. Finch also identifies hackers, viruses and destruction

and denial of access as information system security risks.

An information system is frequently at risk from hackers illegally accessing the company’s

information system. Excess bandwidth consumption, resource starvation, and resource

exploitation can also interrupt an information system by flooding it, thereby resulting in

system shut down and denial of access to legitimate users. There is also threat from internal

employee frauds of intentional/unintentional disclosure of proprietary information. A series

of supply chain disruptions due to natural disasters and terrorist attacks stress the need of data

backup (Faisal et al., 2007). Meanwhile, Finch (2004) foresees information system disruption

risk from the lack of a proper implementation of standard operating procedure for the

backups.

Intellectual property: To ensure a smooth network, a high visibility of information flow is

required. However, inability to protect information sharing will increase the risk of trade

secret exposure. Barry (2004) highlights the risk of technology transfer which results in the

company competing side by side with their former subcontractors. He raises the question:

what is the impact of the compromise of intellectual properties from global sourcing? Faisal

et al. (2007) believe that the vulnerability of intellectual property right is especially in

jeopardy in the software industry.

Information outsourcing: Information technology or information system outsourcing has

enabled a company to focus on its core-competence. However, leaving this to third party

increases risk for opportunism among vendors, information security apprehension, hidden

costs, loss of control, service debasement, disagreements, disputes and litigation, and

poaching (Faisal et al., 2007). Spekman and Davis (2004) suggest that protection from

inappropriate illegal or unethical access to the information system should be established to

prevent unintended exposure of a company’s data. Christopher and Lee (2004) call for

improved accuracy, visibility and accessibility for improvising of information sharing.

Furthermore, they stress the need for an information system, which can alert the supply chain

members on any out of control conditions. Murphy (2007) predicted that the trend in supply

chain technology in 2008 would be using information system as a service which provides

better security. By using this application, fear of sharing sensitive data to a third party should

no longer be a problem, since companies have the access to the third-party’s server and have

full control of the information system.

2 3

T a b

le 1

: M

a in

i ss

u e s

d is

c u

ss e d o

v e r

th e y

e a rs

Is su

e s

R e fe

r e n

c e s

1 9 9

5 ~

1 9 9

9

F

in a n

c ia

l ri

sk m

a n a g

e m

e n t

P a ra

d in

e (

1 9 9

5 );

C a rr

( 1 9

9 9 )

O p e ra

ti o

n s

tr a te

g ie

s M

a c D

u ff

ie a

n d H

e lp

e r

(1 9 9

7 );

W il

li a m

so n (

1 9 9 7 );

Y u (

1 9 9 7 );

W il

d in

g (

1 9 9 8 );

B o w

e rs

o x e

t a l.

( 1 9 9 9 );

H a n d fi

e ld

e t

a l.

(1 9 9 9 )

2 0 0

0 ~

2 0 0

4

E

n v ir

o n m

e n

ta l

B a rr

y (

2 0 0 4

); C

o u

si n s

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0

4 )

F in

a n

c ia

l ri

sk m

a n a g

e m

e n t

L a L

o n

d e (

2 0

0 0 );

C a c h o n

( 2

0 0 4 );

v a n P

u tt

e n a

n d M

a c M

il la

n (

2 0 0 4 )

In fo

rm a ti

o n m

a n

a g e m

e n

t R

e ic

h h e ld

a n d

S c h e ft

e r

(2 0 0

0 );

B ra

d le

y (

2 0 0 1 );

G e a ry

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0

2 );

C h ri

st o p h e r

an d L

e e (

2 0

0 4 );

F in

c h (

2 0 0 4 );

L e e (

2 0 0 4

)

O p e ra

ti o

n s

tr a te

g ie

s

A b

e rn

a th

y e

t a l.

( 2 0

0 0 );

J o

h n so

n (

2 0 0 1 );

L i

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0

1 );

R a m

a n e

t a l.

( 2 0 0

1 );

T u m

m a la

a n d M

a k (

2 0 0 1

); S

v e n ss

o n

(2 0 0 2 );

v a n d

e r

V o rs

t a n d B

e u le

n s

(2 0

0 2 );

V a n L

a n

d e g h e m

a n d V

a n

m a e le

( 2 0 0 2 );

H a rl

a n d e

t a l.

( 2 0 0

3 );

H a u

se r

(2 0 0 3

);

M o

ra le

s a n d

G e a ry

( 2 0 0 3

); P

e c k e

t a l.

( 2 0

0 3 );

R ic

e a

n d C

a n

ia to

( 2 0 0 3 );

B e rg

e r

e t

a l.

( 2 0

0 4 );

C h o

p ra

a n

d S

o d

h i

(2 0 0 4 );

C h ri

st o p h

e r

a n

d P

e c k (

2 0 0 4

); S

v e n ss

o n (

2 0

0 4 )

P o li

ti c a l

a n d c

u lt

u ra

l p ra

c ti

se s

G ie

rm a n sk

i (2

0 0 0 );

C h e c a e

t a l.

( 2 0 0 3 );

C o u

si n s

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0

4 )

S u p p ly

c h

a in

p a rt

n e rs

r e la

ti o n

sh ip

S

v e n ss

o n

( 2 0 0 1 );

H a ll

ik a s

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0

2 );

L a L

o n d e (

2 0

0 2 );

L e e (

2 0 0 2

); Z

si d

is in

a n d

E ll

ra m

( 2 0 0 3 );

A g re

ll e

t a l.

( 2 0 0 4 );

H a z ra

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0

4 );

K a m

ra d a

n d S

id d

iq u

e (

2 0 0

4 );

N a ra

y a n

a n a

n d R

a m

a n (

2 0 0

4 )

2 0 0

5 ~

2 0 0

9

E

n v ir

o n m

e n

ta l

L a L

o n

d e (

2 0

0 5 );

P e c k (

2 0 0 5

); S

ta lk

( 2

0 0 6 );

E c o n o m

y a

n d L

ie b

e rt

h a l

(2 0 0

7 );

M u

rp h y (

2 0 0 7 )

F in

a n

c ia

l ri

sk m

a n a g

e m

e n t

C a ll

io n i

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0 5 );

H e n d ri

c k

s a n d S

in g h

a l

(2 0 0 5 );

B o v e t

(2 0 0 6 );

C h

o i

a n d K

ra u se

( 2 0 0

6 );

H a rt

le y -U

rq u h a rt

( 2 0 0 6 );

K e rr

( 2 0 0

6 );

P a p a d a k

is (

2 0 0

6 );

F a n g a

n d W

h in

st o

n (

2 0 0 7

); S

m it

h e

t a l.

( 2 0 0 7

); X

ia o a

n d Q

i (2

0 0 8 )

In fo

rm a ti

o n m

a n

a g e m

e n

t Jh

a rk

h a ri

a a

n d S

h a n

k a r

(2 0 0 5 );

F a is

a l

e t

a l.

( 2

0 0 6 , 2

0 0 7 );

R a tn

a si

n g a m

( 2 0 0

7 )

O p e ra

ti o

n s

tr a te

g ie

s E

lk in

s e t

a l.

( 2

0 0 5 );

H a le

a n d

M o b

e rg

( 2

0 0 5 );

J ü tt

n e r

(2 0 0

5 );

S h e ff

i a n d R

ic e (

2 0 0 5 );

Z si

d is

in a

n d S

m it

h (

2 0 0

5 );

Z si

d is

in

e t

a l.

( 2

0 0 5 );

G a tt

o rn

a (

2 0

0 6 );

H il

lm a n (

2 0

0 6 );

K is

e r

a n d C

a n tr

e ll

( 2 0 0

6 );

K h a n e

t a l.

( 2 0 0

8 )

O u ts

o u rc

in g t

o l

o w

c o

st c

o u n tr

ie s

F it

z g e ra

ld (

2 0 0

5 );

A m

a ra

l e t

a l.

( 2

0 0 6 );

C ig

o li

n i

a n d R

o ss

i (2

0 0 6 );

C ro

n e (

2 0 0 6 );

K u m

a r

e t

a l.

( 2 0 0 7 )

P o li

ti c a l

K le

in d o

rf e r

a n d S

a a d (

2 0 0

5 );

d e W

a a rt

( 2 0 0 6 );

S ta

lk (

2 0 0 6 );

E c o n o m

y a

n d L

ie b

e rt

h a l

(2 0 0 7 );

F e rr

e r

e t

a l.

( 2 0

0 7 );

C u d a h y

e t

a l.

( 2

0 0 8 )

S u p p ly

c h

a in

p a rt

n e rs

r e la

ti o n

sh ip

M

a rt

ín e z -d

e -A

lb é n iz

a n

d S

im c h i-

L e v i

(2 0 0 5

); L

e v a ry

( 2 0

0 7 )

23

24

2.4.4. Summary of supply chain risk issues

The risk issues affecting supply chain flows discussed above are some examples from the

many and mostly unique cases affecting today’s industry. In Table 1, we provide the

summary of issues discussed over the years. We divide these studies into three time

segments. We observe that risk issues in supply chains have received increasing attention

from researchers and practitioners, especially after 9/11.

In the early years, studies in SCRM mainly focused on financial risk and operational

strategies. Then, in the later time segments, research areas extended the scope to risk issues

affecting the entire supply chain. We also observe an emerging interest in analysing

information management. We refer to the accompanying Paper 1 for further discussion on

trends and advancement in SCRM.

2.5. Research methods and approaches in literature

In reviewing the current research and trends in this field, articles were gathered by means of a

literature search and a bibliometric analysis of selected journals (business review journals,

operations management journals, management science or operations research (MS/OR)) and

a database (Web of Science) from 1995 until 2009. After a series of selection and filtration, a

total of 138 related articles were reviewed (Tang and Musa, 2011).

Besides the definition and scope of SCRM presented earlier, it is also important to indentify

the research methods and approaches used in evaluating and managing risk issues. We

identify that the existing studies on SCRM are mainly based on a qualitative approach (78%)

and merely a small fraction fall under the category of quantitative approach (see Figure 4). In

the following, we will discuss the two respective approaches.

Figure 4: Percentage of publication by types of research method

2.5.1. Qualitative approach

We categorise qualitative studies into two groups. The first group consists of conceptual

models, overviews and exploratory reviews, while the latter comprises empirical studies such

as industrial cases, interviews and surveys.

More than half of total articles reviewed fall under the category of the first group, qualitative

approach. From this group, the vast majority cover some perspectives of supply chain risk.

Harland et al. (2003) view risk from the supply side. Peck et al. (2003) investigate the same

52

26 20

2

Overview / Exploratory

Empirical Studies Analytical Model Simulation Model

25

and include the additional perspectives of process risk, demand risk and control risk. Taking a

wider view of the supply chain, Lee (2004) and Gattorna (2006) analyse the risk of

misalignment of supply chain partners’ relationship, while Barry (2004) analyses risk in the

global supply chain environment. Other perspectives include process-based risk (Neiger et

al., 2009), information visibility and controls (Christopher and Lee, 2004), technological

capability, and policy risks (Johnson, 2006).

Frameworks have also been developed to explore the risk issues in supply chains, for

example for identifying supply chain risk (Bovet, 2006). The strategies proposed aim to

mitigate risks in their respective areas, from postponement in order to mitigate demand

uncertainties to early warning system in order to monitor critical product development.

A large number of the articles in the first group cover the sourcing issue with or without a

combination of other supply chain elements. Hartley-Urquhart (2006) proposes the early-

payment programmes whereas Cachon (2004) suggests discount contracts to secure the

supplier relationship. Lee (2002, 2007) proposes taking advantage of information technology

for the supply chain to tackle supply and demand risks. Fitzgerald (2005) suggests a

secondary manufacturing plan which includes sourcing in less risky regions and in the same

country as the focal company, in order to mitigate supply disruption.

Other solutions involve the risk protection of buyer’s credit (Kerr, 2006), stress testing

(Chopra and Sodhi, 2004), a resilience supply chain (Christopher and Peck, 2004) and to

increase flexibility (Bovet, 2006; Chopra and Sodhi, 2004; Sheffi and Rice, 2005; Tang,

2006b). We note that the most commonly discussed and implemented methods found in the

literature are associated with material flow risk in supply chains.

The empirical studies have predominantly focused on sourcing policies which arise from the

practitioner’s problem (Amaral et al., 2006; Crone, 2006; Norrman and Jansson, 2004; Sinha

et al., 2004). In this study group, inventory is another important issue with common topics

such as the reduction of inventory holding (Jüttner, 2005), allocation of buffer inventory

(Baker, 2007), application of inventory-driven cost metrics (Callioni et al., 2005) and the

implementation of lean production (Abernathy et al., 2000). Frameworks are proposed to

encourage early supplier involvement to improve control capacity, demand and process

(Khan et al., 2008; Zsidisin and Smith, 2005). Rice and Caniato (2003) stress the significance

of redundancy in an organisation facing disruption strikes.

2.5.2. Quantitative approach

Only a quarter of the articles in our review apply a quantitative method including analytical

models and simulation. With regard to supply selection, there are decision-tree based

optimization models (Berger et al., 2004), risk ranking systems, (Levary, 2007), an IBM

supplier evaluation model (Kirkwood et al., 2005) and incentive models (Agrell et al., 2004).

With a focus on flexible sourcing and supplier relationships, there are dual optimization using

real options (Kamrad and Siddique, 2004), decision support systems with multivariate

analysis (Kremic et al., 2006) and procurement contracts models (Martinez-de-Albeniz and

Simchi-Levi, 2005).

26

Various methods are used to mitigate risk associated with uncertainty. Among them are a

robust economic order quantity model (Yu, 1997), an optimization model for operating policy

(Li et al., 2001), an options contract model (Fang and Whinston, 2007), a linear dynamic

system model (Zhang, 2006), a two-stage stochastic model combining real option and

financial option (Ding et al., 2007), a financial model (Hauser, 2003), an equilibrium model

to counter supply and demand risk (Nagurney et al., 2005), a stochastic location model with

risk pooling (Snyder et al., 2007), a stochastic programming for identifying loss risks

(Sounderpandian et al., 2008) and a value-at-risk (VaR) model (Tapiero, 2005, 2007).

Simulation modelling covers a very small fraction of the quantitative approaches and most of

these models have been designed recently. Dual optimization using real options simulation-

based decision support system has been developed for selecting the best collaboration level

between partners (Cigolini and Rossi, 2006) and relocating the order penetration points

(OPP) (Wong and Hvolby, 2007). A recent application of ARENA simulation (Kull and

Closs, 2008) assesses supply risk, and it also claims that small order quantities bring

resilience to the supply chain.

Tang (2006a) presents an excellent review on quantitative approaches for supply chain risk

management. He proposes robust supply chain strategies which aims both to improve a firm’s

capability to manage supply and demand under normal operation, and to enhance a firm’s

capability to sustain its operations when a major disruption hits. Tang (2006a) also proposes

nine key policies for mitigating risks: postponement, strategic stock, flexible supply base,

make-and-buy, economic supply incentives, flexible transportation, revenue management,

dynamic assortment planning and silent product rollover. However, it is acknowledged that

studies applying quantitative methods in supply chain risk management are still very limited

in number (Khan and Burnes, 2007; Tang, 2006a, 2006b). From our review, we note there is

an obvious lack of quantitative approaches, particularly in modelling risk associated with

information flows.

2.5.3. Summary on research methods and approaches in literature

The literature search shows that early studies in SCRM focus on a conceptual analysis (52%)

of risk issues, mainly on the supply side. There is also increasing SCRM awareness from

practitioners, which is translated into an increase of interest in empirical studies (26%). Over

the years, we have observed a growing interest in handling risk issues by combining risk

perspectives and risk flows. However, these studies are still mainly limited to conceptual and

overview studies.

Research conducted in how to deal with technical problems are very few (22%). Although

there has been an increase in research in quantitative studies, a big portion of these studies

still focus on a specific area, and ignore the need to handle supply chain as an integrated

system. This may be due to the challenge of analysing and managing risk issues in a complex,

integrated supply chain system. The application of simulation models could be an alternative

way to promote quantitative analysis in resolving technical problems in SCRM.

27

3. Approaches and Methods Adopted in this Research Project

“Where there are things to be done the end is not to survey and recognize the various

things, but rather to do them; with regard to excellence, then, it is not enough to

know, but we must try to have and use it, or try any other way there may be of

becoming good.” ~ Aristotle, Nicomachean Ethics

This dissertation aims to investigate the general concern for and perception of risks affecting

supply chains and how risk flows in a supply chain can be effectively managed. To achieve

our research objectives, we have employed various approaches and methods as presented in

the shaded area in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Approaches and methods adopted in the dissertation

Firstly, we identify the agendas in supply chain risk management by using a bibliometric

analysis. Bibliometric analysis, specifically co-citation analysis, helps to identify the research

agenda and trends in the field of SCRM. The findings of this investigation are presented in

Paper 1 and complemented with Section 2 of Part I in this dissertation.

Then, we investigate how supply chain risk could be effectively handled. We use the SCRM

process, comprising of risk analysis and risk control stages as the framework (refer to Figure

2 in Section 2). To present how risk in a supply chain can be analysed, we include Paper 2, in

which we adopt well-established tools and approaches that have been introduced in

Reliability Engineering. These tools and approaches have been widely used in

product/process development.

28

The application of System Dynamics modelling also helps in analysing risk in a supply chain.

This is presented in Paper 4. This paper shows how when disruption occurs at one node of

the supply chain, the effect of this disruption flows along the supply chain can be identified.

These effects could be observed for instance by monitoring the production performance. Any

discrepancy in supply chain performance helps to identify a potential risk of disruption. An

individual supply chain has to compromise on estimating and evaluating the risk to allow

effective risk control processes.

Meanwhile, for risk control, we investigate selected mitigation policies: dynamic pricing,

dual-sourcing, and delayed diffusion process. The applications of these policies are presented

in Paper 3, Paper 4 and Paper 5. We use system dynamics modelling in Paper 4 and Paper 5

to cater for the complexity and dynamics of a supply chain facing risks. Below, we present

some basic facts of the above mentioned approaches and methods.

3.1. Co-citation analysis

Bibliometric analysis is a quantitative approach used in analysing the impact of a particular

research field. Two approaches can be applied, either patent analysis or citation/co-citation

analysis. Patent analysis is more commonly used for product related analysis, and is therefore

excluded from our research. Citation/co-citation analysis is an established approach which

has the advantage of identifying the development and trend in a research field.

Figure 6: Co-citation Terminology

We first explain the basic terminology in citation/co-citation analysis as illustrated in Figure

6. Articles of interest are referred as core articles. The references obtained from the core

articles (the cited references) are referred to as parent articles, while articles citing the core

articles are known as children articles.

Citation analysis is the process of examining the frequency, patterns and graphs drawn of

citations in publications. The process involves identifying core articles and the appearance of

parent articles. From this approach, one may identify the significance of articles, authors, or

29

journals for the particular field of interest. This is usually performed in the articles’ database

by classifying the highly cited articles, authors or journals. It is important to carefully select

the core articles by referring to databases such as Web of Science or Scopus, where one can

easily export the citation data of each article.

To further investigate the impact of articles on research development, co-citation analysis is a

preferred method. Co-citation analysis allows the mapping of scientific topics based on the

relation between and among core (articles of interest), parent (cited references) and children

(citing articles) articles (refer to Figure 6). The aim of co-citation analysis is to find the co-

occurrence of parent articles through finding common themes between the core articles and

consequently, uncovering the development of research field of interest.

In preparing for co-citation analysis, we first identify the core articles. Then all the references

used in these core articles are extracted. These references are known as the parent articles and

will be used in the co-citation analysis. When two common parent articles are cited together

by a core article, this suggests that the core article has combined the knowledge from these

two earlier articles. It also reflects the correlation between the two parent articles as they both

have influenced the existence of this core article. The topic relatedness can be analysed by

investigating the contents of the parent articles, either by the co-existence of authors or by

keywords, journal or research area, even though co-citation of author is the most common

method (Bayer et al., 1990; Culnan et al., 1990; Lunin and White, 1990; McCain, 1990;

Paisley, 1990; Pilkington and Meredith, 2009).

Data from both citation and co-citation is then used to develop matrices and clusters in order

to present a visual network of the research field. Computer aided statistics tools such as

SPSS, BibExcel, UCINET and Pajek are commonly used in developing citation and co-

citation matrices and network clustering (Pilkington and Meredith, 2009; White and McCain,

1998).

In the field of Operations Management, citation analysis has been used to define the influence

of journals (Cote et al., 1991) and journal ranking (Vokurka 1996; Kumar and Kwon 2004).

This method helps researchers to realign their focus in the literature review and to know

where to send your own work for publication. Co-citation analysis is relatively new for

analysing the development of Operations Management. Attempts to identify intellectual

structures in the field of Operations Management (Pilkington and Fitzgerald, 2006; Pilkington

and Meredith, 2009; Ramon-Rodriguez and Ruiz-Navarro, 2004) and Supply Chain

Management (Charvet et al., 2008) have been made. Paper 1 which accompanies this

dissertation (Tang and Musa, 2011) is the first attempt to identify research advances in

Supply Chain Risk Management.

3.2. Reliability theory

Consumers increasing demands for product quality and performance leads to a growing

complexity of product development processes. This higher complexity calls for an

interdisciplinary approach to enable the realisation of successful products. Thus, the field of

System Engineering and Concurrent Engineering have emerged. System Engineering is a

30

disciplined, orderly, top-down process for managing project risks while defining customer

requirements, translating those into performance requirements, selecting balanced solutions

to the design problems revealed, verifying that the solution responds adequately to the

problems, and validating that the solution fulfils the original needs. One important sub-field

in System Engineering is Reliability Engineering, where the focus is on ensuring product

reliability, quality and safety.

Even though reliability and quality are often used interchangeably, there is a distinct

difference between these two qualities. Reliability concerns the performance of a product

over its entire lifetime, while quality control focuses on the performance of a product at one

point in time, usually during the manufacturing process. Safety is usually defined as a

“conservation of human life and its effectiveness, and the prevention of damage to items as

per specified mission requirement” (Dhillon, 2005). While reliability and quality focus on

failures and their prevention, safety focuses on those failures that create hazards. Hence, these

three qualities are closely knit together to satisfy customers’ needs for highly reliable, good

quality and safe products.

To achieve high quality, a product has to reflect customers’ needs as well as be robust

(Lewis, 1996). One common approach for measuring product and process performance is to

assess its risk by means of the three above mentioned qualities.

To perform a fundamental risk assessment in Reliability Engineering requires an

understanding of probability and sampling to ensure the accuracy of the assessment.

Concepts in representing failure behaviour include the bathtub hazard rate curve, hazard rate

function, reliability function and mean time to failure (Dhillon, 2005; Lewis, 1996). Risk

assessment can be divided into three stages; preparing for the assessment, carrying out the

assessment and post-assessment activities (Gadd et al. 2004).

Many methods and approaches have been developed for assessing risk. Some examples of

commonly and interchangeably used methods in reliability, quality and safety assessment are

the fault tree analysis (FTA), the failure modes and effect analysis (FMEA), the Markov

method, the network reduction method, the decomposition method, and various types of

quality control charts, the Pareto diagram, the quality function deployment (QFD), the cause

and effect diagram (CAED), the design of experiments (DOE) and the hazards and

operability analysis (HAZOP). The applications of these tools range from software to aircraft

engine developments (Yacoub and Ammar, 2002; Yang et al., 2011).

Based on a literature search and case studies, an extensive study on risk assessment of health

and safety at work in the UK has identified several pitfalls in implementing risk assessment

(Gadd et al., 2004). Among others, the pitfalls include “considering risk from one activity”

and failure to identify all problems as well as consequences. Meanwhile, in a comparative

study, Backlund and Hannu (2002) identify results obtained from three different risk analysis

approaches (from three different teams) applied to a specific hydro-plant, and conclude that

these approaches produce dissimilar results. Based on these pitfalls, factors affecting the

quality of risk analysis are identified (Backlund and Hannu, 2002; Arunraj and Maiti, 2007).

31

These factors are risk assessment, hazard identification and initial consequence analysis. Sub

factors include frequency estimation, consequence estimation, method, data and information,

and results.

We believe that there are similarities between system engineering and supply chain

management. Both concepts require a holistic perspective of the network, as if there is a case

of failure in one of the members, the whole network will be affected. Therefore, we aim to

investigate the suitability of adopting reliability engineering risk analysis tools in the

perspective of supply chain risk (see Paper 2).

3.3. Dynamic pricing

Pricing strategy plays a main role in maximizing profit, especially when competition is high

or in the case of limited supplies. Advances in information technologies have enabled the

sharing and real-time processing of various pieces of information, e.g. customers’ demands

and competitors’ strategies. With this development, dynamic pricing has become more

attractive to apply.

Dynamic pricing affects customers demand by making flexible adjustments to price based on

changing circumstances, such as demand and market conditions. One approach in dynamic

pricing is to offer goods according to customers’ willingness to pay. For example, a new

product can be labelled with a high price to gain a high profit margin at the introductory

stage, and then later have a price markdown in order to maintain revenue by increasing the

sales volume. Another common application of dynamic pricing which is based on time of

purchase is practised by airline companies.

The early development of dynamic pricing can be traced back to the research conducted by

Gallego and van Ryzin (1994) where they present the structural properties of the optimal

policies of dynamic pricing. They formulate an elegant model in which the vendor starts with

a finite number of identical products in the inventory. Customers arrive according to a

Poisson process, with independent, identically distributed reservation prices. In the case of

exponentially distributed reservation prices, the optimal pricing strategy is easily derived.

Gallego and van Ryzin (1994) conclude that with homogenous demand, at any given time the

optimal price decreases as the inventory increases, and with any given initial inventory level,

the optimal price increases over time. The above work has been further extended in studies by

Bitran and Mondschein (1997), Zhao and Zheng (2000) and Chatwin (2000).

Petruzzi and Dada (1999) present a review of the newsvendor model with pricing policies.

They investigate multiplicative, additive demand cases and present a unified framework for

both. This study demonstrates how optimal policy varies when different demand uncertainties

are introduced to the model. It also demonstrates that the profit function is unimodal and is

determined by i) pricing, as well as ii) both pricing and order quantity. In this model, a high

confidence in supply is assumed, and demand is realised after order quantity and pricing have

been determined.

32

In the industries of today, the strategic, the tactical as well as the operational planning of an

organisation is developed under various uncertainties. For example, in the case of new

product introduction, the organisation has to determine resources’ capacity and estimate the

payoffs of investment in that capacity without knowing the actual demand for the new

product. These issues, in which a firm evaluates profit based on i) price or ii) production

quantity or iii) price and production quantity determined after demand is realised, are

discussed by Van Mieghem and Dada (1999) in a very interesting way. Another extension of

dynamic pricing is presented by Biller et al. (2005) who present dynamic pricing in

association with production scheduling and inventory controls for non-perishable products.

They demonstrate that dynamic pricing promotes market shares.

An extension of dynamic pricing in newsvendor policy in the case of yield risks is presented

in this dissertation (see Paper 3).

3.4. Sourcing policy

The role of sourcing has changed from being simply a tactical decision to becoming a

strategic one. Sourcing policy is used as a guideline in decision making to ensure the success

of procurement practises, which include finding, evaluating and engaging suppliers of goods

and services. In order to develop a fully integrated supply chain, it is important to know the

capabilities and activities of each member of the supply chain, such as the design aspect,

process flows and data management. However, aligning its diverse components is a

challenge, particularly as supply chain grows wider.

There is no simple sourcing policy that can fit everywhere. Instead, a policy is very much

related to the specific situations, opportunities and intentions of the supply chain. Enarsson

(2008) discusses the different needs and practises of sourcing. Single sourcing is preferable

for it is easier to monitor and control. This strategy is particularly common in industries that

require high confidentiality with their products and processes. However, with a single

sourcing policy, the supplier has the upper hand, something which eventually could influence

the price and operations of its buyer. Furthermore, the buyer is more exposed to the risk of

supply shortages, especially within a global sourcing environment. Therefore multiple

sourcing is preferable particularly when global sourcing involves high-risk countries, even

though using redundant suppliers is against the principles of lean manufacturing.

In order to both minimize risk and control the production process, industries are now more

prone to having a smaller supplier base, such as a dual sourcing policy. Dual sourcing

requires a rigorous and boring process in supplier selection. It also limits customer/supplier

relationships as suppliers’ loyalty towards customers is reduced because they need to cater

for greater numbers of customers. However, the benefits of dual sourcing overshadow these

limitations. With dual sourcing, the supply chain gains supply reliability and benefits from a

better price and quality due to supply redundancy and competition. Figure 7 shows the

operational advantages of using dual sourcing. Assuming the same replenishment level (or

reorder point s) and order quantity (Q) in both single sourcing and dual sourcing systems, we

note that in the dual sourcing system, both the stockout and inventory holding can be reduced

if two suppliers offer different lead times.

(i) Single sourcing

Early literature on dual sourcing

over sole sourcing under various conditions (

1991). Ramasesh et al. (1991) evaluate the sourcing policy by varying demand variability,

shortage cost, holding cost ratio and ordering costs. They conclud

implementation of dual sourcing, savings increase as demand variability increases.

lost sales into consideration, Mohebbi and Posner (1998) investigate under which conditions

sole and dual sourcing outperform each other. When both su

sourcing is superior to sole sourcing especially in saving inventory holding cost

Another group of literature focuses on finding the optimal order splitting strategy (

Miller, 2001; Lau and Zhao, 1993

investigate optimal splitting assuming a stochastic demand and lead

Kelle and Miller (2001) focus on constant demand and investigate the stockout

and uneven order splitting in dual sourcing. Kelle and Miller conclude that

splitting of order lowers the risk of stockout even in the case that one supplier is not reliable.

The application of the dual sourcing splitting strateg

supply chain system (Tang and Grubbström, 2005).

Existing literature in dual sourcing focus

(Anupindi and Akella, 1993; Chopra et al. 2007). Assuming one supplier is

than the other, Lu et al. (2011) study the optimal product substitution in case of disruption. In

Paper 4 of this dissertation (Musa et al.,

when one of the supply chain members fac

information flow and its impact on

3.5. Bass diffusion

The Bass diffusion model was developed by Frank Bass (Bass, 1969). It describes the process

by which new products and services are adopted as an interaction between customer

(existing users) and potential customers.

The model is built on the basic assumption that potential adopters of an innovative product

are influenced by two types of communication: b

Individuals adopt a new product partly because of what they see or hear from mass media

(ii) Dual sourcing

Figure 7: Sourcing policy

dual sourcing includes studies investigating the benefits of d

over sole sourcing under various conditions (Mohebbi and Posner, 1998; Ramasesh et al.

1991). Ramasesh et al. (1991) evaluate the sourcing policy by varying demand variability,

shortage cost, holding cost ratio and ordering costs. They conclude that

implementation of dual sourcing, savings increase as demand variability increases.

lost sales into consideration, Mohebbi and Posner (1998) investigate under which conditions

sole and dual sourcing outperform each other. When both suppliers are equally reliable, dual

sole sourcing especially in saving inventory holding costs

Another group of literature focuses on finding the optimal order splitting strategy (

Lau and Zhao, 1993; Tang and Grubbström, 2005). Lau and Zhao (1993)

investigate optimal splitting assuming a stochastic demand and lead time environment, while

Kelle and Miller (2001) focus on constant demand and investigate the stockout risk with even

and uneven order splitting in dual sourcing. Kelle and Miller conclude that

splitting of order lowers the risk of stockout even in the case that one supplier is not reliable.

dual sourcing splitting strategy is also found in the remanufacturing

supply chain system (Tang and Grubbström, 2005).

Existing literature in dual sourcing focuses on uncertainties in demand, supply or lead

Chopra et al. 2007). Assuming one supplier is

than the other, Lu et al. (2011) study the optimal product substitution in case of disruption. In

(Musa et al., 2012), we investigate the benefits of dual sourcing

when one of the supply chain members faces disruption. This study highlights the

on the dual sourcing policy.

The Bass diffusion model was developed by Frank Bass (Bass, 1969). It describes the process

new products and services are adopted as an interaction between customer

(existing users) and potential customers.

The model is built on the basic assumption that potential adopters of an innovative product

are influenced by two types of communication: broadcast media and interpersonal channels.

Individuals adopt a new product partly because of what they see or hear from mass media

33

studies investigating the benefits of dual sourcing

Ramasesh et al.

1991). Ramasesh et al. (1991) evaluate the sourcing policy by varying demand variability,

that with the

implementation of dual sourcing, savings increase as demand variability increases. Taking

lost sales into consideration, Mohebbi and Posner (1998) investigate under which conditions

ppliers are equally reliable, dual

s.

Another group of literature focuses on finding the optimal order splitting strategy (Kelle and

Grubbström, 2005). Lau and Zhao (1993)

time environment, while

risk with even

and uneven order splitting in dual sourcing. Kelle and Miller conclude that the uneven

splitting of order lowers the risk of stockout even in the case that one supplier is not reliable.

y is also found in the remanufacturing

on uncertainties in demand, supply or lead time

more reliable

than the other, Lu et al. (2011) study the optimal product substitution in case of disruption. In

), we investigate the benefits of dual sourcing

ption. This study highlights the

The Bass diffusion model was developed by Frank Bass (Bass, 1969). It describes the process

new products and services are adopted as an interaction between customers

The model is built on the basic assumption that potential adopters of an innovative product

roadcast media and interpersonal channels.

Individuals adopt a new product partly because of what they see or hear from mass media

34

advertising messages, while, in interpersonal channels, individuals adopt based on what they

see or hear from earlier adopters. Bass specifies the probability of adoption as a linear

function of the total potential market (m), the coefficient of innovation (p), and the coefficient

of imitation (q). The diffusion at time t is described as:

���� = �� − ����� + �

����� − �����

where D(t) is the cumulative number of customers who have already adopted the product.

Various extensions have been made to this model (Bass et al., 1994; Kamakura and

Balasubramanian, 1987; Mahajan and Peterson, 1978).

One area of extension considers the effect of marketing variables. Kamakura and

Balasubramanian (1987) find that the role of price seems to be heterogeneous across

products. Meanwhile, Bass et al. (1994) include price and advertising to develop a

Generalised Bass model to reflect the current marketing effort. A number of parameters of

the Bass model can change over time due to factors such as the changing characteristics of

the population, products, or economy. Another similar extension is by Mahajan and Peterson

(1978), in which the authors formulate market potential as a function of time-varying

exogenous and endogenous factors such as socioeconomic conditions, population changes,

and government or marketing actions.

The classic Bass model includes only the first purchases, but market growth could also be due

to the repeat purchases by the original buyers. Hahn et al. (1994) develop a four-segment

trial-repeat purchase model in which the four segments comprise nontriers, triers, post-trial

nonrepeaters, and post-trial repeaters. They find that word-of-mouth from earlier adopters and

marketing efforts influence trial, and that product quality, marketing activity, and market

familiarity influence the repeat rate.

Taking into account the supply restrictions, Jain et al. (1991) model the impact of capacity

restrictions on the diffusion process. They model the customer flow from potential adopters to

waiting applicants and from waiting applicants to adopters. Both Ho et al. (2002) and Kumar

and Swaminathan (2003) allow some waiting applicants to abandon their adoption decisions

to reflect supply and demand dynamics. However, in these studies, capacity is considered as

constant and restricted, without the possibility of expansion.

In this dissertation, we include one paper investigating the capacity expansion policy and its

risk when introducing new products. The Bass diffusion model provides a theoretical

framework for model development (see Paper 5).

3.6. System dynamics

Industrial dynamics studies behaviour and its impact on the interactions between various

functional areas (Forrester, 1958). Towill (1996) later extends this approach to the supply

chain systems where he claims that for an effective supply chain model, there are four

essential inputs that need to be integrated: industrial engineering, control engineering,

simulation and business re-engineering. Figure 8 illustrates the supply chain modelling

35

methodology which is developed based on the flow diagram in Towill (1996). An effective

industrial dynamics model should be able to address a system’s conceptual and technical

problems (Figure 8).

Figure 8: Supply chain modelling methodology (adapted from Towill, 1996)

When addressing this modelling process, Towill (1996) suggests applying systems-

knowledge-based information to address conceptual problems (top part of Figure 8). In

systems-knowledge modelling, it is important to analyse system input and output. This is

usually presented by a causal loop diagram (Figure 9) or by a stock and rate diagram (Figure

10). Another alternative is to use a block diagram to link the conceptual and technical

problems. A block diagram is a control theory approach which could be represented in either

a time-domain (Figure 11) or a frequency domain (Figure 12). In the frequency domain,

Laplace transform (or z-transform) technique can have the advantage of developing transfer

functions for further analysis (Ogata, 1997).

36

Figure 9: Causal loop diagram

Figure 10: Stock and rate diagram

Figures 9-12 show that the level of population relies on the difference between the rate of

births and the rate of deaths. The level of population will increase with an increase in birth

rates. Meanwhile, as the level of the population increases, the number of deaths will increase

and will eventually reduce the population size. The integral in the time domain can be

substituted with the Laplace transform �

� in the frequency domain as presented in Figure 12.

To further investigate the technical problems of the supply chain system, dynamic analysis

should be conducted (Towill, 1996, Figure 8). The application of system dynamics modelling

is renowned for its capability to address this type of analysis (Sterman, 2000).

birth rate death rate

populationbirths deaths

+ +

+ +

- +

(+)

(-)

population deaths

birth rate death rate

births

∫ population (t)

deaths (t)

births (t) + -

/

population (s)

deaths (s)

births (s) + -

Figure 12: Block diagram in frequency domain

Figure 11: Block diagram in time domain

37

The basis of a system dynamics lies in a system of coupled, nonlinear, differential (or

integral) equations

� ��

���� = ���, ��

where � is a vector of levels, � a set of parameters, and � a nonlinear vector-valued function (Ogata, 1997). Though the original development of system dynamics is based on continuous

time, development has shown how system dynamics can be used on discrete difference

equations combined with continuous differential equation or integral equations (Forrester,

1958; Sterman, 2000; Wilson, 2007).

System dynamics applies a feedback approach to understand the system structure and its

impact upon performance behaviour. It has recently been successfully applied for analysing a

supply chain and its inherent control policies. A typical example is to apply such a method to

investigate the bullwhip effect in a supply chain (Croson and Donohue, 2006; Disney and

Towill, 2005, 2006; Wang and Huang, 2010).

Most research into system dynamics application focuses on information flow (Fiala, 2005;

Wikner et al., 1991; Wilson, 2007). However, a recent development has seen a combination

of financial and information flows (De Marco et al., 2012). We refer to Sarimveis et al.

(2008) for an extensive review on modelling techniques used in controlling the dynamics

characteristics of supply chains. In this dissertation, we refer to Paper 4 and Paper 5 for a

presentation of the system dynamics application.

38

39

4. Overview and Summary of Papers

“The learning process is something you can incite, literally incite, like a riot.”~

Audre Lorde

4.1. Overview

As mentioned before, this dissertation consists of two parts. In Part I, we present the

background and an introduction to SCRM, as well as essential information about the

approaches and methods used in this research field. In Part II, the five individual (but

connected) papers each answer one or more of the research questions presented in Part I. In

Figure 13, we show how these five papers are positioned according to their relationships to

the research objectives and questions raised in Section 1. This figure also shows the links

between research outputs and research approaches/methods used.

Figure 13: Positioning of the papers within the research objectives and research questions

40

We identify two research objectives in this dissertation. The first focuses on identifying the

research agenda in SCRM. Under this objective we raised two questions. First we ask “What

risk issues should be considered in supply chain operations?”; follow by “How does a risk

event affects supply chain operations?”.

For the first research question, RQ1, we present our answer in Paper 1 and Section 2 of Part I

(henceforth we referred to as Section 2). We first discuss several definitions and perceptions

of risk in supply chains. In both, we define a risk as an event that has a low probability of

occurrence, but which results in highly negative consequences to a system. There are two

main types of risk that we consider; supply and demand mismatch, and unforeseen disruptive

risk. Further, we present these risk issues from the perspective of major flows in supply

chain; material, financial and information.

Our findings for the effect of risk event connection to supply chain operations (RQ2) can be

found in Section 2, Paper 2, 3, 4, and 5. In Section 2, where supply chain risk issues are

presented, we show that one risk event may disrupt more than one node and/or flow in the

supply chain. Paper 2 discusses the importance of analysing risk from the holistic perspective

of the supply chain, for any single incident affecting or changes made to the supply chain can

easily affect the entire supply chain. In the other three papers we provide further evidence of

various risk events affecting supply chain operations. Paper 4 focuses on supply chain

operations in the face of supply side risk, and investigates operational disruption. Paper 3 and

5 on the other hand analyse supply chain operations on both supply and demand risk, and

Paper 3 focuses more specifically on random demand and random yield, while Paper 5

investigates the correlation between capacity augmentations (supply) on new product

diffusion (demand).

For the second research objective, we focus on the identification of effective management of

supply chain risk. Under this objective three research questions are tabled; RQ3: How can we

analyse supply chain performance from a risk management viewpoint?, RQ4: What kind of

mitigation policies should be used for managing risk in supply chains? and RQ5: What

modelling techniques and approaches are possible in this research area?

We answer RQ3 in Paper 2 and Paper 4. In Paper 2 we investigate the opportunities for

analysing supply china risk using the readily available and commonly applied tools in

product/process development, the reliability engineering tools. We analyse the suitability of

adopting such tools from the perspective of assessing supply chain risk. In Paper 4, we

present a partial risk analysis process, the risk identification. With the application of system

dynamics modelling, the adaptability of a supply chain to changes is monitored. According to

this study, in order to reduce negative effects, it is important to monitor the performance of

the entire supply chain to allow quick response in case of a risk event.

In RQ4 and RQ5 we raise the questions of what are the mitigation policies and what possible

techniques in this area. In Section 2, we present various mitigation policies as well as

techniques used in literatures. We identify the fact that there are many supply chain

management policies that could be adopted in dealing with risk issues, from managing the

41

material flow, to managing the information flow and the financial flow. With regards to

approaches, many existing research studies still focus on conceptual and qualitative models.

We find there is a research gap in quantitative research especially in risk issues relating to

supply chain information flow.

To further investigate RQ4, in Papers 3, 4 and 5 we present some selected mitigation

policies. Paper 3 uses pricing policy to deal with the risk of a mismatch between supply and

demand. Paper 4 investigates sourcing policy to face unforeseen disruptive risk. In Paper 5,

we investigate the information risk of forecasting demand and consequently risk of capacity

expansion when new product is introduced into a market.

Papers 3, 4 and 5 also answer RQ5. In Paper 3 we use mathematical modelling on a

newsvendor problem to investigate different pricing policies. Due to the complexity of the

problem, we further develop the managerial insights by using numerical examples. In Paper

4 and Paper 5 we apply the system dynamics approach. In Paper 4, a system dynamics model

is built to illustrate a 3-echelon supply chain system. We investigate the complicated (non-

linear) system behaviour in such a supply chain when it faces disruption. We use

AnyLogic TM

(XJ Technologies, 2011) simulation software which helps to enhance the

integration and visual impact of complicated models. In Paper 5 differential equations are

used to show information flow, decision making and system dynamics. This paper also

discusses the conditions for optimal control with regards to production and sales decisions.

The studies in Papers 3, 4 and 5 illustrate some mitigation policies and analysis tools for

supply chains reacting to risk events, either from the supply side or from the demand side.

4.2. Summary of the contributions

In this section we summarise the contribution of each paper included in this dissertation.

Paper 1: Identifying risk issues and research advancements in supply chain risk

management

Paper 1 presents a review of risk issues and supply chain risk management. A combination of

a literature survey and co-citation analysis was conducted on journal articles published up to

the year 2009. Issues in Supply Chain Risk Management are categorised according to the

operations and flows of the supply chain.

This paper identifies the major risk issues investigated by fellow researchers and

practitioners. From the co-citation analysis, we identify only a few distinct clusters in the

early development of this field, from 1995 to 1999. The number of individual clusters

increases over the next 5 years (2000-2004) and there is a shift towards more integrated

clusters in the following 5 years (2005-2009).

To identify issues in supply chain risk management, we use co-citation analysis based on

keywords. Over the three time segments that we have investigated, the research focus on

performance is replaced by innovation, which later is replaced by management. This shows

the shifting of interest in the research area from that of a separate issue of risk to an integrated

viewpoint of managing risk in a system. We also identify the growing importance of

42

information issues in this field. However, there is relatively little research on risk mitigation

concerning disruption in information flows.

This article has now been published in the International Journal of Production Economics,

Vol. 133, pp. 25-34, 2011. An earlier version of this article entitled “Analysing Risk Flows in

Supply Chains”, was selected and presented as plenary paper in the 15th International

Symposium on Inventories Research (ISIR) in Budapest, Hungary on 22 nd

till 26 th

August,

2008.

Paper 2: Assessing supply chain risk adopting reliability tools

Reliability engineering is a well known approach in addressing risk issues in systems

development. The tools used in this approach have a long history and have shown to tackle

the problem well. From a wide list of tools and approaches in reliability engineering risk

analysis, we select five tools based on their commonality in the industries that show good

potential for use in supply chain. With these selected tools, we evaluate their applicability and

adopt them to managing supply chain risk. The application of these tools has also provided

the interconnection between risk events and supply chain operations.

We identify the potential of FMEA to be used as a standalone tool for analysing risks in a

supply chain as it can identify, estimate and evaluate risk events. However, FTA and AHP

can complement each other, and a hybrid application of these two tools offers a less

complicated process for analysing supply chain risk. FTA carries excellent criteria for

identifying risk issues, while AHP’s pairwise computational analysis has shown to be the best

option for both risk estimation and evaluation. In short, this paper contributes alternatives for

risk assessment in supply chain in a structured way.

An early draft of this paper was presented at the International Conference on Advances in

Production Management Systems (APMS2010) which was held in Cernobbio, Lake Como,

Italy between 11 th

and 13 th

October, 2010.

Paper 3: Dynamic pricing in the newsvendor problem with yield risks

Supply yield would affect a supply chain during the disruption event as well as during its

recovery period. When this happens, a supply chain faces a potential loss of market and profit

if the mismatch between supply and demand is not managed properly. This was what

happened for many personal computer producers when their suppliers needed to operate at

partial capacity during the Taiwan earthquake in 1999. In order to reduce the impact of

supply shortage, Dell offered lower prices on products using alternatives memories, in order

to redirect consumers’ choice.

In this paper, the focus is on how uncertainties in supply can be manipulated with the

application of a postponed and dynamic pricing policy in a newsvendor problem. There are

three circumstances where dynamic pricing brings more economic benefits to the system:

first, when the quantity delivered is fairly small compared with the ordered quantity; second,

when demand side has a low uncertainty; and third, when there is a wide range in which

demand is sensitive to price change. This article provides insights into when and how a

dynamic pricing policy can be implemented for mitigating risk of supply yield.

43

The paper has been accepted for publication in the International Journal of Production

Economics in 2011. It is currently available online (doi:10.1016/j.ijpe.2011.01.018).

Paper 4: Information Flow and Mitigation Strategy in a Supply Chain under Disruption

This paper investigates the effect of disruption in a supply chain where a dual-sourcing

strategy is used. A system dynamics model is used to illustrate 3-echelon supply chain

operations. Two inventory replenishment policies, APIOBPCS and APVIOBPCS, are

investigated to identify which reacts better in a disruption event.

The impacts of disruption occurring at echelon 2 are visible throughout the 3-echelon supply

chain network. APIOBPCS shows a lower variation of inventory levels. This model has also

verified that the application of dual-sourcing causes less turbulence in the system. Reacting to

the disruption by immediately transferring part of the order to its backup supplier further

dampens the disruption impact. In order to react appropriately to the disruption event,

extensive information sharing along the supply chain is necessary. This paper shows that

system dynamics has the advantage of analysing supply chain disruption, even though the

system needs to be modelled as a non-linear one.

An earlier version of this paper was presented at the International Conference on Production

Research (ICPR 21), held between July 31 st and August 4

th , 2011 in Stuttgart, Germany.

During ICPR21, the author was selected as one of the ten recipients of Young Scientist

Award (YSA). From among the papers selected for the award, this paper was chosen as Best

Paper.

Paper 5: Capacity expansion policy and its risk in new product diffusion

Overinvestment in capacity often occurs when companies are introducing new products into

markets. This reduces a company’s profit, even if the new product can be well accepted by

the customer with good profit margin. A fast and large capacity expansion can be caused by

the diffusion speed of the product. Based on the Bass diffusion model, we analyse result from

two principles of capacity augmentation: progressive expansion and lumping expansion.

Decision for capacity expansion also relies on the four scenarios of colleting forecast

information which consists of either one or of a combination of market demand, backlogs and

sales information.

In the case of both capacity augmentation policies, this paper suggests relying on sales

information. Using sales information creates a drift of the diffusion curve, and consequently,

it reduces the pressure of overinvesting in capacity. It is also important to define the initial

capacity level, which should ideally be near the level of initial demand in the market. In the

worst case, with too low initial capacity, delaying sales and adding initial inventory can

significantly improve the system performance, in particular when capacity expansion is based

on a sales’ forecast. This paper provides robust strategies for planning capacity, which is

important for business success both from marketing and production perspectives, when a new

product is introduced into the market.

44

4.3. Future research

As mentioned in Figure 1, Supply Chain Operations can be represented in two different ways,

either by the flows of information, material and finances; or by its processes. In the current

study, we focus mainly on the information flow aspect. Expanding the simulation model by

taking into consideration other aspects of supply chain operations and the interaction of

operations, would definitely be of interest for further investigation, since this would extend

our understanding of risk issues.

Current investigations mainly focus on selected mitigation strategies, i.e. dual-sourcing,

dynamic pricing and capacity expansion. It would be very interesting to investigate the

impact of disruption on a supply chain by implementing different mitigation strategies on

individual entities as well as comparing the robustness of different strategies under the same

disruption signal (for example dual-sourcing vs. reinforced co-operation).

Current studies focus on the impact of disruption on the supply chain. An extension of

studying the behaviour of entities in facing supply chain disruption would also be of great

interest. One possible approach is to combine two simulation modelling approaches, the

Agent Based Modelling to study entity behaviour and System Dynamics to represent system

performance.

Validating the policies and approaches used with industrial data would provide insight from

the practitioners’ perspectives. Furthermore, it would be interesting to identify how effective

the proposed mitigation strategies such as the SCRM approach introduced in Ericsson post

supplier fire incident are to the company. Do they help to avoid risk issues in supply chain or

are they just another Band-Aid solution? How effective are these to the entire supply chain, or

does it require a high level of compromise from the upstream supply chain? These are still

open questions for future investigation.

Nowadays, people have a higher awareness of environmental issues than previously.

Industries have to accommodate this concern together with commodities and energy

volatilities. These issues, together with a number of few other factors such as short product

life cycles, have motivated research on risk issues in reverse manufacturing. Nevertheless,

can be expected that risk issues in reverse manufacturing to be more complicated to manage

for they involve more complicated flows and decisions.

Managing supply chain risks is a complicated task. This dissertation provides some answers

to difficult questions and it provides some suggestions as to how a better and more robust

supply chain could be designed and managed. We hope that the diversified modelling

approaches and risk issues presented in this dissertation will enrich the literature and also

stimulate future study in supply chain risk management.

45

5. References

Abernathy, F.H., Dunlop, J.T., Hammond, J.H. and Weil, D., 2000. Control your inventory in

a world of lean retailing. Harvard Business Review 78 (6), 169-176.

Agrell, P.J., Lindroth, R. and Norrman, A., 2004. Risk, information and incentives in telecom

supply chains. International Journal of Production Economics 90, 1–16.

Amaral, J., Billington, C.A., Tsay, A.A., 2006. Safeguarding the promise of production

outsourcing. Interfaces 36 (3), 220-233.

Anupindi, R., Akella, R., 1993. Diversification under supply uncertainty. Management

Science 39 (8), 944–963.

Arlbjorn, J. S. and Halldorsson, A., 2002. Logistics knowledge creation: reflections on

content, context and processes. International Journal of Physical Distribution and

Logistics Management 32 (1), 22-40.

Arunraj, N.S., Maiti, J., 2007. Risk-based maintenance—Techniques and applications. Journal of Hazardous Materials 142, 653-661.

Backlund, F., Hannu, J., 2002. Can we make maintenance decisions on risk analysis results?

Journal of Quality in Maintenance Engineering 8, 77-91.

Baker, P., 2007. An exploratory framework of the role of inventory and warehousing in

international supply chains. The International Journal of Logistics Management 18 (1),

64-80.

Barry, J., 2004. Supply chain risk in an uncertain global supply chain environment.

International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics Management 34 (9), 695-

697.

Bass, F.M., 1969. A new product growth for model consumer durables. Management

Science.

Bass, F.M., Krishnan, T.V., Jain, D.C., 1994. Why the Bass Model Fits Without Decision

Variables. Marketing Science 13, 203-223.

Bayer, A.E., Smart, J.C., McLaughlin, G.W., 1990. Mapping intellectual structure of a

scientific subfield through author cocitations. Journal of the American Society for

Information Science 41, 444-452.

Berger, P.D., Gerstenfeld, A. and Zeng, A.Z., 2004. How many suppliers are best? A

decision-analysis approach. Omega 32, 9-15.

Biller, S., Chan, L.M.A., Simchi-Levi, D., Swann, J., 2005. Dynamic pricing and the direct-

to-customer model in the automotive industry. Electronic Commerce Research 5 (2),

309–334.

46

Bitran, G.R., Mondschein, S.V., 1997. Periodic pricing of seasonal products in retailing.

Management Science 43 (1), 64–79.

Bovet, D., 2006. The self-funding supply chain. Supply Chain Management Review 10 (5), 9-

10.

Bowersox, D. J., Stank, T. P. and Daugherty, P. J., 1999. Lean launch: managing product

introduction risk through response-based logistics. Journal of Product Innovation

Management 16, 557-568.

Bradley, P., 2001. The certainty of uncertainty. Supply Chain Management Review 5 (2),

105-106.

Buzacott, J.A., 1971. The Role of Inventory in Flow-line Production Systems. International

Journal of Production Research, 9(4) 425-436.

Cachon, G.P., 2004. The allocation of inventory risk in a supply chain: push, pull, and

advance-purchase discount contracts. Management Science 50 (2), 222–238.

Callioni, G., de Montgros, X., Slagmulder, R., Van Wassenhove, L.N., Wright, L., 2005.

Inventory-driven costs. Harvard Business Review 83 (3), 135-141.

Carr, N.G., 1999. Managing in the Euro zone. Harvard Business Review 77 (1), 47-48.

Carter, C.R., Rogers, D.S., 2008. A framework of sustainable supply chain management:

moving toward new theory. International Journal of Physical Distribution and

Logistics Management 38(5), 360-387.

Charvet, F.F., Cooper, M.C., Gardner, J.T., 2008. The intellectual structure of supply chain

management: A bibliometric approach. Journal of Business Logistics 29 (1), 47-73.

Chatwin, R.E., 2000. Optimal dynamic pricing of perishable products with stochastic demand

and a finite set of prices. European Journal of Operational Research 125, 149-174.

Checa, N., Maguire, J., Barney, J., 2003. The new world disorder. Harvard Business Review

81 (8), 70-79.

Chen, I.J., Paulraj, A., 2004. Towards a theory of supply chain management: the constructs

and measurements. Journal of Operations Management 22, 119-150.

Choi, T.Y., Krause, D.R., 2006. The supply base and its complexity: Implications for

transaction costs, risks, responsiveness, and innovation. Journal of Operations

Management 24, 637–652.

Chopra, S., Sodhi, M.S., 2004. Managing risk to avoid supply-chain breakdown. MIT Sloan

Management Review 46 (1), 53-62.

Chopra, S., Reinhardt, G., Mohan, U., 2007. The importance of decoupling recurrent and

disruption risks in a supply chain. Naval Research Logistics 54 (5), 544–555.

47

Christopher, M., Lee, H., 2004. Mitigating supply chain risk through improved confidence.

International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics Management 34 (5), 388-

396.

Christopher, M., Peck, H., 2004. Building the resilient supply chain. International Journal of

Logistics Management 15 (2), 1-13.

Cigolini, R., Rossi, T., 2006. A note on supply risk and inventory outsourcing. Production

Planning and Control 17 (4), 424–437.

Cote, J.A., Leong, S.M., Cote, J., 1991. Assessing the influence of Journal of Consumer

Research: A citation analysis. Journal of Consumer Research 18 (3), 402-410.

Cousins, P.D., Lamming, R.C., Bowen, F., 2004. The role of risk in environment-related

supplier initiatives. International Journal of Operations and Production Management

24 (6), 554-565.

Crone, M., 2006. Are global supply chains too risky?: a practitioner's perspective. Supply

Chain Management Review 10 (4), 28-35.

Croson, R., Donohue, K., 2006. Behavioral causes of the bullwhip effect and the observed

value of inventory information. Management Science 52, 323-336.

Cudahy, G., Mulani, N., Cases, C., 2008. Mastering global operations in multipolar world.

Supply Chain Management Review 12 (2), 22-29.

Culnan, M.J., O'Reilly, C.A., Chatman, J.A., 1990. Intellectual structure of research in

organizational behavior, 1972–1984: A co-citation analysis. Journal of the American

Society for Information Science 41, 453-458.

De Marco, A., Cagliano, A.C., Nervo, M.L., Rafele, C., 2012. Using System Dynamics to

assess the impact of RFID technology on retail operations. International Journal of

Production Economics 135, 333-344.

de Waart, D., 2006. Getting smart about risk management. Supply Chain Management

Review 10 (8), 27-33.

Dhillon, B.S., 2005. Reliability, quality, and safety for engineers. CRC Press.

Ding, Q., Dong, L., Kouvelis, P., 2007. On the integration of production and financial

hedging decisions in global markets. Operations Research 55 (3), 470–489.

Disney, S.M., Towill, D.R., 2005. Eliminating drift in inventory and order based production

control systems. International Journal of Production Economics 93–94, 331–344.

Disney, S.M., Towill, D.R., 2006. A methodology for benchmarking replenishment-induced

bullwhip. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 11(2), 160–168.

Economy, E., Lieberthal, K., 2007. Scorched earth. Harvard Business Review 85 (6), 88-96.

48

Elkins, D., Handfield, R.B., Blackhurst, J., Craighead, C.W., 2005. 18 ways to guard against

disruption. Supply Chain Management Review 9 (1), 46-53.

Enarsson, L., 2008. Outsourcing and Strategic Sourcing – From Strategic Models to

Practical Experience, BAS Publishing, Göteborg, ISBN: 978-91-7246-265-6.

Faisal, M.N., Banwet, D.K., Shankar, R., 2006. Mapping supply chains on risk and customer

sensitivity dimensions. Industrial Management and Data Systems 106 (6), 878-895.

Faisal, M.N., Banwet, D.K., Shankar, R., 2007. Information risks management in supply

chains: an assessment and mitigation framework. Journal of Enterprise Information

Management 20 (6), 677-699.

Fang, F., Whinston, A., 2007. Option contracts and capacity management—enabling price

discrimination under demand uncertainty. Production and Operations Management 16

(1), 125–137.

Fiala, P., 2005. Information sharing in supply chains. Omega-International Journal of

Management Science 33, 419-423.

Finch, P., 2004. Supply chain risk management. Supply Chain Management: An International

Journal 9 (2), 183-196.

Fitzgerald, K.R., 2005. Big savings, but lots of risk. Supply Chain Management Review 9 (9),

16-20.

Ferrer, J., Karlberg, J., Hintlian, J., 2007. Integration: The key to global success. Supply

Chain Management Review 11 (2), 24-30.

Forrester, J., 1958. Industrial dynamics--a major breakthrough for decision makers. Harvard

Business Review 36 (4), 37–66.

Gadd, S.A., Keeley, D.M., Balmforth, H.F., 2004. Pitfalls in risk assessment: examples from the UK. Safety Science 42, 841-857.

Gallego, G., van Ryzin, G., 1994. Optimal dynamic pricing of inventories with stochastic

demand over finite horizons. Management Science 40, 999-1020.

Gartner Inc., 2011. Predicts 2012: supply chain predictions: talent, risk and analytics

dominate. Accessed 2nd March, 2012. <www.gartner.com>.

Gattorna, J., 2006. Supply chains are the business. Supply Chain Management Review 10 (6),

42-49.

Geary, S., Childerhouse, P., Towill, D., 2002. Uncertainty and the seamless supply chain.

Supply Chain Management Review 6 (4), 52-61.

Giermanski, J.R., 2000. A "Black Hole" on the border. Supply Chain Management Review

July/August 2000, 17-20.

49

Goh, M., Lim, J.Y.S., Meng, F., 2007. A stochastic model for risk management in global

supply chain networks. European Journal of Operational Research 182, 164–173.

Hahn, M., Park, S., Krishnamurthi, L., Zoltners, A., 1994. Analysis of new product diffusion

using a four segment trial-repeat model. Marketing Science 13, 224-247.

Hale, T., Moberg, C.R., 2005. Improving supply chain disaster preparedness: A decision

process for secure site location. International Journal of Physical Distribution and

Logistics Management 35 (3), 195-207.

Hallikas, J., Virolainen, V.M., Tuominen, M., 2002. Risk analysis and assessment in network environments: A dyadic case study. International Journal of Production Economics 78, 45-55.

Handfield, R.B., Ragatz, G.L., Petersen, K.J., Monczka, R.M., 1999. Involving suppliers in

new product development. California Management Review 42 (1), 59-82.

Harland, C., Brenchley, R., Walker, H., 2003. Risk in supply networks. Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 9, 51-62.

Hartley-Urquhart, R., 2006. Managing the financial supply chain. Supply Chain Management

Review September 2006, 18-25.

Hauser, L.M., 2003. Risk-adjusted supply chain management. Supply Chain Management

Review 7 (6), 64-71.

Hazra, J., Mahadevan, B., Seshadri, S., 2004. Capacity allocation among multiple suppliers in

an electronic market. Production and Operations Management 13 (2), 161–170.

Hendricks, K.B., Singhal, V.R., 2005. An empirical analysis of the effect of supply chain

disruptions on long-run stock price performance and equity risk of the firm. Production

and Operations Management 14, 35-52.

Hillman, M., 2006. Strategies for managing supply chain risk. Supply Chain Management

Review 10 (5), 11-13.

Ho, T.H., Savin, S., Terwiesch, C., 2002. Managing demand and sales dynamics in new

product diffusion under supply constraint. Management Science 48, 187-206.

Jain, D., Mahajan, V., Muller, E., 1991. Innovation diffusion in the presence of supply

restrictions. Marketing Science 10, 83-90.

Jharkharia, S., Shankar, R., 2005. IT-enablement of supply chains: understanding the barriers.

The Journal of Enterprise Information Management 18 (1), 11-27.

Johnson, M.E., 2001. Learning from toys: lessons in managing supply chain risk from the toy

industry. California Management Review 43 (3), 106-124.

Johnson, M.E., 2006. Supply chain management: Technology, globalization, and policy at a

crossroads. Interfaces 36 (3), 191-193.

50

Jüttner, U., 2005. Supply chain risk management: Understanding the business requirements

from a practitioner perspective. The International Journal of Logistics Management 16

(1), 120-141.

Kamakura, W., Balasubramanian, S.K., 1987. Long-term forecasting with innovation

diffusion models: The impact of replacement purchases. Journal of Forecasting 6, 1-

19.

Kamrad, B., Siddique, A., 2004. Supply contracts, profit sharing, switching, and reaction

options. Management Science 50 (1), 64–82.

Kelle, P., Miller, P.A., 2001. Stockout risk and order splitting. International Journal of

Production Economics 71, 407-415.

Kerr, J., 2006. Streamlining the cash flow. Supply Chain Management Review October 2006,

S25-S31.

Khan, O., Burnes, B., 2007. Risk and supply chain management: Creating a research agenda.

International Journal of Logistics Management 18 (2), 197-216.

Khan, O., Christopher, M., Burnes, B., 2008. The impact of product design on supply chain

risk: a case study. International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics

Management 38 (5), 412-432.

Kirkwood, C.W., Slaven, M.P., Maltz, A., 2005. Improving supply chain configuration

decisions at IBM. Interfaces 35 (6), 460-473.

Kiser, J., Cantrell, G., 2006. 6 steps to managing risk. Supply Chain Management Review 10

(3), 12-17.

Kleindorfer, P.R., Saad, G.H., 2005. Managing disruption risks in supply chains. Production

and Operations Management 14 (1), 53–68.

Knemeyer, A.M., Zinna, W., Eroglu, C., 2009. Proactive planning for catastrophic events in

supply chains. Journal of Operations Management 27, 141-153.

Kouvelis, P., 1999. Global sourcing strategies under exchange rate uncertainty. Quantitative

Models for Supply Chain Management, Eds. Tayur, S., Ganeshan, R., Magazine, M.,

(International series in operations research and management science; 17), Kluwer

Academic Publishers, Massachusetts.

Kouvelis, P., Chambers, C., Wang, H., 2006. Supply chain management research and

production and operations management: Review, trends, and opportunities. Production

and Operations Management 15 (3), 449-469.

Kremic, T., Tukel, O.I., Rom, W.O., 2006. Outsourcing decision support: a survey of

benefits, risks, and decision factors. Supply Chain Management: An International

Journal 11 (6), 467–482.

51

Kull, T., Closs, D., 2008. The risk of second-tier supplier failures in serial supply chains:

Implications for order policies and distributor autonomy. European Journal of

Operational Research 186, 1158–1174.

Kumar, S., DuFresne, C., Hahler, K., 2007. Managing supply chain risks in US-China trade

partnership. Information Knowledge Systems Management 6, 343–362.

Kumar, V., Kwon, I.G., 2004. A pilot study on normalized weighted approach to citation

study: A case of logistics and transportation journals. International Journals of

Physical Distribution and Logistics Management 34 (10), 811-826.

Kumar, S., Swaminathan, J.M., 2003. Diffusion of innovations under supply constraints.

Operations Research 51, 866-879.

LaLonde, B.J., 2000. The cost of switching. Supply Chain Management Review March/April

2000, 11-12.

LaLonde, B.J., 2002. Who can you trust these days? Supply Chain Management Review

May/June 2002, 9-10.

LaLonde, B.J., 2004. A crisis in transportation. Supply Chain Management Review

November/December 2004, 7-8.

LaLonde, B.J., 2005. Time to get serious about energy. Supply Chain Management Review

May/June 2005, 8-9.

Lau, H., Zhao, L. 1993. Optimal ordering policies with two suppliers when lead times and

demands are all stochastics. European Journal of Operational Research 68, 120-133.

Lee, H.L., 2002. Aligning supply chain strategies with product uncertainties. California

Management Review 44 (3), 105-119.

Lee, H.L., 2004. The triple-A supply chain. Harvard Business Review October 2004, 102-

112.

Lee, H.L., 2007. Have your cake*. Supply Chain Management Review 11 (3), 26-27.

Levary, R.R., 2007. Ranking foreign suppliers based on supply risk. Supply Chain

Management: An International Journal 12 (6), 392–394.

Lewis, E.E., 1996. Introduction to Reliability Engineering. John Wiler and Sons, Inc.

Li, L., Porteus, E.L., Zhang, H., 2001. Optimal operating policies for multiplant stochastic

manufacturing systems in a changing environment. Management Science 47 (11),

1539–1551.

Los Angeles Times, February 13, 2005. Wal-Mart to Pay Penalty in Child Labor Charges.

Los Angeles Times Online. Retrieved May, 2008, http://articles.latimes.com.

52

Lu, M., Huang, S., Shen, Z.M., 2011. Product substitution and dual sourcing under random

supply failures. Transportation Research Part B 45, 1251–1265.

Lunin, L.F., White, H.D., 1990. Introduction and overview. Journal of the American Society

for Information Science 41, 429-432.

MacDuffie, J.P., Helper, S., 1997. Creating lean suppliers: Diffusing lean production through

the supply chain. California Management Review 39 (4), 118-151.

Mahajan, V., Peterson, R., 1978. Innovation diffusion in a dynamic potential adopter

population. Management Science 24, 1589-1597.

Manuj, I., Mentzer, J.T., 2008. Global supply chain risk management. Journal of Business

Logistics 29, 133-154.

Martínez-de-Albéniz, V., Simchi-Levi, D., 2005. A portfolio approach to procurement

contracts. Production and Operations Management 14 (1), 90–114.

McCain, K.W., 1990. Mapping authors in intellectual space: A technical overview. Journal of

the American Society for Information Science 41, 433-443.

Mohebbi, E., Posner, M.J.M., 1998. Sole versus dual sourcing in a continuous-review

inventory system with lost sales. Computers and Industrial Engineering 34 (2), 321-

336.

Morales, D.K., Geary, S., 2003. Speed kills: Supply chain lessons from the war in Iraq.

Harvard Business Review 81 (11), 16-17.

Murphy, S., 2007. The supply chain in 2008. Supply Chain Management Review December

2007, 4-7.

Musa, S.N., Wei, S., Tang, O., 2012. Information flow and mitigation strategy in a supply

chain under disruption. Working paper, Department of Management and Engineering,

Linköping University.

Nagurney, A., Cruz, J., Dong, J., Zhang, D., 2005. Supply chain networks, electronic

commerce, and supply side and demand side risk. European Journal of Operational

Research 164, 120–142.

Narayanan, V.G., Raman, A., 2004. Aligning incentives in supply chains. Harvard Business

Review 82 (11), 94-102.

Neiger, D., Rotaru, K., Churilov, L., 2009. Supply chain risk identification with value-

focused process engineering. Journal of Operations Management 27 (2), 154-168.

Norrman, A., Jansson, U., 2004. Ericsson's proactive supply chain risk management approach

after a serious sub-supplier accident. International Journal of Physical Distribution and

Logistics Management 34, 434-456.

53

Ogata, K., 1997. Modern Control Engineering, 3ed. Prentice Hall.

Paisley, W., 1990. An oasis where many trails cross: The improbable co-citation networks of

a multidiscipline. Journal of the American Society for Information Science 41, 459-468.

Papadakis, I.S., 2006. Financial performance of supply chains after disruptions: an event

study. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 11 (1), 25–33.

Paradine, T.J., 1995. Business interruption insurance: a vital ingredient in your disaster

recovery plan. Information Management and Computer Security 3 (1), 9-17.

Paulson, U., 2005. Developing a supply chain flow risk model. NOFOMA 2005 Conference,

Copenhagen, 9-10 June 2005.

Peck, H., 2005. Drivers of supply chain vulnerability: an integrated framework. International

Journal of Physical Distribution &andand Logistics Management, Vol. 35 ( No. 4),

2005, 210-232.

Peck, H., 2006. Reconciling supply chain vulnerability, risk and supply chain management.

International Journal of Logistics: Research and Application, Vol. 9, No. (2), June

2006, 127-142.

Peck, H., Abley, J., Christopher, M., Haywood, M., Saw, R., Rutherford, C., and Strathern,

M., 2003. Creating Resilient Supply Chains: A Practical Guide. Cranfield University,

Cranfield School of Management, UK.

Petruzzi, N.C., Dada, M., 1999. Pricing and the newsvendor problem: a review with

extensions. Operations Research 47, 183–194.

Pilkington, A., Meredith, J., 2009. The evolution of the intellectual structure of operations

management--1980-2006: A citation/co-citation analysis. Journal of Operations

Management 27, 185-202.

Pilkington, A., Fitzgerald, R., 2006. Operations management themes, concepts and

relationships: a forward retrospective of IJOPM. International Journal of Operations

and Production Management 26 (11), 1255-1275.

Poirier, C.C., Swink, M.L., Quinn, F.J., 2007. Global survey of supply chain progress.

Supply Chain Management Review October 2007, 20-27.

Quinn, F., 2006. Risky business. Supply Chain Management Review 10 (4), 5-5.

Raman, A., DeHoratius, N., Ton, Z., 2001. The Achilles' heel of supply chain management.

Harvard Business Review 79 (5), 25-28.

Ramasesh, R.V., Ord, J.K., Hayya, J.C., Pan, A., 1991. Sole versus dual sourcing in

stochastic lead time (s, Q) inventory models. Management Science 37 (4), 428-443.

54

Ramon-Rodriguez, A., Ruiz-Navarro, J., 2004. Changes in the intellectual structure of

strategic management research: A bibliometric study of the Strategic Management

Journal, 1980-2000. Strategic Management Journal 25 (10), 981-1004.

Ratnasingam, P., 2007. A risk-control framework for e-marketplace participation: the

findings of seven cases. Information Management and Computer Security 15 (2), 149-

166.

Reichheld, F.F., Schefter, P., 2000. E-loyalty: Your secret weapon on the web. Harvard

Business Review July/August 2000, 105-113.

Rice, J.B., Caniato, F., 2003. Building a secure and resilient supply network. Supply Chain

Management Review 7 (5), 22-30.

Sarimveis, H., Patrinos, P., Tarantilis, C.D., Kiranoudis, C.T., 2008. Dynamic modeling and

control of supply chain systems: A review. Computers and Operations Research 35,

3530-3561.

Sheffi, Y., 2005. The Resilient Enterprise: Overcoming Vulnerability for Competitive

Advantage. Cambridge, MA, MIT Press.

Sheffi, Y., Rice, J.B., 2005. A supply chain view of the resilient enterprise. MIT Sloan

Management Review 47, 41-48.

Sinha, P.R., Whitman, L.E., Malzahn, D., 2004. Methodology to mitigate supplier risk in an

aerospace supply chain. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 9 (2),

154–168.

Smith, G.E., Watson, K.J., Baker, W.H., Pokorski, J.A., 2007. A critical balance:

collaboration and security in the IT-enabled supply chain. International Journal of

Production Research 45 (11), 2595–2613.

Snyder, L.V., Daskin, M.S., Teo, C.P., 2007. The stochastic location model with risk pooling.

European Journal of Operational Research 179, 1221–1238.

Sodhi, M.S., 2005. Managing demand risk in tactical supply chain planning for a global

consumer electronics company. Production and Operations Management 14 (1), 69–

79.

Sodhi, M.S., Son, B., Tang, C.S., 2012. Researchers’ perspectives on supply chain risk

management. Production and Operations Management 21 (1), 1-13.

Sounderpandian, J., Prasad, S., Madan, M., 2008. Supplies from developing countries:

Optimal order quantities under loss risks. Omega 36, 122 – 130.

Spekman, R.E., Davis, E.W., 2004. Risky business: expanding the discussion on risk and the

extended enterprise. International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics

Management 34 (5), 414-433.

55

Stalk, G., 2006. The costly secret of China sourcing. Harvard Business Review 84 (2), 64-66.

Sterman, J., 2000. Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for a Complex World.

Irwin/ McGraw-Hill, Homewood, IL.

Supply Chain Council, 2008. Supply Chain Operations Reference (SCOR®). Accessed July

2008, <http://supply-chain.org/>.

Svensson, G., 2001. Perceived trust towards suppliers and customers in supply chains of the

Swedish automotive industry. International Journal of Physical Distribution and

Logistics Management 31 (9), 647-662.

Svensson, G., 2002. A conceptual framework of vulnerability in firms' inbound and outbound

logistics flows. International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics

Management 32 (2), 110-134.

Svensson, G., 2004. Key areas, causes and contingency planning of corporate vulnerability in

supply chains: A qualitative approach. International Journal of Physical Distribution

and Logistics Management 34 (9), 728-748.

Tang, C.S., 2006a. Perspectives in supply chain risk management. International Journal of

Production Economics 103, 451–488.

Tang, C.S., 2006b. Robust strategies for mitigating supply chain disruptions. International

Journal of Logistics: Research and Application 9 (1), 33-45.

Tang, O., Grubström, R., 2005. Considering stochastic lead times in a manufacturing/

remanufacturing system with deterministic demands and returns. International Journal

of Production Economics 93–94, 285–300.

Tang, O., Musa, S.N., 2011. Identifying risk issues and research advancements in supply

chain risk management. International Journal of Production Economics 133, 25-34.

Tapiero, C.S., 2005. Value at risk and inventory control. European Journal of Operational

Research 163, 769–775.

Tapiero, C.S., 2007. Consumers risk and quality control in a collaborative supply chain.

European Journal of Operational Research 182, 683–694.

Tohamy, N., 2008. Can technology handle supply chain risk? Supply Chain Management

Review 12 (5), 12-13.

Towill, D.R., 1996. Industrial dynamics modelling of supply chains. International Journal of

Physical Distribution and Logistics Management 26 (2), 23-42.

Tummala, V.M.R., Mak, C.L., 2001. A risk management model for improving operation and

maintenance activities in electricity transmission networks. Journal of the Operational

Research Society 52 (2), 125-134.

56

van der Vorst, J.G.A.J., Beulens, A.J.M., 2002. Identifying sources of uncertainty to generate

supply chain redesign strategies. International Journal of Physical Distribution and

Logistics Management 32 (6), 409-430.

Van Landeghem, H., VanMaele, H., 2002. Robust planning: a new paradigm for demand

chain planning. Journal of Operations Management 20, 769–783.

Van Mieghem, J.A., Dada, M., 1999. Price versus production postponement: capacity and

competition. Management Science 45 (12), 1631–1649.

van Putten, A.B., MacMillan, I.C., 2004. Making real options really work. Harvard Business

Review 82 (12), 134-141.

Vokurka, R.J., 1996. The relative importance of journals used in operations management

research: A citation analysis. Journal of Operations Management 14 (4), 345-355.

Wang, X.Y., Huang, X.B., 2010. Supply chain bullwhip effect simulation under different

inventory strategy. Logistics and Supply Chain Research in China, 27-34.

White, H.D., McCain, K.W., 1998. Visualizing a discipline: An author co-citation analysis of

Information Science, 1972-1995. Journal of the American Society for Information

Science 49.

Wikner, J., Towill, D.R., Naim, M., 1991. Smoothing supply chain dynamics. International

Journal of Production Economics 22, 231-248.

Wilding, R., 1998. The supply chain complexity triangle: Uncertainty generation in the

supply chain. International Journal of Physical Distribution and Logistics Management

28 (8), 599-616.

Williamson, P.J., 1997. Asia's new competitive game. Harvard Business Review 75 (5), 55-

67.

Wilson, M.C., 2007. The impact of transportation disruptions on supply chain performance.

Transportation Research Part E: Logistics and Transportation Review 43, 295-320.

Wong, C.Y., Hvolby, H.H., 2007. Coordinated responsiveness for volatile toy supply chains.

Production Planning and Control 18 (5), 407–419.

Xiao, T., Qi, X., 2008. Price competition, cost and demand disruptions and coordination of a

supply chain with one manufacturer and two competing retailers. Omega-The

International Journal of Management Science 36, 741-753.

XJ Technologies, 2011. AnyLogic TM

(University 6.7.0) [software], 1991-2011.

Yacoub, S.M., Ammar, H.H., 2002. A methodology for architecture-level reliability risk

analysis. IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering 28, 529-547.

57

Yang, J.P., Huang, H.Z., He, L.P., Zhu, S.P., Wen, D.W., 2011. Risk evaluation in failure

mode and effects analysis of aircraft turbine rotor blades using Dempster-Shafer

evidence theory under uncertainty. Engineering Failure Analysis 18, 2084-2092.

Yu, G., 1997. Robust economic order quantity models. European Journal of Operational

Research 100, 482-493.

Zhang, F., 2006. A note on supply risk and inventory outsourcing. Production Planning and

Control 17 (8), 796–806.

Zhao W., Zheng, Y.S., 2000. Optimal dynamic pricing for perishable assets with nonhomogeneous demand. Management Science 46, 375-388.

Zsidisin, G.A., 2003. Managerial perceptions of supply risk. Journal of Supply Chain Management 39, 14-26.

Zsidisin, G.A., Ellram, L.M., 2003. An agency theory investigation of supply risk

management. The Journal of Supply Chain Management: A Global Review of

Purchasing and Supply Summer 2003, 15-27.

Zsidisin, G.A., Melnyk, S.A., Ragatz, G.L., 2005. An institutional theory perspective of

business continuity planning for purchasing and supply management. International

Journal of Production Research 43 (16), 3401–3420.

Zsidisin, G.A., Smith, M.E., 2005. Managing supply risk with early supplier involvement: A

case study and research propositions. The Journal of Supply Chain Management: A

Global Review of Purchasing and Supply Fall 2005, 44-57.

  • Kappa_NM_120515
  • Separator_1_1
  • Paper 1_Tang Musa 2011 Identifying risk issues and research advancements in SCRM
    • Identifying risk issues and research advancements in supply chain risk management
      • Introduction
      • Research process
        • Risk definition
        • Literature survey
        • Citation and co-citation study
        • Supply chain operations framework
      • Results
        • An overview of literature survey
        • Major risk issues
          • Material flow risk
          • Financial flow risk
          • Information flow risk
        • Results of citation and co-citation studies
        • Remarks
      • Discussions and conclusions
      • Acknowledgment
      • References
  • Separator_1_2
  • Paper 2_2
  • Separator_1_3
  • Paper 3_Tang etal DOI 2011 Dynamic pricing in the newsvendor problem with yield risks
    • Dynamic pricing in the newsvendor problem with yield risks
      • Introduction
        • Background
        • Literatures review
          • Pricing policy
          • Random yield
      • Model formulation
        • Description of the decision procedure
        • Demand function
        • Random yield
        • Notations
      • Dynamic pricing policy
        • Deterministic market size
        • Stochastic demand case
      • Fixed pricing policy
      • Numerical examples
        • Observation I
          • The dynamic pricing policy brings more economic benefits when the delivery q is small
        • Observation II
          • The dynamic pricing policy brings more economic benefits when demand has less uncertainty
        • Observation III
          • The dynamic pricing policy brings more economic benefits if there is a wide range that demand is sensible to price change
      • Conclusions
      • Acknowledgments
      • References
  • Separator_1_4
  • Paper 4_1
  • Separator_1_5
  • Paper 5_1

Article 3 .pdf

Identifying risk issues and research

advancements in supply chain risk management

Ou Tang and Nurmaya Musa

Linköping University Post Print

N.B.: When citing this work, cite the original article.

Original Publication:

Ou Tang and Nurmaya Musa, Identifying risk issues and research advancements in supply chain

risk management, 2011, International Journal of Production Economics, (133), 1, 25-34.

http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2010.06.013

Copyright: Elsevier

http://www.elsevier.com/

Postprint available at: Linköping University Electronic Press

http://urn.kb.se/resolve?urn=urn:nbn:se:liu:diva-69766

Identifying risk issues and research advancements in supply chain risk management

Ou Tang1 and S. Nurmaya Musa1,2,*

1Department of Management and Engineering, Linköping University, SE-581 83 Linköping,

Sweden

2Department of Engineering Design and Manufacture, University of Malaya, 50603 Kuala

Lumpur, Malaysia

Abstract

The purpose of this paper is to investigate the research development in supply chain risk

management (SCRM), which has shown an increasing global attention in recent years.

Literature survey and citation/co-citation analysis are used to fulfil the research task.

Literature survey has undertaken a thorough search of articles on selected journals relevant to

supply chain operations management. Meanwhile, citation/co-citation analysis uses Web of

Sciences database to disclose SCRM development between 1995 and 2009. Both approaches

show similar trends of rising publications over the past 15 years. This review has piloted us to

identify and classify potential risk associated with different flows, namely material, cash and

information flows. Consequently, we identify some research gaps. Even though there is a

pressing need and awareness of SCRM from industrial aspect, quantitative models in the field

is relatively lacking and information flow risk has received less attention. It is also interesting

to observe the evolutions and advancements of SCRM discipline. One finding is that the

intellectual structure of the field made statistically significant increase during 2000-2005 and

evolved from passively reacting to vague general issues of disruptions towards more

proactively managing supply chain risk from system perspectives.

Keywords: Supply Chain, Risk Management, Citation/Co-citation Analysis

*Corresponding author

*Nurmaya Musa: [email protected] phone: +46-13-285785

Ou Tang: [email protected] phone: +46-13-281773

Dept. of Management and Engineering, Linköping University, SE 581 83 Linköping, Sweden

Fax: +46-13-281101

1. Introduction

Production in the early years was simple, with single flow of products moving from raw

material suppliers, to manufacturers and then to markets. Nowadays, shorter product lifecycle

and increasing demand among all have led to a complicated supply chain. Due to cost

pressure and competitive advantages, companies are adopting globalization and outsourcing

strategies. This also requires an extended supply chain network, hence increases the nodes in

the system. In addition, many companies have introduced lean production concepts which

intend to remove “wastes” from a supply chain, for instance, by reducing number of suppliers.

This helps in smoothing the operations but it would also create problems if unexpected events

happen in a supply chain. The rising use of internet helps supply network in sharing

information visibility (Christopher and Lee, 2004; Lee, 2002, 2004; Narayanan and Raman,

2004). It is indubitable that the emerging uses of enterprise resource planning (ERP) solutions

such as Oracle and SAP have cut down the information transaction time and reduced the

incidents of inaccuracy and redundancy. Vast assistance from these systems has however

exposed to another consequence, namely information disruption.

All above changes have inevitably increased the importance of supply chain risk management

(SCRM). One typical example is Ericsson’s crisis in 2000. Since a single-source policy was

used, a fire accident in its chips supplier immediately disrupted the material supply.

Ericsson’s loss was estimated to reach USD 400 million in the T28 model (Norrman and

Jansson, 2004). In June 2008, Volvo Cars reported 28% reduction of sales compared with the

same period in previous year, with the biggest loss in its SUVs for about 50%. Fredrik Arp,

CEO of Volvo Cars stated that “the weak dollar reduces the revenue and it will further reduce

the opportunities for R&D”. Another example is the Taiwan earthquake in December 2006,

which caused breakage in undersea cables and slowed down internet. One immediate effect is

a prolonged waiting time of containers in the Shanghai sea port in China, since all claim

procedures rely on information systems. Nature disaster, terrorist attack, labor strike,

accidents can all be the causes for supply chain disruption and delay (Berger et al., 2004;

Christopher and Lee, 2004; LaLonde, 2004; Norrman and Jansson, 2004; Poirier et al., 2007;

Quinn, 2006; Tang, 2006a). The above examples show that any material, financial or

information risk could create problems in a supply chain. Any hiccup transpired within the

supply chain will cause delay and even disruption (Buzacott, 1971). Disruption does not only

halt the supply chain operations, but without preparation and precaution, it takes time for the

affected system to recover (Sheffi and Rice, 2005; Hendricks and Singhal, 2005

The above background provides the motivation to investigate the current trend and issues in

SCRM. Our main objective is through literature review to i) define the important risk issues

and mitigation techniques in SCRM; ii) understand the research trend both from industrial and

academic perspectives; and iii) identify the possible research gaps and opportunities in the

field.

2. Research process

This study is based on the review of existing literature using two approaches; literature survey

as well as basic bibliometric method of citation and co-citation analysis. Before we present

the details of these two approaches, we need clarify some definitions.

2.1 Risk definition

In SCRM literature, there exist various definitions of risk. In particular, it is not clear to

distinguish risk and uncertainty in supply chain operations. Risk sometimes is interpreted as

unreliable and uncertain resources creating supply chain interruption, whereas uncertainty can

be explained as matching risk between supply and demand in supply chain processes. We

believe that two dimensions are important in discussing risk: the outcome of risk impact and

expectation of risk sources. As in most literature, we also agree that risk issue is associated

with negative consequences of impact (Christopher and Lee, 2004, Paulson, 2005, Spekman

and Davis, 2005, Wagner and Bode, 2006). However, the second dimension, expectation of

risk is difficult to define. Should risk event be expected (as supplier has quality deficiencies

experienced by Robert Bosch GmbH, Wagner and Bode, 2006) or unexpected (such as wars,

strikes or terrorist attacks, Christopher and Lee, 2004; Kleindorfer and Saad, 2005; Quinn,

2006)? Furthermore, could the expectation be described by probability and how? These

questions have been debated for centuries and these are the reasons for having vague

definitions of risk.

In our opinion, a better definition of supply chain risk should refer to i) events with small

probability but may occur abruptly, and ii) these events bring substantial negative

consequences to the system. Consequently, we follow the SCRM definition from Tang

(2006a) “the management of supply chain risk through coordination or collaboration among

the supply chain partners so as to ensure profitability and continuity”.

2.2 Literature survey

Literature survey aims at understanding the important issues and mitigation techniques in

SCRM, including the current status and the development tendency in the area. Thus we

attempt to make a thorough search of articles in related publication databases. Articles are

selected from business review journals, operations management journals, as well as

management science or operations research (MS/OR) type of journals. The operations

management journals can be either conceptual modeling or quantitative modeling orientated,

in order to understand the practical needs as well as the theoretical development in SCRM. In

addition, journal is selected only if it is related to supply chain management. The list of

journal is given in Table 1.

Based on the description of definitions in previous section, we use search keywords supply

chain, supply chain risk or supply chain risk management together with risk or uncertainty.

After obtaining these articles, we use the criteria “high impact and low probability risk” to

filter the most relevant ones. Finally we have shortlisted and reviewed 138 articles between

the years of 1995 and the first half of 2008.

Table 1: List of journals reviewed

I: Business / Management Review

California Management Review

Decision Sciences

Harvard Business Review

Interfaces

MIT Sloan Management Review

Supply Chain Management Review

II: Operations management journals

International Journal of Logistics Management

International Journal of Logistics: Research and Application

International Journal of Operations & Production Management

International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management

Journal of Operations Management

Production and Operations Management

Supply Chain Management: An International Journal

III: MS/OR type journals

European Journal of Operational Research

International Journal of Production Economics

International Journal of Production Research

Journal of the Operational Research Society

Management Science

Omega

Operations Research

Production Planning & Control

2.3 Citation and co-citation study

The study result in literature survey is subject to the articles chosen within limited number of

journals selected. Thus we propose citation/co-citation analysis to comprehend our findings.

Citation/co-citation analysis is a quantitative method and it adopts bibliometric approach to

investigate the structures and evolution of research in a particular discipline, in this case,

SCRM. In particular, citation analysis is used to obtain some statistics data relating to

gathered publications. Meanwhile, co-citation approach serves very well for the purpose of

defining the intellectual structures in the area (Pilkington and Meredith, 2009).

Citation/co-citation analysis has its limitation in terms of the search method. In our case,

articles are gathered based on searching abstract and keywords, which are provided by either

authors or journal editors. However, the keywords used and abstract presented might not

always aligned with our needs, since authors often have own reasons and styles in

highlighting their articles. Thus, we could gather some articles irrelevant to the study, or we

may have missed some relevant articles. In order to reduce this problem, we limit our search

on Web of Sciences (WoS) database. Even though WoS has its limitation on the number of

journals in the database (as compared to Scopus for instance), it is very selective and covers

only peer-reviewed journals with high impact factors. As a result, WoS often includes high-

cited articles, which are more rigid in keywords assignment and abstract presentation.

We then use the same search keywords on WoS database and attempt to disclose SCRM

development during 1995 to 2009. The time horizon has been divided into three segments as

T1 (1995 – 1999), T2 (2000 – 2004), and T3 (2005 – 2009). In total 236 articles have been

obtained and examined by keywords co-occurrence. (cf. Pilkington & Meredith (2009) for

details on citation/co-citation analysis).

We have to note that the two search methods end with different number of articles, since we

have not performed any journal refinement in WoS search. Thus some journals which do not

have supply chain management as a main scope are included as well. Also WoS search has

been performed up till December 2009 as compared to June 2008 in literature survey. Finally

the applications BibExcel and Pajek are used for multidimensional scaling, cluster analysis

and factor analysis on co-citations approach.

2.4 Supply chain operations framework

Supply chain is a complicated production system. One important change in managing supply

chain is the emphasis on integrating activities into key supply chain processes instead of

individual functions. With regard of SCRM, managerial aspect may not be the same when

considering the inbound and outbound sides. For instance, when we discuss the risk in terms

of supplier selection, a major concern is to sustain the flow of raw material. However, on the

demand side, financial risk (such as customer’s possibility of bankruptcy) may appear more

important.

However, there was no clear evidence of flows interlinking as well as integrating activities in

previous SCRM studies, possibility due to its complexity. Therefore, in this paper, we will

identify the flows in the forms of material, financial and information. In addition, we will

analyze the system process of source (supply), make (production) and deliver (demand),

based on Supply Chain Operations Reference (SCOR) Model. We define material flow as

physical movement of products from suppliers to customers. Letters of credit, timely payment

of bills, bankruptcy, payment schedules, credit terms and suppliers’ contract fall under the

category of financial flows. Finally, information flow is used to keep all supply chain

elements updated and hence provides resources for decision making. Examples of information

flow are order status, order delivery and inventory status, among others. Similar thoughts

appear in Chopra and Sodhi (2004), Johnson (2001) and Spekman and Davis (2004), in which

the authors identify risks in form of other flows.

3. Results

3.1 An overview of literature survey

This section presents an overview of literature survey. The number of publication on each

year is indicated in Figure 1. Main issues discussed during year 1995 until 1999 include

financial risk management and operations strategies such as adoption of lean concept and

early supplier involvement (Table 2). Between years 2000 and 2003, the number of articles in

SCRM slowly increases. Main issues vary from operation plans to relationship of supply

chain partners. In the same time period, we also note the emerging of studies on information

technology and information flow. Meantime, we also note a rising discussion on globalization

risk associating with political and cultural practices.

Figure 1: Number of articles by year of publication (* up to June 2008)

A dramatic increase of publications starts in 2004, from which SCRM exhibits a steady rising

of interest from academic researchers and practitioners. Challenges and opportunities of

outsourcing to low cost countries are the favorite discussion topics. Others include supply

chain partner relationship, supply chain environmental, economy and political issues, and

growth of information sharing and security. Several studies on financial risk are also noted. A

summary of supply chain risk studies obtained from literature reviews is given in Table 2.

Table 2: Main issues discussed over the years by literature reviews findings

1995~1999 2000~2004 2005~2008

Operation strategies Operation strategies Financial risk management

Financial risk management Supply chain partners relationship Operation strategies

Information management Environmental

Political &cultural practices Information management

Environmental Outsourcing to low cost

countries

0 3

1 4 4

6 8

5

22 21

29

23

12

95 97 98 99 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08*

Our study also shows that main SCRM articles are found in the business or management

review journals (cf. Table 1) with 41%. The next group is operation management journals of

34%, among which most are conceptual models. After year 2000, more quantitative orientated

articles were published. However, the number of articles compared to qualitative orientated

ones is still considerably small. This indicates a growing awareness of SCRM in industry, but

still there is a lacking of quantitative models for system analysis and decision supporting.

3.2 Major risk issues

In this section we summarize the major risk issues according to our literature survey. For a

detail description of various risks in supply chain, we refer to Tang (2006a), although the

author presents a different study aspect. We further identify risks in material, information and

financial flows, which are necessary in operating a supply chain no matter how simple or

extended it is.

3.2.1 Material flow risk We first investigate the material flow which involves physical

movement within and between supply chain elements. We further categorize perspectives of

risk events into the stages of source, make and deliver. The results are summarized in Table 3.

Source involves inquiring physical products or services. Typical risk issues are single

sourcing risk, sourcing flexibility risk, supplier selection/outsourcing, supply product

monitoring/quality and supply capacity. Ericsson’s inability of reacting to a supplier’s fire

accident is the consequence of single sourcing risk (Peck et al., 2003). On the other hand,

flexible supplier sourcing has benefited firms in having alternatives in the case of capacity

constraint or hazardous disruption, but it may, as Kamrad and Siddique (2004) and LaLonde

(2000) note, still bring a hidden cost and managerial difficulties when switching suppliers.

Supplier selection/outsourcing increase complexity of the supply process. While outsourcing

in a way reduces manufacturing costs and improves responsiveness, on the other hand, it has

increased the variation of choices and concerns, hence selecting the right supplier has become

difficult. At the very least, supplier selection should consider supplier reliability, country risk,

transport reliability and supplier's supplier reliability (Levary, 2007). When a company

decides to outsource globally, it is most likely cost-driven. However, not long, the unseen cost

of outsourcing has eventually unveiled, such as various taxes, fluctuating currency exchange

rates, import/export duties, increasing transportation costs and suppliers audit costs (Crone,

2006; Fitzgerald, 2005; Kremic et al., 2006; Murphy, 2007; Stalk, 2006). Operational

performance such as transportation lead time could be another concern. In addition, lacking of

supply product monitoring creates quality associated problems such as product safety and

contamination (Fitzgerald, 2005). Supply capacity is another form of risk, if supply chain does

not have an early supplier involvement in new product development (Khan et al., 2008).

The major issues at make stage involve product and process design risk, production capacity

risk, and operational disruption. First, product and process design risk occurs with inability

to cope with changes, in particular associated with new product development stage (Khan et

al., 2008) and product launch activity (Handfield et al., 1999). The issue is significant since it

involves a big sum of capital spent in positioning products in the market. Production capacity

risk refers to technological, skills and quality capacities (Handfield et al., 1999). Finally,

operational disruption often happens due to operational contingencies, natural disasters and

political instability including terrorism (Kleindorfer and Saad, 2005).

On the deliver side, we have main risk issues as demand volatility/seasonality, balance of

unmet demand and excess inventory. These issues are all affected by the forecasting

difficulties due to seasonality, volatility of fads, new product adoptions, and short product life

(Johnson, 2001; Wong and Hvolby 2007). In addition, due to rapid technology evolvement

and customer demand changes, excess inventory may expose the obsolete risk, cf. the well-

known case of inventory write-off in Cisco (Narayanan & Raman, 2004).

In the above discussion, we focus on individual flow. We need to acknowledge that when

discussing risk, these flows are related and interconnected and therefore cases of one flow

disruption obstructing the others are common. From the supply chain scopes, logistics, price

volatility of commodity and alternative energy, environment degradation and awareness,

political risk, cultural and ethics, and supply chain partners relationship are other risk issues

need to be concerned.

Table 3: Material flow risk and mitigation techniques

Risk elements Qualitative Solution Quantitative Solution

Material Flow Risk

Source

Single Sourcing risk  Multiple sourcing (Norrman & Jansson, 2004)

 Alternative sourcing in and out of home country (Fitzgerald, 2005)

 Resilience supply chain (Christopher & Peck, 2004; Peck et al., 2003 )

Sourcing flexibility

risk  Resilience supply chain (Christopher &

Peck, 2004)

 Real option model for flexible sourcing (Kamrad & Siddique,

2004)

 Multivariate analysis DSS (Kremic et al., 2006)

 Procurement contract model (Martinez-de-Albeniz & Simchi-

Levi, 2005)

Supply product

monitoring / Quality  Alternative sourcing in and out of home

country (Fitzgerald, 2005)

Supply capacity  Alternative sourcing in and out of home country (Fitzgerald, 2005)

 Outsourcing (Johnson, 2001)

 Build a flexible web of partners (Johnson, 2001)

 Early supplier involvement (Handfield et al., 1999)

Supplier selection

/outsourcing  Alternative sourcing in and out of home

country (Fitzgerald, 2005)

 Avoid outsourcing/off-shoring: in-house / regional manufacturing (Crone, 2006;

Stalk, 2006)

 Decision-tree based optimization model (Berger et al., 2004)

 Foreign suppliers supply risk ranking model (Levary, 2007)

 Selection model based on cost, quality, responsiveness, strategic

issue and operating constraint

(Kirkwoord et al., 2005)

 Incentive conflicts and coordinating contracts model

(Agrell et al., 2004)

 Simulated-based decision support system (DSS) model for

collaboration level selection

Risk elements Qualitative Solution Quantitative Solution

(Cigolini & Rossi, 2006)

 Multivariate analysis DSS (Kremic et al., 2006)

Make

Product and process

design risk  ESI (Handfield et al., 1999; Khan et al.,

2008; Peck, 2005)

Production capacity

risk  ESI (Handfield et al., 1999; Khan et al.,

2008; Peck, 2005)

 Early warning system (Bovet, 2006)

 Options contract model (Fang & Whinston, 2007)

Operational disruption  ESI (Handfield et al., 1999; Khan et al., 2008; Peck, 2005)

 Alternative sourcing in and out of home country (Fitzgerald, 2005)

 Supply chain design (Kleindorfer & Saad, 2005)

 Operational hedging (Cudahy et al., 2008)

 Optimization model (Tomlin, 2006)

Deliver

Demand volatility/

Seasonality  Postponement strategy (Bovet, 2006)

 Adopting / improvising information technology (Lee, 2002, 2007)

 Mixed model (Lee, 2002, 2007)

 Aligning interest (Lee, 2004)

 Licensing (Johnson, 2001)

 Increase number of channels (Johnson, 2001)

 Build longer life products i.e. rolling mix (Johnson, 2001)

 Lean manufacturing (Abernathy, 2000; Geary et al., 2002 )

 Operational hedging (Cudahy et al., 2008)

 Application of best practices (Geary et al., 2002)

 Postponement model (Tang, 2006b)

 OPP relocating opportunities and QR simulation (Wong & Hvolby,

2007)

 Robust economic order quantity (EOQ) model (Sounderpandian, et

al., 2008; Yu, 1997)

 Optimization model for optimal operating policy (Li et al., 2001;

Wu, 2006))

 Linear dynamic system model (Zhang, 2006)

 Incentive conflicts and coordinating contracts model

(Agrell et al., 2004)

 Two-stage stochastic model using real option and financial options

(Ding et al., 2007)

 Options contract model (Fang and Whinston, 2007)

 Multi stage stochastic model (Goh et al., 2007)

 Equilibrium modeling to counter supply and demand risk (Nagurney

et al., 2005)

Balance of unmet

demand and excess

inventory

 Lean manufacturing (Abernathy, 2000; Geary et al., 2002)

 Reduce inventory holding (Jüttner, 2005)

 Propose application of “demand-at-risk” (Sodhi, 2005)

 Propose application of “inventory-at-risk” (Sodhi, 2005)

 Options contract model (Fang & Whinston, 2007)

 Improvise contract with aligned incentives (Narayanan & Raman,

2004)

 Robust economic order quantity (EOQ) model (Yu, 1997)

 Value-at-Risk model (Tapiero, 2005, 2007)

Supply chain scope

Logistics  Reduce transport content:- reduce the cumulative length of SC (Crone, 2006)

 Use transportation more efficiently:- more-efficient consolidated shipments or

 Financial modeling (Hauser, 2003)

Risk elements Qualitative Solution Quantitative Solution

use third party provider (Crone, 2006)

Price volatility of

commodity/alternative

energy

 Operational hedging (Cudahy et al., 2008)

Environment

degradation and

awareness

 Supplier initiatives evaluation (Cousins et al., 2004)

 Invest in environmental protection effort (Economy & Lieberthal, 2007)

Political risk  Operational hedging (Cudahy et al., 2008; Johnson, 2001)

Cultural and ethics

Supply chain partners

relationship  Discount contract module (Cachon, 2004)

 Improvise contract with aligned incentives (Narayanan & Raman, 2004)

 E-business loyalty (Reichheld & Shefter, 2000)

 Simulated-based decision support system (DSS) for collaboration

level selection (Cigolini & Rossi,

2006)

3.2.2 Financial flow risk Financial flow risk involves the inability to settle payments and

improper investment. The common risks are exchange rate risk, price and cost risk, financial

strength of supply chain partners and financial handling/practice. The results are illustrated

in Table 4.

Table 4: Financial flow risk and mitigation techniques

Risk elements Qualitative Solution Quantitative Solution

Financial Flow Risk

Exchange rate risk  Operational hedging (Johnson, 2001)  Flexible sourcing model (Kouvelis, 1999)

 Two-stage stochastic model using real option and financial options

(Ding et al., 2007)

 Multi stage stochastic model (Goh et al., 2007)

 Optimization model for optimal operating policy (Li et al., 2001)

Price and cost risk  Framework to enable SC driven profit growth (Bovet, 2006)

 Avoid low cost country (Stalk, 2006)

 Real options application (van Putten & MacMillan, 2004)

Financial strength of

supply chain partners  Early-payment programs (Hartley-

Urquhart, 2006)

 Stock-price benchmarking (Hendricks & Singhal, 2005)

Financial handling

and practice  Early-payment programs (Hartley-

Urquhart, 2006)

Research on exchange rate risk can be found at Li et al. (2001), Carr (1999), Goh et al. (2007)

and Kouvelis (1999), among others. With a global supply chain as a study scope, exchange

rate has a major influence on firm’s after tax profit, supplier selection, market development

and other operation decisions. Price and cost risk can be strongly attached with exchange rate,

but its fluctuation may also be caused by scarcity of raw materials (Papadakis, 2006).

Hendricks and Singhal (2005) study financial flow vulnerability and long term effect of

supply chain disruptions with focus on financial strength of supply chain partners. Their

empirical study also shows this type of risk can be evaluated based on the evidence of

increasing equity risk, financial leverage and asset risk. The vulnerability of financial strength

of a supply chain member, may easily affect the entire supply chain network (Peck et al.,

2003; Tang, 2006b; Hartley-Urquhart, 2006), referring Asia's financial crisis in 1997 as case

in point. Finally Hartley-Urquhart (2006) and Kerr (2006) discuss the risk arising from

financial handling and practice. For instance, an increasing velocity and quantity of payment

should complicate the financial flow and need urgent attention. Lack of control and visibility

of procure-to-pay process may cause alleged illegal collection of excess vendor markdown.

3.2.3 Information flow risk Value adding activities in a supply chain is often

triggered by information flows such as demand, inventory status, order fulfillment, product

and process design changes and capacity status. One may also look at information flow as the

bonding agent between material flow and financial flow. Here we obtain issues such as

information accuracy, information system security and disruption, intellectual property and

information outsourcing risk (cf. Table 5).

The risk of information accuracy may cause by information accessibility, information

efficiency and data accuracy (Lee, 2002, 2004; Geary et al., 2002; Raman et al., 2001;

Giermanski, 2000; Bradley, 2001; Faisal et al., 2007). Inaccurate information should further

affect decision making in supply chain. The threats of information system security and

disruption could be internally due to ill-manage system, or externally by hackers and nature

disaster (Faisal et al., 2007). The information system risk can also be considered at

application, organizational and inter-organizational levels (Finch, 2004). Intellectual property

risk is associated with increasing information flow in supply chain network and in the

meantime inability of protecting information sharing, for instance trade secret exposure

(Barry, 2004). Information outsourcing allows company to focus on the core-competence.

However, it also increases risk of opportunism of vendors, information security apprehension,

hidden costs, loss of control, service debasement, disagreements, disputes and litigation, and

poaching (Faisal et al., 2007).

Table 5: Information flow risk and mitigation techniques

Risk elements Qualitative Solution Quantitative Solution

Information Flow Risk

Information accuracy

 Aligning interest (Lee, 2004)

 Implementation of CPFR, ECR, VMI concepts (Faisal et al., 2007)

 Chaos theory (Bradley, 2001)

 Application of best practices (Geary et al., 2002)

 Improvise inventory data handling and policies (Raman et al., 2001)

Information system

security and

disruption

 Contingency planning (Finch, 2004)

 Assess and manage IS of the firm and SC partners (Finch, 2004)

Intellectual property

Information

outsourcing

 ‘Value-added’ outsourcing, ‘Co-sourcing’ and create ‘spin-off’ with vendors (Faisal et al.,

2007)

 Improve visibility (Christopher & Lee, 2004)

3.3 Results of citation and co-citation studies

Citation analysis shows similar trends of rising publications during the three time segments,

based on both core articles (articles obtained from database search) and cited references

(Figure 2). A significant increase occurs in 2007. More interestingly, the cited references

show steady increase in 1990s with a dramatic rise in 2000. This believes resulted from the

arising vulnerability issues, such as the Asian economic crisis in 1997.

Figure 2: Development of core articles and cited articles for SCRM in 1995 ~ 2009

By using the co-citation analysis, we note the emergency of various clusters between three

time segments T1, T2 and T3 with number of cluster 3, 11 and 9, respectively. The cluster is

defined from the keywords co-occurrence analysis. The results indicate that the intellectual

structure of SCRM field has made statistically significant increase in T2 and research has

evolved from vague general issues of supply chain disruptions towards more specific yet

global perspectives of risk. This can be seen in Figures 3, 4 and 5. In the time segment T1

(1995-1999), distinct areas such as operation management (T1-1), inventory theory (T1-2)

and lean/product introduction (T1-3) are the only clusters, which are also studied

independently. In the time segment T2 (2000-2004), more clusters appear and some weak

links have been established between clusters for risk issues (cf. Figure 4). In the time segment

T3 (2005-2009), the SCRM discipline shows further development, since the clusters are more

integrated and many exhibit a strong connection with integrated SCRM (T3-1) and liability

management (T3-3) as well as inventory management (T3-5).

Figure 3: Keywords co-occurrence cluster for T1 (T1-1:operation management; T1-2:inventory theory; T1-3:Lean, product introduction)

Figure 4: Keywords co-occurrence cluster for T2

(T2-1:innovation, logistics; T2-2:interfaces, EDI; T2-3:production planning & management; T2-4: production planning system; T2-5:organizational; T2-6:management strategies; T2-7:policies; T2-

8:MRP; T2-9:facility planning; T2-10:contract; T2-11: cost)

Figure 5: Keywords co-occurrence cluster for T3

(T3-1:integrated SCRM; T3-2:inventory models; T3-3:liability management; T3-4:human factors; T3-

5: inventory management; T3-6:earnings & returns; T3-7:agricultural; T3-8:financial risk; T3-9:Gen.

Motor case)

Table 6: Main issues discussed over the years by co-citation analysis

T1 (1995~1999) T2(2000~2004) T3(2005~2009)

Performance Innovation Management

Successes Industry Systems

Power Logistics Model

Entry EDI Performance

Strategies Model Networks

Order Management Information

Quantity discount Information Product

Inventory Organizations Integration

Management Interface Design

Coordination Perceptions Products

With co-citation analysis, we also obtain the top ten most popular keywords (top vertices)

used in articles (Table 6). The keyword performance has been lately replaced by Innovation

and then management. By observing the change of these keywords, we can see the changing

attitude of researchers and practitioners towards SCRM. We note that in T1, popular vertices

such as performance and successes are associated with the reaction of risk impacts. In T2,

technologies (vertices such as innovation, logistics and EDI) are adopted to prevent risk,

whereas in T3 attention has been shifted to management and also from system perspective.

The study of SCRM thus has been changed from passively reacting to risk events to actively

managing them, and the focus has been changed from local to system aspect. In addition,

Table 6 illustrates growing importance of information, cf. the appearance and rank of the

vertex information as in the second and third columns.

3.4 Remarks

Dawning of this century shows opportunities of applying modern supply chain concepts in

SCRM, according to our literature survey. Enterprise Risk Management studies the variance

between business strategies outcome and objectives (Dickinson, 2001; Chapman, 2006)

whereas Business Contingency Planning prepares oneself for possibility of future emergency

or disruption (Rice and Caniato, 2003; Sheffi 2005; Carter and Rogers, 2008). There are also

rising discussions on Business Vulnerability (Sheffi 2005; Svensson 2002; Peck et al., 2003)

which to some extent triggers the realization of Supply Chain Resilient (Rice and Caniato

2003; Sheffi and Rice, 2005; Christopher and Peck, 2004; Carter and Rogers, 2008). These

concepts revolve more on proactive risk responses rather than on preventive risk actions. The

literature survey brings a consistent result as from the co-citation cluster analysis.

Nevertheless, the literatures on SCRM are mainly based on qualitative approach and only a

small fraction falls under the category of quantitative approach. According to the literature

survey, the majority of studies are conceptual models, overview and exploratory reviews,

empirical studies (industrial cases, interviews and surveys). Among 138 papers, 78 % belong

to this category. Many review articles cover some perspectives (but with different dimensions

compared to this paper) of supply chain risk. Frameworks have also been developed to

explore the risk issues in supply chains and further propose mitigation techniques. A big

portion of articles cover the sourcing issue with or without the combination of other supply

chain elements. The empirical studies also have a strong focus on sourcing policies. In

addition most discussed and implemented methods are associated with material flow

disruption risk, this can be illustrated as large number of references in Table 3 whereas

relatively small numbers in Tables 4 and 5.

Only a quarter of articles in literature propose quantitative models in risk analysis, which

again can be seen in Tables 3, 4 and 5. In particular, quantitative methods are missing in

information flow analysis. In the literature survey, typical quantitative approaches are

optimization, multivariate analysis, options contracts model, stochastic programming and

simulation, real option.

4. Discussions and conclusions

In this paper, we have reviewed recent literature relevant to SCRM. The research tendency of

the field has been investigated. Empirical evidences have shown severe consequences after

supply chain disruptions, such as lose of profit, damage of market share, etc. This leads to a

general increasing interest in SCRM. The need of having an integrated view of SCRM has

been growing strong, according to the co-citation analysis. SCRM definitely needs an

integration of knowledge from multiple researches disciplinary. In addition, the future

analysis tools should aim at proactively managing supply chain risk.

Major risk issues and risk mitigation techniques have been investigated based on material,

cash and information flows. The summary is presented in Tables 3, 4 and 5, which further

indicate some research gaps. Most literature still focuses on material flow issues in risk

management, in particular with supplier selection. Some efforts have been made to integrate

material and cash flows by adapting financial option theory. According to our literature

survey, there is a lacking of models in analyzing risk associated with information flows,

possibly due to missing of appropriate modeling techniques in this area.

The study also indicates a larger number of publications in business journals. In addition, the

existing literature includes mainly descriptive and conceptual models rather than quantitative

models. Hence, there is a pressing need (or awareness) of studying risk management issues

from industrial practice, whereas there is a missing gap and potential in developing

quantitative models to make hard decisions in managing the risk.

Regarding the possible modeling techniques and approaches in this research area, we propose

the following potential methods in developing quantitative models for risk management.

Robust planning: This planning approach aims at exploring the uncertainty inherent in a

supply chain, and developing optimization decisions which provide more predictable results.

For instance at strategic decision level, how to design a supply chain so that key performance

indicators have stable outcomes for different production scenarios. At operational level, we

should investigate which control policy needs less modification with a changing production

environment. Also it is of interests to investigate the institutional aspects of supply chain,

namely, with updated conditions and institutional constraints, how the previous supply chain

decisions can be modified. This involves not only the robustness of a decision, but also the

(re)computational efficiency of the optimization algorithms. One advantage of this approach

is due to its proactive planning capability.

Revenue management: As we have mentioned in this paper, most supply chain risk study

focus on supply side. But with a supply disruption, we can still use different pricing policies

to redistribute customer’s demand for different products so as to mitigate the supply risk.

Such a policy was used by Dell when they faced a chips supply problem in Taiwan. In this

case, revenue management can be used to develop pricing policy and investigate how to

allocate and relocate capacity to different market segments when supply chain encounters a

disruption.

Agency theory: supply chain disruption often creates asymmetric and incomplete information.

In addition, goal confliction, adverse selection, moral hazard can be frequent phenomenon in

supply chain which further damages the supply chain performance. Risk sharing is often

suggested to reduce the vulnerability of a supply chain, in both cases of normal operation and

disruption. Different incentive policies are also used in practice (for instance cash donation by

LG to its customer during the China earthquake 2008) to recover the cash flows in a supply

chain during crisis. Agency theory can therefore be appropriate to understand inter-

relationship between supply chains, and thus maintain a system perspective in management.

Option theory: Option nowadays has been used as a standard tool to buffer financial risks in a

company. Integrating real and financial options should definitely enhance the performance of

a supply chain, in particularly in a global production environment. This should concern not

only strategic/tactic decisions such as supplier selection, supplier switch, but also operational

decisions such as speculation inventory, invoicing currency etc. Thus it provides chances to

integrated different flows in supply chain.

System dynamics: This modeling approach is often used to understand and analyze a supply

chain and its inherent control policies. A typical example is applying such method to

investigate the bullwhip effect in a supply chain. It is important to understand the disperse

mechanism after a disruption “shock” is received in a supply chain. How long it will take to

translate disruption information to other nodes of a supply chain? How long it will take to

recover from a shock with different control policies? Moreover, a supply chain may overreact

and build excess capacity during a risk event. Control theory and system dynamics approach

could be very promising in modeling risk information flows.

Reverse logistics: Reverse logistics has captured substantial attention in recent years due to

environment legislation and economic incentives. In auto industry, remanufacturing return

cores has been used as an alternative to supply service market. Can we use the similar

business concept and use return products as a backup (of materials) in a supply chain? This

should provide a chance to enhance supply reliability and in the meantime reduce capital tied

up.

Understanding comprehensively what risk is, where risk exists, and how to mitigate risk

definitely exhibits an additional research challenge in supply chain management. However,

with an increasing awareness of risk management issues, both from industrial and academic

aspects, we believe that developing risk management models should improve a supply chain

competence in the new business environment and definitely it is a promising and important

research area in operations management.

References

1. Abernathy, F.H., Dunlop, J.T., Hammond, J.H. and Weil, D., (2000). Control Your Inventory

in a World of Lean Retailing. Harvard Business Review, Nov/Dec 2000, Vol. 78 Issue 6, 169-176.

2. Agrell, P.J., Lindroth, R. and Norrman, A., (2004). Risk, information and incentives in

telecom supply chains. International Journal of Production Economics, 90 (2004) 1–16.

3. Barry, J., (2004). Supply chain risk in an uncertain global supply chain environment.

International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management, 34/9 (2004), 695-697.

4. Berger, P.D., Gerstenfeld, A. and Zeng, A.Z., (2004). How many suppliers are best? A

decision-analysis approach. Omega, 32 (2004) 9 – 15.

5. Bovet, D., (2006). The Self-Funding Supply Chain. Supply Chain Management Review,

Jul/Aug2006, Vol. 10 Issue 5, 9-10.

6. Bradley, P., (2001). The Certainty of Uncertainty. Supply Chain Management Review,

Mar/Apr2001, Vol. 5 Issue 2, 105-106.

7. Buzacott, J.A., (1971). The Role of Inventory in Flow-line Production Systems. International

Journal of Production Research, 9(4) 425-436.

8. Cachon, G.P., (2004). The Allocation of Inventory Risk in a Supply Chain: Push, Pull, and

Advance-Purchase Discount Contracts. Management Science, Vol. 50, No. 2, February 2004, 222–

238.

9. Carr, N.G., (1999). Managing in the Euro Zone. Harvard Business Review, Jan/Feb 1999, Vol.

77 Issue 1, p47-48.

10. Carter, C.R. and Rogers, D.S., (2008). A framework of sustainable supply chain management:

moving toward new theory. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics

Management, Vol. 38 No. 5, 2008, 360-387.

11. Chopra, S. and Sodhi, M.S., (2004). Managing Risk To Avoid Supply-Chain Breakdown. MIT

Sloan Management Review, Fall 2004, Vol. 46 Issue 1, p53-62.

12. Christopher, M. and Lee, H., (2004). Mitigating supply chain risk through improved

confidence. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management, Vol. 34 No.

5, 2004, 388-396.

13. Christopher, M. and Peck, H., (2004). Building the Resilient Supply Chain. International

Journal of Logistics Management, Vol. 15 No. 2, 2004, 1-13.

14. Cigolini, R. and Rossi, T., (2006). A note on supply risk and inventory outsourcing.

Production Planning & Control, Vol. 17, No. 4, June 2006, 424–437.

15. Cousins, P.D., Lamming, R.C. and Bowen, F., (2004). The role of risk in environment-related

supplier initiatives. International Journal of Operations & Production Management, Vol. 24 No. 6,

2004, 554-565.

16. Crone, M., (2006). Are Global Supply Chains too Risky?: A Practitioner's Perspective. Supply

Chain Management Review, May/Jun2006, Vol. 10 Issue 4, p28-35.

17. Cudahy, G., Mulani, N. and Cases, C., (2008). Mastering Global Operations in Multipolar

World. Supply Chain Management Review, Mar2008, Vol. 12 Issue 2, p22-29.

18. Ding, Q., Dong, L. and Kouvelis, P., (2007). On the Integration of Production and Financial

Hedging Decisions in Global Markets. Operations Research, Vol. 55, No. 3, May–June 2007, 470–

489.

19. Economy, E. and Lieberthal, K., (2007). Scorched Earth. Harvard Business Review, Jun 2007,

Vol. 85 Issue 6, p88-96.

20. Faisal, M.N., Banwet, D.K. and Shankar, R., (2007). Information risks management in supply

chains: an assessment and mitigation framework. Journal of Enterprise Information Management,

Vol. 20 No. 6, 2007, 677-699.

21. Fang, F. and Whinston, A., (2007). Option Contracts and Capacity Management—Enabling

Price Discrimination under Demand Uncertainty. Production and Operations Management, Vol.

16, No. 1, January-February 2007, 125–137.

22. Finch, P., (2004). Supply chain risk management. Supply Chain Management: An

International Journal, Vol. 9 (2) 2004, 183-196.

23. Fitzgerald, K.R., (2005). Big Savings, But Lots of Risk. Supply Chain Management Review,

Dec 2005, Vol. 9 Issue 9, p16-20.

24. Geary, S., Childerhouse, P. and Towill, D., (2002). Uncertainty and the Seamless Supply

Chain. Supply Chain Management Review, Jul/Aug2002, Vol. 6 Issue 4, 52-61.

25. Giermanski, J.R., (2000). A "Black Hole" on the Border. Supply Chain Management Review,

July/August 2000, 17-20.

26. Goh, M., Lim, J.Y.S. and Meng, F., (2007). A stochastic model for risk management in global

supply chain networks. European Journal of Operational Research, 182 (2007) 164–173.

27. Handfield, R.B., Ragatz, G.L., Petersen, K.J. and Monczka, R.M., (1999). Involving Suppliers

In New Product Development. California Management Review, Vol 42. No. 1, Fall 1999.

28. Hartley-Urquhart, R., (2006). Managing the Financial Supply Chain. Supply Chain

Management Review, September 2006, 18-25.

29. Hauser, L.M., (2003). Risk-Adjusted Supply Chain Management. Supply Chain Management

Review, Nov/Dec 2003, Vol. 7 Issue 6, 64-71.

30. Hendricks, K.B. and Singhal, V.R., (2005). An Empirical Analysis of the Effect of Supply

Chain Disruptions on Long-Run Stock Price Performance and Equity Risk of the Firm. Production

and Operations Management, Vol. 14, No. 1, Spring 2005, 35–52.

31. Johnson, M.E., (2001). Learning from Toys: Lessons in Managing Supply Chain Risk From

the Toy Industry. California Management Review, Vol 43, No. 3, Spring 2001.

32. Jüttner, U., (2005). Supply chain risk management: Understanding the business requirements

from a practitioner perspective. The International Journal of Logistics Management, Vol. 16 No. 1,

2005, 120-141.

33. Kamrad, B. and Siddique, A., (2004). Supply Contracts, Profit Sharing, Switching, and

Reaction Options. Management Science, Vol. 50, No. 1, January 2004, 64–82.

34. Kerr, J., (2006). Streamlining the Cash Flow. Supply Chain Management Review, October

2006, S25-S31.

35. Khan, O., Christopher, M. and Burnes, B., (2008). The impact of product design on supply

chain risk: a case study. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management,

Vol. 38 No. 5, 2008, 412-432.

36. Kirkwood, C.W., Slaven, M.P. and Maltz, A., (2005). Improving supply chain configuration

decisions at IBM. Interfaces, Vol. 35, No. 6, November-December 2005, 460-473.

37. Kleindorfer, P.R. and Saad, G.H., (2005). Managing Disruption Risks in Supply Chains.

Production and Operations Management, Vol. 14, No. 1, Spring 2005, 53–68.

38. Kouvelis, P., (1999). Global sourcing strategies under exchange rate uncertainty. Quantitative

Models for Supply Chain Management, Eds. Tayur, S., Ganeshan, R. and Magazine, M.;

International series in operations research & management science; 17, Massachusetts: Kluwer

Academic Publishers, 1999.

39. Kremic, T., Tukel, O.I. and Rom, W.O., (2006). Outsourcing decision support: a survey of

benefits, risks, and decision factors. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal, 11/6

(2006), 467–482.

40. LaLonde, B.J., (2004). A Crisis in Transportation. Supply Chain Management Review,

November/December 2004, 7-8.

41. LaLonde, B.J., (2000). The Cost of Switching. Supply Chain Management Review,

March/April 2000; 11-12.

42. Lee, H.L., (2004). The Triple-A Supply Chain. Harvard Business Review, October 2004; 102-

112.

43. Lee, H.L., (2002). Aligning Supply Chain Strategies with Product Uncertainties. California

Management Review, Vol 44, No. 3, Spring 2002.

44. Lee, H.L., (2007). Have Your Cake*. Supply Chain Management Review, April 2007, Vol. 11

Issue 3, 26.

45. Levary, R.R., (2007). Ranking foreign suppliers based on supply risk. Supply Chain

Management: An International Journal, 12/6 (2007) 392–394.

46. Li, L., Porteus, E.L. and Zhang, H., (2001). Optimal Operating Policies for Multiplant

Stochastic Manufacturing Systems in a Changing Environment. Management Science, Vol. 47, No.

11, November 2001, 1539–1551.

47. Martínez-de-Albéniz, V. and Simchi-Levi, D., (2005). A Portfolio Approach to Procurement

Contracts. Production and Operations Management, Vol. 14, No. 1, Spring 2005, 90–114.

48. Murphy, S., (2007). The Supply Chain in 2008. Supply Chain Management Review, December

2007; 4-7.

49. Nagurney, A., Cruz, J., Dong, J. and Zhang, D., (2005). Supply chain networks, electronic

commerce, and supply side and demand side risk. European Journal of Operational Research, 164

(2005) 120–142.

50. Narayanan, V.G. and Raman, A., (2004). Aligning Incentives in Supply Chains. Harvard

Business Review, Nov 2004, Vol. 82 Issue 11, 94-102.

51. Norrman, A. and Jansson, U., (2004). Ericsson’s proactive supply chain risk management

approach after a serious sub-supplier accident. International Journal of Physical Distribution &

Logistics Management, 34/5 (2004); 434-456.

52. Papadakis, I.S., (2006). Financial performance of supply chains after disruptions: an event

study. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal, 11/1 (2006) 25–33.

53. Paulson, U., (2005). Developing a Supply Chain Flow Risk Model. NOFOMA 2005

Conference, Copenhagen, 9-10 June 2005.

54. Peck, H., Abley, J., Christopher, M., Haywood, M., Saw, R., Rutherford, C. and Strathern, M.,

(2003). Creating Resilient Supply Chains. Cranfield University, Cranfield School of Management,

UK.

55. Peck, H., (2005). Drivers of supply chain vulnerability: an integrated framework.

International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management, Vol. 35 No. 4, 2005, 210-

232.

56. Peck, H., (2006). Reconciling supply chain vulnerability, risk and supply chain management.

International Journal of Logistics: Research and Application, Vol. 9, No. 2, june 2006, 127-142.

57. Pilkington, A., Meredith, J., (2009). The evolution of the intellectual structure of operations

management – 1980-2006: A citation / co-citation analysis. Journal of Operations Management,

Vol. 27, No. 3, 2009, 185-202.

58. Poirier, C.C., Swink, M.L. and Quinn, F.J., (2007). Global Survey of Supply Chain Progress.

Supply Chain Management Review, October 2007; 20-27.

59. Quinn, F., (2006). Risky Business. Supply Chain Management Review, May/Jun 2006, Vol. 10

Issue 4, 5-5.

60. Raman, A., DeHoratius, N. and Ton, Z., (2001). The Achilles' Heel of Supply Chain

Management. Harvard Business Review, May 2001, Vol. 79 Issue 5, 25-28.

61. Reichheld, F. F. and Schefter, P., (2000). E-Loyalty: Your Secret Weapon on the Web.

Harvard Business Review, July/August 2000, 105-113.

62. Rice, J.B. and Caniato, F., (2003). Building a secure and resilient supply network. Supply

Chain Management Review, Sep/Oct 2003, Vol. 7 Issue 5, 22-30.

63. Sheffi, Y. and Rice, J.B., (2005). A Supply Chain View of the Resilient Enterprise. MIT Sloan

Management Review, Fall 2005, Vol. 47 Issue 1, 41-48.

64. Snyder, L.V., Daskin, M.S. and Teo, C.P., (2007). The stochastic location model with risk

pooling. European Journal of Operational Research, 179 (2007) 1221–1238.

65. Sodhi, M.S., (2005). Managing Demand Risk in Tactical Supply Chain Planning for a Global

Consumer Electronics Company. Production and Operations Management, Vol. 14, No. 1, Spring

2005, 69–79.

66. Sounderpandian, J., Prasad, S. and Madan, M., (2008). Supplies from developing countries:

Optimal order quantities under loss risks. Omega, 36 (2008) 122 – 130.

67. Spekman, R.E. and Davis, E.W., (2004). Risky business: expanding the discussion on risk

and the extended enterprise. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics

Management, Vol. 34 No. 5, 2004, 414-433.

68. Stalk, G., (2006). The Costly Secret of China Sourcing. Harvard Business Review, Feb 2006,

Vol. 84 Issue 2, 64-66.

69. Svensson, G., (2002). A conceptual framework of vulnerability in firms' inbound and

outbound logistics flows. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management,

Vol. 32 No.2, 2002, 110-134.

70. Tang, C.S., (2006a). Perspectives in supply chain risk management. International Journal of

Production Economics, 103 (2006) 451–488.

71. Tang, C.S., (2006b). Robust Strategies for Mitigating Supply Chain Disruptions.

International Journal of Logistics: Research and Application, Vol. 9, No.1, March 2006, 33-45.

72. Tapiero, C.S., (2007). Consumers risk and quality control in a collaborative supply chain.

European Journal of Operational Research, 182 (2007) 683–694.

73. Tomlin, B., (2006). On the Value of Mitigation and Contingency Strategies for Managing

Supply Chain Disruption Risks. Management Science, Vol. 52, No. 5, May 2006, 639–657.

74. van Putten, A.B., and MacMillan, I.C., (2004). Making Real Options Really Work. Harvard

Business Review, Dec 2004, Vol. 82 Issue 12, 134-141.

75. Wagner, S. M. and Bode, C., (2006). An empirical investigation into supply chain

vulnerability. Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management, 12 (2006) 301-312.

76. Wong, C.Y. and Hvolby, H.H., (2007). Coordinated responsiveness for volatile toy supply

chains. Production Planning & Control, Vol. 18, No. 5, July 2007, 407–419.

77. Wu, Y., (2006). Robust optimization applied to uncertain production loading problems with

import quota limits under the global supply chain management environment. International Journal

of Production Research, Vol. 44, No. 5, 1 March 2006, 849–882.

78. Yu, G., (1997). Robust Economic Order Quantity Models. European Journal of Operational

Research, 100 (1997) 482-493.

79. Zhang, F., (2006). A note on supply risk and inventory outsourcing. Production Planning &

Control, Vol. 17, No. 8, December 2006, 796–806.

Article 4 .pdf

White Paper SCRLC Emerging Risks in the Supply Chain 2013 Produced by the Supply Chain Risk Leadership Council (www.scrlc.com) Legal Disclaimer

Whilst all reasonable care has been taken to ensure the information contained within this paper is accurate we do not guarantee its accuracy or completeness. We are not responsible for any errors or omissions or for the results obtained from the use of such information. We assume no liability in connection with this publication including any recommendations contained herein.

1

Contents

 Page 1 Contents  Page 2 & 3 Introduction  Page 3 Climate Change  Page 4 Global, JLT, Lean Supply Chains  Page 5 Increasing Social Inequity and Potential Supply Chain

Risks  Page 6 Gender Imbalance and Future Supply Chain Risk  Page 6 Increased Population  Page 7 Population Migration: Urban vs. Rural  Page 8 Global Democratization Movement  Page 9 Dependence on Information Technology  Page 9 Government Financial Crises  Page 10 Government Social Policies  Page 10 Global capital/economic/banking system disruptions  Page 11 Social Media Threats  Page 11 Growth of Mega Cities & Ageing Population  Page 12 Ageing Population  Page 13 Appendix 1 – Sources of Supply Chain Insights  Page 13 Appendix 2 – References

2

Introduction “Change Is The Law of Life, and Those Who Look Only to the Past or Present Are Certain to Miss The Future”……. John F. Kennedy The frequency and scale of major supply chain impacts from a variety of disruptive events continues to grow across the globe. Recently, a variety of events such as Hurricane Sandy, the Japanese earthquake/tsunami, floods in Thailand, Arab Spring protests, the Occupy Wall Street movement, and more have clearly demonstrated that significant impacts to businesses can, and will, result. Recognizing the potentially devastating impacts posed by a multitude of diverse and growing risks, every smart business must consider and plan for unknown disruptions if they wish to avoid, or at least mitigate to the maximum extent possible, the damage that otherwise could occur to their enterprise. It’s widely recognized that global supply chains and transport networks form the backbone of the global economy, fuelling trade, consumption and economic growth. These include the food and pharmaceutical supply chains which are critical to human life itself. Trends such as outsourcing, globalization, lean processes and the geographical concentration of production have made supply chain networks more efficient, but have also changed, and increased, their risk profile. Many enterprises have risk management protocols that can address localized disruptions. However, recent high-profile events have highlighted how risks outside the control of individual enterprises can have cascading and unintended consequences that cannot be mitigated by one organization alone. And the damage to individual companies, nations, and/or the global economy can be significant. The leaders of corporate boards and governments are increasingly understanding and being held accountable for tackling supply chain risk. This paper is designed to be a catalyst to encourage more thought and interaction on the topic of emerging supply chain risks. The contributors to it do not pretend to have identified all the emerging risks with respect to supply chains (these will in any case vary from one enterprise to the next) but we want to use this paper to encourage others to contribute their ideas. As a group, we have also discussed at length how to define a risk as emerging. In the end we decided this was not as important as recognising that supply chain risks will arise. We also hope it will encourage enterprises to look beyond the short term cost savings of their supply chain decisions to ensure they factor in longer term risks that could threaten their performance if not their survival. The SCRLC has drawn up Supply Chain Risk Management recommendations on www.scrlc.com which offers useful advice in this area. (Note: this website also provides information on the purpose, goals, and membership of the SCRLC) We believe it is critical that enterprises, in addressing emerging supply chain risks, move from being reactionary to being proactive and resilient, KNOWING that at some point, somehow, and perhaps frequently, your business will be impacted by a supply chain disruption of one form or another. Therefore, it is no longer sufficient to tackle many issues once they have started to directly affect your enterprise but they should be factored into your overall supply chain planning and operational processes in advance, with plans in place to respond quickly and effectively when these risks become reality. The SCRLC has adopted a Supply Chain Risk Management (SCRM) Maturity Model to easily portray the levels of maturity that companies can measure their SCRM

3

posture against. Where does your company stand today? Are you prepared to face the types of emerging risks that are described?

Supply Chain Risk Management (SCRM) Maturity

Determines an Enterprise’s Capacity to Address Emerging Risks What follows is a sampling of some of the emerging supply chain risk areas that members of the SCRLC recognize and wish to share with a broader audience. Again, it is not meant to be all-inclusive nor specific to any particular business, industry, or nation. Rather it is simply meant to be thought-provoking: could such emerging issues affect your business? How? What are you doing to prepare? Is anyone even thinking about such issues? Where does your company’s SCRM capacity fit on the Maturity Model? We hope you find our efforts of use in considering, planning for, and responding to the risks we all face in an increasingly global and connected world. 1. Climate Change Independent of the cause, it is widely recognised that climate patterns appear to have changed on a global basis, particularly in their variance from past norms. This is creating a number of different issues which threaten supply chains. For example there have been unusual flood events in certain parts of the world and droughts in other areas. The impact has been seen in agricultural production in 2012 with the issues in the US and Europe due to the different extremes of the weather with in one case there being too little rain and in the other there being too much. There have also been other severe climate effects such as winter storms in terms of wind damage and snow/ice conditions. These changes given they continue in the medium term will also create population shifts and further political challenges due among other aspects to the shortage of food and water in certain areas of the world. It should be noted again that these risks also present opportunities, for example in the Mc Kinsey Quarterly July 2008(Chris Brickman and Drew Ungerman) “Our analysis suggests that for consumer goods makers, high-tech players, and other manufacturers, between 40 and 60 percent of a company’s carbon footprint resides upstream in its supply chain—from raw materials, transport, and packaging to the energy consumed in manufacturing processes. For retailers, the figure can be 80 percent. Therefore, any significant carbon-abatement activities will require collaboration with supply chain partners, first to comprehensively understand the emissions associated with products, and then to analyse abatement opportunities systematically.”

SCRM maturity level Risks Reactionary All risks Awareness Traditional risks Proactive Non-traditional risks Integrated "black swan” events

Resilient Major emerging trends/risks

4

How does a SCRM practitioner respond to these climate changes? There are a number of actions that can be taken both in the short and the longer term. One of the basic checks that can be made is to understand whether any of your key supplier locations are likely to be affected by floods or other adverse weather events. This should also include consideration of the basic inputs to the production processes such as the adequacy of the water supply or other aspects of the utilities infrastructure that might be adversely impacted by weather conditions. Having established key supplier locations you can then also look at Business Continuity Planning in terms of its adequacy this can both within your own enterprise but also in terms of the supplier do they have further production sites with adequate capacity. As has been observed recently those companies that were better prepared for issues such as the Thailand Floods have also been able to use it as an opportunity to improve their performance over a competitor who was less well prepared. A number of companies are also addressing the opportunity to respond to what many think is the key cause of climate change, carbon emissions. This action recognises the pressure coming from consumers and governments to improve in this area. 2. Global, JIT, Lean Supply Chains There has been a general trend through the adoption of lean approaches to reduce capacity across industries and in a number of cases to create single points of failure. This has efficiency benefits but if the right balance is not achieved it can, when combined with JIT, lead to a significant increase in supply chain disruptions. Average U.S. industrial capacity utilization from 1972 to 2011 is 80.3%, with peaks around 85% in 1988-1989 and 1994-1995 and a low of 66.8% in 2009, according to the U.S. Federal Reserve. In May 2012, total industrial capacity utilization was 76.3%. These overall figures also mask specific capacity constraints in, for example, a low margin sector or one facing new regulations leading to capacity being withdrawn from the market. A number of recent disruption events such as the Icelandic volcanic ash and the massive Japanese earthquake and resultant Tsunami in 2011 have quickly stopped sections of automotive and other supply chains at considerable cost. An issue around the destruction of a black pigment plant caused substantial automotive issues because it was a key point of failure in the supply chain. The current issues around rare earth metals and China also is just one indication of how raw materials within a supply chain can create significant issues. How does a SCRM practitioner respond to this increase in capacity constraints and pressure on key commodities? An initial step can be to map out the critical supply chains that you have and understand which of the suppliers/supplies potentially represent a single source of failure. Driving transparency is one of the key areas to reduce supply chain risk. There are then a number of other steps that can be taken such as development of alternative suppliers, technological changes in the product make up, etc. As a means of tracking potential capacity issues you can also monitor your supplier in terms of delivery times if there is a slippage in these it can indicate a capacity or other issue which can be followed up in terms of a supplier audit. In a number of cases dual sourcing can be a valid strategy.

5

3. Increasing Social Inequity and Potential Supply Chain Risks Today’s news is filled with routine stories of social unease, protest, and violent responses to global and local imbalances in wealth distribution, employment opportunity, and a perceived unfairness of the global economic system. Just a sampling of recent events attributable to social inequity includes:

 The Occupy Wall Street movement in the US; the 99% vs. the 1%  Violent riots in the UK and France by disaffected populations  Growing protests and tensions in China due to an underclass who feels left

out of and exploited by China’s economic boom  Millions of unemployed youth across the globe who cannot find meaningful

employment in the current economic downturn  The Arab Spring, triggered by the frustrations of an underclass who felt

economically and politically strangled by existing conditions

In the U.S., the richest 1 percent holds 34.5% of total wealth, while the bottom half of Americans hold just 1.1%. China’s richest 1 percent holds 70% of the nation’s wealth. Just less than 1% of household’s globally control nearly 40% of the world’s financial wealth. (Source: Pat Garofalo, Think Progress, August 17, 2012). How do such conditions, particularly when worsening, contribute to a potential increase in supply chain risk? At a tactical level, violent Occupy Wall Street protests targeted US ports, shutting down operations, stopping the movement of goods, and directly creating supply chain disruptions. At a more strategic level, events caused by social inequity in Tunisia, Egypt, Libya, and now Syria have disrupted entire economies and the ability of businesses to operate in, import, or export from those nations for extended periods of time. Looking forward, a reasonable person should expect that continuing rise of global social and economic inequity will create increasing frustration and uprisings by a disaffected underclass. These inequities may unpredictably explode into violent protest or revolution at a local, regional, national, potentially global scale. What does this mean for your business and your risk management of existing and future supply chains? A SCRM practitioner must consider how these inequities might impact their supply chain operations, particularly if sourcing from or operating in countries with known social inequities and a history of public backlash that could erupt in an instant. Evaluate factors such as:

 Where do we have supply chains or operations that are exposed to risks from social inequities?

 How would we continue to operate in the event of massive protests, port closures, or even an overthrow of the government?

 Do we have a backup plan or dual sourcing?  Do we begin to shift or restructure operations to mitigate these risks?

Social inequity, combined with a seemingly growing willingness of local populations to challenge existing systems, is virtually certain to create risks for businesses and their global operations. Think through how this could affect your business and plan accordingly.

6

4. Gender Imbalance and Future Supply Chain Risk One might logically wonder how gender imbalance (a disproportionate, comparative level of males or females in a population) could possibly affect their supply chain. Yet, one need only to look at the situation in China, arguably considered the “world’s factory”, to understand how this issue could ripple into the future of global industry and supply chains. In China, “this vast nation is confronting a self-perpetuated demographic disaster that some experts describe as "gendercide" -- the phenomenon caused by millions of families resorting to abortion and infanticide to make sure their one child was a boy.” (Source: Eric Baculinao, NBCNews.com, September 14, 2004). China will have 30 million more men of marriageable age than women in less than 15 years due to the gender imbalance caused by China’s tough one-child policy. (Source: Chinese State Media, January 12, 2007). India faces similar gender imbalances as that nation, too, has a cultural history of favouring boys over girls in family structure. Experts are alarmed at potential societal disruptions that may occur due to such extreme gender imbalance, the most disproportionate imbalance in history. Gender imbalance could lead to a flood of rural males to cities seeking a future wife, creating urban overpopulation and agricultural disruptions and food shortages due to a lack of rural workers. Factories, businesses, and supply chains dependant on female labor (garment industry, assembly lines, etc) may experience extreme shortages of workers and an inability to sustain production rates. In a worst case, broad social disruption could result from large populations of males frustrated by the paucity of female partners. How does a SCRM practitioner respond? Evaluate if or how such an imbalance could affect your business or your supply chain, i.e., does your business depend on large numbers of female workers in China, India, or other nations with looming gender imbalances? Will those workers be available in a decade? Should you potentially consider shifting operations over time if an imbalance might impact your operations? Should you place future work in a factory that may not be able to sustain future production? While perhaps not your top SCRM concern, gender imbalance is, in fact, a real and growing problem that is expected to reach a critical stage by 2020 in China. 5. Increased Population

If we fast forward to the year 2050, the environment is likely to have suffered immensely from an economy based on mass consumption by 9 billion people. Energy prices may have continued to rise, as most of the easily accessible fossil fuel reserves are depleted. As such, unconventional deposits such as the Tar Sands in Canada and shale deposits in Venezuela may have become major sources for oil. This population growth will because of the pressure it puts on resources, threaten social unrest. Given the shift in energy and geo political realities, logistics and supply chains will need to react and shift to meet the burdens of society. In one scenario, it is not too difficult to see Asia as the center of a thriving world trade. Former emerging countries will turn into high tech locations of global importance and centers of consumption. Low cost production will shift to other regions that previously had been economically less relevant. The logistics industry is poised to benefit

7

tremendously from the steady increase in movement of parts and goods. Of all modes, maritime is predicted to see the greatest increase. Climatic change can have a dramatic impact on shipping routes. Arctic routes may become navigable while more extreme weather may impact traditional routes. The summer of 2012, with the extreme drought and weather patterns may be a glimpse of the future. It is not too difficult to imagine a “supergrid” covering the entire world. Each economic region has one hub with spokes for global logistics optimized for intermodal transport. Cargo ships will continue to grow in size, which will require larger and more efficient ports to handle the volume. As such, the dimensions of trailers, containers and pallets will need to be internationally standardized. 6. Population Migration: Urban vs. Rural Societal changes will have direct effects on the economic and social gap between urban and rural areas. Since the 1950’s urbanization has been increasing rapidly and will continue to do so. For the first time ever, in 2007 more people lived in urban areas than in rural areas. The number of cities with more than 5m citizens is expected to increase from 49 in 2006 to 75 in 2020. This is especially true in Asia and Africa. To quote Dr. Yuwa Hedrick- Wong Economic Advisor, Mastercard Worldwide, “The possibility that social tension will be created is very high” ……. “Urbanization is clearly a strong trend. You will end up with a scenario of 75%, 80% even 90% of the population living in urban areas, megacities, metropolitan regions and so on” The United Nations in 2009 published a very interesting chart that has tracked Increasing Urbanization since 1950, and projects the trend to 2050. 1950: 28% of population or 2.50 bn people live in urban areas 1970: 35% of population or 3.7 bn people live in urban areas 1990: 43% of population or 5.3 bn people live in urban areas 2010: 51% of population or 6.9 bn people live in urban areas Based on historical trends, the UN has projected growth to 2030 and 2050 as follows: 2030: 59% of population or 8.3 bn people living in urban areas, and; 2050: 69% of population or 9.1 bn people living in urban areas A consequence of this shift to urban population will be shifting large investments to a few growth zones in order to develop the infrastructure. These zones will attract substantial investment and prosper. Similarly, and coincident to the timing, rural areas will be increasingly neglected and could very well become impoverished. Along with this trend toward urbanization, one can also see that the populations in rural areas will age. Young people will continue to move to cities and large metropolitan areas, while the older population will most likely stay in more rural areas. This will stress the infrastructure in many ways, including schools, police, fire, postal service, etc. Given projected demographic changes, this development will be dramatic, especially in China. With the increasing population density in urban areas, tensions between various cultural groups will tend to increase. Any increase in terrorist acts and civil disturbances could have enormous consequences for the global economy and supply chains. While experts agree that these consequences are manageable as it relates to the free exchange of products and information, the cost to secure will come at a very high price. This is particularly true as it relates to the transportation of goods and people.

8

The population migration will present significant challenges to logistics and supply chain professionals, city planners, politicians and the like. Some of the challenges that are to be faced are:

 Lack of appropriate transportation infrastructure leading to massive traffic congestion. Recent estimates of London traffic movement are in the range of 15km/h. Even before the advent of the horse drawn carriage in the 19th century, traffic in Center London moved faster.

 Shortage of (affordable) space leading to urban sprawl. The consequence of this is that freight as well as passenger transport will need to cover additional kilometers.

 Pollution increase  Low service levels in central city areas (on time delivery)  Higher on site storage requirements  Higher city complexity and customer demand which will lead to high

logistics cost to service those demands.  Greater e-commerce utilization, leading to increased parcel delivery in

urban markets, requiring innovative methods to assure on time delivery.  It will also create more challenges around the economics of supply chains

in rural areas.  Costs and appropriate spaces for production facilities.

7. Global Democratization Movement

In many regions of the world, particularly in volatile areas such as the Middle East and Africa, where social unrest has increased in recent years, there is a growing risk of governmental collapses or takeovers, as well as shifting geopolitical alignments. As to governmental takeovers, one movement that has been particularly prominent is the Arab Spring. This is a popular banner democratic movement in the Middle East and North Africa, which evolved after years of authoritarian rule in places like Egypt and Libya. While followers of this movement hope to end years of corruption, political repression, and economic disparity, there is also the threat of chaos and disorganization that could arise from new political systems being established by individuals with little governing experience. Furthermore, with many current rulers hoping to maintain power, when constitutional reforms are not pursued, lethal force has been employed, which can lead to greater conflicts, as was seen in Libya, and is on-going in Syria. According to one report, more than 22% of businesses around the world have experienced a negative impact from this movement, which includes many supply routes in the regions that have been disrupted, leading to longer shipping times and other logistical problems (Grant Thornton International Business Report, 2012). While this movement could extend the influence Arab Spring countries have in the world markets, until there is stability in this newly implemented economic process, these countries could become inert, or even a hindrance to the world market when there are products coming from, or being transported through their region. In Latin American countries, one of the primary concerns is movement away from the “Rule of Law” resulting from the growing threat of large criminal organizations. Rival drug cartels in Mexico have become prominent, particularly through government corruption. The national homicide rates in El Salvador, Guatemala, and Honduras, as a result of extreme gang violence, substantially interferes with the governing of those countries. In contrast, countries such as Venezuela, Argentina, Bolivia, Ecuador, and Cuba where the governments maintain control through strict repression, trade and business activities are adversely impacted. Overall, when considering the region as a whole, whether there is the chaos of

9

gang activity, or the oppression of governments, the region is very volatile. These factors, coupled with the United States’ decreased influence in the region, creates a risky environment for supply chain manipulation, with countries such as China, Russia, and Iran stepping in the void left by the United States.

From a supply chain perspective this again calls for appropriate initial due diligence around the countries in which you establish your upstream supply chain and also the appropriate on-going monitoring to ensure the appropriate mitigation steps are in place. 8. Dependence on Information Technology With the world’s ever-increasing dependence on information technology, a growing risk that must be confronted is the potential for cyber-attacks against governments, business, and leaders by targeting communications, trade, defence, and/or infrastructure. The United States Administration’s study on the current state of information technology has declared that “the cyber corruption threat is one of the most serious economic and national security challenges we face as a nation…. America’s economic prosperity in the 21st century will depend on cyber security.” The sophistication of cyber-attacks reaches beyond computer systems and networks, to interdict the sourcing systems of the original information and data. Software such as Malware allows electronic intruders to operate unimpeded within accounts and other data servers to disrupt operations or gather sensitive information. Within Supply Chain Operations, we must improve our resilience to cyber incidents and reduce the cyber threat. A comprehensive supply chain cyber security program includes strategy, policy, and standards regarding the security operations in cyberspace. It addresses threat reduction, vulnerability reduction, deterrence, international engagement, incident response, and resiliency. The program needs to identify recovery policies that address computer network operations, information assurance, law enforcement, diplomacy, military, and intelligence missions as they relate to the security and stability of the global communication infrastructure. Addressing this problem will require collaboration and goal alignment among security, information technology, and supply chain leaders throughout the whole of each critical supply chain or network. 9. Government Financial Crises

A number of governments, such as Japan, Greece, and Italy have very high and growing debt as a percent of their Gross Domestic Product. See for example the CIA’s World Factbook @ https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world- factbook/rankorder/2186rank.html# such high debt can lead to risk of default or hyper-inflation which wipes out the value of the debt. To avoid default when lenders are no longer willing to finance further debt, many countries must raise revenue through higher taxes on individuals and commerce and reduce expenses such as infrastructure investments and social safety nets, the latter of which can lead to unrest as recently demonstrated in Greece and other European countries. In some cases, it can lead to nationalization of key industries. It also often leads to crippled political and government systems such as regulations. Consequently, supply chain professionals need to factor government debt into their decision making. For example, hyper-inflation could significantly devalue an enterprise’s investments in a specific country. It could wipe out any savings from operating in the country due to much higher costs of inputs to production. Lack of investments in infrastructure could make it difficult to continue to operate or expand operations in a country if roads, rails, and air and seaports become

10

congested, or worse, dysfunctional. Higher taxes on enterprises and commerce, and possibly protective tariffs could also adversely the profitability of operating in a country. Lastly, slow or erratic regulations and government operations could further hinder efficient supply chain operations. 10. Government Social Policies Government social policies focus on welfare and social protection to include benefits such as retirement, disability (i.e., physical and learning), medical (i.e., physical and mental), unemployment, education, housing, and food as well as crime, poverty, and discrimination (e.g., race, religion, and gender) protection and the redistribution on income from those who have more to those who have less (Spicker, Paul, An Introduction to Social Policy, as of September 10, 2012 @ http://www2.rgu.ac.uk/publicpolicy/introduction/socpolf.htm). Supporting social policies usually involves governments taxing individuals, enterprises, and commerce as well as borrowing to raise the revenue to support social policy programs. And, when governments can no longer borrow, they must either raise taxes or cut benefits (i.e., reduce the social “safety net.” Depending on how governments expand or contract their social policies, one or more groups may be adversely affected leading to social unrest. One of the early examples of this was the Boston Tea Party when British colonists protested taxation without representation. Recently, the more global Occupy Wall Street is an example of protest against the uneven distribution of wealth. And, the so called “Arab Spring,” is about both political and economic inequalities. Supply chain leaders need to be aware of growing disparities and threats to government social safety nets that foster social unrest, which can lead to serious supply chain disruptions as roads, rail, and air and sea ports are blocked or destroyed, labor strikes or sabotages production, gangs, cartels, or political groups terrorize citizens, and/or general anarchy reigns. Such unrest can also lead to rapidly changing policies, regulations, taxes/tariffs, and government paralysis from political division. While supply chain professionals are unlikely to be able to do much to affect the factors underlying unrest, they need to be aware of their likelihood and potential consequences, and make plans accordingly, particularly for future investments in capacity or back-up capacity development. 11. Global capital/economic/banking system disruptions It is the case in respect of nearly all supply chains that not only do they depend on a physical flow of goods, but that they have associated with them relevant financial flows. This can range from various types of supplier financing, currency exposures, interest exposures or other financial trade instruments. The lack of confidence in the financial markets at a macro or micro level can have the same impact on a supply chain as that which would arise out of say the physical closure of a port. Access to capital is more expensive these days and more difficult. In a number of cases demand has dropped off, customers are paying more slowly and working capital is being tied up in inventory and slow-moving receivables. Well-managed companies need to consider embedding effective working capital management and associated tools into sustainable processes to minimize related business risk across their customer and supply chain base. As companies are becoming more concerned about the rising risk in their supply chains stemming from the economic stress on suppliers, volatile commodity and energy prices, and broad-based financial turmoil, management needs to actively look at supply chain finance options. These actions can help in terms of lowering

11

their overall financial supply chain costs, increased supply chain stability, and the efficiencies that this offers to both buyer and supplier. There are a number of options open to organisations to help mitigate these financial exposures including:

 Appropriate analysis and monitoring of the countries/currencies/financial infrastructure in which you intend to trade with

 Due diligence around specific trading partners including associated financial institutions

 Consideration of appropriate hedging strategies  Use of a third-party financier to provide liquidity to suppliers by leveraging

their buyer’s higher credit rating where this is available 12. Social Media Threats As use grows, the risks from social media are also growing. A June 2012 study by Deloitte and Forbes Insight ranks social media “as the fourth largest source of risk over the next three years. “[1] Executives worry about “cyber-attacks [e.g., denial-of-service worms, Trojan-horse scripts, and E-mail viruses], breaches of confidentiality, fast-spreading malicious rumors about the company, as well as financial disclosures.” As networks have become more secure, hackers are turning to social engineering to gain access by tricking unsuspecting employees into letting them into corporate networks.[2] Indeed IBM recently found that while span is declining social phishing is increasing.[3] So called “phishing” scams, which were originally designed to obtain financial information from individuals by taking them to phony Websites, now also target business users.[4] Some of the “bait” these sophisticated “phishers” use comes from information shared on social media. In addition, social media has been used to arrange “swarm” attacks, where a large group of individuals descend on an establishment and overwhelm personnel to plunder, loot, and sometimes kill. Complex supply chains with many different partners communicating with one another offer numerous opportunities for those with malicious intent to gain access to both supply and product movements as well as internal enterprise intellectual property, finances, and sensitive customer and supply partner information. Social media provides a vehicle for possible entry into sensitive information systems as well as for organizing malicious attacks. Consequently, supply chain professionals need to be aware of the growing risks from social media and work with their partners to enhance security and the awareness of social media threats as well as design their networks and facilities to be as robust as possible and to have plans in place to quickly recover from any disruptions. 13. Growth of Mega Cities Megacities are those metropolitan areas that have grown beyond 5M population. Rapidly-growing megacities present a challenge for the downstream ends of companies’ supply chains. These megacities’ high population densities, congested infrastructure, fragmented retailing environments, and regulations pose challenges to the last dozen miles of the supply chain. Today's new megacities are largely found in developing countries, whereas of the 600 largest cities in the world, 71% are in developing countries. And by 2025, the top 600 cities will represent 60% of the global economy (compared to 54% in 2007). With growing populations and rising economic activity comes rising supply chain volume -- more and more goods will be flowing into megacities.

12

These new cities have population densities over very large areas that are far above those in the developed world -- up to 29,000 people per square kilometer. These densely populated urban centers create new supply chain challenges and opportunities. The other issues arising in these cities include socio economic contrasts, transport systems that tend to focus on people not freight and the fact that distribution centers are moving out of the middle of the cities to out of town. The movement of distribution centers outside of town has also increased the mileage required for the final drop off. This together with the number of stops involved is contributing considerably to the costs involved, this could be as much as 20-30% of food costs, for example. These Mega Cities are thus driving a need for revised approaches to dealing with logistics, from both a cost and availability perspective. The above is largely extracted from work by Dr. Edgar Blanco of MIT CTL at the “Crossroads 2012 – Supply Chains in Transition: The Driving Forces of Change” 14. Aging Population One of the key risks recognised in World Economic Forum report is “unsustainable population growth”. A significant trend within this is the number of people over 60 years of age, this has risen from 8% in 1950 (200m people) to 11% in 2009 (760m people) by 2050 this is expected to double again in percentage terms 22% (around 2 billion people). Currently, the number of people over 60 is growing at 2.6% against an overall population growth of 1%. This on-going increase and dependency is set against a background of heavily indebted governments and overall social challenges based around issues related to the fact that 1% of the world’s population owns around 40% of the world’s assets. In terms of supply chain risks this has a number of potential implications: 1. As people in countries move through to retirement it will potentially create

resource and skill gaps, which will need to be taken into account when organizations consider where to base themselves.

2. The potential burden placed on governments, organizations and people in caring for this larger elder population will create financial and time pressure on the resources that are available. This will need to be taken account of in terms resource allocation and relevant tax burdens.

3. There could be new opportunities and risks associated with the handling

the logistics with supporting an ageing population in a more urban environment i.e. delivery to homes in the “Mega Cities” see other section.

4. If the burden of supporting an ageing population in a particular country

becomes very high, then there is a danger this could create social unrest with consequential impacts again on relevant supply chains.

13

Appendix 1 Sources of Supply Chain Risk insights

• World Economic Forum, Global Risk 2012, Seventh Edition, January 2012 at http://www.weforum.org/reports/global-risks-2012-seventh-edition

• Risk and Insurance, “Most Dangerous Emerging risks 2012,” Reynolds, Dan, April 13, 2010 at http://www.riskandinsurance.com/story.jsp?storyId=533346918

• Humpf, Heike, Delivering Tomorrow: Customer Needs in 2020 and Beyond – A Global Delphi Study, Deutsche Post AG, Bonn, Germany, June 2009

• Risk Integration Strategy Council, “Emerging Risks Report and Monitor,” Corporate Executive Board, September 2011

• Zurich Risk Room Appendix 2 – References 5. Increased Population Sources:

1. Delivering Tomorrow – Logistics 2050 a. February 2012 Deutsche Post AG

2. Delivering Tomorrow – Customer Needs in 2020 and Beyond a Global

Delphi Study. a. June 2009 Deutsche Post AG

6. Population Migration: Urban vs. Rural

Sources:

1. Delivering Tomorrow, Towards Sustainable Logistics October 2010 Deutsche Post AG

2. Delivering Tomorrow, Customer Needs in 2020 and Beyond, A Global Delphi Study, June 2009, Deutsche Post AG

9. Government Financial Crises Sources:

Central Intelligence Agency, Worked Fact Book, as of September 9, 2012 at https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world- factbook/rankorder/2186rank.html#

10. Government Social Policies Sources:

Spicker, Paul, An Introduction to Social Policy, as of September 10, 2012 @ http://www2.rgu.ac.uk/publicpolicy/introduction/socpolf.htm)

14

12. Social Media Sources:

1. Moreno, Kasia, “Social Media Risk Is Like Wildfire. Where's the Fire Engine?” Forbes, August 7, 2012, as of September 27, 2012 at http://www.forbes.com/sites/forbesinsights/2012/08/07/social-media- risk-is-like-wildfire-wheres-the-fire-engine/ and Deloitte and Forbes Insight, “Aftershock: Adjusting the New World of Risk Management,”2012 as of October 6, June 2012 at http://www.deloitte.com/assets/Dcom- Australia/Local%20Assets/Documents/Services/Risk%20services/Deloitte_ Aftershock_Adjusting_to_the_new_world_of_risk_management_July_2012 .pdf.

2. Fowler, Geoffrey A., What’s a Company’s Biggest Security Risk? You.” The Wall Street Journal, September 26, 2011.

3. Carr, David F., “Social Phishing spikes as Span Declines, IBM Finds,” Information Week, March 26, 2012, as of October 6, 2012 at http://www.informationweek.com/thebrainyard/news/social_networking_c onsumer/232700191/social-phishing-spikes-as-spam-declines-ibm-finds

4. Banham, Russ, “The Enemy Within,” CFO Magazine, October 1, 2004.

Article 5 .pdf

econstor Make Your Publications Visible.

A Service of

zbw Leibniz-Informationszentrum Wirtschaft Leibniz Information Centre for Economics

Anggara, Rachmat Affriadi

Working Paper

Implementation of risk management framework in supply chain: A tale from a biofuel company in Indonesia

Manchester Business School Working Paper, No. 614

Provided in Cooperation with: Manchester Business School, The University of Manchester

Suggested Citation: Anggara, Rachmat Affriadi (2011) : Implementation of risk management framework in supply chain: A tale from a biofuel company in Indonesia, Manchester Business School Working Paper, No. 614, The University of Manchester, Manchester Business School, Manchester

This Version is available at: http://hdl.handle.net/10419/50724

Standard-Nutzungsbedingungen:

Die Dokumente auf EconStor dürfen zu eigenen wissenschaftlichen Zwecken und zum Privatgebrauch gespeichert und kopiert werden.

Sie dürfen die Dokumente nicht für öffentliche oder kommerzielle Zwecke vervielfältigen, öffentlich ausstellen, öffentlich zugänglich machen, vertreiben oder anderweitig nutzen.

Sofern die Verfasser die Dokumente unter Open-Content-Lizenzen (insbesondere CC-Lizenzen) zur Verfügung gestellt haben sollten, gelten abweichend von diesen Nutzungsbedingungen die in der dort genannten Lizenz gewährten Nutzungsrechte.

Terms of use:

Documents in EconStor may be saved and copied for your personal and scholarly purposes.

You are not to copy documents for public or commercial purposes, to exhibit the documents publicly, to make them publicly available on the internet, or to distribute or otherwise use the documents in public.

If the documents have been made available under an Open Content Licence (especially Creative Commons Licences), you may exercise further usage rights as specified in the indicated licence.

www.econstor.eu

Working Paper Series

Implementation of Risk Management Framework in Supply Chain: A Tale from a Biofuel Company in Indonesia

Rachmat Affriadi Anggara

Manchester Business School Working Paper No 614

Manchester Business School

Copyright © 2011 ANGGARA, R. All rights reserved.

Do not quote or cite without permission from the author.

Manchester Business School

The University of Manchester

Booth Street West

Manchester M15 6PB

+44(0)161 306 1320

http://www.mbs.ac.uk/research/workingpapers/

ISSN 0954-7401

The working papers are produced by The University of Manchester - Manchester Business School and are to be circulated for discussion purposes only. Their contents should be considered to be preliminary. The papers are expected to be published in due course, in a revised form and should not be quoted without the authors’ permission.

Author(s) and affiliation

Rachmat Affriadi Anggara, B.Eng., MSc, Prasetiya Mulya Business School, Jakarta, Indonesia Alumnus of MSc. in Operation and Supply Chain Management, Manchester Business School, Class of 2008 Email: [email protected]/ [email protected]

Abstract This paper examines the implementation of risk management within a supply chain. Using FMEA(Failure Mode and Effect Analysis) methodology as the risk management framework, this research investigates the overall supply chain network in the firm, identifies the inherent risks along its supply chain, assesses those risks, categorises those risks according to their level, and explores risk mitigation strategies. The study employs a qualitative approach and gathers first-hand data by means of semi-structured interviews to collect nuanced insights that underpin the FMEA method. Interviews with the firm’s supply chain experts also reveal some critical risks along with their mitigation strategies. This study offers a practical implementation of FMEA in the supply chain, increases focal points on the most imminent risks, prioritises risk mitigation plans, and improves the sustainability of the firm’s overall supply chain. Optimistically, in the end, this study seeks to enhances the sustainability in Indonesia’s biofuel industry.

Keywords Supply chain management, risk management, failure mode and effect analysis, biofuels, risk assessment, mitigation strategy, small-medium enterprise

JEL Classification

How to quote or cite this document Anggara, Rachmat Affriada(2011). Implementation of Risk Management Framework in Supply Chain: A Tale from a Biofuel Company in Indonesia. Manchester Business School Working Paper, Number 614 available: http://www.mbs.ac.uk/research/workingpapers/index.aspx

Acknowledgement

This paper is based on the author’s MSc dissertation which was supervised by Prof. Paul

Cousins. The author would like to thank Prof. Paul Cousins and Dr. Yanuar Nugroho for their

reviews and comments on the earlier version of this paper. The author would also like to

thank to anonymous reviewer(s) who gave constructive comments and reviews. Earlier

version of this paper were presented at the Indonesian Student International Conference in

London, 2009.

Biofuel and Its Supply Chain in Indonesia

In response to the hike in oil prices in the global market and environmental problems,

Indonesia’s government has developed a new blueprint of renewable energy development since

2006, which emphasises biofuel production and intensive utilisation (Wirawan and Tambunan,

2006). The Indonesian government proposed that annual production reach 720,000 kilolitres in

2010, with a steady increase to 1.5 million kilolitres by 2015. The development of the biofuel

market in Indonesia has created its own domestic market, which attracts many investors, and it

makes Indonesia one of the biggest suppliers of biofuel in the global market. However, the

development of biofuel in Indonesia has many problems that have an impact on projects, such as

natural disasters, bad transportation infrastructure, deforestation, and social conflicts. These

factors can seriously disrupt biofuel production, increase costs, decrease sales, and create

vulnerability. Supply chains have essential roles in the development of the biofuel industry.

These roles are the structure of coordination in the supply network, alignment with customer

satisfaction, and the sustainability of overall competency throughout the supply chain (Faisal and

Banwat, 2006; Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). Yet, not all biofuel companies in Indonesia have

developed a risk management framework systematically for their supply chain; this situation is

very typical for small and medium enterprise companies. Lack of knowledge and implementation

of the risk management framework in the supply chain can cause unsustainable conditions for the

biofuel industry (Guha, 2004). On the other hand, rising awareness of risk in the supply chain

will be the basis of innovation along the supply chain in order to improve efficiency,

effectiveness, end of chain satisfaction, and also sustainability (Subroto et.al., 2010). Therefore,

it is important to develop a framework of risk mitigation strategies for supply chains, in order to

create a sustainable biofuel industry and so the target set by the Indonesian government will be

reached.

Therefore, this research seeks to answer the following questions: What is the nature of the

biofuel supply chain network? What kinds of risks attach themselves along the supply chain?

What is the appropriate mitigation strategy to deal with these risks?

With the intention of answering these questions, this paper sets out to propose a systematic

concept of applying risk management to the supply chain by identifying, assessing and

mitigating all the risks along it. I also expect to be in a position to suggest the methods with

which Biofuel’s actors can implement a risk management framework accurately for its supply

chain. Moreover, this paper seeks to contribute to biofuel development in Indonesia by

sustaining its supply chain in advance. In terms of its overall outcomes, this research reveals that

there are four kinds of risk in biofuels supply chains (demand risk, supply risk, environmental

risk, and operational risk) and then develops a mitigation strategy for each type of risk.

Having introduced the scope and objectives of this research, the next section describes three

frameworks found in literature pertaining to this subject, those being Concept of Risk, Supply

Chain Risk Management, and FMEA method. It goes on to suggest a risk management

framework that uses the FMEA method. The third section reviews the methodology of this

research which is followed by the fourth section which explains the field findings and examines

them using Failure Mode and Effect Analysis. This fourth section also proposes

recommendations for the company featured in this case study. The final section summarises and

underscores some lessons learned from this research.

Connecting Risk Management and Supply Chain through FMEA method

This section describes the main theories and concepts of this research. The main theory is the

concept of risk and supply chain management while Failure Mode and Effect analysis (FMEA) is

used as the concept to reveal the risks found in biofuel supply chains in Indonesia.

1.1. The Concept of Risk

Concept of risk has been studied in plenty of business contexts and even in the fields of science

and engineering (Sitkin and Pablo, 1992; Yates and Stone, 2002; Khan and Burnes, 2007; Rithie

and Brindley, 2007; Zsidsin, 2003; Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). The study of risk has promised

essential investigation of corporate functions, for example decision-making tools (Yates and

Stone, 2002), operations (Khan and Burnes, 2007), and strategic management tools (Sitkin and

Pablo, 1992). Companies are waking up to the need for risk management implementation for

some significant time and there exists an extensive body of literature from such diverse areas as

economics (e.g.Kahnemann & Tversky, 1979; Tversky & Kahnemann, 1992), finance (e.g. Smith

et. al., 1990), strategic management (e.g. Bettis & Thomas, 1990; Simons, 1999) and

international management (e.g. Miller, 1992; Ting, 1988). Previous studies have suggested many

definitions of risk, such as Sitkin and Pablo (1992), who defined risk as “the extent to which

there is hesitation whether potentially desired or insignificant/unwanted outcomes of decision

will be realised.” On the other hand, Mitchell (1999) described risk as the likelihood of loss and

the implication of that loss for the individual or organisation. He formulated a principle of risk

to assess the probability of loss (P) and the significance (l) of that loss as shown in the notation

below.

Risk = P (loss) X l (loss)

However, this concept has been overtaken by further studies which propose that the concept of

risk should be much broader than Mitchell’s formula. Zsidsin (2003) suggested that risk contains

three dimensions which are outcome uncertainty, outcome expectations, and outcome potential.

Moreover, Ritchie and Brindley (2007) cited that there are three dimensions of risk: (1)

likelihood/probability of occurrence of certain outcomes; (2) consequences/severity from the

occurrence of particular events; (3) causal pathways leading to the events. Similar to Ritchie and

Brindley (2007), whose Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, as the tool used in this research,

defined risk as the multiplication of likelihood of a risk event, the severity of a risk event, and the

ability to detect the risk (PMBOK, 2000). It is formulated in the notation below.

Risk = Likelihood X severity X Detection

Considering the fact that risk management always relates to those three dimensions of risk

(Rithie and Brindley, 2007), this research intends to use this definition in order to analyse the

sources of risk, understand the forces which might create the occurrence of undesired event, and

manage these dimensions to enhance the possibility of positive outcomes and avoid negative

outcomes.

1.2. Supply Chain Risk Management

Risk management in today’s business environment has become the biggest contributor to most

fields of management (Ritchie and Brindley, 2007; Mallman, 1996; Giannakis et al, 2004).

Supply chain management, as part of management study, cannot avoid those risks which are

inherent. It is common today in supply chain management to adopt a risk concept and apply this

concept as the key role in the supply chain management (Ellegard, 2008). Therefore, it is

necessary to develop risk management and risk mitigation in the supply chain context. The term

supply chain is defined in many ways, but it is defined in this research as the network of

organisations, which are involved through upstream and downstream linkages, in different

processes and activities that create value in the form products and services in the hands of

customers (Christopher, 1998 cited in Peck, 2005).

Nowadays, managing supply chains in a competitive, high uncertainty and turbulent market is

very challenging. The frequent occurrence of natural disasters, labour disputes, uncertain supply

and demand, supplier bankruptcy, political changes, war and terrorism have led to deeper

concerns about risk management for the supply chain (Christopher and Lee, 2004). Hence, the

biggest challenge in supply chains today is managing and mitigating the risks that are inherent in

every business situation. Company needs to know and understand the category of the risks as

well as the condition that drives the risks (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). There are numerous

definitions of risk, one of them being that offered by Sitkin and Pablo (2002), who describe it as

uncertainty about potential outcome, whether it is momentous and/or insignificant in the decision

that occurred. On the other hand, Faisal et al (2006) defined risk as consumer’s perceptions of

the insecurity and undesirable consequences for buying products or services.

The understanding of risk in the supply chain should accommodate each of these three

components (Ellegard, 2008):

1. The knowledge of a risk event

2. The probability of occurrence of a risk event

3. The impact of a risk event

The first component is the initiative for increasing knowledge of risk as the prerequisite to

reduce the probability of risk and the effect of it. The second component is related to reducing

the probability of occurrence by implementing a set of actions such as increased influence in

behaviour of third party (suppliers), joint collaboration, supplier development, and managing the

relationships with them. The last component is trying to reduce the impact of the risk event,

which can be done by preparing the supply strategy such as increasing inventory, capacity, risk

sharing, being responsive and agile, etc. (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). In conclusion, previous

research has stated that the development of supply chain risk management, as the main key role

in supply chain management in today’s business, should take into account these components:

1. The identification of risk type and the drivers

2. The action to seek deep knowledge about risk events

3. The well-planned strategy to reduce probability of risk events

The preparedness for risk impact by developing a set of actions is related to the supply chain

strategy in order to enhance sustainability in the system.

1.3. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis

Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA) is methodology for analysing potential reliability

problems or unwanted events early in the development cycle where it is easier to take actions to

overcome the problems, thereby enhancing reliability through design. FMEA is implemented to

identify potential failure forms, determine their impact on production, and identify actions to

mitigate the failures (Crow, 2002). Failure Modes and Effects Analysis is a planning tool on

developing the process, products, or the services. The use of FMEA has been developed in the

deployment of products or services for troubleshooting and counteractive action. The standard of

FMEA evaluation is based on the occurrence, severity, and detection for each risk event. The

multiplication of these values obtain a Risk Priority Number (RPN)

RPN = Occurrence x Severity x Detection

The FMEA has been developed not merely for designing services, products, and so on. Recently,

FMEA is being used for analysing potential risk in project management, marketing, operations,

etc. This tool is very useful because it provides a simple method for analysing crucial steps to

anticipate what might go wrong with products/services. If there is a case where anticipating

every failure mode is impossible, the development team should invent as extensive a list of

potential failure modes as possible. This research implements the RFMEA’s framework in order

to achieve the main objective of this research which is assessment and mitigation of risk in the

supply chain.

Research Methodology

The Research Framework : Adoption of Failure Mode and Effect Analysis

The main theme of this research is the implementation the FMEA method in supply chain risk

management in order to increase the sustainability along the supply chain. To do so, this research

employs a case study. It is common with a case study to use multiple methods for collecting and

analysing the data (Maylor and Blackman, 2005). In this research, multiple methods are applied

because they have different stages. The first stage is collecting the data by using semi-structured

interviews. The next stage is when the data that has been collected from interview will be

analysed by using the Failure Mode and Effect Analysis method, as the techniques to asses and

identify risk in supply chain. This method is a simple and systematic approach for identifying

and assessing the risk (Carbone and Tippett, 2004). This research will use three phases as shown

in the graphic (figure 1) below;

Figure 1. Research Phases (source: Author)

The first phase focuses on identifying the potential risk that is inherent in every process within

the supply chain. This stage ensures that all of the risk is recognised, and then each risk will be

scored for its probability, severity, and detection. FMEA provides some scaling guidelines for

scoring each risk. At this phase, all the data will be collected from interviews and the company’s

historical data.

The second phase for this methodology is to calculate and analyse all the collected data from

phase 1. The main point of this phase is to obtain a Risk Priority Number (RPN) for each risk.

After the RPN value is obtained for each risk, the Pareto analysis and risk clustering using a

scatter plot (as mentioned in figure 2) can be developed. From the Pareto analysis and the scatter

plot, the risk profiling and its mitigation will be developed.

Figure 2. Risk Clustering (Carbone and Tippett, 2004)

The last step in this phase is to develop a risk mitigation plan for each risk event that is plotted in

the critical section in scatter diagram. Sometimes, in extreme cases, the risk is unavoidable;

therefore, the detection plan and contingency plan are required. It is essential to develop such

plan, because it is common that risk occurrence is more expensive than developing the risk

mitigation, detection and contingency plan.

The third phase of this research is validating the result and risk mitigation plan that has been

developed from the second phase. The validation will use interviews with the same participants

as in the first phase. The FMEA’s result and mitigation plan will be shown to them. Then, the

participants will validate the appropriateness of the result and whether it illustrates the reality of

the supply chain’s nature within the company. Moreover, the mitigation plan, which has been

developed based on the FMEA’s result, will be tested for its feasibility.

Key Informants and Data Collection Method

This research uses qualitative research methods by using a semi-structured interview as the main

tool for collecting the data. As mentioned earlier in the literature review, this research takes place

at the functional level (transaction level) in the biofuel company. Therefore, the interview

participants for this research are from functional divisions (Purchasing, Operations, and

Distribution) which are involved in the supply chain within this company. The key informants

for this research are Purchasing & Sourcing Manager, Chief Operations Officer, and Distribution

& Merchandising Manager. They have been working for the company for more than 7 years.

Therefore, the information and findings from them are valid and reliable. The participants will be

asked by a set of question related to supply chain risk management in the company. In addition,

this research will use secondary data which is gathered from Company’s historical data. The

secondary data consists of company’s annual report, sales volume, production volume, suppliers’

performances, and any other facts about the social, political, economic and environmental

situation in Indonesia. This historical data is used in order to enhance the analysis of this

research. From all the findings and information, this research builds a cross-case analysis where

it compares and contrasts the answers of the key informants leading to the judgment of the

hypotheses and a mitigation framework to cope with those particular risks.

The Supply Network of Indonesian Biofuels

The identification of the overall chain, which starts with obtaining the raw materials from the

suppliers to the customers at its other end end, is the foundation to develop a supply chain risk

management framework. The actors who are involved along the supply chain have to be

identified; hence, it will give a clear understanding of the supply chain within the Biofeul

Company. From the supply chain management’s point of view, value-adding activity has to take

place at every single part throughout the overall supply chain. Figure 3 shows the structure of the

supply chain in the Company.

Figure 3. Biofuel Supply Chain in the Company (source: interview)

The flow of goods starts from the palm plantations which are fully owned by The Company.

Palm fruit, as the main raw material for producing biofuel, is obtained from their plantations in

Sumatra and Kalimantan. Since all the manufacturing plants are in Sumatra, the palm fruit from

Kalimantan plantation needs to be delivered by water transport (ships) which is also owned by

The Company. The other materials that are required to produce biofuel are chemical goods

which are used for cracking the carbon-chain from palm to biofuel. The most essential chemicals

are methanol and catalyst. Without these chemicals, the quality of biofuel becomes lower or can

even fail to be produced. These components bought from local suppliers who have cooperated

for almost 4 years (Ramajaya, interview, 06/07/2009). In some cases, mostly when they are

lacking palm fruit supplies from their own plantations, the Company needs to buy crude palm oil

from third parties. This is a very rare situation as they probably need to buy from another party

only once or twice each year. Indeed, so far they have bought crude palm oil from third party

only three times since they started to produce biofuel (Hendarto, interview, 09/07/09).

All of these materials will be stored in warehouses in Sumatra, which is located near the plants.

There is no transformation process here, and these materials are delivered to the warehouse only

to compensate for long lead times and as safety stock to support the production process in the

plants. From the warehouse, these materials will be dispatched to the plants at a certain time and

amount as needed by each plant (Ramajaya, interview, 06/07/09).

At the plant, the manufacturing process takes place. Figure VI.2 describes the overall process

from the input of raw materials to the output of biofuel. The manufacturing process is similar for

all the plants.

Figure 4. Biofuel Manufacturing Process (source: interview)

The process starts from cutting the fresh palm bunches into tiny slices by using a milling

machine. This process aims to make the fruit small enough to be crushed easily in the crushing

machine. The rationale behind this is to preserve the crushing machine which can be easily

broken if some batches of intact palm fruit are processed in it. Therefore, the cutting process has

to be done before the palm fruit is crushed. The tiny sliced palm fruit is crushed in order to get its

concentrate. Then, this concentrate is processed in a fractionation machine. The fractioning

process is crucial in producing the biofuel. At this stage all the chemicals, such as methanol and

catalyst, are mixed with crude palm oil concentrate. The cracking of the hydrocarbon chain

happens here, thus fractioned palm concentrate with a certain amount of carbon is obtained.

Afterwards, this concentrate proceeds to the refining stage. At this stage, the concentrate

undergoes thermal and physical processing with the purpose of purifying the oil from undesired

substances in it. Having done that, the biofuel is produced (Ramajaya, interview, 06/07/09).

This biofuel is then stored in the warehouse before it is dispatched to the customers. The

warehouse is located in the same complex as the plants. The complex is near the sea and it has its

own dock where the ships moor. In the warehouse, as well as in the raw materials’ warehouse,

there is no value-adding or transformation process for the biofuel. It is only stored to reduce the

lead times to customer and create buffer stock especially for the high season (Susanto, interview,

13/07/09).

From the warehouse, the biofuel is moved to the ships by truck. Subsequently, the biofuel is

dispatched to the customer by ship. There is only one customer for biofuel which is Pertamina,

the Indonesian state-owned enterprise responsible for oil and energy supply, which has two main

depots in Plumpang and Balongan. As requested by their customer, the biofuel has to be

delivered to those two main depots that are located in different places (Susanto, interview,

13/06/09). Actually, not all the biofuel is sold to Pertamina as some of it is used by The

Company itself because it has adopted new technology for all their machines and other facilities

which utilise biofuel as the source of energy (Ramajaya, interview, 06/07/09).

To sum up this section, The Company’s supply chain has several key components; The

plantation where the palm trees grow and are harvested, The Company as the producer and

owner of the palm plantation, the methanol supplier, the catalyst supplier, other chemicals

supplier, and PERTAMINA as the customer for Company’s biofuel.

The Risk(s) of Indonesian Biofuels Supply Chain

The development of the risk mitigation framework by using FMEA has several steps as

explained in the literature section. The first step is the identification of risk that is inherent in

every single link along the supply chain. At this stage, identifying the risk is based on literature

about supply chain risk management from Chopra and Sodhi (2004), Manuj (2005), Cucchiella

and Gastaldi (2005), Blackhurst et al (2008), and Peck (2005). From those key writings, as stated

in the literature section, the risk in the supply chain can be categorised into four elements;

demand risk, supply risk, operational risk, and environmental risk. Therefore, the process of risk

identification follows this concept.

First, demand risk is the occurrence of an undesired event, which is mostly caused by fluctuation

in customer demand. Forecast becomes more inaccurate if the fluctuation is really high, and the

further result from forecast inaccuracy is the bullwhip effect as the most undesired outcome from

this risk (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004).

As for supply risk, Manuj (2005) stated that it pertains to supplier performance. All the core

materials are bought from the suppliers. The quality of products, firm ability to cope with

consumer expectations and the level of purchasing cost are really dependent on suppliers. Low

ability to manage suppliers can increase the supply risk level (Peck, 2005). Supply risk refers to

the increments of purchasing cost that is caused by price increase from suppliers, delivery delay

from suppliers that can increase production cost, quality cost because of the low quality of

inbound materials or even defects (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004).

Third, operational risks affect manufacturing or the production process (Manuj, 2005). Likewise,

Cucchiella and Gastaldi (2005) defined operations risk is being the risk that has an effect on a

company’s internal ability to produce goods or services. Furthermore, the concept of operational

risk is not only about risk that threatens production process, but also the information that flows

along the information network within a firm and between firms (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004).

Collapse of information structure, although it is not common, can destroy these extremely

networked environments nowadays.

The last source of risk that needs to be identified is environmental risk. Several factors taken into

consideration are technological, social, political and economic circumstances. However, natural

phenomena, such as geological, metrological, disease and any other uncontrollable events have

to be taken into consideration too (Peck, 2005). Identically, Blackhurst (2005) noted that external

risks that may affect supply chain are natural disaster (earthquake, tsunami, forest fire, etc.), war

and terrorism, and political problems that may take place where the firm conducts business.

From the interview with three experts (production manager, procurement manager, and supply

chain director), source of risks have been gathered as shown on the table 1 below,

RISKS Quote from interview

Demand Risks

demand fluctuation Our Customer demand is not entirely predictable; it fluctuates over the past few years (Ramajaya, interview)

negative campaign Another factor that affects demand is negative campaign about palm biofuels, which is our product (Susanto, interview)

economic condition Economic condition influences customer demand. PERTAMINA as our main customer, really depend on national energy demand. In recession like today, national energy consumption is lower than before (Susanto, interview)

Environmental Risks

earthquake >Natural disasters such as; earthquake, tsunami, fireS in the forest, and landslideS mostly occur every year (Ramajaya, interview) >During the dry season, there are a lot of forest fires near our plantations and plant (Hendarto, interview) >On the other hand, during the rainy season landslides are a major threat to the materials delivery (Hendarto, interview)

forest fire during dry season

landslide

tsunami

currency exchange Another risk is currency exchange rate, this becomes a risk since our customer (PERTAMINA) sell the biofuels for their external customers by using US dollar (Susanto, interview)

oil price decrease Oil price is another external risk that affects our business. The decrease of oil price reduces the demand of biofuels, it is mostly caused by forward buying through the oil trader (Susanto, interview)

Supply Risks

inbound product quality So I can say there is a risk in here, if the suppliers deliver it late or it is low quality, we will have a big problem. (Hendarto, interview)

uncertainty in palm's harvest season It is quite difficult to predict the amount of palm fruit when it is harvests nowadays, because it depends on the weather which cannot be forecasted accurately due to climate change (Ramajaya, interview)

product arrival variability(delays) So I can say there is a risk here, if the suppliers deliver it lately or low quality, we will have a big problem. (Hendarto, interview)

deforestation problem There is a risk here, we cannot easily cut all the trees in the forest or burn it down, there are many procedures that we have to obey, it takes time and might be a big obstacle for our business development (Ramajaya, interview)

palm life cycle risk Undeniably, the palm has a product life cycle. It produces palm fruit after 3-5 years from the first implant, and then it will slightly decline and reach lowest level on the 15

th -20

th year (Ramajaya,

interview)

Operations Risks

Chemicals mixing in fractination machine

In the fraction machine, the operators have to combine the crude palm oil with methanol and catalyst. The composition of those chemicals have to be highly accurate, otherwise it cannot be a biofuel, it might becomes something else or even if it is extremely inaccurate can cause an explosion and then devastate the whole facilities in the plant (Ramajaya, interview)

fractioning machine breakdown There are two critical machines in our plant; a refining machine and a fractioning machine. I can say this stage is key for producing high quality biofuels. Failure to do so, and we are in a dangerous situation (Ramajaya, interview) refining machine breakdown

IT breakdown It covers the flow of information from the upstream (plantations) to downstream (distribution). If we cannot maintain this system, obviously, we will have serious problem (Susanto, interview)

Table 1.Source of Risk (source: interviews)

Risk Assesment

The next step to develop the risk mitigation framework is assessing all the risks that have been

identified in the previous section. The method of assessment follows FMEA’s guidelines that

have been described in an earlier section. The concept of assessing the risk basically uses the

score for the probability of the risk occurrence, the impact from the risk, and the identification

method that the firm has to reduce the impact of the risk. The scoring value has been explained

previously . All the values are calculated to obtain the risk priority number (RPN) and risk score

value (RSV) by using the formula below.

RPN = Occurrence score x Severity score x Detection score

RSV = Occurrence score x Severity score

After the score is determined from the interview and the RPN and RSV has been calculated, all

the risks will be categorised by their RPN and RSV, then they will be plotted on the scatter

diagram in order to prioritise which risk needs to be mitigated immediately.

Subsequently, after all the inherent risks have been identified, the next step is to assess each risk

by using the FMEA method. Every risk is assessed by its likelihood value, impact value and

detection method value. Determining those values is based on the secondary data and interviews

with the experts. By having experienced professionals as the key informants, the quality of the

data and analysis is highly enhanced. All the informants enter values for the probability, impact

and detection methods for each risk, and then they are adjusted by using past historical data

(sales, volume of productions, suppliers performance and the occurrence of risks). All the values

which informants have given in the interviews are described on the table 2 below;

RISKS PROBABILITY SEVERITY DETECTION

Demand Risks COO PROC MGR DISTR MGR COO PROC MGR DISTR MGR COO PROC MGR DISTR MGR

demand fluctuation 7 6 6 5 4 6 3 3 4

negative campaign 8 4 7 5 4 4 7 6 6

economic condition 7 8 8 5 4 7 6 4 4

Environmental Risks

earthquake 5 4 5 9 8 8 7 8 7

forest fire during dry season 9 8 8 6 6 5 5 4 4

landslide 8 6 7 6 7 7 4 5 4

tsunami 6 4 6 7 8 5 4 7 5

currency exchange 8 7 7 3 4 5 6 6 6

oil price decrease 7 7 5 4 4 5 5 6 6

Supply Risks

inbound product quality 6 4 4 6 5 7 6 8 5

uncertainty in palm's harvest season

7 6 5 4 5 5 7 6 6

product arrival variability(delays)

6 6 7 6 7 7 6 5 5

deforestation problem 6 6 7 5 6 5 6 7 5

palm life cycle risk 7 5 5 6 6 5 6 5 5

Operations Risks

Chemicals mixing in fractination machine

5 4 4 9 8 8 7 6 8

fractioning machine breakdown

3 4 3 6 5 5 6 7 6

refining machine breakdown 3 3 4 6 5 5 5 6 5

IT breakdown 5 3 3 7 7 6 6 6 4

Table 2. Risks Score Values (Source: Interviews)

Table 9 shows the perception of each key informant of every risk. The values entered depend

entirely on their personal opinion and experience, thus, the entered values are not consistent for

every informant. So, this data cannot be used as the final result of risk assessment and it still

requires an adjustment and validation to gain consistent data for further analysis. All the values

from the informants have to be unanimous (Carbone, 2004). Therefore, after the values have

been adjusted according to the secondary data, then they will be validated using the experts’

(informants) judgment. The resulting risk score values for all the risks are shown on the table 3

below;

Table 3. Validated Risks Score and Calculated RPN & RSV

Having calculated the risk score and risk priority number values, the next step is to figure out the

critical RPN and risk score values by using Pareto analysis (Carbon, 2004). The 80:20 rule says

that 20% of the work can gain 80% of all the benefits that can be obtained. The Pareto analysis is

applied to set out RPN and risk score threshold values and this is a critical step (Bongiorno,

2001). The Pareto chart for RPN and risk score values are described in figure 5 and figure 6,

respectively, below;

Figure 5. Risk Priority Number's Pareto Chart

Figure 6. Risk Score Value's Pareto Chart

These two Pareto charts above help determine the critical RPN values for risk scores. These

charts are made simply to give guidance for prioritising risk response planning. In selecting

critical values, there is no scientific rule of thumb (Carbone, 2004). It really depends on the

nature of the business or project, for this reason the critical value for this project is based on the

Pareto chart. From the charts, also the Pareto rule, the critical value for RPN is 200 and for risk

the score is 35. The next step is to build a scatter diagram for the RPN plotted against the risk

score values. The critical value for both the RPN and the risk are plotted as well. The aim of

doing this is to find the intersection of those two critical values to reveal the set of risks that have

high risk scores which need to be responded to and managed first. The scatter diagram is shown

on the graph below (figure 7).

The scatter diagram shows that the critical values of RPN and risk scores divide the diagram into

four areas. The upper-right area is the most urgent risk that should be addressed early on. There

are six risks in that area; chemical mixing risk in the fractioning machine, negative campaign risk

from competitor, landslide risk, inbound product quality risk, economic conditions, and forest

fire risk. These high scored risks are the main concern in the supply chain, therefore the

mitigation strategy for these risks is urgently needed. The discussion about this mitigation

framework is presented in the next section.

Figure 7. RPN versus Risk Score Scatter Diagram

RPN’s threshold Value

Risk score’s

threshold Value

The Strategy for Mitigating The Risk: Some Recommendations

Once the supply chain risk has been identified and assessed, information about the level of

urgency of the risk can be obtained. Since the level of risk has been revealed in the previous

section, those high scored risks have to be mitigated by using specific supply chain strategies.

Further investigation shows two out of the six highest risks are of the environmental type; forest

fire and landslide. The other two risks are categorised as demand risk, negative campaign from

customer, and national economic conditions. The last two risks are inbound product quality and

chemical mixing risk in the fractioning machine, these risks are inherent in supply risk and

operations risk, respectively.

Due to the high level of risk from all types of supply chain risk, supply, demand, operations, and

environment risks, the mitigation strategy has to cover the entire risk. Every single type of risk

has its own mitigation strategy. The enablers of risk mitigation have been identified by previous

research. Faisal et al (2006) found that information sharing, agility in the supply chain, trust

among supply chain counterparts, collaborative partnerships, risk sharing and transfer, increased

knowledge of supply chain risk, and continuous risk analysis and assessment are the enablers of

risk mitigation in the supply chain. Moreover, increasing some factors such as capacity,

inventory level, number of suppliers, responsiveness, and the number of customer accounts can

be mitigation strategies to reduce the impact of supply chain risk (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004).

Nevertheless, previous research from Manuj et al (2005), who focus on developing global supply

chain risk management strategies, accounted for six management strategies to reduce the impact

of supply chain risk. Those mitigation strategies are postponement, speculation, hedging,

avoidance, backward and forward integration, and security strategy (Manuj et al, 2005).

Unfortunately, there is no perfect weapon to protect a firm’s supply chain from the inherent risk.

However, the firms have to understand the overall risks that need to be tackled and which

strategy works best against those risks (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). Furthermore, different supply

chain conditions and the nature of business affect the suitability of the various strategies.

Managers have to recognize the benefits and disadvantages of the strategies, and understand to

what extent that strategy is appropriate to implement (Manuj, 2005). Therefore, the firms need to

consider the trade-off between risk and the cost to mitigate it, also their capability to develop the

mitigation strategy. There is a rule of thumb for risk mitigation strategies for the supply chain, it

shown on the graph below (figure 8).

Figure 8. Rule of Thumb for Risk Mitigation Strategies

(Source: Chopra and Sodhi (2004), page 59)

In view of the fact that the main focus for this study is to mitigate the high level of risk in supply

chain, based on the rule of thumb, there are two basic strategies: using pool reserves or

decentralising reserves. Indeed, these tactics are basic and need to be modified. Decisions about

which strategy will be implemented really depend on the risk and the firm’s ability.

Landslides and forest fires constitute environmental risks in biofuel supply chain. These two

risks are categorised as very risky since its RPN and risk score values are beyond the threshold

value. The occurrence of these risks interrupts the flow of goods along the chain. The delivery of

raw materials from suppliers or delivery of products to the customers will face delays. This is the

lowest impact and most likely occurs in the supply chain. Perhaps, these risks can be a serious

threat if it happens near the plants and plantations and directly affects them. In order to mitigate

these risks the most appropriate strategy is using safety stock and buffer stock (increase

inventory). Safety stock levels are increased to compensate for the delay of materials delivery

from supplier if this risk event occurs and buffer stock levels are enhanced to ensure customer

demand can still be fulfilled during the risk event (Slack and Johnston, 2005). All the inventory

resources are decentralised in warehouses, plants and any pool of reserves. The decentralisation

of reserves is appropriate for this case since the demand for biofuel is quiet predictable (Chopra

and Sodhi, 2004). To avoid the property loss if a landslide or forest fire directly cracks down the

resources, business interruption insurance can be used (Svenssons, 2004). These strategies also

can be applied for mitigating the other supply chain risks in the biofuel supply chain. Even

though those risks are not categorised as extreme, the firm has to prepare for the worst case that

might occur.

Two demand risks have been identified and grouped as extremely risky. Those risks are negative

campaign from competitor and national economic conditions (instability). Fundamentally, the

effect of these risks is decreased forecast accuracy, thus it might increase the cost of inventory or

stock. In order to mitigate these risks, the firm can use pool or aggregate demand forecasting

(Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). Seeing as the nature of demand for biofuel is quite predictable,

collaborative demand planning with customers (downstream) is a useful option to tackle this

type of risk (Tang and Tomlin, 2008). Due to the fact that The Company only has one main

customer for their biofuel, it is reasonable and applicable to implement this strategy.

Furthermore, the impact of fluctuations in demand can be reduced by using postponement

strategy. Seeing as biofuel is one of the by products of palm fruit, delaying the point of product

differentiation until the actual demand from customer is revealed is possible to implement. This

strategy can improve The Company’s product flexibility and then it will mitigate the demand risk

(Tang and Tomlin, 2008). For example, they can postpone the process just before the last stage

of biofuel production so if the demand is lower than the forecast, it can be switched to another

product. In an attempt to overcome the effect of a negative campaign about palm biofuel from

competitors, they can improve its corporate social and environmental responsibility activity.

Since the competitors’ campaign about palm plantations reduce the amount of forest due to

public concern about it being burned or cut before planting the palm, The Company has to

counteract this campaign by implementing an environmentally friendly replanting programme in

all of their plantations and then publicise this activity by using an effective marketing campaign.

For the sake of their corporate image, this strategy is urgently required. Empirical findings from

Kovacs (2008) stated that firms from product chain faced more environmental responsibility

demand in the downstream part of their supply chain rather than the upstream. Therefore, palm

biofuel’s image can be renovated by executing CSR and CER (corporate environmental

responsibility) and publicising them intensively in the society. By doing this, the demand of palm

biofuel is expected to be enhanced or even more sustainable for longer period.

The other risk that needs to be mitigated is the quality of inbound products from suppliers. This

risk is categorised as supply risk, which is mostly caused by the supplier. The impact of the low

quality of the inbound products affects the quality of biofuel. The purpose of mitigating this risk

relationship with the supplier is the key tool. Implementing collaborative relationships with the

suppliers are extremely desirable to reduce the prevent the occurrence and impact of this risk. It

supports the improvement of flexibility and ability, thereby reducing the risk (Faisal et al, 2006).

Certainly, building such relationships requires trust and information sharing between firms for a

long-term period along with commitment to share risk and, in the end, joint business

sustainability plan can be achieved (Tang and Tomlin, 2008; Christopher and Peck, 2003). On

the other hand, there is another strategy to mitigate supply risk which has more redundant

suppliers (reconfiguring supply base). This strategy increases supply flexibility for the firms due

to having more suppliers, and it automatically increases the buyer’s bargaining power (Chopra

and Sodhi, 2004; Tang and Tomlin, 2008). The choice of which strategy is the most suitable for

the biofuel supply chain entirely depends on the nature of the firm and its external parties, which

is why a mitigation strategy needs to be customized (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004). Acquiring more

suppliers is favourable for high volume products with an abundant supply of materials.

Finally, the last risk that needs mitigation strategy immediately is the chemical mixing risk in the

fractioning machine, which is categorised as an operational risk. Operational risk is described as

a transformation process therefore consideration about ex ante (prevention), in process, and ex

post (after the risk event) mechanisms is needed (Lewis, 2002). Preventive control is identical to

Quality Management concepts about “doing right at first time” and mistake proofing (poka

yoke). An example of this strategy is building standard operating procedures (SOP), assigning

quality control and inspection to ensure that all the processes comply with the SOP accurately

(ex ante mechanism), and human safety management can be implemented to reduce the impact if

the risks that occur (in process mechanism). Regarding the nature of this operational risk that is

categorised as high-impact but low occurrence, all The Company needs to do is ensure that all

the processes follow all the standards. If the risk accidentally occurs, Company can only reduce

the impact of that risk, the worst of which would be plant breakdown, by obtaining business

interruption insurance in advance (Svenssons, 2004).

Additionally, these strategies can be applied to mitigate the other risks. For instance, the

implementation of Quality Management tools might prevents the occurrence of operational risks.

Moreover, reconfiguring the supply base increases the quality control for inbound products, also

it can prevent the material delivery problem to avoid delay. In conclusion, mitigation strategies

within the supply chain are shown on table 4 below;

Category of Risk Risk Level of Risk Mitigation Strategies

Demand Risk

negative campaign from competitor High

> Collaborative Forecast Planning with

customer > Product Postponement

> CSR and CER implementation

instability in economics condition

fluctuation demand Low

Supply Risk

inbound product quality High

> Reconfiguring supply base

(add more suppliers)

> Increase Inventory Level (safety

stock level)

uncertainty in palm's harvest season

Low product arrival variability (delays)

deforestation problem

palm life cycle risk

Operational Risk

Chemicals mixing in fractionation

machine High > Implementing Quality Management

> Implementing Human Safety

Management

> Acquiring business disruption

insurance

fractioning machine breakdown

Low refining machine breakdown

IT breakdown

Environmental Risk

landslide High

> Implementing optimum inventory

level (buffer &safety stock)

> Decentralised Inventory Resources

> Acquiring business disruption

insurance

forest fire during dry season

earthquake

Low tsunami

currency exchange

oil price decrease

Table 4. Risk Mitigation Strategies for Company’s Biofuel Supply Chain

Conclusion and Implications of The Research

Having explained the overall findings and constructed the mitigation strategies framework for

the supply chain of a biofuel company in Indonesia, I shall now present the conclusion of this

study. Since this study seeks to address the supply chain risk assessment and mitigation with

three sub-questions, I present three arguments regarding the research questions. The first part

summarised the overall supply chain networks in the biofuel company. The second one

concludes the findings about the inherent risk in biofuel supply chain, as well as the results for

the hypotheses. The last summarised the mitigation strategies to reduce the supply chain risks,

which have been investigated earlier.

Firstly, referring back to the opening section, this research seeks to address “How a biofuel

company in Indonesia assesses and mitigates the risk in its supply chain?” In order to answer

this, the first question which asks “How is the supply chain network in Indonesian biofuel

Company?”, has been answered in the graph of supply chain networks and the actors of a biofuel

supply chain company, as described in figure 9 below;

Figure 9. The Supply Network

Secondly, the second research question seeks to figure out the inherent risks in the supply chain

which are presented in table 5 below, and thus it answers the second research question.

SUPPLY CHAIN RISKS

Demand Risks Supply Risks

demand fluctuation inbound product quality

negative campaign uncertainty in palm's harvest season

economic condition product arrival variability (delays)

Environmental Risks deforestation problem

earthquake palm life cycle risk

forest fire during dry season Operations Risks

landslide Chemicals mixing in fractioning machine

tsunami fractioning machine breakdown

currency exchange refining machine breakdown

oil price decrease IT breakdown

Table 5. The Inherent Risk in Supply Chain

Finally, the last research question tries to find and explore the risk mitigation strategies

framework to reduce the supply chain risk. Previously, risk assessment has been carried out to

seek the high level of risk to be mitigated. As the result of the mitigation strategies for all the

risks, table 6 gives the explanation of it below;

Category of Risk Mitigation Strategies

Demand Risk > Collaborative Forecast Planning with customer

> Product Postponement > CSR and CER implementation

Supply Risk > Reconfiguring supply base

(add more suppliers) > Increase Inventory Level (safety stock level)

Operational Risk > Implementing Quality Management

> Implementing Human Safety Management > Acquiring business disruption insurance

Environmental Risk

> Implementing optimum inventory level (buffer &safety stock)

> Decentralised Inventory Resources > Acquiring business disruption insurance

Table 6. Risk Mitigation Strategies Framework

All the explanations above, together, have answered the main research question laid out in the

first section as to how a biofuel company in Indonesia assesses and mitigates the risk in its

supply chain.

What are the implications of this study? I propose no less than two parallel implications.

First, the implications of this study for Company itself are: (1) Company has a clear framework

of risk mitigation for their biofuel supply chain, hopefully, this framework can enhance the

sustainability of their biofuel business; (2) this study can be used as the foundation for risk

management strategy for all their business units; and (3) this study enhances their awareness of

the threats that might interrupt or even demolish their company. To conclude, this study offers a

practical implementation of risk management strategy in order to achieve sustainability of the

business.

Second, the implications for the biofuel industry development in Indonesia are: (1) it is hoped

that this study might influence the other actors in the biofuel sector in Indonesia to implement a

risk management strategy to sustain their industry and (2) encourage the Indonesian government

to give instruction to all the components who are involved in biofuel development in Indonesia.

In conclusion, the main implications of this study are to encourage the company, especially its

supply chain division, to implement the concept of supply chain risk management in order to

ensure the continuity of their supply chain and their business as a whole.

References

Aron, R., E. K. Clemons, et al. (2005). "Just Right Outsourcing: Understanding and Managing

Risk." Journal of Management Information System, 22(2), 37-55.

Bettis,T. and Thomas, H. (1990). "Risk, Strategy and Management". Greenwich, CT, JAI Press.

Blackhurst, J. V., K. P. Scheibe, et al. (2008). "Supplier risk assessment and monitoring for the

automotive industry." International Journal Physics Distribution & Logistics Management, 38(2),

143-165.

BWI (2007). Biofuel Industry in Indonesia: Some Critical Issues. Jakarta, The Business Watch

Indonesia. Vol.1.

Carbone, T. A. and D. D. Tippett (2004). "Project risk management using the project risk

FMEA." Engineering Management Journal, 16(4), 25-35.

Chopra, S. and M. S. Sodhi (2004). "Managing risk to avoid supply-chain breakdown." MIT

Sloan Management Review, 46(1), 52-61.

Christopher, M. and H. Lee (2004). "Mitigating supply chain risk through improved confidence."

International Journal Physics Distribution & Logistics Management,34(5), 388-396.

Cohen, A. V. (1984). "Overview and Definition of Risk : Its Assesment and Management."

Environment International, 10, 359-366.

Cousins, P., R. Lamming, et al. (2008). Strategic Supply Management. Essex, Prentice Hall.

Cousins, P., R. C. Lamming, et al. (2004). "The role of risk in environment-related supplier

initiatives." International Journal of Operations and Production Management, 24(6), 554-565.

Cousins, P. and B. Menguc (2005). "The implications of socialization and integration in supply

chain management." Journal of Operations Management, 24, 604-620.

Cousins, P. D., R. B. Handfield, et al. (2006). "Creating supply chain relational capital: The

impact of formal and informal socialization processes." Journals of Operations Management, 24,

851-863.

Crow, Kenneth (2002) Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA): online: URL:

http://www.npd-solutions.com/fmea.html; [28.04.2005]

Cucchiella, F. and M. Gastaldi (2006). "Risk management in supply chain: a real option

approach." Journal of Manufacturing Technology Management, 17(6), 700-720.

Dufey, A. (2006). "Biofuels production, trade and sustainable development: emerging issues."

International Institute for Environment and Development.

Ellegaard, C. (2008). "Supply risk management in a small company perspective." Supply Chain

Management, 13(6), 425-434.

Faisal, M. N., D. K. Banwet, et al. (2006). "Supply chain risk mitigation: modeling the enablers."

Business Process Management Journal, 12(4), 535-552.

Gardner, D. (2009). RISK : the science and political fear. Canada, Virgin Books.

Gaudensi, B. and A. Borghensi (2006). "Managing risks in the supply chain using AHP method."

International Journal of Logistics Management, 17(1), 114-136.

Giannakis, M., Croom, S. and Slack, N. (2004), “Supply chain paradigms”, in New, S. and

Westbrook, R. (Eds), Understanding Supply Chains, Oxford University Press, Oxford,

pp. 1-22.

Giunipero, L. C. and R. A. Eltantawy (2003). "Securing the upstream supply chain: a risk

management approach." International Journal Physics Distribution & Logistics Management,

34(9), 698-713.

Grover, V. and M. K. Malhotra (2003). "Transaction cost framework in operations and supply

chain management research: theory and measurement." Journal of Operations Management, 21,

457-473.

Error! Reference source not found.Hobbs, J. E. (1996). "A transaction cost approach to supply

chain management." Supply Chain Management, 1(2), 15-27.

Juttner, U., H. Peck, et al. (2003). "Supply Chain Risk Management: Outlining an Agenda for

Future Research." International Journal of Logistics, 6(4), 197-210.

Kahnemann,D.and Tversky, A. (1979) "Prospect theory: an analysis of decision under risk",

Econometrica, 47, pp. 263–291.

Khan, O., Burnes, B. (2007) "Risk and supply chain management: creating a research agenda",

International Journal of Logistics Management, The, Vol. 18 Iss: 2, pp.197 - 216

Kleindorfer, P. R. and G. H. Saad (2005). "Managing disruption risks in supply chains."

Productions and Operations Management.

Kneymeyer, A. M., W. Zinn, et al (2009). "Proactive planning for catastrophic events in supply

chains." International Journal Physics Distribution & Logistics Management, 27, 141-153.

Kovacs, G. (2008). "Corporate environmental responsibility in the supply chain." Journal of

Clean Production, 16, 1571-1578.

Lewis, M. A. (2002). "Cause, consequence and control: towards a theoretical and practical model

of operational risk." Journal of Operations Management, 21, 205-224.

Maanen, J. V. and E. H. Schein (1979). "Toward a theory of organizational socialization."

Vol.1: 209-264.

Mallman, C. (1996), “Risk and organizational behaviour: a research model”, Disaster Prevention

and Management, Vol. 5 No. 2, pp. 12-26.

Manuj, I. (2008). "Global supply chain risk management strategies." International Journal

Physics Distribution & Logistics Management, 38(3),192-223.

Maylor, H. and K. Blackman (2005). Researching Business and Management. New York,

Palgrave macmillan.

Miller, K. (1992). "A framework for integrated risk management in international business",

Journal of International Business Studies, Second Quarter, pp. 311–331.

Mitchell, V. (1999) "Consumer perceived risk: conceptualisations and models", European

Journal of Marketing, Vol. 33 Iss: 1/2, pp.163 - 195

Oke, A. and M. Gopalakrishnan (2009). "Managing disruptions in supply chains: A case study of

a retail supply chain " International Journal of Prodcutions Economics, 118, 168-174.

Peck, H. (2005). "Drivers of supply chain vulnerability: an integrated framework." International

Journal Physics Distribution & Logistics Management, 35(4), 210-232.

(PMI), P. M. (2009). "Project Management Body of Knowledge". New York: Project

Management Institute

Ritchie, B. and C. Brindley (2007). "Supply chain risk management and performance."

International Journal of Operations and Production Management, 27(3), 303-322.

Robson, C. (2002). Real World Research. Oxford, Blackwell Publisher.

Simons, R. (1999). "How risky is your company?", Harvard Business Review, 77, (3), pp. 85–

94.

Sitkin, S. B. and Pablo, A. L. (1992), "Reconceptualizing the Determinants of Risk Behaviour",

Academy of Management Review, vol. 17, no. 1, pp. 9-38.

Slack, N., S. Chambers, et al. (2005). Operations Management. Essex, Prentice Hall.

Smith, C., Smithson,C.and Wilford, S. (1990). "Managing Financial Risk". New York,

Harper & Row.

Subroto, R., Sivakumar, K., Wilkinson, I. (2010). "Innovation Generation in Supply Chain

Relationships: A Conceptual Model and Research Propositions". Journal of the Acadeny of

Marketing Science, 32(61).

Svensson, G. (2004). "Key areas, causes and contingency planning of corporate vulnerability in

supply chains: A qualitative approach." International Journal Physics Distribution & Logistics

Management , 34(9), 728-748.

Tang, C. and B. Tomlin (2008). "The power of flexibility for mitigating supply chain risks "

International Journal of Productions Economics, 116, 12-27.

Ting, W. (1988). "Multinational Risk Assessment and Management". Westport, CT, Greenwood

Press.

Tomlin, B. (2006). "On the Value of Mitigation and Contingency Strategies for Managing

Supply Chain Disruption Risks." Management Science, 52(5), 639-657.

Tversky,A. and Kahnemann, D. (1992). "Advances in prospect theory: cumulative representation

on uncertainty", Journal of Risk and Uncertainty, 5, pp. 297–323.

Williamson, O. E. (1975). Markets and Hierarchies: Analysis and Antitrust Implications. New

York, The Free Press.

Wirawan, S. S. and A. H. Tambunan (2006). The Current Status and Prospects of Biodiesel

Development in Indonesia : a review. Third Asia Biomass Workshop. B. Institute for

Engineering and Technology System Design. Japan.

Stone, E. R., Yates, A., & Caruthers, A. S. (2002). Risk taking in decision making for others

versus the self. Journal of Applied Social Psychology , Vol.32 , 1797-1824.

Zsidsin, G. A. (2003). "A grounded definition of supply risk." Journal of Purchasing & Supply

Management 9, 217-224.

Article 6 .pdf

For more information,

[email protected] or 617-253-7054 please visit our website at http://ebusiness.mit.edu

or contact the Center directly at

A research and education initiative at the MIT Sloan School of Management

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Governance

Paper 227 Gabriel R. Bitran Suri Gurumurthi Shiou Lin Sam

June 2006

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

1

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Governance

Gabriel R. Bitran∗, Suri Gurumurthiο, Shiou Lin Sam+

Abstract

We consider the impact of vertical disintegration in large scale supply networks-of the type that has been observed in the automotive, textile and electronics industries over the past few decades. Our interest is in understanding the strategic and operational implications for the key network players in industries undergoing such change; for example, we focus on the supply chain strategies that have been adopted by the network players in order to accommodate for the changing governance and ownership structures. Our broad hypothesis here is that this process of disintegration in many industries is not sustainable from a coordination and control viewpoint, and therefore will be followed by eventual reintegration—although this reintegration is likely to take many different forms in various industries. To support our hypothesis, we present a field study that was conducted to understand the impact of disintegration on original equipment manufacturers and in particular, on small and medium enterprises. We discuss the expanded role of the systems integrator, which, in many cases, goes beyond critical coordination services, and extends into issues related to control and governance of portions of the supply network. We explore the challenges that systems integrators are likely to face in their expanded roles, and contrast two different models of coordination and governance that could be adopted by such players.

Introduction The last few decades have witnessed a dramatic shift in the manner in which business is

conducted around the world. Firms have shifted away from a hierarchical, one-dimensional

supply chain entity to a fragmented network in favor of strategic partnerships with external

entities. This global phenomenon causes ripple effects throughout the old supply network. Many

businesses, facing challenges that accompany such change, are struggling to compete in this new

landscape. On the other hand, the fragmentation creates opportunities for whole new set of

supply chain services. We conjecture that such a fragmented state will not be sustainable. There

will be a period of disintegration followed by reintegration facilitated by an independent third ∗ Sloan School of Management, MIT, Cambridge, MA 02139, [email protected] ο Fuqua School of Business, Duke University, Durham, NC 27708, [email protected] + Electrical Engineering and Computer Science, MIT, Cambridge, MA 02139, [email protected]

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

2

party, the mini-maestro. In supporting our hypothesis, we present results from a field study

conducted to understand the impact of fragmentation on original equipment manufacturers and

on small and medium enterprises.

Historical Perspective

Historically, the process of disintegration followed by reintegration has been observed in the

airline and the communications industry. In 1938, Congress introduced regulation for the airline

industry to avoid the impact of “excess competition” that plagued the railroad and automobile

industries. The regulated airlines were widely acclaimed to be the “world’s finest system of

transportation” until the oil shocks and recessions of the 1970s [1]. In 1978, President Carter

signed the Airline Deregulation Act. Airlines were free to compete on prices, entry and exit. The

fuel crisis of 1979, the air traffic controllers’ strike of 1981, the severe recession in the early

1980s and the intense price competition combined to produce the worst losses in the history of

domestic aviation. During the first decade of deregulation, more than 150 carriers collapsed into

bankruptcy. In the same period, the industry witnessed more than 50 mergers, acquisition and

consolidations. In the late 1980s, eight airlines emerged from the decade of fare wars and

consolidations with a combined market share of 92% of United States air traffic. The “Big

Three” (American, United and Delta) together with Northwest, Continental, TWA, USAir and

Pan Am were known as “mega carriers”. Analysts noted that the mergers had increased their

ability to manage operations across hub systems, new geographic territories and marketing areas.

In addition, with their monopoly, carriers were able to raise prices. In part due to the Persian

Gulf War in the late 1990 and the end of leveraged buyouts in 1989, the industry again

experienced a serious downturn.

As the “mega carriers” were being awashed in red ink, simultaneously, the industry was

observing the rise of Southwest Airlines. Initially dismissed as a niche player, by the mid-1990s,

major airlines were responding to the threat of Southwest with the equivalent of lower fare

fighting brands such as Continential Lite in the southeast United States and the United Shuttle on

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

3

the West Coast. These fighting brands temporarily depressed Southwest’s profitability in 1995.

However, because these brands were spawned by full service airlines, they carried the same

baggage which were responsible for weighing down the traditional airlines – the same cultures,

management beliefs, labor policies and route structures[2]. Merely lowering the fares was not

sufficient to compete with Southwest Airline, for what defined Southwest was not only the

discount fares. Southwest Airlines took off at a time when all other major airlines were

struggling because it identified, addressed, and fulfilled the needs of the marketplace. It operated

with a different culture and employed a point-to-point route system instead of the hub-and-spoke

system. The hub-and-spoke system, in addition to being less convenient to customers who

preferred point-to-point flying, caused domino delaying effects, crowding and confusion at the

hubs. In recent years, emerging players such as JetBlue have continued to innovate and respond

to changes in the industry, causing further damage to the mega carriers who still operate in an

archaic way.

A similar evolution in the telecommunications industry has been observed and extensively

chronicled in the literature. AT&T, since its founding in 1877, has monopolized the United

States telecommunications services. After Bell’s telephone patents expired in the 1890s, the US

telephone industry entered a period of intense competition. Under the helm of Theodore N. Vail,

AT&T began a furious effort to buy out competitors. The acquisition of Western Union in 1909

triggered federal antitrust scrutiny, but Mr. Vail was able to convince the government that having

a single, dominant telephone company was in the best interests of the nation. This lead to the

1913 Kingsbury Commitment, and the company was informally recognized as a monopoly.

In 1974 MCI filed an antitrust suit against the company. This blow, following the opened

competition in equipment business and FCC’s approval of MCI gaining entry into the long

distance market, resulted in AT&T’s divestiture agreement with the Justice Department. The

agreement became effective on Jan 1, 1984 [3, 4]. AT&T divested its 22 Bell Operating

Companies to exit local phone business, while remaining a long distance player. As new

technologies emerged over time, the US telecommunications industry evolved beyond the wire-

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

4

based phone system to encompass a range of services which includes wire-line, wireless, cable

and Internet[3]. These developments cumulated in the Telecommunications Act of 1996; every

segment of the industry was now open to competition. Since then, the industry as a whole saw a

wave of mergers and consolidations. Among the region bell operating companies, the strategy

allowed them to collectively target the long distance and wireless market. For long distance

service providers, the acquisitions and mergers enabled them to foray into new emerging

technology domain. In both cases, the consolidations occurred to fulfill an identified need in the

marketplace.

Observation and examples of supply network fragmentation

The structural and organizational transformations in the airline and telecommunications industry

aforementioned are often precipitated by changes in the business climate, demand behavior and

competition. In recent years, with integration of economies around the world and the collapse of

the notion of geographical boundaries, it is not surprising that we are once again observing

massive changes in the way business is being conducted. In an attempt to capitalize on the

effects of globalization, these changes across many industries come mostly in the form of

fragmentation of supply chains. In the automotive industry, we are able to chronicle the

divestment of significant portions of the automotive supply chain, including the cost and labor

intensive manufacturing portions, as semi-independent or wholly independent units [5-8]. The

case histories of the divestment of Visteon Corp. from Ford, and of Delphi Systems from GM,

are examples of this phenomenon in the automotive sector[9-11]. While these are high-profile

examples, in our understanding there is also a more fundamental re-organization of the

automotive industry at the lower tiers of the supply chain, with outsourcing and off-shoring of

the production function being accompanied by changes in system management methodologies

and practices (lean manufacturing, just-in-time among others) [6, 7, 12, 13]. These trends are not

limited to the North American region, but are also observed and have been documented for the

Japanese, and the EU regions, both traditional powerhouses in the automotive sector [7, 14].

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

5

Similar examples are to be found in the electronics manufacturing and services sector. Many

Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) in the consumer electronics market have divested

themselves of their expensive and cost-intensive manufacturing and back-end facilities to

specialty manufactures and service providers such as Flextronics, Solectron, Sanmina SCI,

among others [15-17].

Another industry sector that has witnessed far-reaching changes is the apparel and textile

industry. The global apparel and textile industry spans the entire textile and apparel supply chain,

from the processing of raw materials to the production of the finished goods. The increasingly

keen competition has forced a shift of significant portions of the manufacturing process from

developed to developing countries, resulting in a decline of the textile and apparel sector in

developed countries[18-20]. Over the past two decades, the Asian economies have dominated

textile and apparel exports, gaining market share relative to their European Union rivals. The U.S.

economy on the other hand, has primarily remained a consumer of textiles and apparel output,

and its consumption of Asian imports has increased significantly over the past decade or so. The

last observation implies that many of the U.S. firms operating in the textiles and apparels sector

are primarily involved in the design, development, and marketing activities, while the bulk of the

processing of textiles, and the manufacturing of apparels is outsourced to Asian and European

firms.

Reasons of fragmentation

Presented with the fragmented state of supply network, it is worthwhile to understand the reasons

and incentives that caused many large vertically integrated firms to outsource or offshore

portions of their supply chain [7, 10, 12, 15]. One contention is that capital and investments are

now being micro-managed to the extent that the validity of non-core assets is being questioned.

While cost management and shareholder interests have certainly been prominently cited factors,

in our observation and based on our literature review, factors such as end-product quality,

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

6

product proliferation, the emergence of retail powerhouses and information technology can all be

cited as influential drivers. We comment on these factors in the sections that follow.

Cost and Quality related factors

The gradual relaxing of trade barriers, improving information technologies, the emergence of

new markets, and the availability of skilled labor and reliable supply routes from Asia have

together generated a business climate in which large and small firms alike, and across many

industry sectors, have seen incentives to fragment their supply chains. With the availability of

cheap manufacturing labor in China and in the rest of Asia accentuating the labor cost

differentials between developed and the developing regions, the incentives have never been

greater.

Ironically, it is a greater effort towards supplier consolidation and cost reduction that has led to

the greater levels of partnership and subsequently, the greater levels of outsourcing to supply

partners [12]. As key suppliers which survived in the “supplier rationalization” phase of the

previous two decades assumed more importance and relevance, the cost reduction emphasis has

helped transfer many of the functions that were previously considered core competencies of the

larger firms to these suppliers. The bigger suppliers that survived the consolidation phase were

then able to provide greater economies of scale to the OEMs, and therefore enhanced value from

the partnership ventures. Another factor that has probably aided this trend is the significant

transfer, first of production technology, and subsequently of product-critical designs to the key

suppliers [17, 21]. As the technology in various manufacturing process segments became more

stable, and as the manufacturing processes became commoditized (i.e. no longer considered a

core competency), those processes and functions came to be seen as a cost factor, as opposed to a

revenue stream or as strategic know-how.

However in our assessment, cost differentials between the developed and emerging

manufacturing and industrial regions in the world are by themselves not adequate factors to

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

7

explain the outsourcing and off-shoring trend to Asian supply bases. Partnerships between the

supply bases with US giants coupled with surging local and international demand lead to the

ability to invest in better processes and technologies, which in turn leads to higher quality

products and the ability to manufacture at lower cost and higher margins. This positive feedback

cycle results in the strengthening of the supply bases and partially explains the outsourcing

and/or off-shoring phenomena that we are observing.

Product Proliferation and Mass Customization

With the increased risks and the costs associated with product proliferation and mass

customization, the larger OEMs, especially in the automotive and in the electronics

manufacturing sectors, have seen incentives to co-design and develop products with their key

manufacturing suppliers. The case of the Microsoft X-box product that was co-developed with

Flextronics International that had sole manufacturing responsibility for the end-product is a good

example of this trend. This trend is also observed in the mass-market computer products segment,

where firms based prominently in Taiwan, other locations in Asia and in the US are providing

design as well as manufacturing services to the larger OEMs that brand the end-product [22].

Emergence of Retail Powerhouses

The consolidation or convergence of retail channels, as in the case of the retail chains such as

Wal-Mart and the accompanying phenomena of smaller stores and chains being replaced by

larger discount stores, not only have had a profound impact on the supply channels, it has also

changed the traditional roles defined for the manufactures, the retailers, the wholesalers and

distributors. With the emergence of retail powerhouses, the large manufacturers of consumer

items have seen incentives to outsource the cost and asset intensive operations to contract

manufacturers, while focusing on creating and sustaining brand values through design and

marketing activities. For retailers, the competition is now based on cost, logistics, and speed of

innovation. These basic tenets of retail competition coupled with the change in the retail

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

8

landscape have an enormous impact on the supply channels that feed the growing retail channels.

These supply channels, both large and small, have to respond quicker and more efficiently to

customer demand patterns. As a result, retail companies have attempted to change their business

models and to dictate broad strategic and operating requirements to their vast supply base – thus

there is pressure even on large and established suppliers to conform to the specific practices and

the needs of the retail channels[23]. In order to compete in the new landscape, retailers are taking

on influential role in the design of products, they are also ready to reach in the second tier to

develop, market and distribute products that in some cases compete directly with their own

suppliers.

Emergence and proliferation of Information Technology

Information technology, even taken as an independent environmental factor, and its adoption in

professionally run businesses and firms has led to fundamental changes in supply chain behavior

and further to the changes in governance structures[24-26]. Virtually all sectors of industry in the

developed and in the developing regions have witnessed the following major trends over the past

two decades:

(i) Data storage costs have gone down in the past few years, while the volume of data

gathered for business analysis purposes has increased dramatically.

(ii) The cost per business transaction as well as the networking and communication costs

within supply chains has been greatly reduced. Simultaneously, the capabilities and the content

involved in the communications and the number and relevance of IT enabled business

transactions have also increased.

(iii) With greater analytical capabilities and design technologies, new product introductions

have increased, in part as a response to the need for greater product variety. As a consequence,

product life-cycles have been shrinking, as documented for many industry sectors. The role of IT

in the handling and communication of product design information is also well chronicled[24, 25].

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

9

These changes in IT (in particular business communication technologies) have played a critical

role in enabling firms and supply chains to operate on a global scale[27]. Without IT being the

enabler, the disintegrated supply network cannot be managed effectively.

Feasibility of the Disintegrated Model

As the reasons accompanying fragmentation become clear, at first glance it appears that

switching to the disintegrated model is advantageous. We caution that is it not the case. If a

firm’s decision to outsource is based primarily on cost factors, and if there are well identified

leaders in the fragmented supply chains to assume responsibility for the strategy, planning and

control of the operations, the disintegration model might serve well. In practice, there exist

companies who choose to fragment parts of their supply chain for the wrong reasons. Companies

who fall in this trap usually perceive outsourcing, which leads to fragmentation, as the solution

to their existing problems of incompetence and inefficiencies. Used in the wrong way, this

“solution” will lead to a total disintegration of the company. Since a state of total disintegration

is not at equilibrium, there needs to be an eventual reintegration stage during which new entities

are formed. In this respect, the primary hypothesis of this report is that while a globally dispersed

model of fulfillment may be cost efficient, the accompanying disintegration of the critical supply

channels of past decades and the dissolution of conventional governance structures presents a

new set of challenges; in addition, this unstable state of disintegration cannot be sustained. An

aggregate player will eventually emerge to conduct a subset of the disintegrated value network.

We conjecture the following:

1. There is a need for responsible agents (or roles) within supply chains that enable the

coordination and governance of various supply chain segments in keeping with the objectives of

the larger supply chain.

2. There is a need as well as the opportunity for a new set of supply chain services that

i) Enable or sustain the heterogeneous models of collaboration between the

decentralized supply chain agents

ii) Allow rapid integration of new partners into existing supply chains

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

10

iii) Allow the different parties to communicate and coordinate their activities in

support of the end-customer fulfillment objectives

3. There will have to be agents within the supply chain that develop and sustain the small

and medium enterprises which operate on the periphery of networks dominated by the larger

agents.

In the remaining of the paper we present research outcome on the impact of disintegration of

supply networks. We follow by commenting on emerging opportunities in the fragmented

landscape. In light of the set of opportunities, we introduce and support the maestro/mini-

maestro model and conclude with future research directions.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

11

Impact of Disintegration of Supply Networks

C

C S

C

S F

C

C S

C

F S

F- Finished Product S- Sub-system C- Component

C

C S

C S F

C

C S

C

F S

Firm

Supply Chain Disintegration

Figure 1 Disintegration of Supply Network

The disintegration and fragmentation of the supply chains that we previously observe

dramatically change the existing network and rules of engagement, resulting in increased

coordination requirements and role ambiguity. Figure 1 illustrates the effect pictorially. Prior to

disintegration, the firm itself was responsible, and had a strong profit incentive, to take a greater

stake in the coordination of the fulfillment value chain and to ensure proper alignment of the

incentives of the supply chain agents operating within the organizational boundaries to support

the strategic objectives of the supply chain. However, with the vertical disintegration of the

supply chains, there is now a larger question of who, or which of the independent or semi-

independent agents within the supply chain, is now responsible for the coordination activities and

for setting the appropriate incentives for the supply chain agents[28-30]. In the newly formed,

much more complicated network configuration, the level of interaction and coordination

increases dramatically with the fragmented supply chain, even though the number of layers in the

chain (from component to finished product) can remain the same. In addition, the ownership and

control of assets and functions in these supply chains have also changed hands, in many cases

leading to a significant sub-division, or re-distribution of the responsibilities of handling,

material transformation, and of delivering end-product to the customers. The disintegration

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

12

brings about new sets of challenges previously not encountered, ranging from managing a large

number of supplier and distributor relationships to optimally allocating resources among many

different entities. With the fragmentation, the complexity costs of coordination have made it

more challenging for the companies to exert the same level of control and influence on their

supply chains[31]. In addition, managing internal business functions and managing relationships

with external entities call for a different approach. While this process of disintegration has a huge

impact on all the players in the network, most of the negative effects are felt by the smaller

entities in the lower tiers of the supply chain. Their size and distance from the end customer

subject them to a great deal of variability, which is further exacerbated by their lack of authority

and control. As a result, the smaller players in the network find themselves losing their footing in

the middle of the disintegration process.

Through extensive interviews with business managers, academics, research analysts, software

providers and logistics providers from entities including BOSE, GM, Boston Fuel Cells, MIT

Center for Transportation and Logistics and Gartner 1, we were able to distill the challenges into

a couple of major categories. In the following sections, we summarize our findings, first

commenting on the impact of disintegration on original equipment manufacturers (OEM)

followed by the impact on small and medium enterprises (SME). Based on these observations,

we further comment on the emerging opportunities in the newly disintegrated landscape.

Impact of disintegration on OEMs

In the disintegrated network, OEMs need to manage both inbound and outbound flow of goods

(Figure 2). While outbound logistics is concerned with goods disbursement from a central

location, inbound logistics is concerned with aggregation of goods and services from myriad

points. In dealing with inbound flows of goods from contract manufacturers (CM), smaller

OEMS tend to have less leverage due to their sizes and relative importance. In addition, the CMs 1 Further examples of institutions consulted are Color Kinetic, GE, SAP, Nortel Networks, Gillette, PCI, Sun Country Sunscreen, Qualcomm, Hardy Machine and Design Inc, Agilent Technologies, Channel Partner, Pratt and Whitney Dependable Machines, Nokia, Cap Gemini Ernest and Young, UCCnet, SAP, UPS, Exiros, DHL and MITSloan.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

13

who deal with the smaller OEMs may also be smaller and much less capable. Our research found

the need to have a neutral party enforcing discipline among the CMs to meet the smaller OEMs’

delivery schedules. In addition, there is a need for a consolidator whose role is to aggregate

suppliers from various locations around the world on behalf of the smaller OEMs. Larger OEMs,

on the other hand, typically have much power and influence over their suppliers. As a result, they

are more concerned about the outbound flow rather than the inbound flow. Thus, there is a need

for a neutral third party to assist with new ideas for product distribution, channel diversification

and for efficient ways to fulfill customer orders. A simple example of a solution for efficient

order fulfillment can be found in the relationship between third party logistics companies and the

electronics industry. Currently UPS and FedEx provide airport stocking points for storing end

products in order to expedite shipping to the end customers. When an order is received, the

products are shipped directly from the airport rather than from the warehouses. In some cases,

simple repair facilities are also located in the vicinity.

Outbound for large OEMs

CM: Contract Manufacturers OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer

Distributor

Distributor

Distributor

Retailer

Retailer

Retailer

CM

CM

CM

OEM CM

Inbound for Small OEMs

Figure 2 OEM Needs in the Disintegrated Network

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

14

Impact on SMEs

Arguably, the impact of the fragmented supply chain is felt the most by the SMEs, which, due to

their size and relative unimportance in the overall supply chain, are located at the fringes of the

network, far from the center of action. The disintegrated supply network has resulted in a huge

amount of uncertainty being pushed to the edge. As such, the inferior positions of the small and

medium enterprises force them to absorb a disproportionate amount of the uncertainty and

bullwhip effect created by the disintegration. These companies, being less sophisticated than

their larger counterparts, end up living through feast and famine cycles. Our interviews with

them uncovered a mind-boggling set of required assistance. In many cases, the SMEs are willing

to impart intimate knowledge about their own capacity, inventory positions and capabilities and

allow a third party to assist with the coordination, sourcing and selling process. Specifically,

these companies voiced the need of a neutral and unbiased third party to assist with managing

inbound sourcing, selling excess production capacity, reaching customers whom they do not

have access to and accessing new sources of capital. In other words, they needed assistance with

almost every aspect of their operations.

Figure 3 SME’s position in the Disintegrated Network

CS: Component Supplier CM: Contract Manufacturer OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer

CS CM OEM

LP LP

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

15

Emerging Opportunities in the New Landscape

Such a clear cry for help presents huge opportunities for the marketplace to create roles in order

to fulfill these needs. With the current trend of disintegration and fragmentation, future supply

chains will no longer consist of serialized form of interactions between the buyers, suppliers and

logistic players. Rather, these pre-determined, static roles and relationships will be replaced by

those which are much more dynamic and malleable, enabling the synchronization of goods,

information and capital. The transformation of supply chains into value networks is premised on

the capacity of each player to acquire, process and distribute information to all participants in the

network to collectively maximize productivity and efficiency of the network. Relationships

between the players are thus collaborative rather than adversarial.

Our field research revealed three value drivers which support the concept of the value

network[32]. These are i) working capital, ii) visibility and iii) velocity (Figure 4). While none of

these drivers are new concepts, their interpretation in the new landscape is worth noting. The

past twenty years have seen various strategies for freeing up working capital and increasing

liquidity. Practices such as JIT, TQM, CRM were all adequate at the time of introduction; yet

companies today confront a much more complicated set of challenges. With the disintegration,

inventory challenges are no longer confined to warehouses, but are now scattered across a

complex matrix of material management issues on the entire inbound side of the business,

canvassing thousands of parts and hundreds of suppliers across several continents. As such,

visibility, the prerequisite to any optimization and management effort, is being catapulted into

one of the more important value drivers. Companies not only need to identify the location of the

required material in the supply chain at any moment in time, they also need inventory visibility

of other players in the value network, which in turn allows them to monitor over and under

stocking of component parts, coordinate production strategies and set pricing strategies based on

the information available. However, this resulting visibility has no value unless the information

can be harnessed, interpreted and incorporated swiftly, and that the players involved develop

mutual trust that supports the exchange of pertinent information on a real time basis. Velocity

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

16

also alludes to a value network which responds quickly to changing environments, one which

supports a pull system triggered by the buyer.

In the process of understanding the aforementioned value drivers, our research uncovered

industry disappointment with logistic companies in their perceived failure and inability to

appreciate the different types of material flows and complexity associated with inbound logistics.

This is in part caused by the current strategic competencies of moving goods from point A to B

of the logistics providers (LP), and by their position in the traditional supply network. At their

current position as the last link in a serialized supply network, the LPs have limited visibility into

the internal processes of all the other players in the chain (Figure 4). These LPs are unable to

conceptualize the entire value network from the perspective of the companies they serve, and

thus are unable to make the supply chain more flexible and lean through services that leverage

the relationships they have with other players in the chain. By moving into the value chain rather

than remaining as a peripheral player, these LPs are in a unique position to assume the role of a

facilitator, thereby fulfilling the needs of the marketplace[32].

Working Capital

Visibility

Velocity

Logistics Providers

Value Network Suppliers

Buyers: VN Leaders

Figure 4 Linear Interactions to Supply Chain Visibility

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

17

In order to be successful in this new structure (Figure 5), LPs must contribute to the ability of the

players within the network to collect, process, interpret and use information effectively.

Essentially, LPs must be able to communicate, on a real-time basis, pertinent information about

each incoming sales order to every other player in the network who has a role in fulfilling that

order. Each player must be able to experience connectivity which unites purchase orders,

production processes, order fulfillment, and movement of goods between all players. The new

structure greatly reduces cycle time, and has to be engineered such that all players not only have

the power to trace materials, but the ability to modularize and reconfigure the subsystem so that

transparency and visibility is achieved across different processes in the entire system.

Supplier

LP

Customer Purchase Order

Sales Order Goods

Listen /Demand

Check/ Inventory

Deliver// Transportation

Figure 5 Listen-Check-Delivery

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

18

Figure 6 Maestro, Mini-Maestro Model

Maestro/Mini Maestro Model Viewed in a larger context, one can extract the concepts and principles from the role of the LP in

a value network and formulate the role of a maestro – a neutral third party who coordinates the

network and aligns the incentives for all players belonging to the network. This conceptually

sound role is somewhat idealistic and hard to implement in reality. Established and reputable

corporations will not see much incentive to buy into the coordination made by such a maestro.

As a result, we are observing the emergence of mini-maestros – a neutral third party who takes

charge of part of the network, but not in its entirety (Figure 6). This manifestation of the concept

Company

First Tier

Second Tier

Third Tier

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

19

of an independent third party is easier for established corporations to accept and digest.

Established companies are more inclined to surrender portions of their supply network to a third

party (the mini-maestro) while retaining control of other parts of the supply network. At the same

time, the mini-maestros are able to cater to the SME needs by providing assistance and services

in the areas most needed.

The concept of a mini-maestro is well exemplified by Li & Fung, a Hong Kong based company

that serves private label apparel firms in Europe and North America [20, 33, 34]. Li & Fung is

known to operate as a “smokeless” factory. It maintains a network of 7500 suppliers in 26

countries; even though it does not own any of the factories that are part of its vast supply and

trading network [33]. The inner workings of Li & Fung are best understood through looking at a

typical order flow. Upon receipt of the order within a division, Li & Fung dissects the

manufacturing process for the order and attempts to optimally allocate the work at each step to

its global supply partners. As a typical result, the manufacturing process is divided into two sub-

processes: the front-end (sales and design) coupled with the back-end (logistics and banking),

and the labor intensive middle portion. The front and back-end are typically performed in Hong

Kong where the requisite advanced skills are often available; whereas the middle portion is

further decomposed into various segments, and Li & Fung finds the best factory to serve each

segment. The entire process is tied together in the end with IT and logistics. The following

illustrates the order splitting and combining process: when Li & Fung receives an order to

produce 10,000 garments, it may decide to source zippers from Japan, purchase and weave yarn

in Korea, dye in Taiwan, and produce the garment in Thailand. It will then reach into the supply

chain by reserving un-dyed yarn from the supplier, reserving a fixed mill capacity for milling and

dying, and reserving factory time for producing x numbers of garments in y weeks. Li & Fung

then coordinates and manages the logistics and transportation involved in the supply chain, such

that in about five weeks from when the order is received, 10,000 garments may arrive on the

shelves of the customer. Thus, by using its buying power and trust developed with its supply

base, Li & Fung is able to considerably shrink the delivery cycle of time sensitive products. This

allows its customers to buy closer to time-to-market, resulting in substantial savings both by

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

20

reducing expensive inventory markdowns at the end of selling seasons, and through reacting

quickly to changes in demand.

Another illustrative example is Flextronics International (Flextronics), headquartered in

Singapore. Flextronics, with revenues of $14.5 billion in fiscal year 2004, is a leading

Electronics Manufacturing Services (EMS) firm operating in 32 countries and 5 continents. The

company provides complete design, engineering and manufacturing services that are vertically

integrated with component capabilities to optimize its OEM customers’ operations and time to

market. As part of its global manufacturing strategy, Flextronics operates in six industrial parks

in low-cost regions around the world. Each park incorporates the manufacture of components

needed for the final system assembly, thus functioning as complete manufacturing centers. The

parks also integrate strategic suppliers onsite to reduce material procurement costs and to

accelerate new product introductions [17]. In addition, Flextronics has two “Super Sites” in Asia

with access to established local resources and suppliers; it also maintains “High Competency

Centers” in North America and Europe that specialize in high-tech services.

The emergence of these mini-maestros alludes to a coordinated supply network. In this new state

of the supply network, a pure push system is not likely to be optimal. In a pure push system, due

to the limited visibility of the supply network and customer demand, production is initiated

without much coordination within the parties in the supply network. The mini-maestros acting as

coordinators will make possible the use of pull mechanisms in the new network, but establishing

a pure pull network is questionable. The effects of the mini-maestros thus result in a network in

which both push and pull mechanisms co-exist. In managing the network, one will gradually

move away from the push and pull mentality towards optimal resource allocation amongst nodes

in the network.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

21

As with any model it is critical to understand its limitations and abilities. In the following

sections we elaborate on some of the issues involved with the mini-maestro model.

Sharing of Costs and Benefits Given the fragmented and competitive nature of the supply chains, it is challenging for the

diverse interest groups within the network to align themselves with the global objectives of the

supply chain and the end-customer. Thus the question of supply chain governance and that of

leadership is increasingly becoming a critical one for many supply chains[31]. Such a question

is of utmost importance for a mini-maestro. The success of a mini-maestro hinges on the support

that it can garner from the network players. As such, the mini-maestro must institutionalize

ground level mechanisms for sharing the net costs and benefits of partnering. Typically, as the

mini-maestro starts to focus on system optimization, business processes undergo reconfiguration

– as a result some players stand to gain or lose more than the others. An example is a distribution

center located downstream in the value network which witnesses its inventory rise as a result of a

decision to postpone the assembly process further downstream. In such a case, for the

distribution center to remain committed, the mini-maestro must institute ways to compensate for

its increased inventory. Similarly, network players that contribute to the overall network

performance through innovation need to be rewarded appropriately for individual excellence.

To say this task is difficult is an understatement; excelling in it requires immense maturity,

patience and deep knowledge of network operations.

Such a cost and benefit sharing system can be observed in Li & Fung’s operations. The company

shares cost by assisting with production planning and by advancing letters of credit to the

suppliers [35]. Financial support is also offered to factories to facilitate bidding for more quotas.

A deeper level of cost and benefit sharing is illustrated through Li & Fung’s benchmarking

system. The company maintains a very comprehensive performance benchmarking system that

allows it to track performance levels of each player. Although time-consuming and expensive,

benchmarking has provided Li & Fung with a deep knowledge of the supply side, which in turn

allows them to allocate work optimally. A player who consistently outperforms will be rewarded

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

22

with compelling financial incentives in the form of steady and substantial business [36]. A player

who under-performs, on the other hand, receives in-depth feedback which can be dissected and

internalized to achieve stronger performance and to be on par as its counterparts.

Mutual Dependence and Trust

The diverse and fragmented nature of the network results in the success of the mini-maestro, and

thus of the network, being correlated with the degree of interdependence among the players. The

mini-maestro must ensure that the players are mutually dependent for their success and failures.

Mutual and well-balanced dependence helps build enduring relationships, while asymmetry in

mutual dependence increases the possibility of mistrust and conflict within the network. The

cultivation of mutual dependence will also, with time, establish a high level of trust within

players in the network.

As an example, we observe that for each of the 7500 suppliers in the vast network that Li& Fung

maintains, it targets to consume 30-70% of its production capabilities and capacity. This

particular range allows Li & Fung to obtain priority attention from the factories for its end-

customer (or retailer) orders, while at the same time avoiding complete dependence of the

factories on Li & Fung orders. In addition, Li & Fung cultivates trust by paying several visits to

the suppliers during the production process [37]. The first visit is scheduled prior to production

for raw material inspection and acquisition, when needed. A subsequent visit occurs after the

first batch of garments is produced to stem quality problems prior to full production. The third

visit follows for packing supervision and final quality assurance. In the event that the garments

do not pass inspection, the supplier is allowed to replace defectives. In some cases, if the end

customer accepts under-quality products, the supplier is asked to lower the final price. These

factory visits are coupled with continuous training for suppliers to develop the knowledge and

skills required to convene the company requirements.

These monetary incentives, performance feedback, guidance and training serve to strengthen the

notion that there is a high level of mutual dependency and trust between Li & Fung and the

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

23

players in the network. The players trust that Li & Fung will provide them with jobs to fill their

capacity, while knowing that Li & Fung will assist when they under-perform. Furthermore, the

players are also aware of the level of trust placed in them; in a highly connected and dependent

network, a single failing link could be catastrophic for every player in the network.

Systems, Standards and IT One of the dangers of pulling together a final product while sourcing from different players

within the network is non uniformity. The fact that two shirts of different colors on display in a

store are from different origins (factories) should be transparent to the end customer. To

guarantee this level of transparency, the interfaces in the supply network where parts of these

products flow through need to have uniform standards to ensure all players can conform to the

same set of requirements. The network itself also needs to be extremely malleable; the players

should be “hot-swappable” - weaker players should be easily swapped out with the stronger ones

replacing it without disrupting the network. This constant reconfiguration results in optimal

productivity and responsiveness [36]. Designing and managing such a set of measure to be put in

place is non-trivial, while implementing the system and trigger points requires a mature IT

infrastructure. Viewed in this light, IT is not a determinant of the network’s success; rather, it is

an enabler.

Returning to Li & Fung as an example, we are able to observe many of the systems and

standards put in place to ensure consistency throughout the vast supply network. First of, the

company defines the requirements that partner companies must meet in order to become a

service provider (thus become part of the network). Li & Fung will also define each service

provider’s role and specify job allocation. Li & Fung manages the network at a macro level, and

is not involved in managing the day to day operations of the network players. With this loosely

coupled network, the service providers can focus on their tasks and capabilities without costly

intervention from the orchestrator.

To achieve transparency within the network, communication architectures are structured for

seamless information transfer and exchange. The service providers typically need two types of

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

24

information from Li & Fung. First, they need detailed information on product specifications to

perform the tasks; second, they need the schedule of raw material arrivals and end product

delivery dates together with the quantity of end products. On its part, Li & Fung needs timely

information about the service providers’ progress towards delivering on their commitments. To

accomplish this, Li & Fung has a standardized order executing and tracking system that is used

by all divisions in the company.

In order to be able to renew the network efficiently, Li & Fung maintains an exhaustive

benchmarking system. Performance of each player is constantly monitored and compared to its

peers. This information is shared with every player in the network, giving them a detailed

understanding of their performance gaps, ideas for addressing them, and strong incentives for

taking action. By doing so, Li & Fung is not dictating how the players should do their work, it

merely points out who has the best approaches. The poorly performing participants can be

swapped out with two implications. First, these poor performing participants are better at other

jobs. For example, some suppliers may do well with coarser forms of wool but lack the expertise

to maintain high quality and throughput for the more delicate forms of wool products. Second,

being out of the network allows them to improve their quality of work based on the information

received from Li & Fung [36]. As a result, service providers will tend to focus on a small but

core set of activities – those in which they have developed truly distinctive capabilities.

Social Contract A mini-maestro managing a portion of the disintegrated supply network needs to operate with a

different social contract. The traditional model of a top-down management approach will not

result in an efficient value network. The new social contract should be one that strips away the

importance of a hierarchy to allow and encourage individual players to reach their potential.

Within a corporate setting, the impact of such a social contract will manifest itself in two ways.

First, there will be a sense of equality within different ranks and second, there will be a rooted

commitment to allow people to take initiatives and maximize their potential.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

25

At Li & Fung, customer-focused divisions are the building blocks of their organization. Each of

them is kept small and entrepreneurial and is run by a lead entrepreneur. Li & Fung provides

them the financial resources and the administrative support of a big organization, but each

division is given a great deal of autonomy. All the merchandising decisions that go into

coordinating a production program for the customer are made at the division head level. Li &

Fung maintains a larger number of divisions (around 60) and they view divisions as a portfolio

they can create and collapse, almost at will [33]. Towards their suppliers, Li & Fung adopts a

similar approach. Each supplier is part of a network which is highly malleable and each of them

are encouraged and given autonomy to materialize their potential in the world economy.

In the sections above we have attempted to highlight some of the important issues associated

with the mini-maestro model. In short, a mini-maestro needs to architect a governing system to

ensure supply chain incentives are properly distributed. Such a system should also be conducive

in building mutual dependence and trust amongst the different players. In order to ensure that the

network will function efficiently and optimally, there needs to be clearly established standards

and benchmarking systems. Information technology then comes into play as an enabler and

adhesive agent. Finally, the mini-maestro needs to function within the new social contract such

that each player is allowed sufficient autonomy and freedom to materialize it’s potential.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

26

Types of Aggregate Players – Li & Fung vs. Flextronics Having commented on some issues common to the mini-maestro model, in what follows we take

an alternative stance and investigate the differences between companies employing the mini-

maestro model through focusing on Flextronics and Li & Fung. Even though both companies

control a portion of the supply network, the relationship dynamics between the companies, the

suppliers and their end customers are quite different.

At first glance, Flextronics and Li & Fung share many common functional aspects. Both

organize their team around customer accounts, both emphasize centralized information

technology and business processes across all units for quality control and seamless integration of

the supply network and manufacturing processes, both adopt global manufacturing as an

important component of the strategy of selling services in different regional markets, both

demarcate along the skill sets that are deployed at the regional facilities - choosing to base the

higher technology services in the higher cost and higher skill regions (US and Europe) and the

back end manufacturing in lower cost regions..

A more careful understanding of the organizations reveals many differences. Some of the

differences stem from their respective asset ownership strategy and the nature of the two industry

sectors. Flextronics, unlike Li & Fung, owns all its factories and facilities. Li and Fung, on the

other hand, adopts a leveraged growth strategy through operating an efficient process

network[36]. In employing a leveraged growth strategy, the company does not own factories, but

have highly privileged access to the capacity and schedules of its factory partners. As such, the

company’s asset base is not capital equipment or land; rather, it is its knowledge of the apparel

market and a deep understanding of the supply side issues. Li & Fung maintains a detailed, up-

to-date view of supplier performance in a wide variety of contexts. Such real-time operational

information and knowledge are critical in the company’s work allocation decisions and in the

feedback mechanisms implemented for standardization and uniformity of its suppliers. In

addition to having a distinctive and strong asset base, Li & Fung’s successful leveraged growth

strategy is attributed to its efficient process network, comprised of one orchestrator who

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

27

organizes and disperses the manufacturing work flow to many other service providers.

Furthermore, the orchestrator manages the network at a macro level and is not involved in the

day to day operations of the service providers. Flextronics, on the other hand, maintains a much

more intricate relationship with its customers; the roles that the customer and Flextronics play

are not as decoupled as in Li & Fung’s case, especially during the design and prototyping phases.

During this phase, Flextronics representatives are housed in their customers’ sites and these two

teams collaborate on a daily basis on detailed issues. In summary, Flextronics orchestrates

through acquisition of the assets involved in the production process rather than employing a

leveraged growth strategy; it also manages at a greater level of detail when compared to Li &

Fung.

The more intriguing difference stems from the origins of the companies and the relationships

they cultivate with their suppliers and clients. The success of Flextronics is partly due to the

abuse of outsourcing, which lead many companies to shed their inefficient processes in order

remain competitive at all levels. As a result, Flextronics is transforming from the role of a

contract manufacturer to a final product designer and eventually, to a formidable threat to its

clients. In the local economies where Flextronics operates, one could hypothesize that labor cost

arbitrage remains an important intention. As such, Flextronics’ social economic impact is limited

to producing jobs and could be seen as less constructive when compared to Li & Fung’s impact.

Li & Fung originated as a trading business founded in 1906. Though the years, it evolved from a

buying agent into a regional sourcing agent to a manager and deliverer of manufacturing

programs and finally to a dispersed manufacturer [33]. By the time Li & Fung became noticeably

successful, outsourcing in the textile and apparel industry in the US was common place. Most

retailers at that time ceased to manufacture their own products due to cost inefficiencies; the

problem they faced was to effectively, both in terms of cost and time, source products from

lower cost regions. Presently, the mass apparel industry has evolved into one which focuses more

on marketing and on themes for the upcoming seasons. The core of the design and manufacturing

work is outsourced. The nature and state of the industry lends itself well to Li & Fung, for there

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

28

is no competitive friction between the company and its clients. On the other hand, the

electronics industry, being younger than the textile/apparel industry, is still heavily involved in

the design, fabrication, testing and selling processes. The emergence of Flextronics and its

subsequent growth in skill set is thus perceived as an encroachment and not as a partner.

In terms of supplier relationships, one can hypothesize that Li & Fung’s presence in the local

economy has a more positive impact than of Flextronic’s; its nature is also less colonial. In

working with Li & Fung, small suppliers are given the opportunity to grow and learn the

standards and expectations of global trade. Li & Fung is also less likely to abandon the

relationship that it has nurtured. Flextronics, on the other hand, does not work with individual

suppliers. One can argue that, in part, its presence in a local economy is more due to labor cost

arbitrages. As such, it is more likely to abandon the site once the arbitrage gap diminishes;

causing much disruption to the local economies that it operates in.

Conclusion As the process of disintegration and reintegration continues, it is becoming clear that the

emerging aggregate players may reflect the creation of corporations that will be successful in

years to come. These mini-maestros bring innovation and efficiency to the network by

orchestrating the flow of goods, information and funds between multiple entities and by

dynamically reconfigurating the network. Much of the competition in the business world will

center on gaining and maintaining the orchestration role for a value chain or industry. Clearly,

becoming part of the network is essential; yet becoming the conductor of the network will be

even more critical. Looking forward, it is important to understand the impact these aggregators

have on the local economies where they operate. Such an insight is instrumental in

comprehending the development of trust, quality of service and sustainability in networks made

up of small businesses in developing markets. With this research, we are able to identify two

broad classifications of mini-maestros in terms of their impact on local economies; one being

value creation while the other being colonial. In order to avoid over generalization, future

research could focus on a comprehensive classification of mini-maestros from the viewpoint of

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

29

the impact on local economies. To accomplish this, there needs to be a thorough understanding

of the nature, strength and evolution of the local companies that grew out of relationships with

the aggregator, the expectation and perception of both, evidence and measures of economic

contribution to firms and local communities, and finally, the rules of engagement and

disengagement set forth.

Acknowledgements

The authors would like to thank UPS for support and Rhesa Jenkins for challenging and

provoking our thoughts. The authors would also like to thank Pilar Arroyo and Eng Ching Kooi

for their input and feedback. Lastly, the authors would like to thank Bharat Salhotra, Paolo

Bassetti and Gary Romano for their contribution in an earlier version of the paper

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

30

References

1. McGahan, A., The U.S Airline Industry in 1995. Harvard Business School Cases, 1995(9-

795-113): p. 22.

2. Heskett, J.L., Southwest Airlines 2002: An Industry Under Siege. Harvard Business

School Cases, 2003(9-803-113): p. 24.

3. Burgelman, R.A., A.S. Grove, and E. Marti, The US Telecommunications Industry (B) --

1996-99. Harvard Business School Cases, 1999(SM5B): p. 24.

4. Grove, A.S., E. Marti, and R.A. Burgelman, The US Telecommunications Industry (A):

1984-1996. Harvard Business School Cases, 1999(SM5A): p. 22.

5. Balakrishnan, K., et al., Indian Auto Supply Chain at the Cross-Roads. Working Paper,

New York University and Purdue University, 2004: p. 33.

6. Biesebroeck, J.V., Trends and complementarities in the Canadian Automobile Industry.

Industrial Economics and Performance in Canada (forthcoming), 2004: p. 35.

7. Veloso;, F. and R. Kumar, The Automotive Supply Chain: Global Trends and Asian

Perspectives. Asian Development Bank Research Report, January 2002, 2002: p. 54.

8. Hufbauer, G.C., et al., The North American Automotive Sector. Research Report, Institute

for International Economics, 2004: p. 30.

9. Welch, D., Ford and Visteon: Ties That Bind. Business Week Online, 2003(April 21st

2003).

10. Hartley, T., Delphi spin-off launches new era. Business First Magazine (Buffalo, NY),

1998(August 10th 1998).

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

31

11. Keeton, A., Delphi Woes Mount With Financial Restatements, in Morning Star Magazine.

2005.

12. Holmes, J. and M. Anderson, New Models of Industrial Organization: The Case of

Magna International. Regional Studies, 1995. 29(7): p. 17.

13. Mercer, G.A., J.-H.J. Monier, and A. Satpathy, The Right Restructuring for US

Automotive Suppliers. McKinsey Quarterly, 2004. Autumn 2004: p. 5.

14. Komori, M., Trend of International Reorganization Affecting the Japanese Automobile

and Auto Parts Industries. Development Bank of Japan Research Report No. 8, 2000: p.

30.

15. Barnes, E., et al., Electronics Manufacturing Service Industry. Research Report, Logistics

Institute, School of Industrial Engineering, Georgia Tech, 2000.

16. Farzad, R., The Grease Monkeys of Technology. Smartmoney.com, December 18th 2001,

2001.

17. Ferry, J., Flextronics: Staying Real in a Virtual World. strategy+ business Magazine,

Booz Allen Hamilton, 2004. Winter 2004(37): p. 9.

18. Johns, L.S., The U.S. Textile and Apparel Industry: A Revolution in Progress. Research

Report, Office of Technology Assessment, Washington, D.C., 1987: p. 117.

19. Gereffi, G. and O. Memedovic, The Global Apparel Value Chain: What Prospects for

Upgrading by Developing Countries. Research Report, United Nations Industrial

Development Corporation, Vienna., 2003: p. 36.

20. Jones, G.G., Multinational Trading Companies as Diversified Business Groups. Harvard

Business Review, 2003: p. 15.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

32

21. Sherman, E., Microsoft Doesn't Play Games With Xbox Design. Electronics Design Chain

Magazine, 2002. Fall 2002.

22. Earl Barnes, J.D., Shijie Deng, Doug Down, Electronics Manufacturing Service Industry.

Research Report, Logistics Institute, School of Industrial Engineering, Georgia Tech,

2000.

23. Staff, A Marriage Made in Heaven—And in The Bathroom. The Economist Magazine,

2005(Jan 28th 2005).

24. Stroeken, J.H.M., Information Technology, Innovation, and Supply Chain Structure.

International Journal of Services Technology and Management (IJSTM), 2001. 2(3/4).

25. Gao, G. and L. Hitt, Information Technology and Product Variety: Evidence From Panel

Data. Twenty-Fifth International Conference on Information Systems, 2004, 2004: p. 14.

26. Clark, T., Increasing Innovation: TAL Apparel unbuttons a product management tool to

keep its customers on the cutting edge of fashion. Consumer Goods Technology,

2004(September 2004).

27. Paul, L.G., RosettaNet Picks Up Steam. http://www.managingautomation.com/, June 3,

2004, 2004.

28. Raman, A., Supply Chain Risk: Deal With It. Harvard Business Review, 2003(April

2003).

29. Narayanan, V.G. and A. Raman, Aligning Incentives in Supply Chains. Harvard Business

Review, 2004(November 2004): p. 8.

MIT Sloan School of Management Working Report 2006

33

30. Whitford, J. and J. Zeitlin, Governing Decentralized Production: Institutions, Public

Policy, and the Prospects for Inter-Firm Collaboration in US Manufacturing. Research

Report, Wisconsin Manufacturing Research Center, 2003.

31. Gereffi, G., J. Humphrey, and T. Sturgeon, The Governance of Global Value Chains.

Review of International Political Economy (forthcoming), 2003: p. 21.

32. Bassetti Paolo and G. Romano, Supply Chains and Value Networks: The Factors Driving

Change and their Implications to Competition in the Industrial Sector, in Alfred P. Sloan

School of Management. 2003, Massachusetts Institute of Technology: Cambridge. p. 82.

33. Magretta, J. and V. Fung, Fast, Global, and Entrepreneurial: Supply Chain Management,

Hong Kong Style: An Interview with Victor Fung. Harvard Business Review,

1998(September/October 1998): p. 16.

34. Fung, V., China and the Supply Chain. UPS Longitudes 04, Mapping the New World of

Synchronized Commerce, 2004.

35. Yoshino, M. and A. George, Li & Fung (A): Beyond "Filling in the Mosaic" -- 1995-98.

Harvard Business School Cases, 1998(9-398-092): p. 18.

36. Hagel, J., Leveraged Growth: Expanding Sales Without Sacrificing Profits. Harvard

Business Review, 2002(October 2002): p. 8.

37. Loveman, G. and J. O'Connell, Li & Fung (Trading) Ltd. Harvard Business School Cases,

1995(9-396-075): p. 23.

Article 7.pdf

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries

JULY 2010

This publication was produced for review by the U.S. Agency for International Development. It was prepared by the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management: Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries

The authors' views expressed in this publication do not necessarily reflect the views of the U.S. Agency for International Development or the United States Government.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1 The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1, is funded by the U.S. Agency for International Development under contract no. GPO-I-01-06-00007-00, beginning September 29, 2006. Task Order 1 is implemented by John Snow, Inc., in collaboration with PATH; Crown Agents Consultancy, Inc.; Abt Associates; Fuel Logistics Group (Pty) Ltd.; UPS Supply Chain Solutions; The Manoff Group; and 3i Infotech. The project improves essential health commodity supply chains by strengthening logistics management information systems, streamlining distribution systems, identifying financial resources for procurement and supply chain operations, and enhancing forecasting and procurement planning. The project also encourages policymakers and donors to support logistics as a critical factor in the overall success of their health care mandates.

Recommended Citation USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1. 2010. Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management: Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Abstract This paper examines the potential opportunity for public sector health systems to engage third party service providers to support the logistics functions—with an emphasis on distribution, warehousing, and inventory management. It provides stakeholders in supply chain management for public sector health, including the Ministry of Health and Ministry of Finance officials, program managers, and Central Medical Store managers (or associated parastatal organizations charged with health product management) with a resource that describes outsourcing and how it could be used in public health supply chains, when to consider outsourcing, the process of deciding whether outsourcing is a viable option in a particular context, and how to begin the outsourcing process. These points are illustrated by a few country examples of how countries have engaged the private sector in providing the logistics function to support their public sector supply chains.

Cover photo: Men load boxes into a truck in Indonesia.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT John Snow, Inc. 1616 Fort Myer Drive, 11th Floor Arlington, VA 22209 USA Phone: 703-528-7474 Fax: 703-528-7480 Email: [email protected] Internet: deliver.jsi.com

Contents

Acronyms .................................................................................................................................... vii

Acknowledgments ........................................................................................................................ ix

Executive Summary ...................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 3

Overview ...................................................................................................................................3

What?............................................................................................................................................ 7

Supply Chain Functions to Consider Outsourcing ....................................................................8

Types of Service Providers .......................................................................................................9

Beyond Outsourcing: Supply Chain Collaboration ....................................................................9

Specific Examples of Outsourcing Logistics in Public Sector Health Systems .......................11

When?......................................................................................................................................... 17

Deliberation—Strategic and Operational Considerations........................................................18

Cost-Benefit Analysis—Financial Considerations ...................................................................19

How?—Implementation Roadmap .............................................................................................. 27

Stage 1. Project Team and Activity Formation........................................................................27

Stage 2. 3PL Recruitment .......................................................................................................28

Stage 3. Service-level Agreement...........................................................................................30

Stage 4. Monitoring and Evaluation ........................................................................................32

Conclusion .................................................................................................................................. 33

References.................................................................................................................................. 37

Appendices

A. Typical Contract Format ......................................................................................................... 41

B. Sample Implementation Plan..................................................................................................43

Figures

1. The Logistics Cycle................................................................................................................... 7

2. Uses and Advantages of 3PLs................................................................................................ 17

3. Process for Outsourcing Decisionmaking………………………………………………………....27

Tables

1. Category and Examples of Costs ...........................................................................................20

2. Category and Examples of Costs to Upgrade.........................................................................21

3. Cost Comparison Sample Worksheet .....................................................................................23

4. Final Cost-Benefit Comparison ...............................................................................................25

v

vi

Acronyms

3PL third party logistics provider

4PL fourth party logistics providers

AHP analytic hierarchy process

AIDS acquired immune deficiency syndrome

CHAI Clinton Health Access Initiative

ARV antiretroviral

CCTU closed-circuit television

CMS Central Medical Store

CPFR collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment

DGFP Directorate General for Family Planning

DRC Democratic Republic of the Congo

EDI electronic data interchange

FEFO first-to-expire, first-out

FIFO first-in, first-out

GOB Government of Bangladesh

HIV human immunodeficiency virus

IAPHL International Association of Public Health Logisticians

ICB international competitive bidding

IHD UTi Pharma Distribution

ISO International Organization for Standardization

ITT invitation to tender

KPI key performance indicator

LMIS logistics management information system

LMU logistics management unit

M&E monitoring and evaluation

MOF Ministry of Finance

MOH Ministry of Health

NGO nongovernmental organization

vii

NPV net present value

PHD Pharmaceutical Healthcare Distributors (Pty) ltd.

RFP request for proposals

SDC service delivery contract

SLA service level agreement

SOP standard operating procedure

UNDP United Nations Development Programme

USAID U.S. Agency for International Development

WHO World Health Organization

WMS warehouse management system

viii

Acknowledgments

This paper is the result of significant input and expertise from a knowledgeable group of people who have experience with public sector health system supply chains, outsourcing, and the decision process to outsource. The main authors of the document are Alexis Heaton of the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT; Zachary Clarke, who was an intern at the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID); and Simon Cole from Pharmaceutical Healthcare Distributors, ltd (PHD). James Gibney, formerly of JSI, gave this activity its initial momentum through his thorough research. Thanks go to Maeve Magner of the Clinton Health Access Initiative (CHAI) for her careful review and thoughtful comments on an early version of the guide.

We are grateful to the many members of the International Association of Public Health Logisticians (IAPHL) who contributed to an interesting online discussion about outsourcing; the forum started and encouraged discussions during the writing of this paper. Last, but no less important, many thanks go to the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT staff, especially Shyam Lama, Linda Allain, Joseph McCord, and Kelly Hamblin. They provided valuable contributions, including opinions and perspectives from their own experiences that helped shape this work. We thank them for their participation in brainstorming sessions, interviews, and multiple rounds of document reviews. We would also like to thank the many researchers, writers, and practitioners whose work provided the theoretical foundation for this report.

ix

x

Executive Summary

Supply chain management in public sector health systems has received increasing attention in recent years—as both a priority and a challenge for many countries—as governments find themselves struggling with an increasing number of products, programs, and patients to manage. Due to major increases in funding and donor support for a variety of health programs, supply chain managers may be responsible for a larger number and volume of products, but with limited additional resources to expand their capacity to manage, store, and distribute these products. Often, staff already working in this area receive additional pressure to build up internal capacity to meet the service delivery targets. However, many countries, faced with this type of challenge, recognize that these functions, that were once ancillary to their primary function of service delivery to patients, could tie up a significant portion of their budgets should they scale up appropriately. Furthermore, some countries recognize that these functions could potentially be outsourced to private sector logistics providers. More and more governments and donors are considering options to engage the private sector to contract out functions such as warehousing, distribution, and inventory management. However, the costs and benefits of doing so often are not clear and managers have limited resources to guide them through this process.

This document provides professionals working in supply chain management with a useful resource for engaging outside resources for public health logistics, covering the what, when, and how of outsourcing and its applicability to people working in public health supply chain management. They could include Ministry of Health (MOH) and Ministry of Finance (MOF) stakeholders, program managers, and Central Medical Store managers (or associated managers at parastatal organizations charged with health product management). This document, divided roughly into three sections, focuses on the following three elements of outsourcing.

What: This section describes the basic principles of outsourcing, and provides examples of outsourcing functions from the public sector supply chains in Bangladesh and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. These examples highlight possible successes, such as improved service delivery and increased capacity; they also explain the potential challenges—unpopularity due to loss of government jobs and skill shifting from supply chain management to contract management. The process of outsourcing can be a significant change for an organization; the lessons learned from these examples highlight considerations that should be carefully weighed before any decision is made to outsource.

When: This section covers the decision process, including basic guidelines for doing a cost benefit analysis—comparing outsourcing to maintaining functions in-house and, potentially, increasing the capacity to meet demands. The guide highlights additional considerations that are above and beyond cost—for example, the capacity of local organizations to take on these functions, political feasibility, and contracting and payment options that will affect relationships with private companies.

How: This section covers the specifics of contract management, including common pitfalls and suggested ways to avoid them. It outlines how to convene a project team to manage the process, the selection of a third party logistics provider (3PL), the creation of a service-level agreement with the

1

selected contractor, and management of the contract, including key performance indicators (KPIs) for the contract.

Overall, it is important to remember that while outsourcing can significantly reduce the number of functions that a government has to provide for its public sector health system, it may not be a perfect solution. Managing a contract is usually challenging, especially for a large job with a complex network, as public health supply chains often are. It may require fewer resources than doing the same job in-house; but will require different types of management, oversight, and funding. Furthermore, it may not be a feasible option if there are restrictions on contracting or funding, or the decision may cause political opposition because of lost jobs.

However, as private sector companies continue to make significant advances with technology and information management, their capacity to excel in supply chain functions often surpasses what is possible within the public sector. Rather than attempt to keep pace with these advances, it may make sense for government systems to benefit from that capacity by outsourcing specific functions to the private sector, when and if that is a viable option. For outsourcing, no one answer is always right, but to increase capacity to meet an increasing number of demands on supply chains for public sector health systems, this guide should help managers and policymakers determine what is possible within a given context.

2

Introduction

Many supply chain managers in public sector health systems find themselves with an increasing number and volume of products to manage, but with limited resources to expand their capacity to manage, store, and distribute these products. Often, to meet acceptable service levels, there is pressure to either build up internal capacity or contract these services to the private sector. However, the decision to do one or the other is not always clear, and there are limited resources available to guide managers through this process.

This document provides anyone working in supply chain management with a useful resource for engaging outside expertise for public health logistics, covering the what, when, and how of outsourcing and its applicability to people working in public health supply chain management. They could include the MOH and MOF stakeholders, program managers, Central Medical Store managers (or associated parastatal organizations charged with health product management). This document, divided roughly into three sections, focuses on the three elements of outsourcing.

 What: The first section of this paper presents the what of outsourcing, including background on outsourcing in the private sector. It also includes the functions that public health sector organizations should think about when they consider outsourcing and how this might improve their ability to meet customer needs. This is followed by a sub-section with examples of a few government health systems and nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) in resource-limited countries that have outsourced logistics functions; the document explores how these have affected service delivery. The examples include evidence of past outcomes and provide lessons learned that can be applied to future outsourcing programs.

 When: This section includes guidance on how to identify potential opportunities for outsourcing within an organization and how to conduct an analysis that would help an MOH or government body determine if outsourcing would be feasible and advantageous to meet organizational performance objectives.

 How: This section provides guidance on the steps that should be included in an implementation plan, after the decision to outsource is made. This includes the selection of a 3PL, the tender process, drafting a contract and monitoring performance, and building and maintaining a relationship with a 3PL to improve the quality of service delivery.

Overview Outsourcing discrete business functions is a well-established practice in the private sector. During the past several decades, a significant number of companies and organizations have expanded the use of 3PLs for functions that fall outside their core capacities. Typically, organizations outsource parts of their business when the need for functions beyond their main business or mission exceeds their ability or utility (cost, efficiency, mission). Rather than invest additional resources in staff and infrastructure to expand support to these functions, it may be cost effective to outsource to an organization that specializes in these services, often at a lower cost and/or higher level of service. Businesses frequently outsource parts of supply chain management (i.e., procurement, distribution, logistics etc.), as companies seek to shift their responsibility for all management functions to only

3

those that specifically require their unique and specialized expertise. The once fully vertical model of companies managing all their logistics functions has moved toward reliance on companies whose primary focus is logistics services. For example, a company that manufactures goods may outsource warehousing and shipping to another company that focuses on warehousing and distribution rather than trying to build this capacity.

While much of this shift initially occurred in the private sector of developed countries, where infrastructure and information systems are robust; developing countries have increased interest in adopting this model, where the public sector still provides many services. As markets have opened up and private services have expanded in many countries, organizations are exploring how the same basic principles can be applied to their supply chains. In many resource-limited countries, the private sector has significantly expanded their involvement in improving education, service delivery, and infrastructure; including road and bridge building, communications, and power networks.

For instance, in several countries, hospital management has been outsourced to private companies to improve efficiency and quality of service delivery. The same principle of outsourcing non-core functions can be applied to public health systems. Ministries of health often identify their core competency as health service delivery to their constituencies, yet continue to be involved in logistics for health products, such as warehousing, transportation, quality assurance, etc. These functions could potentially be outsourced to third parties, thus freeing up key resources to focus on the core mission. The result can be increased service levels for the patients and reduced operational costs.

Currently, in many developing countries, MOHs are responsible for all in-country distribution of health products, in addition to forecasting, procuring supplies, and providing service delivery. In many cases, freight forwarders coordinate shipments as far as the central warehouse in a country1; but, from there, the government is responsible for all aspects of product management and movement. That means that, in these countries, the public sector is responsible for coordinating all movement and management of products from the time they pass through customs, quarantine, and quality assurance testing, to storage at the national level; and then as they are distributed to the provincial, district, and service delivery points. In many places, this is necessary. With minimal infrastructure and limited private market development, the MOH has few options.

Further, because of growing populations and a rising number of health services and facilities, MOHs in developing countries often invest increasing amounts of scarce resources in supply chain management for the public sector as the number of service delivery points expand, patient access/demand grows, health supplies and suppliers increase, and volumes increase. This growth in the number of products and clients results in expanding needs for warehousing, information management, transportation, and the equipment and staff needed to support those functions. Often this increased demand occurs within an atmosphere of uncertainty as donor commitments and government budgets vary from year to year, seasonal disease patterns and product demands change, and fuel costs and currency values fluctuate, making these ancillary responsibility for logistics management a significant part of an MOH’s management burden. In many countries, the people charged with logistics management are pharmacists and clinicians; they require additional logistics training to carry out this added task. Furthermore, high levels of staff turnover in many public health

1 Occasionally, freight forwarders deliver products to levels farther down in a health system, but this is unusual; this is an example of the type of distribution outsourcing that this paper explores.

4

systems leave positions vacant for significant periods and require frequent investments of time and money in training new staff.

The objective of a public health supply chain is to get the right health commodities, of the right quality, at the right time, in the right quantity, to the right place, and for the right cost. For many reasons, this is a significant challenge for the public health sector in many countries—it is difficult to find the resources required to consistently meet the six rights. These challenges may be the result of increased supply chain demands of other (vertical) programs, lack of routine or accurate data, limited forecasting and procurement capacity, vehicle limitations, budget constraints, lack of staff trained in logistics, outdated information systems, policy shifts, or other factors that governments must face. These challenges can result in weak supply chains that negatively impact systems already struggling with limited resources, including stockouts; they can also result in high morbidity and mortality rates when patients do not receive medicines and health supplies, and the lack of or inferior data that leads to poor decision making and inefficient use of funding. Thus, outsourcing has emerged as a potential way to maximize the resources of governments (MOHs) and improve service delivery while leveraging the expertise of private sector service providers to better meet customer needs.

5

6

What?

Outsourcing is often defined as “engaging a third party provider to perform services for the host organization that were previously performed in-house.” In this definition, third party provider refers to any entity outside the traditional supplier-carrier-consumer relationship. Within any organization, public or private, there may be valid business and strategic reasons to outsource parts of the operation so the business can focus on its core capabilities. This process requires both an objective evaluation of internal performance and capacity, followed by a search for reliable partners that can deliver responsive services. Note that we distinguish outsourcing from contracting out—contracting usually implies that the customer dictates exactly what a contractor is to do and how to do it; outsourcing means the customer dictates the required outcome and the contractor determines how to complete the task based on their expertise.

In public health systems and supply chain management, a number of potential functional areas can be outsourced. There are many examples of public health systems that have contracted out service delivery; where, for example, a private organization or NGO may be contracted to provide health services to clients or to manage hospital administration. Following are a few such examples of this arrangement:

 In Cambodia, to outsource health services to NGOs, the MOH created two mechanisms: (1) a service delivery contract (SDC), where the contractor has complete line responsibility for service delivery in a specific area; and (2) management contract (MC) where the contractor works within the MOH system to strengthen the system. In El Alto, Bolivia, an NGO was given a management contract to improve the hospital management. In Madagascar and Senegal, the governments contracted with NGOs to deliver community-based nutrition interventions for improved health (Loevinsohn 2008).

Figure 1. The Logistics Cycle

While there are a limited number of well-documented examples of governments outsourcing parts of their supply chains; there are still opportunities in this area, and there is increasing interest in exploring this option. Many logistics functions can be outsourced. However, the various functions of the logistics cycle in figure 1 show clearly that some functions are better outsourced than others. MOHs are unlikely to relegate responsibility for functions that

7

they consider part of their core competency—areas that are under their direct mission and that they can perform better than an external party. These functions typically include developing and updating treatment guidelines, developing health policies, resourcing health facilities, creating national essential drug lists, and selecting products. However, ministries may determine that outside expertise is advantageous for some other functions that may not be part of their core competencies: forecasting and procurement, storage, distribution, and logistics management information systems (LMIS).

Supply Chain Functions to Consider Outsourcing The following supply chain activities may be appropriate for outsourcing in this context, because of the MOHs’ lack of specialization in these areas and the frequent availability of these services from third party providers:

Importation: This is the expeditious and controlled movement of goods into a country, always following local regulations; it may include customs clearance. To remain sensitive to necessary storage conditions, third party importation services may also include—

 Bonded Facilities—A government certifies these facilities and a bonding agency guarantees them; goods can be securely stored and the related taxes and duties deferred until they are removed.

 Cold Chain—This is the guaranteed maintenance and storage of goods, at the appropriate temperature, as they move from the supplier, through customs, to the consignee. This is especially important for vaccines and other temperature-sensitive products.

 Storage and Distribution—This is the secure, appropriate, and climate-controlled warehousing for all products. Third party providers may also offer inventory accuracy guarantees; 24-hour assistance, if needed; product insurance; and access for government or program officers to ensure proper goods management. Related services may include—

― Inventory management. The service provider may use an electronic warehouse management system (WMS) that would allow for real-time sharing of inventory status, if the customer uses a compatible system.

― Stock rotation. Proper stock rotation will ensure minimal product expiration and wastage; it may be first-to-expire, first-out (FEFO) for products with limited shelf lives but first-in, first-out (FIFO) for others.

― Picking and packing. This may include preparing orders for delivery to individual facilities, or for a district storage center; the service provider may or may not control it.

― Order tracking. This information shows what quantities of which products have moved from where to where, including the dates of these movements and proof that a facility received the products.

8

― Cross-docking. This is a service for orders that are packed for a facility, but sent to a collection or redistribution point for consolidation and onward delivery. Additional storage is not needed.

Transportation and Delivery—This is the physical delivery service of goods between different levels in the supply chain (movement from central level to regional level or last mile locations, etc.), according to the program/client requirements.

Product Security—A third party provider manages a product for the entire time; they are responsible for the safety and security of the goods. Additional services provided for product security may include bar coding, closed-circuit television (CCTV) for monitoring and security, restricted access, and product tracking.

Information Services—Service providers typically invest in information systems to monitor stock movements, order status, and invoicing, using bar coding and electronic data management systems. With this data, third parties can provide real-time data on stock levels, product usage, and trend analysis to add significant visibility and value to management.

Types of Service Providers Although any external or third party organization may be able to provide services for a customer, several types of organizations focus specifically on logistics services.

Third Party Logistics Providers—These providers specialize in the logistics functions described above. Commonly called 3PLs, these organizations are popular in the private sector as solution providers to firms interested in outsourcing some or all aspects of their supply chain management functions. They typically invest in physical infrastructure and information services that make their offerings more sophisticated and specialized than what can be provided by other organizations in­ house.

Non-Asset–Based 3PLs—These providers offer logistics solutions without ownership of physical resources, such as warehouses or trucks. They operate similarly to freight forwarders by negotiating and contracting warehousing and transportation while offering information services related to product handling.

Fourth Party Logistics Providers (4PLs)—These lead logistics partners act as a supply chain integrator that assembles and manages the resources, capabilities, and technology of its own organization with those of complementary service providers to deliver a comprehensive supply chain solution. These partners function as the primary manager of other 3PL partners for a client. They provide a single interface for the client and are the primary supply chain management provider, even if multiple parties actually perform specific aspects.

Beyond Outsourcing: Supply Chain Collaboration In addition to outsourcing, supply chain collaboration is another option for working with the private sector or other external partners in supply chain management. Supply chain collaboration is the joint planning, coordinating, and process integration between suppliers, customers, and other partners. This type of agreement can reduce costs, increase return on assets, and improve reliability and responsiveness to market needs.

9

Supplier-client collaboration can take a variety of forms. Three of the most common are described below, but the best forms of collaboration are tailored to the unique needs and requirements of the supplier-client partnership.

 Supplier direct delivery: In this model, the supplier delivers products directly to the distribution point. For example, in some local supermarkets, the supplying company delivers and shelves a variety of products (shampoo, soft drinks, etc.). This transfers the burden of storage and transport to the supplier. It also increases the risk for the distribution point, because they depend on their supplier’s well-functioning supply chain to avoid stockouts.

In Mexico, as a public health example, a system analysis concluded that distribution costs in the public health sector were 30 to 50 percent lower when private companies provided the same services. The higher costs were attributed to insufficient logistics infrastructure, limited information systems, and a complex network of distribution. In states where the government managed the distribution, products arrived at a state central warehouse; were moved to local warehouses; and then were eventually moved to the hospitals and health facilities, as needed. In this system, lead times were long, managers had very little visibility into the status of their orders, and warehouses were under-utilized. As a pilot, several states changed the system so the suppliers delivered medicines directly to the hospitals and health centers. The results showed that this shift to supplier direct delivery resulted in an improved response time, a 95 percent order fulfillment rate, and a 36 percent increase in the availability of medicines. (A.T. Kearney 2004).

 Collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR): This can be used to streamline communication through the supply chain, from the manufacturer to the end user. Information shared between suppliers and the procurer allows for continuous updating of inventory and projected needs. This, in turn, makes the end-to-end supply chain more efficient, facilitates better supply planning, and decreases expenditures on excess inventory by creating a leaner supply chain. It improves transport by promoting more efficient routing schedules, which are based on known demand.

CPFR has been used for public health in the past, at least partially, in coordinating donor-funded procurements. For example, the Clinton Health Access Initiative aggregated demand forecasts for pediatric antiretrovirals needed across many developing countries for treatment of HIV and AIDS in children; this helped suppliers understand the total demand for specific products. Prior to this, suppliers had to create their own forecasts for product development and manufacturing, with limited visibility into country-level demand estimates, particularly for new products. This type of information sharing enables the manufacturer to plan better, such as ensuring the availability of necessary raw materials and increasing their ability to meet customer needs on time. This information sharing needs to be routine and continuous to ensure that ongoing supply levels are appropriate, given the estimated demand.

 Vendor managed inventory—In this model, the manufacturer or distributor for the client must maintain the product inventory levels. The inventory can be held either at a distributor/supplier interim distribution center or, for replenishment, at the supplier’s central warehouse or manufacturing facility. This system requires the supplier to have visibility of the supply chain to the distribution point. For the manufacturer or supplier to know when and how much stock to replenish, they must have accurate and real-time knowledge of inventory status at the distribution points.

10

In the private sector, this is often done through the Internet or electronic data interchange (EDI). Computer-to-computer transfer of data minimizes data entry and calculation errors in the LMIS; this improves order accuracy. The responsibility to ensure stock availability shifts to the supplier. This direct link to the point of service further enables the supplier to provide quality, efficient service to both the distributor and the end user.

For example, in South Africa several distributors are warehousing and distributing antiretrovirals (ARVs) for suppliers. Three large distributors, IHD (now UTi Pharma Distribution), PHD, and CiplaMedpro have contracts with a variety of ARV suppliers—the suppliers maintain ownership of the medicines, but the distributors store, manage, and sell them. At the time the products are moved to the point of sale (health facilities, smaller distributors, etc.), ownership is transferred from the supplier to the buyer. The distributor is, therefore, a retailer that stores the product and shares the expected demand with the supplier to help better manage inventory in exchange for a predetermined commission or profit.

Specific Examples of Outsourcing Logistics in Public Sector Health Systems Following are some examples of how these types of outsourcing partnerships have been implemented by governments in health systems in developing countries. These examples of partnerships in health logistics in low-income countries include information on the background, decision criteria, risks and concerns of participants, and outcomes. The examples provide lessons learned that MOHs, policymakers, and supply chain implementers can use in similar contexts.

Example 1: Gradually handing over control in Bangladesh

Background Prior to 1994, the Government of Bangladesh (GOB) MOH Directorate General for Family Planning (DGFP) used a government-owned and -operated fleet of vehicles for distributing family planning commodities. However, because of consistently late deliveries, labor shortages, lost products, and high costs, the DGFP decided to outsource some of the transportation of family planning commodities.

Decision Criteria To help the GOB make this decision, it contracted a consultant to assess the logistics system to determine if there were opportunities for increased cost savings and/or greater efficiencies by outsourcing some or all of the family planning commodities logistics. This third party consultancy performed a cost-benefit analysis and analyzed efficiency of the system. Specifically, the consultant compared asset utilization rates, cost schedules, human resource capacity, and service levels of the private sector and the DGFP. The assessor found significant opportunities for cost savings and some potential service benefits (according to the consultant, the cost savings alone justified the change). Most of the potential savings were by eliminating or reducing government employees’ pensions and other benefits (due to the high labor costs) and the high operational costs caused by the under-utilization of human and physical capital (e.g., idle drivers and vehicles, and shipping at less than a full truckload).

11

The DGFP decided to proceed with a limited outsourcing plan; the DGFP outsourced 20 percent of the distribution of family planning commodities from the central warehouse to the regional warehouses, to the district reserve stores, and, finally, to the sub-district (thana) stores.2 By outsourcing 20 percent of the transportation to an outside organization, the government was able to easily compare the performance of the private sector transportation to the public sector transportation. From this comparison, it was obvious that by using the private carrier, costs were lower and efficiencies (as determined by on-time deliveries) were greater. This success motivated the DGFP to expand the private sector involvement and commit to outsourcing up to 80 percent of the transportation requirements of the DGFP. To proceed, the DGFP held a competitive bid for a two year contract that the GOB fully funded (not donors).

Risks and Concerns The government was hesitant to make the outsourcing decision because of several concerns. First, the GOB was using a significant amount of capital (trucks) for transportation and they employed a large number of drivers. What would happen to this capital and, more important, what would happen to the drivers if the government outsourced this function? Second, what would political consequences be for the redundancies? And, finally, the GOB wanted to retain control over the family planning program— outsourcing was seen as a threat to this control. Because these were serious concerns, they had to be addressed during any discussion or decision to outsource.

This led the government to take a moderate approach in adapting an outsourcing strategy. Not only did the DGFP begin the project by outsourcing only 20 percent of the transportation requirement, but it also decided not to dismiss any employees. Instead, the DGFP would not hire new employees or replace worn-out capital. As employees left, and as vehicles were retired, they were replaced by the private carrier. To maintain some control over transportation, the government decided to cap private sector participation at 80 percent of the total capacity requirement. This ensured the GOB a minimum of 20 percent of the total capacity3 (DELIVER 2007), which allowed them to maintain some control, and flexibility for emergency shipments and backup to resolve any problems with the private carrier.

Outcomes The cost and service-level benefits for outsourcing transportation have already been mentioned. These benefits occurred when the private sector took a more competitive and professional approach to transportation logistics management. For service-level improvements, the evidence is largely anecdotal. In the past, there were frequent labor problems (striking government workers); corruption (government employees used the trucks to visit relatives, which delayed departures and changed routes); drivers’ lack of accountability (drivers would claim mechanical problems to spend time with family members); and poor use of capital (shipping less than a truck load). Compared to outsourcing to the private sector, cost savings are measurable. Now, there is a financial incentive to hold employees accountable, use capital efficiently, and use modern route planning software.

2 From the sub-district stores to the clinics, transportation is more efficient. Each month the last mile suppliers (health clinic workers) meet at the sub-district stores to attend meetings and receive paychecks. At this time, each attendee is resupplied with family planning commodities. The quantities are small enough that they can be transported using local transportation, motorcycle, or bicycle. At the time the project was implemented, there was one central warehouse, three regional warehouses, 18 district reserve stores, and 467 sub-districts stores in Bangladesh. 3 As of September 2006, the private sector capacity had only reached 50 percent of the transportation requirement.

12

According to the third party consultancy, these improvements could save the DGFP approximately 25 percent in annual operating costs for the routes outsourced to the private sector (Pearson 1997).

However, outsourcing did not mean that the DGFP could ignore transportation; it has not eliminated the government’s role, it has simply changed it. Now, rather than using government resources to provide transportation, the government plans, oversees, and evaluates the service provider. Furthermore, the exacting standards of the private carrier have led to more rigorous standards for the DGFP, particularly in resource planning, warehousing, forecasting, and payroll practices. The DGFP also had to learn to manage a contract, particularly writing the contract; and manage the bidding process, perform supplier evaluations, and monitor supplier performance.

Finally, the private sector service providers have also had concerns. They were cautious about working with the government because of their delayed payments and perceived level of corruption. To maintain the trust of its private partners and to maintain these relationships, the GOB had to include payment terms in the contracts and follow through every time.

Lessons Learned Outsourcing is not a perfect solution that will end all logistics concerns. It can lead to significant cost savings and service-level improvements, but it requires constant involvement and special skills from the outsourcing party, particularly in contract management. The DGFP had to develop, manage, and evaluate their outsourcing contract and meet the standards of the contract.

Outsourcing programs are often unpopular because of the perceived loss of government control over parts of the public programs and concerns about layoffs. These political risks should be carefully considered and mitigated in outsourcing programs to ensure adequate management participation and organizational buy-in. The DGFP overcame these concerns by proceeding cautiously and avoiding politically unpopular layoffs.

Finally, the profit incentives of the private sector encourage greater use of technology and cost saving practices in health commodity delivery. These improvements placed pressure on the DGFP to follow supply chain best practices, but they also increased service levels.

Example 2: Using a 4PL in the Democratic Republic of the Congo

Background In 2005, the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) became part of an innovative public-private partnership in the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) (Global Health Council 2009). The DRC’s general lack of infrastructure and government resources has created significant challenges in administering a much-needed grant from the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria. Because the government lacked the internal capacity to manage a large public health project, UNDP stepped in to fill this role; they are accountable for the U.S.$200 million grant.

Under this grant, UNDP is responsible for the entire supply chain—from procurement to final distribution. It has fully capable procurement units with years of experience in procuring drugs and health commodities; however, when the grant was issued, it lacked local capacity and expertise in distribution, particularly in last-mile distribution. This challenge was complicated by the lack of infrastructure in the DRC—they have only 250 miles of paved roads in a country approximately the size of Western Europe.

13

Due to human resource capacity constraints and an inability to develop the short-term capacity, UNDP was not able to use the public sector to distribute its commodities but, instead, turned to the private sector. UNDP contacted the World Response Consultancy to engineer a public-private partnership strategy. World Response drafted an initial request for proposal (RFP) that included the primary distribution tasks that UNDP would need the private sector to fulfill—quality assurance, customs clearance, storage, and comprehensive national distribution. UNDP and World Response decided that, despite the procurement capabilities of UNDP, it would be beneficial to outsource this function, as well. This would create one cohesive supply chain that was implemented from start to finish by the private sector service provider. After completing a competitive bidding process, Missionpharma was awarded the contract.

Decision Criteria As previously mentioned, UNDP lacked the expertise to implement a distribution network under the difficult conditions in the DRC. To quickly attain a high level of supply chain service, UNDP needed the knowledge of an organization with on-the-ground experience. This would allow UNDP to fulfill its Global Fund mandate and use its resources efficiently and effectively. Developing internal capacity would have been too time consuming and would have initially affected service at the lower levels as UNDP learned to manage the distribution.

Risks and Concerns One of the greatest challenges in this partnership has been reinforcing accountability of the participating organizations. UNDP mitigated this challenge in its contract, which stipulates that payment for procured products will not be made until UNDP receives verification that the products have reached their final destination. This ensures UNDP that its objectives are met, but it requires a high level of trust from Missionpharma.

The incentive arrangement also places Missionpharma at significant financial risk when products are damaged or lost, and poses administrative management challenges due to the length of the supply chain. To overcome this, Missionpharma pre-packs cartons in its overseas warehouses for shipment directly to the service delivery points throughout the DRC (Global Health Council 2009). Missionpharma also established a bonded warehouse to protect products against leakage during the customs clearance process. The warehouse, with a track and trace barcode system, has allowed Missionpharma to maintain control and visibility of products throughout the supply chain, eliminating leakage and protecting its investment.

Outcomes The primary outcome has been that UNDP has successfully distributed health commodities throughout the DRC, a country with very limited infrastructure and long lead times.

Furthermore, they reached this level in a relatively short period of time. By contracting with only one service provider and reducing the amount of time and effort necessary to coordinate a supply chain among multiple partners, UNDP has been able to implement a complete, functioning supply chain in less than two months. This has guaranteed that the target population has access to needed health commodities quickly, saving lives.

Finally, the incentive structure of the public-private partnership has contributed to the implementation of a best practices supply chain that is more common among big businesses. Strict accountability and financial incentives provide Missionpharma the impetus to employ real-time

14

package tracking technology, a bonded warehouse, and a chartered dedicated aircraft. Undoubtedly, these practices have improved service levels and overall superior supply chain performance.

Lessons Learned Public-private partnerships can do more than fill the gaps in public sector capacity; they can encourage supply chain innovations and greater supply chain performance. These benefits are realized through contracts and incentives that mirror private sector competitiveness, risk, and accountability. This risk encouraged supply chain best practices and innovation in the DRC context and has also improved service levels throughout the length of the supply chain.

Key Lessons from These Examples From these examples, we have learned that the application of outsourcing and use of 3PL services by public institutions and public health organizations, in particular, can improve service delivery, but it is not always an easily implemented solution. There are many reasons why MOHs and associated parastatal organizations responsible for warehousing and distribution of health products would consider outsourcing some of their supply chain functions to private contractors. One reason is that as health services expand, as they have in many countries, the number of products that need to be managed and the number of distribution points have increased. Without major investments in infrastructure and equipment, it is extremely difficult to achieve this expansion. Because of donor support, many resource-limited settings have had a rapid increase in the number and volume of products they must manage, but they have received little additional support for inventory management and distribution for staff, equipment, or management skills. Further, warehousing and transportation needs often vary, meaning that the investment required to increase infrastructure to accommodate the largest inventory may not be worthwhile, if that need is only once a year, or is infrequent enough that it would be more efficient to outsource the need for additional capacity. In some cases, the cost of adapting a system for maximum variability—buying additional trucks or building additional warehouse space—could be avoided by outsourcing that function for a specified function or period of time.

In addition to the common issues just mentioned, four ideas from the examples can be applied to other situations:

MOH recognition of capacity constraints. The main reason the governments or agencies decided to outsource specific functions was because the MOH recognized that they could not carry out the identified activity, whether it was human capacity, or infrastructure capacity, or both. This limitation prompted the MOH to determine how they could obtain that capacity elsewhere instead of investing the time and capital necessary to build the capacity internally.

Defining the private sector: The private sector partners in the outsourcing relationships mentioned in this research fall outside the traditional definition of private sector. These partners range from domestic for-profit organizations to international private cooperating agencies, such as Missionpharma, that have organizational goals beyond earning a profit. These are not for profit organizations as defined by the for profit private sector. Defining these partners is particularly important to the country context. Opportunities to outsource depend on the level of development, infrastructure, and private sector sophistication. Often, very low-income countries do not have options for private sector partnership. As countries’ markets develop, however, so do their private sectors; and the options for outsourcing with private sector companies increase.

15

Concerns of control and payment: The most common concerns mentioned by the outsourcing participants were control and payment. Control was particularly important to the public sector partner, but the private sector also mentioned it. This concern should be addressed before an outsourcing decision is made. In the examples mentioned earlier, the Government of Bangladesh was concerned about the control of its health supply chain; this was one reason it chose to proceed cautiously and to outsource only a small percentage of its transportation capacity. This type of risk assessment and caution contributes to successful outsourcing campaigns by encouraging participant support and political buy-in.

In the examples researched, the private sector participant was, at least initially, concerned about the ability of the public sector to guarantee timely and accurate payment. This type of concern leads to higher costs and lower service levels because the private sector partner is hesitant to make significant investments in the project if there are concerns about recovering costs. This risk can be mitigated through contract management, but it can only be eliminated by developing a true partnership and trust.

Contract management: For an outsourcing program to succeed, there must be excellent contract management. The outsourcing organization needs to know how to write, enforce, and monitor a contract. This includes clauses for payment terms, performance expectations, assessment, and contract renewal. Different types of contracts are appropriate for different contexts, but it is essential that both parties enter the contract with accurate expectations of performance, a clear understanding of how that performance will be measured, and what the consequences will be for under-performance.

16

When?

The decision to outsource is not one that should be made without an exhaustive evaluation of resources and intended outcomes. Usually, some catalyst or issue drives the exploration process of alternative solutions, whether it is a resource limitation or a challenge in maintaining performance that an outside partner may be better positioned to address.

For example, as the needs of public sector health systems expand and the scope of products managed by a MOH increases, outsourcing may be an opportunity to expand without making additional investment in infrastructure and staff. This could either be a short-term strategy for managing change, or a longer-term strategy if a government decides that these capacities are not part of their core competencies and are not areas that they want to grow internally.

Additionally, shifting certain functions may result in economies of scale, as a 3PL can leverage the resources and needs of other clients to more efficiently meet the needs of all. Thus, when a 3PL consolidates smaller infrequent shipments, they may be able to provide larger, more frequent shipments at a lower average cost than the clients could provide individually. This might ultimately lead to lower costs for the MOH and service improvements for the ultimate customers. Using 3PLs leverages the private sector’s flexibility and may help overcome absorptive capacity constraints imposed on government institutions. Some common challenges, and how a 3PL may be able to address these, are displayed in figure 2.

Figure 2. Uses and Advantages of 3PLs

17

The following two-phase process will enable a public institution, such as a MOH, to decide if they should pursue outsourcing as a way to improve service.

Deliberation—Strategic and Operational Considerations At this initial stage, the organization recognizes that there are issues with service levels or capacity, but they may need to conduct further analysis to pinpoint operational bottlenecks. This should involve a group of internal stakeholders who understand the existing system and its performance and are able to analyze options for improvement. Ideally, the team is consistently involved in the process from beginning to end. During this deliberation process, the stakeholder team will determine which of the organization’s functions and activities could be outsourced to a third party. The stakeholder team may find that none of the analyzed functions fall into this category, but the deliberation process will still help determine the best approach for moving forward with system improvements. The steps in this process may take the following form:

1. Identification of core competency—Out of all parts of an organization’s process, define what is and what is not within the core operational expertise of the organization. The core competency of a business is its main purpose and its key to survival; it is how a private sector organization makes a profit and survives in a competitive environment. Surprisingly, it is common for an organization to misunderstand, or to not recognize, its core competency; because it often changes with time, technology, management, or customer demands. Before an organization makes an outsourcing decision, it should be confident that it understands its core competencies.

The core competency is what sets an organization apart from its competition; it is what the organization does that its competitors do not, or what it does better than its competitors. Many successful businesses have multiple core competencies but, for simplicity, observers often focus on only one. The following are examples of frequently recognized core competencies.

 Dell: manufacturing consistently high-quality, customizable computers

 Apple: design and innovation

 Walmart: low costs because of its supply chain excellence

Each organization has a core competency that sets it apart from the competition and enables it to earn high profits, often at an above average rate of return.4 Without this core competency, the organization would not survive, or would not be as successful (i.e., profitable).

Using this process, an MOH should consider outsourcing activities that are outside its areas of operational expertise, or areas in which the MOH does not want to build expertise. This move toward specialization of services would, for example, allow a Central Medical Store (CMS) that has staff with expertise in procurement and management of pharmaceutical supplies, but limited experience with transportation scheduling or fleet management, to outsource the physical distribution of products. This would increase the CMS’ capacity to focus on their areas of strength while shifting responsibility for other aspects of supply chain management to the private sector, rather than trying to build internal capacity.

4 An above normal rate of return is a rate greater than the organization’s cost of capital, or an economic profit (as opposed to accounting profit).

18

2. Operational process review—Identify functional areas within the organization’s operations that are not performing well. This requires the ability to measure performance and compare it to some benchmark or standard. Comparable measurement of performance must have performance-based indicators, also known as metrics. The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT has published a list of suggested metrics for logistics systems (Aronovich et al. 2010); it is available on the project’s website.

Using metrics like these, public health logistics performance can be measured against international standards, including the World Health Organization (WHO) (WHO Expert Committee 2006), or private sector standards, such as International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The operational process review can also occur through customer feedback or assessments conducted by outside consultants. A skills assessment of staff should be done to understand the knowledge base and the capacity currently available.

After the core competency and the process review are complete, the areas to be outsourced should be clear.

3. Feasibility analysis—Determine which outsourcing options are politically and operationally feasible. Having identified certain processes as potential candidates for outsourcing, the stakeholder team will need to assess the political feasibility of outsourcing government operations to a private third party. After the team has determined that there are no political barriers to outsourcing, they should find out if there are any operational barriers, such as the availability of 3PLs that could carry out the tasks the MOH wants to outsource. This should include a frank discussion and cooperation between MOH and MOF stakeholders about how to secure funding and whether to use the MOH’s capital, loans, or donor funding. It is essential that they discuss if and when the initiative could become self-sufficient.

Cost-Benefit Analysis—Financial Considerations After a not-for-profit organization determines that outsourcing a particular function would make operational sense, it must assess the potential financial implications of doing so. A cost-benefit analysis enables the organization to compare the costs and benefits of providing the services in­ house to the costs and benefits of outsourcing the same services or functions.

When conducting a cost-benefit analysis, the following points are important to keep in mind:

 The cost comparison should include additional measurements beyond the direct costs of vehicles, fuel, warehouse space, and staff; these costs need to be compared to the cost that would be paid for the 3PL to assume these functions.

 For product availability, depending on the circumstances, and especially in the public sector, it may be worthwhile to pay higher operating costs while improving performance. If the overall cost of operations goes up by 10 percent, but the service levels improve by 30 percent, the MOH will need to decide if its service priorities allow this cost increase.

 Also, it is important to consider the longer-term benefits if future maintenance or upgrade costs are averted. Such trade-offs should be carefully analyzed in any comparison of the value of outsourcing versus maintaining functions in-house.

 Further, use of a 3PL may provide greater flexibility for adjusting to changes in demand or number of supplies managed. This increased flexibility may not generate a measureable, monetary benefit, but it can improve performance, regardless.

19

Therefore, an organization must gather detailed information on costs and processes necessary to quantify many of these elements. This requires information about the entire system, the location of cost information, and, finally, access to the information.

The following section lists each of the components of a cost-benefit analysis to determine the financial implication of logistics outsourcing. Each component includes examples of cost figures that should be accounted for in the analysis. To obtain these figures, the stakeholder group can use accounting costs, costs allocated based on relative amount of activity, and validated assumptions or estimates. For example, if an essential medicines program uses 60 percent of a warehouse and they want to know the warehousing costs, they could consider the entire amount spent on warehousing—space, utilities, depreciation, maintenance, and labor—and determine 60 percent of that to represent the amount consumed by the essential medicines program.

A. Existing operation Determine the current costs associated with the function under consideration for outsourcing (see table 1).

Table 1. Category and Examples of Costs

Category of Costs Examples of Costs to Include

Employee and administrative  Salaries  Pensions  Health care  Training  Other benefits.

Equipment  Operations (fuel, insurance)  Maintenance  Replacement.

Buildings  Operations costs (electricity, communications, facilities)

 Maintenance  Security (guards and systems).

Cost of inventory*

*if considering outsourcing inventory management

 Purchase value of expired stock  Purchase value of excess stock  Purchase value of unusable or obsolete stock.

These types of cost data can be collected using the project’s supply chain costing tool (USAID | DELIVER PROJECT Forthcoming), an Excel-based template for capturing and analyzing supply chain costs by tier (level), function, and facility. Another useful tool for determining what to measure when estimating costs of current transportation systems is Guidelines for Assessing Costs in a Logistics System: An Example of Transport Cost Analysis (Abdallah 2004), which is available on the project’s website.

While the information on operating costs of the current system are critical inputs, it is important to acknowledge that if the current system is underperforming, and the objective of outsourcing is to

20

improve service delivery, the cost of what it would take to meet a higher level of performance must also be part of the evaluation. Therefore, it is necessary to cost, or at least develop a reasonable estimate, of the costs that would be incurred to improve the current system (see table 2).

B. Upgrade costs

Table 2. Category and Examples of Costs to Upgrade

Category of Costs Examples of Costs to Include

Benchmarking operation  Consultancy cost.

Improving personnel skills  Training costs o trainer’s time o cost of lost staff time while in training.

 Recruitment costs o job specification development o advertising o interviewing.

Improving infrastructure  Buildings o warehouses o garages o offices.

 Equipment o computers o materials handling equipment o racking o vehicles and spare parts o vehicle repair equipment.

 Systems o financial o logistical o vehicle tracking.

 Personnel turnover o losing/gaining people and associated

training.

The sum of the actual costs (A), plus estimated upgrade costs (B), can then be compared to documented and estimated costs of outsourcing, outlined in the section C (see table 3). This information may be difficult to estimate, but it is important to be as realistic as possible. It may be possible to obtain input estimates from a private sector company working in another sector with similar equipment, infrastructure, and systems costs. They may not be able to share their actual costs but they may be able to gauge whether a set of estimates is reasonable, in a given context.

21

C. Outsourced operation  Cost of tendering

The process of requesting cost estimates from potential outsourcing partners and evaluating their ability to perform the task will require administrative time. The contract manager should participate in this process.

 Cost of contract management

This will include paying people to monitor the contract, which can be very time consuming. They may need to monitor the quality of work during visits, including travel costs, or by phone or email. Expect to closely monitor organizations with less experience.

 Third party costs for services required

The third party cost estimate will probably be the largest percentage of costs incurred when outsourcing. Verify that their estimates are realistic to prevent disputes if they do not follow through on their proposal.

 Cost of providing some infrastructure

Depending on the outsourcing contract, both buildings and vehicles may need to be provided to the third party.

 Contingency for poor performance

What is the back-up plan if the service provider does not perform well? Keeping a contingency plan may cost money, but it is essential to ensure high levels of service.

 Retrenchment costs (if current operation is scaled back)

Outsourcing may be politically unpopular as it may require downsizing the part of the system that is currently performing that function. Laying off workers may lead to low morale among those who remain, fearful that their jobs are also at risk. Depending on local and organizational labor laws, redundancy pay may be required to compensate employees who have been downsized. Although this is not desired, the risk of sabotage from disgruntled employees may need to be factored into scale-back costs, as well.

Any organizational change will lead to a drop in productivity levels during the transition period, which will vary in length, depending on the size of the change. In a cost-benefit analysis, the loss of productivity may also need to be considered.

 Cost of capital

Because the life of a project normally spans a specific length of time, it is important to evaluate the costs over the entire relevant project period and to account for any risk. This time frame and risk add an additional component to the equation: the cost of capital. The cost of capital is equal to the next best use of the organization’s resources (the opportunity cost or risk of the investment). As a general rule, the cost of capital is equal to the return that an investment could have earned elsewhere (by investing in another project or by investing in the financial markets), or the rate of the return that the organization has earned on similar projects. Essentially, the cost of capital is a measurement of risk; the higher the risk, the greater the cost of capital.

22

Table 3. Cost Comparison Sample Worksheet

Current costs (A)

Cost to upgrade (B) Cost to outsource (C) Potential savings/increased cost from outsourcing

Total = A + B Total = C Difference = C – (A+B)

The cost-benefit analysis can take many forms, but in a private sector environment where profit guides the decisionmaking process, it is often distilled to a mathematical equation such as net present value (NPV); if the equation is positive, the organization pursues the opportunity; if it is negative, the organization abandons the project. In its simplest form, an analyst identifies each and every relevant cost of a decision, including non-monetary costs, which are given a value based on an economic estimation. These costs are then added together and compared against the expected benefits (cost savings, profit, increased quality, etc.). This analysis should yield the information necessary to make a decision about whether outsourcing would either decrease costs or be a reasonable expansion of costs, given what it would take to match capacity with internal resources.

D. Non-quantifiable benefits for a public organization that decides to outsource

Not all the benefits are monetary or quantifiable and they may require a different type of estimation. For example, it is often difficult to put a dollar value on increased quality because the provider may be unsure about how consumers will receive it. There are many such benefits to outsourcing that do not fit the cost-benefit equation, but they should still be considered when making an outsourcing decision. These include the following examples: 1. Using public money in an effective manner  Public perception that government is getting

value for money

2. Improving the services to the public  Seen to be socially focused

3. High performance leading to positive customer feedback  Improved team morale

4. Osmosis of skill sets from private to public sector  Work force increases skills

Based on the country priorities and reasons for outsourcing, these non-quantifiable benefits (D) will have to factor into the calculations with A, B, and C in table 3; but how they vary will be on a case- by-case basis.

23

What are some reasons to consider outsourcing?  Reduce costs.  Focus on core expertise.  Maximize use of shared resources and infrastructure  Improve service levels.  Increase flexibility to deal with ever-changing business conditions.  Improve access to products, services, and emerging technologies.  Assign operational issues to an outside expert.  Use the expertise of other organizations.  Compensate for lack of expertise or capacity internally.  Improve credibility and image by associating with superior providers.  Improve operating performance, quality, timeliness, and productivity.

Case Example: Country X Considers Potential Distribution Outsourcing An MOH in a sub-Saharan African country decided to improve its services by increasing the availability of medical products at public health facilities; they decided that outsourcing might be a possible route to that improvement.

Following the steps outlined above, the MOH first formed a permanent stakeholder group that was to decide whether or not to outsource some of its operations. The stakeholder group laid out all its activities related to the support of health services. They determined that developing treatment guidelines, selecting products, and ensuring quality were within its core competencies, but physical transportation to service delivery points was not. Conducting an operational process review, the group also found that its transport operations suffered from low performance; vehicles were frequently unavailable for delivery because of maintenance and scheduling problems.

While stakeholders agreed that laying off the current transport personnel was politically undesirable, they decided they could condense current operations to improve performance and, simultaneously, take advantage of locally available transport firms to serve unmet need. Additionally, the stakeholder group found that the use of a 3PL for transport could enable the MOH to deal with variable demand more efficiently—3PLs would have better short-term capacity to handle seasonal or emergency distribution of products. From this analysis, the MOH decided that outsourcing transport operations was both politically and operationally desirable.

Using only internal resources, the stakeholder group then conducted a cost-benefit analysis to determine the financial implications of outsourcing compared to performance improvement. Using the Supply Chain Costing Tool: User Manual (USAID | DELIVER PROJECT Forthcoming), they found that current transport costs to service delivery points (A) cost the MOH $55,000 per year. The estimated cost to improve service internally (B) was $100,000 in the first year for new equipment and training, and $40,000 per year after the first year to increase capacity and manage the process. The MOH then asked local transport services for bid estimates for regular transport. Specifically, the MOH looked for companies that owned their own vehicles, employed safety and security measures, charged per cubic meter or kilogram, and were able to respond to short-term and long-term transport requests from the MOH. The lowest cost response that met these needs had an annual cost of $50,000–$55,000, depending on the MOH’s final requirements. Table 4 shows the final cost-benefit comparison.

24

Table 4. Final Cost-Benefit Comparison

Keep In-House Outsource Comparison

Total current cost (A)

$55,000/year

Total current cost (A) (would not be eliminated, but condensed, which reduces the total current costs, and includes contract management) $40,000

Total difference

Cost to upgrade (B)

$100,000 first year only

$40,000/year

Cost to outsource (C)

$50,000 to $55,000/year

Total

$155,000 first year only

$95,000/year after

$90,000 to $95,000/year

$90,000 to $95,000/year

$65,000 to $60,000 savings

0 to $5,000 savings/year

By conducting the cost-benefit analysis, the stakeholder group agreed to contract transport services from the 3PL identified during the bid process. While they realized that other than then first year saving, the lifetime costs of outsourcing were almost the same as internal improvement, the group agreed that the non-quantifiable benefits (D), which is the ability to see improvements sooner and the ability to efficiently handle short-term changes, made outsourcing the more desirable option.

This process will identify a function or activity that makes strategic and financial sense to outsource and has the support of internal stakeholders.

Summary of Outsourcing Decision Process

The organization recognizes the need for improvement or expansion in operations. The organization forms a group of internal stakeholders to investigate the potential for outsourcing to a third party as a way to achieve this. The stakeholder group conducts the following two phases:

Deliberation—does outsourcing a particular function make strategic and operational sense?

 Identify core competency—Of all the organization’s processes, which are the core competencies? Core competencies should probably not be outsourced.

 Process review—Of all the organization’s process, which are under-performing? Those that are not core competencies and are under-performing are good candidates for outsourcing.

 Feasibility analysis—Are all involved stakeholders supportive of possible outsourcing? Are potential third parties available that can perform the work?

Cost-benefit analysis—Does outsourcing make financial sense? For the outsource-able function, collect and compare:  current cost of performing function internally  cost of improving or expanding performance internally  cost of outsourcing.

25

Other Potential Analysis Frameworks In addition to the cost-benefit analysis, several other analysis frameworks can be used to inform business decisionmaking. Two decision analysis frameworks, that include nonmonetary costs and benefits, may be particularly appropriate for decisionmaking. The first, the PrOACT model, is best defined by the letters in the name—problem, objective, alternatives, consequences, and tradeoffs. Working through this model for decisionmaking involves using five steps to help rationalize difficult decisions: (1) defining the problem, (2) considering an exhaustive list of objectives, (3) identifying alternatives, (4) understanding the consequences (of each alternative), and (5) addressing and evaluating tradeoffs.

The second framework is the analytic hierarchy process (AHP), a structured technique for working through complex decisions. Instead of providing an analysis that leads to a correct decision, the AHP helps decisionmakers find the solution that best meets their needs, given an understanding of their defined problem. In the AHP process, the first step is to deconstruct the decision problem into a hierarchy of more easily understood sub-problems, each of which can be analyzed independently. The elements of the hierarchy can relate to any aspect of the decision problem—tangible or intangible, carefully measured or roughly estimated, well- or poorly-understood—any information or criteria that relates to the decision.

After the hierarchy of criteria is developed, the next step is for the decisionmakers to systematically evaluate its various elements by comparing them in pairs. When making comparisons, the decisionmakers can use actual data about the elements, or they can judge the elements' relative significance or importance to the decision. One benefit of the AHP is that human judgment, not just the underlying information, can be used for the evaluations. For this reason, the AHP model is often cited as appropriate to making public sector capital budgeting decisions.

Additional resources can provide other information about these frameworks. A select few are listed below, but an Internet search will yield many results (Bhushan 2004 and Saaty 1980). If internal capacity is not available to do this kind of analysis, an outside consultant can guide an objective analysis of the situation.

Key considerations when deciding to outsource  Is the function non-essential to the organization? Does it add value?  What are the processes where the need for change is greatest?  Are there work processes in which change is already taking place?  Which work processes have a high chance of success/ease of implementation?  Which work process, if improved, will transform the organization?  Which work processes are separable and can be decoupled to improve performance?

26

How?—Implementation Roadmap

To ensure a smooth transition to outsourcing, if that decision is made during the decisionmaking process, all the stakeholders need to plan and agree on an implementation process.

Each project will be unique, but the high-level aspects will be very similar. Appendix B provides a sample implementation plan. This plan, which is based on actual experience, shows the analysis and selection phases taking up to ten months; however, it could take more or less time. Outsourcing is not a quick fix; this process requires careful planning and strong leadership. Government and MOH personnel must be patient with this activity. The spreadsheet in appendix B highlights the key elements of the transition process to outsourcing.

Beginning with the initial decision to outsource or not (described in the previous chapter), the following stages show how to develop a project plan to guide the outsourcing process (see figure 3).

Figure 3. Process for Outsourcing Decisionmaking

Stage 1. Project Team and Activity Formation First, form a cross-functional team of stakeholders and key decisionmakers (many were probably involved in the decision to outsource). Ideally, the leader should be either the Minister of Health or the Permanent Secretary, and departmental heads should be part of the team, including the manager of the CMS and other key stakeholders. The team must commit to meeting regularly, based on the size of the undertaking, to ensure key activities are met and problems are averted.

Second, set objectives that are in line with the MOH’s own mission to ensure that the right service(s) are outsourced with the right objectives—they should be part of the deliberation process. Also, determine the desired outcome from outsourcing. To be meaningful, the impact of outsourcing must be measured and evaluated; key parameters for performance should be established at the outset, including—  improved order fill rate

27

 reduced stockouts

 increased customer satisfaction

 reduced warehouse space required

 reduced product expiries.

Be sure to address issues related to financing and payment of contracting expenses. Government operations may face restrictions from the ministries of finance on their options for budgeting or paying 3PLs, which may hinder relations with potential contractors. Therefore, someone familiar with financing and contracting options should be part of this project team. Address and identify an on-going funding stream and payment terms that will be attractive to private sector companies; discuss them openly during negotiations with potential 3PLs.

Stage 2. 3PL Recruitment To recruit a 3PL, it will be necessary to thoroughly understand all country procedures and regulations regarding contracting with vendors. Laws may dictate how the recruitment and contracting process must be conducted, and it will be important to ensure that these procedures are followed.

In general, the first step is to develop a list of potential candidates by determining what local or international companies may be able to provide the services that will be outsourced. This will depend on the skill base and capacity in a given country or setting. Many large international logistics organizations have partners/agents in many countries, so trade directories may be useful. Alternative sources may come from recommendations and, if needed, a press release asking for expressions of interest from 3PLs. The output should be a list of possible companies, including contact names and telephone numbers.

Next, contact the list of candidates to explore their interest in acting as a 3PL. Most of the time, for formal requests, a telephone conversation is sufficient to screen companies and reduce the list to a manageable size. The screening process should determine if candidates have the required experience, whether they have or could develop resources in the right locations, whether they would be interested in tendering for the work, and, if so, the contact address for the invitations to tender. This step should eliminate businesses that do not have the capacity or are not interested in this type of business. The final list of companies can be contacted with an invitation to tender (ITT).

RFPs or ITTs are typically done through an international bid process. However, some countries have a legal framework within which they perform tenders. The ITT to potential contractors should include—

 introduction and scope of work

 description of agency or organization

 explanation of the origins of the ITT and strategic goals

 business requirements for work to be done

 logistics standards

 performance measures

28

 outline of contractual terms

 operator information

 outline of acceptable fee structure

 definition of needed format for quotations

 date of final response for the ITT.

The ITT should also include any information that will assist the contractor with estimates for fees and quotations. Give the potential contractors the opportunity to ask questions and give all bidders access to the responses. They can be coordinated in several ways—by offering a short visit to the current operations, aggregating all questions and answers and circulating to all bidders, or providing a supplementary data pack with additional information, based on questions or requests.

After the bids are submitted, analyze and evaluate them. To help in the selection, compare and rank criteria—operational fit, costs/prices quoted, technical expertise, information management capabilities, and management structure. Consider visiting the prospective providers’ facilities; this is critical to see if potential contractors have the management capacity and physical resources to meet the objectives of the operations to be outsourced. Also, review the qualifications of all members of the potential 3PL team who will be working on the outsourcing project. To further evaluate how well they perform, talk to previous and existing clients and visit operations they currently service or manage. This will show their management style and how well the team is able to manage operations and/or solve problems.

After evaluating and ranking bidders, if multiple candidates remain, create a short list of preferred candidates. To select the best option, gather more information on the financial status of the company, meet and interview key staff, review the benefits they offer, and the pricing structure.

The final step in selecting a 3PL is the preparation and signature of a formal contract and designation of roles and responsibilities within the terms of the contract.

29

Why organizations are reluctant to outsource (Patel 2005)  Cost.  Lack of management support.  Cultural differences.  Confidentiality.  Concerns about level of service.  Perceived loss of control.  Loss of internal expertise.  Personnel issues.

Major reasons why outsourcing fails (Barthélemy 2003)  Poor management of the outsourced relationship.  Making the wrong choices about what to outsource.  Choosing the wrong vendor.  Drafting an inappropriate or unrealistic contract.  Overlooking potential personnel issues.

Stage 3. Service-level Agreement During contract negotiations, it is important to have a service level agreement (SLA) that is performance-oriented, yet realistic within the context. It would be discouraging for all parties if a clause was included in a distribution contract mandating that all orders be delivered within 24 hours if it takes 36 hours to reach some of the health facilities. Also, while electronic reports may be preferable, allowances may need to be made in areas where communications are challenging. The agreement must be fair and equitable, with allowances for conflict resolution, so that each party can perform well, but allow for resolving problems.

Contracting companies should also have standard operating procedures (SOPs) that clearly define the operational activities to be performed between the customer and the 3PL, and also state how they will be performed. These should be outlined in the contract or as an addendum. The SOP is, however, a live document. To ensure that all parties understand the details of the agreement, it should be updated whenever a change occurs in the process.

Next, develop and agree on KPIs, which are linked to the overall objective of outsourcing, as discussed in stage 1. Additional measures could be added, depending on the service to outsource, including—

 delivery times

 condition of vehicles

 agreed-upon reporting protocols

 order processing rates

 accuracy of orders being processed.

KPIs should be measurable, time limited, and realistically attainable. They are the contractor’s insurance to ensure that their outsourcing partner performs as expected. The SLA should state clearly what the implications are for not performing according to the KPIs. This process ensures

30

accountability for both partners. As mentioned earlier, the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT has published a list of suggested metrics for logistics systems (Aronovich et al. 2010), which is available on the project’s website.

Many resources are available on contracts. Recommended reading includes Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers (JSI 2004). While this guide provides guidance on contracting health service delivery, rather than logistics functions, the contracting sections are useful for both. Appendix A includes excerpts on the suggested contract template and format. Another good resource for the contracting process is How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services (Slater 1998) and The Handbook of Logistics Contracts (Jané and de Ochoa 2006). Additional resources are listed in the references section.

Transitioning from in-house to outsourcing may be challenging. After an organization decides to outsource some of its operation, the old way and new way will co-exist for awhile. As part of this, it is critical to have a change management strategy for the operations of both organizations. It is important to ensure that all staff understand the reasons for outsourcing and how it will affect them. Organizational change can lower employee morale and performance as people are unsure how their job will change, or whether it will be eliminated. Good communication about changes can help mitigate this anxiety. The best route is to include all workers at the beginning of the process so at- risk parts of the operation can be highlighted and a contingency plan established.

It will be important to allay fears by confirming the continuation of employees, if that is the case, or to alert them to any potential changes in their responsibilities. Conversely, if jobs are going to be eliminated, a business continuity plan should be developed in case of service interruption during the transition. For instance, if transportation is going to be outsourced, drivers may lose their jobs. To reduce the incidence of theft, damage, or poor service, the 3PL may bring in drivers to drive government vehicles before the SLA is in place.

One of the biggest changes for the program managers is in their role of contract management. Managing a 3PL relationship may require additional training or capacity building to ensure that staff that once directly managed a warehouse or scheduled transport are now equipped to manage a 3PL relationship and to ensure that operations are running smoothly and customers’ needs are being met. It will be a shift toward oversight that includes checking, approving, and processing invoices; information management; and making sure that service levels are met (quality monitoring).

The key areas to focus on are—

 reports based on agreed KPIs

 regular meetings with 3PL to highlight issues or praise good service

 financial oversight

 conflict management

 relationship building.

This job is critical to the success of any outsourcing agreement and, therefore, the contract manager must be a senior government official with project management experience, with support and authority; who, ideally, reports directly to the minister or permanent secretary.

31

 Financial

 Formalize terms of payment and ensure that these are acceptable and reasonable for both parties.

 Establish strong links with the outsourcing partner to develop trust so that they can give favorable payment terms or even discounts for additional work.

Stage 4. Monitoring and Evaluation

Life after the Contract Using the KPIs and objectives of outsourcing, it will be important to assess outsourced functions and contractors to determine if the anticipated benefits were achieved. Depending on the length of the contract, it will be important to conduct a periodic reassessment to ensure that both parties are following their contract. It is especially important to assess the quality of service of an outsourcing partner when the contract is due for rebid or expansion.

These steps, with strong senior management buy-in and vigilant project management, will foster a strong partnership, ensure that objectives are met, and improve the likelihood that both parties will consider the experience mutually beneficial. Further information is available from many sources (Inbound Logistics 2010.)

32

Conclusion

Experience from both the private and public sector’s work with 3PLs and suppliers have generated some useful lessons that are broadly applicable to organizations considering outsourcing some of their logistics functions or working closer with suppliers to improve inventory management.

 The policy environment can affect the government’s flexibility to collaborate with service providers and suppliers.

Policies governing financial mechanisms available to MOH procurement units may inhibit contracting options and opportunities for supplier collaboration between the government and private companies. A service provider or supplier is less likely to make special efforts to accommodate a client’s needs if it will only result in a short-term or one-time contract with no guarantee of future business. Framework contracts or framework international competitive bidding (ICB) contracts may be a favorable contract arrangement for purchaser and supplier, resulting in preferential pricing over a longer-term contract agreement. However, the existing MOF and donor policies might also limit the potential use of these and other types of contracts. Efforts should be made to work with policymakers to ensure that the environment is conducive to healthy competition, yet flexible enough to take advantage of relationships that improve service levels and reduce costs.

 After the decision is made to outsource an activity, the client must develop a thoughtful management plan to implement the proposed changes.

Managing the transition process is a big part of a successful outsourcing initiative. The client needs to invest a significant amount of time and willingness to integrate the 3PL, as the arm of existing services, to ensure that service delivery is seamless for the customer. The 3PL will represent your organization; therefore, they must be able to operate as part of your organization and have the resources and relationships to do this well. This will not happen without a significant amount of communication, training, and resource planning involving both the client and the 3PL from the outset of the relationship.

One way to mitigate issues that arise during a transition is to have a change management plan and a strong project management team to manage the process and ensure that key stakeholders from all involved partners and organizations understand the process and can help oversee the progress and ensure that the transition occurs smoothly.

 Selection of a reputable and respected 3PL with adequate capacity for the task is essential to success.

Part of the initial evaluation of the use of 3PL providers needs to include careful ‘due diligence’ of any prospective partner. A major concern is the financial and operational health of the prospective service provider—how confident are you that the company will not go out of business or become bankrupt during your service contract? Do they have significant capital available to invest in and support their existing infrastructure and expand as needed? Some risk is expected in any business you work with and the business may cease functioning for a variety of reasons—from risky investments made by their management, to natural disasters, to mismanagement. After you have

33

decided to outsource particular services, your role in selecting a 3PL is making sure that the company is reliable and the risk is mitigated as much as possible.

An established company should provide proof of their level of management and experience in an area. The 3PLs should provide references from existing clients that show a clear record of consistent, on-time services; clean financial and legal documents; and good driving records for anyone involved with transporting products.

 A strong contract and contract management plan must be in place to ensure the successful transition to outsourcing and to define roles and responsibilities.

A contract is a useful tool for both parties in defining what the roles and responsibilities are and the expectations of both client and service provider. If well written, the contract should explain who does what, who is held accountable, and how both parties can determine if what has been done was done well.

The contract is what the MOH can use to ensure that the supplier/manufacturer does what is expected. It states performance measures, and, if those measures are monitored, the contract manager can hold the supplier to the expectation stated in the contract.

The process of managing a contract requires a different core competency than doing the work. Rather than planning delivery routes, allocating resources, and coordinating transaction paperwork, a program manager in the MOH or logistics management unit (LMU) monitors performance by collecting information on these performance measures. They may facilitate communications between the contracted supplier and the warehouses or service delivery points with whom they will be collaborating.

Furthermore, either as a government entity or through the 3PL, a business continuity plan should spell out the consequences if some level of the system fails. While not necessarily the responsibility of the 3PL, it is important to know if they have a contingency plan should something disrupt their ability to provide service (i.e., if they are providing distribution services and all of their drivers go on strike).

 Clear performance measures are the foundation for a successful partnership.

The ability to define the desired quality and service levels during the 3PL selection process and in the contract will make the entire process easier. It is important to clearly define the scope and parameters of responsibilities and required logistics services. Even before meeting with potential partners, it would be a good idea to outline performance metrics, including KPIs and desired contractual terms. Expectations and business objectives should be clearly defined and documented. Eventually, after the needs and desired functions of the 3PL are identified, an ITT will need to be developed to start soliciting bids from potential 3PLs. The performance indicators will then go into the contract to ensure that the client is able to determine if the 3PL is or is not providing quality service.

A variety of resources suggest appropriate performance measures for supply chains. The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT lists them in A Guide to Key Performance Indicators for Public Health Managers (Aronovich et al. 2010) and How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services (Slater 1998). The publications are good examples of the contents of an ITT.

34

 Communications must be open and frequent and both parties must be committed to the success of the relationship.

In the private sector in the United States and Europe, communication is cited as one of the most difficult barriers to effective business partnerships and supply chain collaboration. Governments may not be accustomed to managing a contract or providing feedback on performance to a vendor as a way to improve the quality of service. Conversely, 3PLs may not understand the constraints that governments must work with in their operations. Open and on-going communication about needs and expectations can provide opportunities to address these issues and improve the overall system quality.

Outsourcing is an important option to consider for public sector health systems struggling with maintaining high service delivery standards in the middle of growing supply chain demands. Third party service providers can potentially provide a way for governments (MOHs) to maximize limited resources for product management and distribution by harnessing the expertise and resources of the private sector, including advanced information technology, economies of scale, service specialization, and profit incentives generally not available to the public sector supply chain managers.

However, it is important to remember that while outsourcing can significantly reduce the number of functions that a government has to provide for its public sector health system, it is not a perfect solution. Managing a contract is usually challenging, especially for a key function with a complex network—outsourced public health supply chain functions often are. It may require fewer resources than doing the same job in–house, but it will require different types of management, oversight, and funding. Furthermore, it may not be a feasible option if restrictions on contracting, funding, or the decision faces political opposition because of lost jobs. However, if these obstacles do not exist or can be overcome, government systems may benefit from the enhanced capacity and specialization of 3PLs by outsourcing specific functions to the private sector.

The decision to outsource must be made after careful consideration of the potential benefits and risks and with a clear understanding of the expected results from an outsourcing contract; this will help ensure that the process will have a favorable outcome. There is no right answer, but using this guide should help managers and policymakers determine what might be possible and feasible within a given context and to increase the capacity to work with an increasing number of demands on supply chains for public sector health systems.

35

36

References

Abdallah, Hany. 2004. Guidelines for Assessing Costs in a Logistics System: An Example of Transport Cost Analysis. Arlington, Va.: John Snow, Inc./DELIVER, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Abramson, Wendy B. 2004. Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers. Arlington, Va.: John Snow, Inc./DELIVER. Available at http://www.jsi.com/Managed/Docs/Publications/ContractingPrimerManual.pdf

Aronovich, Dana, Marie Tien, Ethan Collins, Adriano Sommerlatte, and Linda Allain. 2010. Measuring Supply Chain Performance: A Guide to Key Performance Indicators for Public Health Managers. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

A.T. Kearny. 2004. Improving the Medicine Supply Chain: An Imperative for Public Health Care. Accessed May 25, 2010 at http://www.mbadepot.com/external_link.php?ID=3850&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.atkearne y.com%2Fshared_res%2Fpdf%2FMedicines_Monograph_S.pdf

Barthélemy, J. 2003. The seven deadly sins of outsourcing, Academy of Management Executive, Briarcliff Manor, NY. Vol. 17. No. 2 p. 87–98.

Bhushan, Navneet, and Kanwal Rai. 2004. Strategic Decision Making: Applying the Analytic Hierarchy Process. London: Springer-Verlag.

Boyson, S., T. Corsi, and E. Rabinovich. 1999. “Managing effective third party logistics relationships: what does it take?” Journal of Business Logistics, Vol. 20 No. 1, p.73–100. Accessed May 3, 2010 at http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_qa3705/is_199901/ai_n8845573/

DELIVER. 2007. DELIVER: Final Project Report. Arlington, Va.: DELIVER, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Family Planning Logistics Management/John Snow, Inc. 2000. Programs That Deliver: Logistics’ Contributions to Better Health in Developing Countries. Arlington, Va.: Family Planning Logistics Management/John Snow, Inc., for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Global Health Council. 2009. Global Health Council Field Note: “Harnessing the Magic of the Market Place for Public Health: A Public-Private Partnership in the Democratic Republic of the Congo that Delivers.” Accessed July 21, 2009 at: http://www.globalhealth.org/reports/report.php3?id=273.

Inbound Logistics. Kicking Off a 3PL Relationship. Volume 29 No. 7, p. 128. Accessed May 14, 2010 at http://www.inboundlogistics.com/digital/issues/il_digital_july2009.pdf

International Finance Committee, World Bank Group. 2007. The Business of Health in Africa: Partnering with the Private Sector to Improve People’s Lives. Accessed February 20, 2009 at http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/healthinafrica.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/IFC_HealthinAfrica_Final/$ FILE/IFC_HealthinAfrica_Final.pdf.

37

Jané, Joan, and Alfonso de Ohcoa. 2006. The Handbook of Logistics Contracts. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

John Snow, Inc. 2004. Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers. Boston, Mass.: John Snow, Inc.

Langley, C. John Jr., and U.S. Capgemini LLC. 2008. The State of Logistics Outsourcing: 2008. Third- Party Logistics. Accessed May 25, 2010 at: http://www.us.capgemini.com/DownloadLibrary/files/factsheets/Capgemini_3PL_study_Hig hTech_FS0209.pdf

Loevinsohn, Benjamin. 2008. Performance-Based Contracting for Health Services in Developing Countries: A Toolkit. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank. Accessed May 20, 2010 at: http://siteresources.worldbank.org/INTHSD/Resources/topics/415176­ 1216235459918/ContractingEbook.pdf

Nikolic, Irina, and Harald Maikisch. 2006. Public-Private Partnerships and Collaboration in the Health Sector: An Overview with Case Studies from Recent European Experience. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank. Accessed May 14, 2010 at: http://info.worldbank.org/etools/docs/library/240103/PUBLIC~2.PDF

Patel, A., and H. Aran. 2005. Outsourcing Success: The Management Imperative. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

Pearson, Paul. 1997. A Comparative Study on Transportation Models: Directorate of Family Planning Managed Transport and Private Carrier. Alexandria, Va.: Paul O. Pearson, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Saaty, Thomas L. 1980. The Analytical Hierarchy Process. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Sarafinchan, Warren. 2008. Governance Practices in Logistics Outsourcing. Logistics Quarterly, Volume 14, Issue 4. Toronto, Canada: Logistics Quarterly.

Slater, Alan. 1998. How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services. Altrincham, UK: Added Value Logistics Publications Limited.

The Rockefeller Foundation, Dalberg, and MIT-Zaragoza. 2008. Private Sector Role in Health Supply Chains, Final Report. New York: The Rockefeller Foundation.

Thomas, Ann, and Valerie Curtis. 2003. Public-Private Partnerships for Health: A Review of Best Practices in Health Sector. World Bank. Accessed May 15, 2010 at: http://sulabhenvis.in/admin/upload/pdf_upload/WSP_PPP_15_10.pdf

U.S. Agency for International Development. 2006. Assessment of the USAID/Bangladesh Component of DELIVER Project: A Success to Build On. Bangladesh: USAID Mission, Bangladesh, Office of Population, Health, and Nutrition.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1. Forthcoming. Supply Chain Costing Tool: User Manual. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Versi, Anver. 2007. The Science and Art of Logistics in Africa. African Business, July. Accessed March 2, 2010 at: http://www.africasia.com/africanbusiness/ab.php?ID=1380&back_month=71

38

WHO Expert Committee on Specifications for Pharmaceutical Preparations. World Health Organization. 2006. WHO Technical Report Series, no. 937, 2006; Accessed May 14, 2010 at http://whqlibdoc.who.int/trs/WHO_TRS_937_eng.pdf

Interview Sources for Outsourcing Examples

Shyam Lama. Senior Program Manager, USAID | DELIVER PROJECT.

39

40

Appendix A

Typical Contract Format

1. Front page: Title of a contract, contracting parties, date when contract becomes effective.

2. Background: Purpose and objectives of the contract and parties involved.

3. Authorized persons and signatures: The contract is signed by a legal representative from each party and it is dated.

4. Contract period: Time period covered by the contract and the arrangements for contract renewal.

5. Terms of reference and service specification: The general scope of work under the contract, including service delivery objectives, definitions of services (what), volume of services (how many), target populations (to whom), and geographic locations (where).

6. Performance of specification: Definition of performance, performance targets, methods of performance measurements, and links to payment.

7. Payment methods: Specification of how, how much, and when the providers are paid.

8. Monitoring and Evaluation (M&E): Data collection and recordkeeping requirements, forms, and schedules/periodicity with specification as to use of possible third party evaluators.

9. Variations to the agreement: The procedure for making variations, normally in writing and mutually agreed.

10. Best endeavors: Both parties have a duty to resolve matters without arbitration, if possible.

11. Arbitration: Who the arbitrator will be and how he/she will be appointed.

12. Statutory regulations: Statement that both parties must be acquainted with and act in accordance with all relevant legislation and national policy.

13. Other items: Conflict of interest, confidentiality, patent, etc.

41

42

Appendix B

Sample Implementation Plan

If activity is complete, mark status with green infill OUTSOURCING MOH SUPPLY CHAIN OPERATIONS IMPLEMENTATION PLAN

Key

Planned

Completed

Outstanding

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1 Form a Cross Functional Team

1.1 Indentify key stakeholders MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.2 Define roles and identify strong project leader MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.3 Prepare a mandate for operations MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.4 Plan regular team meetings MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.5

Develop a reporting process to inform all stakeholders of progress MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.6 Team commits to project and makes it priority MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.7 Develop clear deliverables and dates for actions MOH Month 0 Month 1

2 Set Objectives

2.1 Team defines clear objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

2.2 Success criteria defined to ensure right result is received MOH Month 1 Month 1

43

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

2.3

Ensure that each team member has ownership of specific tasks to achieve objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

2.4

Team determines desired outcome from outsourcing based on the objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

3 Complete Internal Assessment and Pareto Analysis

3.1 Complete cost benefit analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

3.2 Complete skills analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

3.3 Complete a service gap analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

4 Supplier Selection

4.1 Develop a list of potential candidates MOH Month 3 Month3

4.2 Explore interest among the candidates MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.3

If no original candidates interested look for other companies including outside the country MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.4 Develop full specifications for the services required MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.5

Develop an assessment matrix to facilitate easy selection; incorporate cost/service level/capacity/technical expertise/financial stability/geographical coverage MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.6 Instigate the tender process MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.7 Visit companies that have tendered for the business MOH Month 4 Month 6

4.8 Review their professional qualifications MOH Month 6 Month 6

4.9

Solicit feedback from existing or previous customers of the potential supplier MOH month 7 Month 7

4.1 0

Choose the best supplier to meet organization's objectives and that scores highest on assessment matrix MOH Month 8 Month 8

5 Service Level Agreement

5.1 Negotiate the final agreement with supplier MOH/Supplier Month 9 Month 9

5.2 Agree on the KPIs that will govern the agreement MOH/Supplier Month 9 Month 9

5.3 Appoint a contract manager to monitor performance MOH Month 9 Month 9

44

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

5.4

Ensure a plan is in place to make transition is as seamless as possible MOH Month 6

month 10

6 Service Level Agreement Management

6.1 Hold regular meetings with supplier to review performance MOH/Supplier

Month 11

Month 22

6.2

Senior management from both sides meet when needed to resolve issues MOH/Supplier

Month 11

Month 22

6.3

Where possible, have cross- organizational meetings, including customers, to ensure that objectives have been met

MOH/Supplier / Customer

Month 11

Month 22

7 Life after the SLA

7.1

Schedule regular internal reviews to ensure performance is to the agreed levels and objectives have been met MOH

Month 11

Month 22

7.2 If being met, continue/extend the contract MOH

Month 11

Month 22

7.3 If not being met, try to resolve with supplier or restart process MOH

month 22

Month 22

* This example is only illustrative; actual steps and timeline will vary by situation

* This example is only illustrative; actual steps and timeline will vary by situation.

45

46

For more information, please visit deliver.jsi.com.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT

John Snow, Inc.

1616 Fort Myer Drive, 11th Floor

Arlington, VA 22209 USA

Phone: 703-528-7474

Fax: 703-528-7480

Email: [email protected]

Internet: deliver.jsi.com

Article 8 .pdf

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries

JULY 2010

This publication was produced for review by the U.S. Agency for International Development. It was prepared by the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management: Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries

The authors' views expressed in this publication do not necessarily reflect the views of the U.S. Agency for International Development or the United States Government.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1 The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1, is funded by the U.S. Agency for International Development under contract no. GPO-I-01-06-00007-00, beginning September 29, 2006. Task Order 1 is implemented by John Snow, Inc., in collaboration with PATH; Crown Agents Consultancy, Inc.; Abt Associates; Fuel Logistics Group (Pty) Ltd.; UPS Supply Chain Solutions; The Manoff Group; and 3i Infotech. The project improves essential health commodity supply chains by strengthening logistics management information systems, streamlining distribution systems, identifying financial resources for procurement and supply chain operations, and enhancing forecasting and procurement planning. The project also encourages policymakers and donors to support logistics as a critical factor in the overall success of their health care mandates.

Recommended Citation USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1. 2010. Emerging Trends in Supply Chain Management: Outsourcing Public Health Logistics in Developing Countries. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Abstract This paper examines the potential opportunity for public sector health systems to engage third party service providers to support the logistics functions—with an emphasis on distribution, warehousing, and inventory management. It provides stakeholders in supply chain management for public sector health, including the Ministry of Health and Ministry of Finance officials, program managers, and Central Medical Store managers (or associated parastatal organizations charged with health product management) with a resource that describes outsourcing and how it could be used in public health supply chains, when to consider outsourcing, the process of deciding whether outsourcing is a viable option in a particular context, and how to begin the outsourcing process. These points are illustrated by a few country examples of how countries have engaged the private sector in providing the logistics function to support their public sector supply chains.

Cover photo: Men load boxes into a truck in Indonesia.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT John Snow, Inc. 1616 Fort Myer Drive, 11th Floor Arlington, VA 22209 USA Phone: 703-528-7474 Fax: 703-528-7480 Email: [email protected] Internet: deliver.jsi.com

Contents

Acronyms .................................................................................................................................... vii

Acknowledgments ........................................................................................................................ ix

Executive Summary ...................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 3

Overview ...................................................................................................................................3

What?............................................................................................................................................ 7

Supply Chain Functions to Consider Outsourcing ....................................................................8

Types of Service Providers .......................................................................................................9

Beyond Outsourcing: Supply Chain Collaboration ....................................................................9

Specific Examples of Outsourcing Logistics in Public Sector Health Systems .......................11

When?......................................................................................................................................... 17

Deliberation—Strategic and Operational Considerations........................................................18

Cost-Benefit Analysis—Financial Considerations ...................................................................19

How?—Implementation Roadmap .............................................................................................. 27

Stage 1. Project Team and Activity Formation........................................................................27

Stage 2. 3PL Recruitment .......................................................................................................28

Stage 3. Service-level Agreement...........................................................................................30

Stage 4. Monitoring and Evaluation ........................................................................................32

Conclusion .................................................................................................................................. 33

References.................................................................................................................................. 37

Appendices

A. Typical Contract Format ......................................................................................................... 41

B. Sample Implementation Plan..................................................................................................43

Figures

1. The Logistics Cycle................................................................................................................... 7

2. Uses and Advantages of 3PLs................................................................................................ 17

3. Process for Outsourcing Decisionmaking………………………………………………………....27

Tables

1. Category and Examples of Costs ...........................................................................................20

2. Category and Examples of Costs to Upgrade.........................................................................21

3. Cost Comparison Sample Worksheet .....................................................................................23

4. Final Cost-Benefit Comparison ...............................................................................................25

v

vi

Acronyms

3PL third party logistics provider

4PL fourth party logistics providers

AHP analytic hierarchy process

AIDS acquired immune deficiency syndrome

CHAI Clinton Health Access Initiative

ARV antiretroviral

CCTU closed-circuit television

CMS Central Medical Store

CPFR collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment

DGFP Directorate General for Family Planning

DRC Democratic Republic of the Congo

EDI electronic data interchange

FEFO first-to-expire, first-out

FIFO first-in, first-out

GOB Government of Bangladesh

HIV human immunodeficiency virus

IAPHL International Association of Public Health Logisticians

ICB international competitive bidding

IHD UTi Pharma Distribution

ISO International Organization for Standardization

ITT invitation to tender

KPI key performance indicator

LMIS logistics management information system

LMU logistics management unit

M&E monitoring and evaluation

MOF Ministry of Finance

MOH Ministry of Health

NGO nongovernmental organization

vii

NPV net present value

PHD Pharmaceutical Healthcare Distributors (Pty) ltd.

RFP request for proposals

SDC service delivery contract

SLA service level agreement

SOP standard operating procedure

UNDP United Nations Development Programme

USAID U.S. Agency for International Development

WHO World Health Organization

WMS warehouse management system

viii

Acknowledgments

This paper is the result of significant input and expertise from a knowledgeable group of people who have experience with public sector health system supply chains, outsourcing, and the decision process to outsource. The main authors of the document are Alexis Heaton of the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT; Zachary Clarke, who was an intern at the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID); and Simon Cole from Pharmaceutical Healthcare Distributors, ltd (PHD). James Gibney, formerly of JSI, gave this activity its initial momentum through his thorough research. Thanks go to Maeve Magner of the Clinton Health Access Initiative (CHAI) for her careful review and thoughtful comments on an early version of the guide.

We are grateful to the many members of the International Association of Public Health Logisticians (IAPHL) who contributed to an interesting online discussion about outsourcing; the forum started and encouraged discussions during the writing of this paper. Last, but no less important, many thanks go to the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT staff, especially Shyam Lama, Linda Allain, Joseph McCord, and Kelly Hamblin. They provided valuable contributions, including opinions and perspectives from their own experiences that helped shape this work. We thank them for their participation in brainstorming sessions, interviews, and multiple rounds of document reviews. We would also like to thank the many researchers, writers, and practitioners whose work provided the theoretical foundation for this report.

ix

x

Executive Summary

Supply chain management in public sector health systems has received increasing attention in recent years—as both a priority and a challenge for many countries—as governments find themselves struggling with an increasing number of products, programs, and patients to manage. Due to major increases in funding and donor support for a variety of health programs, supply chain managers may be responsible for a larger number and volume of products, but with limited additional resources to expand their capacity to manage, store, and distribute these products. Often, staff already working in this area receive additional pressure to build up internal capacity to meet the service delivery targets. However, many countries, faced with this type of challenge, recognize that these functions, that were once ancillary to their primary function of service delivery to patients, could tie up a significant portion of their budgets should they scale up appropriately. Furthermore, some countries recognize that these functions could potentially be outsourced to private sector logistics providers. More and more governments and donors are considering options to engage the private sector to contract out functions such as warehousing, distribution, and inventory management. However, the costs and benefits of doing so often are not clear and managers have limited resources to guide them through this process.

This document provides professionals working in supply chain management with a useful resource for engaging outside resources for public health logistics, covering the what, when, and how of outsourcing and its applicability to people working in public health supply chain management. They could include Ministry of Health (MOH) and Ministry of Finance (MOF) stakeholders, program managers, and Central Medical Store managers (or associated managers at parastatal organizations charged with health product management). This document, divided roughly into three sections, focuses on the following three elements of outsourcing.

What: This section describes the basic principles of outsourcing, and provides examples of outsourcing functions from the public sector supply chains in Bangladesh and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. These examples highlight possible successes, such as improved service delivery and increased capacity; they also explain the potential challenges—unpopularity due to loss of government jobs and skill shifting from supply chain management to contract management. The process of outsourcing can be a significant change for an organization; the lessons learned from these examples highlight considerations that should be carefully weighed before any decision is made to outsource.

When: This section covers the decision process, including basic guidelines for doing a cost benefit analysis—comparing outsourcing to maintaining functions in-house and, potentially, increasing the capacity to meet demands. The guide highlights additional considerations that are above and beyond cost—for example, the capacity of local organizations to take on these functions, political feasibility, and contracting and payment options that will affect relationships with private companies.

How: This section covers the specifics of contract management, including common pitfalls and suggested ways to avoid them. It outlines how to convene a project team to manage the process, the selection of a third party logistics provider (3PL), the creation of a service-level agreement with the

1

selected contractor, and management of the contract, including key performance indicators (KPIs) for the contract.

Overall, it is important to remember that while outsourcing can significantly reduce the number of functions that a government has to provide for its public sector health system, it may not be a perfect solution. Managing a contract is usually challenging, especially for a large job with a complex network, as public health supply chains often are. It may require fewer resources than doing the same job in-house; but will require different types of management, oversight, and funding. Furthermore, it may not be a feasible option if there are restrictions on contracting or funding, or the decision may cause political opposition because of lost jobs.

However, as private sector companies continue to make significant advances with technology and information management, their capacity to excel in supply chain functions often surpasses what is possible within the public sector. Rather than attempt to keep pace with these advances, it may make sense for government systems to benefit from that capacity by outsourcing specific functions to the private sector, when and if that is a viable option. For outsourcing, no one answer is always right, but to increase capacity to meet an increasing number of demands on supply chains for public sector health systems, this guide should help managers and policymakers determine what is possible within a given context.

2

Introduction

Many supply chain managers in public sector health systems find themselves with an increasing number and volume of products to manage, but with limited resources to expand their capacity to manage, store, and distribute these products. Often, to meet acceptable service levels, there is pressure to either build up internal capacity or contract these services to the private sector. However, the decision to do one or the other is not always clear, and there are limited resources available to guide managers through this process.

This document provides anyone working in supply chain management with a useful resource for engaging outside expertise for public health logistics, covering the what, when, and how of outsourcing and its applicability to people working in public health supply chain management. They could include the MOH and MOF stakeholders, program managers, Central Medical Store managers (or associated parastatal organizations charged with health product management). This document, divided roughly into three sections, focuses on the three elements of outsourcing.

 What: The first section of this paper presents the what of outsourcing, including background on outsourcing in the private sector. It also includes the functions that public health sector organizations should think about when they consider outsourcing and how this might improve their ability to meet customer needs. This is followed by a sub-section with examples of a few government health systems and nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) in resource-limited countries that have outsourced logistics functions; the document explores how these have affected service delivery. The examples include evidence of past outcomes and provide lessons learned that can be applied to future outsourcing programs.

 When: This section includes guidance on how to identify potential opportunities for outsourcing within an organization and how to conduct an analysis that would help an MOH or government body determine if outsourcing would be feasible and advantageous to meet organizational performance objectives.

 How: This section provides guidance on the steps that should be included in an implementation plan, after the decision to outsource is made. This includes the selection of a 3PL, the tender process, drafting a contract and monitoring performance, and building and maintaining a relationship with a 3PL to improve the quality of service delivery.

Overview Outsourcing discrete business functions is a well-established practice in the private sector. During the past several decades, a significant number of companies and organizations have expanded the use of 3PLs for functions that fall outside their core capacities. Typically, organizations outsource parts of their business when the need for functions beyond their main business or mission exceeds their ability or utility (cost, efficiency, mission). Rather than invest additional resources in staff and infrastructure to expand support to these functions, it may be cost effective to outsource to an organization that specializes in these services, often at a lower cost and/or higher level of service. Businesses frequently outsource parts of supply chain management (i.e., procurement, distribution, logistics etc.), as companies seek to shift their responsibility for all management functions to only

3

those that specifically require their unique and specialized expertise. The once fully vertical model of companies managing all their logistics functions has moved toward reliance on companies whose primary focus is logistics services. For example, a company that manufactures goods may outsource warehousing and shipping to another company that focuses on warehousing and distribution rather than trying to build this capacity.

While much of this shift initially occurred in the private sector of developed countries, where infrastructure and information systems are robust; developing countries have increased interest in adopting this model, where the public sector still provides many services. As markets have opened up and private services have expanded in many countries, organizations are exploring how the same basic principles can be applied to their supply chains. In many resource-limited countries, the private sector has significantly expanded their involvement in improving education, service delivery, and infrastructure; including road and bridge building, communications, and power networks.

For instance, in several countries, hospital management has been outsourced to private companies to improve efficiency and quality of service delivery. The same principle of outsourcing non-core functions can be applied to public health systems. Ministries of health often identify their core competency as health service delivery to their constituencies, yet continue to be involved in logistics for health products, such as warehousing, transportation, quality assurance, etc. These functions could potentially be outsourced to third parties, thus freeing up key resources to focus on the core mission. The result can be increased service levels for the patients and reduced operational costs.

Currently, in many developing countries, MOHs are responsible for all in-country distribution of health products, in addition to forecasting, procuring supplies, and providing service delivery. In many cases, freight forwarders coordinate shipments as far as the central warehouse in a country1; but, from there, the government is responsible for all aspects of product management and movement. That means that, in these countries, the public sector is responsible for coordinating all movement and management of products from the time they pass through customs, quarantine, and quality assurance testing, to storage at the national level; and then as they are distributed to the provincial, district, and service delivery points. In many places, this is necessary. With minimal infrastructure and limited private market development, the MOH has few options.

Further, because of growing populations and a rising number of health services and facilities, MOHs in developing countries often invest increasing amounts of scarce resources in supply chain management for the public sector as the number of service delivery points expand, patient access/demand grows, health supplies and suppliers increase, and volumes increase. This growth in the number of products and clients results in expanding needs for warehousing, information management, transportation, and the equipment and staff needed to support those functions. Often this increased demand occurs within an atmosphere of uncertainty as donor commitments and government budgets vary from year to year, seasonal disease patterns and product demands change, and fuel costs and currency values fluctuate, making these ancillary responsibility for logistics management a significant part of an MOH’s management burden. In many countries, the people charged with logistics management are pharmacists and clinicians; they require additional logistics training to carry out this added task. Furthermore, high levels of staff turnover in many public health

1 Occasionally, freight forwarders deliver products to levels farther down in a health system, but this is unusual; this is an example of the type of distribution outsourcing that this paper explores.

4

systems leave positions vacant for significant periods and require frequent investments of time and money in training new staff.

The objective of a public health supply chain is to get the right health commodities, of the right quality, at the right time, in the right quantity, to the right place, and for the right cost. For many reasons, this is a significant challenge for the public health sector in many countries—it is difficult to find the resources required to consistently meet the six rights. These challenges may be the result of increased supply chain demands of other (vertical) programs, lack of routine or accurate data, limited forecasting and procurement capacity, vehicle limitations, budget constraints, lack of staff trained in logistics, outdated information systems, policy shifts, or other factors that governments must face. These challenges can result in weak supply chains that negatively impact systems already struggling with limited resources, including stockouts; they can also result in high morbidity and mortality rates when patients do not receive medicines and health supplies, and the lack of or inferior data that leads to poor decision making and inefficient use of funding. Thus, outsourcing has emerged as a potential way to maximize the resources of governments (MOHs) and improve service delivery while leveraging the expertise of private sector service providers to better meet customer needs.

5

6

What?

Outsourcing is often defined as “engaging a third party provider to perform services for the host organization that were previously performed in-house.” In this definition, third party provider refers to any entity outside the traditional supplier-carrier-consumer relationship. Within any organization, public or private, there may be valid business and strategic reasons to outsource parts of the operation so the business can focus on its core capabilities. This process requires both an objective evaluation of internal performance and capacity, followed by a search for reliable partners that can deliver responsive services. Note that we distinguish outsourcing from contracting out—contracting usually implies that the customer dictates exactly what a contractor is to do and how to do it; outsourcing means the customer dictates the required outcome and the contractor determines how to complete the task based on their expertise.

In public health systems and supply chain management, a number of potential functional areas can be outsourced. There are many examples of public health systems that have contracted out service delivery; where, for example, a private organization or NGO may be contracted to provide health services to clients or to manage hospital administration. Following are a few such examples of this arrangement:

 In Cambodia, to outsource health services to NGOs, the MOH created two mechanisms: (1) a service delivery contract (SDC), where the contractor has complete line responsibility for service delivery in a specific area; and (2) management contract (MC) where the contractor works within the MOH system to strengthen the system. In El Alto, Bolivia, an NGO was given a management contract to improve the hospital management. In Madagascar and Senegal, the governments contracted with NGOs to deliver community-based nutrition interventions for improved health (Loevinsohn 2008).

Figure 1. The Logistics Cycle

While there are a limited number of well-documented examples of governments outsourcing parts of their supply chains; there are still opportunities in this area, and there is increasing interest in exploring this option. Many logistics functions can be outsourced. However, the various functions of the logistics cycle in figure 1 show clearly that some functions are better outsourced than others. MOHs are unlikely to relegate responsibility for functions that

7

they consider part of their core competency—areas that are under their direct mission and that they can perform better than an external party. These functions typically include developing and updating treatment guidelines, developing health policies, resourcing health facilities, creating national essential drug lists, and selecting products. However, ministries may determine that outside expertise is advantageous for some other functions that may not be part of their core competencies: forecasting and procurement, storage, distribution, and logistics management information systems (LMIS).

Supply Chain Functions to Consider Outsourcing The following supply chain activities may be appropriate for outsourcing in this context, because of the MOHs’ lack of specialization in these areas and the frequent availability of these services from third party providers:

Importation: This is the expeditious and controlled movement of goods into a country, always following local regulations; it may include customs clearance. To remain sensitive to necessary storage conditions, third party importation services may also include—

 Bonded Facilities—A government certifies these facilities and a bonding agency guarantees them; goods can be securely stored and the related taxes and duties deferred until they are removed.

 Cold Chain—This is the guaranteed maintenance and storage of goods, at the appropriate temperature, as they move from the supplier, through customs, to the consignee. This is especially important for vaccines and other temperature-sensitive products.

 Storage and Distribution—This is the secure, appropriate, and climate-controlled warehousing for all products. Third party providers may also offer inventory accuracy guarantees; 24-hour assistance, if needed; product insurance; and access for government or program officers to ensure proper goods management. Related services may include—

― Inventory management. The service provider may use an electronic warehouse management system (WMS) that would allow for real-time sharing of inventory status, if the customer uses a compatible system.

― Stock rotation. Proper stock rotation will ensure minimal product expiration and wastage; it may be first-to-expire, first-out (FEFO) for products with limited shelf lives but first-in, first-out (FIFO) for others.

― Picking and packing. This may include preparing orders for delivery to individual facilities, or for a district storage center; the service provider may or may not control it.

― Order tracking. This information shows what quantities of which products have moved from where to where, including the dates of these movements and proof that a facility received the products.

8

― Cross-docking. This is a service for orders that are packed for a facility, but sent to a collection or redistribution point for consolidation and onward delivery. Additional storage is not needed.

Transportation and Delivery—This is the physical delivery service of goods between different levels in the supply chain (movement from central level to regional level or last mile locations, etc.), according to the program/client requirements.

Product Security—A third party provider manages a product for the entire time; they are responsible for the safety and security of the goods. Additional services provided for product security may include bar coding, closed-circuit television (CCTV) for monitoring and security, restricted access, and product tracking.

Information Services—Service providers typically invest in information systems to monitor stock movements, order status, and invoicing, using bar coding and electronic data management systems. With this data, third parties can provide real-time data on stock levels, product usage, and trend analysis to add significant visibility and value to management.

Types of Service Providers Although any external or third party organization may be able to provide services for a customer, several types of organizations focus specifically on logistics services.

Third Party Logistics Providers—These providers specialize in the logistics functions described above. Commonly called 3PLs, these organizations are popular in the private sector as solution providers to firms interested in outsourcing some or all aspects of their supply chain management functions. They typically invest in physical infrastructure and information services that make their offerings more sophisticated and specialized than what can be provided by other organizations in­ house.

Non-Asset–Based 3PLs—These providers offer logistics solutions without ownership of physical resources, such as warehouses or trucks. They operate similarly to freight forwarders by negotiating and contracting warehousing and transportation while offering information services related to product handling.

Fourth Party Logistics Providers (4PLs)—These lead logistics partners act as a supply chain integrator that assembles and manages the resources, capabilities, and technology of its own organization with those of complementary service providers to deliver a comprehensive supply chain solution. These partners function as the primary manager of other 3PL partners for a client. They provide a single interface for the client and are the primary supply chain management provider, even if multiple parties actually perform specific aspects.

Beyond Outsourcing: Supply Chain Collaboration In addition to outsourcing, supply chain collaboration is another option for working with the private sector or other external partners in supply chain management. Supply chain collaboration is the joint planning, coordinating, and process integration between suppliers, customers, and other partners. This type of agreement can reduce costs, increase return on assets, and improve reliability and responsiveness to market needs.

9

Supplier-client collaboration can take a variety of forms. Three of the most common are described below, but the best forms of collaboration are tailored to the unique needs and requirements of the supplier-client partnership.

 Supplier direct delivery: In this model, the supplier delivers products directly to the distribution point. For example, in some local supermarkets, the supplying company delivers and shelves a variety of products (shampoo, soft drinks, etc.). This transfers the burden of storage and transport to the supplier. It also increases the risk for the distribution point, because they depend on their supplier’s well-functioning supply chain to avoid stockouts.

In Mexico, as a public health example, a system analysis concluded that distribution costs in the public health sector were 30 to 50 percent lower when private companies provided the same services. The higher costs were attributed to insufficient logistics infrastructure, limited information systems, and a complex network of distribution. In states where the government managed the distribution, products arrived at a state central warehouse; were moved to local warehouses; and then were eventually moved to the hospitals and health facilities, as needed. In this system, lead times were long, managers had very little visibility into the status of their orders, and warehouses were under-utilized. As a pilot, several states changed the system so the suppliers delivered medicines directly to the hospitals and health centers. The results showed that this shift to supplier direct delivery resulted in an improved response time, a 95 percent order fulfillment rate, and a 36 percent increase in the availability of medicines. (A.T. Kearney 2004).

 Collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR): This can be used to streamline communication through the supply chain, from the manufacturer to the end user. Information shared between suppliers and the procurer allows for continuous updating of inventory and projected needs. This, in turn, makes the end-to-end supply chain more efficient, facilitates better supply planning, and decreases expenditures on excess inventory by creating a leaner supply chain. It improves transport by promoting more efficient routing schedules, which are based on known demand.

CPFR has been used for public health in the past, at least partially, in coordinating donor-funded procurements. For example, the Clinton Health Access Initiative aggregated demand forecasts for pediatric antiretrovirals needed across many developing countries for treatment of HIV and AIDS in children; this helped suppliers understand the total demand for specific products. Prior to this, suppliers had to create their own forecasts for product development and manufacturing, with limited visibility into country-level demand estimates, particularly for new products. This type of information sharing enables the manufacturer to plan better, such as ensuring the availability of necessary raw materials and increasing their ability to meet customer needs on time. This information sharing needs to be routine and continuous to ensure that ongoing supply levels are appropriate, given the estimated demand.

 Vendor managed inventory—In this model, the manufacturer or distributor for the client must maintain the product inventory levels. The inventory can be held either at a distributor/supplier interim distribution center or, for replenishment, at the supplier’s central warehouse or manufacturing facility. This system requires the supplier to have visibility of the supply chain to the distribution point. For the manufacturer or supplier to know when and how much stock to replenish, they must have accurate and real-time knowledge of inventory status at the distribution points.

10

In the private sector, this is often done through the Internet or electronic data interchange (EDI). Computer-to-computer transfer of data minimizes data entry and calculation errors in the LMIS; this improves order accuracy. The responsibility to ensure stock availability shifts to the supplier. This direct link to the point of service further enables the supplier to provide quality, efficient service to both the distributor and the end user.

For example, in South Africa several distributors are warehousing and distributing antiretrovirals (ARVs) for suppliers. Three large distributors, IHD (now UTi Pharma Distribution), PHD, and CiplaMedpro have contracts with a variety of ARV suppliers—the suppliers maintain ownership of the medicines, but the distributors store, manage, and sell them. At the time the products are moved to the point of sale (health facilities, smaller distributors, etc.), ownership is transferred from the supplier to the buyer. The distributor is, therefore, a retailer that stores the product and shares the expected demand with the supplier to help better manage inventory in exchange for a predetermined commission or profit.

Specific Examples of Outsourcing Logistics in Public Sector Health Systems Following are some examples of how these types of outsourcing partnerships have been implemented by governments in health systems in developing countries. These examples of partnerships in health logistics in low-income countries include information on the background, decision criteria, risks and concerns of participants, and outcomes. The examples provide lessons learned that MOHs, policymakers, and supply chain implementers can use in similar contexts.

Example 1: Gradually handing over control in Bangladesh

Background Prior to 1994, the Government of Bangladesh (GOB) MOH Directorate General for Family Planning (DGFP) used a government-owned and -operated fleet of vehicles for distributing family planning commodities. However, because of consistently late deliveries, labor shortages, lost products, and high costs, the DGFP decided to outsource some of the transportation of family planning commodities.

Decision Criteria To help the GOB make this decision, it contracted a consultant to assess the logistics system to determine if there were opportunities for increased cost savings and/or greater efficiencies by outsourcing some or all of the family planning commodities logistics. This third party consultancy performed a cost-benefit analysis and analyzed efficiency of the system. Specifically, the consultant compared asset utilization rates, cost schedules, human resource capacity, and service levels of the private sector and the DGFP. The assessor found significant opportunities for cost savings and some potential service benefits (according to the consultant, the cost savings alone justified the change). Most of the potential savings were by eliminating or reducing government employees’ pensions and other benefits (due to the high labor costs) and the high operational costs caused by the under-utilization of human and physical capital (e.g., idle drivers and vehicles, and shipping at less than a full truckload).

11

The DGFP decided to proceed with a limited outsourcing plan; the DGFP outsourced 20 percent of the distribution of family planning commodities from the central warehouse to the regional warehouses, to the district reserve stores, and, finally, to the sub-district (thana) stores.2 By outsourcing 20 percent of the transportation to an outside organization, the government was able to easily compare the performance of the private sector transportation to the public sector transportation. From this comparison, it was obvious that by using the private carrier, costs were lower and efficiencies (as determined by on-time deliveries) were greater. This success motivated the DGFP to expand the private sector involvement and commit to outsourcing up to 80 percent of the transportation requirements of the DGFP. To proceed, the DGFP held a competitive bid for a two year contract that the GOB fully funded (not donors).

Risks and Concerns The government was hesitant to make the outsourcing decision because of several concerns. First, the GOB was using a significant amount of capital (trucks) for transportation and they employed a large number of drivers. What would happen to this capital and, more important, what would happen to the drivers if the government outsourced this function? Second, what would political consequences be for the redundancies? And, finally, the GOB wanted to retain control over the family planning program— outsourcing was seen as a threat to this control. Because these were serious concerns, they had to be addressed during any discussion or decision to outsource.

This led the government to take a moderate approach in adapting an outsourcing strategy. Not only did the DGFP begin the project by outsourcing only 20 percent of the transportation requirement, but it also decided not to dismiss any employees. Instead, the DGFP would not hire new employees or replace worn-out capital. As employees left, and as vehicles were retired, they were replaced by the private carrier. To maintain some control over transportation, the government decided to cap private sector participation at 80 percent of the total capacity requirement. This ensured the GOB a minimum of 20 percent of the total capacity3 (DELIVER 2007), which allowed them to maintain some control, and flexibility for emergency shipments and backup to resolve any problems with the private carrier.

Outcomes The cost and service-level benefits for outsourcing transportation have already been mentioned. These benefits occurred when the private sector took a more competitive and professional approach to transportation logistics management. For service-level improvements, the evidence is largely anecdotal. In the past, there were frequent labor problems (striking government workers); corruption (government employees used the trucks to visit relatives, which delayed departures and changed routes); drivers’ lack of accountability (drivers would claim mechanical problems to spend time with family members); and poor use of capital (shipping less than a truck load). Compared to outsourcing to the private sector, cost savings are measurable. Now, there is a financial incentive to hold employees accountable, use capital efficiently, and use modern route planning software.

2 From the sub-district stores to the clinics, transportation is more efficient. Each month the last mile suppliers (health clinic workers) meet at the sub-district stores to attend meetings and receive paychecks. At this time, each attendee is resupplied with family planning commodities. The quantities are small enough that they can be transported using local transportation, motorcycle, or bicycle. At the time the project was implemented, there was one central warehouse, three regional warehouses, 18 district reserve stores, and 467 sub-districts stores in Bangladesh. 3 As of September 2006, the private sector capacity had only reached 50 percent of the transportation requirement.

12

According to the third party consultancy, these improvements could save the DGFP approximately 25 percent in annual operating costs for the routes outsourced to the private sector (Pearson 1997).

However, outsourcing did not mean that the DGFP could ignore transportation; it has not eliminated the government’s role, it has simply changed it. Now, rather than using government resources to provide transportation, the government plans, oversees, and evaluates the service provider. Furthermore, the exacting standards of the private carrier have led to more rigorous standards for the DGFP, particularly in resource planning, warehousing, forecasting, and payroll practices. The DGFP also had to learn to manage a contract, particularly writing the contract; and manage the bidding process, perform supplier evaluations, and monitor supplier performance.

Finally, the private sector service providers have also had concerns. They were cautious about working with the government because of their delayed payments and perceived level of corruption. To maintain the trust of its private partners and to maintain these relationships, the GOB had to include payment terms in the contracts and follow through every time.

Lessons Learned Outsourcing is not a perfect solution that will end all logistics concerns. It can lead to significant cost savings and service-level improvements, but it requires constant involvement and special skills from the outsourcing party, particularly in contract management. The DGFP had to develop, manage, and evaluate their outsourcing contract and meet the standards of the contract.

Outsourcing programs are often unpopular because of the perceived loss of government control over parts of the public programs and concerns about layoffs. These political risks should be carefully considered and mitigated in outsourcing programs to ensure adequate management participation and organizational buy-in. The DGFP overcame these concerns by proceeding cautiously and avoiding politically unpopular layoffs.

Finally, the profit incentives of the private sector encourage greater use of technology and cost saving practices in health commodity delivery. These improvements placed pressure on the DGFP to follow supply chain best practices, but they also increased service levels.

Example 2: Using a 4PL in the Democratic Republic of the Congo

Background In 2005, the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) became part of an innovative public-private partnership in the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) (Global Health Council 2009). The DRC’s general lack of infrastructure and government resources has created significant challenges in administering a much-needed grant from the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria. Because the government lacked the internal capacity to manage a large public health project, UNDP stepped in to fill this role; they are accountable for the U.S.$200 million grant.

Under this grant, UNDP is responsible for the entire supply chain—from procurement to final distribution. It has fully capable procurement units with years of experience in procuring drugs and health commodities; however, when the grant was issued, it lacked local capacity and expertise in distribution, particularly in last-mile distribution. This challenge was complicated by the lack of infrastructure in the DRC—they have only 250 miles of paved roads in a country approximately the size of Western Europe.

13

Due to human resource capacity constraints and an inability to develop the short-term capacity, UNDP was not able to use the public sector to distribute its commodities but, instead, turned to the private sector. UNDP contacted the World Response Consultancy to engineer a public-private partnership strategy. World Response drafted an initial request for proposal (RFP) that included the primary distribution tasks that UNDP would need the private sector to fulfill—quality assurance, customs clearance, storage, and comprehensive national distribution. UNDP and World Response decided that, despite the procurement capabilities of UNDP, it would be beneficial to outsource this function, as well. This would create one cohesive supply chain that was implemented from start to finish by the private sector service provider. After completing a competitive bidding process, Missionpharma was awarded the contract.

Decision Criteria As previously mentioned, UNDP lacked the expertise to implement a distribution network under the difficult conditions in the DRC. To quickly attain a high level of supply chain service, UNDP needed the knowledge of an organization with on-the-ground experience. This would allow UNDP to fulfill its Global Fund mandate and use its resources efficiently and effectively. Developing internal capacity would have been too time consuming and would have initially affected service at the lower levels as UNDP learned to manage the distribution.

Risks and Concerns One of the greatest challenges in this partnership has been reinforcing accountability of the participating organizations. UNDP mitigated this challenge in its contract, which stipulates that payment for procured products will not be made until UNDP receives verification that the products have reached their final destination. This ensures UNDP that its objectives are met, but it requires a high level of trust from Missionpharma.

The incentive arrangement also places Missionpharma at significant financial risk when products are damaged or lost, and poses administrative management challenges due to the length of the supply chain. To overcome this, Missionpharma pre-packs cartons in its overseas warehouses for shipment directly to the service delivery points throughout the DRC (Global Health Council 2009). Missionpharma also established a bonded warehouse to protect products against leakage during the customs clearance process. The warehouse, with a track and trace barcode system, has allowed Missionpharma to maintain control and visibility of products throughout the supply chain, eliminating leakage and protecting its investment.

Outcomes The primary outcome has been that UNDP has successfully distributed health commodities throughout the DRC, a country with very limited infrastructure and long lead times.

Furthermore, they reached this level in a relatively short period of time. By contracting with only one service provider and reducing the amount of time and effort necessary to coordinate a supply chain among multiple partners, UNDP has been able to implement a complete, functioning supply chain in less than two months. This has guaranteed that the target population has access to needed health commodities quickly, saving lives.

Finally, the incentive structure of the public-private partnership has contributed to the implementation of a best practices supply chain that is more common among big businesses. Strict accountability and financial incentives provide Missionpharma the impetus to employ real-time

14

package tracking technology, a bonded warehouse, and a chartered dedicated aircraft. Undoubtedly, these practices have improved service levels and overall superior supply chain performance.

Lessons Learned Public-private partnerships can do more than fill the gaps in public sector capacity; they can encourage supply chain innovations and greater supply chain performance. These benefits are realized through contracts and incentives that mirror private sector competitiveness, risk, and accountability. This risk encouraged supply chain best practices and innovation in the DRC context and has also improved service levels throughout the length of the supply chain.

Key Lessons from These Examples From these examples, we have learned that the application of outsourcing and use of 3PL services by public institutions and public health organizations, in particular, can improve service delivery, but it is not always an easily implemented solution. There are many reasons why MOHs and associated parastatal organizations responsible for warehousing and distribution of health products would consider outsourcing some of their supply chain functions to private contractors. One reason is that as health services expand, as they have in many countries, the number of products that need to be managed and the number of distribution points have increased. Without major investments in infrastructure and equipment, it is extremely difficult to achieve this expansion. Because of donor support, many resource-limited settings have had a rapid increase in the number and volume of products they must manage, but they have received little additional support for inventory management and distribution for staff, equipment, or management skills. Further, warehousing and transportation needs often vary, meaning that the investment required to increase infrastructure to accommodate the largest inventory may not be worthwhile, if that need is only once a year, or is infrequent enough that it would be more efficient to outsource the need for additional capacity. In some cases, the cost of adapting a system for maximum variability—buying additional trucks or building additional warehouse space—could be avoided by outsourcing that function for a specified function or period of time.

In addition to the common issues just mentioned, four ideas from the examples can be applied to other situations:

MOH recognition of capacity constraints. The main reason the governments or agencies decided to outsource specific functions was because the MOH recognized that they could not carry out the identified activity, whether it was human capacity, or infrastructure capacity, or both. This limitation prompted the MOH to determine how they could obtain that capacity elsewhere instead of investing the time and capital necessary to build the capacity internally.

Defining the private sector: The private sector partners in the outsourcing relationships mentioned in this research fall outside the traditional definition of private sector. These partners range from domestic for-profit organizations to international private cooperating agencies, such as Missionpharma, that have organizational goals beyond earning a profit. These are not for profit organizations as defined by the for profit private sector. Defining these partners is particularly important to the country context. Opportunities to outsource depend on the level of development, infrastructure, and private sector sophistication. Often, very low-income countries do not have options for private sector partnership. As countries’ markets develop, however, so do their private sectors; and the options for outsourcing with private sector companies increase.

15

Concerns of control and payment: The most common concerns mentioned by the outsourcing participants were control and payment. Control was particularly important to the public sector partner, but the private sector also mentioned it. This concern should be addressed before an outsourcing decision is made. In the examples mentioned earlier, the Government of Bangladesh was concerned about the control of its health supply chain; this was one reason it chose to proceed cautiously and to outsource only a small percentage of its transportation capacity. This type of risk assessment and caution contributes to successful outsourcing campaigns by encouraging participant support and political buy-in.

In the examples researched, the private sector participant was, at least initially, concerned about the ability of the public sector to guarantee timely and accurate payment. This type of concern leads to higher costs and lower service levels because the private sector partner is hesitant to make significant investments in the project if there are concerns about recovering costs. This risk can be mitigated through contract management, but it can only be eliminated by developing a true partnership and trust.

Contract management: For an outsourcing program to succeed, there must be excellent contract management. The outsourcing organization needs to know how to write, enforce, and monitor a contract. This includes clauses for payment terms, performance expectations, assessment, and contract renewal. Different types of contracts are appropriate for different contexts, but it is essential that both parties enter the contract with accurate expectations of performance, a clear understanding of how that performance will be measured, and what the consequences will be for under-performance.

16

When?

The decision to outsource is not one that should be made without an exhaustive evaluation of resources and intended outcomes. Usually, some catalyst or issue drives the exploration process of alternative solutions, whether it is a resource limitation or a challenge in maintaining performance that an outside partner may be better positioned to address.

For example, as the needs of public sector health systems expand and the scope of products managed by a MOH increases, outsourcing may be an opportunity to expand without making additional investment in infrastructure and staff. This could either be a short-term strategy for managing change, or a longer-term strategy if a government decides that these capacities are not part of their core competencies and are not areas that they want to grow internally.

Additionally, shifting certain functions may result in economies of scale, as a 3PL can leverage the resources and needs of other clients to more efficiently meet the needs of all. Thus, when a 3PL consolidates smaller infrequent shipments, they may be able to provide larger, more frequent shipments at a lower average cost than the clients could provide individually. This might ultimately lead to lower costs for the MOH and service improvements for the ultimate customers. Using 3PLs leverages the private sector’s flexibility and may help overcome absorptive capacity constraints imposed on government institutions. Some common challenges, and how a 3PL may be able to address these, are displayed in figure 2.

Figure 2. Uses and Advantages of 3PLs

17

The following two-phase process will enable a public institution, such as a MOH, to decide if they should pursue outsourcing as a way to improve service.

Deliberation—Strategic and Operational Considerations At this initial stage, the organization recognizes that there are issues with service levels or capacity, but they may need to conduct further analysis to pinpoint operational bottlenecks. This should involve a group of internal stakeholders who understand the existing system and its performance and are able to analyze options for improvement. Ideally, the team is consistently involved in the process from beginning to end. During this deliberation process, the stakeholder team will determine which of the organization’s functions and activities could be outsourced to a third party. The stakeholder team may find that none of the analyzed functions fall into this category, but the deliberation process will still help determine the best approach for moving forward with system improvements. The steps in this process may take the following form:

1. Identification of core competency—Out of all parts of an organization’s process, define what is and what is not within the core operational expertise of the organization. The core competency of a business is its main purpose and its key to survival; it is how a private sector organization makes a profit and survives in a competitive environment. Surprisingly, it is common for an organization to misunderstand, or to not recognize, its core competency; because it often changes with time, technology, management, or customer demands. Before an organization makes an outsourcing decision, it should be confident that it understands its core competencies.

The core competency is what sets an organization apart from its competition; it is what the organization does that its competitors do not, or what it does better than its competitors. Many successful businesses have multiple core competencies but, for simplicity, observers often focus on only one. The following are examples of frequently recognized core competencies.

 Dell: manufacturing consistently high-quality, customizable computers

 Apple: design and innovation

 Walmart: low costs because of its supply chain excellence

Each organization has a core competency that sets it apart from the competition and enables it to earn high profits, often at an above average rate of return.4 Without this core competency, the organization would not survive, or would not be as successful (i.e., profitable).

Using this process, an MOH should consider outsourcing activities that are outside its areas of operational expertise, or areas in which the MOH does not want to build expertise. This move toward specialization of services would, for example, allow a Central Medical Store (CMS) that has staff with expertise in procurement and management of pharmaceutical supplies, but limited experience with transportation scheduling or fleet management, to outsource the physical distribution of products. This would increase the CMS’ capacity to focus on their areas of strength while shifting responsibility for other aspects of supply chain management to the private sector, rather than trying to build internal capacity.

4 An above normal rate of return is a rate greater than the organization’s cost of capital, or an economic profit (as opposed to accounting profit).

18

2. Operational process review—Identify functional areas within the organization’s operations that are not performing well. This requires the ability to measure performance and compare it to some benchmark or standard. Comparable measurement of performance must have performance-based indicators, also known as metrics. The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT has published a list of suggested metrics for logistics systems (Aronovich et al. 2010); it is available on the project’s website.

Using metrics like these, public health logistics performance can be measured against international standards, including the World Health Organization (WHO) (WHO Expert Committee 2006), or private sector standards, such as International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The operational process review can also occur through customer feedback or assessments conducted by outside consultants. A skills assessment of staff should be done to understand the knowledge base and the capacity currently available.

After the core competency and the process review are complete, the areas to be outsourced should be clear.

3. Feasibility analysis—Determine which outsourcing options are politically and operationally feasible. Having identified certain processes as potential candidates for outsourcing, the stakeholder team will need to assess the political feasibility of outsourcing government operations to a private third party. After the team has determined that there are no political barriers to outsourcing, they should find out if there are any operational barriers, such as the availability of 3PLs that could carry out the tasks the MOH wants to outsource. This should include a frank discussion and cooperation between MOH and MOF stakeholders about how to secure funding and whether to use the MOH’s capital, loans, or donor funding. It is essential that they discuss if and when the initiative could become self-sufficient.

Cost-Benefit Analysis—Financial Considerations After a not-for-profit organization determines that outsourcing a particular function would make operational sense, it must assess the potential financial implications of doing so. A cost-benefit analysis enables the organization to compare the costs and benefits of providing the services in­ house to the costs and benefits of outsourcing the same services or functions.

When conducting a cost-benefit analysis, the following points are important to keep in mind:

 The cost comparison should include additional measurements beyond the direct costs of vehicles, fuel, warehouse space, and staff; these costs need to be compared to the cost that would be paid for the 3PL to assume these functions.

 For product availability, depending on the circumstances, and especially in the public sector, it may be worthwhile to pay higher operating costs while improving performance. If the overall cost of operations goes up by 10 percent, but the service levels improve by 30 percent, the MOH will need to decide if its service priorities allow this cost increase.

 Also, it is important to consider the longer-term benefits if future maintenance or upgrade costs are averted. Such trade-offs should be carefully analyzed in any comparison of the value of outsourcing versus maintaining functions in-house.

 Further, use of a 3PL may provide greater flexibility for adjusting to changes in demand or number of supplies managed. This increased flexibility may not generate a measureable, monetary benefit, but it can improve performance, regardless.

19

Therefore, an organization must gather detailed information on costs and processes necessary to quantify many of these elements. This requires information about the entire system, the location of cost information, and, finally, access to the information.

The following section lists each of the components of a cost-benefit analysis to determine the financial implication of logistics outsourcing. Each component includes examples of cost figures that should be accounted for in the analysis. To obtain these figures, the stakeholder group can use accounting costs, costs allocated based on relative amount of activity, and validated assumptions or estimates. For example, if an essential medicines program uses 60 percent of a warehouse and they want to know the warehousing costs, they could consider the entire amount spent on warehousing—space, utilities, depreciation, maintenance, and labor—and determine 60 percent of that to represent the amount consumed by the essential medicines program.

A. Existing operation Determine the current costs associated with the function under consideration for outsourcing (see table 1).

Table 1. Category and Examples of Costs

Category of Costs Examples of Costs to Include

Employee and administrative  Salaries  Pensions  Health care  Training  Other benefits.

Equipment  Operations (fuel, insurance)  Maintenance  Replacement.

Buildings  Operations costs (electricity, communications, facilities)

 Maintenance  Security (guards and systems).

Cost of inventory*

*if considering outsourcing inventory management

 Purchase value of expired stock  Purchase value of excess stock  Purchase value of unusable or obsolete stock.

These types of cost data can be collected using the project’s supply chain costing tool (USAID | DELIVER PROJECT Forthcoming), an Excel-based template for capturing and analyzing supply chain costs by tier (level), function, and facility. Another useful tool for determining what to measure when estimating costs of current transportation systems is Guidelines for Assessing Costs in a Logistics System: An Example of Transport Cost Analysis (Abdallah 2004), which is available on the project’s website.

While the information on operating costs of the current system are critical inputs, it is important to acknowledge that if the current system is underperforming, and the objective of outsourcing is to

20

improve service delivery, the cost of what it would take to meet a higher level of performance must also be part of the evaluation. Therefore, it is necessary to cost, or at least develop a reasonable estimate, of the costs that would be incurred to improve the current system (see table 2).

B. Upgrade costs

Table 2. Category and Examples of Costs to Upgrade

Category of Costs Examples of Costs to Include

Benchmarking operation  Consultancy cost.

Improving personnel skills  Training costs o trainer’s time o cost of lost staff time while in training.

 Recruitment costs o job specification development o advertising o interviewing.

Improving infrastructure  Buildings o warehouses o garages o offices.

 Equipment o computers o materials handling equipment o racking o vehicles and spare parts o vehicle repair equipment.

 Systems o financial o logistical o vehicle tracking.

 Personnel turnover o losing/gaining people and associated

training.

The sum of the actual costs (A), plus estimated upgrade costs (B), can then be compared to documented and estimated costs of outsourcing, outlined in the section C (see table 3). This information may be difficult to estimate, but it is important to be as realistic as possible. It may be possible to obtain input estimates from a private sector company working in another sector with similar equipment, infrastructure, and systems costs. They may not be able to share their actual costs but they may be able to gauge whether a set of estimates is reasonable, in a given context.

21

C. Outsourced operation  Cost of tendering

The process of requesting cost estimates from potential outsourcing partners and evaluating their ability to perform the task will require administrative time. The contract manager should participate in this process.

 Cost of contract management

This will include paying people to monitor the contract, which can be very time consuming. They may need to monitor the quality of work during visits, including travel costs, or by phone or email. Expect to closely monitor organizations with less experience.

 Third party costs for services required

The third party cost estimate will probably be the largest percentage of costs incurred when outsourcing. Verify that their estimates are realistic to prevent disputes if they do not follow through on their proposal.

 Cost of providing some infrastructure

Depending on the outsourcing contract, both buildings and vehicles may need to be provided to the third party.

 Contingency for poor performance

What is the back-up plan if the service provider does not perform well? Keeping a contingency plan may cost money, but it is essential to ensure high levels of service.

 Retrenchment costs (if current operation is scaled back)

Outsourcing may be politically unpopular as it may require downsizing the part of the system that is currently performing that function. Laying off workers may lead to low morale among those who remain, fearful that their jobs are also at risk. Depending on local and organizational labor laws, redundancy pay may be required to compensate employees who have been downsized. Although this is not desired, the risk of sabotage from disgruntled employees may need to be factored into scale-back costs, as well.

Any organizational change will lead to a drop in productivity levels during the transition period, which will vary in length, depending on the size of the change. In a cost-benefit analysis, the loss of productivity may also need to be considered.

 Cost of capital

Because the life of a project normally spans a specific length of time, it is important to evaluate the costs over the entire relevant project period and to account for any risk. This time frame and risk add an additional component to the equation: the cost of capital. The cost of capital is equal to the next best use of the organization’s resources (the opportunity cost or risk of the investment). As a general rule, the cost of capital is equal to the return that an investment could have earned elsewhere (by investing in another project or by investing in the financial markets), or the rate of the return that the organization has earned on similar projects. Essentially, the cost of capital is a measurement of risk; the higher the risk, the greater the cost of capital.

22

Table 3. Cost Comparison Sample Worksheet

Current costs (A)

Cost to upgrade (B) Cost to outsource (C) Potential savings/increased cost from outsourcing

Total = A + B Total = C Difference = C – (A+B)

The cost-benefit analysis can take many forms, but in a private sector environment where profit guides the decisionmaking process, it is often distilled to a mathematical equation such as net present value (NPV); if the equation is positive, the organization pursues the opportunity; if it is negative, the organization abandons the project. In its simplest form, an analyst identifies each and every relevant cost of a decision, including non-monetary costs, which are given a value based on an economic estimation. These costs are then added together and compared against the expected benefits (cost savings, profit, increased quality, etc.). This analysis should yield the information necessary to make a decision about whether outsourcing would either decrease costs or be a reasonable expansion of costs, given what it would take to match capacity with internal resources.

D. Non-quantifiable benefits for a public organization that decides to outsource

Not all the benefits are monetary or quantifiable and they may require a different type of estimation. For example, it is often difficult to put a dollar value on increased quality because the provider may be unsure about how consumers will receive it. There are many such benefits to outsourcing that do not fit the cost-benefit equation, but they should still be considered when making an outsourcing decision. These include the following examples: 1. Using public money in an effective manner  Public perception that government is getting

value for money

2. Improving the services to the public  Seen to be socially focused

3. High performance leading to positive customer feedback  Improved team morale

4. Osmosis of skill sets from private to public sector  Work force increases skills

Based on the country priorities and reasons for outsourcing, these non-quantifiable benefits (D) will have to factor into the calculations with A, B, and C in table 3; but how they vary will be on a case- by-case basis.

23

What are some reasons to consider outsourcing?  Reduce costs.  Focus on core expertise.  Maximize use of shared resources and infrastructure  Improve service levels.  Increase flexibility to deal with ever-changing business conditions.  Improve access to products, services, and emerging technologies.  Assign operational issues to an outside expert.  Use the expertise of other organizations.  Compensate for lack of expertise or capacity internally.  Improve credibility and image by associating with superior providers.  Improve operating performance, quality, timeliness, and productivity.

Case Example: Country X Considers Potential Distribution Outsourcing An MOH in a sub-Saharan African country decided to improve its services by increasing the availability of medical products at public health facilities; they decided that outsourcing might be a possible route to that improvement.

Following the steps outlined above, the MOH first formed a permanent stakeholder group that was to decide whether or not to outsource some of its operations. The stakeholder group laid out all its activities related to the support of health services. They determined that developing treatment guidelines, selecting products, and ensuring quality were within its core competencies, but physical transportation to service delivery points was not. Conducting an operational process review, the group also found that its transport operations suffered from low performance; vehicles were frequently unavailable for delivery because of maintenance and scheduling problems.

While stakeholders agreed that laying off the current transport personnel was politically undesirable, they decided they could condense current operations to improve performance and, simultaneously, take advantage of locally available transport firms to serve unmet need. Additionally, the stakeholder group found that the use of a 3PL for transport could enable the MOH to deal with variable demand more efficiently—3PLs would have better short-term capacity to handle seasonal or emergency distribution of products. From this analysis, the MOH decided that outsourcing transport operations was both politically and operationally desirable.

Using only internal resources, the stakeholder group then conducted a cost-benefit analysis to determine the financial implications of outsourcing compared to performance improvement. Using the Supply Chain Costing Tool: User Manual (USAID | DELIVER PROJECT Forthcoming), they found that current transport costs to service delivery points (A) cost the MOH $55,000 per year. The estimated cost to improve service internally (B) was $100,000 in the first year for new equipment and training, and $40,000 per year after the first year to increase capacity and manage the process. The MOH then asked local transport services for bid estimates for regular transport. Specifically, the MOH looked for companies that owned their own vehicles, employed safety and security measures, charged per cubic meter or kilogram, and were able to respond to short-term and long-term transport requests from the MOH. The lowest cost response that met these needs had an annual cost of $50,000–$55,000, depending on the MOH’s final requirements. Table 4 shows the final cost-benefit comparison.

24

Table 4. Final Cost-Benefit Comparison

Keep In-House Outsource Comparison

Total current cost (A)

$55,000/year

Total current cost (A) (would not be eliminated, but condensed, which reduces the total current costs, and includes contract management) $40,000

Total difference

Cost to upgrade (B)

$100,000 first year only

$40,000/year

Cost to outsource (C)

$50,000 to $55,000/year

Total

$155,000 first year only

$95,000/year after

$90,000 to $95,000/year

$90,000 to $95,000/year

$65,000 to $60,000 savings

0 to $5,000 savings/year

By conducting the cost-benefit analysis, the stakeholder group agreed to contract transport services from the 3PL identified during the bid process. While they realized that other than then first year saving, the lifetime costs of outsourcing were almost the same as internal improvement, the group agreed that the non-quantifiable benefits (D), which is the ability to see improvements sooner and the ability to efficiently handle short-term changes, made outsourcing the more desirable option.

This process will identify a function or activity that makes strategic and financial sense to outsource and has the support of internal stakeholders.

Summary of Outsourcing Decision Process

The organization recognizes the need for improvement or expansion in operations. The organization forms a group of internal stakeholders to investigate the potential for outsourcing to a third party as a way to achieve this. The stakeholder group conducts the following two phases:

Deliberation—does outsourcing a particular function make strategic and operational sense?

 Identify core competency—Of all the organization’s processes, which are the core competencies? Core competencies should probably not be outsourced.

 Process review—Of all the organization’s process, which are under-performing? Those that are not core competencies and are under-performing are good candidates for outsourcing.

 Feasibility analysis—Are all involved stakeholders supportive of possible outsourcing? Are potential third parties available that can perform the work?

Cost-benefit analysis—Does outsourcing make financial sense? For the outsource-able function, collect and compare:  current cost of performing function internally  cost of improving or expanding performance internally  cost of outsourcing.

25

Other Potential Analysis Frameworks In addition to the cost-benefit analysis, several other analysis frameworks can be used to inform business decisionmaking. Two decision analysis frameworks, that include nonmonetary costs and benefits, may be particularly appropriate for decisionmaking. The first, the PrOACT model, is best defined by the letters in the name—problem, objective, alternatives, consequences, and tradeoffs. Working through this model for decisionmaking involves using five steps to help rationalize difficult decisions: (1) defining the problem, (2) considering an exhaustive list of objectives, (3) identifying alternatives, (4) understanding the consequences (of each alternative), and (5) addressing and evaluating tradeoffs.

The second framework is the analytic hierarchy process (AHP), a structured technique for working through complex decisions. Instead of providing an analysis that leads to a correct decision, the AHP helps decisionmakers find the solution that best meets their needs, given an understanding of their defined problem. In the AHP process, the first step is to deconstruct the decision problem into a hierarchy of more easily understood sub-problems, each of which can be analyzed independently. The elements of the hierarchy can relate to any aspect of the decision problem—tangible or intangible, carefully measured or roughly estimated, well- or poorly-understood—any information or criteria that relates to the decision.

After the hierarchy of criteria is developed, the next step is for the decisionmakers to systematically evaluate its various elements by comparing them in pairs. When making comparisons, the decisionmakers can use actual data about the elements, or they can judge the elements' relative significance or importance to the decision. One benefit of the AHP is that human judgment, not just the underlying information, can be used for the evaluations. For this reason, the AHP model is often cited as appropriate to making public sector capital budgeting decisions.

Additional resources can provide other information about these frameworks. A select few are listed below, but an Internet search will yield many results (Bhushan 2004 and Saaty 1980). If internal capacity is not available to do this kind of analysis, an outside consultant can guide an objective analysis of the situation.

Key considerations when deciding to outsource  Is the function non-essential to the organization? Does it add value?  What are the processes where the need for change is greatest?  Are there work processes in which change is already taking place?  Which work processes have a high chance of success/ease of implementation?  Which work process, if improved, will transform the organization?  Which work processes are separable and can be decoupled to improve performance?

26

How?—Implementation Roadmap

To ensure a smooth transition to outsourcing, if that decision is made during the decisionmaking process, all the stakeholders need to plan and agree on an implementation process.

Each project will be unique, but the high-level aspects will be very similar. Appendix B provides a sample implementation plan. This plan, which is based on actual experience, shows the analysis and selection phases taking up to ten months; however, it could take more or less time. Outsourcing is not a quick fix; this process requires careful planning and strong leadership. Government and MOH personnel must be patient with this activity. The spreadsheet in appendix B highlights the key elements of the transition process to outsourcing.

Beginning with the initial decision to outsource or not (described in the previous chapter), the following stages show how to develop a project plan to guide the outsourcing process (see figure 3).

Figure 3. Process for Outsourcing Decisionmaking

Stage 1. Project Team and Activity Formation First, form a cross-functional team of stakeholders and key decisionmakers (many were probably involved in the decision to outsource). Ideally, the leader should be either the Minister of Health or the Permanent Secretary, and departmental heads should be part of the team, including the manager of the CMS and other key stakeholders. The team must commit to meeting regularly, based on the size of the undertaking, to ensure key activities are met and problems are averted.

Second, set objectives that are in line with the MOH’s own mission to ensure that the right service(s) are outsourced with the right objectives—they should be part of the deliberation process. Also, determine the desired outcome from outsourcing. To be meaningful, the impact of outsourcing must be measured and evaluated; key parameters for performance should be established at the outset, including—  improved order fill rate

27

 reduced stockouts

 increased customer satisfaction

 reduced warehouse space required

 reduced product expiries.

Be sure to address issues related to financing and payment of contracting expenses. Government operations may face restrictions from the ministries of finance on their options for budgeting or paying 3PLs, which may hinder relations with potential contractors. Therefore, someone familiar with financing and contracting options should be part of this project team. Address and identify an on-going funding stream and payment terms that will be attractive to private sector companies; discuss them openly during negotiations with potential 3PLs.

Stage 2. 3PL Recruitment To recruit a 3PL, it will be necessary to thoroughly understand all country procedures and regulations regarding contracting with vendors. Laws may dictate how the recruitment and contracting process must be conducted, and it will be important to ensure that these procedures are followed.

In general, the first step is to develop a list of potential candidates by determining what local or international companies may be able to provide the services that will be outsourced. This will depend on the skill base and capacity in a given country or setting. Many large international logistics organizations have partners/agents in many countries, so trade directories may be useful. Alternative sources may come from recommendations and, if needed, a press release asking for expressions of interest from 3PLs. The output should be a list of possible companies, including contact names and telephone numbers.

Next, contact the list of candidates to explore their interest in acting as a 3PL. Most of the time, for formal requests, a telephone conversation is sufficient to screen companies and reduce the list to a manageable size. The screening process should determine if candidates have the required experience, whether they have or could develop resources in the right locations, whether they would be interested in tendering for the work, and, if so, the contact address for the invitations to tender. This step should eliminate businesses that do not have the capacity or are not interested in this type of business. The final list of companies can be contacted with an invitation to tender (ITT).

RFPs or ITTs are typically done through an international bid process. However, some countries have a legal framework within which they perform tenders. The ITT to potential contractors should include—

 introduction and scope of work

 description of agency or organization

 explanation of the origins of the ITT and strategic goals

 business requirements for work to be done

 logistics standards

 performance measures

28

 outline of contractual terms

 operator information

 outline of acceptable fee structure

 definition of needed format for quotations

 date of final response for the ITT.

The ITT should also include any information that will assist the contractor with estimates for fees and quotations. Give the potential contractors the opportunity to ask questions and give all bidders access to the responses. They can be coordinated in several ways—by offering a short visit to the current operations, aggregating all questions and answers and circulating to all bidders, or providing a supplementary data pack with additional information, based on questions or requests.

After the bids are submitted, analyze and evaluate them. To help in the selection, compare and rank criteria—operational fit, costs/prices quoted, technical expertise, information management capabilities, and management structure. Consider visiting the prospective providers’ facilities; this is critical to see if potential contractors have the management capacity and physical resources to meet the objectives of the operations to be outsourced. Also, review the qualifications of all members of the potential 3PL team who will be working on the outsourcing project. To further evaluate how well they perform, talk to previous and existing clients and visit operations they currently service or manage. This will show their management style and how well the team is able to manage operations and/or solve problems.

After evaluating and ranking bidders, if multiple candidates remain, create a short list of preferred candidates. To select the best option, gather more information on the financial status of the company, meet and interview key staff, review the benefits they offer, and the pricing structure.

The final step in selecting a 3PL is the preparation and signature of a formal contract and designation of roles and responsibilities within the terms of the contract.

29

Why organizations are reluctant to outsource (Patel 2005)  Cost.  Lack of management support.  Cultural differences.  Confidentiality.  Concerns about level of service.  Perceived loss of control.  Loss of internal expertise.  Personnel issues.

Major reasons why outsourcing fails (Barthélemy 2003)  Poor management of the outsourced relationship.  Making the wrong choices about what to outsource.  Choosing the wrong vendor.  Drafting an inappropriate or unrealistic contract.  Overlooking potential personnel issues.

Stage 3. Service-level Agreement During contract negotiations, it is important to have a service level agreement (SLA) that is performance-oriented, yet realistic within the context. It would be discouraging for all parties if a clause was included in a distribution contract mandating that all orders be delivered within 24 hours if it takes 36 hours to reach some of the health facilities. Also, while electronic reports may be preferable, allowances may need to be made in areas where communications are challenging. The agreement must be fair and equitable, with allowances for conflict resolution, so that each party can perform well, but allow for resolving problems.

Contracting companies should also have standard operating procedures (SOPs) that clearly define the operational activities to be performed between the customer and the 3PL, and also state how they will be performed. These should be outlined in the contract or as an addendum. The SOP is, however, a live document. To ensure that all parties understand the details of the agreement, it should be updated whenever a change occurs in the process.

Next, develop and agree on KPIs, which are linked to the overall objective of outsourcing, as discussed in stage 1. Additional measures could be added, depending on the service to outsource, including—

 delivery times

 condition of vehicles

 agreed-upon reporting protocols

 order processing rates

 accuracy of orders being processed.

KPIs should be measurable, time limited, and realistically attainable. They are the contractor’s insurance to ensure that their outsourcing partner performs as expected. The SLA should state clearly what the implications are for not performing according to the KPIs. This process ensures

30

accountability for both partners. As mentioned earlier, the USAID | DELIVER PROJECT has published a list of suggested metrics for logistics systems (Aronovich et al. 2010), which is available on the project’s website.

Many resources are available on contracts. Recommended reading includes Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers (JSI 2004). While this guide provides guidance on contracting health service delivery, rather than logistics functions, the contracting sections are useful for both. Appendix A includes excerpts on the suggested contract template and format. Another good resource for the contracting process is How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services (Slater 1998) and The Handbook of Logistics Contracts (Jané and de Ochoa 2006). Additional resources are listed in the references section.

Transitioning from in-house to outsourcing may be challenging. After an organization decides to outsource some of its operation, the old way and new way will co-exist for awhile. As part of this, it is critical to have a change management strategy for the operations of both organizations. It is important to ensure that all staff understand the reasons for outsourcing and how it will affect them. Organizational change can lower employee morale and performance as people are unsure how their job will change, or whether it will be eliminated. Good communication about changes can help mitigate this anxiety. The best route is to include all workers at the beginning of the process so at- risk parts of the operation can be highlighted and a contingency plan established.

It will be important to allay fears by confirming the continuation of employees, if that is the case, or to alert them to any potential changes in their responsibilities. Conversely, if jobs are going to be eliminated, a business continuity plan should be developed in case of service interruption during the transition. For instance, if transportation is going to be outsourced, drivers may lose their jobs. To reduce the incidence of theft, damage, or poor service, the 3PL may bring in drivers to drive government vehicles before the SLA is in place.

One of the biggest changes for the program managers is in their role of contract management. Managing a 3PL relationship may require additional training or capacity building to ensure that staff that once directly managed a warehouse or scheduled transport are now equipped to manage a 3PL relationship and to ensure that operations are running smoothly and customers’ needs are being met. It will be a shift toward oversight that includes checking, approving, and processing invoices; information management; and making sure that service levels are met (quality monitoring).

The key areas to focus on are—

 reports based on agreed KPIs

 regular meetings with 3PL to highlight issues or praise good service

 financial oversight

 conflict management

 relationship building.

This job is critical to the success of any outsourcing agreement and, therefore, the contract manager must be a senior government official with project management experience, with support and authority; who, ideally, reports directly to the minister or permanent secretary.

31

 Financial

 Formalize terms of payment and ensure that these are acceptable and reasonable for both parties.

 Establish strong links with the outsourcing partner to develop trust so that they can give favorable payment terms or even discounts for additional work.

Stage 4. Monitoring and Evaluation

Life after the Contract Using the KPIs and objectives of outsourcing, it will be important to assess outsourced functions and contractors to determine if the anticipated benefits were achieved. Depending on the length of the contract, it will be important to conduct a periodic reassessment to ensure that both parties are following their contract. It is especially important to assess the quality of service of an outsourcing partner when the contract is due for rebid or expansion.

These steps, with strong senior management buy-in and vigilant project management, will foster a strong partnership, ensure that objectives are met, and improve the likelihood that both parties will consider the experience mutually beneficial. Further information is available from many sources (Inbound Logistics 2010.)

32

Conclusion

Experience from both the private and public sector’s work with 3PLs and suppliers have generated some useful lessons that are broadly applicable to organizations considering outsourcing some of their logistics functions or working closer with suppliers to improve inventory management.

 The policy environment can affect the government’s flexibility to collaborate with service providers and suppliers.

Policies governing financial mechanisms available to MOH procurement units may inhibit contracting options and opportunities for supplier collaboration between the government and private companies. A service provider or supplier is less likely to make special efforts to accommodate a client’s needs if it will only result in a short-term or one-time contract with no guarantee of future business. Framework contracts or framework international competitive bidding (ICB) contracts may be a favorable contract arrangement for purchaser and supplier, resulting in preferential pricing over a longer-term contract agreement. However, the existing MOF and donor policies might also limit the potential use of these and other types of contracts. Efforts should be made to work with policymakers to ensure that the environment is conducive to healthy competition, yet flexible enough to take advantage of relationships that improve service levels and reduce costs.

 After the decision is made to outsource an activity, the client must develop a thoughtful management plan to implement the proposed changes.

Managing the transition process is a big part of a successful outsourcing initiative. The client needs to invest a significant amount of time and willingness to integrate the 3PL, as the arm of existing services, to ensure that service delivery is seamless for the customer. The 3PL will represent your organization; therefore, they must be able to operate as part of your organization and have the resources and relationships to do this well. This will not happen without a significant amount of communication, training, and resource planning involving both the client and the 3PL from the outset of the relationship.

One way to mitigate issues that arise during a transition is to have a change management plan and a strong project management team to manage the process and ensure that key stakeholders from all involved partners and organizations understand the process and can help oversee the progress and ensure that the transition occurs smoothly.

 Selection of a reputable and respected 3PL with adequate capacity for the task is essential to success.

Part of the initial evaluation of the use of 3PL providers needs to include careful ‘due diligence’ of any prospective partner. A major concern is the financial and operational health of the prospective service provider—how confident are you that the company will not go out of business or become bankrupt during your service contract? Do they have significant capital available to invest in and support their existing infrastructure and expand as needed? Some risk is expected in any business you work with and the business may cease functioning for a variety of reasons—from risky investments made by their management, to natural disasters, to mismanagement. After you have

33

decided to outsource particular services, your role in selecting a 3PL is making sure that the company is reliable and the risk is mitigated as much as possible.

An established company should provide proof of their level of management and experience in an area. The 3PLs should provide references from existing clients that show a clear record of consistent, on-time services; clean financial and legal documents; and good driving records for anyone involved with transporting products.

 A strong contract and contract management plan must be in place to ensure the successful transition to outsourcing and to define roles and responsibilities.

A contract is a useful tool for both parties in defining what the roles and responsibilities are and the expectations of both client and service provider. If well written, the contract should explain who does what, who is held accountable, and how both parties can determine if what has been done was done well.

The contract is what the MOH can use to ensure that the supplier/manufacturer does what is expected. It states performance measures, and, if those measures are monitored, the contract manager can hold the supplier to the expectation stated in the contract.

The process of managing a contract requires a different core competency than doing the work. Rather than planning delivery routes, allocating resources, and coordinating transaction paperwork, a program manager in the MOH or logistics management unit (LMU) monitors performance by collecting information on these performance measures. They may facilitate communications between the contracted supplier and the warehouses or service delivery points with whom they will be collaborating.

Furthermore, either as a government entity or through the 3PL, a business continuity plan should spell out the consequences if some level of the system fails. While not necessarily the responsibility of the 3PL, it is important to know if they have a contingency plan should something disrupt their ability to provide service (i.e., if they are providing distribution services and all of their drivers go on strike).

 Clear performance measures are the foundation for a successful partnership.

The ability to define the desired quality and service levels during the 3PL selection process and in the contract will make the entire process easier. It is important to clearly define the scope and parameters of responsibilities and required logistics services. Even before meeting with potential partners, it would be a good idea to outline performance metrics, including KPIs and desired contractual terms. Expectations and business objectives should be clearly defined and documented. Eventually, after the needs and desired functions of the 3PL are identified, an ITT will need to be developed to start soliciting bids from potential 3PLs. The performance indicators will then go into the contract to ensure that the client is able to determine if the 3PL is or is not providing quality service.

A variety of resources suggest appropriate performance measures for supply chains. The USAID | DELIVER PROJECT lists them in A Guide to Key Performance Indicators for Public Health Managers (Aronovich et al. 2010) and How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services (Slater 1998). The publications are good examples of the contents of an ITT.

34

 Communications must be open and frequent and both parties must be committed to the success of the relationship.

In the private sector in the United States and Europe, communication is cited as one of the most difficult barriers to effective business partnerships and supply chain collaboration. Governments may not be accustomed to managing a contract or providing feedback on performance to a vendor as a way to improve the quality of service. Conversely, 3PLs may not understand the constraints that governments must work with in their operations. Open and on-going communication about needs and expectations can provide opportunities to address these issues and improve the overall system quality.

Outsourcing is an important option to consider for public sector health systems struggling with maintaining high service delivery standards in the middle of growing supply chain demands. Third party service providers can potentially provide a way for governments (MOHs) to maximize limited resources for product management and distribution by harnessing the expertise and resources of the private sector, including advanced information technology, economies of scale, service specialization, and profit incentives generally not available to the public sector supply chain managers.

However, it is important to remember that while outsourcing can significantly reduce the number of functions that a government has to provide for its public sector health system, it is not a perfect solution. Managing a contract is usually challenging, especially for a key function with a complex network—outsourced public health supply chain functions often are. It may require fewer resources than doing the same job in–house, but it will require different types of management, oversight, and funding. Furthermore, it may not be a feasible option if restrictions on contracting, funding, or the decision faces political opposition because of lost jobs. However, if these obstacles do not exist or can be overcome, government systems may benefit from the enhanced capacity and specialization of 3PLs by outsourcing specific functions to the private sector.

The decision to outsource must be made after careful consideration of the potential benefits and risks and with a clear understanding of the expected results from an outsourcing contract; this will help ensure that the process will have a favorable outcome. There is no right answer, but using this guide should help managers and policymakers determine what might be possible and feasible within a given context and to increase the capacity to work with an increasing number of demands on supply chains for public sector health systems.

35

36

References

Abdallah, Hany. 2004. Guidelines for Assessing Costs in a Logistics System: An Example of Transport Cost Analysis. Arlington, Va.: John Snow, Inc./DELIVER, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Abramson, Wendy B. 2004. Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers. Arlington, Va.: John Snow, Inc./DELIVER. Available at http://www.jsi.com/Managed/Docs/Publications/ContractingPrimerManual.pdf

Aronovich, Dana, Marie Tien, Ethan Collins, Adriano Sommerlatte, and Linda Allain. 2010. Measuring Supply Chain Performance: A Guide to Key Performance Indicators for Public Health Managers. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

A.T. Kearny. 2004. Improving the Medicine Supply Chain: An Imperative for Public Health Care. Accessed May 25, 2010 at http://www.mbadepot.com/external_link.php?ID=3850&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.atkearne y.com%2Fshared_res%2Fpdf%2FMedicines_Monograph_S.pdf

Barthélemy, J. 2003. The seven deadly sins of outsourcing, Academy of Management Executive, Briarcliff Manor, NY. Vol. 17. No. 2 p. 87–98.

Bhushan, Navneet, and Kanwal Rai. 2004. Strategic Decision Making: Applying the Analytic Hierarchy Process. London: Springer-Verlag.

Boyson, S., T. Corsi, and E. Rabinovich. 1999. “Managing effective third party logistics relationships: what does it take?” Journal of Business Logistics, Vol. 20 No. 1, p.73–100. Accessed May 3, 2010 at http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_qa3705/is_199901/ai_n8845573/

DELIVER. 2007. DELIVER: Final Project Report. Arlington, Va.: DELIVER, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Family Planning Logistics Management/John Snow, Inc. 2000. Programs That Deliver: Logistics’ Contributions to Better Health in Developing Countries. Arlington, Va.: Family Planning Logistics Management/John Snow, Inc., for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Global Health Council. 2009. Global Health Council Field Note: “Harnessing the Magic of the Market Place for Public Health: A Public-Private Partnership in the Democratic Republic of the Congo that Delivers.” Accessed July 21, 2009 at: http://www.globalhealth.org/reports/report.php3?id=273.

Inbound Logistics. Kicking Off a 3PL Relationship. Volume 29 No. 7, p. 128. Accessed May 14, 2010 at http://www.inboundlogistics.com/digital/issues/il_digital_july2009.pdf

International Finance Committee, World Bank Group. 2007. The Business of Health in Africa: Partnering with the Private Sector to Improve People’s Lives. Accessed February 20, 2009 at http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/healthinafrica.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/IFC_HealthinAfrica_Final/$ FILE/IFC_HealthinAfrica_Final.pdf.

37

Jané, Joan, and Alfonso de Ohcoa. 2006. The Handbook of Logistics Contracts. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

John Snow, Inc. 2004. Contracting for Health Care Service Delivery: A Manual for Policy Makers. Boston, Mass.: John Snow, Inc.

Langley, C. John Jr., and U.S. Capgemini LLC. 2008. The State of Logistics Outsourcing: 2008. Third- Party Logistics. Accessed May 25, 2010 at: http://www.us.capgemini.com/DownloadLibrary/files/factsheets/Capgemini_3PL_study_Hig hTech_FS0209.pdf

Loevinsohn, Benjamin. 2008. Performance-Based Contracting for Health Services in Developing Countries: A Toolkit. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank. Accessed May 20, 2010 at: http://siteresources.worldbank.org/INTHSD/Resources/topics/415176­ 1216235459918/ContractingEbook.pdf

Nikolic, Irina, and Harald Maikisch. 2006. Public-Private Partnerships and Collaboration in the Health Sector: An Overview with Case Studies from Recent European Experience. The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development/The World Bank. Accessed May 14, 2010 at: http://info.worldbank.org/etools/docs/library/240103/PUBLIC~2.PDF

Patel, A., and H. Aran. 2005. Outsourcing Success: The Management Imperative. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

Pearson, Paul. 1997. A Comparative Study on Transportation Models: Directorate of Family Planning Managed Transport and Private Carrier. Alexandria, Va.: Paul O. Pearson, for the U.S. Agency for International Development.

Saaty, Thomas L. 1980. The Analytical Hierarchy Process. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Sarafinchan, Warren. 2008. Governance Practices in Logistics Outsourcing. Logistics Quarterly, Volume 14, Issue 4. Toronto, Canada: Logistics Quarterly.

Slater, Alan. 1998. How to Select Suppliers of Third-Party Logistics Services. Altrincham, UK: Added Value Logistics Publications Limited.

The Rockefeller Foundation, Dalberg, and MIT-Zaragoza. 2008. Private Sector Role in Health Supply Chains, Final Report. New York: The Rockefeller Foundation.

Thomas, Ann, and Valerie Curtis. 2003. Public-Private Partnerships for Health: A Review of Best Practices in Health Sector. World Bank. Accessed May 15, 2010 at: http://sulabhenvis.in/admin/upload/pdf_upload/WSP_PPP_15_10.pdf

U.S. Agency for International Development. 2006. Assessment of the USAID/Bangladesh Component of DELIVER Project: A Success to Build On. Bangladesh: USAID Mission, Bangladesh, Office of Population, Health, and Nutrition.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1. Forthcoming. Supply Chain Costing Tool: User Manual. Arlington, Va.: USAID | DELIVER PROJECT, Task Order 1.

Versi, Anver. 2007. The Science and Art of Logistics in Africa. African Business, July. Accessed March 2, 2010 at: http://www.africasia.com/africanbusiness/ab.php?ID=1380&back_month=71

38

WHO Expert Committee on Specifications for Pharmaceutical Preparations. World Health Organization. 2006. WHO Technical Report Series, no. 937, 2006; Accessed May 14, 2010 at http://whqlibdoc.who.int/trs/WHO_TRS_937_eng.pdf

Interview Sources for Outsourcing Examples

Shyam Lama. Senior Program Manager, USAID | DELIVER PROJECT.

39

40

Appendix A

Typical Contract Format

1. Front page: Title of a contract, contracting parties, date when contract becomes effective.

2. Background: Purpose and objectives of the contract and parties involved.

3. Authorized persons and signatures: The contract is signed by a legal representative from each party and it is dated.

4. Contract period: Time period covered by the contract and the arrangements for contract renewal.

5. Terms of reference and service specification: The general scope of work under the contract, including service delivery objectives, definitions of services (what), volume of services (how many), target populations (to whom), and geographic locations (where).

6. Performance of specification: Definition of performance, performance targets, methods of performance measurements, and links to payment.

7. Payment methods: Specification of how, how much, and when the providers are paid.

8. Monitoring and Evaluation (M&E): Data collection and recordkeeping requirements, forms, and schedules/periodicity with specification as to use of possible third party evaluators.

9. Variations to the agreement: The procedure for making variations, normally in writing and mutually agreed.

10. Best endeavors: Both parties have a duty to resolve matters without arbitration, if possible.

11. Arbitration: Who the arbitrator will be and how he/she will be appointed.

12. Statutory regulations: Statement that both parties must be acquainted with and act in accordance with all relevant legislation and national policy.

13. Other items: Conflict of interest, confidentiality, patent, etc.

41

42

Appendix B

Sample Implementation Plan

If activity is complete, mark status with green infill OUTSOURCING MOH SUPPLY CHAIN OPERATIONS IMPLEMENTATION PLAN

Key

Planned

Completed

Outstanding

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1 Form a Cross Functional Team

1.1 Indentify key stakeholders MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.2 Define roles and identify strong project leader MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.3 Prepare a mandate for operations MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.4 Plan regular team meetings MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.5

Develop a reporting process to inform all stakeholders of progress MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.6 Team commits to project and makes it priority MOH Month 0 Month 1

1.7 Develop clear deliverables and dates for actions MOH Month 0 Month 1

2 Set Objectives

2.1 Team defines clear objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

2.2 Success criteria defined to ensure right result is received MOH Month 1 Month 1

43

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

2.3

Ensure that each team member has ownership of specific tasks to achieve objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

2.4

Team determines desired outcome from outsourcing based on the objectives MOH Month 1 Month 1

3 Complete Internal Assessment and Pareto Analysis

3.1 Complete cost benefit analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

3.2 Complete skills analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

3.3 Complete a service gap analysis MOH/external consultant Month 1 Month 3

4 Supplier Selection

4.1 Develop a list of potential candidates MOH Month 3 Month3

4.2 Explore interest among the candidates MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.3

If no original candidates interested look for other companies including outside the country MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.4 Develop full specifications for the services required MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.5

Develop an assessment matrix to facilitate easy selection; incorporate cost/service level/capacity/technical expertise/financial stability/geographical coverage MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.6 Instigate the tender process MOH Month 4 Month 4

4.7 Visit companies that have tendered for the business MOH Month 4 Month 6

4.8 Review their professional qualifications MOH Month 6 Month 6

4.9

Solicit feedback from existing or previous customers of the potential supplier MOH month 7 Month 7

4.1 0

Choose the best supplier to meet organization's objectives and that scores highest on assessment matrix MOH Month 8 Month 8

5 Service Level Agreement

5.1 Negotiate the final agreement with supplier MOH/Supplier Month 9 Month 9

5.2 Agree on the KPIs that will govern the agreement MOH/Supplier Month 9 Month 9

5.3 Appoint a contract manager to monitor performance MOH Month 9 Month 9

44

Month Persons Responsible for Delivery

Start Date

End Date Status

Comments/ Issues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

5.4

Ensure a plan is in place to make transition is as seamless as possible MOH Month 6

month 10

6 Service Level Agreement Management

6.1 Hold regular meetings with supplier to review performance MOH/Supplier

Month 11

Month 22

6.2

Senior management from both sides meet when needed to resolve issues MOH/Supplier

Month 11

Month 22

6.3

Where possible, have cross- organizational meetings, including customers, to ensure that objectives have been met

MOH/Supplier / Customer

Month 11

Month 22

7 Life after the SLA

7.1

Schedule regular internal reviews to ensure performance is to the agreed levels and objectives have been met MOH

Month 11

Month 22

7.2 If being met, continue/extend the contract MOH

Month 11

Month 22

7.3 If not being met, try to resolve with supplier or restart process MOH

month 22

Month 22

* This example is only illustrative; actual steps and timeline will vary by situation

* This example is only illustrative; actual steps and timeline will vary by situation.

45

46

For more information, please visit deliver.jsi.com.

USAID | DELIVER PROJECT

John Snow, Inc.

1616 Fort Myer Drive, 11th Floor

Arlington, VA 22209 USA

Phone: 703-528-7474

Fax: 703-528-7480

Email: [email protected]

Internet: deliver.jsi.com

Article 9 .pdf

Six Key Trends Changing Supply Chain Management Today Choosing the optimal strategy for your business

A Knowledge-Driven Consulting® White Paper © 2009 Hitachi Consulting Corporation

Contents Demand Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Globalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Increased Competition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Outsourcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Product Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Collaboration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Role of Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

As companies increasingly use their supply chain to compete and gain market share, spending and activity in this area are notably on the upswing. Technology and process upgrades at forward-thinking companies clearly show that supply chain excellence is more widely accepted as an element of overall business strategy and that increasing value to customers is not just management’s, but everyone’s business.

The shift in how companies view their supply chain is taking hold. Examine how your company views its supply chain and consider your answers to these basic questions.

Does leadership view your supply chain as a strategic competitive advantage? If not, are you considering outsourcing your supply chain?

Are the capacity strengths of your supply chain commonly known and understood by leadership of the company? If so, how do they impact growth, profitability and customer service?

Hitachi Consulting works closely with leading manufacturing and distribution companies and helps them address their business challenges. From our experience working with key companies in food and beverage, consumer products, high tech and industrial manufacturing, there are six key trends causing significant impact and change to supply chain design and performance:

Trend 1 – Demand planning Trend 2 – Globalization Trend 3 – Increased competition and price pressures Trend 4 – Outsourcing Trend 5 – Shortened and more complex product life cycles Trend 6 – Closer integration and collaboration with suppliers

As sources and capacities for manufacturing have increased, more companies have moved away from focusing efforts on plant-level production planning and are adopting more of a demand-driven focus of trying to influence and manage demand more efficiently. Rationalizing what you are best at selling, making and delivering, and aligning the sales force with that mindset, is critical to adopting a demand-driven model. The demand-driven approach can help a company create a more customer-focused mindset, without sacrificing operational efficiency. Ultimately a demand-focused approach to planning can significantly improve demand planning and management efforts and help overall costs and customer service efforts.

Advanced demand planning systems and proper strategies can also help uncover data and identify trends buried in a company's information systems. We encourage companies to conduct an enterprise-wide internal Demand Review to gather information from all aspects of the organization.

Executive Overview

Trend 1 – Demand Planning Sets the Tone

Hitachi Consulting 1

Hitachi Consulting 2

Goals are then set to gain consensus on what will be sold each month for each product line or category and the resulting revenue. Of course, the driver of the Demand Review process is continuous improvement of forecast accuracy.

Critical to the success of any Demand Plan is having all stakeholders, including sales, marketing, finance, product development and supply chain agree upon a con- sensus Demand Plan. It is important for all participants to discuss factors affecting customer demand patterns, such as new or deleted products, competitors or market conditions, the aggregate demand plans and associated revenue plans. Once all demand for products and services is recognized, the information is consolidated into one Demand Plan.

Demand Planning is a key input to the larger Sales and Operations Planning process and can have a significant positive impact on new product introductions, inventory planning and management, customer service, supply planning efficiency and sourcing strategies. With our clients, we have often seen that Demand Planning success is often tied to organizational structure. We have found that companies with dedicated resources focused around demand planning and forecasting yield stronger results and drive more value to their company. Organizations that focus part time on demand planning and forecasting efforts yield substandard results. With the strategic importance of Demand Planning, companies need to be committed to this from both a resource and technology perspective.

For more information and success stories on S&OP and Demand Planning, search key words in the Knowledge & Success area at www.hitachiconsulting.com.

The business landscape is rapidly becoming more global. Largely due to improve- ments in communications, globalization is dramatically impacting the way business is managed and transacted, even on the most local levels. No area of a business is affected more by the trend to a global business environment than the supply chain. Manufacturing, distribution, sourcing of materials, invoicing and returns have all been significantly impacted by the increased integration of a global customer and supplier base, and many companies find that existing processes and technology are not flexible enough for this new business environment.

For example, historically, many companies have brought in container shipments from Asia Pacific through the ports in southern California. As the volume of container shipments has increased, all of these ports have experienced capacity issues relating to customs clearance and transshipping. As a result, some companies are contemplating rerouting these inbound shipments to alternate ports. This change may seem subtle, but a shift in logistics of this magnitude has far-reaching effects on the overall cost and efficiency of the supply chain network. Dynamically repositioning the point of entry for inbound container shipments can have a positive impact on customs

Trend 2 – Globalization

Hitachi Consulting 3

clearance times and access to increased transportation capacity, however there can be a negative impact as well. Better understanding the total landed cost and service implications of alternate ports of entry can help improve supply chain costs and performance.

The right Supply Chain Design is critical to managing the changes brought about by rapid globalization. A well thought-out Supply Chain Network Design can optimize the network and the flow of materials through the network. In doing so, network design captures the costs of the supply chain with a "total landed cost" perspective, and applies advanced mathematical technology to determine optimal answers to both strategic and tactical questions.

Strategic questions answered by a well thought-out network design:

• Where should facilities be located? • How many facilities should I have and what capabilities should they have? • What kind of capacity should they have? • What products and services should they handle? • Whose manufacturing and distribution orbit should they source? • Which contract packers or contract manufacturers should I use? • How can I achieve operations synergies through integrating acquisitions?

For more information and success stories on Network Design search key words in the Knowledge & Success area at www.hitachiconsulting.com.

Historically, price, product features and brand recognition were enough to differentiate many products in the marketplace. With the continued commoditization of many products, companies need better ways to distinguish themselves. In one case, a large global consumer goods manufacturer saw prices around some of its commod- ity products drop as much as 60-80 percent. Product innovation and brand equity no longer were allowing them to command a higher price in the market. In order to continue to compete with that commoditized product they made significant cost improvements with supply chain re-design and technology.

Companies are looking to their supply chains in two ways to help offset this trend. First, they are looking at ways to reduce cost and are creating a more efficient value chain to remain cost competitive. Second, companies are looking at ways they can provide value-added services to meet the demands of more sophisticated customers.

Trend 3 – Increased Competition and Price Pressures

Hitachi Consulting 4

Cost improvements around inventory management, logistics operations, material management and manufacturing costs, including raw material and component acquisition can be found with:

• Sales and operations planning • Transportation/distribution management • Improved product lifecycle management • Improved strategic sourcing and procurement

Suppliers can differentiate themselves in a number of ways as well as provide value, additional services and capabilities to their customers. The differentiating factors include:

• Vendor Managed Inventory (VMI) • RFID • Labeling and packaging • Drop shipping • Collaboration

Companies should not only look to their supply chain to drive cost improvement, but should increase capabilities as a means for staying competitive. Streamlining processes with better design, better collaboration across networks and new services will help your company stay competitive and strengthen relationships with your customers.

As many companies step back and examine their core competencies, some realize that outsourcing parts or all of a supply chain can be advantageous. With market- place improvements around (1) information media and systems (2) cost and quality of global manufacturing and distribution, and (3) product design capabilities, companies are gaining additional synergies by outsourcing all or parts of their supply chain.

There can be significant economic benefits from outsourcing all or part of your supply chain operation, but without the right systems, processes, or organizational management structure the risk to success can increase to frightening levels. In an outsource-heavy environment companies need to put more controls and systems in place to compensate for the fact that their supply chain capabilities no longer reside onsite. In an outsourced supply chain environment the need for information, controls and excellence from the “information worker” becomes a high priority.

Trend 4 – Outsourcing

Hitachi Consulting 5

The optimally outsourced supply chain, either in its entirety or just a component, relies heavily on:

(1) Superior supply chain network design

(2) Inclusion of that outsource partner in the information chain

(3) Establishment of control mechanisms to proactively monitor the various components of the supply chain and,

(4) Information systems to connect and coordinate the supply chain as seamlessly as possible.

A failure to excel at any one of these components can result in breakdowns affecting the entire supply chain.

Today many of our clients are under pressure to develop innovative products and bring them to market more rapidly, while minimizing cannibalization of existing prod- ucts, which are still in high demand. In order to meet the needs of both customers and consumers, companies need more efficient product lifecycle management processes. This includes heavy emphasis on managing new product introduction, product discontinuation, design for manufacturability and leveraging across their entire product and infrastructure characteristics.

One chief benefit of PLM processes and technology is helping companies design products that can share common operations, components or materials with other products, thereby reducing risks of obsolescence writeoffs, increasing cost leverage on the purchasing of key materials and ensuring that infrastructure investments are optimally utilized. Additionally, getting this right will help to improve your time to market. By focusing product lifecycle management efforts in these areas, a com- pany can buffer itself against the risk of an unplanned cost increase, a poor new product launch, an unplanned obsolescence writeoff and can enhance the overall customer perception of the company as an effective innovator.

Trend 5 – Shortened and More Complex Product Life Cycles

Level of

Supply Chain

Outsourcing

Level of

Supply Chain

Outsourcing

Investment in Supply Chain Systems ProcessesInvestment in Supply Chain Systems Processes

Hitachi Consulting 6

Typically when companies begin the process of introducing new products to market, they coordinate marketing, engineering, sales and procurement and develop sales forecasts to plan products in the pipeline. Without a formalized product lifecycle process the end result isn’t always predictable. Recently, a US-based major appli- ance manufacturer, struggling with sky-rocketing product development costs and a cumbersome, manual development process, was looking to implement a PLM initia- tive to help reduce the cycle time between development and entry to market. While implementing a new PLM environment the company designed innovative, common product development processes and selected a PLM solution to control engineering document management, online mark-up and web-based collaboration with suppliers and contract manufacturers.

As a result, the company increased parts re-use, improved document retrieval time, reduced design cycle time, and ultimately reduced new product development cost by 15 percent. These improvements helped the company grow revenue by 25 percent, mainly from an increased rate of product introductions.

As the economy becomes more global, labeling and compliance to packaging requirements and regulations have become critical to success. Without adherence to local packaging and labeling regulations a product may violate local requirements, preventing it from being distributed and sold in that market. Product lifecycle manage- ment technology and processes can help ensure that products being produced and targeted for specific markets are well-managed and are compliant. Product lifecycle management tools and processes have helped consumer goods companies with their efforts to try to continually drive demand through packaging and labeling inno- vation and design. Implementation of an optimal PLM process and technology can allow a consumer goods company to effectively produce and distribute products that are only targeted for regional promotions or consumer preferences.

For more information and success stories on PLM search key words in the Knowledge & Success area at www.hitachiconsulting.com.

As supply chains continue to develop and mature, a move toward more intense collaboration between customers and suppliers has occurred. The level of collabora- tion goes beyond linking information systems to fully integrating business processes and organization structures across companies that comprise the full value chain. The ultimate goal of collaboration is to increase visibility throughout the value chain in an effort to make better management decisions and to ultimately decrease value chain costs. With the right tools, processes and organizational structure in place, collaboration provides key people throughout the value chain with the information needed to make business-critical decisions with the best available information.

Trend 6 – Collaboration Between Stakeholders in the Extended Supply Chain

Hitachi Consulting 7

Recent examples of collaboration have emerged in the expansion of Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP) processes that include upstream and downstream value chain partners as regular participants. S&OP processes help maintain a well-coordinated and valid, current operating plan in support of customer demand, a business plan and a strategy. The improved resulting operating plan provides the management of each partner with a complete picture of forecasted demand, supply capacity, corresponding financial information with financial implications and allows them to make informed, critical decisions.

Companies that expand the usage of Sales and Operations Planning have greater visibility across their owner enterprise and respective value chain, gain the agility necessary to improve the Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) process, improve promotional planning, minimize unnecessary buildups of inventory, increase revenue predictability and execute customer service expectations.

The S&OP activity enables information systems to connect the value chain participants around key demand information, such as customer forecasts, and around key supply information, such as supplier inventories and capacities.

Another recent example of collaboration is seen in the increased focus around RFID (Radio Frequency Identification). Value chain leaders are looking at functional areas to better integrate the supply chains of their partners with themselves. RFID can serve as a means to quickly and efficiently ensure that critical product information is communicated as products flow through the value chain and ultimately to the consumer.

Recent estimates show that major retailers can lose 3-4 percent of revenue per year due to shelf stock outs, while inventory is available somewhere in the value chain. Better coordination of store-level product availability would have a significant impact to the entire value chain for these retailers. Additionally, better visibility of retailer product availability can reduce overall logistics costs as products move through the value chain to fulfill safe stock levels and ultimately consumer demand.

As supply chain networks have become more complex, the need for greater and improved supply chain technology solutions has become critical. Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) and best-of-breed Supply Chain Management (SCM) solution providers have made significant investments in developing solutions to address the needs of manufacturing and distribution companies in areas, such as:

• Network and Inventory Optimization • Logistics Optimization • Product Lifecycle Management • RFID • Sales and Operations Planning • Procurement • Manufacturing Optimization • Business Intelligence

The Role of Technology in Supporting these Trends

These technologies have helped enable the supply chain “information worker” innovate, drive cost reductions, improve service and meet customer expectations better than ever. In order to have sustainable improvement in supply chain performance, a business must have the right balance of investments in organization, processes and technology. Lack of investment and focus in any one of these areas will reduce your ability to achieve fundamental, sustainable improvement.

For more information and Supply Chain Technology and Strategy search key words in the Knowledge & Success area at www.hitachiconsulting.com.

Developing, manufacturing and selling a product can challenge the best organizations in the best of times. As a company’s business drivers change, business processes, SCM technology investment and the overall approach to supply chain management must change and keep pace. An inefficient and poorly functioning supply chain can negatively impact every aspect of an organization, jeopardizing the long-term performance and success of a business.

To remain successful companies need organization-wide buy-in to supply chain excellence and some will need to re-evaluate their current processes and performance with these key trends in mind:

• Demand Planning as an imperative • Globalization • Increased competition and price pressures • Outsourcing • Shortened and more complex product life cycles • Collaboration between stakeholders

Companies that reevaluate their business and how the current supply chain structure supports the business—from a strategy, process, technology and organizational perspec- tive—must focus on keeping their supply chain aligned with the overall business strategy. To succeed, companies must embrace Supply Chain Excellence as a core competency at all levels throughout the company and recognize that supply chain management is executed in many areas, not just the functional supply chain organization.

Learn more about the how leading companies are innovating their supply chain in the Knowledge and Success area at www.hitachiconsulting.com.

Conclusion

Hitachi Consulting 8

About Hitachi Consulting

As Hitachi, Ltd.’s (NYSE: HIT) global consulting company, Hitachi Consulting is a recognized leader in delivering proven business and IT solutions to Global 2000 companies with a balanced view of strategy, people, process and technology, we work with companies to understand their unique business needs, and to develop and implement practical business strategies and technology solutions.

Hitachi Consulting's client base includes nearly 25 percent of the Global 100 many leading mid-market companies. From business stragegy development through application deployment, we help clients quickly realize measurable business value and acheive sustainable ROI.

Hitachi Consulting – Inspiring your next success!®

About Hitachi Hitachi, Ltd., (NYSE: HIT / TSE: 6501), headquartered in Tokyo, Japan, is a leading global electronics company with approximately 400,000 employees worldwide. Fiscal 2008 (ended March 31, 2009) consolidated revenues totaled 10,000 billion yen ($102.0 billion). The company offers a wide range of systems, products and services in market sectors including information systems, electronic devices, power and industrial systems, consumer products, materials, logistics and financial services. For more information on Hitachi, please visit the company's website at http://www.hitachi.com.

© 2009 Hitachi Consulting Corporation. All rights reserved. "Inspiring your next success", "Knowledge- Driven Consulting" and "Information Velocity" are all registered service marks of Hitachi Consulting Corporation. Printed in USA.

Sunday .xlsx

Sheet1

Supply Chain Management
Class Sunday
Guidelines for Presentation: Each group member must present during the presentation and a minimum of 7 slides a group must be prepared. New current examples will add more value to your marking. A group will be given 20-30 mins time excluding questions and answers. The presentation will be starting from the 10th lecture day as per schedule till 16, Marks 10
Guidelines for Assignment: The written assignment is based on group, students are required to choose any two articles/paper given and need to make reflection report, and the report should consist:1. Introduction, 2. main theme/subtheme, 3. conclusion, 4. learning outcomes(In bullet points), The reflection report must contain at least 10 pages. (Times New Roman, Font size 11 or 12 with single spacing in PDF format) No copy from any source including your group members or any other source will be allowed. Marks 10
S. NO Registration Name of student Title of assignment and presentation Day of Presentation
1 902-2004064 Abdul Rahim Akbary 10th lecture day
2 902-2004050 Jamaluddin
3
4
5 902-2004035 Safiullah Naderi 10th lecture day
6 902-2009060 Abdul qahar 11th lecture day
7 902-2009016 Obaidullah
8 912-1804102 Fardin Faqiri
9 902-2009056 Mohbooba
10 902-2009099 Shah Mahmood 11th lecture day
11 902-2009090 Samim Hamidy
12 902-2009114 M. Sulaiman
13 902-2009115 Khwaja Valyullah
14 902-2009019 Ahmad Nabi 12th lecture day
15 902-2004083 Shabeer Ahmad Lal
16 902-2009043 Bilal Ahmad
17
18 902-2009104 Ahmad shaheen 12th lecture day
19 902-2009105 Omaid farahi
20 902-2009103 Kamal Ahmad Asim
21
22 902-2009065 Nomanullah 13th lecture day
23 902-2004001 Ali Reza Ahmadi
24 902-2009066 Mohammad Ayaz Azimi
25 902-2009080 Izzatullah
26 902-2004007 Moqim Afghan 13th lecture day
27 902-2004065 Ahmad Masoud Nasartzada
28 902-2004036 Mohamma Zubair
29
30 902-2004089 Jamal Nasir 14th lecture day
31 902-2004077 Hameed Rahman Ayran
32 902-2004101 Mursal Ehsan
33
34 912-1909016 Monibullah Seerat 14th lecture day
35 912-1909020 Mohammad Ajmal Shirzad
36 912-1909034 Fazal Akbar
37 902-2009059 Sediqa
38 902-2004086 Naweedullah 15th lecture day
39 902-2004087 Arash
40 902-2009049 Khyber massoudy 15th lecture day
41 902-2009070 Aimal Safi
42 902-2009074 Bahram Befroz
43 90-2004029 Fahima 16th Week
44 912-1904053 Khalid Ahmad Mashal
45 912-1904021 Ahmad Mojib Stanekzai